Apple InstrumentsUserGuide/InstrumentsUserGuide.pdf Manuel Apple sur Fnac.com - Pour voir la liste complète des manuels APPLE, cliquez ici

 

 

TELECHARGER LE PDF sur :

https://developer.apple.com/library/mac/documentation/developertools/conceptual/InstrumentsUserGuide/InstrumentsUserGuide.pdf

Commander un produit Apple sur Fnac.com

 

 

Voir également d'autres Guides APPLE :

Apple-macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_f.pdf-manuel

Apple-iOS_Security_May12.pdf-manue

Apple-Mac-Pro-2008-Performance-and-Productivity-for-Creative-Pros

Apple-iPod_shuffle_4thgen_Manuale_utente.pdf-Italie-Manuel

Apple-KernelProgramming.pdf-manuel

Apple-Core-Data-Model-Versioning-and-Data-Migration-Programming-Guide-manuel

Apple-RED_Workflows_with_Final_Cut_Pro_X.pdf-manuel

Apple-Transitioning-to-ARC-Release-Notes-manuel

Apple-iTunes-Connect-Sales-and-Trends-Guide-manuel

Apple-App-Sandbox-Design-Guide-manuel

Apple-String-Programming-Guide-manuel

Apple-Secure-Coding-Guide-manuel

Apple_AirPort_Networks_Early2009.pdf-manuel

Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide_TA.pdf-manuel

Apple-time_capsule_4th_gen_setup.pdf-manuel

Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide.pdf-manuel

Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide_CH.pdf-Chinois-manuel

Apple-CodeSigningGuide.pdf-manuel

Apple-ViewControllerPGforiOS.pdf-manuel

Apple-KeyValueObserving.pdf-manuel

Apple-mac_mini-late-2012-quick_start.pdf-manuel

Apple-OS-X-Mountain-Lion-Core-Technologies-Overview-June-2012-manuel

Apple-OS-X-Server-Product-Overview-June-2012-manuel

Apple-Apple_Server_Diagnostics_UG_109.pdf-manuel

Apple-PackageMaker_UserGuide.pdf-manuel

Apple-Instrumentos_y_efectos_de_Logic_Studio.pdf-Manuel

Apple-ipod_nano_kayttoopas.pdf-Finlande-Manuel

Apple_ProRes_White_Paper_October_2012.pdf-Manuel

Apple-wp_osx_configuration_profiles.pdf-Manuel

Apple-UsingiTunesProducerFreeBooks.pdf-Manuel

Apple-ipad_manual_do_usuario.pdf-Portugais-Manuel

Apple-Instruments_et_effets_Logic_Studio.pdf-Manuel

Apple-ipod_touch_gebruikershandleiding.pdf-Neerlandais-Manuel

AppleiPod_shuffle_4thgen_Manual_del_usuario.pdf-Espagnol-Manuel

Apple-Premiers-contacts-avec-votre-PowerBook-G4-Manuel

Apple_Composite_AV_Cable.pdf-Manuel

Apple-iPod_shuffle_3rdGen_UG_DK.pdf-Danemark-Manuel

Apple-iPod_classic_160GB_Benutzerhandbuch.pdf-Allemand-Manuel

Apple-VoiceOver_GettingStarted-Manuel

Apple-iPod_touch_2.2_Benutzerhandbuch.pdf-Allemand-Manuel

Apple-Apple_TV_Opstillingsvejledning.pdf-Allemand-Manuel

Apple-iPod_shuffle_4thgen_Manuale_utente.pdf-Italie-Manuel

Apple-iphone_prirucka_uzivatela.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Aan-de-slag-Neerlandais-Manuel

Apple-airmac_express-80211n-2nd-gen_setup_guide.pdf-Thailande-Manuel

Apple-ipod_nano_benutzerhandbuch.pdf-Allemand-Manuel

Apple-aperture3.4_101.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Pages09_Anvandarhandbok.pdf-Manuel

Apple-nike_plus_ipod_sensor_ug_la.pdf-Mexique-Manuel

Apple-ResEdit-Reference-For-ResEdit02.1-Manuel

Apple-ipad_guide_de_l_utilisateur.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Compressor-4-Benutzerhandbuch-Allemand-Manuel

Apple-AirPort_Networks_Early2009_DK.pdf-Danemark-Manuel

Apple-MacBook_Pro_Mid2007_2.4_2.2GHz_F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-MacBook_13inch_Mid2010_UG_F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Xserve-RAID-Presentation-technologique-Janvier-2004-Manuel

Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2010_F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-AirPort_Express-opstillingsvejledning.pdf-Danemark-Manuel

Apple-DEiPod_photo_Benutzerhandbuch_DE0190269.pdf-Allemand-Manuel

Apple-Final-Cut-Pro-X-Logic-Effects-Reference-Manuel

Apple-iPod_touch_2.1_Brugerhandbog.pdf-Danemark-Manuel

Apple-Remote-Desktop-Administratorhandbuch-Version-3.1-Allemand-Manuel

Apple-Qmaster-4-User-Manual-Manuel

Apple-Server_Administration_v10.5.pdf-Manuel

Apple-ipod_classic_features_guide.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Lecteur-Optique-Manuel

Apple-Carte-AirPort-Manuel

Apple-iPhone_Finger_Tips_Guide.pdf-Anglais-Manuel

Apple-Couvercle-Manuel

Apple-battery.cube.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Boitier-de-l-ordinateur-Manuel

Apple-Pile-Interne-Manuel

Apple-atacable.pdf-Manuel

Apple-videocard.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Guide_de_configuration_de_l_Airport_Express_5.1.pdf-Manuel

Apple-iMac_Mid2010_UG_F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-MacBook_13inch_Mid2009_F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-MacBook_Mid2007_UserGuide.F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Designing_AirPort_Networks_10.5-Windows_F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Administration_de_QuickTime_Streaming_et_Broadcasting_10.5.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Opstillingsvejledning_til_TimeCapsule.pdf-Danemark-Manuel

Apple-iPod_nano_5th_gen_Benutzerhandbuch.pdf-Manuel

Apple-iOS_Business.pdf-Manuel

Apple-AirPort_Extreme_Installationshandbuch.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Final_Cut_Express_4_Installation_de_votre_logiciel.pdf-Manuel

Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_2.53GHz_Mid2009.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Network_Services.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Aperture_Performing_Adjustments_f.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Supplement_au_guide_Premiers_contacts.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Administration_des_images_systeme_et_de_la_mise_a_jour_de_logiciels_10.5.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Mac_OSX_Server_v10.6_Premiers_contacts.pdf-Francais-Manuel

Apple-Designing_AirPort_Networks_10.5-Windows_F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Mise_a_niveau_et_migration_v10.5.pdf-Manue

Apple-MacBookPro_Late_2007_2.4_2.2GHz_F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Mac_mini_Late2009_SL_Server_F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Mac_OS_X_Server_10.5_Premiers_contacts.pdf-Manuel

Apple-iPod_touch_2.0_Guide_de_l_utilisateur_CA.pdf-Manuel

Apple-MacBook_Pro_17inch_Mid2010_F.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Comment_demarrer_Leopard.pdf-Manuel

Apple-iPod_2ndGen_USB_Power_Adapter-FR.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Feuille_de_operations_10.4.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Time_Capsule_Installationshandbuch.pdf-Allemand-Manuel

Apple-F034-2262AXerve-grappe.pdf-Manuel

Apple-Mac_Pro_Early2009_4707_UG_F

Apple-imacg5_17inch_Power_Supply

Apple-Logic_Studio_Installieren_Ihrer_Software_Retail

Apple-IntroductionXserve1.0.1

Apple-Aperture_Getting_Started_d.pdf-Allemand

Apple-getting_started_with_passbook

Apple-iPod_mini_2nd_Gen_UserGuide.pdf-Anglais

Apple-Deploiement-d-iPhone-et-d-iPad-Reseaux-prives-virtuels

Apple-F034-2262AXerve-grappe

Apple-Mac_OS_X_Server_Glossaire_10.5

Apple-FRLogic_Pro_7_Guide_TDM

Apple-iphone_bluetooth_headset_userguide

Apple-Administration_des_services_reseau_10.5

Apple-imacg5_17inch_harddrive

Apple-iPod_nano_4th_gen_Manuale_utente

Apple-iBook-G4-Getting-Started

Apple-XsanGettingStarted

Apple-Mac_mini_UG-Early2006

Apple-Guide_des_fonctionnalites_de_l_iPod_classic

Apple-Guide_de_configuration_d_Xsan_2

Apple-MacBook_Late2006_UsersGuide

Apple-sur-Fnac.com

Apple-Mac_mini_Mid2010_User_Guide_F.pdf-Francais

Apple-PowerBookG3UserManual.PDF.Anglais

Apple-Installation_de_votre_logiciel_Logic_Studio_Retail

Apple-Pages-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Apple-MacBook_Pro_13inch_Mid2009.pdf.Anglais

Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2009

Apple-Installation_de_votre_logiciel_Logic_Studio_Upgrade

Apple-FRLogic_Pro_7_Guide_TDM

Apple-airportextreme_802.11n_userguide

Apple-iPod_shuffle_3rdGen_UG

Apple-iPod_classic_160GB_User_Guide

Apple-iPod_nano_5th_gen_UserGuide

Apple-ipod_touch_features_guide

Apple-Wireless_Mighty_Mouse_UG

Apple-Advanced-Memory-Management-Programming-Guide

Apple-iOS-App-Programming-Guide

Apple-Concurrency-Programming-Guide

Apple-MainStage-2-User-Manual-Anglais

Apple-iMacG3_2002MultilingualUserGuide

Apple-iBookG3_DualUSBUserGuideMultilingual.PDF.Anglais

Apple-imacG5_20inch_AirPort

Apple-Guide_de_l_utilisateur_de_Mac_Pro_Early_2008

Apple-Installation_de_votre_logiciel_Logic_Express_8

Apple-iMac_Guide_de_l_utilisateur_Mid2007

Apple-imacg5_20inch_OpticalDrive

Apple-FCP6_Formats_de_diffusion_et_formats_HD

Apple-prise_en_charge_des_surfaces_de_controle_logic_pro_8

Apple-Aperture_Quick_Reference_f

Apple-Shake_4_User_Manual

Apple-aluminumAppleKeyboard_wireless2007_UserGuide

Apple-ipod_shuffle_features_guide

Apple-Color-User-Manual

Apple-XsanGettingStarted

Apple-Migration_10.4_2e_Ed

Apple-MacBook_Air_SuperDrive

Apple-MacBook_Late2007-f

ApplePowerMacG5_(Early_2005)_UserGuide

Apple-iSightUserGuide

Apple-MacBook_Pro_Early_2008_Guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-Nouvelles-fonctionnalites-aperture-1.5

Apple-premiers_contacts_2e_ed_10.4.pdf-Mac-OS-X-Server

Apple-premiers_contacts_2e_ed_10.4

Apple-eMac_2005UserGuide

Apple-imacg5_20inch_Inverter

Apple-Keynote2_UserGuide.pdf-Japon

Apple-Welcome_to_Tiger.pdf-Japon

Apple-XsanAdminGuide_j.pdf-Japon

Apple-PowerBookG4_UG_15GE.PDF-Japon

Apple-Xsan_Migration.pdf-Japon

Apple-Xserve_Intel_DIY_TopCover_JA.pdf-Japon

Apple-iPod_nano_6thgen_User_Guide_J.pdf-Japon

Apple-Aperture_Photography_Fundamentals.pdf-Japon

Apple-nikeipod_users_guide.pdf-Japon

Apple-QuickTime71_UsersGuide.pdf-Japon

Apple-iMacG5_iSight_UG.pdf-Japon

Apple-Aperture_Performing_Adjustments_j.pdf-Japon

Apple-iMacG5_17inch_HardDrive.pdf-Japon

Apple-iPod_shuffle_Features_Guide_J.pdf-Japon

Apple-MacBook_Air_User_Guide.pdf-Japon

Apple-MacBook_UsersGuide.pdf-Japon

Apple-iPad_iOS4_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Apple_AirPort_Networks_Early2009_H.pd-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPod_classic_120GB_no.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-StoreKitGuide.pdf-Japon

Apple-Xserve_Intel_DIY_ExpansionCardRiser_JA.pdf-Japon

Apple-iMacG5_Battery.pdf-Japon

Apple-Logic_Pro_8_Getting_Started.pdf-Japon

Apple-PowerBook-handbok-Norge-Norveg

Apple-iWork09_formler_og_funksjoner.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2010_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacPro_HardDrive_DIY.pdf-Japon

Apple-iPod_Fifth_Gen_Funksjonsoversikt.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_13inch_white_Early2009_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-GarageBand_09_Komme_i_gang.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2009_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-imac_mid2011_ug_h.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iDVD_08_Komme_i_gang.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_Air_11inch_Late2010_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iMac_Mid2010_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_13inch_Mid2009_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

/Apple-iPhone_3G_Viktig_produktinformasjon_H-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_13inch_Mid2010_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-macbook_air_13inch_mid2011_ug_no.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Mac_mini_Early2009_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-ipad2_brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPhoto_08_Komme_i_gang.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_Air_Brukerhandbok_Late2008.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Pages09_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_13inch_Late2009_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPhone_3GS_Viktig_produktinformasjon.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_13inch_Aluminum_Late2008_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Wireless_Keyboard_Aluminum_2007_H-Norge-Norvege

Apple-NiPod_photo_Brukerhandbok_N0190269.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_Pro_13inch_Mid2010_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_Pro_17inch_Mid2010_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Velkommen_til_Snow_Leopard.pdf-Norge-Norvege.htm

Apple-TimeCapsule_Klargjoringsoversikt.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPhone_3GS_Hurtigstart.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Snow_Leopard_Installeringsinstruksjoner.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iMacG5_iSight_UG.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPod_Handbok_S0342141.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-ipad_brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-GE_Money_Bank_Handlekonto.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_Air_11inch_Late2010_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPod_nano_6thgen_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPod_touch_iOS4_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_Air_13inch_Late2010_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Early2011_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Numbers09_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Welcome_to_Leopard.pdf-Japon

Apple-PowerMacG5_UserGuide.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPod_touch_2.1_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Boot_Camp_Installering-klargjoring.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-MacOSX10.3_Welcome.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPod_shuffle_3rdGen_UG_H.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPhone_4_Viktig_produktinformasjon.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple_TV_Klargjoringsoversikt.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iMovie_08_Komme_i_gang.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iPod_classic_160GB_Brukerhandbok.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Boot_Camp_Installering_10.6.pdf-Norge-Norvege

Apple-Network-Services-Location-Manager-Veiledning-for-nettverksadministratorer-Norge-Norvege

Apple-iOS_Business_Mar12_FR.pdf

Apple-PCIDualAttachedFDDICard.pdf

Apple-Aperture_Installing_Your_Software_f.pdf

Apple-User_Management_Admin_v10.4.pdf

Apple-Compressor-4-ユーザーズマニュアル Japon

Apple-Network_Services_v10.4.pdf

Apple-iPod_2ndGen_USB_Power_Adapter-DE

Apple-Mail_Service_v10.4.pdf

Apple-AirPort_Express_Opstillingsvejledning_5.1.pdf

Apple-MagSafe_Airline_Adapter.pdf

Apple-L-Apple-Multiple-Scan-20-Display

Apple-Administration_du_service_de_messagerie_10.5.pdf

Apple-System_Image_Admin.pdf

Apple-iMac_Intel-based_Late2006.pdf-Japon

Apple-iPhone_3GS_Finger_Tips_J.pdf-Japon

Apple-Power-Mac-G4-Mirrored-Drive-Doors-Japon

Apple-AirMac-カード取り付け手順-Japon

Apple-iPhone開発ガイド-Japon

Apple-atadrive_pmg4mdd.j.pdf-Japon

Apple-iPod_touch_2.2_User_Guide_J.pdf-Japon

Apple-Mac_OS_X_Server_v10.2.pdf

Apple-AppleCare_Protection_Plan_for_Apple_TV.pdf

Apple_Component_AV_Cable.pdf

Apple-DVD_Studio_Pro_4_Installation_de_votre_logiciel

Apple-Windows_Services

Apple-Motion_3_New_Features_F

Apple-g4mdd-fw800-lowerfan

Apple-MacOSX10.3_Welcome

Apple-Print_Service

Apple-Xserve_Setup_Guide_F

Apple-PowerBookG4_17inch1.67GHzUG

Apple-iMac_Intel-based_Late2006

Apple-Installation_de_votre_logiciel

Apple-guide_des_fonctions_de_l_iPod_nano

Apple-Administration_de_serveur_v10.5

Apple-Mac-OS-X-Server-Premiers-contacts-Pour-la-version-10.3-ou-ulterieure

Apple-boot_camp_install-setup

Apple-iBookG3_14inchUserGuideMultilingual

Apple-mac_pro_server_mid2010_ug_f

Apple-Motion_Supplemental_Documentation

Apple-imac_mid2011_ug_f

Apple-iphone_guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-macbook_air_11inch_mid2011_ug_fr

Apple-NouvellesfonctionnalitesdeLogicExpress7.2

Apple-QT_Streaming_Server

Apple-Web_Technologies_Admin

Apple-Mac_Pro_Early2009_4707_UG

Apple-guide_de_l_utilisateur_de_Numbers08

Apple-Decouverte_d_Aperture_2

Apple-Guide_de_configuration_et_d'administration

Apple-mac_integration_basics_fr_106.

Apple-iPod_shuffle_4thgen_Guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-ARA_Japan

Apple-081811_APP_iPhone_Japanese_v5.4.pdf-Japan

Apple-Recycle_Contract120919.pdf-Japan

Apple-World_Travel_Adapter_Kit_UG

Apple-iPod_nano_6thgen_User_Guide

Apple-RemoteSupportJP

Apple-Mac_mini_Early2009_UG_F.pdf-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Apple-Compressor_3_Batch_Monitor_User_Manual_F.pdf-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Apple-Premiers__contacts_avec_iDVD_08

Apple-Mac_mini_Intel_User_Guide.pdf

Apple-Prise_en_charge_des_surfaces_de_controle_Logic_Express_8

Apple-mac_integration_basics_fr_107.pdf

Apple-Final-Cut-Pro-7-Niveau-1-Guide-de-preparation-a-l-examen

Apple-Logic9-examen-prep-fr.pdf-Logic-Pro-9-Niveau-1-Guide-de-preparation-a-l-examen

Apple-aperture_photography_fundamentals.pdf-Manuel-de-l-utilisateu

Apple-emac-memory.pdf-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Apple-Apple-Installation-et-configuration-de-votre-Power-Mac-G4

Apple-Guide_de_l_administrateur_d_Xsan_2.pdf

Apple-premiers_contacts_avec_imovie6.pdf

Apple-Tiger_Guide_Installation_et_de_configuration.pdf

Apple-Final-Cut-Pro-7-Level-One-Exam-Preparation-Guide-and-Practice-Exam

Apple-Open_Directory.pdf

Apple-Nike_+_iPod_User_guide

Apple-ard_admin_guide_2.2_fr.pdf

Apple-systemoverviewj.pdf-Japon

Apple-Xserve_TO_J070411.pdf-Japon

Apple-Mac_Pro_User_Guide.pdf

Apple-iMacG5_iSight_UG.pdf

Apple-premiers_contacts_avec_iwork_08.pdf

Apple-services_de_collaboration_2e_ed_10.4.pdf

Apple-iPhone_Bluetooth_Headset_Benutzerhandbuch.pdf

Apple-Guide_de_l_utilisateur_de_Keynote08.pdf

APPLE/Apple-Logic-Pro-9-Effectsrfr.pdf

Apple-Logic-Pro-9-Effectsrfr.pdf

Apple-iPod_shuffle_3rdGen_UG_F.pdf

Apple-iPod_classic_160Go_Guide_de_l_utilisateur.pdf

Apple-iBookG4GettingStarted.pdf

Apple-Administration_de_technologies_web_10.5.pdf

Apple-Compressor-4-User-Manual-fr

Apple-MainStage-User-Manual-fr.pdf

Apple-Logic_Pro_8.0_lbn_j.pdf

Apple-PowerBookG4_15inch1.67-1.5GHzUserGuide.pdf

Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2010_CH.pdf

Apple-LED_Cinema_Display_27-inch_UG.pdf

Apple-MacBook_Pro_15inch_Mid2009_RS.pdf

Apple-macbook_pro_13inch_early2011_f.pdf

Apple-iMac_Mid2010_UG_BR.pdf

Apple-iMac_Late2009_UG_J.pdf

Apple-iphone_user_guide-For-iOS-6-Software

Apple-iDVD5_Getting_Started.pdf

Apple-guide_des_fonctionnalites_de_l_ipod_touch.pdf

Apple_iPod_touch_User_Guide

Apple_macbook_pro_13inch_early2011_f

Apple_Guide_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_RAID

Apple_Time_Capsule_Early2009_Setup_F

Apple_iphone_4s_finger_tips_guide_rs

Apple_iphone_upute_za_uporabu

Apple_ipad_user_guide_ta

Apple_iPod_touch_User_Guide

apple_earpods_user_guide

apple_iphone_gebruikershandleiding

apple_iphone_5_info

apple_iphone_brukerhandbok

apple_apple_tv_3rd_gen_setup_tw

apple_macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_ch

apple_Macintosh-User-s-Guide-for-Macintosh-PowerBook-145

Apple_ipod_touch_user_guide_ta

Apple_TV_2nd_gen_Setup_Guide_h

Apple_ipod_touch_manual_del_usuario

Apple_iphone_4s_finger_tips_guide_tu

Apple_macbook_pro_retina_qs_th

Apple-Manuel_de_l'utilisateur_de_Final_Cut_Server

Apple-iMac_G5_de_lutilisateur

Apple-Cinema_Tools_4.0_User_Manual_F

Apple-Personal-LaserWriter300-User-s-Guide

Apple-QuickTake-100-User-s-Guide-for-Macintosh

Apple-User-s-Guide-Macintosh-LC-630-DOS-Compatible

Apple-iPhone_iOS3.1_User_Guide

Apple-iphone_4s_important_product_information_guide

Apple-iPod_shuffle_Features_Guide_F

Liste-documentation-apple

Apple-Premiers_contacts_avec_iMovie_08

Apple-macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_br

Apple-macbook_pro-13-inch-mid-2012-important_product_info

Apple-macbook_air-11-inch_mid-2012-qs_br

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_MainStage

Apple-Compressor_3_User_Manual_F

Apple-Color_1.0_User_Manual_F

Apple-guide_de_configuration_airport_express_4.2

Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide

Apple-Instruments_et_effets_Logic_Express_8

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_WaveBurner

Apple-Macmini_Guide_de_l'utilisateur

Apple-PowerMacG5_UserGuide

Disque dur, ATA parallèle Instructions de remplacement

Apple-final_cut_pro_x_logic_effects_ref_f

Apple-Leopard_Installationshandbok

Manuale Utente PowerBookG4

Apple-thunderbolt_display_getting_started_1e

Apple-Compressor-4-Benutzerhandbuch

Apple-macbook_air_11inch_mid2011_ug

Apple-macbook_air-mid-2012-important_product_info_j

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_de_reponse_d_impulsion

Apple-Aperture_2_Raccourcis_clavier

AppleTV_Setup-Guide

Apple-livetype_2_user_manual_f

Apple-imacG5_17inch_harddrive

Apple-macbook_air_guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-MacBook_Early_2008_Guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-Keynote-2-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Apple-PowerBook-User-s-Guide-for-PowerBook-computers

Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide-5200CD-and-5300CD

Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide

Apple-Workgroup-Server-Guide

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPad-User-Guide-For-iOS-5-1-Software

Apple-Boot-Camp-Guide-d-installation-et-de-configuration

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID

Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio

Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID

Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio

Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 5.1

PowerBook G4 Premiers Contacts APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur iphone pour le logiciel ios 5.1 APPLE

Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 4,3

Guide de l’utilisateur iPod nano 5ème génération

Guide de l'utilisateur iPod Touch 2.2 APPLE

Guide de l’utilisateur QuickTime 7  Mac OS X 10.3.9 et ultérieur Windows XP et Windows 2000

Guide de l'utilisateur MacBook 13 pouces Mi 2010

Guide de l’utilisateur iPhone (Pour les logiciels iOS 4.2 et 4.3)

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPod-touch-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPad-2-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE

Guide de déploiement en entreprise iPhone OS

Guide-de-l-administrateur-Apple-Remote-Desktop-3-1

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Xserve-Diagnostics-Version-3X103

Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802.11n-5e-Generation

Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802-11n-5e-Generation

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Capteur-Nike-iPod

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iMac-21-5-pouces-et-27-pouces-mi-2011-APPLE

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Qadministrator-4

Guide-d-installation-Apple-TV-3-eme-generation

User-Guide-iPad-For-ios-5-1-Software

Instruments User GuideContents About Instruments 7 At a Glance 7 Organization of This Document 8 See Also 9 Instruments Quick Start 10 Launching Instruments 11 Gathering Your First Data 13 Choose a Trace Template 14 Choose Your Target 15 Collect and Examine the Data 15 Touring Instruments 17 Your First View: The Trace Template Selection Window 17 Collecting and Analyzing Data: The Trace Document Window 18 Adding and Configuring Instruments 22 Viewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane 23 Changing the Library View Mode 24 Finding an Instrument in the Library 24 Creating a Custom Group 26 Creating a Smart Group 28 Adding an Instrument 31 Configuring an Instrument 32 Collecting Data on Your App 33 Setting Up Data Collection with the Target Pop-up Menu 33 Collecting Data from the Dock 35 Examining Your Collected Data 36 Resymbolicating Your Data 36 Viewing the Collected Data in the Track Pane 37 Setting Flags 38 Zooming In and Out 38 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 2Viewing Data for a Range of Time 39 Isolating a Segment of the Data Collection Graph 40 Examining Data in the Detail Pane 40 Changing the Display Style of the Detail Pane 41 Sorting in the Detail Pane 42 Working in the Extended Detail Pane 42 Saving and Importing Trace Data 45 Saving a Trace Document 45 Saving an Instruments Trace Template 46 Exporting Track Data 46 Importing Data from the Sample Tool 47 Working With DTrace Data 47 Locating Memory Issues in Your App 48 Examining Memory Usage with the Activity Monitor Trace Template 48 Recovering Memory You Have Abandoned 50 Finding Leaks in Your App 51 Eradicating Zombies with the Zombies Trace Template 53 Measuring I/O Activity in iOS Devices 54 Following Network Usage Through the Activity Monitor Trace Template 54 Analyzing Network Connections with the Connection Trace Template 56 Measuring Graphics Performance in Your iOS Device 58 Measuring Core Animation Graphics Performance 58 Measuring OpenGL Activity with the OpenGL ES Analysis Trace Template 60 Finding Bottlenecks with the OpenGL ES Driver Trace Template 61 Analyzing CPU Usage in Your App 62 Looking for Bottlenecks with Performance Monitor Counters 62 Tracking a Single Event 63 Saving Energy with the Energy Diagnostics Trace Template 64 Examining Thread Usage with the Multicore Trace Template 66 Delving into Core Usage with the Time Profiler Trace Template 67 Monitoring OS X App Activity 69 Tracking File System Usage 69 Identifying Layout Changes with the Cocoa Layout Trace Template 70 Preventing Sudden Termination 71 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 3 ContentsUsing Instruments to Run Your App 72 Automating UI Testing 73 Writing an Automation Test Script 74 Testing Your Automation Script 75 Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 76 UI Element Accessibility 77 Understanding the Element Hierarchy 78 Performing User Interface Gestures 84 Adding Timing Flexibility with Timeout Periods 86 Logging Test Results and Data 87 Verifying Test Results 88 Handling Alerts 89 Handling Externally Generated Alerts 89 Handling Internally Generated Alerts 90 Detecting and Specifying Device Orientation 90 Testing for Multitasking 93 Creating Custom Instruments 94 About Custom Instruments 94 Creating a Custom Instrument 96 Adding and Deleting Probes 97 Specifying the Probe Provider 97 Adding Predicates to a Probe 99 Adding Actions to a Probe 102 Tips for Writing Custom Scripts 104 Writing BEGIN and END Scripts 104 Accessing Kernel Data from Custom Scripts 105 Scoping Variables Appropriately 105 Finding Script Errors 106 Exporting DTrace Scripts 106 Document Revision History 108 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 4 ContentsFigures, Tables, and Listings Instruments Quick Start 10 Figure 1-1 The Instruments Trace Template selection window 14 Figure 1-2 Selecting the Chess app as the target 15 Figure 1-3 Collecting information with the Multicore trace template 16 Touring Instruments 17 Figure 2-1 The Instruments window on opening 17 Figure 2-2 The Instruments window while tracing 19 Figure 2-3 The Instruments toolbar 20 Table 2-1 Opening screen sections 18 Table 2-2 Trace document key features 19 Table 2-3 Trace document toolbar controls 20 Adding and Configuring Instruments 22 Figure 3-1 The instrument library 23 Figure 3-2 Viewing an instrument group 25 Figure 3-3 Searching for an instrument 26 Table 3-1 Smart group criteria 31 Examining Your Collected Data 36 Figure 5-1 The track pane 38 Figure 5-2 Inspection Range control 39 Figure 5-3 Zooming in on a section of data 40 Figure 5-4 The Detail pane 41 Figure 5-5 Extended Detail pane 42 Table 5-1 Action menu options 43 Locating Memory Issues in Your App 48 Figure 7-1 Activity Monitor instrument with charts 49 Measuring I/O Activity in iOS Devices 54 Figure 8-1 Activity Monitor instrument tracing network packets 55 Figure 8-2 Viewing network connections 57 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 5Measuring Graphics Performance in Your iOS Device 58 Figure 9-1 Core Animation trace template showing frame rate spikes 59 Figure 9-2 Detailed information for a Core Animation sample 61 Analyzing CPU Usage in Your App 62 Figure 10-1 Tracking one PMC event with the Event Profiler instrument 64 Figure 10-2 Thread activity displayed by the Thread States trace template 66 Monitoring OS X App Activity 69 Figure 11-1 Finding an unprotected file access call 71 Automating UI Testing 73 Figure 12-1 Running an iOS app through scripting 75 Figure 12-2 The Recipes app (Recipes screen) 77 Figure 12-3 Setting the accessibility label in Interface Builder 78 Figure 12-4 Recipes table view 79 Figure 12-5 Output from logElementTree method 80 Figure 12-6 Element hierarchy (Recipes screen) 81 Figure 12-7 Recipes app (Unit Conversion screen) 82 Figure 12-8 Element hierarchy (Unit Conversion screen) 83 Table 12-1 Device orientation constants 91 Table 12-2 Interface orientation constants 92 Creating Custom Instruments 94 Figure 13-1 The instrument configuration sheet 96 Figure 13-2 Adding a predicate 99 Figure 13-3 Configuring a probe’s action 102 Figure 13-4 Returning a string pointer 103 Table 13-1 DTrace providers 97 Table 13-2 DTrace variables 100 Table 13-3 Variable scope in DTrace scripts 106 Listing 13-1 Accessing kernel variables from a DTrace script 105 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 6 Figures, Tables, and ListingsInstruments is a performance and analysis and testing tool for dynamically tracing and profiling OS X and iOS code. It is a flexible and powerful tool that lets you track one or more processes and examine the collected data. In this way, Instruments helps you understand the behavior of both user apps and the operating system. Development OSX Apps iOS Apps At a Glance With Instruments, you use special tools(known asinstruments) to trace different aspects of a process’s behavior. You can also use the tool to record a sequence of user interface actions and replay them, using one or more instruments to gather data. Instruments includes the ability to: ● Examine the behavior of one or more processes ● Record a sequence of user actions and replay them, reliably reproducing those events and collecting data over multiple runs ● Create your own custom DTrace instruments to analyze aspects of system and app behavior ● Save user interface recordings and instrument configurations as templates, accessible from Xcode Using Instruments, you can: ● Track down difficult-to-reproduce problems in your code ● Do performance analysis on your program 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 7 About Instruments● Automate testing of your app ● Stress-test parts of your app ● Perform general system-level troubleshooting ● Gain a deeper understanding of how your app works Instruments is available with Xcode 3.0 and later and with OS X v10.5 and later. Organization of This Document The following chapters describe how to use the Instruments app: ● “Instruments Quick Start” (page 10) describes how to install Instruments and provides a quick example. ● “Touring Instruments” (page 17) gives a brief overview of the Instruments app and introduces the main window. ● “Adding and Configuring Instruments” (page 22) describes how to add and configure instruments and run them to collect data on one or more processes. This chapter also shows how to choose the app to trace. ● “Collecting Data on Your App” (page 33) describes the ways you can initiate traces and gather trace data. ● “Examining Your Collected Data” (page 36) describes the tools you use to view the data returned by the instruments. ● “Saving and Importing Trace Data” (page 45) describes how you save trace documents and data and how you import data from other sources. ● “Locating Memory Issues in Your App” (page 48) provides examples of how to use the memory-oriented trace templates. ● “Measuring I/O Activity in iOS Devices” (page 54) provides examples of how to use the I/O-oriented trace templates. ● “Measuring Graphics Performance in Your iOS Device” (page 58) provides examples of how to use the OpenGL ES–oriented trace templates. ● “Analyzing CPU Usage in Your App” (page 62) provides examples of how to use the CPU-oriented trace templates. ● “Monitoring OS X App Activity” (page 69) provides examples of how to use the behavior-oriented trace templates. ● “Automating UI Testing” (page 73) provides examples of how to write scripts for automatic testing of your app. About Instruments At a Glance 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 8● “Creating Custom Instruments” (page 94) shows how to create and configure your own DTrace-based custom instrument. See Also Instruments is best used in conjunction with Xcode. For information on how to use Xcode, see the Xcode 4 User Guide . For information on how to configure an instrument and what information it collects, see the Instruments User Reference . About Instruments See Also 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 9Instruments is a powerful tool you can use to collect data about the performance and behavior of one or more processes on the system and track that data over time. Unlike most other performance and debugging tools, Instruments lets you gather widely disparate types of data and view them side by side. In this way you can spot trends that might otherwise be hard to spot with other tools. For example, your app may have large memory growth that is caused by multiple network connections being opened. Using the Allocations and Connectionsinstrumentstogether, you can pinpoint those connectionsthat are not closing and so are causing the rapid memory growth. The Instruments tool uses individual data collection modules known as instruments to collect data about a process over time. Each instrument collects and displays a different type of information, such as file access, memory use, and so forth. Instruments includes a library of standard instruments, which you can use as is to examine various aspects of your code. You can configure instruments to gather data about the same process or about different processes on the system. You can build new instruments using the custom instrument builder interface, which uses the DTrace program to gather the data you want. Note: Several Apple apps—namely, iTunes, DVD Player, and Front Row and apps that use QuickTime—prevent the collection of data through DTrace (either temporarily or permanently) in order to protectsensitive data. Therefore, you should not run those apps when performing systemwide data collection. All work in Instruments is done in a trace document, which contains a set of instruments and the data they collected. Each trace document typically holds a single session’s worth of data, which is also referred to as a single trace . You can save a trace document to preserve the trace data you have gathered and open them again later to view that data. Although most instruments are geared toward gathering trace data, the User Interface instrument helps automate data collection. With it you can record user events while you gather your trace data. You can use this recording to reliably reproduce the same sequence of events over and over again. Each time you run through this sequence, your trace document gathers a new set of trace data from the other instruments in the document and presents that data side by side with previous runs. This feature lets you compare trace data as you make improvements to your code and verify that the changes you make are having the desired impact. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 10 Instruments Quick StartLaunching Instruments Instruments is contained within the Xcode 4 toolset. Download Xcode from the App Store and install it onto your computer. After you have installed Xcode, you are ready to run Instruments. Instruments can be launched in one of three ways. To run Instruments from Xcode 1. Open Xcode. 2. Choose Xcode > Open Developer Tool > Instruments. Running Instruments from your code allows you to gather information about your app every time you build it. Incorporating Instruments from the beginning of the app development process can save you time later by finding issues early in the development cycle. To run Instruments while building your code 1. Open the scheme editor. 2. Select Edit Scheme. Instruments Quick Start Launching Instruments 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 113. Select Profile appname . 4. Choose an instrument template from the Instrument pop-up menu. The default choice is “Ask on Launch,” which causes Instruments to display its template chooser dialog when it starts up. The third way to run Instruments can only be achieved after you have launched Instruments from Xcode. You save Instruments to the Dock, so that you are able to quickly run Instruments in the future without opening Xcode. To run Instruments from the Dock 1. Launch Instruments from Xcode using one of the two options above. 2. Control-click the Instruments icon in the Dock. Instruments Quick Start Launching Instruments 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 123. Click Options > Keep in Dock. Gathering Your First Data Even though each instrument is different, there is one general workflow when collecting information from your app. This workflow is a four-step process. You: 1. Choose a trace template 2. Direct Instruments to your app 3. Collect information from about your app 4. Examine the collected information Instruments Quick Start Gathering Your First Data 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 13Choose a Trace Template When Instrumentsfirststarts up, it provides you with a list of trace templates. These templates contain collections of individual instruments that are used together to provide you with a specific set of information. For Figure 1-1, the Multicore trace template is selected. Figure 1-1 The Instruments Trace Template selection window Trace Templates Trace Template Description Platform Instruments Quick Start Gathering Your First Data 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 14Choose Your Target If you did notstart Instruments while compiling your code, you mustselect a target for the instruments chosen. A target can be an app or a process that is already running. Some instruments allow you to gather information from all of the running processes on your device. In Figure 1-2, the Chess app is chosen. Figure 1-2 Selecting the Chess app as the target Collect and Examine the Data Now that you have chosen the trace template and target for your app, it is time to collect the data. You can adjust the information that is collected by an instrument through its configuration dialog. Figure 1-3 (page 16) shows data collection using the default values for the two instruments. Click Record to start collecting data. When you have enough data, click Stop. Instruments Quick Start Gathering Your First Data 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 15After collecting your data, you are able to examine it through the Detail pane. Selecting a row in the Detail pane brings up extra information on the row in the Extended Detail pane. Figure 1-3 Collecting information with the Multicore trace template Instruments Quick Start Gathering Your First Data 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 16Instruments provides you with numerous waysto collect and examine information about your app. Instruments consists of two work areas, the trace template selection window and the trace document window. The trace template selection window, which appears when Instruments is first started, allows you to select a group of instruments based on their function. After you select a trace template, the trace document window appears. From this window, you can add more instruments, collect data, examine collected data, and much more. This chapter describes these sections and provides a quick walkthrough for each one. Your First View: The Trace Template Selection Window When Instruments opens, you are presented with a list of trace templates and platforms that are supported by Instruments on your machine. If you do not have the iOS SDKs installed, then you will not see the iOS platform displayed in the left column. Figure 2-1 The Instruments window on opening Trace Templates Trace Template Description Platform The opening screen is divided into three sections: platform, trace template, and trace template descriptions. Table Table 2-1 (page 18) describes what is found in each of these sections. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 17 Touring InstrumentsTable 2-1 Opening screen sections Feature Description There are three possible platforms available for Instruments: iOS, iOS Simulator, and OS X. Each platform contains its own set of trace templates that are configured to run on that platform. Certain instruments can run on any platform, but many are platform specific. You will see only those platforms you have downloaded the SDK for. Platform Trace templates are groups of instruments that have been collected together in order to achieve a specific task. The trace templates shown change as you select the platform and group type. Trace template The trace template description section provides a brief overview of what the type information that can be collected by the instruments contained within the trace template. Trace template description Collecting and Analyzing Data: The Trace Document Window A trace document is a self-contained space for collecting and analyzing trace data. You use the document to organize and configure the instruments needed to collect data, and you use the document to view the data you’ve gathered, at both a high and low level. Touring Instruments Collecting and Analyzing Data: The Trace Document Window 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 18Figure 2-2 shows a typical trace document. Because a trace document window presents a lot of information, it has to be well organized. As you work with trace documents, information generally flows from left to right. The farther right you are in the document window, the more detailed the information becomes. Figure 2-2 The Instruments window while tracing Track pane Extended Detail pane Toolbar Instruments pane Navigation bar Detail pane Table 2-2 lists some of the key features that are called out in Figure 2-2 (page 19) and provides a more in-depth discussion of how you use that feature. Table 2-2 Trace document key features Feature Description This pane holds the instruments you want to run. You can drag instruments into this pane or delete them. You can click the inspector button in an instrument to configure its data display and gathering parameters. Instruments pane The track pane displays a graphical summary of the data returned by the current instruments. Each instrument hasits own “track,” which provides a chart of the data collected by that instrument. Although this pane’s information is read-only, it is in this pane that you select data points to examine more closely. Track pane Touring Instruments Collecting and Analyzing Data: The Trace Document Window 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 19Feature Description The Detail pane showsthe details of the data collected by each instrument. Typically, this pane displays the explicit set of “events” that were gathered and used to create the graphical view in the track pane. If the current instrument allows you to customize the way detailed data is displayed, those options are also listed in this pane. Detail pane The Extended Detail pane shows even more detailed information about the item currently selected in the Detail pane. Most commonly, this pane displays the complete stack trace, timestamp, and other instrument-specific data gathered for the given event. Extended Detail pane The navigation bar shows you where you are and how you got there. It includes two menus, the active instrument menu and the detail view menu. You can click entries in the navigation bar to select the active instrument and the level and type of information in the detail view. Navigation bar The trace document’s toolbar lets you add and control instruments, open views, and configure the track pane. Figure 2-3 identifies the different controls on the toolbar, and Table 2-3 provides detailed information about how you use those controls. Figure 2-3 The Instruments toolbar Time/Run Inspection Range Target Menu Pause/Resume Loop Record/Stop View Library Search field Table 2-3 Trace document toolbar controls Control Description Pausesthe gathering of data during a recording. This button does not actually stop recording, it simply stops Instruments from gathering data while a recording is under way. In the track pane, pausesshow up as a gap in the trace data. Pause/Resume button Starts and stopsthe recording process. You use this button to begin gathering trace data. Record/Stop button Sets whether the user interface recordershould loop during play back to repeat the recorded steps continuously. Use this setting to gather multiple runs of a given set of steps. Loop button Touring Instruments Collecting and Analyzing Data: The Trace Document Window 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 20Control Description Selects the trace target for the document. The trace target is the process (or processes) for which data is gathered. Target menu Selects a time range in the track pane. When set, Instruments displays only data collected within the specified time period. Use the buttons of this control to set the start and end points of the inspection range and to clear the inspection range. Inspection Range control Shows the elapsed time of the current trace. If your trace document has multiple data runs associated with it, you can use the arrow controlsto choose the run whose data you want to display in the track pane. Time/Run control Hides or shows the Instruments pane, Detail pane, and Extended Detail pane. This control makes it easier to focus on the area of interest. View control Hides or shows the instrument library. For information on using the Library window, see “Adding and Configuring Instruments” (page 22). Library button Filtersinformation in the Detail pane based on a search term that you provide. Use the search field’s menu to select search options. Search field Touring Instruments Collecting and Analyzing Data: The Trace Document Window 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 21The Instruments tool uses instruments to collect data and display that data to the user. Although there is no theoretical limit to the number of instruments you can include in a document, most documents contain fewer than ten for performance reasons. You can even include the same instrument multiple times, with each instrument configured to gather data from a different process on the system. Instruments comes with a wide range of built-in instruments whose job is to gather specific data from one or more processes. Most of these instruments require little or no configuration to use. You simply add them to your trace document and begin gathering trace data. You can also create custom instruments, however, which provide you with a wide range of options for gathering data. This chapter focuses on how to add existing instruments to your trace document and configure them for use. For information on how to create custom instruments, see “Creating Custom Instruments” (page 94). 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 22 Adding and Configuring InstrumentsViewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane The instrument library (shown in Figure 3-1) displays all of the instruments that you can add to your trace document. The library includes all of the built-in instruments plus any custom instruments you have already defined. Figure 3-1 The instrument library Instrument List Instrument Description Action Menu Filter Control Group Selector To open the Library pane Do one of the following: ● Click the Library pane button in the toolbar. ● Choose Window > Library. Because the list of instruments in the Library window can get fairly long, especially if you add your own custom-built instruments, the instrument library providesseveral optionsfor organizing and finding instruments. The following sections discussthese options and show how you use them to organize the available instruments. Adding and Configuring Instruments Viewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 23Changing the Library View Mode The library provides different view modes to help you organize the available instruments. View modes let you choose the amount of information you want displayed for each instrument and the amount of space you want that instrument to occupy. Instruments supports the following view modes: ● View Icons. Displays only the icon representing each instrument. ● View Icons And Labels. Displays the icon and name of each instrument. ● View Icons and Descriptions. Displays the icon, name, and full description of each instrument. ● View Small Icons And Labels. Displays the name of the instrument and a small version of its icon. Note: Regardless of which view mode you choose, the Library window always displays detailed information about the selected instrument in the detail pane. To change the library’s view mode, select the desired mode from the Action menu at the bottom of the Library window. In addition to changing the library’s view mode, you can display the parent group of a set of instruments by choosing Show Group Banners from the Action menu. The Library window organizes instruments into groups, both for convenience and to help you narrow down the list of instruments you want. By default, this group information is not displayed in the main pane of the Library window. Enabling the Show Group Banners option adds it, making it easier to identify the general behavior of instruments in some view modes. Finding an Instrument in the Library By default, the Library window shows all of the available instruments. Each instrument, however, belongs to a larger group, which identifies the purpose of instrument and the type of data it collects. You can use the group selection controls at the top of the Library window to select one or more groups and thereby limit the number of instruments displayed by the Library window. When there are many instruments in the library, this feature makes it easier to find the instruments you want. The group selection controls have two different configurations. In one configuration, the Library window displays a pop-up menu, from which you can select a single group. If you drag the split bar between the pop-up menu and the instrument pane downward, however, the pop-up menu changes to an outline view. In this configuration, you can select multiple groups by holding down the Command or Shift key and selecting the desired groups. Adding and Configuring Instruments Viewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 24Figure 3-2 shows both standard mode and outline mode in the Library window. The window on the left shows standard mode, in which you select a single group using the pop-up menu. The window on the right shows the outline view, in which you can select multiple groups and manage your own custom groups. Figure 3-2 Viewing an instrument group Adding and Configuring Instruments Viewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 25Another way to filter the contents of the Library window is to use the search field at the bottom of the Library window. Using the search field, you can quickly narrow down the contents of the Library to find the instrument or instruments whose name, description, category, or list of keywords matches the search text. For example, Figure 3-3 shows instruments that match the search string file. Figure 3-3 Searching for an instrument When the pop-up menu is displayed at the top of the Library window, the search field filters the contents based on the currently selected instrument group. If the outline view is displayed, the search field filters the contents based on the entire library of instruments, regardless of which groups are selected. Creating a Custom Group Create a group of instruments to customize your data gathering and streamline your data gathering efforts. To create a static group in the Library pane 1. Click Library to open the Library pane. 2. Control-click in the Library pane. Adding and Configuring Instruments Viewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 263. Choose New Group. 1 2 3 4. Enter a name for the group and press Return. 5. Select the Library directory. Adding and Configuring Instruments Viewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 276. Drag the desired instruments into the new group. When you first open the Library pane, the library directory and all previously created groups are displayed. The library directory contains a complete list of all available instruments. Populate a new group with any number of instruments from the library directory. Give the group a name that identifies its purpose so you can easily select it when needed. You can nest groups in a hierarchical structure. You can also drag a nested group outside the structure to stand alone. If an instrument has already been put into a group, the group name does not become highlighted if you try to drag the same instrument into it a second time. Creating a Smart Group Smart groups are instruments that have been grouped together based on a set of user-created rules. Adding and Configuring Instruments Viewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 28To create a smart group 1. Choose New Smart Group from the Library window’s action menu. 2. Enter a name for the group in the Label field. 3. Specify a rule for the group. Adding and Configuring Instruments Viewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 294. Click the plus (+) button to create a new rule. 4 2 3 5. Verify that the group populated correctly. Every smart group must have at least one rule. You can add additional rules, as needed, using the controls in the rule editor and then configuring the group to apply all or some of the rules. Table 3-1 lists the criteria you can use to match instruments. Adding and Configuring Instruments Viewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 30Table 3-1 Smart group criteria Criteria Description Matchesinstruments based on their title. This criterion supportsthe comparison operators Starts With, Ends With, and Contains. Label Matchesinstruments based on when they were used. You can use this criterion to match only instruments that were used within the last few minutes, hours, days, or weeks. Used Within Matches instruments whose title, description, category, or keywords include the specified string. Search Criteria Matches Matches instruments whose library group name matches the specified string. This criterion does not match against custom groups. Category To edit an existing smart group, select the group in the Library window and choose Edit groupname from the action menu, where groupname is the name of your smart group. Instruments displays the rule editor again so that you can modify the existing rules. To remove a smart group from the Library window, select the group and choose Remove Group from the action menu. If you are currently viewing groups using the outline view, you can also select the group and press the Delete key. Adding an Instrument Expand on the amount and type of data collected by adding a new instrument to your trace document. To add an instrument from the Library pane 1. Click Library to open the Library pane. 2. Select the Library directory. 3. Double-click on an instrument to add it to the trace document. You can place multiple instances of an instrument in your trace document with each one set up to collect data from a different process or app. In this way, you can track how a client and server interact with each other. Adding and Configuring Instruments Viewing the Built-in Instruments with the Library Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 31Configuring an Instrument Most instruments are ready to use as soon as you add them to the Instruments pane. Some instruments can also be configured using the instrument inspector. The content of the inspector varies from instrument to instrument. Most instruments contain optionsfor configuring the contents of the track pane, and a few contain additional controls for determining what type of information is gathered by the instrument itself. To open the configuration options for an instrument Do one of the following: ● Click the inspector icon to the right of the instrument’s name. ● Choose File > Get Info. ● Press Command-I. Controls related to displaying information in the track pane can be configured before, during, or after your record data for the track. Instruments automatically gathersthe data it needsfor each display option regardless of whether that option is currently displayed in the track pane. For a list of instruments, including their configurable options, see Instruments User Reference . Adding and Configuring Instruments Configuring an Instrument 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 32For Instruments to help you monitor and improve your app, it has to be able to collect information on your app while it is running. This chapter describes how to direct Instruments to collect information on your app. Setting Up Data Collection with the Target Pop-up Menu The Target pop-up menu in the Navigation bar is used to set both the device to collect data on and the app or process you will be collecting data on. Click on the Target pop-up menu to make your choice. The Target pop-up menu provides you with three choices for collecting data: ● All Processes. Collects data from all processes currently running on the system. ● Attach to Process. Collects data from a currently running process of your choice. ● Choose Target. Collects data from a specific app that you specify. The app automatically launches when you clid the Record button. Set a particular target for an instrument in a trace document to collect data from a particular app, process, or device. Set another instrument in the trace document to collect data from a different app, process, or device. To set different targets for multiple instruments 1. Choose Instrument Specific from the Target pop-up menu. 2. Click the instrument’s inspector icon. 3. Choose the targeted app or process from the pop-up menu in the Target section. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 33 Collecting Data on Your AppYou can add multiple versions of the same instrument to your trace document by dragging another copy of the instrument from the Library into the document to record data from a different app, process, or device with each version of the instrument. You can collect various streams of data simultaneously. For example, you could simultaneously collect data from: ● All processes with one instrument. ● A single app with a second instrument ● A different app with a second version of the second instrument ● A third app with a third instrument For iOS development, the pop-up menu for the target selection includes only the targets you can profile. For OS X development, the pop-up menu includes the targets you have already profiled. When selecting the platform, you see iOS devices only when they are plugged into your computer or when you have configured Instruments to collect data from a particular device wirelessly. To enable a wireless device 1. Make sure your mobile device is connected by a USB cable. 2. Press the Option key and click the Target pop-up menu. 3. Choose your mobile device to enable the wireless option. 4. Open the Target pop-up menu and choose the wireless version of your device. 5. Disconnect the device from the USB cable. See the HTML version of this document to view the video. document to view the video. Using a wireless connection allows you to move your device as needed for testing without getting tangled in the cable or accidentally unplugging the device during testing. Connecting wirelessly is especially useful when testing the following: ● Accelerometers. Move the device in all directions without its being tethered. Connecting wirelessly ensures a complete testing of the device. ● Accessories. Plug your USB accessory into the free slot and test it. Collecting Data on Your App Setting Up Data Collection with the Target Pop-up Menu 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 34Important: Bonjour and multicast must be enabled on your wireless network access point. Note: Turning off the device causes data collection to stop. You must reconnect the device to your computer to resume data collection. Collecting Data from the Dock Save time by running Time Profiler from the Instruments app icon in the Dock to record events while Instruments is not running. Record fleeting or transient events. You can profile the following: ● System Time Profile. Starts profiling all system processes. ● Time Profile Specific Process. Starts the Time Profiler instrument with the targeted app from the pop-up menu. ● Automatically Time Profile Spinning Applications. Automatically profiles blocked (spinning) apps in the future. ● Allow Tracing of Any Process (10 hours). Trace any process that occurs in the next 10 hours. Bypasses having to type in a password during the 10 hours. To collect Time Profiler information from the Dock 1. Control-click the Instruments dock icon. 2. Choose the call stack to profile. 3. Click All Thread States to profile all available threads. 4. Choose the process to profile to start recording. Collecting Data on Your App Collecting Data from the Dock 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 35After you have collected information about your app, it is time to take a look at what you collected. Even though every instrument is different, there are several things they all have in common. This chapter describes common tasks that are used to help you examine the information you have collected. Resymbolicating Your Data Instruments requires accurate information about your project in order to provide you with the best results. Thisis accomplished by ensuring that the system is able to see all of the symbols associated with your document. Resymbolicate your document when addresses, rather than symbols, are displayed in trace documents. Symbolication maps addresses to their associated symbols and line number information. Resymbolication is often necessary when doing builds on one machine and performance testing on another. To correctly display symbols in trace documents, Instruments needs access to the specific symbol files that were generated when the executable you are testing was built. To resymbolicate your app 1. Choose File > Re-Symbolicate. 2. In the Re-Symbolicate dialog that appears, click the Binaries tab. 3. Highlight the binary (executable) from which your trace document was made. 4. Press the Locate button. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 36 Examining Your Collected Data5. Click Symbolicate. Viewing the Collected Data in the Track Pane The most prominent portion of a trace document window is the track pane. The track pane occupies the area immediately to the right of the instruments pane. This pane presents a high-level graphical view of the data gathered by each instrument. You use this pane to examine the data from each instrument and to select the areas you want to investigate further. The graphical nature of the track pane makes it easier to spot trends and potential problem areas in your app. For example, a spike in a memory usage graph indicates a place where your app is allocating more memory than usual. This spike might be normal, or it might indicate that your code is creating more objects or memory buffers than you had anticipated in this location. An instrument such as the Spin Monitor instrument can also point out places where your app becomes unresponsive. If the graph for Spin Monitor is relatively empty, you know that your app is being responsive, but if the graph is not empty, you might want to examine why that is. Figure 5-1 shows a sample trace document and calls out the basic features of the track pane. You use the timeline at the top of the pane to select where you want to investigate. Clicking in the timeline moves the playhead (a position control showing a common point in time) to that location and displays a set of inspection Examining Your Collected Data Viewing the Collected Data in the Track Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 37flags that summarize the information for each instrument at that location. Clicking in the timeline also focuses the information in the Detail pane on the surrounding data points;see “Examining Data in the Detail Pane” (page 40). Figure 5-1 The track pane Show/Hide trace runs Cycle through Inspection flag trace runs Timeline Playhead Although each instrument is different, nearly all of them offer options for changing the way data in the track pane is displayed. In addition, many instruments can be configured to display multiple sets of data in their track pane. Both features give you the option to display the data in a way that makes sense for your app. The sections that follow provide more information about the track pane and how you configure it. Setting Flags Flags allow you to quickly access points of interest in the track pane. You can add names and descriptions to flags in order to add information specific to that flag. To set flags in the track pane Do one of the following: ● Choose Edit > Add Flag. ● Press Command–Down Arrow. Zooming In and Out After data has been recorded, you can zoom in and out on the track pane to refine the detail presented. To zoom in and out of your data Do one of the following: ● Press the Shift key, and drag across a section of data to zoom in. Examining Your Collected Data Viewing the Collected Data in the Track Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 38● Press the Control key, and drag across a section of data to zoom out. Viewing Data for a Range of Time Although zooming in on a particular event in the track pane lets you see what happened at a specific time, you may also be interested in seeing the data collected over a range of time. You use the Inspection Range control (shown in Figure 5-2) to focus on the data collected in a specific time range. Figure 5-2 Inspection Range control Set Start of Range Clear Range Set End of Range To mark a time range for inspection 1. Set the start of the range. a. Drag the playhead to the desired starting point in the track pane. b. Click the leftmost button in the Inspection Range control. 2. Set the end of the range. a. Drag the playhead to the desired endpoint in the track pane. b. Click the rightmost button in the Inspection Range control. Instruments highlights the contents of the track pane that fall within the range that you specified. When you set the starting point for a range, Instruments automatically selects everything from the starting point to the end of the current trace run. If you set the endpoint first, Instruments selects everything from the beginning of the trace run to the specified endpoint. You can also set an inspection range by holding the Option key and dragging in the track pane of the desired instrument. Dragging makes the instrument under the mouse the active instrument (if it is not already) and sets the range using the mouse-down and mouse-up points. When you set a time range, Instruments filters the contents of the Detail pane, showing data collected only within the specified range. You can quickly narrow down the large amount of information collected by Instruments and see only the events that occurred over a certain period of time. To clear an inspection range, click the Clear Range button in the center of the Inspection Range control. Examining Your Collected Data Viewing the Collected Data in the Track Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 39Isolating a Segment of the Data Collection Graph While pressing the Option key, drag across a section of the data collection graph to view the data in the selected range. As you drag the cursor, the start time and the duration of the time filter appear. The Detail pane changes to display only the information contained within the time filter. Figure 5-3 shows a section of the track pane highlighted before it is zoomed in on. Figure 5-3 Zooming in on a section of data Examining Data in the Detail Pane After you identify a potential problem area in the track pane, use the Detail pane to examine the data in that area. The Detail pane displays the data associated with the current trace run for the selected instrument. Instruments displays only one instrument at a time in the Detail pane, so you must select different instruments to see different sets of details. Examining Your Collected Data Examining Data in the Detail Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 40Different instruments display different types of data in the Detail pane. Figure 5-4 shows the Detail pane associated with the File Activity instrument, which records information related to file system routines. The Detail pane in this case displays the function or method that called the file system routine, the file descriptor that was used, and the path to the file that was accessed. For information about what each instrument displays in the Detail pane, see Instruments User Reference . Figure 5-4 The Detail pane To open or close the Detail pane Do one of the following: ● Choose View > Detail. ● Click the middle View button in the toolbar. Changing the Display Style of the Detail Pane Forsome instruments, you can display the data in the Detail pane using more than one format. See Instruments User Reference for information on each individual instrument’s Detail pane display options. To view an instrument’s data using one of these formats, choose the appropriate mode from the rightmost menu in the navigation bar. Which modes an instrument supports depends on the type of data gathered by that instrument. Examining Your Collected Data Examining Data in the Detail Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 41You can use disclosure trianglesin the appropriate rowsto dive further down into the corresponding hierarchy. Clicking a disclosure triangle expands or closesjust the given row. To expand both the row and all of its children, hold down the Option key while clicking on a disclosure triangle. Sorting in the Detail Pane You can sort the information displayed in the Detail pane according to the data in a particular column. To do so, click the appropriate column header. The columns in the Detail pane differ with each instrument. Working in the Extended Detail Pane Forsome instruments, the Extended Detail pane shows additional information about the item currently selected in the Detail pane. The Extended Detail pane usually includes a description of the probe or event that was recorded, a stack trace, and the time when the information was recorded. Not all instruments display this information, however. Some instruments may not provide any extended details, and others may provide other information in this pane. Figure 5-5 shows the Extended Detail pane for the Allocations instrument. In this example, the instrument displays information about the type of memory that was allocated, including its type, pointer information, and size. Figure 5-5 Extended Detail pane To open or close the Extended Detail pane Do one of the following: Examining Your Collected Data Working in the Extended Detail Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 42● Choose View > Extended Detail. ● Click the Extended Detail View button in the toolbar. You can configure the information shown in the stack trace using the Action menu at the top of that section. Clicking and holding the Action menu icon displays a menu from which you can enable or disable the options in Table 5-1. Table 5-1 Action menu options Action Description Invert Stack Toggles the order in which calls are listed in the stack trace. Displays the source file that defines each symbol whose source you own. Source Location Library Name Displays the name of the library containing each symbol. Frame # Displays the number associated with each frame in the stack trace. File Icon Displays an icon representing the file in which each symbol is defined. Creates a new Instruments instrument that traces the selected symbol and places that instrument in the Instruments pane. Trace Call Duration Opensthe XcodeDocumentation window and brings up documentation, if available, for the selected symbol. Look up API Documentation Copies the stack trace information for the selected frames to the pasteboard so that you can paste it into other apps. Copy Selected Frames If you have an Xcode project with the source code for the symbols listed in a stack trace, you see the code in the Detail pane’s Console area. Instruments is able to display your code in the Detail pane and can even open Xcode so that you can make any desired changes. To see your personal code 1. Click on a line in the Detail pane. Examining Your Collected Data Working in the Extended Detail Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 432. Double-click the symbol name in the Extended Detail pane. 3. Click the Xcode icon in the top right of the Detail pane to make changes. You can collapse stack traces by using the slider control at the bottom of the Extended Detail pane. This is called backtrace compression with filtering. Its purpose is to reduce the detail in the stack trace and to display only what matters. Examining Your Collected Data Working in the Extended Detail Pane 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 44Instruments providesseveral waysfor you to save instrument and trace data. For a given Instruments document window, you can save the trace data you’ve recorded with that document or you can save the instrument configuration of that document. Saving the trace data lets you maintain a record of your app’s performance over time. Saving the document configuration avoids the need to recreate a commonly used configuration each time you run Instruments. The following sections explain how to save your trace documents and also how to export trace data to formats that other apps can read. Saving a Trace Document At times you will want to save a set of instruments along with the data that they have collected over one or more trace sessions. Instruments saves the current document as an Instruments trace file, with the .trace extension. To save a set of instruments 1. Select File > Save. 2. Enter a name for the file. 3. Enter a destination for the file. 4. Click Save. By default, Instrumentssaves only the trace data collected on the most recent run. If you have recorded multiple runs and want Instruments to save all of that data, you must deselect the Save Current Run Only option in the General pane of Instruments preferences before saving the document. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 45 Saving and Importing Trace DataSaving an Instruments Trace Template During your development cycle, you may want to gather data at several points by running Instruments on your app using a fixed set of instruments. Rather than reconfigure the same set of instruments in your trace document each time you run Instruments, you can configure the trace document once and save it as a trace template. To save a trace template 1. Choose File > Save As Template. 2. Enter a name for the template. 3. Enter a destination for the template. 4. Select an icon for the template. 5. Enter a description for the template. 6. Click Save. Trace template documents are not the same as the Instruments templates that appear when you create a new document. You open a trace template in the same way you open other Instruments documents, by choosing File > Open. When you open a trace template, Instruments creates a new trace document with the template configuration but without any data. Xcode supports launching your apps using your custom trace templates. To add your trace template to the Run menu in Xcode, drop the template in the /Users//Library/Application Support/Instruments/Templates directory on your local system. Exporting Track Data Instruments lets you export trace data to a comma-separated value (CSV) file format. This simple data file format is supported by many apps. For example, you might save your trace data in this format so that you can import it into a spreadsheet app. To save your trace data to a CSV file,select the instrument whose data you want to export and choose Instrument > Export Data for: . Instruments exportsthe data for the most recent run of that instrument. Saving and Importing Trace Data Saving an Instruments Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 46Note: Not all instruments support exporting to the CSV file format. Importing Data from the Sample Tool If you use the sample command-line tool to do a statistical analysis of your app’s execution, you can import your sample data and view it using Instruments. Importing data from the sample tool creates a new trace document with the Sampler instrument and loads the sample data into the Detail pane. Because the samples do not contain time stamp information, you can only view the data using Outline mode in the Detail pane. And although you can use the Call Tree configuration options of the Sampler instrument to trim the sample data, you cannot prune data using the Call Tree Constraints or Inspection Range controls. A new trace document is created based on the file you select. To import data from the Sample tool 1. Choose File > Import Data. 2. Locate your saved data. 3. Click Save. Working With DTrace Data If your trace document contains custom instruments, you can export the underlying scriptsfor those instruments and run them using the dtrace command-line tool. After running the scripts, you can then reimport the resulting data back into Instruments. For information on how to do this, see “Exporting DTrace Scripts” (page 106). Saving and Importing Trace Data Importing Data from the Sample Tool 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 47Managing the memory that your app uses is one of the most important aspects of creating an app. From the smallest iOS device to the largest OS X computer, memory is a finite resource. This chapter describes how to identify common memory issues, from memory leaks to zombies. Examining Memory Usage with the Activity Monitor Trace Template The Activity Monitor trace template monitors overall system activity and statistics, including CPU, memory, disk, and network. It also monitors all existing processes and can be used to attach new instruments to specific processes, monitor parent-child process hierarchies, and to quit running processes. It consists of the Activity Monitor instrument only. You’ll see later that the Activity Monitor is also used to monitor network activity on iOS devices. The Activity Monitor instrument provides you with four convenient charts for a quick, visual representation of the collected information. The two charts that describe memory usage are: ● Real Memory Usage (bar graph). Shows the top five real memory users in a bar graph. ● Real Memory Usage (pie chart). Shows the top five real memory users with the total memory used displayed. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 48 Locating Memory Issues in Your AppFigure 7-1 shows the top five users of memory on the system. Figure 7-1 Activity Monitor instrument with charts The following configuration options provide memory-specific information through the Activity Monitor. For statistic definitions and complete configuration options, see “Activity Monitor Instrument” in Instruments User Reference . ● Physical Memory Wired ● Physical Memory Active ● Physical Memory Inactive ● Physical Memory Used ● Physical Memory Free ● Total VM Size ● VM Page In Bytes ● VM Page Out Bytes ● VM Swap Used Locating Memory Issues in Your App Examining Memory Usage with the Activity Monitor Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 49Recovering Memory You Have Abandoned The Allocations trace template measures heap memory usage by tracking allocations, including specific object allocations by class. It also records virtual memory statistics by region. It consists of the Allocations and the VM Tracker instruments. Avoid abandoned memory by ensuring that the heap does not continue to grow when the same set of operations are continuously repeated. For example, opening a window then immediately closing it, or setting a preference then immediately unsetting it are operations that conceptually return the app to a previous and stable memory state. Cycling through such operations many times should not result in unbounded heap growth. To ensure that none of your code abandons memory, repeat user scenarios and use the Mark Heap feature after each iteration. After the first few iterations(where caches may be warmed), the persistent memory of these iterations should fall to zero. If persistent memory is still accumulating, select the focus arrow to see a call tree of the memory. There you can identify the code paths responsible for abandoning the memory. Ensure that your scenarios exercise all your code that allocates memory. To find memory abandoned by your app 1. Open the Allocations template. 2. Choose your app from the Choose Target pop-up menu. 3. Click the Record button. 4. Repetitively perform an action in your app that starts from, and finishes in, the same state. 5. After each iteration of the repeated action, click the Mark Heap button to take a snapshot of the heap. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you see whether the heap is growing without limit, and then click the Stop button. 7. Analyze objects captured by the heapshots to locate abandoned memory. Locating Memory Issues in Your App Recovering Memory You Have Abandoned 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 50If the heap continues to grow after the first few iterations of the cycle, you know your app is abandoning memory. Find a heapshot that seems representative of the repeated heap growth. Click the focus button to the right of the heapshot name to display objects created during that time range that are still living after the app has executed. After you stop the trace, you can still take snapshots by dragging the inspection head in the trace window timeline to where you want the snapshot, and clicking Mark Heap. After stopping the trace, take one last snapshot at the end of the trace. At that point, the number of persistent objects should be zero. Note: Garbage collection does not release abandoned memory. Finding Leaks in Your App The Leaks trace template measures general memory usage, checks for leaked memory, and provides statistics on object allocations by class as well as memory address histories for all active allocations and leaked blocks. It consists of the Allocations and Leaks instruments. Use the Leaks instrument to find objects in your app that are no longer referenced and reachable. The Leaks instrument reportsthese blocks of memory. Most of these leaks are objects and are reported with a class name. The others are reported as Malloc-size . To locate leaking memory 1. Open the Leaks instrument. 2. Choose your app from the Choose Target pop-up menu. 3. Click the Record button. 4. Exercise your app to execute code, and click the Stop button when leaks are displayed. 5. Click any leaked object that is identified in the Detail pane. 6. Within the Extended Detail pane, double-click an instruction from your code. Locating Memory Issues in Your App Finding Leaks in Your App 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 517. Click the Xcode icon in the Detail pane to open that code in Xcode. Note: If a leak isn't an object, you may be calling an API that assumes ownership of a malloc-created memory block for which you are missing a corresponding call to free(). After opening Xcode to see the piece of code that is creating the leak, the cause of the leak may still be unclear. The Leaks instrument allows you to see the cycle that is creating the leak in the Cycles & Roots option in the Detail pane. It provides a graph of the reference cycle that is causing the leak. To see the cycle graph of a leak 1. Select the Leaks instrument. 2. Select Cycles & Roots in the Detail pane. 3. Select the leak whose graph you want to see. Locating Memory Issues in Your App Finding Leaks in Your App 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 52Eradicating Zombies with the Zombies Trace Template The Zombies trace template measures general memory usage while focusing on the detection of overrelease “zombie” objects. It also provides statistics on object allocations by class as well as memory address histories for all active allocations. It consists of the Allocations instrument only. The Zombies template substitutes an object of type NSZombie for objects that are released to a reference count of zero. Then, when a zombie is messaged the app crashes, recording stops, and a Zombie Messaged dialog appears. Clicking the focus button to the right of the message in the Zombie Detected dialog displays the complete memory history of the overreleased object. To find zombies in your code 1. Open the Zombies template. 2. Choose your app from the Choose Target pop-up menu. 3. Click the Record button and exercise your app. 4. When a Zombie Messaged dialog appears, click the focus button to the right of the message text in the dialog. 5. Open the Extended Detail pane and double-click the zombie event type in the object history table. 6. In the stack trace that appears, double-click Responsible Caller to display the responsible code. Tip: The Zombies template causes memory growth because the zombies are never deallocated. So for iOS apps, use it with iOS simulator rather than on the device itself. For the same reason, don’t use it concurrently with the Leaks instrument. Locating Memory Issues in Your App Eradicating Zombies with the Zombies Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 53Apps can be complicated programs with a lot of information being passed between the device and the user. The I/O Activity trace template in Instruments help you see what your app is doing and where it is sending and receiving information. This chapter shows you how to use these trace templates and monitor your app’s activity. Following Network Usage Through the Activity Monitor Trace Template The Activity Monitor trace template monitors overall system activity and statistics, including CPU, memory, disk, and network. It also monitors all existing processes and can be used to attach new instruments to specific processes, monitor parent-child process hierarchies, and quit running processes. The Activity Monitor trace template consists of the Activity Monitor instrument. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 54 Measuring I/O Activity in iOS DevicesUse the network statistics in the Activity Monitor instrument to see which processes are sending and receiving information. Examine this information carefully to pinpoint areas where your app is sending out excessive amounts of information and therefore tying up valuable device resources. When you minimize the amount of information sent and received, you can benefit from increased performance and response times in your app. Figure 8-1 Activity Monitor instrument tracing network packets The Trace Highlights view option does not provide any useful graphs when looking at network connections. To provide useful information, the Activity Monitor instrument must be configured. The following configuration options provide network specific information through the Activity Monitor. Forstatistic definitions and complete configuration options, see Instruments User Reference . ● Net Packets In ● Net Bytes In ● Net Packets Out ● Net Bytes Out ● Net Packets In Per Second ● Net Packets Out Per Second ● Net Bytes In Per Second ● Net Bytes Out Per Second Measuring I/O Activity in iOS Devices Following Network Usage Through the Activity Monitor Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 55Analyzing Network Connections with the Connection Trace Template The Networks template analyzes how your apps are using TCP/IP and UDP/IP connections. The Network trace template consists of the Connections and Network Activity instruments. To view network connections used by your app 1. Connect your iOS device. You can use a physical or wireless connection. See “To enable a wireless device” (page 34). 2. Choose a target from the Target pop-up menu. 3. Click Record and exercise your app. 4. Click Stop. Selecting Trace Highlights in the Detail pane provides two bar graphs. The first bar graph lists the top five active ports and the amount of information that has traveled through them. The second one lists the amount of bytes used other processes. Switching to the Connection view shows the collected information in column form. Measuring I/O Activity in iOS Devices Analyzing Network Connections with the Connection Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 56You can compare the amount of data passed by different connections using the Connections instrument (see Figure 8-2). Clicking a checkbox in the Graph column next to a connection displays that information in the track pane. A graph of all connections is always displayed in the track pane. Figure 8-2 Viewing network connections In conjunction with the Connections instrument, the Network Activity instrument measures the number of packets that are sent and received by your app. Measuring I/O Activity in iOS Devices Analyzing Network Connections with the Connection Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 57Extensive use of graphics in your app can make your app stand out from your competitor. But unless you use graphics resources responsibly, your app will slow down and look mediocre no matter how good the images you are trying to render. Use the three trace templates found in the iOS Graphics section to profile your app. Ensure that the frame rate is high enough and that your graphics don’t bog down your app’s performance. Measuring Core Animation Graphics Performance Instruments uses the Core Animation instrument to measure your app’s graphical performance on iOS devices. The Core Animation trace template provides a quick and lightweight option for measuring the number of frames per second rendered by your app. This instrument is not intended to be used to measure OpenGL ES performance. You can quickly see where your app renders fewer than expected frames. By correlating what you were doing at the time the sample wastaken, you can identify areas of your code that need to be improved. Correlate your interactions with your app with the results displayed in Instruments. In Figure 9-1, you can see spikes where the frame rate of the app becomes appreciably better. Without knowing what was happening with the device during these spikes, it would be natural for you to want to duplicate these higher frame rates throughout the app. However, these spikes were caused by orientation changes when the device was changed 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 58 Measuring Graphics Performance in Your iOSDevicebetween landscape and normal orientation. Without knowing that an orientation change by the device was performed, you might spend time trying to find what caused the performance increase and replicating it throughout your app. Figure 9-1 Core Animation trace template showing frame rate spikes Core Animation contains several useful debugging options in the Detail pane. You do not need to be running a trace in order to see these options working on your iOS device. Select the running process from the Target pop-up menu. ● Color Blended Layers. Shows blended view layers. Multiple view layers that are drawn on top of each other with blending enabled are highlighted in red. Reducing the amount of red in your app when this option is selected can dramatically improve your apps performance. Blended view layers are often the cause for slow table scrolling. ● Color Hits Green and Misses Red. Marks views in green or red. A view that is able to use a cached rasterization is marked in green. ● Color Copied Images. Shows images that are copied by Core Animation in blue. ● Color Immediately. When selected, removes the 10 ms delay when performing color-flush operations. ● Color Misaligned Images. Places a magenta overlay over images where the source pixels are not aligned to the destination pixels. ● Color Offscreen-Rendered Yellow. Places a yellow overlay over content that is rendered offscreen. ● Color OpenGL Fast Path Blue. Places a blue overlay over content that is detached from the compositor. Measuring Graphics Performance in Your iOS Device Measuring Core Animation Graphics Performance 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 59● Flash Updated Regions. Colors regions on your iOS device in yellow when that region is updated by the graphics processor. Measuring OpenGL Activity with the OpenGL ES Analysis Trace Template The OpenGL ES Analysis template measures and analyzes OpenGL ES activity in order to detect OpenGL ES correctness and performance problems. It also offers you recommendation for addressing found problems. It consists of the OpenGL ES Analyzer and the OpenGL ES Driver instruments. To get OpenGL ES Analyzer to make suggestions for your app 1. Open the OpenGL ES Analysis template in the iOS group. 2. Click the Choose Target pop-up and select your iOS device. 3. Click the Choose Target pop-up a second time and choose the app you want to analyze. 4. Click the Record button to begin recording data, and exercise your OpenGL graphics code. 5. Click the Stop button when issues stop accumulating in the detail pane. Errors are listed in the Detail pane, showing total occurrences, unique occurrences, category, summary, and (at the far left) a severity code that is either a red square for most severe, or an orange triangle for less severe. When an error isselected a recommendation is provided in the Extended Detail pane on how to fix the detected problem. Measuring Graphics Performance in Your iOS Device Measuring OpenGL Activity with the OpenGL ES Analysis Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 60Finding Bottlenecks with the OpenGL ES Driver Trace Template The OpenGL ES Driver trace template is also used to measure app performance and provides you with more information than just the number of frames per second that your app renders. The Extended Detail pane displays all of the gathered information for a specific sample. Each statistic can also be displayed in the track pane by configuring the OpenGL ES Driver to display that particular statistic. For detailed information about the statistic offered, see “OpenGL ES Driver Instrument” in the Instruments User Reference . Figure 9-2 Detailed information for a Core Animation sample Bottlenecksfor an OpenGL app often come in two forms, a GPU bottleneck or a CPU bottleneck. GPU bottlenecks occur when the GPU forces the CPU to wait for information as it has to much information to process. CPU bottlenecks often occur when the GPU has to wait for information from the CPU before it can process it. CPU bottlenecks can often be fixed by changing the underlying logic of your app to create a better overall flow of information to the GPU. The following shows a list of bottlenecks and common symptoms that point to the bottleneck: ● Geometry limited. See whether Tiler Utilization is high. If it is, then look into your vertex shader processes. ● Pixel limited. See whether Rendered Utilization is high. If it is, then look into your fragment shader processes. ● CPU limited. See whether Tiler and Rendered Utilization are low. If both of these are low, the performance bottleneck may not be in your OpenGL code and you should look into the your code’s overall logic. Measuring Graphics Performance in Your iOS Device Finding Bottlenecks with the OpenGL ES Driver Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 61Ensuring effective use of all available resources is important when writing code for your app. One of the most important resources is your CPU. Effective use of CPUs allows your app to run faster and more effectively. Even though you will be writing your app for a particular platform, keep in mind that even the same general platform type can have different CPU capabilities. The CPU trace templates provide you with the means to identify how well your app uses multiple cores, how much energy you are using, and other resource measurements. Looking for Bottlenecks with Performance Monitor Counters Performance monitor counters are hardware registers that measure events occurring in the processor. They can be used to help identify bottlenecksin your app by identifying an excessive amount of events of a particular type. For example, a high number of conditional branch instructions may indicate a section of logic that, if rearranged, might lower the number of branches required. Even though PMC events can bring these issues to light, it is up to you to match them to your code and decide how they will help you improve your app’s performance. In Instruments, you track PMC events using the Counters instrument. To track PMC events in the Counters instrument 1. Open the Counters trace template. 2. Click the Inspector button in the Counters instrument. 3. Click the plus (+) button. 4. Click the event to change to another event. The PMC events list is populated with an initial set of common events. You can add events specific to your app through the Window menu. To add new PMC events 1. Select Window > Manage PM Events. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 62 Analyzing CPU Usage in Your App2. Click the state corresponding to the desired event and select Visible or Favorite. Important: The number of PMC eventsthat can be tracked is hardware dependent. Trying to track to many events at one time will cause an error. Experiment with your setup to determine the number of events that can be successfully tracked at one time. Note: If you plan on recording the same PM events frequently, save them in a template. Otherwise, they will be lost when you close the document. For information on saving a trace template see “Saving an Instruments Trace Template” (page 46). Tracking a Single Event The Event Profiler instrument tracks Performance Monitor Interrupt (PMI) events, but in this case, only one event is tracked and you can get more detail about it. You set the size of each sample set collected by the Event Profiler instrument. Event Profiler then provides you with information about how active the tracked PMI event was during the sample. Use the track pane slider to identify those samples showing a lot of activity. After you have identified high activity areas, use the Detail pane to get more information on each particular example. To add new PMI events 1. Choose Window > Manage PM Events. 2. Click the state corresponding to that event and select Visible or Favorite. 3. In the Threshold field, enter how many times an event must occur before a sample is taken. Analyzing CPU Usage in Your App Tracking a Single Event 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 63Choose the PMI event you want to track by selecting it from the Event Name pop-up menu control. If the required event is not listed, make sure that you have enabled it. See “To add new PMC events” (page 62) to create a new event. Figure 10-1 shows the Event Profiler tracking a single PMC event. Figure 10-1 Tracking one PMC event with the Event Profiler instrument Note: If you plan to record the same PM events frequently, save them in a template; otherwise, they will be lost when you close the document. For information on saving a trace template see “Saving an Instruments Trace Template” (page 46). Saving Energy with the Energy Diagnostics Trace Template The Energy Diagnostics trace template provides diagnostics regarding energy usage, as well as basic on/off states of major device components. This template consists of the Energy Usage, CPU Activity, Network Activity, Display Brightness, Sleep/Wake, Bluetooth, WiFi, and GPS instruments. With Energy Diagnostics Logging on, your iOS device records energy-related data unobtrusively while the device is used. Because logging is efficient, you can log all day. Logging continues while the iOS device is in sleep mode, but if the device battery runs dry or the iOS Device is powered off, the log data is lost. Analyzing CPU Usage in Your App Saving Energy with the Energy Diagnostics Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 64The Developer Setting appears only after the device is provisioned for development. The setting disappears after the device has been rebooted. Restore the setting by connecting the device to Xcode or Instruments. After sufficient energy usage events have been logged, you can analyze them by importing the log data from the phone to the Xcode Instruments Energy Diagnostics template. Look for areas of high energy usage and see whether you can reduce energy usage in these areas. To track energy usage on an iOS device 1. Turn on developer logging in the iOS device where you want to capture data. 2. Exercise your app like a user would. 3. After capturing the data, turn off developer logging. Minimize the amount of energy your app uses by ensuring that you turn off any radios that you don’t actively need. You can verify if you have turned off a particular radio using the Energy Diagnostics trace template. Each radio is depicted with red in the track pane to designate that it is on and black to designate that it is turned off. Analyzing CPU Usage in Your App Saving Energy with the Energy Diagnostics Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 65Examining Thread Usage with the Multicore Trace Template The Multicore trace template analyzes your multicore performance, including thread state, dispatch queues, and block usage. It consists of the Thread States and the Dispatch instruments. The Thread Statesinstrument provides you with a graphical representation of each threadsstate at a particular time in the run. Each state is color-coded to help you identify what each thread is doing in conjunction with all of the other threads. Threads that go through multiple state changes are easily identifiable through the changing colors in the track pane. Figure 10-2 shows four threads being tracked. Figure 10-2 Thread activity displayed by the Thread States trace template To view thread usage in your app 1. Select the Multicore trace template. 2. Run your app. 3. Choose the threads to examine by selecting the checkbox in the Mark column in the Detail pane. The following actions are captured in the track pane. Color notations are the default color for each action, but they can be changed by you. ● Unknown / At termination (Grey). Instrumentsis unable to determine the state of the thread or it is being terminated. ● Waiting (Yellow). The thread is waiting for another thread to perform a particular action. Analyzing CPU Usage in Your App Examining Thread Usage with the Multicore Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 66● Suspended (Dark Blue). The thread has been put into a suspended state and will not continue until it is specifically told to resume running. ● Requested to suspend (Light Blue). The thread has sent out a request to be put into a suspended state. ● Running (Green). The thread is running. ● On run queue (Black). The thread is in the queue to be run. It will run after a CPU becomes available. ● Waiting uninterruptedly (uninterruptibly) (Orange). The thread is waiting for another thread to perform a particular action and can not be interrupted during the wait. ● Idling processor (White). The thread is active on a processor, but is not performing any actions. Along with the Thread States instrument, the Multicore template contains the Dispatch instrument. Use the Dispatch instrument to see when your dispatch queues are executed. You can see how long the dispatched thread lasts and how many blocks are used. The Multicore trace template displays thread interaction throughout your app. However, you are not able to see which cores are being used. To see core usage by your app, see “Delving into Core Usage with the Time Profiler Trace Template” (page 67). Delving into Core Usage with the Time Profiler Trace Template The Time Profiler trace template performs low-overhead, time-based sampling of processes running on the system’s CPUs. It consists of the Time Profiler instrument only. The CPU strategy in the Time Profiler instrument shows how well your app utilizes multiple cores. Selecting the CPU strategy in a trace document configures the track pane to display time on the x-axis and processor cores on the y-axis. The CPU strategy Usage view facilitates comparison of core usage over given time periods. Effective core concurrency improves an app’s performance. Areas of heavy usage for a single core while other cores remain quiet can depict areas needing greater optimization. To view individual core usage 1. Open the Time Profiler instrument. 2. Choose your app from the Choose Target pop-up menu. 3. Click Record, exercise your app, and then click Stop to capture data. 4. Click the CPU strategy button. 5. Select Usage. Analyzing CPU Usage in Your App Delving into Core Usage with the Time Profiler Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 676. Look for unbalanced core usage. Ensure that your app is using multiple cores simultaneously by zooming in on the track pane. One or two threads that jump between cores very quickly can make it look like multiple cores are in use at the same time when in reality, only one core is in use at any one time. Analyzing CPU Usage in Your App Delving into Core Usage with the Time Profiler Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 68Monitor your app to find problems with it before you release it to the world. To monitor your app in OS X, you profile it with the file system and behavior trace templates supplied by Instruments. Using these templates, you manipulate your app and watch as your code reacts to the manipulation. For example, you can make sure your app doesn’tsuddenly terminate, make sure it writesto approved directories only, and then have Instruments run it for you. Tracking File System Usage The File Activity trace template monitorsfile and directory activity, including file open/close calls, file permission modifications, directory creation, and file moves. It consists of the File Activity, Reads/Writes, File Attributes, and Directory I/O instruments. Every app submitted to the App Store is required to save information in specific directories unless the user explicitly chooses to save the information in another location. Apps that do not save their information in the correct directories are rejected during submission. Use the File Activity trace template to ensure that your app follows the rules found in “File-System Usage Requirements for the Mac App Store” in Submitting to the Mac App Store . To see where you app saves information 1. Select the File Activity trace template. 2. Profile your app. 3. Select the Reads/Writes instrument. 4. Look for write calls in the Function column. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 69 Monitoring OS X App Activity5. Verify that write calls follow the rules stated in “File-System Usage Requirements for the Mac App Store” in Submitting to the Mac App Store . Identifying Layout Changes with the Cocoa Layout Trace Template To properly profile your app, you must identify what your app is doing when layout changes occur. The Cocoa Layout trace template accomplishes this by observing the changes to NSLayoutConstraint objects in order to help you debug your code. When you run your app, if the layout is not acting the way you expect, then chances are there is an error in your layout. The Cocoa Layout instrument makes it easy to identify these errors by taking a snapshot whenever the layout changes and providing you with information about what is happening. To locate cocoa layout calls 1. Profile your app from inside of Xcode. See “To run Instruments while building your code” (page 11). 2. Exercise your app. 3. In the Detail pane, highlight the item that is not working as intended. 4. Pull up your code in the Detail pane’s Console area. See “To see your personal code” (page 43). Monitoring OS X App Activity Identifying Layout Changes with the Cocoa Layout Trace Template 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 70Preventing Sudden Termination Preventing your app from suddenly terminating should be a high priority when creating your app because no person enjoys using an app that has a tendency to shut down while in use. Often,sudden termination is caused when the file system is accessed and the system is not protected by calls designed to prevent the sudden termination of the app. To find unprotected file access 1. Select the Sudden Termination trace template. 2. Record your data. 3. In the Detail pane, sort by Function, Mode, or Safety Rating. After you have identified an unprotected file access, select the section in the Detail pane to bring up more information in the Extended Detail pane. Here you can see the stack trace at the time of the access and know what thread was running when it happened. The Activity Monitor instrument allows you to see more detailed information about what was happening at the time of the call. Figure 11-1 shows Instruments finding unprotected file access calls. Figure 11-1 Finding an unprotected file access call Monitoring OS X App Activity Preventing Sudden Termination 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 71Using Instruments to Run Your App The UI Recorder trace template records the user interface events of a process launched from Instruments. You can then play thisrecording back in order to drive the user interface of the target process while other instruments record new data. It consists of the User Interface instrument only. To properly test an app, you may need to interact with it multiple times. Using the same actions each time you test provides you with a consistent testing platform. You can then compare your testing results reliably to previous results to ensure that any changes made to your code have not adversely affected the app. To collect data using the same set of actions each time 1. Select the User Interface instrument. 2. Click Record to begin gathering data. 3. Perform the events you want to record. 4. Click Stop after the data has been recorded. 5. Choose File > Save to save the recording. See the HTML version of this document to view the video. document to view the video. User interface events are color coded according to the type of event: ● Blue. Mouse events ● Green. Key events ● Yellow. System events Note: Yoursystem must be set up to use assistive devices. Select“Enable accessfor assistive devices” in System Preferences > Universal Access to enable this feature. Monitoring OS X App Activity Using Instruments to Run Your App 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 72Use the Automation instrument to automate user interface tests for your iOS app through test scripts that you write. These scripts simulate user actions by calling UI Automation, a JavaScript programming interface that specifies actions to be performed in your app as it runs. During the tests, the system returns log information to you. When you automate tests of UI interactions, you free critical staff and resources for other work. In this way you minimize procedural errors and shorten the amount of time needed to develop product updates. This chapter describes how you use the Automation template in Instrumentsto execute scripts. It also describes how to mesh your scripts with the UI Automation programming interface to verify that your app can do the following: ● Access its UI element hierarchy ● Add timing flexibility by having timeout periods ● Log and verify the information returned by Instruments ● Handle alerts properly ● Handle changes in device orientation gracefully ● Handle multitasking As you work through this chapter, look for more detailed information about each class in UI Automation Reference Collection . An important benefit of the Automation instrument is that you can use it with other instruments to perform sophisticated tests such as tracking down memory leaks and isolating causes of performance problems. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 73 Automating UI TestingNote: For your protection, the instrument does not allow you to process any app that is not code-signed with your provisioning profile. This includes any copy that has been downloaded from the iTunes App Store. Important: Simulated actions may not prevent the test device from auto-locking. Prior to running tests on a device, you should set the Auto-Lock preference to Never. Writing an Automation Test Script Your test script must be a valid executable JavaScript file that is accessible to the instrument on the host computer. Because the script runs outside of your app, the app version you are testing can be the one your submit to the App Store. Because each app is different, often a script for one app is not acceptable for use in another app. In this case, you can create your own script inside of Instruments. To create a script 1. Select the Automation trace template. 2. Click Add > Create. 3. Double-click New Script to change the name of the script. 4. In the Detail pane, select Console to enter the code for your script. 5. Choose a target for your script. 6. Click the Play button at the bottom of the Console. Automating UI Testing Writing an Automation Test Script 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 74After you create a script, you will want to use it throughout the development of your app. You do this by importing your saved script and running it with the Automation instrument. Figure 12-1 shows a completed run using a script. Figure 12-1 Running an iOS app through scripting Testing Your Automation Script You write your Automation tests in JavaScript, using the UI Automation JavaScript library to specify actions that should be performed in your app as it runs. Your test script must be a valid executable JavaScript file accessible to the instrument on the host computer. It runs outside your app, so the tested version of your app can be the same version that you submit to the iTunes App store. You can create as many scripts as you like, but you can run only one at a time. The API does offer a #import directive that allows you to write smaller, reusable discrete test scripts. For example, if you were to define commonly used functions in a file named TestUtilities.js, you could make those functions available for use in your test script by including in that script the line #import "/TestUtilities.js" To import a previously saved script 1. Select the Automation trace template. 2. Click Add > Import. 3. Navigate to your saved script file and click Open. Automating UI Testing Writing an Automation Test Script 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 75The Automation trace template executes a script which simulates UI interaction for an iOS app launched from Instruments. It consists of the Automation instrument only. To configure the Automation instrument to automatically start and stop your script under control of the Instruments Record button in the toolbar, select the Run on Record checkbox. If your app crashes or goes to the background, your script is blocked until the app is frontmost again, at which time the script continues to run. Note: You must explicitly stop recording. Completion or termination of your script does not turn off recording. Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements The Accessibility-based mechanism underlying the UI Automation feature represents every control in your app as a uniquely identifiable element. To perform an action on an element in your app, you explicitly identify that element in terms of the app’s element hierarchy. Automating UI Testing Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 76Note: To fully understand this section, you should be familiar with the information in iOS Human Interface Guidelines. To illustrate the element hierarchy, this section refers to the Recipes iOS app shown in Figure 12-2, which is available as the code sample iPhoneCoreDataRecipes from the iOS Dev Center. Figure 12-2 The Recipes app (Recipes screen) UI Element Accessibility Each accessible element is inherited from the base element, UIAElement. Every element can contain zero or more other elements. Automating UI Testing Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 77As detailed below, your script can access individual elements by their position within the element hierarchy. However, you can assign a unique name to each element by setting the label attribute and making sure Accessibility is selected in Interface Builder for the control represented by that element, as shown in Figure 12-3. Figure 12-3 Setting the accessibility label in Interface Builder UI Automation uses the accessibility label (if it’s set) to derive a name property for each element. Aside from the obvious benefits, using such names can greatly simplify development and maintenance of your testscripts. The name property is one of four properties of these elements that can be very useful in your test scripts. ● name: derived from the accessibility label ● value: the current value of the control, for example, the text in a text field ● elements: any child elements contained within the current element, for example, the cells in a table view ● parent: the element that contains the current element Understanding the Element Hierarchy At the top of the element hierarchy is the UIATarget class, which represents the high-level user interface elements of the system under test (SUT)—that is, the device (or simulator) as well as the iOS and your app running on that device. For the purposes of your test, your app is the frontmost app (or target app), identified as follows: UIATarget.localTarget().frontMostApp(); To reach the app window, the main window of your app, you would specify UIATarget.localTarget().frontMostApp().mainWindow(); At startup, the Recipes app window appears as shown in Figure 12-2 (page 77). Automating UI Testing Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 78Inside the window, the recipe list is presented in an individual view, in this case, a table view: Figure 12-4 Recipes table view This is the first table view in the app’s array of table views, so you specify it as such using the zero index ( [0]), as follows: UIATarget.localTarget().frontMostApp().mainWindow().tableViews()[0]; Inside the table view, each recipe is represented by a distinct individual cell. You can specify individual cells in similar fashion. For example, using the zero index ( [0]), you can specify the first cell as follows: UIATarget.localTarget().frontMostApp().mainWindow().tableViews()[0].cells()[0]; Each of these individual cell elements is designed to contain a recipe record as a custom child element. in this first cell is the record for chocolate cake, which you can access by name with this line of code: UIATarget.localTarget().frontMostApp().mainWindow().tableViews()[0].cells()[0].elements()["Chocolate Cake"]; Displaying the Element Hierarchy You can use the logElementTree method for any element to list all of its child elements. The following code illustrates listing the elements for the main (Recipes) screen (or mode) of the Recipes app. // List element hierarchy for the Recipes screen Automating UI Testing Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 79UIALogger.logStart("Logging element tree …"); UIATarget.localTarget().logElementTree(); UIALogger.logPass(); The output of the command is captured in the log displayed by the Automation instrument, as in Figure 12-5. Figure 12-5 Output from logElementTree method Automating UI Testing Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 80Note the number at the beginning of each element line item, indicating that element’s level in the hierarchy. These levels could be viewed conceptually as in Figure 12-6. Figure 12-6 Element hierarchy (Recipes screen) UIANavigationBar (Recipes) UIAApplication UIATarget UIAWindow UIATabBar UIATableView UIAButton (Edit) UIAStaticText (Recipes) UIAButton (Add) UIAButton (Recipes) UIAButton (Unit Conversion) UIATableCell (Chocolate cake) UIATableCell (Crèpes Suzette) UIATableCell (Gaufres de Liège) UIATableCell (Ginger Snaps) UIATableCell (Macarons) UIATableCell (Tarte aux Fraises) UIATableCell (Three Berry Cobbler) UIAElement (Chocolate cake) UIAElement (Crèpes Suzette) UIAElement (Gaufres de Liège) UIAElement (Ginger Snaps) UIAElement (Macarons) UIAElement (Tarte aux Fraises) UIAElement (Three Berry Cobbler) Automating UI Testing Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 81Although a screen is not technically an iOS programmatic construct and doesn’t explicitly appear in the hierarchy, it is a helpful concept in understanding that hierarchy. Tapping the Unit Conversion tab in the tab bar displays the Unit Conversion screen (or mode), shown in Figure 12-7. Figure 12-7 Recipes app (Unit Conversion screen) The following code taps the Unit Conversion tab in the tab bar to display the associated screen and then logs the element hierarchy associated with it. // List element hierarchy for the Unit Conversion screen var target = UIATarget.localTarget(); var appWindow = target.frontMostApp().mainWindow(); var element = target; appWindow.tabBar().buttons()["Unit Conversion"].tap(); UIALogger.logStart("Logging element tree …"); element.logElementTree(); UIALogger.logPass(); Automating UI Testing Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 82The resultant log reveals the hierarchy to be as illustrated in Figure 12-8. Note that just as with the previous example, logElementTree is called for the target, but the results are for the current screen—in this case, the Unit Conversion screen. Figure 12-8 Element hierarchy (Unit Conversion screen) UIANavigationBar (Unit Conversion) UIAApplication UIATarget UIAWindow UIATabBar UIATableView UIAStaticText (Unit Conversion) UIAButton (Recipes) UIAButton (Unit Conversion) UIATableCell (Weight) UIATableCell (Temperature) UIAElement (Weight) UIAElement (Temperature) Simplifying Element Hierarchy Navigation The previous code sample introduces the use of variables to represent parts of the element hierarchy. This technique allows for shorter, simpler commands in your scripts. Using variables in this way also allows for some abstraction, yielding flexibility in code use and reuse. The following sample uses a variable (destinationScreen) to control changing between the two main screens (Recipes and Unit Conversion) of the Recipes app. // Switch screen (mode) based on value of variable var target = UIATarget.localTarget(); var app = target.frontMostApp(); var tabBar = app.mainWindow().tabBar(); var destinationScreen = "Recipes"; if (tabBar.selectedButton().name() != destinationScreen) { tabBar.buttons()[destinationScreen].tap(); } Automating UI Testing Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 83With minor variations, this code code could work, for example, for a tab bar with more tabs or with tabs of different names. Performing User Interface Gestures Once you understand how to accessthe desired element, it’srelatively simple and straightforward to manipulate that element. The UI Automation API provides methods to perform most UIKit user actions, including multi-touch gestures. For comprehensive detailed information about these methods, see UI Automation Reference Collection . Tapping. Perhaps the most common touch gesture is a simple tap. Implementing a one-finger single tap on a known UI element is very simple. For example, tapping the right button, labeled with a plus sign (+), in the navigation bar of the Recipes app, displays a new screen used to add a new recipe. This command is all that’s required to tap that button: UIATarget.localTarget().frontMostApp().navigationBar().buttons()["Add"].tap(); Note that it uses the name Add to identify the button, presuming that the accessibility label has been set appropriately, as described above. Of course, more complicated tap gestures will be required to thoroughly test any sophisticated app. You can specify any standard tap gestures. For example, to tap once at an arbitrary location on the screen, you just need to provide the screen coordinates: UIATarget.localTarget().tap({x:100, y:200}); This command taps at the x and y coordinates specified, regardless of what's at that location on the screen. More complex taps are also available. To double-tap the same location, you could use this code: UIATarget.localTarget().doubleTap({x:100, y:200}); And to perform a two-finger tap to test zooming in and out, for example, you could use this code: UIATarget.localTarget().twoFingerTap({x:100, y:200}); Automating UI Testing Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 84Pinching. A pinch open gesture is typically used to zoom in or expand an object on the screen, and a pinch close gesture is used for the opposite effect—to zoom out or shrink an object on the screen. You specify the coordinates to define the start of the pinch close gesture or end of the pinch open gesture, followed by a number of seconds for the duration of the gesture. The duration parameter allows you some flexibility in specifying the speed of the pinch action. UIATarget.localTarget().pinchOpenFromToForDuration({x:20, y:200}, {x:300, y:200}, 2); UIATarget.localTarget().pinchCloseFromToForDuration({x:20, y:200}, {x:300, y:200}, 2); Dragging and flicking. If you need to scroll through a table or move an element on screen, you can use the dragFromToForDuration method. You provide coordinates for the starting location and ending location, as well as a duration, in seconds. The following example specifies a drag gesture from location 160, 200 to location 160, 400, over a period of one second. UIATarget.localTarget().dragFromToForDuration({x:160, y:200}, {x:160, y:400}, 1); A flick gesture is similar, but it is presumed to be a fast action, so it doesn’t require a duration parameter. UIATarget.localTarget().flickFromTo({x:160, y:200}, {x:160, y:400}); Entering text.Your script will likely need to test that your app handles text input correctly. To do so, it can enter text into a text field by simply specifying the target text field and setting its value with the setValue method. The following example uses a local variable to provide a long string as a test case for the first text field (index [0]) in the current screen. var recipeName = "Unusually Long Name for a Recipe"; UIATarget.localTarget().frontMostApp().mainWindow().textFields()[0].setValue(recipeName); Navigating in your app with tabs.To test navigating between screens in your app, you’ll very likely need to tap a tab in a tab bar. Tapping a tab is much like tapping a button; you access the appropriate tab bar, specify the desired button, and tap that button, as shown in the following example. var tabBar = UIATarget.localTarget().frontMostApp().mainWindow().tabBar(); var selectedTabName = tabBar.selectedButton().name(); if (selectedTabName != "Unit Conversion") { tabBar.buttons()["Unit Conversion"].tap(); } Automating UI Testing Accessing and Manipulating UI Elements 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 85First, a local variable is declared to represent the tab bar. Using that variable, the script accesses the tab bar to determine the selected tab and get the name of that tab. Finally, if the name of the selected tab matches the name of the desired tab (in this case “Unit Conversion”), the script taps that tab. Scrolling to an element.Scrolling is a large part of a user’sinteraction with many apps. UI Automation provides a variety of methods for scrolling. The basic methods allow for scrolling to the next element left, right, up, or down. More sophisticated methods support greater flexibility and specificity in scrolling actions. One such method is scrollToElementWithPredicate, which allows you to scroll to an element that meets certain criteria that you specify. This example accesses the appropriate table view through the element hierarchy and scrolls to a recipe in that table view whose name starts with “Turtle Pie.” UIATarget.localTarget().frontMostApp().mainWindow().tableViews()[0] .scrollToElementWithPredicate("name beginswith ‘Turtle Pie’"); Using the scrollToElementWithPredicate method allowsscrolling to an element whose exact name may not be known. Using predicate functionality can significantly expand the capability and applicability of your scripts. For more information on using predicates, see Predicate Programming Guide . Other useful methods for flexibility in scrolling include scrollToElementWithName and scrollToElementWithValueForKey. See UIAScrollView Class Reference for more information. Adding Timing Flexibility with Timeout Periods Your script may need to wait for some action to complete. In the Recipes app, for example, the user taps the Recipes tab to return from the Unit Conversion screen to the Recipes screen. However, UI Automation may detect the existence of the Add button, enabling the test script to attempt to tap it—before the button is actually drawn and the app is actually ready to accept that tap. An accurate test must ensure that the Recipes screen is completely drawn and that the app is ready to accept user interaction with the controls within that screen before proceeding. To provide some flexibility in such cases and to give you finer control over timing, UI Automation provides for a timeout period, a period during which it will repeatedly attempt to perform the specified action before failing. If the action completes during the timeout period, that line of code returns, and your script can proceed. If the action doesn’t complete during the timeout period, an exception is thrown. The default timeout period is five seconds, but your script can change that at any time. To make this feature as easy as possible to use, UI Automation uses a stack model. You push a custom timeout period to the top of the stack, as with the following code that shortens the timeout period to two seconds. Automating UI Testing Adding Timing Flexibility with Timeout Periods 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 86UIATarget.localTarget().pushTimeout(2); You then run the code to perform the action and pop the custom timeout off the stack. UIATarget.localTarget().popTimeout(); Using this approach you end up with a robust script, waiting a reasonable amount of time for something to happen. Note: Although using explicit delays is typically not encouraged, it may be necessary on occasion. The following code shows how you specify a delay of 2 seconds: UIATarget.localTarget().delay(2); Logging Test Results and Data Your script reports log information to the Automation instrument, which gathers it and reports it for your analysis. When writing your tests, you should log as much information as you can, if just to help you diagnose any failures that occur. At a bare minimum, you should log when each test begins and ends, identifying the test performed and recording pass/fail status. This kind of minimal logging is almost automatic in UI Automation. You simply call logStart with the name of your test, run your test, then call logPass or logFail as appropriate, as shown in the following example. var testName = "Module 001 Test"; UIALogger.logStart(testName); //some test code UIALogger.logPass(testName); But it’s a good practice to log what transpires whenever your script interacts with a control. Whether you’re validating that parts of your app perform properly or you’re still tracking down bugs, it’s hard to imagine having too much log information to analyze. To this end, you can log just about any occurrence using logMessage, and you can even supplement the textual data with screenshots. The following code example expands the logging of the previous example to include a free-form log message and a screenshot. var testName = "Module 001 Test"; UIALogger.logStart(testName); Automating UI Testing Logging Test Results and Data 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 87//some test code UIALogger.logMessage("Starting Module 001 branch 2, validating input."); //capture a screenshot with a specified name UIATarget.localTarget().captureScreenWithName("SS001-2_AddedIngredient"); //more test code UIALogger.logPass(testName); The screenshot requested in the example would be saved back in Instruments with the specified filename (SS001-2_AddedIngredient, in this case). Note: Screenshots are currently not supported when targeting iOS Simulator. A screenshot capture attempt is, however, indicated by a log message indicating a failed attempt. Verifying Test Results The crux of testing is being able to verify that each test has been performed and that it has either passed or failed. This code example runsthe test testName to determine whether a valid element recipe element whose name starts with “Tarte” exists in the recipe table view. First, a local variable is used to specify the cell criteria: var cell = UIATarget.localTarget().frontMostApp().mainWindow().tableViews()[0].cells() .firstWithPredicate("name beginswith ‘Tarte’"); Next, the script uses the isValid method to test whether a valid element matching those criteria exists in the recipe table view. if (cell.isValid()) { UIALogger.logPass(testName); } else { UIALogger.logFail(testName); } If a valid cell is found, the code logs a pass message for the testName test; if not, it logs a failure message. Automating UI Testing Verifying Test Results 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 88Note that this test specifies firstWithPredicate and "name beginsWith 'Tarte'". These criteria yield a reference to the cell for Tarte aux Fraises, which works for the default data already in the Recipes sample app. If, however, a user adds a recipe for Tarte aux Framboises, this example may or may not give the desired results. Handling Alerts In addition to verifying that your app’s alerts perform properly, your test should accommodate alerts that appear unexpectedly from outside your app. For example, it’s not unusual to get a text message while checking the weather or playing a game. Even worse, a telemarketing autodialer could pick the number for your phone just as you launch your script. Handling Externally Generated Alerts Although it may seem somewhat paradoxical, your app and your tests should expect that unexpected alerts will occur whenever your app is running. Fortunately, UI Automation includes a default alert handler that renders external alerts very easy for your script to cope with. Your script provides an alert handler function called onAlert, which is called when the alert has occurred, at which time it can take any appropriate action, and then then simply return the alert to the default handler for dismissal. The following code example illustrates a very simple alert case. UIATarget.onAlert = function onAlert(alert) { var title = alert.name(); UIALogger.logWarning("Alert with title '" + title + "' encountered."); // return false to use the default handler return false; } All this handler does is to log a message that this type of alert happened and then return False. Returning false directs the UI Automation default alert handler to just dismiss the alert. In the case of an alert for a received text message, for example, UI Automation simply clicks the Close button. Automating UI Testing Handling Alerts 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 89Note: The default handler stops dismissing alerts after reaching an upper limit of sequential alerts. In the unlikely case that your test reaches this limit, you should investigate possible problems with your testing environment and procedures. Handling Internally Generated Alerts As part of your app, you will have alerts that you do need to handle. In those instances, your alert handler will need to perform the appropriate response and return True to the default handler, indicating that the alert has been handled. The following code example expands slightly on the basic alert handler. After logging the alert type, it tests whether the alert is the specific one that’s anticipated. If so, it taps the Continue button, which is known to exist, and returns True to skip the default dismissal action. UIATarget.onAlert = function onAlert(alert) { var title = alert.name(); UIALogger.logWarning("Alert with title '" + title + "' encountered."); if (title == "The Alert We Expected") { alert.buttons()["Continue"].tap(); return true; //alert handled, so bypass the default handler } // return false to use the default handler return false; } This basic alert handler, as simple as it is, can be generalized to respond to just about any alert received, while allowing your script to continue running. Detecting and Specifying Device Orientation A well-behaved iOS app is expected to handle changes in device orientation gracefully, so your script should anticipate and test for such changes. Automating UI Testing Detecting and Specifying Device Orientation 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 90UI Automation provides setDeviceOrientation to simulate a change in the device orientation. This method uses the constants listed in Table 12-1. Note: As regards device orientation handling, it bears repeating that the functionality is entirely simulated in software. Hardware features such as raw accelerometer data are both unavailable to this UI Automation feature and unaffected by it. Table 12-1 Device orientation constants Orientation constant Description The orientation of the device cannot be determined. UIA_DEVICE_ORIENTATION_UNKNOWN The device is in portrait mode, with the device upright and the home button at the bottom. UIA_DEVICE_ORIENTATION_PORTRAIT The device is in portrait mode but upside down, with the device upright and the home button at the top. UIA_DEVICE_ORIENTATION_PORTRAIT_UPSIDEDOWN The device is in landscape mode, with the device upright and the home button on the right side. UIA_DEVICE_ORIENTATION_LANDSCAPELEFT The device is in landscape mode, with the device upright and the home button on the left side. UIA_DEVICE_ORIENTATION_LANDSCAPERIGHT The device is parallel to the ground with the screen facing upward. UIA_DEVICE_ORIENTATION_FACEUP The device is parallel to the ground with the screen facing downward. UIA_DEVICE_ORIENTATION_FACEDOWN In contrast to device orientation is interface orientation, which represents the rotation required to keep your app's interface oriented properly upon device rotation. Note that in landscape mode, device orientation and interface orientation are opposite, because rotating the device requires rotating the content in the opposite direction. UI Automation provides the interfaceOrientation method to get the current interface orientation. This method uses the constants listed in Table 12-2. Automating UI Testing Detecting and Specifying Device Orientation 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 91Table 12-2 Interface orientation constants Orientation constant Description The interface isin portrait mode, with the bottom closest to the home button. UIA_INTERFACE_ORIENTATION_PORTRAIT The interface is in portrait mode but upside down, with the top closest to the home button. UIA_INTERFACE_ORIENTATION_PORTRAIT_UPSIDEDOWN The interface is in landscape mode, with the left side closest to the home button. UIA_INTERFACE_ORIENTATION_LANDSCAPELEFT The interface is in landscape mode, with the rightside closest to the home button. UIA_INTERFACE_ORIENTATION_LANDSCAPERIGHT The following example changes the device orientation (in this case, to landscape left), then changes it back (to portrait). var target = UIATarget.localTarget(); var app = target.frontMostApp(); //set orientation to landscape left target.setDeviceOrientation(UIA_DEVICE_ORIENTATION_LANDSCAPELEFT); UIALogger.logMessage("Current orientation now " + app.interfaceOrientation()); //reset orientation to portrait target.setDeviceOrientation(UIA_DEVICE_ORIENTATION_PORTRAIT); UIALogger.logMessage("Current orientation now " + app.interfaceOrientation()); Of course, once you've rotated, you do need to rotate back again. When doing a test that involves changing the orientation of the device, it is a good practice to set the rotation at the beginning of the test, then set it back to the original rotation at the end of your test. This practice ensures that your script is always back in a known state. You may have noticed the orientation logging in the example. Such logging provides additional assurance that your tests—and your testers—don’t become disoriented. Automating UI Testing Detecting and Specifying Device Orientation 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 92Testing for Multitasking When a user exits your app by tapping the Home button or causing some other app to come to the foreground, your app issuspended. To simulate this occurrence, UI Automation providesthe deactivateAppForDuration method. You just call this method, specifying a duration, in seconds, for which your app is to be suspended, as illustrated by the following example. UIATarget.localTarget().deactivateAppForDuration(10); This single line of code causes the app to be deactivated for 10 seconds, just as though a user had exited the app and returned to it ten seconds later. Automating UI Testing Testing for Multitasking 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 93You’ve learned that Instruments has built-in instruments that provide a great deal of information about the inner workings of your app. Sometimes, though, you may want to tailor the information being gathered more closely to your own code. For example, instead of gathering data every time a function is called, you might want to set conditions on when data is gathered. Alternatively, you might want to dig deeper into your own code than the built-in instruments allow. For these situations, Instruments lets you create custom instruments. Whenever possible, it isrecommended that you use an existing instrument instead of creating a new instrument. Creating custom instruments is an advanced feature. The following sections show you how to create a custom instrument and how to use that instrument both with the Instruments app and with the dtrace command-line tool. About Custom Instruments Custom instruments use DTrace for their implementation. DTrace is a dynamic tracing facility originally created by Sun and ported to OS X v10.5. Because DTrace taps into the operating system kernel, you have access to low-level operation about the kernel itself and about the user processes running on your computer. Many of the built-in instruments are already based on DTrace. And even though DTrace is itself a very powerful and complex tool, Instruments provides a simple interface that gives you access to the power of DTrace without the complexity. DTrace has not been ported to iOS, so it is not possible to create a custom instrument for devices running iOS. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 94 Creating Custom InstrumentsImportant: Although the custom instrument builder simplifies the process of creating DTrace probes, you should still be familiar with DTrace and how it works before creating new instruments. Many of the more powerful debugging and data gathering actions require you to write DTrace scripts. To learn about DTrace and theDscripting language,see the SolarisDynamic TracingGuide , available fromtheOpenSolaris website. For information about the dtrace command-line tool, see the dtrace man page. Note: Several Apple apps—namely, iTunes, DVD Player, Front Row, and apps that use QuickTime—prevent the collection of data through DTrace (either temporarily or permanently) in order to protectsensitive data. Therefore, you should not run those apps when performing systemwide data collection. Custom instruments are built using DTrace probes. A probe is like a sensor that you place in your code. It correspondsto a location or event,such as a function entry point, to which DTrace can bind. When the function executes or the event is generated, the associated probe fires and DTrace runs whatever actions are associated with the probe. Most DTrace actions simply collect data about the operating system and user app behavior at that moment. It is possible, however, to run custom scripts as part of an action. Scripts let you use the features of DTrace to fine tune the data you gather. Probes fire each time they are encountered, but the action associated with the probe need not be run every time the probe fires. A predicate is a conditional statement that lets you restrict when the probe’s action is run. For example, you can restrict a probe to a specific process or user, or you can run the action when a specific condition in your instrument istrue. By default, probes do not have any predicates, meaning that the associated action runs every time the probe fires. You can add any number of predicates to a probe, however, and link them together using AND and OR operators to create complex decision trees. An instrument consists of the following blocks: ● A description block, containing the name, category, and description of the instrument ● One or more probes, each containing its associated actions and predicates ● A DATA declaration area, for declaring global variables shared by all probes ● A BEGIN script, which initializes any global variables and performs any startup tasks required by the instrument ● An END script, which performs any final cleanup actions All instruments must have at least one probe with its associated actions. Similarly, all instruments should have an appropriate name and description to identify them to Instruments users. Instruments displays your instrument’s descriptive information in the library window. Providing good information makes it easier to remember what the instrument does and how it should be used. Creating Custom Instruments About Custom Instruments 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 95Probes are not required to have global DATA or BEGIN and END scripts. Those elements are used in advanced instrument design when you want to share data among probes or provide some sort of initial configuration for your instrument. The creation of DATA, BEGIN, and END blocks is described in “Tips for Writing Custom Scripts” (page 104). Creating a Custom Instrument To create a custom DTrace instrument, select Instrument > Build New Instrument. This command displays the instrument configuration sheet,shown in Figure 13-1. You use thissheet to specify your instrument information, including any probes and custom scripts. Figure 13-1 The instrument configuration sheet At a minimum, you should provide the following information for every instrument you create: ● Name. The name associated with your custom instrument in the library. ● Category. The category in which your instrument appears in the library. You can specify the name of an existing category—such as Memory—or create your own. Creating Custom Instruments Creating a Custom Instrument 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 96● Description. The instrument description, used in both the library window and in the instrument’s help tag. ● Probe provider. The probe type and the details of when it should fire. Typically, this involves specifying the method or function to which the probe applies. For more information, see “Specifying the Probe Provider” (page 97). ● Probe action. The data to record or the script to execute when your probe fires; see “Adding Actions to a Probe” (page 102). An instrumentshould contain at least one probe and may contain more than one. The probe definition consists of the provider information, predicate information, and action. All probes mustspecify the provider information at a minimum, and nearly all probes define some sort of action. The predicate portion of a probe definition is optional but can be a very useful tool for focusing your instrument on the correct data. Adding and Deleting Probes Every new instrument comes with one probe that you can configure. To add more probes, click the plus (+) button at the bottom of the instrument configuration dialog. To remove a probe from your instrument, click the probe to select it and click the minus (-) button at the bottom of the instrument configuration dialog. When adding probes, it is a good idea to provide a descriptive name for the probe. By default, Instruments enumerates probes with names like Probe 1 and Probe 2. Specifying the Probe Provider To specify the location point or event that triggers a probe, you must associate the appropriate provider with the probe. Providers are kernel modulesthat act as agentsfor DTrace, providing the instrumentation necessary to create probes. You do not need to know how providers operate to create an instrument, but you do need to know the basic capabilities of each provider. Table 13-1 lists the providers that are supported by the Instruments app and available for use in your custom instruments. The Provider column liststhe name displayed in the instrument configuration sheet, and the DTrace provider column lists the actual name of the provider used in the corresponding DTrace script. Table 13-1 DTrace providers DTrace Description provider Provider The probe fires on entry (or return) of the specified function in your code. You must provide the function name and the name of the library that contains it. User Process pid Creating Custom Instruments Creating a Custom Instrument 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 97DTrace Description provider Provider The probe fires on entry (or return) of the specified Objective-C method. You must provide the method name and the class to which it belongs. Objective-C objc The probe fires on entry (or return) of the specified system library function. System Call syscall The probe fires when DTrace itself enters a BEGIN, END, or ERROR block. DTrace DTrace The probe fires on entry (or return) of the specified kernel function in your code. You must provide the kernel function name and the name of the library that contains it. Kernel Function fbt Boundaries The probe fires on entry (or return) of the specified Mach library function. Mach mach_trap The probe fires regularly at the specified time interval on each core of the machine. Profile probes can fire with a granularity that ranges from microseconds to days. Profile profile The probe fires at periodic intervals on one core of the machine. Tick probes can fire with a granularity that ranges from microseconds to days. You might use this provider to perform periodic tasks that are not required to be on a particular core. Tick tick The probe fires at the start of the specified kernel routine. For a list of functions monitored by this probe, use the dtrace -l command from Terminal to get a list of probe points. You can then search this list for probes monitored by the io module. I/O io The probe fires on the initiation of one of several kernel-level routines. For a list of functions monitored by this probe, use the dtrace -l command from Terminal to get a list of probe points. You can then search thislist for functions monitored by the proc module. Kernel Process proc The probe fires at one of several synchronization points. You can use this provider to monitor mutex and read-write lock events. User-Level plockstat Synchronization CPU Scheduling sched The probe fires when CPU scheduling events occur. Creating Custom Instruments Creating a Custom Instrument 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 98DTrace Description provider Provider The probe fires at one of several Core Data–specific events. For a list of methods monitored by this probe, use the dtrace -l command from Terminal to get a list of probe points. You can then search this list for methods monitored by the CoreData module. Core Data CoreData After selecting the provider for your probe, you need to specify the information needed by the probe. For example, forsome function-level probes, providers may need function or method names, along with your code module or else the class containing your module. Other providers may only need you to select appropriate events from a pop-up menu. After you have configured a probe, you can proceed to add additional predicates to it (to determine when it should fire) or you can go ahead and define the action for that probe. Adding Predicates to a Probe Predicates give you control over when a probe’s action is executed by Instruments. You can use predicates to prevent Instruments from gathering data when you don’t want it or think the data might be erroneous. For example, if your code exhibits unusual behavior only when the stack reaches a certain depth, you can use a predicate to specify the minimum target stack depth. Every time a probe fires, Instruments evaluates the associated predicates. Only if they evaluate to true does DTrace perform the associated actions. To add a predicate to a probe 1. Click the plus (+) button. 2. Select the type of predicate. 3. Define the predicate values. Figure 13-2 Adding a predicate Probe point Predicate You can add subsequent predicates using the plus buttons of either the probe or the predicate. To remove a predicate, click the minus button next to the predicate. To rearrange predicates, click the predicate line and drag it to a new location. Creating Custom Instruments Creating a Custom Instrument 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 99Instruments evaluates predicatesfrom top to bottom in the order in which they appear. You can link predicates using AND and OR operators, but you cannot group them to create nested condition blocks. Instead, order your predicates carefully to ensure that all of the appropriate conditions are checked. Use the first pop-up menu in a predicate line to choose the data to inspect as part of the condition. Table 13-2 lists the standard variables defined by DTrace that you can use in your predicates or script code. The Variable column lists the name as it appears in the instrument configuration panel, and the “DTrace variable” column lists the actual name of the variable used in corresponding DTrace scripts. In addition to testing the standard variables, you can test against custom variables and constants from your script code by specifying the Custom variable type in the predicate field. Table 13-2 DTrace variables Variable DTrace variable Description The value of the current thread’s program counter just before entering the probe. This variable contains an integer value. Caller caller The identifier for the physical chip executing the probe. This is a 0-based integer indicating the index of the current core. For example, a four-core machine has cores 0 through 3. Chip chip The identifier for the CPU executing the probe. This is a 0-based integer indicating the index of the current core. For example, a four-core machine has cores 0 through 3. CPU cpu The current working directory of the current process. This variable contains a string value. Current cwd Working Directory The error value returned by the last system call made on the current thread. This variable contains an integer value. Last Error # errno The name that was passed to exec to execute the current process. This variable contains a string value. Executable execname The real user ID of the current process. This variable contains an integer value. User ID uid The real group ID of the current process. This variable contains an integer value. Group ID gid Creating Custom Instruments Creating a Custom Instrument 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 100Variable DTrace variable Description The process ID of the current process. This variable contains an integer value. Process ID pid The process ID of the parent process. This variable contains an integer value. Parent ID ppid The thread ID of the current thread. This is the same value returned by the pthread_self function. Thread ID tid The interrupt priority level on the current CPU at the time the probe fired. This variable contains an unsigned integer value. Interrupt ipl Priority Level The function name part of the probe’s description. This variable contains a string value. Function probefunc The module name part of the probe’s description. This variable contains a string value. Module probemod The name portion of the probe’s description. This variable contains a string value. Name probename The provider name part of the probe’s description. This variable contains a string value. Provider probeprov The root directory of the process. This variable contains a string value. Root root Directory The stack frame depth of the current thread at the time the thread fired. This variable contains an unsigned integer value. Stack Depth stackdepth The current value of the system’s timestamp counter, in nanoseconds. Because this counter increments from an arbitrary point in the past, use it to calculate only relative time differences. This variable contains an unsigned 64-bit integer value. Relative timestamp Timestamp The amount of time the current thread has been running, in nanoseconds. This value does not include time spent in DTrace predicates and actions. This variable contains an unsigned 64-bit integer value. Virtual vtimestamp Timestamp The current number of nanoseconds that have elapsed since 00:00 Universal coordinated Time,January 1, 1970. This variable contains an unsigned 64-bit integer value. Timestamp walltimestamp/1000 Creating Custom Instruments Creating a Custom Instrument 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 101Variable DTrace variable Description The first 10 arguments to the probe, represented as raw 64-bit integers. If fewer than ten arguments were passed to the probe, the remaining variables contain the value 0. arg0 through arg0 through arg9 arg9 Use this option to specify a variable or constant from one of your scripts. The name of your variable Custom In addition to specifying the condition variable, you must specify the comparison operator and the target value. Adding Actions to a Probe When a probe point defined by your instrument is hit and the probe’s predicate conditions evaluate to true, DTrace runs the actions associated with the probe. You use your probe’s actions to gather data or to perform some additional processing. For example, if your probe monitors a specific function or method, you could have it return the caller of that function and any stack trace information to Instruments. If you wanted a slightly more advanced action, you could use a script variable to track the number of times the function was called and report that information as well. And if you wanted an even more advanced action, you could write a script that uses kernel-level DTrace functions to determine the status of a lock used by your function. In this latter case, your script code might also return the current owner of the lock (if there is one) to help you determine the interactions among your code’s different threads. Figure 13-3 shows the portion of the instrument configuration sheet where you specify your probe’s actions. The script portion simply contains a text field for you to type in yourscript code. (Instruments does not validate your code before passing it to DTrace, so check your code carefully.) The bottom section contains controls for specifying the data you want DTrace to return to Instruments. You can use the pop-up menus to configure the built-in DTrace variables you want to return. You can also select Custom from this pop-up menu and return one of your script variables. Figure 13-3 Configuring a probe’s action Creating Custom Instruments Creating a Custom Instrument 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 102When you configure your instrument to return a custom variable, Instruments asks you to provide the following information: ● The script variable containing the data ● The name to apply to the variable in your instrument interface ● The type of the variable Any data your probe returns to Instruments is collected and displayed in your instrument’s Detail pane. The Detail pane displays all data variables regardless of type. If stack trace information is available for a specific probe, Instruments displaysthat information in your instrument’s Extended Detail pane. In addition, Instruments automatically looks for integer data types returned by your instrument and adds those types to the list of statistics your instrument can display in the track pane. Because DTrace scripts run in kernel space and the Instruments app runs in user space, if you want to return the value of a custom pointer-based script variable to Instruments, you must create a buffer to hold the variable’s data. The simplest way to create a buffer is to use the copyin or copyinstr subroutines found in DTrace. The copyinstr subroutine takes a pointer to a C string and returns the contents of the string in a form you can return to Instruments. Similarly, the copyin subroutine takes a pointer and size value and returns a buffer to the data, which you can later format into a string using the stringof keyword. Both of these subroutines are part of the DTrace environment and can be used from any part of your probe’s action definition. For example, to return the string from a C-style string pointer, you simply wrap the variable name with the copyinstr subroutine, as shown in Figure 13-4. Figure 13-4 Returning a string pointer Important: Instruments automatically wraps built-in variables (such as the arg0 through arg9 function arguments) with a call to copyinstr if the variable type isset to string. Instruments does not automatically wrap script’s custom variables, however. You are responsible for ensuring that the data in a custom variable actually matches the type specified for that variable. For a list of the built-in variables supported by Instruments, see Table 13-2 (page 100). For more information on scripts and script variables,see “Tipsfor Writing Custom Scripts” (page 104). For more information on DTrace subroutines, including the copyin and copyinstr subroutines, see the Solaris Dynamic Tracing Guide , available from the OpenSolaris website. Creating Custom Instruments Creating a Custom Instrument 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 103Tips for Writing Custom Scripts You write DTrace scripts using the D scripting language, whose syntax is derived from a large subset of the C programming language. The D language combines the programming constructs of the C language with a special set of functions and variables to help you trace information in your app. The following sections describe some of the common ways to use scripts in your custom instruments. These sections do not provide a comprehensive overview of the D language or the process for writing DTrace scripts. For information about scripting and the D language, see the Solaris Dynamic Tracing Guide , available on the OpenSolaris website. Writing BEGIN and END Scripts If you want to do more than return the information in DTrace’s built-in variables to Instruments whenever your action fires, you need to write custom scripts. Scripts interact directly with DTrace at the kernel level, providing accessto low-level information about the kernel and the active process. Most instruments use scriptsto gather information not readily available from DTrace. You can also use scriptsto manipulate raw data before returning it to Instruments. For example, you can use a script to normalize a data value to a specific range if you want to make it easier to compare that value graphically with other values in your instrument’s track pane. In Instruments, the custom instrument configuration sheet provides several areas where you can write DTrace scripts: ● The DATA section contains definitions of any global variables you want to use in your instrument. ● The BEGIN section contains any initialization code for your instrument. ● Each probe contains script code as part of its action. ● The END section contains any clean up code for your instrument. All script sections are optional. You are not required to have initialization scripts or cleanup scripts if your instrument does not need them. If your instrument defines global variables in its DATA section, however, it is recommended that you also provide an initialization script to set those variables to a known value. The D language does not allow you to assign values inline with your global variable declarations, so you must put those assignmentsin your BEGIN section. For example, a simple DATA section might consist of a single variable declaration, such as the following: int myVariable; The corresponding BEGIN section would then contain the following code to initialize that variable: Creating Custom Instruments Tips for Writing Custom Scripts 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 104myVariable = 0; If your corresponding probe actions change the value of myVariable, you might use the END section of your probe to format and print out the final value of the variable. Most of yourscript code islikely to be associated with individual probes. Each probe can have a script associated with its action. When it comes time to execute a probe’s action, DTrace runs your script code first and then returns any requested data back to Instruments. Because passing data back to Instruments involves copying data from the kernelspace back to the Instruments app space, you should always pass data back to Instruments by configuring the appropriate entriesin the “Record the following data:“section of the instrument configuration sheet. Variables returned manually from your script code may not be returned correctly to Instruments. Accessing Kernel Data from Custom Scripts Because DTrace scripts execute inside the system kernel, they have access to kernel symbols. If you want to look at global kernel variables and data structures from your custom instruments, you can do so in your DTrace scripts. To access a kernel variable, precede the name of the variable with the backquote character (`). The backquote character tells DTrace to look for the specified variable outside of the current script. Listing 13-1 shows a sample action script that retrieves the current load information from the avenrun kernel variable and uses that variable to calculate a one-minute average load of the system. If you were to create a probe using the Profile provider, you could have this script gather load data periodically and then graph that information in Instruments. Listing 13-1 Accessing kernel variables from a DTrace script this->load1a = `avenrun[0]/1000; this->load1b = ((`avenrun[0] % 1000) * 100) / 1000; this->load1 = (100 * this->load1a) + this->load1b; Scoping Variables Appropriately DTrace scripts have an essentially flat structure, due to a lack of flow control statements and the desire to keep probe execution time to a minimum. That said, you can scope the variables in DTrace scripts to different levels depending on your need. Table 13-3 lists the scoping levels for variables and the syntax for using variables at each level. Creating Custom Instruments Tips for Writing Custom Scripts 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 105Table 13-3 Variable scope in DTrace scripts Scope Syntax example Description Global variables are identified simply using the variable name. All probe actions on all system threads have access to variables in this space. Global myGlobal = 1; Thread-local variables are dereferenced from the self keyword. All probe actions running on the same thread have access to variables in this space. You might use this scope to collect data over the course ofseveral runs of a probe’s action on the current thread. self->myThreadVar = 1; Thread Probe-local variables are dereferenced using the this keyword. Only the current running probe has access to variables in this space. Typically, you use thisscope to define temporary variables that you want the kernel to clean up when the current action ends. this->myLocalVar = 1; Probe Finding Script Errors If the script code for one of your custom instruments contains an error, Instruments displays an error message in the track pane when DTrace compiles the script. Instruments reports the error after you press the Record button in your trace document but before tracing actually begins. Inside the error message bubble is an Edit button. Clicking this button opens the instrument configuration sheet, which now identifies the probe with the error. Exporting DTrace Scripts Although Instruments provides a convenient interface for gathering trace data, there are still times when it is more convenient to gather trace data directly using DTrace. If you are a system administrator or are writing automated test scripts, for example, you might prefer to use the DTrace command-line interface to launch a process and gather the data. Using the command-line tool requires you to write your own DTrace scripts, which can be time consuming and can lead to errors. If you already have a trace document with one or more DTrace-based instruments, you can use the Instruments app to generate a DTrace script that provides the same behavior as the instruments in your trace document. Instruments supports exporting DTrace scripts only for documents where all of the instruments are based on DTrace. This means that your document can include custom instruments and a handful of the built-in instruments, such as the instruments in the File System and CoreData groups in the Library window. For information about whether an instrumentisDTrace-based,referto thatinstrumentin Instruments User Reference . Creating Custom Instruments Exporting DTrace Scripts 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 106To export a DTrace script 1. Select the trace document. 2. Click File > DTrace Script Export. 3. Enter a name for the DTrace script. 4. Select a location for the DTrace script. 5. Click Save. The DTrace Script Export command places the script commands for your instruments in a text file that you can then pass to the dtrace command-line tool using the -s option. For example, if you export a script named MyInstrumentsScript.d, run it from Terminal using the following command: sudo dtrace -s MyInstrumentsScript.d Note: You must have superuser privileges to run dtrace in most instances, which is why the sudo command is used to run dtrace in the preceding example. Another advantage of exporting your scripts from Instruments (as opposed to writing them manually) is that after running the script, you can import the resulting data back into Instruments and review it there. Scripts exported from Instruments print a start marker (with the text dtrace_output_begin) at the beginning of the DTrace output. To gather the data, simply copy all of the DTrace output (including the start marker) from Terminal and paste it into a text file, or just redirect the output from the dtrace tool directly to a file. To import the data in Instruments, select the trace document from which you generated the original script and choose File > DTrace Data Import. Creating Custom Instruments Exporting DTrace Scripts 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 107This table describes the changes to Instruments User Guide . Date Notes 2012-09-19 Added a chapter on using the Automation instrument. 2012-06-11 Updated the document for version 4.3 and based the document on tasks. 2012-03-02 Updated information on finding Instruments and Xcode. 2011-05-07 Added information about the OpenGL ES Analyzer instrument. 2010-11-15 Updated to add information about using the Automation instrument. 2010-09-01 Updated to describe new features. 2010-07-09 Changed occurrences of “iPhone OS” to “iOS”. 2010-05-27 Updated with information about new iPhone instruments. 2010-01-20 Added information about iPhone-specific instruments. 2009-08-20 Added information about the Dispatch instrument. Added information about gathering performance data from a wireless device. 2009-07-24 2008-10-15 Made minor editorial corrections. Explained how playing protected content affects systemwide data collection. 2008-02-08 2007-10-31 New document that describes how to use the Instruments application. 2012-09-19 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved. 108 Document Revision HistoryApple Inc. © 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of Apple Inc., with the following exceptions: Any person is hereby authorized to store documentation on a single computer for personal use only and to print copies of documentation for personal use provided that the documentation contains Apple’s copyright notice. No licenses, express or implied, are granted with respect to any of the technology described in this document. Apple retains all intellectual property rights associated with the technology described in this document. This document is intended to assist application developers to develop applications only for Apple-labeled computers. Apple Inc. 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014 408-996-1010 Apple, the Apple logo, Bonjour, Cocoa, Instruments, iPhone, iTunes, Mac, Objective-C, OS X, QuickTime, and Xcode are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store and Mac App Store are service marks of Apple Inc. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. OpenGL is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. Times is a registered trademark of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG, available from Linotype Library GmbH. iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. Even though Apple has reviewed this document, APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENT, ITS QUALITY, ACCURACY, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.ASARESULT, THISDOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” AND YOU, THE READER, ARE ASSUMING THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND ACCURACY. IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT OR INACCURACY IN THIS DOCUMENT, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. THE WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. No Apple dealer, agent, or employee is authorized to make any modification, extension, or addition to this warranty. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. Logic Pro 9 TDM GuideCopyright © 2009 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying software license agreement. The owner or authorized user of a valid copy of Logic Studio software may reproduce this publication for the purpose of learning to use such software. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted for commercial purposes, such as selling copies of this publication or for providing paid for support services. The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Shift-Option-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. Note: Because Apple frequently releases new versions and updates to its system software, applications, and Internet sites, images shown in this manual may be slightly different from what you see on your screen. Apple 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014 408-996-1010 www.apple.com Apple, the Apple logo, FireWire, Logic, Logic Studio, MainStage, QuickTime, and WaveBurner are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Other company and product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products.Preface 5 An Introduction to Using TDM Hardware in Logic Pro 5 About Logic Pro TDM Support 6 About the Logic Pro Documentation 6 Additional Resources Chapter 1 9 TDM Audio Hardware and Drivers 9 Choosing a DAE or Direct TDM Device 9 DAE Settings 11 Direct TDM Settings Chapter 2 13 About TDM 13 How TDM Differs from Native Processing 14 TDM Plug-ins 15 Using TDM-Specific Functions 15 Simultaneous Use of TDM and Other Hardware Chapter 3 17 ESB TDM and EXS24 TDM 17 About the ESB TDM and EXS24 TDM Plug-ins 18 Using EXS24 TDM 19 Using ESB TDM Chapter 4 23 Logic Pro TDM Usage Tips and Tricks 23 Importing Native Projects into a TDM System 24 System Performance and TDM DSP Usage 25 DAE and Direct TDM Bounce Strategies 3 ContentsEarlier Digital Audio Workstations (DAWs) took one of two approaches to audio signal processing: The use of dedicated hardware DSPs (such as in TDM systems), or the native processing capabilities of the computer CPU. Logic Pro enables you to use both your TDM system DSPs and the computer’s native CPU processing resources. The link between the DSP world of your TDM system, and your computer’s native CPU processing resources is ESB TDM. This preface covers the following: • About Logic Pro TDM Support (p. 5) • About the Logic Pro Documentation (p. 6) • Additional Resources (p. 6) About Logic Pro TDM Support Logic Pro provides access to many of the TDM functions supported by Pro Tools HD systems. Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) is the time-interlaced transmission of multiple digital audio signals (or streams) through a single data bus. This bus system is physically isolated from the computer system bus, and runs between individual TDM-capable cards. Up to 512 digital audio channels, each with 24-bit resolution, can be transmitted on the TDM bus. These streams form signal paths within a virtual mixer. These signal paths are necessary for the insertion of plug-ins, which are calculated on the DSP hardware, and routed into the individual channels, or are selected through auxiliary busses. 5 An Introduction to Using TDM Hardware in Logic Pro PrefaceAbout the Logic Pro Documentation Logic Pro comes with various documents that will help you get started as well as provide detailed information about the application. • Logic Pro User Manual: The onscreen user manual is a comprehensive document that describes the Logic Pro interface, commands, and menus and gives step-by-step instructions for creating Logic Pro projects and for accomplishing specific tasks. It is written for users of all levels of experience. The user manual is available in Logic Pro Help (in Logic Pro, choose Help > Logic Pro). • Exploring Logic Pro: This booklet presents the basics of Logic Pro in an easy, approachable way. Each chapter presents major features and guides you in trying things out. A PDF version of the printed manual is available in Logic Pro Help. You can also open the PDF directly in Logic Pro by choosing Help > Exploring Logic Pro). • Logic Pro Control Surfaces Support: This onscreen manual describes the configuration and use of control surfaces with Logic Pro. • Logic Pro TDM Guide: This onscreen manual describes the essential aspects of using TDM in Logic Pro. • Logic Studio Instruments: This onscreen manual provides comprehensive instructions for using the powerful collection of instruments included with Logic Pro and MainStage. • Logic Studio Effects: This onscreen manual provides comprehensive instructions for using the powerful collection of effects included with Logic Pro, MainStage, and WaveBurner. • Logic Studio Working with Apogee Hardware: This onscreen manual describes the use of Apogee hardware with Logic Pro. Additional Resources Along with the documentation that comes with Logic Studio, there are a variety of other resources you can use to find out more. Release Notes and New Features Documents Each application offers detailed documentation that covers new or changed features and functions. This documentation can be accessed in the following location: • Click the Release Notes and New Features links in the application Help menu. Logic Pro Website For general information and updates, as well as the latest news on Logic Pro, go to: • http://www.apple.com/logicstudio/logicpro 6 Preface An Introduction to Using TDM Hardware in Logic ProApple Service and Support Websites For software updates and answers to the most frequently asked questions for all Apple products, go to the general Apple Support webpage. You’ll also have access to product specifications, reference documentation, and Apple and third-party product technical articles. • http://www.apple.com/support For software updates, documentation, discussion forums, and answers to the most frequently asked questions for Logic Pro, go to: • http://www.apple.com/support/logicpro For discussion forums for all Apple products from around the world, where you can search for an answer, post your question, or answer other users’ questions, go to: • http://discussions.apple.com Preface An Introduction to Using TDM Hardware in Logic Pro 7To use Logic Pro with your TDM system, you require Pro Tools HD 7.4 or later. This chapter covers the following: • Choosing a DAE or Direct TDM Device (p. 9) • DAE Settings (p. 9) • Direct TDM Settings (p. 11) Choosing a DAE or Direct TDM Device Selecting and activating a particular audio hardware device is done in the Logic Pro > Preferences > Audio > Devices pane. You can choose between the Core Audio, DAE, and Direct TDM tabs. • Core Audio: The Core Audio tab is used to activate and adjust audio hardware devices that use Core Audio drivers. Full details on Core Audio device settings are found in the Logic Pro User Manual. • DAE: DAE is the abbreviated form of Digidesign Audio Engine. This is the driver software used to access TDM hardware—including use of on-board DSP chips—in Logic Pro. • Direct TDM: The Direct TDM audio engine of Logic Pro is used to process the DTDM Mixer—which you can route into the (aux channel strip) inputs of the TDM Mixer. This allows use of your computer’s CPUs to process Logic Studio and Audio Units instruments and effects, while also using the DAE. DAE Settings DAE parameters can only be set after activating the DAE. Click the Enabled checkbox at the top left of the DAE tab to access to the following parameters: 9 TDM Audio Hardware and Drivers 1Note: You need to restart Logic Pro to activate the DAE. • Global Bit Depth pop-up menu: Choose between 16-bit or 24-bit playback and recording. Note: DAE does not allow the use of 16- and 24-bit files simultaneously. • PT HD Type pop-up menu: Defines the number of tracks for your Pro Tools HD system. Each menu item allows you to define the required number of tracks, based on the number of Pro Tools HD DSPs that you want to use (and actually have) in your system. • “TDM setup indicator” checkbox: Enables or disables the display of a small status window that shows the current TDM process (inserting a TDM plug-in, for example). • Pass Keyboard Events to Plug-ins pop-up menu: Computer keyboard events (keystrokes) that are not used by a plug-in are passed on to Logic Pro. Under normal conditions, this ensures that Logic Pro functions like Start and Stop will continue to work. If this isn’t the case, use the options in this menu to specify certain computer keyboard sections, which will be passed to the plug-in. All other computer keyboard events will be received by Logic Pro. 10 Chapter 1 TDM Audio Hardware and Drivers• Digidesign Hardware Setup button: Opens the Digidesign Hardware Setup window that contains all important system settings for your hardware. Note: The Process Buffer Range and ReWire Behavior parameters at the bottom of the Devices pane have no effect when DAE is active. Direct TDM Settings Activate Direct TDM if you want to use your computer CPUs to process Logic Studio instruments and effects, while also using the TDM features. • Enabled checkbox: Click to activate Direct TDM. • Universal Track Mode checkbox: Activate to enable playback of stereo and mono regions on a single track. Even-numbered audio channels are not regarded as the right channels of the odd-numbered stereo audio channel to their left. Every audio channel has its own Format button. Chapter 1 TDM Audio Hardware and Drivers 11Depending on whether a mono or stereo region is played back, the Pan knob will behave as either a Balance or Pan control. If you play back a mono region when the Pan knob is centered, both channels of the audio channel strip will output the same signal level. Note: Universal Track Mode has limited routing capabilities, as it doesn’t allow separate handling of the left and right audio channels. The Non-Universal Track Mode is useful if you need to play different mono files for the left and right (mono) channels of a single audio channel strip, even when it is assigned as a stereo channel. A stereo input and stereo output plug-in inserted into this stereo channel receives different signals for the left and right channels. 12 Chapter 1 TDM Audio Hardware and DriversLogic Pro allows you to use the TDM functions of Pro Tools HD systems. TDM is an abbreviation for Time Division Multiplexing—the time-interlaced transmission of multiple digital audio signals (or streams) through a single data bus. This bus system is physically isolated from the computer system bus, and runs between the individual TDM-capable (PCI or PCIe) cards. Up to 512 digital audio channels, each with 24-bit resolution, can be transmitted on the TDM bus. These streams form the signal paths within a virtual mixer. These signal paths are necessary for the insertion of plug-ins, which are calculated on the DSP hardware, and routed into the individual channels, or are selected through auxiliary busses. Logic Pro allows you to use both your TDM system DSPs and the computer’s native CPU processing resources. The link between the DSP world of your TDM system, and your computer’s native CPU processing resources is ESB TDM. See ESB TDM and EXS24 TDM. Note: It should be noted that the TDM channel count is sample-rate dependent, so if a rate of 88.2 or 96 kHz is used, the 512 channels available to a Pro Tools HD system will be halved to 256. At a sample rate of 192 kHz, this will again be halved to 128. This chapter covers the following: • How TDM Differs from Native Processing (p. 13) • TDM Plug-ins (p. 14) • Using TDM-Specific Functions (p. 15) • Simultaneous Use of TDM and Other Hardware (p. 15) How TDM Differs from Native Processing Using Logic Pro with a TDM or native processing system is quite similar. Here is an overview of the main differences between the two systems: • In a TDM system, all audio processing is done by the DSP chips of the TDM hardware. This means that “native” Logic Studio or Audio Units plug-ins cannot run on the TDM DSPs. TDM plug-ins, however, can be fully used and automated. 13 About TDM 2• The TDM hardware determines the overall features of the system: number of tracks, number of TDM plug-ins that can be used simultaneously, number of inputs and outputs, and so on. See your Pro Tools system manuals for further information. • Stereo recordings require two tracks, and are recorded as two separate files. In Logic Pro’s Arrange window, a stereo recording is handled as two linked regions, which use two tracks. In the Sample Editor window, stereo recordings are displayed as a stereo file. All odd-numbered audio channels (1, 3, 5, 7, and so on) can be switched to stereo. Doing so will cause the following even-numbered audio channels to be “locked” to the preceding odd-numbered channels. The odd-numbered channel controls both sides of the stereo recording. • DAE (Digidesign Audio Engine) does not support the QuickTime engine, which prevents you from using the Logic Pro movie facilities if you are working exclusively with the DAE. Activate Core Audio or Direct TDM to use the movie facilities when working with the DAE. TDM Plug-ins Correctly installed TDM plug-ins and settings can be used in Logic Pro. Use of TDM plug-ins is very similar to the use of Logic Studio and Audio Units plug-ins. TDM plug-ins can be fully automated. Note: Logic Pro does not support TDM Surround and multi mono plug-ins with two or more channels. All TDM plug-in settings are saved with the project, and are automatically restored when the project is next loaded. Logic Pro can read the Digidesign format for plug-in settings (the supplied settings of most plug-ins are saved in this format). Logic Pro automatically displays the corresponding files in a dialog when loading settings with the plug-in window Settings menu. Settings files are usually located in a Settings folder in the Library/Application Support/Digidesign folder. The name of the most recently chosen setting is indicated by a dot in the plug-in window Settings menu. Support of TDM Plug-in Side Chains You can select a different source for the side chain input (or key input) in some TDM plug-ins—Compressors, Noise Gates, Vocoders, and so on. All tracks, busses, or inputs can be used as a side chain input source. RTAS Plug-ins RTAS plug-ins cannot be used in Logic Pro. Only Audio Units, TDM, and Logic Studio plug-ins are supported. 14 Chapter 2 About TDMIf you currently own any RTAS plug-ins, you should install the Audio Units equivalents for use in Logic Pro. Most plug-ins are available in several formats. If no Audio Units version is available on your RTAS plug-in installation CDs, visit the websites of the plug-in manufacturers. Using TDM-Specific Functions Note the following if you want to use your hardware’s TDM functions with Logic Pro. • TDM Mixer Plug-in: Ensure that the Plug-ins folder (found inside the DAE folder) contains only one Mixer plug-in; either the Stereo Mixer or the Stereo Dithered Mixer. You may also have one of the Surround Mixer plug-ins in the folder, but these Mixer plug-ins have no function in Logic Pro. • Changing Global Bit Depth: When TDM hardware is being used, Logic Pro will ask whether you want to use 16- or 24-bit depth, when first opened. You can change the Global Bit Depth in the Logic Pro > Preferences > Audio > Devices > DAE tab at any time. • Sample Editor: All Sample Editor functions work with 16- and 24-bit audio files. You can exchange audio material between 16- and 24-bit files when using Direct TDM, with the Copy and Paste commands. Note: AudioSuite plug-ins are supported at 16- and 24-bit depth, if using DAE. Simultaneous Use of TDM and Other Hardware Note the following if you wish to use a TDM system and other audio hardware simultaneously. Controlling the Prelisten Device in a TDM System Logic Pro’s Audio Bin, Browser, and Sample Editor windows allow you to choose the playback hardware unit. Control-click (or right-click) the Prelisten button, and choose a device from the shortcut menu: • If you choose Core Audio, an additional audio channel strip (named Prelisten) is created automatically in the Mixer (and Environment), and used for playback. • If you choose DAE, the highest-numbered audio channel strip (possible with your configuration) is used for playback. Note that this channel may be assigned to an Arrange window track when you use the Create Track functions. Total Number of Audio Tracks in a TDM System When operating different audio hardware devices simultaneously, the number of possible playback tracks cannot be determined by merely adding them together. This is especially true if the connected systems place a strain on the CPU. Chapter 2 About TDM 15The number of tracks may also be reduced if the connected systems access the same hard disk bus. This can be mitigated (resulting in an increase in the total track number) by using different hard drives for the various systems. For example, the audio data for a Direct TDM or Core Audio device, and a QuickTime movie are read from an internal hard disk, and audio data for a DAE device is read from an external FireWire hard disk. 16 Chapter 2 About TDMLogic Pro allows you to use both your TDM system DSPs and the computer’s native CPU processing resources. The link between the DSP world of your TDM system and your computer’s native CPU processing resources is ESB TDM. ESB TDM uses your computer CPU to process one audio engine (Direct TDM), and the DSP of the TDM hardware to process another (DAE). This is done by using two different mixers in Logic Pro. The TDM Mixer uses the DAE to process TDM plug-ins. The DTDM Mixer uses the computer CPU (Direct TDM) to process Logic Studio and Audio Units plug-ins. Up to eight DTDM Mixer outputs can be configured as ESB TDM outputs, which can be routed in to the TDM Mixer. The DTDM Mixer outputs (ESB TDM outs) are received by the ESB TDM inputs—which are available as sources in the input slot pop-up menus of TDM Mixer aux channel strips. This enables all Logic tracks, Logic Studio plug-ins, and Audio Units plug-ins—including software instruments—to be used in conjunction with your TDM system DSPs. This chapter covers the following: • About the ESB TDM and EXS24 TDM Plug-ins (p. 17) • Using EXS24 TDM (p. 18) • Using ESB TDM (p. 19) About the ESB TDM and EXS24 TDM Plug-ins The ESB TDM and EXS24 TDM plug-ins enhance TDM system functionality by expanding the capabilities of the TDM Mixer. If working at 44.1 or 48 kHz sample rates, up to 32 additional channels are available. These extra channels can be used for multiple EXS24 TDM sampler instances, and up to eight inputs routed from the DTDM Mixer—which uses the native audio engine (Direct TDM), running in parallel with the DAE. 17 ESB TDM and EXS24 TDM 3The ESB TDM plug-in allows you to route up to eight audio channels of the DTDM Mixer in to the DSP-based TDM Mixer. This is similar to having a card equipped with a multi-channel digital output installed in the computer, and physically connected to a second multi-channel input module for your TDM system. ESB TDM routes digital signals via software within the computer, effectively replacing the audio card’s digital outputs and driver, the TDM audio interface, and the cables between them. In situations where you want to use both the Logic Pro native audio system (Direct TDM) and your TDM system, see Using ESB TDM. The EXS24 TDM plug-in allows up to 32 mono or 16 stereo EXS24 mkII sampler instances to be inserted in the top insert slots of aux channel strips in the TDM Mixer. Ensuing insert slots in the aux channel strip, and further TDM Mixer routing options, allow the sampler output signals to be processed with TDM effect plug-ins. If you want to process the output signals of (up to 32) EXS24 TDM samplers with TDM effect plug-ins exclusively, see Using EXS24 TDM. When using the EXS24 TDM exclusively, there is no need to activate Direct TDM in addition to the DAE (unless you need to use the movie facilities of Logic Pro). Note: EXS24 TDM is available as a mono or stereo plug-in, but not as a multi output plug-in. Using EXS24 TDM If no aux channel strips exist in your TDM Mixer, you can create them in your project. To create TDM channel strips that are displayed in both the Mixer and the Arrange window 1 Open the New Tracks dialog by doing one of the following. • Click the New Tracks button. • Choose Track > New in the Arrange window or use Option-Command-N. 2 In the New Tracks dialog, make sure that the Auxiliary (for EXS24 TDM) button is active. 3 Choose other settings (number of tracks, and so on) as needed. 4 Click Create. 18 Chapter 3 ESB TDM and EXS24 TDMTo insert the EXS24 TDM µ Click the top Insert slot of an aux channel strip in the TDM Mixer, and choose EXS24 TDM from the pop-up menu. To play the EXS24 TDM sampler inserted in the aux channel strip µ Select the corresponding aux track in the Arrange window. When the track is selected, you will be able to play and record the sampler instance. Subsequent insert slots in the aux channel strip allow the insertion of TDM effect plug-ins, for processing of the sampler’s output signal. Further TDM Mixer processing options such as sends to effect busses and output routings behave as per usual. Note: The input routing parameter has no effect, as is the case when using TDM instruments such as Virus TDM. Using ESB TDM ESB TDM allows the outputs of the DTDM Mixer—processed by the computer CPUs (Direct TDM audio engine)—to be routed in to the input slots of TDM Mixer aux channel strips. This enables you to process Logic Pro audio tracks and Logic Studio or Audio Units instruments with TDM-based effects. Note: Direct TDM must be activated in the Logic Pro > Preferences > Audio > Devices pane if you want to route signals from the DTDM Mixer into the TDM Mixer. See Direct TDM Settings. Chapter 3 ESB TDM and EXS24 TDM 19Depending on the number of required channel strip types, your DTDM Mixer could look something like this: This DTDM Mixer example features six audio channel strips, two aux channel strips, two instrument channel strips, and two stereo sums. The eight output signals of the DTDM Mixer example shown above are routed into the TDM Mixer. The DTDM Mixer output signals are received by the ESB TDM inputs—chosen as TDM aux channel strip input sources. To configure and choose ESB TDM sources 1 Set up mono (ESB 1–8) or stereo (ESB 1–2, 3–4, 5–6, and 7–8) DTDM Mixer output channels. 2 Choose one of the available input sources for each TDM Mixer aux channel strip. The following example shows ESB TDM sources in the input slots of TDM Mixer aux channel strips 1–8: 20 Chapter 3 ESB TDM and EXS24 TDMESB TDM Mono and Stereo Handling Logic Pro handles ESB TDM mono and stereo channel settings separately. You can specify either a mono output channel (ESB 1–8), or a stereo output channel pair (ESB 1–2, 3–4, 5–6, and 7–8) in the DTDM Mixer. These can be individually selected as aux channel strip input sources in the TDM Mixer. To create mono and stereo ESB TDM template projects 1 Set up mono DTDM Mixer output channels (ESB 1–8), and choose them as input sources for each TDM Mixer aux channel strip, then save your project as a template. 2 Set up stereo DTDM Mixer output channels (ESB 1–2, 3–4, 5–6, and 7–8), and choose them as input sources for each TDM Mixer aux channel strip, then save your project as a template. Choose the appropriate template to quickly switch between mono and stereo setups, without needing to manually change settings each time. Chapter 3 ESB TDM and EXS24 TDM 21This section provides tips and tricks that may be useful when using Logic Pro with TDM hardware. As a general working suggestion, you should avoid the simultaneous use of more than two audio engines in Logic Pro. The strain on the PCI bus can be problematic, resulting in a number of DAE error messages. Your first choice should be the DAE—in conjunction with Direct TDM. If necessary, choose DAE and Core Audio. This chapter covers the following: • Importing Native Projects into a TDM System (p. 23) • System Performance and TDM DSP Usage (p. 24) • DAE and Direct TDM Bounce Strategies (p. 25) Importing Native Projects into a TDM System If you want to use the native processing capabilities of Logic Pro with the project, start Logic Pro—with the Digidesign Core Audio driver activated. You will be asked if you’d like an automatic conversion if the project was created on a non-Core Audio system, provided that the Universal Track Mode setting is the same on both systems. You should be mindful of problems that can occur, due to plug-in incompatibilities and settings that differ between the source and target systems. If you want to use TDM plug-ins and instruments with the project, you need to load the project into a DAE/Direct TDM system. To load a project that originated on a Core Audio system into a DAE/Direct TDM system 1 Deactivate DAE and ensure that Direct TDM is active. 2 Ensure that the Universal Track Mode setting is the same for both Core Audio (on the project source system) and Direct TDM on your system. 23 Logic Pro TDM Usage Tips and Tricks 43 Open the project. You will be asked if you’d like it automatically converted to Direct TDM. Logic Pro loads the project into a DTDM Mixer, and checks if there is a channel strip available for every hardware channel. If not, a suitable number of channel strips is automatically created in the DTDM Mixer. This facility ensures that changes to the hardware in a given computer, or moving project data to another computer (with different hardware), will result in corresponding channel strip changes. EQ, effect, and send settings are maintained for each channel. If plug-ins used in the project differ between the source and target computers, unavailable plug-ins are dimmed in the Insert slots of affected channel strips. You need to manually replace dimmed plug-ins with plug-ins available on the target computer. 4 When the converted project has loaded, reactivate the DAE. Note: You will need to reopen Logic Pro after activating the DAE. 5 Reopen Logic Pro and open the converted project. All DTDM Mixer track outputs are routed to one of the ESB outputs. 6 Create the required number of aux channel strips in the TDM Mixer. 7 Choose ESB output sources (ESB 1–8 or ESB 1–2, 3–4, 5–6, and 7–8) in the Input slot(s) of the TDM Mixer aux channel strip(s). System Performance and TDM DSP Usage The Logic Pro System Performance window doesn’t reflect any native processing via the DAE—which may be caused by the insertion of numerous EXS24 TDM instruments. You can check the DSP load in the TDM DSP Usage window (Options > Audio > Open TDM DSP Usage). 24 Chapter 4 Logic Pro TDM Usage Tips and TricksDAE and Direct TDM Bounce Strategies The easiest way to perform a stereo bounce is to choose File > Bounce (or use the Toolbar Bounce button or key command). This will open the Bounce dialog for outputs 1-2 of your primary audio device. It is recommended that you use the first output pair for main playback duties. Note: If you are using other output channel strips for primary playback duties, click the Bounce button on these channels. You can set the file format, bit depth, and sample rate of the bounce file in the Bounce dialog. Detailed information on all bounce parameters is found in the Logic Pro User Manual. DAE You can perform real-time bounces in mono, stereo, and all surround formats supported by Logic Pro. Offline bounces are not possible when you use DAE. Keep in mind that none of the TDM surround features are available in Logic Pro. Direct TDM If using the DTDM Mixer output channels, all offline and real-time bouncing features are available. Chapter 4 Logic Pro TDM Usage Tips and Tricks 25 Congratulations, you and your MacBook Air were made for each other.Built-in iSight camera Video chat with up to three friends anywhere in the world at the same time. www.apple.com/macbookair Mac Help isight Finder Browse the contents of your computer using Cover Flow. www.apple.com/macosx Mac Help finder www.apple.com/macosx Mac Help time machine Time Machine Automatically back up your files to an extra hard drive. GarageBand Create music by adding musicians to a virtual stage. Enhance your song to sound like a pro. www.apple.com/ilife/garageband GarageBand Help record iPhoto Help photo www.apple.com/ilife/iphoto iWeb Create beautiful websites with photos, movies, blogs, podcasts, and dynamic web widgets. www.apple.com/ilife/iweb iWeb Help website iPhoto Organize all your photos with Events. Publish to a Web Gallery with a click. iMovie Collect all your video in one library. Create and share movies in minutes. iMovie Help movie www.apple.com/ilife/imovieContents 5 Contents Chapter 1: Ready, Set Up, Go 8 Welcome 9 What’s in the Box 10 Setting Up Your MacBook Air 15 Setting Up DVD or CD Sharing 16 Migrating Information to Your MacBook Air 19 Getting Additional Information onto Your MacBook Air 22 Putting Your MacBook Air to Sleep or Shutting It Down Chapter 2: Life with Your MacBook Air 26 Basic Features of Your MacBook Air 28 Keyboard Features of Your MacBook Air 30 Ports on Your MacBook Air 32 Using the Trackpad and Keyboard 34 Running Your MacBook Air on Battery Power 35 Getting Answers Chapter 3: Problem, Meet Solution 40 Problems That Prevent You from Using Your MacBook Air 44 Using Apple Hardware Test6 Contents 45 Reinstalling Software Using Remote Install Mac OS X 49 Reinstalling Software Using the MacBook Air SuperDrive 51 Problems with AirPort Extreme Wireless Communication 51 Problems with Your Internet Connection 53 Keeping Your Software Up to Date 53 Learning More, Service, and Support 56 Locating Your Product Serial Number Chapter 4: Last, but Not Least 58 Important Safety Information 60 Important Handling Information 62 Understanding Ergonomics 64 Apple and the Environment 65 Regulatory Compliance Information Looking for Something? 70 Index1 1 Ready, Set Up, Go www.apple.com/macbookair Mac Help Migration Assistant8 Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go Welcome Congratulations on purchasing a MacBook Air. Your MacBook Air is streamlined for portability and a completely wireless experience. Read this chapter for help getting started setting up and using your MacBook Air.  If you know you will primarily be downloading applications and content from the Internet and not migrating information from another Mac, you can follow the basic instructions to set up your MacBook Air quickly.  If you want to migrate information from another Mac or get content from CDs or DVDs onto your MacBook Air, you can identify one or more Mac or Windows computers to partner with your MacBook Air. Important: Read all the installation instructions (and the safety information starting on page 57) carefully before you first use your computer. Many answers to questions can be found on your computer in Mac Help. For information about getting Mac Help, see “Getting Answers” on page 35. Apple may release new versions and updates to its system software, so the images shown in this book may be slightly different from what you see onscreen.Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go 9 What’s in the Box Important: Remove the protective film covering the 45W MagSafe Power Adapter before setting up your MacBook Air. About Optical Discs Although your MacBook Air doesn’t have an optical disc drive, it does include DVD discs with important software. You can easily access this software, as well as install applications and access data from other optical discs, using the optical disc drive on another Mac or Windows computer. You can also use the optional MacBook Air SuperDrive, an external optical disc drive. AC power cord ® AC plug 45W MagSafe Power Adapter Micro-DVI to DVI Adapter Micro-DVI to VGA Adapter10 Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go Setting Up Your MacBook Air Your MacBook Air is designed so that you can set it up quickly and start using it right away. The following pages take you through the setup process, including these tasks:  Plugging in the 45W MagSafe Power Adapter  Turning on your MacBook Air and using the trackpad  Using Setup Assistant to access a network and configure a user account and other settings  Setting up the Mac OS X desktop and preferences Step 1: Plug in the 45W MagSafe Power Adapter to provide power to the MacBook Air and charge the battery. Insert the AC plug of your power adapter into a power outlet and the MagSafe connector into the MagSafe power port, located on the back left side of your MacBook Air. As the MagSafe connector gets close to the port, you’ll feel a magnetic pull drawing it in. ¯ AC power cord AC plug ® MagSafe connector MagSafe power portChapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go 11 To extend the reach of your power adapter, replace the AC plug with the AC power cord. First pull the AC plug up to remove it from the adapter, and then attach the included AC power cord to the adapter, making sure it is seated firmly. Plug the other end into a power outlet. When disconnecting the power adapter from an outlet or from the computer, pull the plug, not the cord. When you first connect the power adapter to your MacBook Air, an indicator light on the MagSafe connector starts to glow. An amber light indicates that the battery is charging. A green light indicates that the battery is fully charged. If you don’t see a light, make sure the connector is seated properly and the power adapter is plugged into a power outlet.12 Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go Step 2: Press the power (®) button briefly to turn on your MacBook Air. You will hear a tone when you turn on the computer. It takes the computer a few moments to start up. After it starts up, Setup Assistant opens automatically. If your computer doesn’t turn on, see “If your MacBook Air doesn’t turn on or start up” on page 42. ® Trackpad Trackpad button ® Power buttonChapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go 13 Step 3: Configure your MacBook Air with Setup Assistant The first time you turn on your MacBook Air, Setup Assistant starts. Setup Assistant helps you enter your Internet information and set up a user account on your MacBook Air. You can also migrate information from another Mac during setup. Note: If you don’t use Setup Assistant to transfer information when you first start up your MacBook Air, you can do it later using Migration Assistant. Go to the Applications folder, open Utilities, and double-click Migration Assistant. To set up your MacBook Air: 1 In the Setup Assistant, follow the onscreen instructions until you get to the “Do You Already Own a Mac?” screen. 2 Do a basic setup or a setup with migration:  To do a basic setup, select “Do not transfer my information now” and click Continue. Follow the remaining prompts to select your wireless network, set up an account, and exit Setup Assistant.  To do a setup with migration, first set up another Mac that has an optical disc drive to partner with (see “Setting Up DVD or CD Sharing” on page 15). Then go to page 16, “Migrating Information to Your MacBook Air.” Note: If you’ve already started Setup Assistant on your MacBook Air, you can leave it mid-process without quitting, move to the other computer to install the DVD or CD Sharing Setup software, and then return to your MacBook Air to complete the setup. 14 Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go Step 4: Customize the Mac OS X desktop and set preferences. You can quickly make the desktop look the way you want using System Preferences. Choose Apple () > System Preferences from the menu bar or click the System Preferences icon in the Dock. System Preferences is your command center for most settings on your MacBook Air. Menu bar Dock System Preferences icon Help menu Spotlight search icon Finder iconChapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go 15 Setting Up DVD or CD Sharing You can partner your MacBook Air with another Mac or Windows computer that has an optical disc drive and is on the same wired or wireless network. Use this other computer to:  Migrate information to your MacBook Air, if the other computer is a Mac (see “Migrating Information to Your MacBook Air” on page 16)  Share the contents of DVDs or CDs (see “Sharing Discs with DVD or CD Sharing” on page 19)  Remotely install Mac OS X (see “Reinstalling Software Using Remote Install Mac OS X” on page 45) or use Disk Utility (see “Using Disk Utility” on page 49) The computer with the optical drive can be a Mac with Mac OS X v10.4.10 or later, or a Windows XP or Windows Vista computer. You can partner with more than one other computer. Mac or Windows computer MacBook Air16 Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go Insert the Mac OS X Install Disc 1 that came with your MacBook Air to install the DVD or CD Sharing Setup, which includes software for DVD or CD Sharing, Migration Assistant, and Remote Install Mac OS X:  If the other computer is a Mac, double-click the DVD or CD Sharing Setup package on the Mac OS X Install Disc 1.  If the other computer is a Windows computer, choose “DVD or CD Sharing” from the Install Assistant that starts automatically. Migrating Information to Your MacBook Air You can migrate existing user accounts, files, applications, and other information from another Mac computer. To migrate information to your MacBook Air: 1 Configure the other Mac (see page 15), and then make sure that it is turned on and that it is on the same wired or wireless network as your MacBook Air. Check the AirPort (Z) status icon in the menu bar at the top of the other Mac screen to see what wireless network you’re connected to. Choose the same network for your MacBook Air during setup. 2 On your MacBook Air, follow the Setup Assistant onscreen instructions until you get to the “Do You Already Own a Mac?” screen. Select “from another Mac” as the source of the information you want to transfer. On the next screen, choose your wireless network, and then click Continue.Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go 17 3 When you see the Connect To Your Other Mac screen with a passcode displayed, do the remaining steps on the other Mac. You will enter the passcode in Migration Assistant on the other Mac. 4 On the other Mac, open Migration Assistant (located in /Applications/Utilities/), and then click Continue. 5 When you are prompted for a migration method, select “To another Mac”, and then click Continue. 6 On the other Mac, quit any other open applications and then click Continue.18 Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go 7 On the other Mac, enter the six-digit passcode displayed in Setup Assistant on your MacBook Air. 8 Click Continue to start the migration. Important: Don’t use the other Mac for anything else until the migration is complete.Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go 19 Getting Additional Information onto Your MacBook Air Your MacBook Air comes with several applications installed, including the iLife ’08 suite. Many other applications can be downloaded from the Internet. If you want to install third-party applications from CD or DVD, you can:  Install applications onto your MacBook Air using the optical disc drive on another Mac or Windows computer (if DVD or CD Sharing is set up and enabled). Read the next section for more information.  Attach the MacBook Air SuperDrive (an external USB optical disc drive available separately at www.apple.com/store) to the USB port on your MacBook Air, and insert your installation disc. Sharing Discs with DVD or CD Sharing You can enable DVD or CD Sharing on a Mac or Windows computer so that your MacBook Air can share the discs you insert into the optical disc drive of the other computer. Some discs, such as DVD movies and game discs, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD Sharing. Make sure you first install the DVD or CD Sharing Setup software on any Mac or Windows computer you want to partner with. See page 15 for more information. To enable DVD or CD Sharing, if your other computer is a Mac: 1 Make sure the other Mac and your MacBook Air are on the same wireless network. Check the AirPort (Z) status icon in the menu bar to see what network you’re connected to.20 Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go 2 On the other Mac, choose Apple () > System Preferences and then open Sharing. 3 In the Sharing panel, select “DVD or CD Sharing” in the Service list. If you want other users to request permission to share a DVD or CD, select “Ask me before allowing others to use my DVD drive.” To enable DVD or CD Sharing, if your other computer is a Windows computer: 1 Make sure your MacBook Air and the Windows computer are on the same wireless network. Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go 21 2 On the Windows computer, open the DVD or CD Sharing control panel. 3 Select “Enable DVD or CD Sharing.” If you want other users to request permission to share a DVD or CD, select “Ask me before allowing others to use my DVD drive.” To use a shared DVD or CD: 1 On the other computer, insert a DVD or CD into the optical disc drive. 2 On your MacBook Air, select the Remote Disc when it appears under Devices in the Finder sidebar. If you see the “Ask to use” button, click it. 3 On the other computer, when prompted, click Accept to allow your MacBook Air to use the DVD or CD. 4 On your MacBook Air, use the disc as you normally would once it becomes available. If you try to shut down the other computer or eject the shared DVD or CD while your MacBook Air is using it, you’ll see a message telling you that the disc is in use. To proceed, click Continue.22 Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go Putting Your MacBook Air to Sleep or Shutting It Down When you finish working with your MacBook Air, you can put it to sleep or shut it down. Putting Your MacBook Air to Sleep If you’ll be away from your MacBook Air for only a short time, put it to sleep. When the computer is in sleep, you can quickly wake it and bypass the startup process. To put your MacBook Air to sleep, do one of the following:  Close the display.  Choose Apple () > Sleep from the menu bar.  Press the power (®) button and click Sleep in the dialog that appears.  Choose Apple () > System Preferences, click Energy Saver, and set a sleep timer. To wake your MacBook Air:  If the display is closed, simply open it to wake your MacBook Air.  If the display is already open, press the power (®) button or any key on the keyboard. When your MacBook Air wakes from sleep, your applications, documents, and computer settings are exactly as you left them. NOTICE: Wait a few seconds until the sleep indicator light on the front of your MacBook Air starts pulsing (indicating that the computer is in sleep and the hard disk has stopped spinning) before you move your MacBook Air. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage it, causing loss of data or the inability to start up from the hard disk.Chapter 1 Ready, Set Up, Go 23 Shutting Down Your MacBook Air If you aren’t going to use your MacBook Air for a day or two, it’s best to shut it down. The sleep indicator light goes on briefly during the shutdown process. To shut down your MacBook Air, do one of the following:  Choose Apple () > Shut Down from the menu bar.  Press the power (®) button and click Shut Down in the dialog that appears. If you plan to store your MacBook Air for an extended period of time, see “Important Handling Information” on page 60 for information about how to prevent your battery from draining completely.2 2 Life with Your MacBook Air www.apple.com/macosx Mac Help Mac OS X26 Chapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air Basic Features of Your MacBook Air ® ® Power button Camera indicator light iSight camera Ambient light sensor Mono speaker (under keyboard) Microphone Sleep indicator light Infrared (IR) receiver Trackpad Battery (built-in) Trackpad buttonChapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air 27 Ambient light sensor The ambient light sensor adjusts the illuminated keyboard according to the available light in your operating environment. Built-in iSight camera and camera indicator light Videoconference with others using iChat AV, snap pictures with Photo Booth, or capture video with iMovie. The indicator light glows green when the iSight camera is operating. Built-in microphone Capture sounds directly with the microphone (located to the right of the iSight camera) or talk with friends live using the included iChat AV application. Built-in mono speaker Listen to music, movies, games, and multimedia files. Built-in rechargeable battery Run your MacBook Air using battery power when you are away from a power outlet. Trackpad and trackpad button Move the pointer, click, double-click, scroll, zoom, and more, using one or more fingers on the trackpad. For details, see “Using the Trackpad and Keyboard” on page 32. Sleep indicator light A white light pulses when your MacBook Air is in sleep. Built-in infrared (IR) receiver Use an optional Apple Remote (sold separately at www.apple.com/store) with the IR receiver to control Front Row and Keynote on your MacBook Air. ® Power button Turn your MacBook Air on or off, or put it to sleep. Press and hold to restart your MacBook Air during troubleshooting.28 Chapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air Keyboard Features of Your MacBook Air ® Function (fn) key esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 — C - Volume keys Brightness keys Media Eject key Mute key Exposé Dashboard Media keys Keyboard illumination keys ’Chapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air 29 Function (fn) key Press and hold this key to activate customized actions assigned to the function keys (F1 to F12). To learn how to customize function keys, choose Help > Mac Help from the menu bar and search for “function keys.” ¤ Brightness keys (F1, F2) Increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the brightness of your MacBook Air display. Exposé All Windows key (F3) Open Exposé for quick access to all your open windows. Dashboard key (F4) Open Dashboard to access your widgets. o Keyboard illumination keys (F5, F6) Increase (o) or decrease (ø) the brightness of the keyboard illumination. ’ Media keys (F7, F8, F9) Rewind (]), play or pause (’), or fast-forward (‘) a song, movie, or slideshow. — Mute key (F10) Mute the sound coming from the built-in speaker or headphone jack. - Volume keys (F11, F12) Increase (-) or decrease (–) the volume of the sound coming from the built-in speaker or headphone jack. C Media Eject key Press and hold this key to eject a disc from a MacBook Air SuperDrive (available separately at www.apple.com/store). You can also eject a disc by dragging its desktop icon to the Trash.30 Chapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air Ports on Your MacBook Air Port hatch MagSafe power port d USB 2.0 port £Micro-DVI port ® ¯ Headphone jack fChapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air 31 ¯ MagSafe power port Plug in the included 45W MagSafe Power Adapter to recharge the MacBook Air battery. Port hatch Open the port hatch to use the headphone jack, USB 2.0 port, and Micro-DVI port. f Headphone jack Connect external speakers or headphones. d USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0 port Connect an external optical disc drive, USB to Ethernet adapter, modem, iPod, mouse, keyboard, and more to your MacBook Air. You can also connect USB 1.1 devices. £ Micro-DVI (video out) port Connect an external display, projection device, or TV that uses a DVI, VGA, composite, or S-video connector. Depending on the type of external device you’re connecting, you can use the included Micro-DVI to DVI Adapter or Micro-DVI to VGA Adapter. The Micro-DVI to Video Adapter, which provides composite and S-video support, is sold separately at www.apple.com/store.32 Chapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air Using the Trackpad and Keyboard Use the trackpad to move the pointer and to scroll, tap, double-tap, and drag. How far the pointer moves onscreen is affected by how quickly you move your finger across the trackpad. To move the pointer a short distance, move your finger slowly across the trackpad; the faster you move your finger, the farther the pointer moves. To fine-tune the tracking speed and set other trackpad options, choose Apple () > System Preferences, click Keyboard & Mouse, and then click Trackpad. Here are some useful keyboard and trackpad tips and shortcuts:  Forward deleting deletes characters to the right of the insertion point. Pressing the Delete key deletes characters to the left of the insertion point. To forward delete, hold down the Function (fn) key while you press the Delete key.  Secondary clicking or “right-clicking” lets you access shortcut menu commands. To secondary click, place two fingers on the trackpad while clicking the trackpad button. If Tap to Click is enabled, just tap two fingers on the trackpad. You can also secondary click by holding down the Control key while you click.Chapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air 33  Two-finger scrolling lets you drag to scroll quickly up, down, or sideways in the active window. This option is on by default. The following trackpad gestures work in certain applications, such as Preview or iPhoto. For more information, choose Help > Mac Help and search for “trackpad.”  Two-finger pinching lets you zoom in or out on PDFs, images, photos, and more.34 Chapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air  Two-finger rotating lets you rotate photos, pages, and more.  Three-finger swiping lets you rapidly page through documents, move to the previous or next photo, and more. Running Your MacBook Air on Battery Power When the 45W MagSafe Power Adapter is not connected, your MacBook Air draws power from its built-in rechargeable battery. The length of time that you can run your MacBook Air varies, depending on the applications you use and the external devices connected to your MacBook Air. Turning off features such as AirPort Extreme or Bluetooth® wireless technology can help conserve battery charge. If the battery runs low while you are working, attach the power adapter that came with your MacBook Air and let the battery recharge. When the power adapter is connected, the battery recharges whether the computer is on, off, or in sleep. The battery recharges more quickly, however, when the computer is off or in sleep. You can determine whether the battery needs charging by looking at the indicator light on the MagSafe connector. If the light is glowing amber, the battery needs to be charged. If the light is glowing green, the battery is fully charged. Chapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air 35 You can also check the amount of battery charge left by viewing the Battery ( ) status icon in the menu bar. The battery charge level displayed is based on the amount of power left in the battery with the applications, peripheral devices, and system settings you are currently using. To conserve battery power, close applications and disconnect peripheral devices not in use, and adjust your Energy Saver settings. For more information about battery conservation and performance tips, go to www.apple.com/batteries/notebooks.html. Important: The battery is replaceable only by an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Getting Answers Much more information about using your MacBook Air is available in Mac Help and on the Internet at www.apple.com/support/macbookair. To get Mac Help: 1 Click the Finder icon in the Dock (the bar of icons along the edge of the screen). 2 Click the Help menu in the menu bar and do one of the following: a Type a question or term in the Search field, and select a topic from the returned list or select Show All Results to see all topics. b Choose Mac Help to open the Mac Help window, where you can click links or type a search question.36 Chapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air More Information For more information about using your MacBook Air, see the following: To learn about Do this Troubleshooting your MacBook Air if you have a problem See Chapter 3, “Problem, Meet Solution,” on page 39. Finding service and support for your MacBook Air See “Learning More, Service, and Support” on page 53. Or go to the Apple Support website at www.apple.com/support/macbookair. Using Mac OS X Go to the Mac OS X website at www.apple.com/macosx. Or search for “Mac OS X” in Mac Help. Moving from a PC to a Mac See “How To Move To Mac” at www.apple.com/getamac/ movetomac. Using iLife ’08 applications Go to the iLife ’08 website at www.apple.com/ilife. Or open an iLife ’08 application, open Help for the application, and then type a question in the search field. Changing System Preferences Open System Preferences by choosing Apple (K) > System Preferences. Or search for “system preferences” in Mac Help. Using your trackpad Experiment with gestures within a particular application to see what functionality is supported. Search for “trackpad” in Mac Help. Or open System Preferences, click Keyboard & Mouse, and then click Trackpad. Using the iSight camera Search for “iSight” in Mac Help. Using AirPort Extreme wireless technology Go to the AirPort Support page at www.apple.com/support/airport. Or open Mac Help and search for “AirPort.”Chapter 2 Life with Your MacBook Air 37 Using Bluetooth wireless technology Go to the Bluetooth Support page at www.apple.com/support/ bluetooth. Or open the Bluetooth File Exchange application, located in the Utilities folder within the Applications folder, and choose Help > Bluetooth Help. Connecting a printer Search for “printing” in Mac Help. USB connections Search for “USB” in Mac Help. Connecting to the Internet Search for “Internet” in Mac Help. Connecting an external display Search for “display port” in Mac Help. Apple Remote (sold separately at www.apple.com/store) Search for “remote” in Mac Help. Front Row Search for “Front Row” in Mac Help. Specifications Go to the Specifications page at www.apple.com/support/specs. Or open System Profiler by choosing Apple (K) > About This Mac from the menu bar, and then click More Info. Apple news, free downloads, and online catalogs of software and hardware Go to the Apple website at www.apple.com. Instructions, technical support, and manuals for Apple products Go to the Apple Support website at www.apple.com/support. To learn about Do this3 3 Problem, Meet Solution www.apple.com/support Mac Help help40 Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution Occasionally you may have a problem while working with your MacBook Air. Read on to find some solutions to try when you have a problem. You can also find more troubleshooting information in Mac Help and on the MacBook Air Support website at www.apple.com/support/macbookair. If you experience a problem with your MacBook Air, there’s usually a simple and quick solution. Think about the conditions that led up to the problem. Making a note of things you did before the problem occurred will help you narrow down possible causes and find the answers you need. Things to note include:  The applications you were using when the problem occurred. Problems that occur only with a specific application might indicate that the application is not compatible with the version of the Mac OS installed on your computer.  Any new software that you installed, especially software that added items to the System folder. Problems That Prevent You from Using Your MacBook Air If your MacBook Air doesn’t respond or the pointer doesn’t move On rare occasions, an application might “freeze” on the screen. Mac OS X provides a way to quit a frozen application without restarting your computer. Quitting a frozen application might allow you to save your work in other open applications. To force an application to quit: 1 Press Command (x)-Option-Esc or choose Apple () > Force Quit from the menu bar. The Force Quit Applications dialog appears with the application selected. 2 Click Force Quit.Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution 41 The application quits, leaving all other applications open. If you need to, you can also restart the Finder from this dialog. Next, save your work in any open applications and restart the computer to make sure the problem is entirely cleared up. If you are unable to force the application to quit, press and hold the power (®) button for a few seconds until the computer shuts itself down. Wait 10 seconds and then turn on the computer. If the problem occurs frequently, choose Help > Mac Help from the menu bar at the top of the screen. Search for the word “freeze” to get help for instances when the computer freezes or doesn’t respond. If the problem occurs only when you use a particular application, check with the application’s manufacturer to see if it is compatible with your computer. To get support and contact information for the software that came with your MacBook Air, go to www.apple.com/guide. If you know an application is compatible, you might need to reinstall your computer’s system software. See “Reinstalling the Software That Came with Your MacBook Air” on page 47. If your MacBook Air freezes during startup, or you see a flashing question mark, or the display is dark and the sleep indicator light is glowing steadily (not in sleep) The flashing question mark usually means that the computer can’t find the system software on the hard disk or on any disks attached to the computer. 42 Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution  Wait a few seconds. If the computer still doesn’t start up, shut it down by pressing and holding the power (®) button for about 8 to 10 seconds. Disconnect all external peripherals and try restarting by pressing the power (®) button while holding down the Option key. When your computer starts up, click the hard disk icon, and then click the right arrow. After the computer starts up, open System Preferences and click Startup Disk. Select a local Mac OS X System folder.  If that doesn’t work, try using Disk Utility to repair the disk. For more information, see “Using Disk Utility” on page 49. If your MacBook Air doesn’t turn on or start up Try the following suggestions in order until your computer turns on:  Make sure the power adapter is plugged into the computer and into a functioning power outlet. Be sure to use the 45W MagSafe Power Adapter that came with your MacBook Air. If the power adapter stops charging and you don’t see the indicator light on the power adapter turn on when you plug in the power cord, try unplugging and replugging the power cord to reseat it.  Check whether the battery needs to be recharged. If the light on the power adapter glows amber, the battery is charging. See “Running Your MacBook Air on Battery Power” on page 34.  If the problem persists, return the computer to its factory settings by pressing the left Shift key, left Option (alt) key, left Control key, and the power (®) button simultaneously for five seconds.  Press and release the power (®) button and immediately hold down the Command (x), Option, P, and R keys simultaneously until you hear the startup sound a second time. This resets the parameter RAM (PRAM). Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution 43  If you still can’t start up your MacBook Air, see “Learning More, Service, and Support” on page 53 for information about contacting Apple for service. If the display suddenly goes black or your MacBook Air freezes Try restarting your MacBook Air. 1 Unplug any devices that are connected to your MacBook Air, except the power adapter. 2 Press the power (®) button to restart the system. 3 Let the battery charge to at least 10 percent before plugging in any external devices and resuming your work. To see how much the battery has charged, look at the Battery ( ) status icon in the menu bar. The display might also darken if you have energy saver features set for the battery. If your MacBook Air can’t connect to another computer’s optical disc drive To use services such as Migration Assistant, DVD or CD Sharing, Remote Install Mac OS X, and iTunes music sharing, both your MacBook Air and the other computer must be connected to the same network. If your MacBook Air is connected wirelessly and the other computer is connected to a third-party router by Ethernet, check your router documentation to make sure it supports bridging a wireless to wired connection.44 Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution Using Apple Hardware Test If you suspect a problem with the MacBook Air hardware, you can use the Apple Hardware Test application to help determine if there’s a problem with one of the computer’s components, such as the memory or processor. To use Apple Hardware Test on your MacBook Air: 1 Disconnect all external devices from your computer except the power adapter. 2 Restart your MacBook Air while holding down the D key. 3 When the Apple Hardware Test chooser screen appears, select the language for your location. 4 Press the Return key or click the right arrow button. 5 When the Apple Hardware Test main screen appears (after about 45 seconds), follow the onscreen instructions. 6 If Apple Hardware Test detects a problem, it displays an error code. Make a note of the error code before pursuing support options. If Apple Hardware Test doesn’t detect a hardware failure, the problem may be software related. For more information about Apple Hardware Test, see the Apple Hardware Test Read Me file on the Mac OS X Install Disc 1.Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution 45 Reinstalling Software Using Remote Install Mac OS X Use Remote Install Mac OS X on the partner computer whose optical disc drive you want to share (installation instructions for this and other components of the DVD or CD Sharing Setup software are on page 15) when you want to do one of the following tasks on your MacBook Air:  Reinstall Mac OS X and other software that came with your MacBook Air  Reset your password  Use Disk Utility to repair the MacBook Air hard disk Note: You can also do these tasks using a MacBook Air SuperDrive (available separately at www.apple.com/store). See page 49.46 Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution To use Remote Install Mac OS X: 1 Insert the Mac OS X Install Disc 1 into the optical disc drive of the other computer. 2 If the other computer is a Mac, open /Applications/Utilities/Remote Install Mac OS X. On Windows, choose “Remote Install Mac OS X” from the Install Assistant. 3 Read the introduction and click Continue. 4 Choose the install disc you want to use, and click Continue. 5 Choose a network connection: AirPort, if you are using an AirPort network, or Ethernet, if the other computer is on an Ethernet network and you have an optional Apple USB Ethernet Adapter connecting your MacBook Air to the same network. Click Continue. 6 Restart your MacBook Air and hold down the Option key as it starts up, until you see a list of available startup disks. 7 Click Continue in Remote Install Mac OS X.Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution 47 8 If you chose AirPort as your network in step 5, on your MacBook Air choose your AirPort network from the pop-up list. If the network is secure, you are prompted for a password. You can enter a private network name by choosing the ellipsis (...) and typing the name. 9 If you chose AirPort as your network in step 5, when you see the AirPort status icon indicating signal strength, click Continue in Remote Install Mac OS X. 10 On your MacBook Air, click the arrow button beneath the installer icon and then do one of the following:  If you want to reinstall Mac OS X or iLife ’08 applications, go to “Reinstalling the Software That Came with Your MacBook Air” on page 47.  If you forgot your password and need to reset it, go to “Resetting Your Password” on page 48.  If you want to run Disk Utility, go to “Using Disk Utility” on page 49. Reinstalling the Software That Came with Your MacBook Air Before you install: 1 Back up your essential files. Apple recommends that you back up the information on your hard disk before restoring software. You can do this by connecting the MacBook Air SuperDrive and burning important information to DVDs or CDs, or by attaching an external hard drive to the USB port on your MacBook Air. Apple is not responsible for any lost data. 2 Make sure your power adapter is connected and plugged in.48 Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution To install Mac OS X and the applications that came with your MacBook Air, using a partner computer: 1 Follow the procedure for using Remote Install Mac OS X beginning on page 46. 2 Click Continue in Remote Install Mac OS X. Status messages appear on the other computer’s screen during installation. 3 Click Customize to select what to install (Mac OS X and Bundled Software, or Bundled Software Only), or click Install to perform a basic installation. To install iCal, iChat AV, iSync, iTunes, Safari, and the iLife ’08 applications, you need to select Install Mac OS X and Bundled Software. 4 Follow the onscreen instructions, selecting your MacBook Air as the destination volume for installation. Note: To restore Mac OS X on your computer to the original factory settings, click Options in the “Select a Destination” pane of the Installer, and then select “Erase and Install.” This option erases your MacBook Air hard disk, so be sure you’ve backed up important information. 5 Click OK in Remote Install Mac OS X, and, when installation is done, click Quit to exit Remote Install Mac OS X. Resetting Your Password You can reset your administrator password and passwords for all other accounts. To reset your password, using a partner computer and Remote Install Mac OS X: 1 Follow the procedure for using Remote Install Mac OS X beginning on page 46. 2 Click Continue in Remote Install Mac OS X.Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution 49 3 On your MacBook Air, choose Utilities > Reset Password from the menu bar and follow the onscreen instructions. When you finish, quit Mac OS X Installer. 4 On the other computer, click Quit to exit Remote Install Mac OS X. Using Disk Utility When you need to repair, verify, or erase your MacBook Air hard disk, use Disk Utility by sharing the optical disc drive of another computer. To use Disk Utility from a partner computer: 1 Follow the procedure for using Remote Install Mac OS X beginning on page 46. 2 Click Continue in Remote Install Mac OS X. 3 On your MacBook Air, choose Installer > Open Disk Utility and then follow the instructions in the First Aid pane to see if Disk Utility can repair the disk. When you finish, quit Mac OS X Installer on your MacBook Air. 4 On the other computer, click Quit to exit Remote Install Mac OS X. If using Disk Utility doesn’t help, try reinstalling your computer’s system software. See “Reinstalling the Software That Came with Your MacBook Air” on page 47. Reinstalling Software Using the MacBook Air SuperDrive To install Mac OS X and the applications that came with your MacBook Air, using a MacBook Air SuperDrive: 1 Connect the MacBook Air SuperDrive to your MacBook Air and insert the Mac OS X Install Disc 1. 2 Double-click “Install Mac OS X and Bundled Software.” To install just applications, select Install Bundled Software Only. 50 Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution To install iCal, iChat AV, iSync, iTunes, Safari, and the iLife ’08 applications, you need to select “Install Mac OS X and Bundled Software.” 3 Follow the onscreen instructions, selecting your MacBook Air as the destination volume for installation. Note: To restore Mac OS X on your computer to the original factory settings, click Options in the “Select a Destination” pane of the Installer, and then select “Erase and Install.” To reset your password, using a MacBook Air SuperDrive: 1 Connect the MacBook Air SuperDrive to your MacBook Air and insert the Mac OS X Install Disc 1. 2 Restart your MacBook Air and hold down the C key as it starts up. 3 Choose Utilities > Reset Password from the menu bar. Follow the onscreen instructions. To use Disk Utility from a MacBook Air SuperDrive: 1 Connect the MacBook Air SuperDrive to your MacBook Air and insert the Mac OS X Install Disc 1. 2 Restart your MacBook Air and hold down the C key as it starts up. 3 Choose Installer > Open Disk Utility. When Disk Utility opens, follow the instructions in the First Aid pane.Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution 51 Problems with AirPort Extreme Wireless Communication If you have trouble using AirPort Extreme wireless communication:  Make sure the computer or network you are trying to connect to is running and has a wireless access point.  Make sure you have properly configured the software according to the instructions that came with your base station or access point.  Make sure you are within range of the other computer or the network. Nearby electronic devices or metal structures can interfere with wireless communication and reduce this range. Repositioning or rotating the computer might improve reception.  Check the AirPort (Z) status icon in the menu bar. Up to four bars appear, indicating signal strength. If signal strength is low, try changing your location.  See AirPort Help (choose Help > Mac Help, and then choose Library > AirPort Help from the menu bar). Also see the instructions that came with the wireless device for more information. Problems with Your Internet Connection Your MacBook Air has a Network Setup Assistant application to help you set up an Internet connection. Open System Preferences and click Network. Click the “Assist me” button to open Network Setup Assistant. If you have trouble with your Internet connection, try using Network Diagnostics.52 Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution To use Network Diagnostics: 1 Choose Apple () > System Preferences. 2 Click Network and then click “Assist me.” 3 Click Diagnostics to open Network Diagnostics. 4 Follow the onscreen instructions. If Network Diagnostics can’t resolve the problem, there may be a problem with the Internet service provider (ISP) you are trying to connect to, with an external device you are using to connect to your ISP, or with the server you are trying to access. If you have two or more computers sharing an Internet connection, be sure that your wireless network is set up properly. You need to know if your ISP provides only one IP address or if it provides multiple IP addresses, one for each computer. If only one IP address is provided, then you must have a router capable of sharing the connection, also known as network address translation (NAT) or “IP masquerading.” For setup information, check the documentation provided with your router or ask the person who set up your network. You can use an AirPort Base Station to share one IP address among multiple computers. For information about using an AirPort Base Station, check Mac Help or visit the Apple AirPort website at www.apple.com/support/airport. If you cannot resolve the issue using these steps, contact your ISP or network administrator.Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution 53 Keeping Your Software Up to Date You can connect to the Internet and automatically download and install the latest free software versions, drivers, and other enhancements from Apple. When you are connected to the Internet, Software Update checks Apple’s Internet servers to see if any updates are available for your computer. You can set your MacBook Air to check the Apple servers periodically, and download and install updated software. To check for updated software: 1 Open System Preferences. 2 Click the Software Update icon and follow the instructions on the screen.  For more information, search for “Software Update” in Mac Help.  For the latest information about Mac OS X, go to www.apple.com/macosx. Learning More, Service, and Support Your MacBook Air does not have any user-serviceable or user-replaceable parts. If you need service, contact Apple or take your MacBook Air to an Apple Authorized Service Provider. You can find more information about the MacBook Air through online resources, onscreen help, System Profiler, or Apple Hardware Test. Online Resources For online service and support information, go to www.apple.com/support. Choose your country from the pop-up menu. You can search the AppleCare Knowledge Base, check for software updates, or get help on Apple’s discussion forums. 54 Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution Onscreen Help You can often find answers to your questions, as well as instructions and troubleshooting information, in Mac Help. Choose Help > Mac Help. System Profiler To get information about your MacBook Air, use System Profiler. It shows you what hardware and software is installed, the serial number and operating system version, how much memory is installed, and more. To open System Profiler, choose Apple () > About This Mac from the menu bar and then click More Info. AppleCare Service and Support Your MacBook Air comes with 90 days of technical support and one year of hardware repair warranty coverage at an Apple Store retail location or an Apple-authorized repair center, such as an Apple Authorized Service Provider. You can extend your coverage by purchasing the AppleCare Protection Plan. For information, visit www.apple.com/support/products or visit the website address for your country listed below. If you need assistance, AppleCare telephone support representatives can help you with installing and opening applications, and basic troubleshooting. Call the support center number nearest you (the first 90 days are complimentary). Have the purchase date and your MacBook Air serial number ready when you call.Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution 55 Your 90 days of complimentary telephone support begins on the date of purchase and telephone fees may apply. Telephone numbers are subject to change, and local and national telephone rates may apply. A complete list is available on the web: Country Phone Website United States 1-800-275-2273 www.apple.com/support Australia (61) 133-622 www.apple.com/au/support Canada (English) (French) 1-800-263-3394 www.apple.com/ca/support www.apple.com/ca/fr/support Ireland (353) 1850 946 191 www.apple.com/ie/support New Zealand 00800-7666-7666 www.apple.com/nz/support United Kingdom (44) 0870 876 0753 www.apple.com/uk/support www.apple.com/contact/phone_contacts.html www.apple.com/contact/phone_contacts.html56 Chapter 3 Problem, Meet Solution Locating Your Product Serial Number Use one of these methods to find your computer’s serial number:  Turn your MacBook Air over. The serial number is etched into the case, near the hinge.  Choose Apple () > About This Mac and then click the version number beneath the words “Mac OS X.” Clicking cycles between the Mac OS X version number, the build version, and the serial number.  Open System Profiler (in /Applications/Utilities/) and click Hardware. Serial number4 4 Last, but Not Least www.apple.com/environment Mac Help ergonomics58 Chapter 4 Last, but Not Least For your safety and that of your equipment, follow these rules for handling and cleaning your MacBook Air and for working more comfortably. Keep these instructions handy for reference by you and others. Important Safety Information Avoiding water and wet locations Keep your computer away from sources of liquid, such as drinks, washbasins, bathtubs, shower stalls, and so on. Protect your computer from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow, and fog. Handling your MacBook Air Set up your MacBook Air on a stable work surface that allows for adequate air circulation under and around the computer. Do not operate your MacBook Air on a pillow or other soft material, as the material can block the airflow vents. Never place anything over the keyboard when operating your computer. Never push objects into the ventilation openings. The bottom of your MacBook Air may become very warm during normal use. If your MacBook Air is on your lap and gets uncomfortably warm, remove it from your lap and place it on a stable work surface. WARNING: Failure to follow these safety instructions could result in fire, electric shock, or other injury or damage.Chapter 4 Last, but Not Least 59 Using the 45W MagSafe Power Adapter Make sure the AC plug or AC power cord is fully inserted into the power adapter and the electrical prongs on your AC plug are in their completely extended position before plugging the adapter into a power outlet. Use only the power adapter that came with your MacBook Air, or an Apple-authorized power adapter that is compatible with this product. The AC power cord provides a grounded connection. The power adapter may become very warm during normal use. Always put the power adapter directly into a power outlet, or place it on the floor in a well-ventilated location. Disconnect the power adapter and disconnect any other cables if any of the following conditions exists:  You want to clean the case (use only the recommended procedure described on page 61).  The power cord or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.  Your MacBook Air or power adapter is exposed to rain, excessive moisture, or liquid spilled into the case.  Your MacBook Air or power adapter has been dropped, the case has been damaged, or you suspect that service or repair is required. The MagSafe power port contains a magnet that can erase data on a credit card, iPod, or other device. To preserve your data, do not place these and other magnetically sensitive material or devices within 1 inch (25 mm) of this port. If debris gets into the MagSafe power port, remove it gently with a dry cotton swab.60 Chapter 4 Last, but Not Least Using the battery Discontinue use of your battery if it has been dropped, crushed, bent, or deformed. Do not expose the battery to temperatures above 212° F or 100° C. Do not remove the battery from your MacBook Air. The battery should be replaced only by an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Avoiding hearing damage Permanent hearing loss may occur if earbuds or headphones are used at high volume. You can adapt over time to a higher volume of sound that may sound normal but can be damaging to your hearing. If you experience ringing in your ears or muffled speech, stop listening and have your hearing checked. The louder the volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing experts suggest that to protect your hearing:  Limit the amount of time you use earbuds or headphones at high volume.  Avoid turning up the volume to block out noisy surroundings.  Turn the volume down if you can’t hear people speaking near you. High-risk activities This computer system is not intended for use in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communications systems, air traffic control systems, or for any other uses where the failure of the computer system could lead to death, personal injury, or severe environmental damage. Important Handling Information NOTICE: Failure to follow these handling instructions could result in damage to your MacBook Air or other property.Chapter 4 Last, but Not Least 61 Carrying your MacBook Air If you carry your MacBook Air in a bag or briefcase, make sure that there are no loose items (such as paper clips or coins) that could accidentally get inside the computer through vent openings or get stuck inside a port. Also, keep magnetically sensitive items away from the MagSafe power port. Using connectors and ports Never force a connector into a port. When connecting a device, make sure the port is free of debris, that the connector matches the port, and that you have positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port. Storing your MacBook Air If you are going to store your MacBook Air for an extended period of time, keep it in a cool location (ideally, 71° F or 22° C) and discharge the battery to 50 percent. When storing your computer for longer than five months, discharge the battery to approximately 50 percent. To maintain the capacity of the battery, recharge the battery to 50 percent every six months or so. Cleaning your MacBook Air When cleaning the outside of your computer and its components, first shut down your MacBook Air, and then unplug the power adapter. Then use a damp, soft, lint-free cloth to clean the computer’s exterior. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. Do not spray liquid directly on the computer. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, or abrasives that might damage the finish. Cleaning your MacBook Air screen To clean your MacBook Air screen, first shut down your MacBook Air and unplug the power adapter. Then use the cleaning cloth that came with your MacBook Air to wipe the screen. Dampen the cloth with water if necessary. Do not spray liquid directly on the screen.62 Chapter 4 Last, but Not Least Understanding Ergonomics Here are some tips for setting up a healthy work environment. Keyboard and Trackpad When you use the keyboard and trackpad, your shoulders should be relaxed. Your upper arm and forearm should form an angle that is slightly greater than a right angle, with your wrist and hand in roughly a straight line. This Not thisChapter 4 Last, but Not Least 63 Use a light touch when typing or using the trackpad and keep your hands and fingers relaxed. Avoid rolling your thumbs under your palms. Change hand positions often to avoid fatigue. Some computer users might develop discomfort in their hands, wrists, or arms after intensive work without breaks. If you begin to develop chronic pain or discomfort in your hands, wrists, or arms, consult a qualified health specialist. External Mouse If you use an external mouse, position the mouse at the same height as the keyboard and within a comfortable reach. Chair An adjustable chair that provides firm, comfortable support is best. Adjust the height of the chair so your thighs are horizontal and your feet are flat on the floor. The back of the chair should support your lower back (lumbar region). Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the backrest to fit your body properly. This Not this64 Chapter 4 Last, but Not Least You might have to raise your chair so that your forearms and hands are at the proper angle to the keyboard. If this makes it impossible to rest your feet flat on the floor, you can use a footrest with adjustable height and tilt to make up for any gap between the floor and your feet. Or you can lower the desktop to eliminate the need for a footrest. Another option is to use a desk with a keyboard tray that’s lower than the regular work surface. Built-in Display Adjust the angle of the display to minimize glare and reflections from overhead lights and windows. Do not force the display if you meet resistance. The display is not meant to open past 125 degrees. You can adjust the brightness of the screen when you take the computer from one work location to another, or if the lighting in your work area changes. More information about ergonomics is available on the web: Apple and the Environment Apple Inc. recognizes its responsibility to minimize the environmental impacts of its operations and products. More information is available on the web: www.apple.com/about/ergonomics www.apple.com/environment65 Regulatory Compliance Information FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. L‘utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit étre prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. Radio and Television Interference This computer equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:  Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.  Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio.  Move the computer farther away from the television or radio.  Plug the computer in to an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple Authorized Service Provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Inc., could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product has demonstrated EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables (including Ethernet network cables) between system components. It is important that you use compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices.66 Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only): Apple Inc. Corporate Compliance 1 Infinite Loop M/S 26-A Cupertino, CA 95014-2084 Wireless Radio Use This device is restricted to indoor use when operating in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency band. Cet appareil doit être utilisé à l’intérieur. Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy The radiated output power of the AirPort Extreme technology is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, it is advised to use the wireless equipment in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. FCC Bluetooth Wireless Compliance The antenna used with this transmitter must not be collocated or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter subject to the conditions of the FCC Grant. Bluetooth Industry Canada Statement This Class B device meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la Class B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. Industry Canada Statement Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Europe—EU Declaration of Conformity See: www.apple.com/euro/compliance Korea Statements Singapore Wireless Certification Taiwan Wireless Statements Taiwan Class B Statement Russia67 VCCI Class B Statement External USB Modem Information When connecting your MacBook Air to the phone line using an external USB modem, refer to the telecommunications agency information in the documentation that came with your modem. ENERGY STAR® Compliance As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Apple has determined that standard configurations of this product meet the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency. The ENERGY STAR® program is a partnership with electronic equipment manufacturers to promote energy-efficient products. Reducing energy consumption of products saves money and helps conserve valuable resources. This computer is shipped with power management enabled with the computer set to sleep after 10 minutes of user inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or trackpad button or press any key on the keyboard. For more information about ENERGY STAR®, visit: www.energystar.gov68 Disposal and Recycling Information This symbol indicates that your product must be disposed of properly according to local laws and regulations. When your product reaches its end of life, contact Apple or your local authorities to learn about recycling options. For information about Apple’s recycling program, go to www.apple.com/environment/recycling. Battery Disposal Information Dispose of batteries according to your local environmental laws and guidelines. Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen. Taiwan: European Union—Disposal Information: The symbol above means that according to local laws and regulations your product should be disposed of separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities. Some collection points accept products for free. The separate collection and recycling of your product at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment.Looking for Something?70 Looking for Something? Index A AC plug 10, 11 AC power adapter. See power adapter AC power cord 11 adjusting your display 29 AirPort Extreme troubleshooting 51 ambient light sensor 27 AppleCare 54 Apple Hardware Test, using 44 Apple Remote 27, 37 application freeze 40 applications Front Row 27, 37 iChat AV 27 iLife ’08 36 Keynote 27 B battery charging 34 location 27 performance 34 storing 61 blinking question mark 41 brightness keys 29 built-in speaker 27 button, power 12, 27 C camera. See iSight video camera carrying your computer 61 changing the desktop 14 password 48, 50 System Preferences 14 charging the battery 34 cleaning the display 61 your computer 61 cleaning cloth 61 computer disposal 68 freezes 41 putting to sleep 22 shutting down 23 turning on 12 won’t turn on 42 connection problems with another computer 43 Control-click 32 cord, AC power 11 D Dashboard 29 desktop, customizing 14 Disk Utility 49, 50 display adjusting settings 29 cleaning 61 external 31 goes black 43 disposing of your computer 68 Dock 35 downloading software 53 DVD or CD Sharing 19, 20 DVD or CD Sharing Setup software, installing 16 DVDs in package 9 E environmental impact 64 erasing a disk 49 ergonomics 62 Exposé All Windows key 29 external display port 31 F F1 to F12 function keys 29 Fast-forward key 29Looking for Something? 71 flashing question mark 41 Force Quit 40 forward delete 32 Front Row application 27, 37 frozen application 40 Function (fn) key 29 H hand positions 62 headphone jack 31 Help, finding answers 35 I iChat AV application 27 iLife ’08 applications 36 illuminated keyboard 27 infrared receiver (IR) 27 installation discs 9 installing DVD or CD Sharing Setup 16 iSight video camera 27 K keyboard ALS sensor 27 ergonomics 62 features 28 shortcuts 32 See also keys keyboard illumination keys 29 Keynote application 27 keys brightness 29 Dashboard 29 Exposé 29 function 29 keyboard illumination 29 media 29 Media Eject 29 Mute 29 volume control 29 L lights, sleep indicator 27 M Mac Help 35 Mac OS X installation discs 9 Mac OS X website 36 MagSafe power adapter. See power adapter MagSafe power port 31 Media Eject key 29 media keys 29 micro-DVI port 31 microphone 27 migrating information 16 Migration Assistant 16 mouse 31, 63 See also trackpad Mute key 29 N Network Diagnostics 51 Network Setup Assistant 51 O online resources 53 optical discs for system software 9, 69 optical disc sharing. See DVD or CD Sharing P paging through documents using trackpad 34 partner computer connection problems 43 Disk Utility 49 DVD or CD Sharing Setup software 16 installing Mac OS X 45 resetting your password 48 password, resetting 48, 50 pinching to zoom 33 Play/Pause key 29 plug, AC 10, 11 port hatch 31 ports hatch 31 headphone 31 MagSafe power 31 micro-DVI 31 USB 2.0 31 power adapter plugging in 5972 Looking for Something? port 31 using 10 power button 12, 27 problems computer freezes 41 computer won’t turn on 42 connecting to partner computer 43 display goes black 43 pointer won’t move 40 trouble using AirPort 51 putting your computer to sleep 22 Q question mark, flashing 41 R rechargeable battery 34 Remote DVD or CD 19, 20 Remote Install Mac OS X Disk Utility 49 installing Mac OS X 45 resetting your password 48 repairing a disk 49 resetting your password 48, 50 Rewind key 29 right click 32 rotating objects using trackpad 34 S safety general safety instructions 58 important information 8 power adapter 59 scrolling trackpad feature 27 scrolling with two fingers 33 secondary click 32 serial number, locating 56 service and support 54 Setup Assistant 13 shared optical disc 19, 20 sharing files 19, 20 shutting down 23 sleep mode indicator light 27 putting computer to sleep 22 software, updating 53 Software Update preferences 53 speaker 27 specifications 37 stopping an application 40 the computer 23 storing your computer 61 support 54 swiping to move quickly through documents 34 System Preferences customizing the desktop 14 Energy Saver 22 Software Update 53 System Profiler 54 T three-finger swiping 34 trackpad location 27 paging 34 scrolling 27 shortcuts 32 swiping 34 zooming 27 troubleshooting AirPort 51 AppleCare 54 computer freezes 41 computer won’t turn on 42 display goes black 43 hardware problems 44 partner computer 43 pointer won’t move 40 service and support 53 using Mac Help 54 See also problems turning on your computer 12 two-finger pinching 33 two-finger rotating 34 typing position 62Looking for Something? 73 U updating software 53 USB connections 37 ports 31 V verifying a disk 49 video camera indicator light 27 micro-DVI port 31 volume control keys 29 W waking your computer 22 Z zooming using the trackpad 27, 33K Apple Inc. © 2008 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Apple. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. Apple 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014-2084 408-996-1010 www.apple.com Apple, the Apple logo, AirPort, AirPort Extreme, Cover Flow, Exposé, iCal, iChat, iLife, iMovie, iPhoto, iPod, iSight, iTunes, Keynote, Mac, Macintosh, Mac OS, MacBook, and MagSafe are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Finder, iPhone, Safari, and Spotlight are trademarks of Apple Inc. AppleCare and Apple Store are service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ENERGY STAR® is a U.S. registered trademark. Intel, Intel Core, and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corp. in the U.S. and other countries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license. Other company and product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works, © 1992–1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. The product described in this manual incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603, 4,577,216, 4,819,098 and 4,907,093 licensed for limited viewing uses only. Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada. Finder Dock USB 3 SD USB 3 MagSafe 2 耳機 Thunderbolt 哈囉! 快速入門指南 歡迎使用新的 MacBook Air。讓我們為您介紹。 Multi-Touch 觸控 式軌跡板 MagSafe 2 電源接頭 電源轉換器 交流電源線 電源按鈕 交流電插頭 開始使用 當您第一次啟動 MacBook Air 時,“設定輔助程式”會協助您繼續進行。 請依照一些簡單的步驟執行,以快速地連接 Wi-Fi 網路、從其他 Mac 或 PC 傳送項目,並建立 Mac 的使用者帳號。 您也可以使用 Apple ID 來登入,以便從 App Store 下載應用程式、購買 iTunes Store 和 Apple Online Store 上的內容、存取 iCloud 並使用 FaceTime 進行視訊通話。如果您沒有 Apple ID,您可輕鬆建立免費的 Apple ID。 Multi-Touch 手勢 您可以在觸控式軌跡板上使用簡單的手勢來執行多種 MacBook Air 的操 作。以下是最常用的手勢。 按一下 按下觸控式軌跡板的任一處來點按。 或者,如果啟用了“點一下來點 按”,點一下表面即可。 輔助點按(按右鍵) 用兩指按一下來打開快速鍵選單。 或者,如果啟用了“點一下來點 按”,請用兩指點一下任一處。 滑動導覽 用兩指滑動來翻閱網頁、文件和其 他項目。 按兩下 按兩下軌跡板的任一處。或者,如果 啟用了“點一下來點按”,請點兩下 表面。 兩指捲視 用兩指在軌跡板上滑動,以上下或側 邊的方向來捲視。 智慧型縮放 用兩指點兩下軌跡板來快速放大網頁。 開合縮放 用拇指和食指開合來精準地放大和縮 小照片及網頁。 切換全螢幕應用程式 用三指滑動來切換不同的全螢幕應用 程式。 檢視 Launchpad 用四指開合來檢視所有的 Launchpad 應用程式。 旋轉 順時針或逆時針旋轉拇指和食指來旋 轉影像。 檢視 Mission Control 用三指往上滑動來檢視 Mac 上所有已 開啟的視窗。 更多資訊 從“蘋果”選單選擇“系統偏好設定”, 並且按一下“觸控式軌跡板”來瞭解更多 手勢的相關資訊。 繼續進行 您可以輕易地從其他 Mac 或 PC 上將文件、郵件、照片、音樂和影片等檔 案傳送到新的 Mac 上。第一次啟動新的 Mac 時,會循序漸進地引導您完 成這些程序。您只要依照螢幕上的指示執行即可。 瞭解桌面 您可以在 Mac 的桌面上找到所有項目並執行所有工作。底部的 Dock 可以 放置您最常使用的應用程式。您也可以在此打開“系統偏好設定”,讓您 自定 Mac 的桌面與其他設定。按一下 Finder 圖像可快速地取用檔案和檔 案夾。上方的選單列顯示了許多關於 Mac 的有用資訊。若要查看無線 Internet 連線的狀態,請按一下 Wi-Fi 圖像。您的 Mac 會自動連接您在設 定期間所選擇的網路。 iCloud iCloud 能儲存您的音樂、照片、郵件和其他內容,並無線推播到您的 Mac、iPhone、iPad、iPod touch 甚至是 PC 上。全部都不需連接或同步。 因此,當您在某部裝置上購買歌曲時,即會自動下載到所有其他裝置上。 有了“照片串流”,最新的照片便會顯示在所有裝置上。若要自定 iCloud 的設定,請打開“蘋果”選單,選擇“系統偏好設定”,並且按一下 iCloud。接著使用 Apple ID 登入,並選擇您要使用的 iCloud 功能。 輔助說明 選單 選單列 系統偏好設定 Wi-Fi 狀態 重要事項 開始使用電腦前,請先仔細閱讀此文件以及「重要產品資訊指南」中的安 全資訊。 更多資訊 您可以在 www.apple.com/tw/macbookair 網站找到更多資訊、觀看示範教 學並瞭解其他 MacBook Air 的功能。 輔助說明 在“輔助說明中心”裡,您可以找到問題的解答、說明和疑難排解的相關 資訊。按一下 Finder 圖像,按一下選單列上的“輔助說明”,並且選 擇“輔助說明中心”。 Mac OS X 工具程式 若您的 Mac 發生問題,“Mac OS X 工具程式”能協助您修復電腦的固態 硬碟、從Time Machine 備份回復軟體和資料,或清除固態硬碟並重新安 裝 OS X Lion 和 Apple 應用程式。您也可以使用 Safari 來取得線上輔助說 明。如果您的 Mac 偵測到問題,即會自動打開“Mac OS X 工具程式”。 或者,您也可以重新開機並按住 Command + R 鍵來手動開啟此程式。 支援 您的 MacBook Air 隨附有 90 天的技術支援和一年的硬體維修保固, 提供服務的是 Apple Store 經銷商或 Apple 授權服務供應商。請參訪 www.apple.com/tw/support/macbookair 以取得 MacBook Air 的技術支援。 或致電台灣:(886) 0800-095-988。 www.apple.com/support/country 某些功能無法在部分地區使用。 TM and © 2012 Apple Inc.保留一切權利。Designed by Apple in California. Printed in XXXX. TA034-6355-A FaceTime HD 攝影機Launchpad Mission Control Safari 網頁瀏覽器 Mail iTunes iCal FaceTime iPhoto iMovie Mac App Store *發話者和接收者都需要配備 FaceTime 功能的裝置。部分地區無法使用此功能。 打開 Launchpad 按一下 Dock 上的 Launchpad 圖像。 檔案夾 將應用程式拖到其他應用 程式上,藉此製作應用程 式的群組。 Launchpad 是 Mac 上所有應用程式 的集中處。只要按一下 Dock 上的 Launchpad 圖像。即會以全螢幕顯 示所有應用程式已開啟的視窗。 依您的個人喜好來排列應用程式, 用檔案夾將應用程式收集成群組, 或是從 Mac 上刪除應用程式。當您 從 Mac App Store 下載應用程式時, 它會自動顯示在 Launchpad 中。 按一下 Dock 上的圖像,並使用 Multi-Touch 多點觸控手勢來快速且 輕鬆地瀏覽網路。在觸控式軌跡板 上用兩指上下捲動。用兩指左右滑 動來往返於不同的網頁。用兩指點 Top Sites 快速概覽您最常造訪 的網站。 兩下來放大網頁,然後再點兩下來 返回原始大小。或是兩指開合來放 大或縮小。 Mission Control 能讓您鳥瞰 Mac 上 所有正在執行的項目。在 Dock 上 按一下 Mission Control 圖像,桌面 即會縮小並顯示所有應用程式已開 啟的視窗、所有全螢幕應用程式和 Dashboard(此處收集了所有名為 widget 的迷你應用程式)。按一下 任一個項目來將其放大。您可將 Mission Control 視為系統的樞紐, 只要在此按一下即可檢視任何項目 或前往任何位置。 打開 Mission Control 按一下 Dock 上的 Mission Control 圖像。 加入桌面空間 按上方橫列右側的 + 按 鈕來加入新的空間。 Dashboard 位於左上方可 輕易取用。 閱讀列表 按一下眼鏡圖像來儲存 網頁,供您稍後閱讀。 全螢幕顯示方式 按一下全螢幕按鈕來顯示 全螢幕內容。 電子郵件總覽 只要按一下即可在 Mail 中檢視所有帳號。 對話顯示方式 在對話討論串中檢視 所有電子郵件。 搜尋 快速縮小搜尋結果, 來找出您要的項目。 即使您未連接 Internet,Mail 也能 讓您在單一且沒有廣告信的信箱中 管理您的所有郵件帳號。它能與大 多數的電子郵件標準一起使用,包 含 POP3 和 IMAP,以及常用的電子 郵件服務,例如 Gmail、Yahoo! Mail 和 AOL Mail。您也可以搭配 Mail 來使用您從 iCloud 取得的免費 me.com 電子郵件帳號。當您第一 次打開 Mail 時,“設定輔助程式” 會協助您開始使用。 iTunes 能讓您在 Mac 上整理和播放 數位音樂和視訊。您可以在 iTunes Store 中購買新的音樂、影片、電 視節目、書籍和其他內容。您也可 透過 iTunes 來使用 iPad、iPhone 和 iPod touch 的 App Store。 iTunes Store 尋找並購買新的音樂、 影片和其他內容。 Genius 組曲 讓 iTunes 搜尋您的音樂資料庫, 並組合能完美搭配的歌曲。 多重行事曆 在同一位置取用所有 行事曆。 使用 iCal 來記錄您的繁忙行程。您 可以製作不同的行事曆,供您在家 中、學校或公司裡使用。您可在單 一視窗中檢視所有行事曆,或只選 擇您想檢視的行事曆。使用“通訊 錄”中的聯絡資訊來製作和傳送邀 請函,然後查看哪些人回應了邀 請。使用 iCloud 在所有裝置上自動 更新行事曆,或與其他 iCloud 使用 者共享行事曆。 製作 製作攝影集、 卡片和月曆。 面孔 iPhoto 可依據人物的 面孔來整理照片。 事件 按兩下“事件”來瀏 覽照片。 iPhoto 是您在 Mac 上整理、瀏覽、 編輯和共享照片的最佳方式。您可 以依照“面孔”、“位置”和“事 件”來整理照片。若要用郵件傳送 照片,或發佈照片到 Facebook 上,只要選取照片,並且按一下螢 幕右下方的“共享”即可。或是按 一下“製作”來將您喜愛的照片製 作成攝影集、月曆和卡片。 Mac 上的 FaceTime 能讓您使用 Mac 與其他 iPad、iPhone、iPod touch 或 Mac 的使用者面對面交談。* 若要設定 FaceTime,只需要 Apple ID 和電子郵件帳號。若要啟 動視訊通話,請按一下“通訊錄” 聯絡資訊列表中的項目即可。 喜好項目 將常用聯絡資訊加入“喜好 項目”以便輕鬆取用。 行事曆顯示方式 選擇您偏好的顯示方 式:日、週、月或年。 加入事件 按兩下來製作新的 事件。 Mac App Store 是尋找和下載數以千 計 Mac 應用程式的最佳途徑,內容 從遊戲、社群網路到生產力工具, 應有盡有。只要一個步驟就能將新 的應用程式安裝到 Launchpad。 您可以在每一部授權您個人使用的 Mac 上安裝應用程式,甚至可以重 新下載應用程式。Mac App Store 會通知您取得應用程式的更新項 目,讓您隨時擁有最新的版本。 請按一下 Dock 上的 Mac App Store 圖像來將其開啟。 事件瀏覽器 輸入的視訊會顯示於此, 讓您取用所有剪輯片段。 計畫案瀏覽器 只要將您選擇的內容放入 計畫案,即可製作精彩的 影片。 iMovie 能彙整您的所有視訊剪輯片 段,並提供您需要的所有編輯工 具、主題和特效,來將它們轉換成 特殊的作品。只需輕鬆點按,即可 快速地將它們編輯成精彩的影片, 或是好萊塢風格的電影預告片。您 也可使用 iMovie 來從大多數的數位 攝影機、iPad、iPhone、iPod touch 或 Mac 上的 FaceTime 攝影機輸入 視訊。 即時更新 購買之應用程式的更新項 目會自動顯示。 尋找新應用程式 瀏覽數以千計的應用程 式,並直接下載到 Launchpad。 App Store デベロッパ向け マーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 2 概要 3 App Storeバッジ 基本情報 4 グラフィック・スタンダード 5 注意事項 6 参考例 7 Apple製品を使用する 基本情報 8 注意事項 9 参考例 10 カスタム画像と動画 注意事項 12 アプリケーションの宣伝 基本情報 13 注意事項 14 オーディオとビデオ 15 アクセサリが付属するアプリケーション 基本情報 16 アクセサリのパッケージ 17 App Storeアイコン 18 法律上の必要条件 19 コンテンツApp Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 3 このガイドラインは、iOSデベロッパプログラムのメンバーがウェブサイトや広告を含むすべての マーケティングコミュニケーションにおいて、App Storeとの提携を正しく、効果的に行うための 情報を提供します。本ガイドラインは、App Storeバッジの使用方法やApp Storeにおける最良 のマーケティング方法、さらにApple製品の画像を使用する際の注意点などを説明しています。 重要:Appleの承認が必要です マーケティングや広告の目的でApple製品が登場する 印刷やビデオ形式の素材、または注目度の高いあらゆ る形式の素材はすべて、出版あるいは放送される前に Appleへ提出されたうえで、承認を得る必要がありま す。企画内容や絵コンテ、ラフカットを下記の要領で メールにてお送りください。返答には最低5営業日から7 営業日ほどかかりますのでご了承ください。この期間を 過ぎてもAppleから返答が来なかった場合でも、提出 した素材が承認されたわけではありませんのでご注意 ください。まだ完成していない制作中の素材を審査す ることもできますが、出版あるいは放送前に最終的に 仕上がった完成作品の承認が必要になります。 Apple製品のカスタム画像や動画などが含まれる広告 素材はすべて、出版あるいは放送される前にAppleに 提出し、承認を得る必要があります。 マーケティングの審査:Appleによる審査を受けるには、 マーケティング素材をappstoremarketing@apple. comに提出してください。マーケティングには有料 メディア広告以外のすべての宣伝コミュニケーションも含ま れます。例えば、ビデオクリップやチュートリアル、印刷 されたニュースレターやポスター、その他の印刷宣伝 物などです。コミュニケーションの簡潔な説明や、メ ディア媒体、コミュニケーションゴールなどを説明してく ださい。 広告の審査:Appleによる審査を受けるには、広告素材 をappstoreadvertising@apple.comに提出してくだ さい。広告とは、有料メディアを含む、宣伝を目的とした あらゆるコミュニケーションを指します。例えば、テレビ CM、印刷広告、屋外広告、その他の料金が発生するメ ディアです。すべてのクリエイティブ素材とメディアプラ ン(広告を出すタイミングや場所など)、さらに費用の詳 細も提出してください。 提出要件 審査に必要な素材の提出はすべて英語で行ってくださ い。また、必要に応じて素材のコンテンツなども英語に ローカライズされたものを提出してください。メールに 素材を添付する、安全なFTPログインを提供する、ある いはパスワード保護のついたウェブデリバリーサービス を使ってください。素材と一緒に次の情報を提出してく ださい:会社名とApp Storeに表示されるアプリケーショ ンの名称、Apple App ID(9ケタのアプリケーションID 番号)、連絡用の電話番号。 Appleが提供するマーケティング素材を使用するため の条件 本ガイドラインに掲載されているApp Storeバッジと iPhone、iPad、iPod touchの画像は、App Marketing Artwork License Agreementに同意したiOSデベ ロッパプログラムのメンバーのみが使用を許可されてい ます。このライセンス契約は、App Store Resource Centerの「Marketing Resources」ページで閲覧、ま 概要 たはダウンロードすることができます。Appleは、App StoreバッジやApple製品の画像の使用方法が本ガイ ドラインと一致しない場合、またはAppleが不適切で あると判断した場合に、使用許可を取り消す権利を有 します。 本ガイドラインに表記されている情報は予告なく変更さ れることがあります。最新の情報についてはApp Store Resource Center(http://developer.apple.com/jp/ appstore)をご覧ください。 サポート iOSデベロッパプログラムサポートはhttp://developer. apple.com/jp/contactからご利用できます。 法律上の必要条件 いかなるコミュニケーション素材も、適切なシンボルと クレジットラインを用いたApple商標を表示しなけれ ばなりません。法律上の必要条件に関する詳細につい ては www.apple.com/jp/legal/trademark をご覧く ださい。App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 4 バッジの使用 App Storeで提供されるアプリケーションをテレビCM、 印刷広告、ビデオクリップ、メール、ニュースレター、 ウェブサイトなどを含むマーケティングおよび広告コミュ ニケーションで使用する場合、App Storeのバッジを使 用する必要があります。ここで表示されているバッジの みが、Appleに承認された、利用可能なバッジとなりま す。バッジは提供されたものをそのまま使用してくださ い。変更や修正を加えたりしないでください。 オンラインコミュニケーションにおいては、必ず「App Storeからダウンロード」バッジを使用してくださ い。また、バッジを使用する際には常にApp Storeに ある自分のアプリケーションに必ずリンクさせてく ださい。 App Store上のアプリケーションのURL を取得するには、iTunesのApp Storeで自分の製 品のページにアクセスします。次に、一覧表示さ れているアプリケーションを右クリック、または Controlキーを押しながらクリックして、「リンク をコピー」を選択します。App Storeのバッジにこ のURLを埋め込んでください。お客様のコンピュー タにiTunesソフトウェアがインストールされていない場 合、App StoreのリンクがiTunesのダウンロードページ にリダイレクトします。その後、App Storeの元のアクセ ス先ページにお客様が誘導されます。 バッジのローカライゼーション Appleは「Available on the」と「Download on the」 の部分を様々な地域の言語に翻訳したバッジを提供 しています。独自に翻訳したバッジを制作しな いでください。必ずAppleが提供するアートワークを、 変更を加えずに使用してください。 App Storeバッジ 基本情報 ガイドラインのローカライゼーション 特定の地域では、ローカライズされたガイドラインがダ ウンロードできます。詳しくは http://developer.apple. com/jp/appstore/resources/marketing/index.html を参照してください。 「App Storeで配信中」バッジ 印刷物とウェブサイトにリンクできないコミュニケーション や宣伝には、「App Storeで配信中」バッジを使用し てください。テレビCM、印刷広告、ビデオクリップ、販売促進 ポスター、ダイレクトメールなどが含まれます。 「App Storeからダウンロード」バッジ 電子コミュニケーションには「App Storeからダウンロード」 バッジを使用してください。ウェブサイト、ウェブのバナ ー広告、モバイルデバイスのバナー広告、メールのプロ モーション、オンライン・ニュースレター、オンライン・ダイレクト メールなどが含まれます。 「App Store」の商標は常に英語で表示されなければなり ません。「App Store」を翻訳したり、Appleが提供したバッ ジのアートワークに変更を加えないでください。 App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 5 App Storeバッジ 最小余白と最小サイズ • 最小余白は、バッジの縦の長さの4分の1です。 • 写真やタイポグラフィ、その他のグラフィック要素をこの 余白内に配置しないでください。 • 最小サイズは、印刷物の場合は10mm、ウェブサイトな どオンスクリーンの場合は40px(ピクセル)です。 • 文字がはっきりと読み取れる大きさで、かつ極端に目立 たない程度の適度なサイズを選択してください。 背景色 App Storeのバッジは、下図のように必ず白と黒で 表示します。バッジのグレーの外枠はアートワークの一部 であり、これを除いて表示することはできません。App Storeバッジの背景は以下の条件から選んでください。 • 黒または白の背景 • 無地の背景 • 文字の読みやすさが損なわれない程度の模様などが 入った背景 アートワーク バッジのアートワークはウェブサイトとオンスクリーン・ コミュニケーションに使用する.svg、印刷広告に使用す る.epsのフォーマットで提供されます。 グラフィック・スタンダード モバイルデバイス広告の最少余白と最小サイズ モバイルデバイスのバナー広告など、レイアウトのス ペースが限定された場合はこのガイドラインに従って ください: • 最小余白は、バッジの縦の長さの10分の1です。 • 表示されるモバイルデバイスではっきり読み取れる バッジのサイズを使用してください。 • バッジを表示する位置は、企業のアイデンティティに 従属する位置に配置します。バッジのサイズは、企業 のアイデンティティよりも小さくしてください。 • Retinaディスプレイのために調整された.svgフォー マットのバッジを使用してください。詳細は右にある 「アートワーク」を参照してください。 X X 10 mm 40 px X X X X X 12 px X X X X App Store one-tenth badge height バッジの 高さの 10分の1App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 6 • App Storeバッジは、常にAppleが提供する最新のバ ッジアートワークを使用してください。アートワークは一 切変更しないでください。 • App Storeで提供されるアプリケーションを宣伝す るためのマーケティングまたは広告には、常にApp Storeバッジを表示してください。例えば、以下のよう なものが含まれます。 – ウェブページ – ニュースレター – 宣伝用のメール – ビデオクリップ – 印刷広告や販売促進ポスター – ウェブページのバナー広告 – モバイル広告 – テレビCM – 屋外広告 • オンラインコミュニケーションでは「App Storeから ダウンロード」バッジを使用し、App Storeにあ る自分のアプリケーションにリンクさせてください。 • レイアウトやビデオクリップには、1つのApp Storeバッ ジのみを使用してください。 • バッジを表示する位置は、アプリケーションやデベロッ パの企業名に従属する位置に配置します。バッジのサ イズは、主要なメッセージや企業のアイデンティティ、 アプリケーションのグラフィックよりも小さくしてくださ い。 • 商品に付ける品質表示やパッケージなどには、アプリ ケーションがその品質表示やパッケージで宣伝される 場合のみ、App Storeバッジを表示します。 • 他社のプラットフォームのバッジと並べて表示する場 合は、App Storeバッジを前に、あるいは先頭に配置 してください。 • App Storeバッジを、デベロッパの企業や製品の一般 的な宣伝のために使用することはできません。バッジは App Storeで提供するアプリケーションが関連する場合 にのみ、使用することができます。 • ご使用のメディアがApp Storeバッジのデザインをハイ レゾリューションで明瞭に再現できない場合には、バッ ジの使用はお控えください。 • App Storeバッジを主要なメッセージやメイングラフィッ クとしてレイアウト上で使わないでください。メッセージ や企業およびアプリケーションのアイデンティティがあく までも重要であり、バッジはそれらに従属するものとし て使用してください。 • iTunesのロゴは使用しないでください。 • Appleのロゴを単独で使用しないでください。 • App Storeバッジをアニメーション化したり、回転させた り、傾けたりしないでください。 • バッジのアートワークは決して変更しないでください。 • iOSについて言及しないでください。代わりに、正しい製 品名を使用してください。 • AppleのウェブサイトやApp Storeにあるグラフィックやイ メージを使用しないでください。 • App Storeバッジを互換性に関連したメッセージの一部 として使用しないでください。自分のアプリケーションに 対応する製品名をすべて表示してください。 App Storeバッジ 注意事項 順守事項 禁止事項App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 7 App Storeバッジ 参考例 アプリケーションを宣伝するウェブページ ウェブページのバナー広告 印刷広告 ビデオクリップ モバイル広告 モバイル広告 終了画面 モバイルデバイスのバナー広告App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 8 iPad、iPhone、iPod touchの画像 Apple製品であるiPad、iPhone、iPod touchの画像は App Storeで提供されるアプリケーションを宣伝するた めのコミュニケーションでのみ使用できます。その他の 目的のために使用することはできません。 常にAppleが提供した製品画像のみを使用してくださ い。詳細については、10ページと11ページを参照して ください。製品画像はhttp://developer.apple.com/jp/ appstore/resources/marketing からダウンロードし てください。縦向きと横向きの両方のフォーマットで画 像ファイルが提供されます。ローカライズされた画像に はその地域のステータスバーが表示されています。ス クリーン領域にアプリケーション画像を配置できるよう に、Apple製品のスクリーンは空白になっています。 このページに表示されているiPhone 5とiPod touch( 第5世代)の他に、iPhone 4SとiPod touch(第4世代) の画像も使用できます。自分のアプリケーションに対応 する製品のみをフィーチャーしてください。アプリケー ションがiPhone 5やiPod touch(第5世代)の画面サイズ と解像度に適応していない場合は、それらの製品の画 像を使用しないでください。例えば、アプリケーションが 1136x640で326ppiの解像度に対応できる場合にのみ iPhone 5の画像を使用してください。 以前のApple製品にのみ対応するアプリケーションを宣 伝したい場合、appstoremarketing@apple.com に メールして、正しい製品画像をリクエストしてください。 コミュニケーション内でApple製品と他社の類似製品を 並べないでください。他社の製品との対応性はテキスト 内で言及しても構いません。 iPad、iPhone、iPod touch画像のスクリーンにアプリ ケーション画面を配置する Apple製品のスクリーンには、アプリケーションを開 いている時に自然に表示される画像のみを表示しま す。Apple製品のスクリーンに宣伝コピーを表示しない でください。iPad、iPhone、iPod touchのホーム画面 や、自分が所有していない製品のアイコンを表示しない でください。 レイアウトに最適なApple製品の画像を選び、Adobe Photoshopでファイルを開きます。次に「Open to Update Screen」レイヤー(Smart Objectレイヤー)の アイコンをダブルクリックします。「Replace Contents to Update Screen」のレイヤーを開き、アプリケーション 画面用のアートワークを作業ウィンドウに配置し、保存し てウィンドウを閉じます。ロックされた「Product Image and Shadow」レイヤーは変更しないでください。 RGBファイルはウェブ用に書き出し、または保存できま す。さらにCMYKファイルに変換し、プリントレイアウトで の配置用に.psdまたは.tiffフォーマットで保存することも できます。CMYKファイルを印刷物で使用する場合は、 十分な高解像度(少なくとも画面解像度の4倍)のスク リーン画像をファイル内に配置してください。 ステータスバー 使用地域に最適な、正しくローカライズされたファイルを 選択してください。Appleが提供する画像のステータス バーには、ネットワークアイコン、製品の名称、フル充電 アイコン、Wi-Fiアイコンを含む、完全なアイコンセットが 表示されています。フルスクリーン対応のアプリケーショ ンの場合は、アプリケーション画面の画像がステータス バーを覆っても構いません。Smart Objectレイヤー内に 白い不透明なバーと黒い不透明なバーが.psdファイル の個別のレイヤーとして提供されます。アプリケーション 使用時に見えるステータスバーのレイヤーを選択してく ださい。 Apple製品を使用する 基本情報 Appleが提供したiPhone 5の画像ファイル 縦向きと横向きの両方のフォーマットで画像ファイルが提 供されます。 Appleが提供するiPod touchの画像ファイル 縦向きと横向きの両方のフォーマットで画像ファイルが提 供されます。 Appleが提供するiPadの画像ファイル 縦向きと横向きの両方のフォーマットで画像ファイルが提 供されます。App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 9 • Apple製品の画像を、一部のみを選択、または抜き取っ て表示したり、重ねて表示したり、障害になるようなも のと一緒に表示しないでください。 • 製品の画像を変更したり、歪めて見せたり、修正した りしないでください。スクリーンの光沢を新たに加えた り、変更したりしないでください。 • 製品の画像を使ったウェブページ用のボタンやアイコン などを作らないでください。 • Appleが提供した黒いApple製品の画像を、白いApple 製品に入れ替えないでください。 • Apple製品を他社の製品と一緒に紹介しないでくださ い。Apple製品の画像は常に単独で表示してください。 • Apple製品を雑然とした背景の上に配置しないでくだ さい。 • スクリーンが空白のApple製品を表示しないでくださ い。 • 製品の画像を傾けたり、角度をつけて表示しないでく ださい。 • 製品の画像をアニメーション化したり、上下を逆さまに したり、回転させたりしないでください。 • Apple製品のイメージとまったく同じ形に切り取った印 刷物を宣伝に使わないでください。 • AppleのウェブサイトやApp Storeにあるグラフィックや イメージを使用しないでください。Appleのレイアウトを 模倣しないでください。 • Apple製品の画像を、宣伝コピーや吹き出し、その他の 別の画像と重ねないでください。製品をハイライトなど で囲んだりしないでください。 • App Store Resource Centerのウェブページで提供さ れるApple製品の最新画像を使用してください。Apple が提供する画像は黒い製品のみになります。 • Apple製品は、他のデバイスとは別に取り扱ってくださ い。Apple製品を他社製品と一緒に並べたりせず、単独 でフィーチャーするようにしてください。 • 複数のアプリケーション画面を表示する場合 は、iPad、iPhone、iPod touchの画像を並べて表示 し、繰り返し使用できます。製品画像の向きは縦でも 横でも構いません。複数の製品を並べて表示する場合 は、正確な比率のサイズを保ってください。 • 製品の画面に表示する、いかなる商標や著作権のある 素材についても使用権利を取得してください。 • 製品スクリーン上のアプリケーションを表示する場合 は、実際に使用している際の正確なイメージを表示して ください。アプリケーションのスクリーン画像は、できる 限り普通に使用している際に現れる実際のイメージに 近い画像を使用してください。 • 画像の妨げになるようなものや、吹き出し、宣伝コピー などは、Apple製品の画像に重ならないよう、画像の横 に配置してください。 • Apple製品の画像は、提供されたレゾリューションで可 能な範囲の、文字がはっきりと認識できるサイズで表 示してください。屋外広告など、大規模な宣伝に使う ためにハイレゾリューションの製品画像が必要な場合 は、appstoremarketing@apple.com までメールでお 問い合わせください。その際に、マーケティングの必要 条件やメディアのフォーマットなどをお知らせください。 Apple製品を使用する 注意事項 順守事項 禁止事項 • 複数のApple製品の画像を重ねて表示しないでくだ さい。 • Apple製品をケースやカバーと一緒に表示しないでく ださい。 • Apple製品を3Dにしたり、何らかのシミュレーション 映像などを創作しないでください。 • 使用説明書などの場合を除き、Apple製品を表現す るためにイラストを使用しないでください。一般的な 携帯デバイスを説明する際に、「ホームボタン」など Apple製品に特有の詳細な表現や言葉の使用は避け てください。 • Apple製品の画像を、使い捨ての包装や食品業界の 宣伝に使用しないでください。製品の名称はコピーテ キストでの表記にのみ使用できます。 • 製品のスクリーンに現れたり、スクリーンから出て来る ように見えるグラフィック要素を追加しないでくださ い。 • コミュニケーションにおいて、製品のスクリーンやデス クトップ・アプリケーションにApp Storeで使用されて いる画像を使用しないでください。また、製品のスク リーンにApp Storeにある自分のアプリケーションのリ ストを表示しないでください。 • App Storeにある自分の製品のスクリーン画像 に、Apple製品の画像を組み込まないでください。ス クリーン画像にはアプリケーションを使用した時に ユーザが実際に目にする正確なイメージのみを表示し てください。App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 10 Apple製品のホーム画面や Dockアイコンをデベロッパの 広告に使用しないでください。 Apple製品の機能ではなく、 開発したアプリケーションを フィーチャーし、その機能性に 焦点を当ててください。画像 は、アプリケーションを開いて いるときに自然に表示される スクリーン画像のみを使用し てください。 Apple製品の画面に宣伝コピーを入れないでください。 自分のアプリケーション画面のみを表示してください。 Appleが提供する黒いApple 製品の画像を、白いApple製 品に置き換えないで ください。 Apple製品を使用する 参考例 New Game Name v.3.0 available September 15.App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 11 25mm 200px (最小サイズ) Apple製品を表示する際の最小サイズは、印刷物の場合は 25mm、オンスクリーンの場合は200px(ピクセル)です。 複数の製品を並べて表示する場合は、正確な比率のサイ ズを保ってください。 複数のApple製品の画像を重ねて表示しないでください。 Apple製品を使用する 参考例 25mm 200px (最小サイズ)App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 12 • 使用権利を有するコンテンツのみを表示してください。 例えば、使用権を持たないアルバムジャケットや著名 人の顔写真などは使用しないでください。 • 最新のApple製品のみを使用してください。複数の Apple製品を並べて表示する場合には、正確な比率の サイズを保ってください。 • 黒いApple製品を使用してください。 • 実際に使用した時の状態に最も近いアプリケーション 画面の画像を使用してください。グラフィックやメッセー ジは追加しないでください。 • 単純明快なスクリーンショットが好ましく、また一番使 いやすいでしょう。極端なアングルのイメージは使用し ないでください。 • 常に実際の製品イメージのみを使用してください。(例 えば、装飾の付いたケースなどに入れないでください) • ステータスバーがはっきりと見える場合は、バッテリー 残量やWi-Fiアイコンがフルの状態であること、通信会 社名が表示されていないことを確認してください。 • 動画の場合は、フェードやディゾルブなどシンプルなト ランジションを使用してください。 • アプリケーションで使用しているビデオシークエンスが 短縮されている場合は、「短縮された映像」である旨 を、表示してください。 • アプリケーションを開く際には、スプラッシュスクリーン を設定してください。 • Apple製品をごく自然に使用している人々の姿や映像 を表示することは構いません。Apple製品を使用する 様子を、シンプルに明瞭な形で描写してください。 • 法的な情報を提供する時は、常にAppleのクレジットラ インを付け加えてください。 カスタム画像と動画 注意事項 Apple製品のカスタム画像や動画は、Appleの承認を 得てから使用してください。カスタム画像や動画の使 用許可を得る方法は、3ページに記載されています。 カスタム画像と動画には現実的でないイメージや表現 を使わないでください。アプリケーションの実際の機能 性を正確に描写する必要があります。 Appleの広告やモーショングラフィックを模倣しないでく ださい。Appleのスタイルではなく、デベロッパのビジュ アルスタイルを反映させてください。 アクセサリの付属したApple製品の画像については、 16ページと17ページを参照してください。 • Apple製品に対して、いかなる改造、歪曲、性能の変 更を加えることはできません。製品の色、形、大きさ、 形態は正確に表示してください。 • Apple製品の機能をフィーチャーしないでください。 デベロッパが開発したアプリケーションの機能性に焦 点を置いてください。 • 白いApple製品を使わないでください。 • Apple製品を他社の製品と並べて表示しないでく ださい。 • Appleブランドを、宣伝効果を上げる目的のためだけ に使用しないでください。デベロッパのアプリケー ション独自のメリットを宣伝してください。 • Apple製品にあるAppleのロゴを、Appleブランドの 宣伝力をねらった目的のためだけに使用しないでく ださい。 • Apple製品のホーム画面を表示しないでください。 • Dockアイコンを表示しないでください。 • 空白のスクリーンを表示しないでください。 • 本ガイドラインで許可されているアプリケーション用ア クセサリ以外の小物、モデル、ケースなどのアクセサ リをApple製品と並べて表示しないでください。 • Apple製品を現実的でない方法やイメージで表示し ないでください。デベロッパ製品の非現実的な描写( 空を飛ぶ、海を泳ぐなど)は避けてください。 順守事項 禁止事項App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 13 Apple製品の名称を宣伝コピーで使用する 「iPhone」、「iPad」、「iPod touch」などのApple製 品の名称(あるいは、これら複数の製品名称)は、アプリ ケーションの互換性やApple製品向けであることを提示 するために使用することができます。例えば、「(アプリ ケーション名)はiPhoneおよびiPod touch向けのアプリ ケーションです」や「(アプリケーション名)はiPad用のア プリケーションです」などの表現が使えます。また、「~ で使えます」や「~と互換性があります」などの表現と 共に使用することもできます。開発したアプリケーション が使用できるすべてのApple製品を表示してください。 「iPad(アプリケーション名)」または「iPhone(アプリ ケーション名)」などの表現は使用しないでください。 企業名を入れる場合は、企業名を先頭に置き、 これに続いてアプリケーション名を記載し、適切 なApple製品の名称を最後に配置します。例え ば、「Company name(企業名)App name(ア プリケーション名)for iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch(iPhone、iPad、iPod touch対応)」という表現 が適切です。 Apple製品の名称は、ほかのモバイルデバイスやコン ピューティングデバイスと一緒に、宣伝コピー内で使うこ とができます。その際には、Apple製品の名称を先に表 示してください。他の開発プラットフォームの名称は宣 伝コピーで使用できますが、Apple製品の画像と他のモ バイルデバイスやコンピューティングデバイスの画像を 並べて表示することはできません。 「iPhone」、「iPad」、「iPod touch」の名称を使用す る時は、必ず「i」を小文字、「P」を大文字にし、これに 続く文字を小文字にします。「touch」の「t」は小文字 です。「iPhone」、「iPad」、「iPod touch」の「i」は、文 章、パラグラフ、タイトルの先頭にある場合でも小文字 にします。 Appleの商標とクレジットラインの使用についての詳細 は19ページを参照してください。 宣伝コピーで「App Store」 の名称を使用する 「App Store」の名称をヘッドラインやコピーで使用す る場合、必ず「A」と「S」を大文字にし、これに続く文 字を小文字にします。App Storeの商標は、英語以外 のテキスト内で使う場合でも必ず英語で表記してくだ さい。 「App Store」の名称に付ける冠詞は「the」のみ です。「iTunes App Store」、「Apple App Store」、 「iPhone App Store」など、他の名称と組み合わせな いでください。また、「the best App Store」といった誇 張表現も使わないでください。 「App Storeの」という表現は使わないでください。 「App Storeで」または「App Storeから」を使用して ください。 米国でのコミュニケーションにおいては、ボディコピー 内で最初に「App Store」の名称が表示される時に、 サービスマーク(SM )の記号を使用してください。 推奨コピー App Storeの説明には、ここで紹介するコピーを使うこ とも、独自のコピーを使うこともできます。 コピー1: App Storeでお気に入りのアプリケーションを見つけ たら、その場でiPhone、iPad、iPod touchに直接ダ ウンロード! コピー2: App Storeには、マルチタッチ、加速度センサーなど の画期的な機能をフィーチャーした、ゲーム、ビジネ ス、教育、エンターテインメント、仕事効率化、 ソーシャルネットワーキングなど、あらゆるカテゴリ のアプリケーションが豊富に揃っています。すべてのアプリ ケーションは、iPhone、iPad、iPod touchにワイヤレ スで直接ダウンロードできます。 アプリケーションの宣伝 基本情報 URLアドレスのネーミング Appleの商標名をデベロッパのURLアドレスに含むことが できるのは、企業名または製品名に商標が続く場合のみで す。Appleの商標は、Apple製品専用に開発されたアプリ ケーションを掲載したウェブページのURLでのみ使用できま す。URLの先頭でAppleの商標を使用しないでください。 正しい使用例: www.company.com/app/iphone www.company.com/ipad 不適切な使用例: www.iphoneapp.com www.ipadweatherapp.com アプリケーションデベロッパのためのアフィリエイトプロ グラム アフィリエイトプログラムに参加して、自分のアプリ ケーションやウェブサイトからApp StoreやMac App Store、iBookstore、iTunesへのリンクによる売上げに 対する手数料を受け取ることができます。さらにアフィリ エイト広告リンクからトラッキングやアプリケーションメト リックスなどの有効な情報も得ることができます。詳し くはwww.apple.com/jp/itunes/affiliatesを参照してく ださい。 コンテストや懸賞 AppleはiPhone、iPadをコンテストや懸賞における賞 品や景品、贈呈品に使用することを承認しません。iPod touchデバイス、またはApp Storeギフトカードの使用は 可能かもしれませんが、その場合にはプロモーションプ ランに対するAppleの承認が必要です。Appleの審査と 承認を受けるには、promoreview@apple.comまでプ ロモーションプランを提出してください。App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 14 • マーケティングコミュニケーションで、Appleによる iPhone、iPad、iPod touch、App Storeの広告、マーケ ティング、メッセージをコピーまたは模倣しないでください。 • Appleのウェブサイト(www.apple.com/jp)や iTunes、App Storeにあるヘッドラインやコピー、アイコ ン、画像を使わないでください。 • Appleのオペレーティングシステムを表示しないでくださ い。互換性を説明する時は、Apple製品の名称を使ってく ださい。 • 開発したアプリケーションに対応していないApple製品を 記載しないでください。 • Appleのタイポグラフィを模倣しないでください。App Storeのメッセージに使用するフォントは、デベロッパ製品 のコミュニケーションと一致したタイポグラフィにしてくだ さい。 • App Storeの所有やカスタマイズを示唆しないでください。 例えば、「お気に入りのゲームを(企業名)のApp Storeで 手に入れよう」などの表現は使用しないでください。代わ りに「お気に入りの(企業名)のゲームをApp Storeで手 に入れよう」のように表現してください。 • 「iPhone」、「iPad」、「iPod touch」の名称、または、い かなるAppleの商標を翻訳することはできません。Apple の商標は、英語以外のテキスト内で使う場合でも必ず英 語で表記してください。 • 「Downloadable(ダウンロード可能)」という言葉は使 わないでください。 • iTunesを使った表現は避けてください。例えば、「iTunes のApp Storeで」や「iTunes App Store」などの表現は使 わないでください。 • Appleによるスポンサーシップや推薦を示唆しないでくだ さい。 • 必ず「iPhone」、「iPad」、「iPod touch」の正確な名 称を使用してください。「touch」や「iTouch」のように 名称を変化させないでください。 • デベロッパのアプリケーションに対応するApple製品を すべて記載してください。Apple製品を「スマートフォ ン」や「タブレット」などの一般的な表現を使って参照 しないでください。 • Apple製品である「iPhone」、「iPad」、「iPod touch」 の名称は、常に単数形で表示してください。決して 「iPhones」、「iPads」、「iPod touches」のような複 数形では表示しないでください • 明確なメッセージを発信してください。開発したアプリ ケーションが「App Storeで配信中」という表現は 適切です。また、アプリケーションが「App Storeからダ ウンロードできる」という表現も適しています。 • 宣伝に使うすべてのヘッドラインとボディコピーは、デ ベロッパの企業のアイデンティティと一致する方法で 表示してください。「App Store」やApple製品の名称 に使用するフォントは、他の宣伝素材でも使用する フォントと一致させてください。 • コミュニケーションには、カスタマーのアクションを喚起 する明確なメッセージを入れてください。例えば、「( 企業名)をApp Storeで検索しよう」や「(アプリケー ション名)をApp Storeで検索しよう」などの表現を使っ てください。 • オフラインコミュニケーションにおいては、デベロッパ のアプリケーションへのリンクとしてiTunesを使用して ください。App Store Resource Centerの 「Marketing Resources」にある「iTunesリンク」 ページを参照してください。 アプリケーションの宣伝 注意事項 順守事項 禁止事項 Appleの製品名を大文字だ けで表示しないでください。 Appleのオペレーティングシ ステムはテキスト内で使用 しないでください。代わりに Appleの製品名を使用してく ださい。 App Store関連のテキスト でMyriadのフォントを使用 しないでください。 Appleの製品名を小文字の 「i」と大文字だけの言葉で 表示しないでください。App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 15 アプリケーションの宣伝 開発したアプリケーションを宣伝する時は、13ページと 14ページに掲載された要領に従ってください。以下、 オーディオとビデオによる宣伝に関する追加説明にな ります。 オーディオによる宣伝 Appleの広告を模倣しないでください。オーディオ広告 のトーンは、Appleではなく、デベロッパの企業や製品 のスタイルを反映したものであるべきです。 アプリケーションの特長や優れた機能に焦点を絞りま しょう。Appleブランドを、宣伝効果を上げる目的のため だけに使用しないでください。Apple製品の機能を強調 しないでください。 iOSデバイス特有のサウンドを、コミュニケーションの オーディオ要素に使用しないでください。自分のアプリ ケーションが使われている際の自然なサウンドのみを使 用してください。 ビデオクリップや宣伝映像 App Storeバッジはビデオクリップまたは宣伝映像の中 で一度だけ使用します。 Appleのモーショングラフィックやビデオ広告を模倣し ないでください。ビデオはデベロッパの企業や製品 コミュニケーションの特徴や雰囲気が表れたものにしてく ださい。 アプリケーションの互換性を説明する際にMacコン ピュータに言及する場合は、App Store Resource Centerの「Marketing Resources」(http://developer. apple.com/jp/appstore)を参照してください。 iOSデバイス以外でマルチタッチジェスチャーを使用 しないでください。例えば、ビデオ内のシーントランジ ションにマルチタッチジェスチャーを使用しないでくだ さい。 オーディオとビデオ 互換性について説明する テキスト内でApple製品の名称を正確に表示してください。 間違いを避ける Appleのオペレーティングシステムを表示しないでください。 対応するApple製品の正確な名称を表記してください。 商標の特定 ビデオの終わりに、実際に使用したApple商標の正しいクレ ジットラインを表示してください。バッジとクレジットラインの 間には、必要なスペースを保ってください。 App Storeバッジ App Storeバッジは主要なメッセージよりも目立たないよう に配置してください。App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 16 Appleの承認が必要です Appleに承認された場合に限り、アプリケーションと共 に使用するハードウェアアクセサリの紹介に、Apple製 品を使用することができます。 アクセサリの機能を紹介する目的にのみ、Apple製品が 含まれるカスタム画像や動画を作ることができます。 カスタム画像や動画の制作に関する要件の詳細は、 12ページを参照してください。 素材は、3ページの提出要件に従って提出して ください。返答には最低5営業日から7営業日ほどかか りますのでご了承ください。さらに下記のガイドラインに 従ってください。 • 絵コンテはPDFフォーマットで提出してください。 • ビデオの審査を受けるには、AppleのQuickTime フォーマットで提出してください(ビデオはH.264フォー マット、オーディオはAACコーデックを使用してくださ い)。 • FTPログインを提供するか、あるいはパスワード保護 のついたウェブページへのアップロードツールを使っ てください。 • 地域と日付を含む宣伝コミュニケーションの詳細をお 知らせください。 Made for iPod MFiプログラムでライセンスを受けたアクセサリ であっても、本ガイドラインに記載された条件での 承認が必要になります。デベロッパのアクセサリがす でに「MFi License Agreement」と「iPhone/iPad Supplement」でAppleに承認されている場合、アクセ サリのマーケティングや広告はMFiプログラムの規 約と本ガイドラインの両方に従う必要があります。 MFiプログラムについてはhttp://developer.apple. com/jp/programs/mfiを参照してください。 製品アイコン パッケージや宣伝では、Appleが提供した iPhone、iPad、iPod touchのアイコンを使って、アク セサリと対応するデバイスの機種と世代を指定してく ださい。アイコンはライセンスと規約に基づいて使用し てください。詳細はhttps://developer.apple.com/jp/ softwarelicensing/agreements/icons.htmlを参照し てください。 アクセサリが付属するアプリケーション 基本情報App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 17 提供するアクセサリに焦点を合わせたパッケージにし てください。Apple製品は、アクセサリとアプリケー ションの関連性を説明するためにのみ使用してくださ い。Appleが提供する製品画像、もしくはAppleに承認 されたカスタム画像(詳しくは、12ページの「カスタム 画像と動画」を参照)を使用してください。また、以下の ガイドラインに従ってください。 • Apple製品の名称を主要なヘッドラインで使用した り、製品名の一部として使用しないでください。 • Apple製品を他社の製品と一緒に紹介しないでくだ さい。 • 互換性の説明には「対応」を使用してください。例え ば、「(商品名)はiPhone、iPad、iPod touchに対応 しています」といった表現が使えます。 • アクセサリの機能性は正しく表示してください。過大 な表現や事実と異なる表現は避けてください。 • Apple製品の画像を切り取ったり、歪めたりしないで ください。 • Apple製品の画像に宣伝コピーや吹き出しなど、別の 画像を重ねないでください。製品をハイライトなどで 囲んだりしないでください。 • アクセサリとApple製品の関係性は、現実的な表現で 説明してください。製品の機能は正確に表示してくだ さい。実際に開いている時の、自然な状態のアプリ ケーション画面を使用してください。 • Apple製品を持つ手を表示することはできますが、製 品の邪魔にならないように気をつけてください。 • App Storeバッジはパッケージの側面あるいは裏面 に1つだけ表示してください。バッジをパッケージの前 面に表示しないでください。 アクセサリが付属するアプリケーション アクセサリのパッケージ パッケージ前面 Apple製品の画像は、製品とアクセサリの機能性を正確に表 現したものを使用してください。製品との関連性をシンプル に、わかりやすく説明してください。アクセサリやApple製品 の機能性を誇張しないでください。 パッケージ側面 バッジはパッケージの裏面あるいは側面に、1つのみ表示し てください。複数の言語を取り入れたデザインである場合、 ローカライズされたバッジを使用せず、バッジの下にローカ ライズされたテキストを入れてください。 間違いを避ける App Storeバッジをパッケージの前面に使用しないでくださ い。バッジはパッケージの側面か裏面に1つだけ使用できます。 App Storeバッジの配置とサイズ App Storeバッジはアクセサリとは関連させずに、アプリ ケーションとの関連のみに使用してください。バッジはパッケ ージの裏面あるいは側面に、1つのみ表示してください。ア クセサリのパッケージには、高さが最小8mmもしくは最大 10mmのバッジを使用してください。バッジの高さを10mm より大きくしないでください。 バッジはアプリケーションのアイコンの隣、または下に配置 してください。アプリケーションの名称と宣伝コピーはApp Storeバッジとアプリケーションのアイコンの近くに配置して ください。 最小8mm 最大10mm (バッジの高さ)App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 18 App Storeアイコン App Storeアイコン 形とサイズが似ている他メディアのアイコンと一 緒に使用する場合にのみ、App Storeのアイコ ンを使用してください。レイアウトのスペースが 限られている場合でも、マーケティングのコミュ ニケーションでApp Storeバッジの代わりにApp Storeのアイコンを使用しないでください。アイ コンのアートワークはhttp://developer.apple. com/jp/appstore/resources/marketingから入 手できます。 アイコンの使用 どうしても必要な場合に限り、形とサイズが似ている 他メディアのアイコンと一緒にApp Storeのアイコンを 使用することができます。 間違いを避ける レイアウトのスペースが限られている場合でも、マーケティ ングのコミュニケーションでApp Storeのアイコンを使用し ないでください。Appleに承認されたアイコンの使用例はこ のページに記載されています。 間違いを避ける いかなるコミュニケーションにおいても、Appleのロゴを単独で 使用しないでください。 バナー広告 マーケティングのコミュニケーションや広告ではApp Store バッジを使用するか、もしくはテキスト内でApp Storeを言 及してください。App Store デベロッパ向けマーケティング/広告ガイドライン 2012年9月 19 商標とクレジットライン 米国内のコミュニケーションでAppleの商標をテキスト 内で最初に使う際は、以下に示す通り、適切な記号 (™、SM 、®)を使用してください。 iPhone® iPad® iPod touch® App Store SM 正しい商標については、Apple Trademark List(www. apple.com/legal/trademark/appletmlist.html)を 参照してください。Appleが提供するApp Storeバッジの アートワークに商標を加えないでください。 どの地域においても、すべてのコミュニケーションで、使 用されるAppleの商標をすべて表記した下記のようなク レジットラインを使用してください。 例えば: Apple、Appleロゴ、iPad、iPhone、iPod touchは 米国および他の国々で登録されたApple Inc.の商 標です。App StoreはApple Inc.のサービスマーク です。 実際にコミュニケーション内で使用しているAppleの商 標のみに関して記載してください。 コミュニケーション内でiTunesに言及する場合は、必ず 下記の文章を付け加えてください。 iTunesは法律に基づいたコピーのみを許可してい ます。音楽を盗用しないでください。 広告では、法的文言を表示する際の通常の決まりに従 い、別途に情報画面を追加したり、商標へのインタラクテ ィブリンクを提供したりしてください。 Appleの商標の使い方の詳細については、「Apple商標 および著作権使用に関するガイドライン」(www.apple. com/jp/legal/trademark/guidelinesfor3rdparties. html)をご覧ください。 Appleが承認した場合に限り、法的通知とクレジットラ イン(商標を除く)の翻訳を米国外で販売される商品に 使用することができます。Appleの商標は絶対に翻訳し ないでください。 詳細については、iOSデベロッパプログラムサポート (http://developer.apple.com/jp/contact)にご連絡く ださい。 アートワークをダウンロードする App Marketing Artwork License Agreementに同 意することを条件に、マーケティングで使用するApp Storeバッジ、iPhone、iPad、iPod touchの写真など のアートワークをダウンロードできます。 App Store Resource Centerの「Marketing Resources」ページ(http://developer.apple.com/jp/ appstore/resources/marketing)を参照してください。 Appleの求める要件 開発したアプリケーションの画面の画像、iPhone、iPad、 iPod touchの製品画像とこれらの写真を、Appleとの関 係を不当に示唆したり、App Store、iPhone、iPad、iPod touch、またはAppleの信用、価値、評価を低下させたり 傷つける可能性がある方法で使用しないでください。 Appleの承認を得る マーケティングや広告などで使用する印刷やビデオ形 式の素材、カスタム画像や動画、注目度の高いいかな る形式においても、Apple製品が登場する、あるいは使 用されるすべての素材は出版あるいは放送される前に Appleへ提出し、承認を得る必要があります。企画内容 や絵コンテ、あるいはラフカットなどを3ページに示した 方法でメールにてお送りください。まだ完成していない 制作中の素材を審査することもできますが、出版あるい は放送前に最終的に仕上がった完成作品の承認が必要 になります。返答には最低5営業日から7営業日ほどかか りますのでご了承ください。 すべてのマーケティングおよび広告素材には、デベロッ パの企業のコミュニケーションスタイルを反映する必要 があります。Appleのコミュニケーションをコピーまたは 模倣しないでください。 法律上の必要条件 © 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple、Appleのロゴ、iPad、iPhone、 iPod、iPod touch、iTunes、iTunesのロゴ、Mac、QuickTimeは、米国およ び他の国々で登録されたApple Inc.の商標です。Multi-Touchは、Apple Inc. の商標です。App StoreはApple Inc.のサービスマークです。IOSは米国およ び他の国々で登録されたCiscoの商標で、ライセンスに基づいて使用されて います。本ガイドラインに記載されたその他の製品名および企業名は、各社 の商標です。 Finder Dock MagSafe 2 Thunderbolt USB 3 耳機 SDXC HDMI USB 3 哈囉! 快速入門指南 歡迎使用新的 MacBook Pro。讓我們為您介紹。 Multi-Touch 觸控 式軌跡板 MagSafe 2 電源接頭 電源轉換器 交流電源線 電源按鈕 交流電插頭 開始使用 當您第一次啟動 MacBook Pro 時,“設定輔助程式”會協助您繼續進行。 請依照一些簡單的步驟執行,以快速地連接 Wi-Fi 網路、從其他 Mac 或 PC 傳送項目,並建立 Mac 的使用者帳號。 您也可以使用 Apple ID 來登入,以便從 App Store 下載應用程式、購買 iTunes Store 和 Apple Online Store 上的內容、存取 iCloud 並使用 FaceTime 進行視訊通話。如果您沒有 Apple ID,您可輕鬆建立免費的 Apple ID。 Multi-Touch 手勢 您可以在觸控式軌跡板上使用簡單的手勢來執行多種 MacBook Pro 的操 作。以下是最常用的手勢。 按一下 按下觸控式軌跡板的任一處來點按。 或者,如果啟用了“點一下來點 按”,點一下表面即可。 輔助點按(按右鍵) 用兩指按一下來打開快速鍵選單。 或者,如果啟用了“點一下來點 按”,請用兩指點一下任一處。 滑動導覽 用兩指滑動來翻閱網頁、文件和其 他項目。 按兩下 按兩下軌跡板的任一處。或者,如果 啟用了“點一下來點按”,請點兩下 表面。 兩指捲視 用兩指在軌跡板上滑動,以上下或側 邊的方向來捲視。 智慧型縮放 用兩指點兩下軌跡板來快速放大網頁。 開合縮放 用拇指和食指開合來精準地放大和縮 小照片及網頁。 切換全螢幕應用程式 用三指滑動來切換不同的全螢幕應用 程式。 檢視 Launchpad 用四指開合來檢視所有的 Launchpad 應用程式。 旋轉 順時針或逆時針旋轉拇指和食指來旋 轉影像。 檢視 Mission Control 用三指往上滑動來檢視 Mac 上所有已 開啟的視窗。 更多資訊 從“蘋果”選單選擇“系統偏好設定”, 並且按一下“觸控式軌跡板”來瞭解更多 手勢的相關資訊。 繼續進行 您可以輕易地從其他 Mac 或 PC 上將文件、郵件、照片、音樂和影片等檔 案傳送到新的 Mac 上。第一次啟動新的 Mac 時,會循序漸進地引導您完 成這些程序。您只要依照螢幕上的指示執行即可。 瞭解桌面 您可以在 Mac 的桌面上找到所有項目並執行所有工作。底部的 Dock 可以 放置您最常使用的應用程式。您也可以在此打開“系統偏好設定”,讓您 自定 Mac 的桌面與其他設定。按一下 Finder 圖像可快速地取用檔案和檔 案夾。上方的選單列顯示了許多關於 Mac 的有用資訊。若要查看無線 Internet 連線的狀態,請按一下 Wi-Fi 圖像。您的 Mac 會自動連接您在設 定期間所選擇的網路。 iCloud iCloud 能儲存您的音樂、照片、郵件和其他內容,並無線推播到您的 Mac、iPhone、iPad、iPod touch 甚至是 PC 上。全部都不需連接或同步。 因此,當您在某部裝置上購買歌曲時,即會自動下載到所有其他裝置上。 有了“照片串流”,最新的照片便會顯示在所有裝置上。若要自定 iCloud 的設定,請打開“蘋果”選單,選擇“系統偏好設定”,並且按一下 iCloud。接著使用 Apple ID 登入,並選擇您要使用的 iCloud 功能。 輔助說明 選單 選單列 系統偏好設定 Wi-Fi 狀態 重要事項 開始使用電腦前,請先仔細閱讀此文件以及「重要產品資訊指南」中的安 全資訊。 更多資訊 您可以在 www.apple.com/tw/macbookpro 網站找到更多資訊、觀看示範 教學並瞭解其他 MacBook Pro 的功能。 輔助說明 在“輔助說明中心”裡,您可以找到問題的解答、說明和疑難排解的相關 資訊。按一下 Finder 圖像,按一下選單列上的“輔助說明”,並且選 擇“輔助說明中心”。 Mac OS X 工具程式 若您的 Mac 發生問題,“Mac OS X 工具程式”能協助您修復電腦的固態 硬碟、從Time Machine 備份回復軟體和資料,或清除固態硬碟並重新安 裝 OS X Lion 和 Apple 應用程式。您也可以使用 Safari 來取得線上輔助說 明。如果您的 Mac 偵測到問題,即會自動打開“Mac OS X 工具程式”。 或者,您也可以重新開機並按住 Command + R 鍵來手動開啟此程式。 支援 您的 MacBook Pro 隨附有 90 天的技術支援和一年的硬體維修保固, 提供服務的是 Apple Store 經銷商或 Apple 授權服務供應商。請參訪 www.apple.com/tw/support/macbookpro 以取得 MacBook Pro 的技術支 援。或致電台灣:(886) 0800-095-988。 www.apple.com/support/country 某些功能無法在部分地區使用。 TM and © 2012 Apple Inc.保留一切權利。Designed by Apple in California. Printed in XXXX. TA034-6358-A FaceTime HD 攝影機Launchpad Mission Control Safari 網頁瀏覽器 Mail iTunes iCal FaceTime iPhoto iMovie Mac App Store *發話者和接收者都需要配備 FaceTime 功能的裝置。部分地區無法使用此功能。 打開 Launchpad 按一下 Dock 上的 Launchpad 圖像。 檔案夾 將應用程式拖到其他應用 程式上,藉此製作應用程 式的群組。 Launchpad 是 Mac 上所有應用程式 的集中處。只要按一下 Dock 上的 Launchpad 圖像。即會以全螢幕顯 示所有應用程式已開啟的視窗。 依您的個人喜好來排列應用程式, 用檔案夾將應用程式收集成群組, 或是從 Mac 上刪除應用程式。當您 從 Mac App Store 下載應用程式時, 它會自動顯示在 Launchpad 中。 按一下 Dock 上的圖像,並使用 Multi-Touch 多點觸控手勢來快速且 輕鬆地瀏覽網路。在觸控式軌跡板 上用兩指上下捲動。用兩指左右滑 動來往返於不同的網頁。用兩指點 Top Sites 快速概覽您最常造訪 的網站。 兩下來放大網頁,然後再點兩下來 返回原始大小。或是兩指開合來放 大或縮小。 Mission Control 能讓您鳥瞰 Mac 上 所有正在執行的項目。在 Dock 上 按一下 Mission Control 圖像,桌面 即會縮小並顯示所有應用程式已開 啟的視窗、所有全螢幕應用程式和 Dashboard(此處收集了所有名為 widget 的迷你應用程式)。按一下 任一個項目來將其放大。您可將 Mission Control 視為系統的樞紐, 只要在此按一下即可檢視任何項目 或前往任何位置。 打開 Mission Control 按一下 Dock 上的 Mission Control 圖像。 加入桌面空間 按上方橫列右側的 + 按 鈕來加入新的空間。 Dashboard 位於左上方可 輕易取用。 閱讀列表 按一下眼鏡圖像來儲存 網頁,供您稍後閱讀。 全螢幕顯示方式 按一下全螢幕按鈕來顯示 全螢幕內容。 電子郵件總覽 只要按一下即可在 Mail 中檢視所有帳號。 對話顯示方式 在對話討論串中檢視 所有電子郵件。 搜尋 快速縮小搜尋結果, 來找出您要的項目。 即使您未連接 Internet,Mail 也能 讓您在單一且沒有廣告信的信箱中 管理您的所有郵件帳號。它能與大 多數的電子郵件標準一起使用,包 含 POP3 和 IMAP,以及常用的電子 郵件服務,例如 Gmail、Yahoo! Mail 和 AOL Mail。您也可以搭配 Mail 來使用您從 iCloud 取得的免費 me.com 電子郵件帳號。當您第一 次打開 Mail 時,“設定輔助程式” 會協助您開始使用。 iTunes 能讓您在 Mac 上整理和播放 數位音樂和視訊。您可以在 iTunes Store 中購買新的音樂、影片、電 視節目、書籍和其他內容。您也可 透過 iTunes 來使用 iPad、iPhone 和 iPod touch 的 App Store。 iTunes Store 尋找並購買新的音樂、 影片和其他內容。 Genius 組曲 讓 iTunes 搜尋您的音樂資料庫, 並組合能完美搭配的歌曲。 多重行事曆 在同一位置取用所有 行事曆。 使用 iCal 來記錄您的繁忙行程。您 可以製作不同的行事曆,供您在家 中、學校或公司裡使用。您可在單 一視窗中檢視所有行事曆,或只選 擇您想檢視的行事曆。使用“通訊 錄”中的聯絡資訊來製作和傳送邀 請函,然後查看哪些人回應了邀 請。使用 iCloud 在所有裝置上自動 更新行事曆,或與其他 iCloud 使用 者共享行事曆。 製作 製作攝影集、 卡片和月曆。 面孔 iPhoto 可依據人物的 面孔來整理照片。 事件 按兩下“事件”來瀏 覽照片。 iPhoto 是您在 Mac 上整理、瀏覽、 編輯和共享照片的最佳方式。您可 以依照“面孔”、“位置”和“事 件”來整理照片。若要用郵件傳送 照片,或發佈照片到 Facebook 上,只要選取照片,並且按一下螢 幕右下方的“共享”即可。或是按 一下“製作”來將您喜愛的照片製 作成攝影集、月曆和卡片。 Mac 上的 FaceTime 能讓您使用 Mac 與其他 iPad、iPhone、iPod touch 或 Mac 的使用者面對面交談。* 若要設定 FaceTime,只需要 Apple ID 和電子郵件帳號。若要啟 動視訊通話,請按一下“通訊錄” 聯絡資訊列表中的項目即可。 喜好項目 將常用聯絡資訊加入“喜好 項目”以便輕鬆取用。 行事曆顯示方式 選擇您偏好的顯示方 式:日、週、月或年。 加入事件 按兩下來製作新的 事件。 Mac App Store 是尋找和下載數以千 計 Mac 應用程式的最佳途徑,內容 從遊戲、社群網路到生產力工具, 應有盡有。只要一個步驟就能將新 的應用程式安裝到 Launchpad。 您可以在每一部授權您個人使用的 Mac 上安裝應用程式,甚至可以重 新下載應用程式。Mac App Store 會通知您取得應用程式的更新項 目,讓您隨時擁有最新的版本。 請按一下 Dock 上的 Mac App Store 圖像來將其開啟。 事件瀏覽器 輸入的視訊會顯示於此, 讓您取用所有剪輯片段。 計畫案瀏覽器 只要將您選擇的內容放入 計畫案,即可製作精彩的 影片。 iMovie 能彙整您的所有視訊剪輯片 段,並提供您需要的所有編輯工 具、主題和特效,來將它們轉換成 特殊的作品。只需輕鬆點按,即可 快速地將它們編輯成精彩的影片, 或是好萊塢風格的電影預告片。您 也可使用 iMovie 來從大多數的數位 攝影機、iPad、iPhone、iPod touch 或 Mac 上的 FaceTime 攝影機輸入 視訊。 即時更新 購買之應用程式的更新項 目會自動顯示。 尋找新應用程式 瀏覽數以千計的應用程 式,並直接下載到 Launchpad。 iPad Kullanma Kılavuzu iOS 6 Yazılımı İçinİçindekiler 7 Bölüm 1: İlk Bakışta iPad 7 iPad Hakkında Genel Bilgiler 8 Aksesuarlar 9 Düğmeler 11 SIM kart tepsisi 12 Durum simgeleri 13 Bölüm 2: Başlangıç 13 Nelere gereksiniminiz var? 13 iPad'i ayarlama 14 Apple kimliği 14 Mail hesaplarını ve diğer hesapları ayarlama 14 iPad'deki içerikleri yönetme 15 iCloud’u kullanma 16 iPad’i bilgisayarınıza bağlama 16 iTunes ile eşzamanlama 17 Bu kullanma kılavuzunu iPad’de görüntüleme 18 Bölüm 3: Temel Konular 18 Uygulamaları kullanma 21 iPad'i özelleştirme 23 Yazma 27 Dikte 28 Arama yapma 29 Bildirimler 30 Paylaşma 32 iPad’i TV’ye veya başka bir aygıta bağlama 32 AirPrint ile yazdırma 34 Bluetooth aygıtları 34 Dosya paylaşma 35 Güvenlik özellikleri 36 Pil 37 Bölüm 4: Siri 37 Siri nedir? 38 Siri’yi kullanma 40 Restoranlar 41 Filmler 41 Spor 41 Dikte 42 Siri’yi düzeltme 243 Bölüm 5: Safari 46 Bölüm 6: Mail 46 E-postaları okuma 47 E-posta gönderme 48 E-postaları düzenleme 49 İletileri ve ilişikleri yazdırma 49 Mail hesapları ve ayarları 51 Bölüm 7: Mesajlar 51 Mesaj gönderme ve alma 52 Yazışmaları yönetme 52 Fotoğrafları, videoları ve daha fazlasını gönderme 53 Mesajlar ayarları 54 Bölüm 8: FaceTime 56 Bölüm 9: Kamera 56 İlk bakışta 57 Görüntüleme, paylaşma ve yazdırma 58 Fotoğrafları düzenleme ve videoları kısaltma 59 Bölüm 10: Fotoğraflar 59 Fotoğrafları ve videoları görüntüleme 60 Fotoğrafları ve videoları düzenleme 60 Fotoğraf Yayını 62 Fotoğrafları ve videoları paylaşma 62 Fotoğrafları yazdırma 62 Resim Çerçevesi 63 Fotoğrafları ve videoları içe aktarma 64 Bölüm 11: Photo Booth 64 Fotoğraf çekme 65 Fotoğrafları yönetme 66 Bölüm 12: Videolar 68 Bölüm 13: Takvim 68 İlk bakışta 69 Birden fazla takvimle çalışma 70 iCloud takvimlerini paylaşma 70 Takvim ayarları 71 Bölüm 14: Kişiler 71 İlk bakışta 72 Kişi ekleme 73 Kişiler ayarları 74 Bölüm 15: Notlar 74 İlk bakışta İçindekiler 376 Bölüm 16: Anımsatıcılar 78 Bölüm 17: Saat 79 Bölüm 18: Harita 79 Konumları bulma 80 Yol tarifi alma 81 3B ve kuş bakışı (Flyover) 81 Harita ayarları 82 Bölüm 19: Müzik 82 Müzikleri alma 82 Müzik çalma 84 Podcast’ler ve sesli kitaplar 84 Listeler 84 Genius 85 Siri 86 iTunes Match 86 Ev Paylaşımı 87 Müzik ayarları 88 Bölüm 20: iTunes Store 90 Bölüm 21: App Store 90 İlk bakışta 91 Uygulamaları silme 92 Bölüm 22: Gazete Bayisi 93 Bölüm 23: iBooks 93 İlk bakışta 94 Kitapları okuma 95 Çoklu ortamlarla etkileşimde bulunma 95 Çalışma notları ve sözcük listeleri 96 Kitap rafını düzenleme 96 Kitapları ve PDF’leri eşzamanlama 97 PDF’i yazdırma veya e-postayla gönderme 97 iBooks ayarları 98 Bölüm 24: Podcast’ler 100 Bölüm 25: Game Center 100 İlk bakışta 101 Arkadaşlarla oyun oynama 101 Game Center ayarları 102 Bölüm 26: Erişilebilirlik 102 Erişilebilirlik özellikleri 102 VoiceOver 111 Siri 111 Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık 111 Büyütme İçindekiler 4112 Büyük Metin 112 Renkleri Tersine Çevirme 112 Seçimi Seslendir 112 Otomatik Seslendir 113 Mono Ses 113 Atanabilir ses tonları 113 Güdümlü Erişim 114 AssistiveTouch 114 OS X’deki Erişilebilirlik 115 Mail iletileri için en küçük font puntosu 115 Geniş ekran klavyeler 115 Gizli altyazılar 116 Bölüm 27: Ayarlar 116 Uçak modu 116 Wi-Fi 117 VPN 117 Kişisel Erişim Noktası 118 Bluetooth 118 Hücresel Veri 119 Rahatsız Etme ve Bildirimler 120 Genel 124 Sesler 124 Parlaklık ve Duvar Kağıdı 125 Resim Çerçevesi 125 Gizlilik 126 Ek A: İş hayatında iPad 126 Şirket ortamında iPad 126 Konfigürasyon profillerini kullanma 126 Microsoft Exchange hesaplarını ayarlama 127 VPN erişimi 127 LDAP ve CardDAV hesapları 128 Ek B: Uluslararası Klavyeler 128 Uluslararası klavyeleri kullanma 129 Özel giriş yöntemleri 131 Ek C: Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 131 Önemli güvenlik bilgileri 133 Önemli kullanım bilgileri 134 iPad Destek 134 Pil azaldı görüntüsü veya "Şarj Etmiyor" iletisi görüntüleniyorsa 134 iPad yanıt vermiyorsa 134 iPad'i yeniden başlatma ve sıfırlama 135 “Yanlış Parola” veya “iPad etkin değil” ifadesi görünüyor 135 “Bu aksesuar iPad tarafından desteklenmiyor” ifadesi görünüyor 135 Bir uygulama ekranı doldurmuyorsa 135 Ekran klavyesi görünmüyorsa 135 iPad'i yedekleme 137 iPad yazılımını güncelleme ve geri yükleme İçindekiler 5138 E-posta alma, gönderme veya görüntüleme 139 Ses, müzik ve video 141 iTunes Store ve App Store 141 Daha fazla bilgi, servis ve destek 142 Atma ve geri dönüşüm bilgileri 143 Apple ve çevre İçindekiler 61 7 iPad özelliklerini, denetimlerin nasıl kullanılacağını ve daha birçok şeyi öğrenmek için bu bölümü okuyun. iPad Hakkında Genel Bilgiler iPad mini  Çoklu dokunmatik (Multi-Touch) ekran Çoklu dokunmatik (Multi-Touch) ekran FaceTime kamera FaceTime kamera Ana Ekran Ana Ekran Uygulama simgeleri Uygulama simgeleri Durum çubuğu Durum çubuğu Lightning bağlayıcısı Lightning bağlayıcısı Hoparlör Hoparlör Mikrofon Mikrofon Kulaklık seti jakı Kulaklık seti jakı Uyut/ Uyandır Uyut/ Uyandır iSight kamera iSight kamera Sesi aç/kıs Sesi aç/kıs Nano SIM tepsisi (bazı modellerde) Nano SIM tepsisi (bazı modellerde) Yandaki Anahtar Yandaki Anahtar İlk Bakışta iPadBölüm 1 İlk Bakışta iPad 8 iPad Çoklu dokunmatik (Multi-Touch) ekran Çoklu dokunmatik (Multi-Touch) ekran FaceTime kamera FaceTime kamera Ana Ekran Ana Ekran Uygulama simgeleri Uygulama simgeleri Durum çubuğu Durum çubuğu Hoparlör Hoparlör Lightning bağlayıcısı Lightning bağlayıcısı Mikrofon Mikrofon Kulaklık seti jakı Kulaklık seti jakı Mikro SIM tepsisi (bazı modellerde) Mikro SIM tepsisi (bazı modellerde) Uyut/Uyandır Uyut/Uyandır iSight kamera iSight kamera Sesi aç/kıs Sesi aç/kıs Yandaki Anahtar Yandaki Anahtar iPad özellikleriniz ve Ana Ekran’ınız, sahip olduğunuz iPad modeline bağlı olarak farklı olabilir. Aksesuarlar Aşağıdaki aksesuarlar iPad ile birlikte gelir: USB güç adaptörü:  iPad'e güç sağlamak ve pili şarj etmek için birlikte gelen güç adaptörünü kullanabilirsiniz.Bölüm 1 İlk Bakışta iPad 9 Not: iPad ile birlikte gelen güç adaptörü modele ve bölgeye göre değişiklik gösterebilir. Lightning - USB kablosu:  iPad'i ve iPad mini'yi şarj etmek amacıyla USB güç adaptörüne ya da eşzamanlamak amacıyla bilgisayarınıza bağlamak için bu kabloyu kullanın. Kabloyu isteğe bağlı iPad dock'uyla kullanabilir veya doğrudan iPad'e takabilirsiniz. Dock bağlayıcısı - USB kablosu:  iPad 2'yi ve 3. nesil iPad'i şarj etmek amacıyla USB güç adaptörüne ya da eşzamanlamak amacıyla bilgisayarınıza bağlamak için bu kabloyu kullanın. Kabloyu isteğe bağlı iPad dock'uyla kullanabilir veya doğrudan iPad'e takabilirsiniz. Düğmeler Birkaç basit düğme, iPad'i açıp kapatmanızı ve ses yüksekliğini ayarlamanızı kolaylaştırır. Uyut/Uyandır düğmesi iPad'i kullanmıyorken uyku durumuna geçirerek kilitleyebilirsiniz. iPad i kilitlediğinizde, ekrana dokunursanız hiçbir şey olmaz ama müzik çalmaya devam eder ve ses yüksekliği düğmesini kullanabilirsiniz. Uyut/Uyandır düğmesi Uyut/Uyandır düğmesi iPad'i kilitleme:  Uyut/Uyandır düğmesine basın. iPad'in kilidini açma:  Ana Ekran düğmesine veya Uyut/Uyandır düğmesine basın, sonra da sürgüyü sürükleyin. iPad’i kapatma:  Kırmızı sürgü gözükene dek Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini birkaç saniye basılı tutun, sonra ekrandaki sürgüyü sürükleyin. iPad’i açma:  Apple logosu gözükene dek Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini basılı tutun. Bir iki dakika boyunca ekrana dokunmazsanız iPad otomatik olarak kilitlenir. Ekranın ne kadar süre sonra kilitleneceğini değiştirebilir veya iPad kilidini açmak için bir parola ayarlayabilirsiniz. Otomatik kilit süresini ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Otomatik Kilit bölümüne gidin. Parola ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Parolayla Kilitleme bölümüne gidin. iPad 2 veya daha yenisini otomatik olarak kilitlemek veya kilidini açmak için ayrı olarak satılan iPad Smart Cover’ı veya iPad Smart Case’i kullanabilirsiniz. iPad Smart Cover’ı veya iPad Smart Case’i kullanma:  Ayarlar > Genel > iPad Kapağı Kilitler/ Kilidi Açar.Bölüm 1 İlk Bakışta iPad 10 Ana Ekran düğmesi Ana Ekran düğmesi istediğiniz zaman Ana ekranınıza geri dönmenizi sağlar. Aynı zamanda başka kullanışlı kestirmeler de sağlar. Ana Ekran’a gitme:  Ana Ekran düğmesine basın. Ana Ekran’da, açmak için bir uygulamaya dokunun. Bakınız: Uygulamaları açma ve uygulamalar arasında geçiş yapma sayfa 18. Son kullanılan uygulamaları görüntüleme:  iPad kilidi açıkken, Ana Ekran düğmesine iki kez basın. Son kullanılan uygulamaları gösteren çoklu görev çubuğu ekranın en altında görünür. Daha fazla uygulama görmek için çubuğu sola doğru kaydırın. Ses çalma denetimlerini görüntüleme:   • iPad kilitliyken:  Ana Ekran düğmesini çift tıklayın. Bakınız: Müzik çalma sayfa 82. • Başka bir uygulamayı kullanırken:  Ana Ekran düğmesine iki kez basın, sonra çoklu görev çubuğunu soldan sağa itin. Siri'yi kullanma (3. nesil iPad veya daha yenisi):  Ana Ekran düğmesini basılı tutun. Bakınız: Bölüm 4, Siri, sayfa 37. Ses yüksekliği düğmesi ve Yandaki Anahtar Sesli uyarıları ve bildirimleri etkisizleştirmek için Yandaki Anahtarı kullanın. Ayrıca onu, ekran yönünü kilitlemek ve iPad ekranının düşey ve yatay modlar arasında geçiş yapmasını engellemek için de kullanabilirsiniz. Ses yüksekliğini ayarlama:  Ses yüksekliğini artırmak veya azaltmak için ses yüksekliği düğmesinin üst veya alt tarafına basın. • Sesi kapatma:  Ses yüksekliği düğmesinin alt ucunu basılı tutun. • Ses sınırı ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Müzik > Ses Sınırı bölümüne gidin. Bildirimlerin, uyarıların ve ses efektlerinin sesini kapatma:  Yandaki Anahtarı aşağı kaydırın. Yandaki Anahtar; müziklerin, podcast'lerin, filmlerin ya da TV şovlarının sesini kapatmaz. Bakınız: Yandaki Anahtar sayfa 123. Ekran yönünü kilitleme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Yandaki Anahtarı Kullanarak… bölümüne gidin, sonra Yönü Kilitle'ye dokunun. Müzik parçalarının, diğer ortamların ve ayrıca uyarıların ve ses efektlerinin ses yüksekliğini ayarlamak için ses yüksekliği düğmesini kullanın. Sesi aç/kıs Sesi aç/kıs Yandaki Anahtar Yandaki Anahtar UYARI: İşitme kaybını önleme hakkında önemli bilgiler için, Önemli güvenlik bilgileri sayfa 131 konusuna bakın. FaceTime aramalarını, uyarıları ve bildirimleri sessize almak için Rahatsız Etme ayarını kullanabilirsiniz.Bölüm 1 İlk Bakışta iPad 11 iPad'i Rahatsız Etme’ye ayarlama:  Ayarlar’a gidin ve Rahatsız Etme’yi açın. Rahatsız Etme; uyarıların ve bildirimlerin ses çıkarmasını veya ekran kilitliyken ekranın yanmasını engeller. Alarmlar yine de ses çıkarır ve ekran kilitli değilse Rahatsız Etme etkili değildir. Sessiz saatleri programlamak, belirli kişilerin aramasına izin vermek veya yinelenen FaceTime aramalarının sesli çalmasını sağlamak için, Ayarlar > Bildirimler > Rahatsız Etme bölümüne gidin. Bakınız: Rahatsız Etme ve Bildirimler sayfa 119. SIM kart tepsisi iPad Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerindeki mikro SIM kartı hücresel veri için kullanılır. SIM kartınız önceden takılmış değilse ya da hücresel veri operatörünüzü değiştirirseniz, SIM kartını takmanız veya değiştirmeniz gerekebilir. iPad mini Wi-Fi + hücresel veri Nano SIM kartı Nano SIM kartı SIM tepsisi SIM tepsisi SIM çıkarma aracı SIM çıkarma aracı iPad Wi-Fi + hücresel veri Mikro SIM kartı Mikro SIM kartı SIM tepsisi SIM tepsisi SIM çıkarma aracı SIM çıkarma aracı SIM tepsisini açma:  SIM çıkarma aracının ucunu SIM tepsisindeki deliğe sokun. Çıkarma aracını sıkıca bastırıp tepsi dışarı çıkana dek düz bir şekilde iyice itin. SIM kartı takmak veya değiştirmek için SIM tepsisini dışa doğru çekin. SIM çıkarma aracınız yoksa, küçük bir kağıt ataşının ucunu kullanabilirsiniz. Daha fazla bilgi için, bakınız: Hücresel Veri sayfa 118.Bölüm 1 İlk Bakışta iPad 12 Durum simgeleri Ekranın en üstündeki durum çubuğunda yer alan simgeler iPad hakkında bilgi verir: Durum simgesi Anlamı Uçak modu Uçak modunun açık olduğunu gösterir—Internet'e erişemez veya Bluetooth® aygıtlarını kullanamazsınız. Kablosuz iletişim gerektirmeyen özellikler kullanılabilir. Bakınız: Uçak modu sayfa 116. LTE iPad’in (Wi-Fi + hücresel modelleri) Internet’e 4G LTE ağı üzerinden bağlı olduğunu gösterir. 4G iPad’in (Wi-Fi + hücresel modelleri) Internet’e 4G ağı üzerinden bağlı olduğunu gösterir. 3G iPad’in (Wi-Fi + hücresel modelleri) Internet’e 3G ağı üzerinden bağlı olduğunu gösterir. EDGE iPad’in (Wi-Fi + hücresel modelleri) Internet’e EDGE ağı üzerinden bağlı olduğunu gösterir. GPRS iPad’in (Wi-Fi + hücresel modelleri) Internet’e GPRS ağı üzerinden bağlı olduğunu gösterir. Wi-Fi iPad'in Wi-Fi Internet bağlantısına sahip olduğunu gösterir. Çubuk sayısı ne kadar fazlaysa, bağlantı o kadar güçlüdür. Bakınız: Bir Wi-Fi ağına katılma sayfa 116. Rahatsız Etme “Rahatsız Etme” özelliğinin açık olduğunu gösterir. Bakınız: Rahatsız Etme ve Bildirimler sayfa 119. Kişisel Erişim Noktası iPad’in başka bir iPad’e, iPhone’a veya iPod touch’a Kişisel Erişim Noktası sağladığını gösterir. Bakınız: Kişisel Erişim Noktası sayfa 117. Eşzamanlama iPad’un iTunes ile eşzamanlandığını gösterir. Bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16. Etkinlik Ağ etkinliğinin veya başka bir etkinliğin olduğunu gösterir. Bazı üçüncü parti uygulamalar sürmekte olan bir işlemi göstermek için bu simgeyi kullanır. VPN Ağa VPN kullanarak bağlı olduğunuzu gösterir. Bakınız: VPN sayfa 117. Kilit iPad’un kilitli olduğunu gösterir. Bakınız: Uyut/Uyandır düğmesi sayfa 9. Alarm Bir alarmın ayarlanmış olduğunu gösterir. Bakınız: Bölüm 17, Saat, sayfa 78. Ekran yönü kilidi Ekran yönünün kilitlenmiş olduğunu gösterir. Bakınız: Düşey ve yatay yön sayfa 20. Konum Servisleri Bir uygulamanın Konum Servisleri’ni kullandığını gösterir. Bakınız: Gizlilik sayfa 125. Çalma Bir müzik parçasının, sesli kitabın veya podcast’in çalmakta olduğunu gösterir. Bakınız: Müzik çalma sayfa 82. Bluetooth Beyaz simge:  Bluetooth’un açık ve mikrofonlu kulaklık seti veya klavye gibi bir aygıtla eşlenmiş olduğunu gösterir. Gri simge:  Bluetooth açık ve bir aygıt ile eşlenmiş; fakat aygıt kapsama alanı dışında veya kapalı. Simge yok:  Bluetooth bir aygıt ile eşlenmemiş. Bakınız: Bluetooth aygıtları sayfa 34. Bluetooth pili Desteklenen eşlenmiş bir Bluetooth aygıtının pil düzeyini gösterir. Pil Pil düzeyini veya şarj olma durumunu gösterir. Bakınız: Pil sayfa 36.2 13 iPad'inizi ve posta hesaplarını nasıl ayarlayacağınızı, iCloud'u nasıl kullanacağınızı ve daha fazlasını öğrenmek için bu bölümü okuyun. Nelere gereksiniminiz var? · UYARI: Yaralanmalardan kaçınmak için Önemli güvenlik bilgileri sayfa 131'i kullanmadan önce iPad bölümünü okuyun. iPad'i kullanmak için şunlara gereksinim duyarsınız: • Internet bağlantısı (geniş bant önerilir) • iCloud, App Store, iTunes Store ve çevrimiçi satın alımlar da dahil olmak üzere bazı özellikler için Apple kimliği Apple kimliğini ayarlama sırasında yaratabilirsiniz. iPad'i bilgisayarınızla kullanmak için şunlara gereksinim duyarsınız: • USB 2.0 veya 3.0 kapısına sahip bir Mac veya USB 2.0 kapısına sahip bir PC ve aşağıdaki işletim sistemlerinden biri: • Mac OS X sürüm 10.6.8 veya daha yenisi • Service Pack 3 veya daha yenisine sahip Windows 7, Windows Vista veya Windows XP Home ya da Professional • www.apple.com/tr/itunes/download/ adresinden edinilebilecek iTunes 11 veya daha yenisi (bazı özellikler için) iPad'i ayarlama iPad’i ayarlamak için onu açın ve Ayarlama Yardımcısı’nı izleyin. Ayarlama Yardımcısı'ndaki ekran yönlendirmeleri aşağıdaki adımlar da dahil olmak üzere ayarlama işlemi boyunca size yol gösterir: • Wi-Fi ağına bağlanma • Apple kimliğiyle giriş yapma veya ücretsiz Apple kimliği yaratma • iCloud’u ayarlama • Konum Servisleri ve iPad'imi Bul gibi önerilen özellikleri açma Ayarlama esnasında, bir iCloud yedeğinden veya iTunes'dan geri yükleyerek başka bir iPad'deki uygulamalarınızı, ayarlarınızı ve içeriklerinizi kopyalayabilirsiniz. Bakınız: iPad'i yedekleme sayfa 135. BaşlangıçBölüm 2 Başlangıç 14 Apple kimliği Apple kimliği; iTunes Store, App Store ve iCloud gibi Apple servislerine erişmenizi sağlayan ücretsiz bir hesabın kullanıcı adıdır. Apple ile yaptığınız her şey için tek bir Apple kimliğine gereksiniminiz vardır. Kullandığınız, satın aldığınız veya kiraladığınız servisler ve ürünler ücretli olabilir. Apple kimliğiniz varsa onu iPad’i ilk kez ayarlarken ve bir Apple servisine giriş yapmanız gerektiğinde kullanın. Önceden Apple kimliğiniz yoksa, şimdi veya daha sonra giriş yapmanız istendiği zaman bir tane yaratabilirsiniz. Apple kimliği yaratma: Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store bölümüne gidin ve Giriş Yap düğmesine dokunun. (Zaten giriş yapmış durumdaysanız ve başka bir Apple kimliği yaratmak istiyorsanız, önce Apple kimliğinize dokunup sonra Çıkış Yap’a dokunun.) Daha fazla bilgi için support.apple.com/kb/he37?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine bakın. Mail hesaplarını ve diğer hesapları ayarlama iPad; iCloud’la, Microsoft Exchange’le ve en yaygın Internet tabanlı e-posta, kişi ve takvim servis sağlayıcılarının çoğuyla çalışır. Önceden bir e-posta hesabınız yoksa, iPad’i ayarlarken ücretsiz bir iCloud hesabı ayarlayabilir veya daha sonra Ayarlar > iCloud bölümünde bir tane ayarlayabilirsiniz. Bakınız: iCloud’u kullanma sayfa 15. Bir iCloud hesabı ayarlama:  Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin. Başka bir hesap ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin. Şirketiniz veya kurumunuz destekliyorsa, kişileri bir LDAP veya CardDAV hesabı kullanarak ekleyebilirsiniz. Bakınız: Kişi ekleme sayfa 72. Şirket ortamında Microsoft Exchange hesabı ayarlama hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, bakınız: Microsoft Exchange hesaplarını ayarlama sayfa 126. iPad'deki içerikleri yönetme iCloud’u veya iTunes’u kullanarak iPad ile diğer iOS aygıtlarınız ve bilgisayarlarınız arasında bilgileri ve dosyaları aktarabilirsiniz. • iCloud; müzikleri, fotoğrafları, takvimleri, kişileri, belgeleri ve benzeri içerikleri saklar ve bunları diğer iOS aygıtlarınıza ve bilgisayarlarınıza kablosuz olarak iletir; böylece her şey güncel tutulur. Aşağıdaki iCloud’u kullanma bölümüne bakın. • iTunes; müzikleri, videoları, fotoğrafları ve daha birçok şeyi bilgisayarınızla iPad’iniz arasında eşzamanlar. Aygıtlardan birinde yaptığınız değişiklikler eşzamanladığınızda diğerine kopyalanır. iTunes’u, bir dosyayı bir uygulamayla kullanmak üzere iPad’a kopyalamak veya iPad üzerinde yarattığınız bir belgeyi bilgisayarınıza kopyalamak için de kullanabilirsiniz. Bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16. Gereksiniminize göre iCloud’u veya iTunes’u ya da her ikisini birden kullanabilirsiniz. Örneğin iPad üzerinde çektiğiniz fotoğrafları diğer aygıtlarınıza otomatik olarak iletmek için iCloud Fotoğraf Yayını’nı kullanabilir ve bilgisayarınızdaki fotoğraf albümlerini eşzamanlayarak iPad’e aktarmak için iTunes’u kullanabilirsiniz. Not: Hem iTunes’un Bilgi penceresinde öğeleri (kişiler, takvimler ve notlar gibi) eşzamanlayıp hem de bu bilgileri aygıtlarınızda güncel tutmak için iCloud’u kullanmayın. Aksi takdirde iPad üzerinde yinelenen veriler görebilirsiniz.Bölüm 2 Başlangıç 15 iCloud’u kullanma iCloud; müzikler, fotoğraflar, uygulamalar, kişiler, takvimler ve desteklenen belgeler de dahil olmak üzere içeriklerinizi saklar. iCloud'da saklanan içerikler, aynı iCloud hesabı ile ayarlanmış olan diğer iOS aygıtlarınıza ve bilgisayarlarınıza kablosuz olarak anında iletilir. iCloud; iOS 5 veya daha yenisine sahip iOS aygıtlarda, OS X Lion 10.7.2 veya daha yenisine sahip Mac’lerde ve Windows için iCloud Denetim Masası’na sahip PC’lerde (Windows Vista Service Pack 2 veya Windows 7 gerekir) kullanılabilir. iCloud özellikleri arasında şunlar bulunur: • Buluttaki iTunes—Daha önce satın alınan iTunes müziklerini ve TV şovlarını, istediğiniz zaman ücretsiz olarak iPad’a indirin. • Uygulamalar ve Kitaplar—Daha önce yapılan App Store ve iBookstore satın alımlarını, istediğiniz zaman ücretsiz olarak indirin. • Fotoğraf Yayını—Bir aygıtınızda çektiğiniz fotoğraflar, otomatik olarak tüm aygıtlarınızda görünür. Bakınız: Fotoğraf Yayını sayfa 60. • Buluttaki Belgeler—iCloud'u destekleyen uygulamalar için, belgeleri ve uygulama verilerini tüm aygıtlarınızda güncel tutun. • Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler—Mail kişilerinizi, takvimlerinizi, notlarınızı ve anımsatıcılarınızı tüm aygıtlarınızda güncel tutun. • Yedekleme—Bir güç kaynağına ve Wi-Fi’ye bağlı iken iPad’u iCloud’a otomatik olarak yedekleyin. Bakınız: iCloud ile yedekleme sayfa 136. • iPad’imi Bul—iPad’inizin yerini haritada bulun, bir mesaj görüntüleyin, bir ses çalın, ekranı kilitleyin veya verileri uzaktan silin. Bakınız: iPad’imi Bul sayfa 35. • Arkadaşlarımı Bul—Arkadaşlarımı Bul uygulamasını kullanarak ailenizi ve arkadaşlarınızı takip edin (bir Wi-Fi ağına veya hücresel ağa bağlıyken). Ücretsiz uygulamayı App Store'dan indirin. • iTunes Match—iTunes Match aboneliği ile CD’lerden içe aktardığınız veya iTunes dışında bir yerden satın aldığınız müzikler de dahil olmak üzere tüm müzikleriniz bütün aygıtlarınızda görünür ve talep üzerine indirilebilir veya çalınabilir. Bakınız: iTunes Match sayfa 86. • iCloud Sekmeleri—Diğer iOS aygıtlarınızda veya OS X Mountain Lion veya daha yenisinin yüklü olduğu bilgisayarlarınızda açık olan web sayfalarını görün. Bakınız: Bölüm 5, Safari, sayfa 43. iCloud ile ücretsiz bir e-posta hesabına ve e-postalarınız, belgeleriniz ve yedeklemeleriniz için 5 GB saklama alanına sahip olursunuz. Satın aldığınız müzikler, uygulamalar, TV şovları, kitaplar ve bunun yanı sıra Fotoğraf Yayını’nız boş alanınızdan düşülmez. Not: iCloud bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir ve iCloud özellikleri bölgeye göre değişebilir. Daha fazla bilgi için, www.apple.com/tr/icloud adresine giden. iCloud hesabına giriş yapma veya iCloud hesabı yaratma:  Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin. iCloud'u yönetme:  Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin. • Servisleri etkinleştirme veya etkisizleştirme:  Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin, sonra Fotoğraf Yayını, Belgeler ve Veriler gibi servisleri açın. • iCloud yedeklemelerini etkinleştirme:  Ayarlar > iCloud > Saklama Alanı ve Yedekleme bölümüne gidin. • Daha fazla iCloud saklama alanı satın alma:  Ayarlar > iCloud > Saklama Alanı ve Yedekleme > Alanı Yönet > Saklama Alanı Planını Değiştir bölümüne gidin, sonra bir yükseltme seçin. iCloud saklama alanı satın alma hakkında bilgi için help.apple.com/icloud’a gidin.Bölüm 2 Başlangıç 16 Müzikler, uygulamalar veya kitaplar için Otomatik İndirmeler’i açma:  Ayarlar > Store bölümüne gidin. Daha önce satın alınanları görüntüleme ve indirme: • iTunes Store’dan satın alınanlar:  iTunes’a gidin ve sonra Satın Alınmış simgesine dokunun. • App Store’dan satın alınanlar:  App Store’a gidin ve sonra Satın Alınmış simgesine dokunun. • iBookstore’dan satın alınanlar:  iBooks’a gidin, Mağaza düğmesine dokunun ve daha sonra Satın Alınmış simgesine dokunun. iPad'inizi bulma:  www.icloud.com, adresini ziyaret edin, Apple kimliğinizle giriş yapın ve daha sonra sonra iPad’imi Bul’u seçin. Önemli: iPad’in bulunabilmesi için iPad’inizin Ayarlar > iCloud bölümünde iPad’imi Bul seçeneği açılmış olmalıdır. iCloud hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, www.apple.com/tr/icloud adresine gidin. Destek bilgileri için, www.apple.com/emea/support/icloud/ adresine gidin. iPad’i bilgisayarınıza bağlama iPad'i bilgisayarınıza bağlamak için, onunla birlikte gelen USB kablosunu kullanın. iPad'in bilgisayarınıza bağlanması; bilgileri, müzikleri ve diğer içerikleri iTunes ile eşzamanlamanıza olanak tanır. iTunes ile kablosuz olarak da eşzamanlayabilirsiniz. iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16 bölümüne bakın. iPad bilgisayarınızla eşzamanlanmadığı sürece, istediğiniz zaman bağlantısını kesebilirsiniz. Bir eşzamanlama sürmekteyken bağlantısını keserseniz, iPad'i bilgisayarınıza bir sonraki bağlayışınıza dek bazı veriler eşzamanlanmamış kalabilir. iTunes ile eşzamanlama iTunes ile eşzamanlama, bilgileri bilgisayarınızla iPad arasında kopyalar. iPad’i birlikte gelen USB kablosu ile bilgisayarınıza bağlayarak eşzamanlayabilirsiniz veya iTunes’u Wi-Fi’yi kullanarak kablosuz olarak eşzamanlamaya ayarlayabilirsiniz. iTunes’u müzikleri, fotoğrafları, videoları, podcast’leri, uygulamaları ve daha birçok şeyi eşzamanlamaya ayarlayabilirsiniz. iPad’i eşzamanlama hakkında bilgi için, bilgisayarınızda iTunes’u açın, sonra Yardım menüsünden iTunes Yardım’ı seçin.Bölüm 2 Başlangıç 17 iTunes ile kablosuz olarak eşzamanlamayı ayarlama:  iPad’i, birlikte gelen USB kablosunu kullanarak bilgisayarınıza bağlayın. Bilgisayardaki iTunes’da iPad’inizi seçin (Aygıtlar’ın altında), Özet’i tıklayın, sonra “Wi-Fi üzerinden eşzamanla”yı açın. Wi-Fi eşzamanlama açıldığında iPad her gün otomatik olarak eşzamanlanır. iPad'in bir güç kaynağına bağlı olması, hem iPad'in hem de bilgisayarınızın aynı kablosuz ağ üzerinde olması ve iTunes’un bilgisayarınızda açık olması gerekir. Daha fazla bilgi için, bakınız: iTunes Wi-Fi Eşzamanlama sayfa 121. iTunes ile eşzamanlama ipuçları • Kişilerinizi, takvimlerinizi, yer imlerinizi ve notlarınızı saklamak için iCloud’u kullanıyorsanız, onları iTunes’u da kullanarak iPad ile eşzamanlamayın. • iPad üzerinde iTunes Store’dan veya App Store’dan satın aldıklarınız eşzamanlanarak yeniden iTunes arşivinize aktarılır. Ayrıca içerikleri ve uygulamaları bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes Store’da da satın alabilir veya indirebilir ve onları eşzamanlayarak iPad’a aktarabilirsiniz. • Aygıtın Özet penceresinde, iTunes’u iPad bilgisayarınıza bağlandığında onu otomatik olarak eşzamanlayacak şekilde ayarlayabilirsiniz. Bu seçeneği geçici olarak geçersiz kılmak için, iPad’iniz kenar çubuğunda görününceye dek Komut ve Option (Mac) veya Shift ve Kontrol (PC) tuşlarını basılı tutun. • Aygıtın Özet penceresinde, iTunes’un yedekleme yaparken bilgisayarınızda saklanan bilgileri şifrelemesini istiyorsanız “iPad yedeklemesini şifrele” seçeneğini seçin. Şifrelenen yedeklemeler kilit simgesiyle gösterilir ve yedeklemeyi geri yüklemek için parola istenir. Bu seçeneği seçmezseniz, diğer parolalar (e-posta hesapları için olanlar gibi) yedeklemeye dahil edilmez ve iPad’in üzerine geri yüklemek için yedeklemeyi kullanırsanız parolaların yeniden girilmesi gerekir. • Aygıtın Bilgi penceresinde e-posta hesaplarınızı eşzamanladığınızda yalnızca bilgisayarınızdaki ayarlar iPad’e aktarılır. iPad'deki bir e-posta hesabında yaptığınız değişiklikler, bilgisayarınızdaki hesabı etkilemez. • Aygıtın Bilgi penceresinde, bir sonraki eşzamanlama sırasında iPad'deki bilgileri bilgisayarınızdaki bilgilerle değiştirmenizi sağlayan seçenekleri seçmek için İleri Düzey’i tıklayın. • Bir podcast’in veya sesli kitabın bir bölümünü dinlediyseniz, bu içeriği iTunes ile eşzamanlarken kaldığınız yer bilgisi de dahil edilir. iPad'de dinlemeye başlayınca, bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da kaldığınız yerden sürdürebilirsiniz (ya da tam tersi). • Aygıtın Fotoğraf penceresinde, bilgisayarınızdaki bir klasörde bulunan fotoğrafları ve videoları eşzamanlayarak aktarabilirsiniz. Bu kullanma kılavuzunu iPad’de görüntüleme iPad Kullanma Kılavuzu'nu iPad üzerinde Safari’de ve ücretsiz iBooks uygulamasında görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Kullanma kılavuzunu Safari’de görüntüleme:  Safari'de simgesine dokunun, sonra da iPad Kullanma Kılavuzu yer imine dokunun. Veya help.apple.com/ipad adresine gidin. Kullanma kılavuzu için Ana Ekran’a bir simge ekleme:   simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra “Ana Ekrana Ekle” düğmesine dokunun. Kullanma kılavuzunu iBooks’da görüntüleme:  iBooks’u yüklemediyseniz App Store’u açın ve daha sonra“iBooks”u aratıp yükleyin. iBooks’u açın ve Store düğmesine dokunun. “iPad Kullanma Kılavuzu” (User Guide) ifadesini aratın ve daha sonra kılavuzu seçip indirin. iBooks hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, bakınız: Bölüm 23, iBooks, sayfa 93.3 18 Uygulamaları kullanma Dokunmatik ekranda nesnelere dokunmak, çift dokunmak, kaydırmak ve kıstırıp açmak için parmaklarınızı kullanarak iPad’inizle etkileşimde bulunursunuz. Uygulamaları açma ve uygulamalar arasında geçiş yapma Ana Ekran’a gitmek için, Ana Ekran düğmesine basın. Bir uygulamayı açma:  Öğeye dokunun. Ana ekrana dönmek için, Ana Ekran düğmesine yeniden basın. Son kullanılan uygulamaları görüntüleme:  Çoklu görev çubuğunu göstermek için Ana Ekran düğmesine iki kez basın. Yeniden kullanmak için uygulamaya dokunun. Daha fazla uygulama görmek için sola kaydırın. Çok fazla uygulamanız varsa, onları bulup açmak için Spotlight’ı kullanmak isteyebilirsiniz. Bakınız: Arama yapma sayfa 28. Temel KonularBölüm 3 Temel Konular 19 İçeriği kaydırma İçeriği kaydırmak için parmağınızı yukarıya veya aşağıya doğru sürükleyin. Web sayfaları gibi bazı ekranlarda içeriği bir yandan diğer yana doğru da kaydırabilirsiniz. İçeriği kaydırmak için parmağınızı sürüklediğinizde, ekrandaki hiçbir şey seçilmez veya etkinleştirilmez. Hızlı bir şekilde kaydırmak için itin. Kaydırmanın durması için bekleyebilir veya kaydırmayı hemen durdurmak için ekranda herhangi bir yere dokunabilirsiniz. Bir sayfanın en başına hızlı bir şekilde gitmek için, ekranın en üstündeki durum çubuğuna dokunun. Listeler Listeye bağlı olarak bir öğeyi seçme işlemi farklı şeyler yapabilir; örneğin başka bir liste açabilir, bir müzik parçasını çalabilir, bir e-posta açabilir ya da birinin kişi bilgilerini gösterebilir. Listedeki bir öğeyi seçme:  Öğeye dokunun. Bazı listelerin yan tarafında, hızlı bir şekilde dolaşmanıza yardımcı olan dizini vardır. Dizinlenmiş bir listedeki öğeleri bulma:  Herhangi bir harfle başlayan öğelere atlamak için o harfe dokunun. Veya listeyi hızlı bir şekilde kaydırmak için dizin boyunca parmağınızı sürükleyin. Bir önceki listeye veya ekrana dönme:  Sol üst köşedeki geri düğmesine dokunun.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 20 Büyütme veya küçültme Uygulamaya bağlı olarak ekrandaki görüntüyü büyütmek için yaklaştırabilir veya küçültmek için uzaklaştırabilirsiniz. Örneğin fotoğrafları, web sayfalarını, e-postaları veya haritaları görüntülerken küçültmek için iki parmağınızı kıstırın veya büyütmek için birbirinden uzaklaştırın. Haritaları büyütmek için çift dokunun; küçültmek için ise iki parmağınızla birden bir kez dokunun. Büyütme aynı zamanda, kullandığınız herhangi bir uygulamada ekrandakileri görmenize yardımcı olmak amacıyla ekranın tümünü büyütmenize olanak sağlayan bir erişilebilirlik özelliğidir. Bakınız: Büyütme sayfa 111. Çoklu Görev hareketleri Ana Ekran'a dönmek, çoklu görev çubuğunu göstermek veya başka bir uygulamaya geçmek için iPad'de çoklu görev hareketlerini kullanabilirsiniz. Ana Ekran'a dönme:  Dört veya beş parmağınızı birden kıstırın. Çoklu görev çubuğunu gösterme:  Dört veya beş parmakla yukarı kaydırın. Uygulamalar arasında geçiş yapma:  Dört veya beş parmakla sola veya sağa kaydırın. Çoklu görev hareketlerini açma veya kapatma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Çoklu Görev Hareketleri bölümüne gidin. Düşey ve yatay yön Birçok iPad uygulamasını düşey veya yatay yönde görüntüleyebilirsiniz. iPad'i yan döndürdüğünüzde, yeni yöne sığacak şekilde ekran da döner.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 21 Ekran yönünü kilitleme:  Ana Ekran düğmesine iki kez basın, çoklu görev çubuğunu soldan sağa doğru kaydırın ve sonra simgesine dokunun. Ekran yönü kilitli iken durum çubuğunda yön kilitli simgesi görünür. Yandaki Anahtarı, ses efektlerinin ve bildirimlerin sesini kapatmak yerine ekran yönünü kilitlemeye de ayarlayabilirsiniz. Ayarlar > Genel bölümüne gidin ve “Yandaki Anahtarı Kullanarak:” başlığının altındaki Yönü Kilitle’ye dokunun. Bakınız: Yandaki Anahtar sayfa 123. Ekran parlaklığını ayarlama: Ekranın parlaklığını elle ayarlayabilir veya iPad’in parlaklığı otomatik olarak ayarlamak amacıyla yerleşik ortam ışığı algılayıcısını kullanmasını sağlamak için Otomatik Parlaklık’ı açabilirsiniz. Ekran parlaklığını ayarlama: Ana Ekran düğmesine iki kez basın, çoklu görev çubuğunu soldan sağa doğru kaydırın ve sonra parlaklık sürgüsünü sürükleyin. Parlaklık Parlaklık Otomatik Parlaklık’ı açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > Parlaklık ve Duvar Kağıdı bölümüne gidin. Bakınız: Parlaklık ve Duvar Kağıdı sayfa 124. iPad'i özelleştirme Ana Ekran’daki uygulamalarınızın yerleşimini özelleştirebilir, onları klasörler halinde düzenleyebilir ve duvar kağıdını değiştirebilirsiniz. Uygulamaları yeniden düzenleme Uygulamaları yeniden düzenleyerek, uygulamaları ekranın alt tarafındaki Dock’a taşıyarak ve ek Ana Ekran’lar yaratarak Ana Ekran’ınızı özelleştirin. Uygulamaları yeniden düzenleme: Ana Ekrandaki herhangi bir uygulamaya dokunup titreyene dek parmağınızı basılı tutun, sonra uygulamaları sürükleyerek düzenleyin. Düzenlemenizi kaydetmek için Ana Ekran düğmesine basın.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 22 Yeni bir Ana Ekran yaratma: Uygulamaları düzenlerken, uygulamayı yeni bir ekran görününceye dek en sağdaki ekranın sağ kenarına doğru sürükleyin. En fazla 11 Ana ekran yaratabilirsiniz. Dock’un üstündeki noktalar, sahip olduğunuz ekran sayısını ve o anda hangi ekranı görüntülediğinizi gösterir. • Ana Ekran'lar arasında geçiş yapma: Sola veya sağa doğru kaydırın. • İlk Ana Ekran’a gitme: Ana Ekran düğmesine basın. Uygulamayı başka bir ekrana taşıma: Uygulama titrerken, uygulamayı ekranın yan kenarına doğru sürükleyin. iTunes’u kullanarak Ana Ekran’ı özelleştirme:  iPad’i bilgisayarınıza bağlayın. Bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da iPad’i seçin ve sonra iPad’in Ana Ekran görüntüsünü görmek için Uygulamalar düğmesini tıklayın. Ana Ekran’ı özgün yerleşimine döndürme: Ayarlar > Genel > Sıfırla bölümüne gidin, sonra Ana Ekran Yerleşimini Sıfırla düğmesine dokunun. Ana Ekran’ın sıfırlanması yaratmış olduğunuz tüm klasörleri siler ve Ana Ekran’ınıza saptanmış duvar kağıdını uygular. Klasörlerle düzenleme Ana Ekran’larınızdaki uygulamaları düzenlemek için klasörleri kullanabilirsiniz. Klasörleri, uygulamaları yaptığınız gibi Ana Ekran’larınızın üzerinde veya Dock’a sürükleyerek yeniden düzenleyin. Klasör yaratma:  Bir uygulamaya dokunun ve Ana Ekran’daki simgeler titremeye başlayana dek parmağınızı basılı tutun, sonra uygulamayı başka bir uygulamanın üzerine sürükleyin. iPad, iki uygulamayı içeren yeni bir klasör yaratır ve klasörü uygulamaların türüne göre adlandırır. Farklı bir ad girmek için ad alanına dokunun. Klasörü açma: Klasöre dokunun. Klasörü kapatmak için, klasörün dışına dokunun veya Ana Ekran düğmesine  basın. Klasörlerle düzenleme: Uygulamaları düzenlerken (simgeler titrerken): • Uygulamayı bir klasöre ekleme: Uygulamayı klasörün üzerine sürükleyin. • Uygulamayı klasörden silme: Gerekiyorsa klasörü açın, sonra uygulamayı dışarıya sürükleyin. • Klasörü silme: Tüm uygulamaları klasörün dışına taşıyın. Klasör otomatik olarak silinir. • Klasörün adını değiştirme: Klasörü açmak için dokunun, sonra ada dokunup yeni bir ad girin. İşiniz bittiğinde, Ana Ekran düğmesine basın. Duvar kağıdını değiştirme Duvar kağıdı olarak kullanılacak bir görüntü veya fotoğraf seçerek hem Kilitli ekranı hem de Ana Ekran’ı özelleştirebilirsiniz. Sağlanan görüntülerden birini veya Film Rulonuzda ya da iPad’deki başka bir albümde bulunan bir fotoğrafı seçin. Duvar kağıdını değiştirme: Ayarlar > Parlaklık ve Duvar Kağıdı bölümüne gidin.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 23 Yazma Ekran klavyesi, metin girmeniz gerektiğinde yazmanızı sağlar. Metin girme Kişi bilgileri, e-postalar ve web adresleri gibi metinler girmek için ekran klavyesini kullanın. Kullandığınız uygulamaya ve dile bağlı olarak klavye; yazım yanlışlarını düzeltebilir, yazdığınız şeyi tahmin edebilir ve hatta kullandıklarınızı öğrenebilir. Yazmak için Apple kablosuz klavye de kullanabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Apple kablosuz klavye sayfa 26. Yazma yerine dikteyi kullanmak için, bakınız: Dikte sayfa 27. Metin girme:  Klavyeyi açmak için bir metin alanına dokunun ve daha sonra klavyedeki tuşlara dokunun. Yazarken, her harf başparmağınızın ya da parmağınızın üzerinde görünür. . Yanlış tuşa dokunursanız parmağınızı doğru tuşa doğru kaydırabilirsiniz. Parmağınızı tuştan çekene dek o harf girilmez. • Büyük harf yazma: Bir harfe dokunmadan önce Shift tuşuna dokunun. Veya Shift tuşuna dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutarak bir harfe kaydırın. • Hızlıca bir nokta ve bir boşluk girme: Boşluk çubuğuna çift dokunun. • Büyük harf kilidini açma: Shift tuşuna çift dokunun. Büyük harf kilidini kapatmak için, Shift tuşuna dokunun. • Sayıları, noktalama işaretlerini veya sembolleri girme: Sayı tuşuna dokunun. Ek noktalama işaretlerini ve sembolleri görmek için, Sembol tuşuna dokunun. • Aksanlı harfleri veya diğer alternatif karakterleri girme: Bir tuşa dokunup basılı tutun, sonra seçeneklerden birini seçmek için kaydırın. Ekran klavyesini gizleme: Klavye tuşuna dokunun. Yazma seçeneklerini ayarlama: Ayarlar > Genel > Klavye bölümüne gidin.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 24 Metni düzenleme Metni düzenlemeniz gerekirse, ekrandaki büyüteç ekleme noktasını gerekli yere konumlandırmanızı sağlar. Metni seçip kesebilir, kopyalayabilir ve yapıştırabilirsiniz. Bazı uygulamalarda fotoğrafları ve videoları da kesebilir, kopyalayabilir ve yapıştırabilirsiniz. Ekleme noktasını yerleştirme:  Büyüteci göstermek için parmağınızı ekrana basılı tutun; sonra parmağınızı ekleme noktası konumuna sürükleyin. Metin seçme:  Seçim düğmelerini görüntülemek için ekleme noktasına dokunun. Bitişik sözcüğü seçmek için Seç’e veya metnin tamamını seçmek için Tümünü Seç’e dokunun. Bir sözcüğe çift dokunarak da onu seçebilirsiniz. Daha fazla veya daha az metin seçmek için tutma noktalarını sürükleyin. Web sayfaları gibi salt okunur belgelerde, sözcüğü seçmek için dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun. Tutma noktaları Tutma noktaları Metni kesme veya kopyalama: Metni seçin ve daha sonra Kes’e veya Kopyala’ya dokunun. Metni yapıştırma: Ekleme noktasına dokunun ve sonra kestiğiniz veya kopyaladığınız son metni eklemek için Yapıştır’a dokunun. Metni değiştirmek için, Yapıştır’a dokunmadan önce onu seçin. Son düzenlemeyi geri alma: iPad’i sallayın, sonra Geri Al’a dokunun. Metni kalın, italik veya altı çizgili yapma: Metni seçin, simgesine dokunun, sonra B/I/U düğmesine dokunun (her zaman kullanılamayabilir). Sözcüğün tanımına bakma: Sözcüğü seçin, sonra Tanımla’ya dokunun (her zaman kullanılamayabilir). Alternatif sözcükleri alma: Bir sözcük seçin, sonra Öner’e dokunun (her zaman kullanılamayabilir). Metni iki yana yaslama: Metni seçin, sonra sol veya sağ oka dokunun (her zaman kullanılamayabilir).Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 25 Otomatik düzeltme ve yazım denetimi Birçok dil için, iPad yazım yanlışlarını düzeltmek veya siz yazarken önerilerde bulunmak için etkin sözlüğü kullanır. iPad bir sözcük önerdiğinde yazmanızı kesmeden öneriyi kabul edebilirsiniz. Desteklenen dillerin listesi için, www.apple.com/tr/ipad/specs adresine bakın. Öneriyi kabul etme:  Bir boşluk, noktalama işareti veya Return karakteri yazın. Öneriyi reddetme:  Önerinin yanındaki “x” simgesine dokunun. Aynı sözcük için olan öneriyi her reddedişinizde, iPad’in sözcüğü kabul etme olasılığı artar. iPad, ayrıca, daha önce yazmış olduğunuz ama yazımı yanlış olabilecek sözcüklerin altını çizebilir. Yanlış yazılmış bir sözcüğü değiştirme: Altı çizgili sözcüğe dokunun, daha sonra doğru yazıma dokunun. İstediğiniz sözcük görünmüyorsa, sözcüğü yeniden yazın. Otomatik düzeltmeyi veya yazım denetimini açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > Genel > Klavye bölümüne gidin. Kestirmeler ve kişisel sözlüğünüz Kestirmeler, uzun bir sözcük veya ifade yerine sadece birkaç karakter yazmanıza olanak tanır. Kestirmeyi yazdığınız zaman genişletilmiş metin görünür. Örneğin "Yldym" kestirmesi "Yoldayım!" olarak genişletilir. Kestirme yaratma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Klavye bölümüne gidin ve sonra Yeni Kestirme Ekle’ye dokunun. iPad’in bir sözcüğü veya ifadeyi düzeltmeye çalışmasını engelleme: Kestirme yaratın ama Kestirme alanını boş bırakın. Kestirmeyi düzenleme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Klavye bölümüne gidin ve sonra kestirmeye dokunun. Kişisel sözlüğünüzü diğer iOS aygıtlarınızda güncel tutmak için iCloud’u kullanma:  Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin ve “Belgeler ve Veriler”i açın.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 26 Klavye yerleşimleri iPad'de, ekranın altında bulunan ayrık klavye ile ya da ekranın orta kısmındaki yeri değiştirilmiş klavye ile yazabilirsiniz. Klavyeyi ayarlama: simgesini basılı tutun, sonra: • Ayrık klavyeyi kullanma: Ayırmak için parmağınızı kaydırın, sonra bırakın. • Klavyeyi ekranın ortasına taşıma: Yerini değiştirmek için parmağınızı kaydırın, sonra bırakın. • Tam klavyeye dönme: Yerleştirmek ve birleştirmek için parmağınızı kaydırın, sonra bırakın. • Ekranın alt kısmındaki tam klavyeye dönme: Yerleştirmek için parmağınızı kaydırın, sonra bırakın. Ayrık Klavye'yi açma ya da kapatma: Ayarlar > Genel > Klavye > Ayrık Klavye bölümüne gidin. Ekran klavyesi veya iPad ile kullandığınız Apple kablosuz klavye için yerleşimleri ayarlamak amacıyla Ayarlar’ı kullanabilirsiniz. Kullanılabilir yerleşimler, klavye diline bağlıdır. Aşağıdaki Apple kablosuz klavye ve Ek B, Uluslararası Klavyeler, sayfa 128 bölümüne bakın. Klavye yerleşimlerini seçme: Ayarlar > Genel > Uluslararası > Klavyeler bölümüne gidin, bir dil seçin ve sonra yerleşimleri seçin. Apple kablosuz klavye iPad’de yazmak için Apple kablosuz klavyeyi (ayrı satılır) kullanabilirsiniz. Apple kablosuz klavye Bluetooth yoluyla bağlanır, bu yüzden önce onu iPad ile eşlemeniz gerekir. Bakınız: Bluetooth aygıtları ile eşleme sayfa 34. Klavye iPad ile eşlendikten sonra, aralık içinde olduğu sürece hep bağlanır (10 metreye kadar). Kablosuz bir klavye bağlıyken bir metin alanına dokunduğunuzda ekranda klavye görünmez. Pilden tasarruf etmek için, klavyeyi kullanılmadığı zaman kapatın. Donanım klavyesini kullanırken dili değiştirme:  Kullanılabilir dillerin listesini görüntülemek için Komut–Boşluk çubuğuna basın. Bir dil seçmek için Boşluk çubuğuna yeniden basın. Kablosuz klavyeyi kapatma:  Yeşil ışık sönene dek klavyedeki açma/kapatma düğmesini basılı tutun. Klavye kapalıyken veya kapsama alanında değilken iPad klavyeyle bağlantısını keser. Kablosuz klavyenin eşlemesini kaldırma:  Ayarlar > Bluetooth bölümüne gidin, klavye adının yanındaki simgesine dokunun ve sonra “Bu Aygıtı Unut”a dokunun.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 27 Dikte Bu özelliği destekleyen bir iPad'de yazmak yerine metin dikte edebilirsiniz. Dikteyi kullanmak için Siri seçeneğinin açık olması ve iPad’in Internet’e bağlı olması gerekir. Noktalama işaretleri ekleyebilir ve metninizi biçimleme komutları verebilirsiniz. Not: Dikte bazı dillerde veya bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir ve özellikler değişiklik gösterebilir. Hücresel veri ücretleri uygulanabilir. Dikteyi açma: Ayarlar > Genel > Siri bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Siri’yi açın. Metin dikte etme: Ekran klavyesinde simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra konuşun. İşiniz bittiğinde, simgesine dokunun. Dikteyi başlatmak için dokunun. Dikteyi başlatmak için dokunun. Metin eklemek için simgesine yeniden dokunun ve dikteye devam edin. Metni araya eklemek için, önce ekleme noktasını yerleştirmek amacıyla dokunun. Dikte ederek seçilen metni de değiştirebilirsiniz. Noktalama işareti ekleme veya metni biçimleme: Noktalama işaretini veya biçimleme komutunu söyleyin. Örneğin, “Dear Mary comma the check is in the mail exclamation mark” ifadesi söylendiğinde, “Dear Mary, the check is in the mail!” yazılır. Noktalama ve biçimleme komutları arasında şunlar sayılabilir: • quote … end quote—tırnak işareti eklemek için • new paragraph—yeni paragraf • cap—bir sonraki sözcüğü büyük harfle başlatmak için • caps on … caps off—her bir sözcüğün ilk karakterini büyük harf yapmak için • all caps—bir sonraki sözcüğün tümünü büyük harf yapmak için • all caps on … all caps off—çevrelenen sözcüklerin tümünü büyük harf yapmak için • no caps on … no caps off—çevrelenen sözcüklerin tümünü küçük harf yapmak için • no space on … no space off—bir dizi sözcüğü bitiştirmek için • smiley—:-) eklemek için • frowny—:-( eklemek için • winky—;-) eklemek içinBölüm 3 Temel Konular 28 Arama yapma iPad’deki çoğu uygulamanın yanı sıra Wikipedia ve web üzerinde de arama yapabilirsiniz. Uygulamalarda tek tek arama yapın veya Spotlight’ı kullanarak uygulamaların tümünde bir kerede arama yapın. Spotlight, iPad’deki uygulamaların adlarında da arama yapar; çok fazla uygulamanız varsa, onları bulup açmak için Spotlight’ı kullanmak isteyebilirsiniz. Tek bir uygulamada arama yapma: Arama alanına bir metin girin. Spotlight’ı kullanarak iPad’de arama yapma:  İlk Ana Ekran’ınızda sağa doğru kaydırın veya herhangi bir Ana Ekran’da Ana Ekran düğmesine  basın. Arama alanına bir metin girin. Siz yazarken, arama sonuçları görünür. Klavyeyi kapatmak ve daha fazla sonuç görmek için Ara’ya dokunun. Açmak için listedeki bir öğeye dokunun. Simgeler, sonuçların hangi uygulamalardan geldiğini tanımanızı sağlar. iPad, daha önceki aramaları temel alarak sizin için en iyi eşleşeni görüntüleyebilir. Spotlight aşağıdakilerde arama yapar: • Kişiler—Tüm içerik • Uygulamalar—Başlıklar • Müzik—Parça, sanatçı ve albüm adları; podcast ve video başlıkları • Podcast’ler—Başlıklar • Videolar—Başlıklar • Sesli Kitaplar—Başlıklar • Notlar—Not metinleri • Takvim (Etkinlikler)—Etkinlik başlıkları, davetliler, konumlar ve notlar • Mail—Tüm hesapların Kime, Kimden ve Konu alanları (ileti metinlerinde arama yapılmaz) • Anımsatıcılar—Başlıklar • Mesajlar—Adlar ve mesajların metniBölüm 3 Temel Konular 29 Spotlight’ta web veya Wikipedia üzerinde arama yapma: Arama sonuçlarının en altına kaydırın, sonra Web’de Ara veya Wikipedia’da Ara düğmesine dokunun. Uygulamayı, Arama ekranından açma:  Uygulama adının tümünü veya bir bölümünü girin, sonra uygulamaya dokunun. Hangi öğelerin aranacağını ve öğelerin hangi sırada aranacağını seçme: Ayarlar > Genel > Spotlight Araması bölümüne gidin. Bildirimler Önemli etkinlikleri kaçırmadığınızdan emin olmak için pek çok iPad uygulaması uyarı sağlayabilir. Uyarı, ekranın en üstünde bir başlık olarak kısa bir süreliğine (eğer buna yanıt vermezseniz kaybolur) veya ekranın ortasında bir uyarı olarak (okuyana kadar ekranda kalır) görünebilir. Bazı uygulamalar Ana Ekran’daki simgeleri üzerinde, kaç tane yeni öğenin beklediğini bildirecek şekilde işaret de görüntüleyebilir (örneğin kaç tane yeni e-posta iletinizin olduğu gibi). Bir sorun olduğunda (gönderilemeyen bir ileti gibi) işaretin üzerinde bir ünlem işareti görünür. Klasörün üzerindeki numaralı işaret o klasördeki tüm uygulamalar için olan toplam uyarı sayısını gösterir. Uyarılar Kilitli ekranda da görünebilir. iPad kilitliyken bir uyarıya yanıt verme:  Uyarıyı soldan sağa doğru kaydırın. Bildirim Merkezi uyarılarınızın tümünü tek bir yerde görüntüler. Uyarıyı ilk aldığınızda yanıt veremediyseniz, hazır olduğunuzda yanıt vermek için Bildirim Merkezi’ni kullanabilirsiniz. Uyarılar şunları içerebilir: • Cevapsız FaceTime aramaları • Yeni e-posta • Yeni mesaj • Anımsatıcılar • Takvim etkinlikleri • Arkadaşlık istekleri (Game Center)Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 30 Yerel hava durumunu da alabilir ve kişisel borsa kayıtlarınızı görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Twitter ve Facebook hesaplarınıza giriş yaptıysanız, Bildirim Merkezi’nden bu hesaplara Tweet ve gönderi yollayabilirsiniz. Bildirim Merkezi’ni görüntüleme: Ekranın en üstünden aşağıya doğru kaydırın. • Bir uyarıya yanıt verme: Öğeye dokunun. • Uyarıyı silme: simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra Sil’e dokunun. Uygulamalarınız için uyarıları yönetme: Ayarlar > Bildirimler bölümüne gidin. Bakınız: Rahatsız Etme ve Bildirimler sayfa 119. Uyarı seslerini seçme, uyarı seslerinin yüksekliğini ayarlama veya titreşimi açma ya da kapatma:  Ayarlar > Sesler bölümüne gidin. Paylaşma iPad diğer kişilerle paylaşmanın birçok yolunu sunar. Uygulamaların içinde paylaşma Birçok uygulamada simgesine dokunma, paylaşmanın yanı sıra yazdırma veya kopyalama gibi diğer eylemler için de seçenekleri görüntüler. Seçenekler kullandığınız uygulamaya göre değişir.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 31 Facebook iPad’deki birçok uygulamadan doğrudan yayımlayabilmek için Ayarlar’da Facebook hesabınıza giriş yapın (veya yeni bir hesap yaratın). Facebook hesabına giriş yapma veya Facebook hesabı yaratma:  Ayarlar > Facebook bölümüne gidin. Bildirim Merkezi’nden yayımlama:  “Yayımlamak İçin Dokunun” düğmesine dokunun. Bu özelliği açmak için, Ayarlar > Bildirimler > Paylaşma Araç Takımı bölümüne gidin. Siri’yi kullanarak yayımlama:  “Post to Facebook” ifadesini söyleyin. Uygulamadan öğe yayımlama:  Çoğu uygulamada simgesine dokunun. Harita’da simgesine dokunun, Konumu Paylaş’a dokunun ve daha sonra Facebook düğmesine dokunun. Facebook seçeneklerini ayarlama:  Aşağıdakileri yapmak için Ayarlar > Facebook bölümüne gidin: • iPad’deki Kişiler’i Facebook adları ve fotoğrafları ile güncelleme • App Store’un, Takvim’in, Kişiler’in veya iTunes’un hesabınızı kullanmasına izin verme Facebook uygulamasını yükleme: Ayarlar > Facebook bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Yükle düğmesine dokunun. Twitter iPad’deki birçok uygulamadan ilişikler içeren Tweet gönderebilmek için Ayarlar’da Twitter hesabınıza giriş yapın (veya yeni bir hesap yaratın). Twitter hesabına giriş yapma veya Twitter hesabı yaratma: Ayarlar > Twitter bölümüne gidin. Bildirim Merkezi’nden Tweet gönderme:  “Tweet Göndermek İçin Dokunun” düğmesine dokunun. Bu özelliği açmak için, Ayarlar > Bildirimler > Paylaşma Araç Takımı bölümüne gidin. Siri’yi kullanarak Tweet gönderme:  “Tweet ….” ifadesini söyleyin. Uygulamadan öğeyi Tweet olarak gönderme: Öğeyi görüntüleyin, simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra Twitter düğmesine dokunun. simgesi görünmüyorsa ekrana dokunun. Konumunuzu dahil etmek için Konum Ekle’ye dokunun. Harita’daki bir konumu tweet ile gönderme: Konum iğnesine dokunun simgesine dokunun, Konumu Paylaş’a dokunun ve daha sonra Twitter düğmesine dokunun. Tweet oluştururken Tweet ekranının sağ alt köşesindeki sayı girebileceğiniz kalan karakter sayısını gösterir. İlişikler, Tweet’e ait 140 karakterden bir kısmını kullanır. Kişilerinize Twitter kullanıcı adlarını ve fotoğraflarını ekleme: Ayarlar > Twitter bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Kişileri Güncelle düğmesine dokunun. Twitter için seçenekleri ayarlama: Ayarlar > Twitter bölümüne gidin. Twitter uygulamasını yükleme: Ayarlar > Twitter bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Yükle düğmesine dokunun. Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 32 iPad’i TV’ye veya başka bir aygıta bağlama İçerikleri HDTV’de duraksız yayımlamak için Apple TV ile AirPlay’i kullanabilir veya iPad’i TV’nize kablo kullanarak bağlayabilirsiniz. AirPlay AirPlay ile Apple TV’de ve diğer AirPlay özellikli aygıtlarda kablosuz olarak müzik, fotoğraf ve video yayımlayabilirsiniz. AirPlay denetimleri, AirPlay özellikli aygıt iPad’in bağlı olduğu Wi-Fi ağında kullanılabilir olduğunda görünür. iPad ekranınızın içeriğini de TV’ye yansıtabilirsiniz. İçerikleri AirPlay ile kullanılabilen bir aygıtta duraksız yayımlama:   simgesine dokunun ve aygıtı seçin. Uygulamayı kullanırken AirPlay ve ses yüksekliği denetimlerine erişme: Ekran açıkken Ana Ekran düğmesine iki kez basın ve çoklu görev çubuğunun sol ucuna doğru kaydırın. AirPlay AirPlay Ses yüksekliği Ses yüksekliği Çalmayı veya oynatmayı tekrar iPad’e değiştirme: simgesine dokunun ve iPad'i seçin. iPad ekranını TV’ye yansıtma: Çoklu görev çubuğunun sol ucundaki simgesine dokunun, bir Apple TV seçin ve Yansıtma’ya dokunun. AirPlay yansıtma açıkken iPad ekranının en üstünde mavi bir çubuk görünür. iPad ekranındaki her şey TV’de görünür. iPad’i TV’ye kablo kullanarak bağlama Apple kabloları ve adaptörleri (ayrı satılır) iPad’i TV’ye, projektöre veya diğer harici ekranlara bağlamak için kullanılabilir. Daha fazla bilgi için, support.apple.com/kb/HT4108?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin. AirPrint ile yazdırma AirPrint, aşağıdaki iOS uygulamaları kullanılarak AirPrint özellikli yazıcılarda kablosuz olarak yazdırmanıza olanak tanır: • Mail—e-posta iletileri ve Göz At ile görüntülenebilen ilişikler • Fotoğraflar ve Kamera—fotoğraflar • Safari—web sayfaları, PDF’ler ve Göz At ile görüntülenebilen diğer ilişikler • iBooks—PDF’ler • Harita—ekranda gösterilen harita bölümü • Notlar—o anda görüntülenen not App Store’da bulunan diğer uygulamalar da AirPrint’i destekleyebilir. iPad ve yazıcı aynı Wi-Fi ağında olmalıdır. AirPrint hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, support.apple.com/kb/HT4356?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 33 Belgeyi yazdırma: veya simgesine dokunun (kullandığınız uygulamaya bağlı olarak) ve daha sonra Yazdır’a dokunun. Yazdırma işinin durumunu görme: Ana Ekran düğmesine iki kez basın ve daha sonra çoklu görev çubuğundaki Yazdırma Merkezi’ne dokunun. Simgenin üzerindeki işaret, o anki belge de dahil olmak üzere kaç belgenin yazdırılmaya hazır olduğunu gösterir. Yazdırma işinden vazgeçme: Yazdırma Merkezi’nde gerekiyorsa yazdırma işini seçin ve daha sonra Yazdırmaktan Vazgeç’e dokunun.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 34 Bluetooth aygıtları iPad'i, Apple kablosuz klavyeyle ve Bluetooth mikrofonlu kulaklık seti gibi diğer Bluetooth aygıtlarıyla kullanabilirsiniz. Desteklenen Bluetooth profilleri için, support.apple.com/kb/HT3647?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin. Bluetooth aygıtları ile eşleme Bluetooth aygıtını iPad ile kullanabilmeniz için, önce onu iPad ile eşlemeniz gerekir. Bluetooth aygıtını iPad ile eşleme:  1 Aygıtı bulunabilir yapın. Aygıtla birlikte gelen belgelere bakın. Apple kablosuz klavye için açma/kapatma düğmesine basın. 2 Ayarlar > Bluetooth bölümüne gidin ve Bluetooth’u açın. 3 Aygıtı seçin ve sorulursa parolayı veya PIN’i girin. Aygıtla birlikte gelen, parola veya PIN hakkındaki yönergelere bakın. Apple kablosuz klavyeyi kullanma hakkında bilgi için, bakınız: Apple kablosuz klavye sayfa 26. iPad ile Bluetooth mikrofonlu kulaklık setini kullanmak için, aygıtla birlikte gelen belgelere bakın. Bluetooth mikrofonlu kulaklık seti bağlıyken ses çıkışını iPad’e döndürme: Aygıtı kapatın veya eşlemesini kaldırın ya da Ayarlar > Bluetooth bölümünde Bluetooth’u kapatın. Aygıt kapsama alanı dışındayken ses çıkışı iPad’e döner. Ses çıkışını iPad'e değiştirmek için AirPlay’i de kullanabilirsiniz. Bakınız: AirPlay sayfa 32. Bluetooth durumu Bir aygıtı iPad ile eşledikten sonra, ekranın en üstündeki durum çubuğunda Bluetooth simgesi görünür: • (beyaz): Bluetooth açık ve bir aygıt ile eşlenmiş. • (gri): Bluetooth açık ve bir aygıt ile eşlenmiş; fakat aygıt kapsama alanı dışında veya kapalı. • Hiçbir Bluetooth simgesi yok: Bluetooth bir aygıt ile eşlenmemiş. Bluetooth aygıtının iPad ile eşlemesini kaldırma Eğer bir Bluetooth aygıtını artık iPad ile kullanmak istemiyorsanız, eşlemesini kaldırabilirsiniz. Bluetooth aygıtının eşlemesini kaldırma:  Ayarlar > Bluetooth bölümüne gidin ve Bluetooth’u açın. Aygıt adının yanındaki simgesine dokunun, sonra Bu Aygıtı Unut'a dokunun. Dosya paylaşma iPad ile bilgisayarınız arasında dosya aktarmak için iTunes’u kullanabilirsiniz. iPad’da e-posta ilişiği olarak alınan dosyaları da görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Bakınız: E-postaları okuma sayfa 46. Birden fazla aygıtta iCloud'u destekleyen aynı uygulamalara sahipseniz, belgelerinizi aygıtlarınızın tümünde otomatik olarak güncel tutmak için iCloud’u kullanabilirsiniz. Bakınız: iCloud’u kullanma sayfa 15. iTunes’u kullanarak dosyaları aktarma: iPad’i, birlikte gelen kabloyu kullanarak bilgisayarınıza bağlayın. Bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da iPad’i seçin ve daha sonra Uygulamalar düğmesini tıklayın. Belgeleri iPad ile bilgisayarınız arasında aktarmak için Dosya Paylaşma bölümünü kullanın. Dosya paylaşmayı destekleyen uygulamalar, iTunes’daki Dosya Paylaşma Uygulamaları listesinde görünür. Bir dosyayı silmek için, Dosyalar listesinde dosyayı seçin ve daha sonra Sil tuşuna basın.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 35 Güvenlik özellikleri Güvenlik özellikleri, iPad üzerindeki bilgileri başka kişilerin erişimine karşı korumaya yardımcı olur. Parolalar ve veri koruma Güvenlik amacıyla iPad’i her açtığınızda veya uyandırdığınızda ya da parolayla kilitleme ayarlarına eriştiğinizde girmeniz gereken bir parola ayarlayabilirsiniz. Bir parola ayarlama, veri korumayı açar ve o da iPad üzerinde tutulan e-posta iletilerini ve ilişiklerini şifrelemek için anahtar olarak parolanızı kullanır. (App Store’da bulunan bazı uygulamalar da veri korumayı kullanabilir.) Ayarlar’daki Parolayla Kilitleme ekranının altında bulunan bir uyarı, veri korumanın etkin olduğunu gösterir. Parola ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Parolayla Kilitleme bölümüne gidin, sonra Parolayı Aç’a dokunun ve 4 basamaklı bir parola girin. Daha güvenli bir parola kullanma: Güvenliği artırmak için Basit Parola’yı kapatın ve sayıların, harflerin, noktalama işaretlerinin ve özel karakterlerin bir kombinasyonu olan daha uzun bir parola kullanın. Karma parolayla korunan bir iPad’in kilidini açmak için, parolayı klavyeyi kullanarak girersiniz. iPad’in kilidini sayısal tuş takımını kullanarak açmayı tercih ediyorsanız, yalnızca sayıları kullanarak daha uzun bir parola ayarlayabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Parolayla Kilitleme sayfa 121. iPad’imi Bul iPad’imi Bul; başka bir iPad’deki, iPhone’daki veya iPod touch’taki ücretsiz iPhone’umu Bul uygulamasını ya da bir web tarayıcı ile www.icloud.com adresine giriş yapmış bir Mac’i veya PC’yi kullanarak iPad’inizi bulmanıza ve güvenlik altına almanıza yardımcı olabilir. iPad’imi Bul şunları içerir: • Ses çalma:  Sesi iki dakika boyunca çalar. • Kayıp modu:  Kaybolan iPad’inizi hemen parolayla kilitleyebilir ve iPad’e iletişim numarası görüntüleyen bir mesaj yollayabilirsiniz. iPad bulunduğu konumu da izler ve bildirir, böylece iPhone’umu Bul uygulamasını denetlediğinizde onun nerede olduğunu görebilirsiniz. • iPad i silme:  iPad'inizin üzerindeki tüm bilgileri ve ortamları silerek ve iPad'i özgün fabrika ayarlarına döndürerek kişisel bilgilerinizi korur. Önemli: Bu özellikleri kullanmak için iPad’inizdeki iCloud ayarlarında iPad'imi Bul özelliğinin açılmış olması ve iPad’in Internet’e bağlı olması gerekir. iPad’imi Bul’u açma: Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin ve sonra iPad’imi Bul seçeneğini açın.Bölüm 3 Temel Konular 36 Pil iPad, şarj edilebilir dahili bir lityum iyon pile sahiptir. Pil ömrünü uzatma ipuçları da dahil olmak üzere pil hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, www.apple.com/tr/batteries adresine gidin. UYARI: Pil ve iPad’i şarj etme hakkında önemli bilgiler için, bakınız: Önemli güvenlik bilgileri sayfa 131. Pili şarj etme:  iPad pilini şarj etmenin en iyi yolu, iPad'i birlikte gelen kabloyu ve USB güç adaptörünü kullanarak bir elektrik prizine bağlamaktır. iPad, onu bilgisayarınızdaki USB 2.0 kapısına bağladığınızda da yavaş yavaş şarj edilebilir. Mac’iniz veya PC’niz iPad’i şarj etmek için yeterli güç sağlamıyorsa, durum çubuğunda “Şarj Etmiyor” iletisi görünür. Önemli: iPad kapalı veya uyku durumunda ya da bekleme modunda olan bir bilgisayara, bir USB hub'a veya bir klavyedeki USB kapısına bağlanırsa, iPad'in pili şarj olmak yerine boşalabilir. Durum çubuğunun sağ üst köşesindeki pil simgesi, pil düzeyini veya pilin şarj olma durumunu gösterir. Dolmuyor Dolmuyor Doluyor Doluyor Dolu Dolu Pil şarjı yüzdesini görüntüleme: Ayarlar > Genel > Kullanım bölümüne gidin ve Pil Kullanımı’nın altındaki ayarı açın. Önemli: iPad’in pili çok azalmışsa; onu tekrar kullanabilmeniz için yirmi dakikaya kadar şarj edilmesi gerektiğini belirtmek üzere, iPad aşağıdaki resimlerden birisini görüntüleyebilir. iPad’un pili çok çok azsa, "pil azaldı" resimlerinden birisi gözükmeden önce bir iki dakika boyunca boş ekran görünebilir. veya veya Şarj edilebilir pillerin sınırlı sayıda şarj döngüleri vardır ve zaman içerisinde değiştirilmeleri gerekir. Pili değiştirme: Pil kullanıcı tarafından erişilemez; yalnızca Apple yetkili servis sağlayıcı tarafından değiştirilebilir. www.apple.com/tr/batteries/ bakın.4 37 Siri nedir? Siri, işleri yalnızca konuşarak yaptırmanıza yardımcı olan akıllı bir asistandır. Siri, doğal konuşmayı anlar; böylece belirli komutları öğrenmeniz veya anahtar sözcükleri hatırlamanız gerekmez. Bazı şeyleri farklı şekillerde isteyebilirsiniz. Örneğin, “Set the alarm for 6:30 a.m.” veya “Wake me at 6:30 in the morning” diyebilirsiniz. Her iki şekilde de, Siri ne demek istediğinizi anlar. UYARI: Sürüş sırasında dikkat dağılmasını önleme hakkında önemli bilgiler için, Önemli güvenlik bilgileri sayfa 131 konusuna bakın. Siri, sadece doğal bir şekilde konuşarak; mesaj yazmanızı ve göndermenizi, toplantı zamanlamanızı, FaceTime görüşmesi yapmanızı, yol tarifi almanızı, anımsatıcı ayarlamanızı, web’de arama yapmanızı ve çok daha fazlasını sağlar. Siri açıklamaya veya daha fazla bilgiye gereksinim duyarsa soru sorar. Siri, söylediklerinizi daha iyi anlamak için kişilerinizdeki, müzik arşivinizdeki, takvimlerinizdeki, anımsatıcılarınızdaki vb. yerlerdeki bilgileri de kullanır. Siri, iPad'deki yerleşik uygulamaların çoğuyla sorunsuz bir şekilde çalışır ve gerektiğinde Arama ve Konum Servisleri özelliklerini kullanır. Siri’den bir uygulamayı açmasını da isteyebilirsiniz. Siri’ye söyleyebileceğiniz o kadar çok şey vardır ki, aşağıda yeni başlayanlar için daha fazla örnek bulunabilir: • FaceTime Joe • Set the timer for 30 minutes • Directions to the nearest Apple Store • Is it going to rain tomorrow? • Post to Facebook • Tweet Not: Siri, 3. nesil iPad veya daha yenisinde kullanılabilir ve Internet erişimi gerektirir. Siri bazı dillerde veya bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir ve özellikler bölgeden bölgeye değişiklik gösterebilir. Hücresel veri ücretleri uygulanabilir. SiriBölüm 4 Siri 38 Siri’yi kullanma Siri’yi başlatma Siri, bir düğmeye basılmasıyla hayata geçer. Siri’yi başlatma: Siri görününceye dek Ana Ekran düğmesine basın. iPad'i ayarlarken Siri’yi açmadıysanız, Ayarlar > Genel > Siri bölümüne gidin. İki kısa bip sesi duyar ve ekranda “Nasıl yardımcı olabilirim?” yazısını görürsünüz. Konuşmaya başlamanız yeterlidir. Mikrofon simgesi yanarak, Siri’nin sizin söylediklerinizi duyduğunu bilmenizi sağlar. Siri ile bir diyalog başlattıktan sonra, onunla yeniden konuşmak için mikrofon simgesine dokunun. Siri, konuşmayı bitirmenizi bekler ama Siri’ye konuşmanızın bittiğini söylemek için mikrofon simgesine de dokunabilirsiniz. Bu, arkaplanda çok fazla gürültü varken yararlıdır. Ayrıca, Siri’nin duraklamanızı beklemesi gerekmeyeceği için, Siri ile konuşmanızı da hızlandırabilir. Konuşmayı bitirdiğinizde, Siri duyduğunu görüntüler ve bir yanıt verir. Siri, çoğunlukla yararlı olabilecek ilişkili bilgileri de verir. Eğer bilgi bir uygulamaya ilişkin ise (örneğin oluşturmuş olduğunuz bir mesaj veya sorduğunuz bir yer gibi) ayrıntılar ve bir sonraki eylem için uygulamayı açmak üzere ekrana dokunmanız yeterli olacaktır. İlişkili bilgiler—uygulamayı açmak için dokunun. İlişkili bilgiler—uygulamayı açmak için dokunun. Siri’nin söylediklerinizden duydukları Siri’nin söylediklerinizden duydukları Siri’nin yanıtı Siri’nin yanıtı Siri’yle konuşmak için dokunun. Siri’yle konuşmak için dokunun. Siri, bir isteği gerçekleştirmek için açıklığa kavuşturmanızı isteyebilir. Örneğin, Siri'ye “Remind me to call mom,” dediğinizde, Siri size “What time would you like me to remind you?” diye sorabilir. İstekten vazgeçme: “Cancel” ifadesini söyleyin, simgesine dokunun veya Ana Ekran düğmesine basın. Siri’ye kendinizden bahsetme Siri hakkınızda ne kadar çok şey bilirse, size yardımcı olmak için bilgilerinizi o kadar fazla kullanır. Siri sizin hakkınızdaki bilgileri, Kişiler içindeki kişisel bilgi kartınızdan (“Bilgilerim”) alır. Siri’ye kim olduğunuzu anlatma: Ayarlar > Genel > Siri > Bilgilerim bölümüne gidin ve sonra adınıza dokunun.Bölüm 4 Siri 39 “Tell me how to get home” gibi ifadeler söyleyebilmek için ev ve iş adresinizi kartınıza ekleyin. Siri, hayatınızdaki önemli kişileri de bilmek ister, bu nedenle kişisel bilgi kartınızda bu ilişkileri de belirtin (Siri size yardımcı olabilir). Örneğin Siri’ye kız kardeşinize mesaj göndermesini söylerseniz, Siri size kız kardeşinizin kim olduğunu sorar (eğer bu bilgi zaten kartınızda yoksa). Siri bu ilişkiyi kişisel bilgi kartınıza ekler, böylece bir sonraki sefer bunu tekrar sorması gerekmez. Kişiler’de tüm önemli ilişkileriniz için kartlar yaratın ve telefon numaraları, e-posta adresleri, ev ve iş adresleri ya da kullanmaktan hoşlandığınız takma adlar gibi bilgileri ekleyin. Ekrandaki kılavuz Siri ekranda, söyleyebileceğiniz şeylere örnekler verir. Siri ilk göründüğünde Siri’ye “what can you do” sorusunu sorun veya simgesine dokunun. Siri, örnek bir istekle birlikte desteklediği uygulamaların listesini görüntüler. Daha fazla örnek görmek için listedeki bir öğeye dokunun. Eller serbest Siri Siri’yi, uzaktan kumandalı ve mikrofonlu Apple EarPods (ayrı satılır) gibi uyumlu bir mikrofonlu kulaklık setiyle ve diğer kablolu veya Bluetooth mikrofonlu kulaklık setleriyle kullanabilirsiniz. Siri’yle mikrofonlu kulaklık seti kullanarak konuşma: Ortadaki düğmeyi (veya Bluetooth mikrofonlu kulaklık setindeki ara düğmesini) basılı tutun. Siri ile konuşmanızı sürdürmek için, her konuşmak isteyişinizde düğmeye basın ve basılı tutun. Mikrofonlu kulaklık seti kullanırken, Siri yanıtlarını size söyler. Siri, dikte ettiğiniz mesajları veya e-posta iletilerini göndermeden önce size geri okur. Bu size, isterseniz mesajı değiştirme fırsatı sunar. Ayrıca Siri, anımsatıcıları yaratmadan önce başlıklarını geri okur. Konum Servisleri Siri “current”, “home” ve “work” gibi konumları bildiği için (iPad Wi-Fi + hücresel modeliniz bu özelliği destekliyorsa), bir yerden ayrıldığınızda veya bir yere vardığınızda size belirli bir işi yapmanızı anımsatabilir. Siri’ye “Remind me to call my daughter when I leave the office” ifadesini söyleyin; Siri, işyerinizden ayrıldığınızda size kızınızı aramanızı anımsatacaktır. Konum bilgileri iPad dışında izlenmez veya saklanmaz. Konum Servisleri’ni kapatsanız da Siri’yi kullanabilirsiniz ama Siri konum bilgisi gerektiren hiçbir şeyi yapmaz. Siri için Konum Servisleri’ni kapatma: Ayarlar > Gizlilik > Konum Servisleri bölümüne gidin.Bölüm 4 Siri 40 Erişilebilirlik Görme engelli kullanıcılar Siri’ye, iOS’de yerleşik ekran okuyucu olan VoiceOver üzerinden erişebilirler. VoiceOver, ekranda görünenleri sesli olarak açıklar—buna Siri'nin yanıtlarındaki metinler de dahildir—böylece iPad'i görmeden de kullanabilirsiniz. VoiceOver’ı açma: Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik bölümüne gidin. VoiceOver’ın açılması, sizin bildirimlerinizin bile size sesli olarak okunmasına neden olur. Daha fazla bilgi için, bakınız: VoiceOver sayfa 102. Siri seçeneklerini ayarlama Siri’yi açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > Genel > Siri bölümüne gidin. Not: Siri’nin kapatılması Siri’yi sıfırlar ve Siri sesiniz hakkında öğrenilenleri unutur. Siri seçeneklerini ayarlama: Ayarlar > Genel > Siri bölümüne gidin. • Dil: Siri ile kullanmak istediğiniz dili seçin. • Sesli Geri Bildirim: Saptanmış olarak Siri, yalnızca Siri’yi mikrofonlu kulaklık setiyle kullandığınızda yanıtını sesli olarak söyler. Siri’nin yanıtlarını her zaman sesli olarak söylemesini istiyorsanız, bu seçeneği Her Zaman olarak ayarlayın. • Bilgilerim: Siri’ye, Kişiler’deki hangi kartın kişisel bilgilerinizi içerdiğini bildirin. Bakınız: Siri’ye kendinizden bahsetme sayfa 38. iPad parola ile kilitli iken Siri'ye erişime izin verme veya erişimi engelleme: Ayarlar > Genel > Parolayla Kilitleme bölümüne gidin. Siri’yi, sınırlamaları açarak da etkisizleştirebilirsiniz. Bakınız: Sınırlamalar sayfa 122. Restoranlar Siri, restoranlar hakkında bilgi vermek ve rezervasyon yapmanıza yardımcı olmak için Yelp, OpenTable ve diğerleriyle çalışır. Mutfak türüne, fiyata, konuma, açık havada yeri olup olmadığına veya bu seçeneklerin birleşimine göre restoranların bulunmasını isteyin. Siri size mevcut fotoğrafları, Yelp yıldızlarını, fiyat aralığını ve değerlendirmeleri gösterebilir. Yelp ve OpenTable uygulamalarını kullanarak daha fazla bilgi edinin—Bu uygulamalar sizde yüklü değilse iPad onları indirmenizi ister. Restoran hakkında ayrıntılı bilgi görme:  Siri’nin önerdiği bir restorana dokunun. Restoranı arayın. Restoranı arayın. Web sitesini ziyaret edin. Web sitesini ziyaret edin. OpenTable yoluyla rezervasyon yapın. OpenTable yoluyla rezervasyon yapın. Yelp yorumlarını görün. Yelp yorumlarını görün.Bölüm 4 Siri 41 Filmler Siri’ye hangi filmlerin oynadığını veya belirli bir filmi nerede görebileceğinizi sorun. Filmin gala tarihini, kim tarafından yönetildiğini ve hangi ödülleri kazandığını öğrenin. Siri sinema konumlarını, gösterim zamanlarını ve Rotten Tomato yorumlarını verir. Film hakkında ayrıntılı bilgi görme:  Siri’nin önerdiği bir filme dokunun. Fragmanı izleyin. Fragmanı izleyin. Rotten Tomato yorumlarını okuyun. Rotten Tomato yorumlarını okuyun. Spor Siri; beyzbol, basketbol, futbol, Amerikan futbolu ve buz hokeyi de dahil olmak üzere sporlar hakkında çok şey bilir. Siri’ye oyun zamanları, o sezona ait oyunların skorları veya canlı oyunların son dakika skorlarını sorun. Siri’ye oyuncu istatistiklerini göstermesini ve bunları diğer oyuncuların istatistikleriyle karşılaştırmasını söyleyin. Siri takım kayıtlarını da tutar. Sorabileceğiniz bazı şeyler şunlardır: • What was the score of the last Giants game? • What are the National League standings? • When is the Chicago Cubs first game of the season? Dikte Siri açıkken metin de dikte edebilirsiniz. Bakınız: Dikte sayfa 27. Siri’yle doğrudan konuşarak e-postaları, mesajları ve diğer metinleri oluşturabilmenize rağmen dikte etmeyi tercih edebilirsiniz. Dikte, metnin tamamını değiştirmek yerine iletiyi veya mesajı düzenlemenizi sağlar. Dikte, oluşturma sırasında size düşünmeniz için daha fazla zaman da verir. Siri; duraklamanın, o an konuşmayı bitirdiğiniz anlamına geldiğini düşünür ve yanıt vermek için bu fırsatı kullanır. Bu, Siri ile doğal bir konuşma yapmanızı sağlasa da; duraklamanız çok uzun sürerse, Siri gerçekten işiniz bitmeden sözünüzü kesebilir. Dikte ile istediğiniz kadar duraklayabilir ve hazır olduğunuzda konuşmaya devam edebilirsiniz. Metni Siri’yi kullanarak oluşturmaya başlayabilir ve daha sonra dikteyi kullanmaya devam edebilirsiniz. Örneğin Siri ile bir e-posta yaratabilir, sonra iletiyi Mail’de açmak için taslağa dokunabilirsiniz. Mail’de iletiyi tamamlayabilir veya düzenleyebilir ve alıcı ekleyip silme, konuyu değiştirme veya e-postanın gönderleceği hesabı değiştirme gibi diğer değişiklikleri yapabilirsiniz.Bölüm 4 Siri 42 Siri’yi düzeltme Siri sorun yaşıyorsa Siri bazen sizi anlamakta sorun yaşayabilir (örneğin gürültülü bir ortamda). Eğer aksanlı konuşuyorsanız, Siri’nin sesinize alışması biraz zaman alabilir. Siri sizi doğru olarak duyamıyorsa, düzeltmeler yapabilirsiniz. Siri, söylediklerinizden ne duyduğunu, yanıtıyla beraber gösterir. Siri’nin söylediklerinizden ne duyduğunu düzeltme: Siri’nin söylediklerinizden ne duyduğunu gösteren konuşma balonuna dokunun. İsteğinizi yazarak düzenleyin veya dikte etmek için klavyedeki simgesine dokunun. Dikteyi kullanma hakkında bilgi için, Dikte sayfa 27 konusuna bakın. Metnin bir kısmının altı maviyle çizilmişse o metne dokunun; Siri bazı alternatifler önerir. Önerilerden birine dokunun veya metni yazarak ya da dikte ederek değiştirin. Siri’yi sesli düzeltme: simgesine dokunun, sonra isteğinizi yeniden ifade edin veya açıklayın. Örneğin “I meant Boston" gibi. Siri’yi düzeltirken, ne yapmak istemediğinizi değil, sadece ne yapmak istediğinizi Siri’ye söyleyin. Bir e-postayı veya mesajı düzeltme: Siri size iletiyi veya mesajı göndermek isteyip istemediğinizi sorarsa, şunun gibi şeyler söyleyebilirsiniz: • Change it to: Call me tomorrow. • Add: See you there question mark. • No, send it to Bob. • No. (iletiyi veya mesajı göndermeden tutmak için) • Cancel. Siri’nin iletiyi veya mesajı size okuması için “Read it back to me” veya “Read me the message” ifadesini söyleyin. Eğer doğruysa “Yes, send it” gibi bir şey söyleyebilirsiniz. Gürültülü ortamlar Gürültülü bir ortamda iPad'i ağzınıza yakın tutun ama doğrudan alt kenarına doğru konuşmayın. Anlaşılır ve doğal bir biçimde konuşmaya devam edin. Konuşmayı bitirdiğinizde simgesine dokunun. Ağ bağlantısı Siri, size ağa bağlanmaya ilişkin sorun yaşadığını söyleyebilir. Siri ses tanıma ve diğer servisler için Apple sunucularına bağlı olduğundan, Internet’e iyi bir 3G, 4G veya LTE hücresel bağlantısı ya da Wi-Fi bağlantısı ile bağlı olmanız gerekir. 5 43 Safari özellikleri arasında şunlar bulunur: • Okuyucu—makaleleri reklam veya karışıklık olmadan görüntüleyin • Okuma listesi—daha sonra okunacak makaleleri toplayın • Tam ekran modu—web sayfalarını yatay yönde görüntülerken Diğer aygıtlarda açık olan sayfalarınızı görmek ve yer imlerinizi ve okuma listenizi diğer aygıtlarınızda güncel tutmak için iCloud’u kullanın. Yer imlerinizi, tarihçenizi veya Okuma Listesi’ni görüntüleyin. Yer imlerinizi, tarihçenizi veya Okuma Listesi’ni görüntüleyin. Yeni bir sayfa açın. Yeni bir sayfa açın. Web’de veya o anki sayfada arama yapın. Web’de veya o anki sayfada arama yapın. Bir web adresi (URL) girin. Bir web adresi (URL) girin. Öğeyi büyütmek veya küçültmek için ona çift dokunun ya da parmaklarınızı kıstırıp açın. Öğeyi büyütmek veya küçültmek için ona çift dokunun ya da parmaklarınızı kıstırıp açın. Web sayfasını görüntüleme:  Adres alanına (başlık çubuğunda) dokunun, URL’yi girin ve daha sonra Git düğmesine dokunun. • Web sayfası içeriğini kaydırma: Yukarıya, aşağıya veya yanlara doğru sürükleyin. • Çerçeve içinde kaydırma: Çerçevenin içinde iki parmağınızla sürükleyin. • Web sayfasını yeniden yükleme: Adres alanında simgesine dokunun. Web sayfasını kapatma:  Sayfanın sekmesindeki simgesine dokunun. Açtığınız başka bir web sayfasını görüntüleme: Sayfanın üst kısmında bir sekmeye dokunun. Yakın zamanda kapatılan web sayfasını yeniden açma:   simgesini basılı tutun, sonra listede bir öğeye dokunun. SafariBölüm 5 Safari 44 Diğer aygıtlarınızda açık olan web sayfalarını görme:   simgesine dokunun. iPad’deki açık web sayfalarını iCloud Sekmeleri’ni kullanan diğer aygıtlarınızla paylaşmak için Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin ve Safari’yi açın. Web sayfasındaki bir bağlantıya gitme:  Bağlantıya dokunun. • Bağlantının hedefini görme: Bağlantıya dokunun ve parmağınızı basılı tutun. • Bağlantıyı yeni bir sekmede açma: Bağlantıya dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun ve daha sonra “Yeni Sekmede Aç” düğmesine dokunun. Telefon numaraları ve e-posta adresleri gibi algılanan veriler de web sayfalarında bağlantı olarak görünebilir. Kullanılabilir seçenekleri görmek için bir bağlantıya dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun. Makaleyi Okuyucu’da görüntüleme: Adres alanında görünüyorsa Okuyucu düğmesine dokunun. • Font puntosunu ayarlama: simgesine dokunun. • Makaleyi paylaşma:   simgesine dokunun. Not: Okuyucu’daki bir makaleyi e-posta ile gönderdiğinizde, bağlantıya ek olarak makalenin tüm metni de yollanır. • Normal görüntüye dönme: Okuyucu’ya dokunun. Web sayfalarını toplamak ve daha sonra okumak için Okuma Listesi’ni kullanın. • O anki web sayfasını ekleme: simgesine dokunun, daha sonra “Okuma Listesine Ekle” düğmesine dokunun. iPad 2 veya daha yenisi ile bağlantının yanı sıra web sayfası da kaydedilir, böylece Internet’e bağlanamadığınız zaman bile onu okuyabilirsiniz. • Bağlantının hedefini ekleme: Bağlantıya dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun ve daha sonra “Okuma Listesine Ekle” düğmesine dokunun. • Okuma listenizi görüntüleme: simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra simgesine dokunun. • Okuma listenizdeki bir öğeyi silme:  Öğe üzerinde parmağınızı kaydırın, daha sonra Sil’e dokunun. Bir formu doldurma: Klavyeyi görüntülemek için bir metin alanına dokunun. • Farklı bir metin alanına gitme: Bir metin alanına ya da Sonraki veya Önceki düğmesine dokunun. • Bir form gönderme: Formu göndermek için Git veya Ara düğmesine ya da web sayfasındaki bağlantıya dokunun. • Otomatik doldurmayı etkinleştirme: Ayarlar > Safari > Otomatik Doldur bölümüne gidin. Web üzerinde, o anki web sayfasında veya aranabilir bir PDF’de arama yapma:  Arama alanına bir metin girin. • Web’de arama yapma: Görünen önerilerden birine dokunun veya Ara’ya dokunun. • Aranan metni o anki web sayfasında veya PDF’de bulma: Ekranın altına kaydırın ve daha sonra Bu Sayfada’nın altındaki girişe dokunun. Sözcüğün veya ifadenin geçtiği ilk yer vurgulanır. Sözcüğün veya ifadenin geçtiği daha sonraki yerleri bulmak için simgesine dokunun. O anki web sayfasına yer imi koyma:  simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra Yer İmi öğesine dokunun. Bir yer imini kaydederken başlığını düzenleyebilirsiniz. Yer imleri saptanmış olarak Yer İmleri klasörünün en üst düzeyine kaydedilir. Farklı bir klasör seçmek için, Yer İmleri'ne dokunun.Bölüm 5 Safari 45 Yer imleri çubuğunu görüntüleme: Adres alanına dokunun. Yer işaretleri çubuğunu her zaman göstermek için Genel bölümü altında Ayarlar > Safari'ye gidin. Ana Ekran’da simge yaratma: simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra “Ana Ekrana Ekle” düğmesine dokunun. Safari, o anki web sayfası için Ana Ekran’ınıza bir simge ekler. Web sayfasının özel bir simgesi olmadığı sürece, bu görüntü Ana Ekran’daki web klibi simgesi için de kullanılır. Web klipleri iCloud ve iTunes tarafından yedeklenir ama iCloud tarafından diğer aygıtlara iletilmez veya iTunes tarafından eşzamanlanmaz. Yer imlerinizi ve okuma listenizi diğer aygıtlarınızda güncel tutmak için iCloud’u kullanma: Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin ve Safari’yi açın. Bakınız: iCloud’u kullanma sayfa 15. Safari seçeneklerini ayarlama: Ayarlar > Safari bölümüne gidin. Seçenekler arasında şunlar bulunur: • Arama motoru • Formları doldurmak için Otomatik Doldurma • Bağlantıları yeni bir sayfada veya arkaplanda açma • Gizli bilgileri korumaya yardımcı olmak ve bazı web sitelerinin davranışlarınızı izlemesini engellemek için özel dolaşma • Tarihçeyi, çerezleri ve verileri silme • Okuma Listesi için hücresel veri • Dolandırıcılık uyarısı6 46 E-postaları okuma Bir ileti oluşturun. Bir ileti oluşturun. Posta kutularını veya hesapları değiştirin. Posta kutularını veya hesapları değiştirin. Birden fazla iletiyi silin, taşıyın veya işaretleyin. Birden fazla iletiyi silin, taşıyın veya işaretleyin. Bu posta kutusunda arama yapın. Bu posta kutusunda arama yapın. Önizleme uzunluğunu Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümünde değiştirin. Önizleme uzunluğunu Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümünde değiştirin. İletiye bayrak ekleme veya okunmamış olarak işaretleme: simgesine dokunun. Aynı anda birden fazla iletiyi işaretlemek için, ileti listesini görüntülerken Düzenle’ye dokunun. Özellikle size adreslenmiş iletileri belirleme: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin ve sonra Kime/Bilgi Etiketi seçeneğini açın veya kapatın. Kime veya Bilgi Etiketi alanında sizin adresiniz olan iletiler, ileti listesinde bir simgeyle gösterilir. İletinin tüm alıcılarını görme: Kimden alanındaki Ayrıntılar sözcüğüne dokunun. Alıcının kişi bilgilerini görmek veya onları Kişiler’e veya Önemli Kişiler listenize eklemek için alıcının adına veya e-posta adresine dokunun. Uzaktaki görüntülerin indirilmesini engelleme: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, sonra Uzaktaki Görüntüler’i açın veya kapatın. Bir bağlantıyı açma: Saptanmış eylemini kullanmak için bağlantıya dokunun veya diğer eylemleri görmek için parmağınızı basılı tutun. Örneğin bir adres için konumunu Harita’da gösterebilir veya adresi Kişiler’e ekleyebilirsiniz. Web bağlantısını Okuma Listesine ekleyebilirsiniz. MailBölüm 6 Mail 47 Bir toplantı davetini veya ilişiğini açma: Öğeye dokunun. İlişik birden fazla uygulama tarafından kullanılabiliyorsa, dosyayla kullanılacak uygulamayı seçmek için dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun. İliştirilmiş bir fotoğrafı veya videoyu kaydetme: Fotoğrafa veya videoya dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun ve sonra Görüntüyü Kaydet veya Videoyu Kaydet düğmesine dokunun. Öğe, Fotoğraflar uygulamasındaki Film Rulosu’na kaydedilir. Yeni iletileri yükleme: Listeyi yenilemek için ileti listesini veya posta kutusu listesini aşağı çekin. • Alınan eski iletilerin sayısını ayarlama: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > Göster bölümüne gidin. Hesap için yeni ileti bildirimlerini kapatma: Ayarlar > Bildirimler > Mail > hesap adı bölümüne gidin, daha sonra Bildirim Merkezi’ni kapatın. Mail tarafından çalınan ses tonlarını değiştirme: Ayarlar > Sesler bölümüne gidin. • Her hesaptaki yeni ileti için çalınan ses tonunu değiştirme: Ayarlar > Bildirimler > Mail > hesap adı > Yeni Mail Sesi bölümüne gidin. • Önemli Kişiler’den gelen yeni iletiler için çalınan ses tonunu değiştirme: Ayarlar > Bildirimler > Mail > Önemli Kişiler > Yeni Mail Sesi bölümüne gidin. E-posta gönderme İmzanızı Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümünde değiştirin. İmzanızı Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümünde değiştirin. Kimden, Bilgi veya Gizli alanlarını değiştirmek için dokunun. Kimden, Bilgi veya Gizli alanlarını değiştirmek için dokunun. İleti oluşturma: simgesine dokunun, daha sonra bir ad veya e-posta adresi yazın. Alıcıları girdikten sonra bunları alanlar arasında taşımak için (Kime alanından Bilgi alanına gibi) sürükleyebilirsiniz. Birden fazla e-posta hesabınız varsa, gönderdiğiniz hesabı değiştirmek için Kimden’e dokunun. Giden iletilerin Gizli kopyasını otomatik olarak kendinize gönderme: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > Kendime Gizli Kopya bölümüne gidin. İletiyi taslak olarak kaydetme: Vazgeç düğmesine ve daha sonra Taslağı Kaydet düğmesine dokunun. Kaydettiğiniz taslakları görmek için simgesine dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun. Bir iletiyi yanıtlama: simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra Yanıtla’ya dokunun. İlk iletinin ilişiğindeki dosyalar ya da görüntüler geri gönderilmez. İlişikleri dahil etmek için, iletiyi yanıtlamak yerine iletin.Bölüm 6 Mail 48 Bir iletiyi iletme: İletiyi açın ve simgesine dokunun, sonra İlet düğmesine dokunun. İletideki ilişikler de iletilir. Yanıtladığınız veya ilettiğiniz bir iletinin bir bölümünü alıntılama: Metni seçmek için dokunun ve parmağınızı basılı tutun. Yanıtınıza dahil etmek istediğiniz metni seçmek için tutma noktalarını sürükleyin ve sonra simgesine dokunun. • Girinti düzeyini değiştirme: Girintilenecek metni seçin, en az iki kez simgesine dokunun, daha sonra Alıntı Düzeyi’ne dokunun. • Alıntı düzeyini otomatik olarak artırma: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin ve Alıntı Düzeyini Artır seçeneğini açın. Bir fotoğrafı veya videoyu iletiyle gönderme: Seçim düğmelerini görüntülemek için ekleme noktasına dokunun, sonra Fotoğraf veya Video Ekle'ye dokunun ve bir albümden fotoğraf veya video seçin. Fotoğraflar’ı kullanarak da birden fazla fotoğrafı e-posta ile gönderebilirsiniz. Bakınız: Fotoğrafları ve videoları paylaşma sayfa 62. E-posta imzanızı değiştirme: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > İmza bölümüne gidin. Birden fazla posta hesabınız varsa, her hesap için farklı bir imza belirlemek istiyorsanız Her Bir Hesap İçin’e dokunun. E-postaları düzenleme Önemli Kişiler’den gelen iletileri görme: Posta kutuları listesine gidin (gitmek için PK düğmesine dokunun), sonra Önemli Kişiler’e dokunun. • Önemli Kişiler listesine kişi ekleme: Kimden, Kime veya Bilgi/Gizli alanındaki kişi adına veya adresine dokunun, sonra Önemli Kişiler’e Ekle’ye dokunun. İlgili iletileri bir arada gruplama: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin ve sonra Konu Grupları’nı açın veya kapatın. Mesajlarda arama yapma: Posta kutusunu açın, sonra Arama alanına bir metin girin. O anda açık olan posta kutusundaki Kimden, Kime veya Konu alanlarında arama yapabilirsiniz. Sunucudaki iletileri aramayı destekleyen mail hesapları için, Kimden, Kime, Konu alanlarında ve ileti gövdesinde aramak için Tümü’ne dokunun. Mesajı silme: İleti açıksa simgesine dokunun. • İletiyi açmadan silme: İleti başlığı üzerinde parmağınızı kaydırın, daha sonra Sil’e dokunun. • Birden fazla iletiyi silme: İleti listesini görüntülerken, Düzenle’ye dokunun. • Silmeyi doğrulamayı kapatma: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > Silmeden Önce Sor bölümüne gidin. Bir iletiyi geri alma: Hesabın Çöp Sepeti kutusuna gidin, iletiyi açın, , simgesine dokunun, sonra iletiyi hesabın Gelen Kutusu’na veya başka bir klasöre taşıyın. • Silinen iletilerin tamamen silinmeden önce ne kadar süre Çöp Kutusu’nda kalacağını ayarlama: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > hesap adı > Hesap > İleri Düzey bölümüne gidin. Arşivlemeyi açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > hesap adı > Hesap > İleri Düzey bölümüne gidin. Bir iletiyi arşivlediğinizde ileti, Tüm Postalar posta kutusuna taşınır. Bazı e-posta hesapları arşivlemeyi desteklemez. İletiyi farklı bir posta kutusuna taşıma: İletiyi görüntülerken, simgesine dokunun ve sonra bir hedef seçin. Posta kutusu ekleme, silme veya posta kutusunun adını değiştirme: Posta kutusu listesinde Düzenle’ye dokunun. Bazı posta kutuları değiştirilemez veya silinemez.Bölüm 6 Mail 49 İletileri ve ilişikleri yazdırma İletiyi yazdırma:   simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra Yazdır’a dokunun. Metnin içindeki bir görüntüyü yazdırma: Görüntüye dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun ve sonra Görüntüyü Kaydet düğmesine dokunun. Fotoğraflar’a gidin ve Film Rulosu albümünüzdeki görüntüyü yazdırın. İlişiği yazdırma: Göz At ile açmak için ilişiğe dokunun, daha sonra simgesine dokunun ve Yazdır düğmesine dokunun. Daha fazla bilgi için, bakınız: AirPrint ile yazdırma sayfa 32. Mail hesapları ve ayarları Mail’i ve e-posta hesabı ayarlarını değiştirme: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin. Şunları ayarlayabilirsiniz: • iCloud • Microsoft Exchange ve Outlook • Google • Yahoo! • AOL • Microsoft Hotmail • Diğer POP ve IMAP hesapları Ayarlar, ayarladığınız hesap türüne bağlı olarak değişebilir. Internet servis sağlayıcınız veya sistem yöneticiniz girmeniz gereken bilgileri sağlayabilir. Bir hesabı kullanmayı geçici olarak durdurma: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, bir hesap seçin, sonra hesap için e-posta servisini kapatın. Servis kapalıyken; iPad, onu yeniden açıncaya dek bu bilgileri görüntülemez veya eşzamanlamaz. Bu örneğin tatildeyken işle ilgili e-postaları almayı durdurmak için iyi bir yoldur. Hesabı silme: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, bir hesap seçin, sonra da aşağıya kaydırın ve Hesabı Sil düğmesine dokunun. O hesapla eşzamanlanan tüm bilgiler (yer imleri, e-postalar ve notlar gibi) silinir. Anında İlet ayarlarını yapma: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > Yeni Verileri Al bölümüne gidin. Anında İlet, sunucuda görünen yeni bilgileri Internet bağlantısı varsa gönderir (bazı gecikmeler olabilir). Anında İlet kapalıyken verilerin hangi sıklıkta isteneceğini belirlemek için, Yeni Verileri Al ayarını kullanın. Burada seçtiğiniz ayar, her bir hesapta yaptığınız ayarları geçersiz kılar. En iyi pil ömrü için, çok sık alma ayarını kullanmayın. Bazı hesaplar anında ilet özelliğini desteklemeyebilir. İmzalanmış ve şifrelenmiş iletiler gönderme: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, bir hesap seçin ve daha sonra İleri Düzey’e dokunun. S/MIME’yi açın ve daha sonra giden iletileri imzalamak ve şifrelemek için sertifikaları seçin. Sertifikaları yüklemek için sistem yöneticinizden bir konfigürasyon profili edinebilir, sertifikaları onları veren kişinin web sitesinden Safari’yi kullanarak indirebilir veya onları e-posta ilişikleri olarak alabilirsiniz.Bölüm 6 Mail 50 İleri düzey seçeneklerini ayarlama: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > hesap adı > Hesap > İleri Düzey bölümüne gidin. Seçenekler hesaba göre değişir ve şunları içerebilir: • Taslakları, gönderilen iletileri ve silinen iletileri iPad'de saklama • Silinen iletilerin tamamen silinmeden önce ne kadar süre tutulacağını ayarlama • Posta sunucusu ayarlarını düzenleme • SSL’yi ve parola ayarlarını düzenleme Hesabınız için uygun ayarların hangisi olduğundan emin değilseniz Internet servis sağlayıcınıza veya sistem yöneticinize sorun.7 51 Mesaj gönderme ve alma UYARI: Sürüş sırasında dikkat dağılmasını önleme hakkında önemli bilgiler için, Önemli güvenlik bilgileri sayfa 131 konusuna bakın. Mesajlar uygulamasını ve yerleşik iMessage servisini kullanarak diğer iOS ve OS X Mountain Lion kullanıcılarına Wi-Fi veya hücresel veri bağlantıları üzerinden sınırsız mesaj gönderebilirsiniz. Mesajlar fotoğrafları, videoları ve diğer bilgileri içerebilir. Diğer kişilerin ne zaman yazdığını görebilir ve mesajlarını okuduğunuz kişilerin haberdar edilmesini sağlayabilirsiniz. iMessage mesajları aynı hesapla oturum açmış iOS aygıtlarınızın tümünde görüntülenir, böylece aygıtlarınızın birinde bir yazışmayı başlatabilir ve daha sonra başka bir aygıtta yazışmaya devam edebilirsiniz. iMessage mesajları güvenlik için şifrelenir. Not: Hücresel veri ücretleri uygulanabilir. Yazışmayı düzenlemek veya iletmek için düzenle düğmesine dokunun. Yazışmayı düzenlemek veya iletmek için düzenle düğmesine dokunun. Yeni bir yazışmayı başlatmak için oluştur düğmesine dokunun. Yeni bir yazışmayı başlatmak için oluştur düğmesine dokunun. Fotoğraf veya video eklemek için Ortam İliştir düğmesine dokunun. Fotoğraf veya video eklemek için Ortam İliştir düğmesine dokunun. MesajlarBölüm 7 Mesajlar 52 Yazışma başlatma:   simgesine dokunun, daha sonra simgesine dokunun ve bir kişi seçin, kişilerinizde ad girerek arama yapın veya telefon numarasını ya da e-posta adresini elle girin. Bir mesaj girin ve sonra Gönder düğmesine dokunun. Not: Mesaj gönderilemiyorsa bir uyarı işareti görünür. Daha fazla bilgi için veya mesajı göndermeyi yeniden denemek için uyarıya dokunun. Yazışmayı sürdürme: Mesajlar listesinde yazışmaya dokunun. Klavyeyi gizleme: Sağ alt köşede simgesine dokunun. Resim karakterleri kullanma: Ayarlar > Genel > Klavye > Klavyeler > Yeni Klavye Ekle bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Emoji klavyesini kullanılabilir yapmak için Emoji’ye dokunun. Daha sonra mesaj yazarken Emoji klavyesini açmak için simgesine dokunun. Bakınız: Özel giriş yöntemleri sayfa 129. Kişinin iletişim bilgilerini görme: simgesine dokunun. Gerçekleştirebileceğiniz eylemleri görmek için (FaceTime ile arama yapmak gibi) Bilgi penceresini aşağı kaydırın. Yazışmada bulunan daha önceki mesajları görme: En üste kaydırın (durum çubuğuna dokunun). Gerekliyse Eski Mesajları Yükle düğmesine dokunun. Gruba mesaj gönderme:   simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra birden fazla alıcıyı girin. Yazışmaları yönetme Yazışmalar Mesajlar listesine kaydedilir. Mavi nokta okunmamış mesajları belirtir. Yazışmayı görüntülemek veya sürdürmek için ona dokunun. Yazışmayı iletme: Yazışmayı seçin, simgesine dokunun, dahil edilecek bölümleri seçin ve daha sonra İlet’e dokunun. Yazışmayı düzenleme:  Yazışmayı seçin, simgesine dokunun, dahil edilecek bölümleri seçin ve daha sonra Sil’e dokunun. Yazışmayı silmeden tüm metinleri ve ilişikleri temizlemek için, Tümünü Sil’e dokunun. Yazışmayı silme: Mesajlar listesinde, yazışmanın üzerinde parmağınızı kaydırın ve daha sonra Sil’e dokunun. Yazışmada arama yapma:  Arama alanını görüntülemek için Mesajlar listesini en üste kaydırın, daha sonra aradığınız ifadeyi girin. Yazışmaları Ana Ekran’da da arayabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Arama yapma sayfa 28. Kişiler listenize birisini ekleme veya bir kişinin bilgilerini paylaşma: Mesajlar listesinde bir telefon numarasına veya e-posta adresine dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun. Fotoğrafları, videoları ve daha fazlasını gönderme Fotoğraflar, videolar, konumlar, kişi bilgileri ve sesli notlar gönderebilirsiniz. İlişiklerin büyüklük sınırı, servis sağlayıcınız tarafından belirlenir. iPad, gerektiğinde fotoğraf ve video ilişiklerini sıkıştırabilir Fotoğraf veya video gönderme:   simgesine dokunun. Bir konumu gönderme: Harita’da konuma ait simgesine dokunun, Konumu Paylaş’a dokunun ve daha sonra Mesaj düğmesine dokunun. Kişi bilgilerini gönderme: Kişiler’de bir kişi seçin, Kişiyi Paylaş’a (Notlar altında) dokunun ve sonra Mesaj düğmesine dokunun.Bölüm 7 Mesajlar 53 Aldığınız bir fotoğrafı veya videoyu Film Rulosu albümünüze kaydetme: Fotoğrafa veya videoya dokunun, simgesine dokunun ve sonra Görüntüyü Kaydet düğmesine dokunun. Fotoğrafı veya videoyu kopyalama: İlişiğe dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun ve sonra Kopyala’ya dokunun. Aldığınız kişi bilgilerini kaydetme: Kişi balonuna dokunun ve daha sonra "Yeni Kişi Yarat" veya “Var Olan Kişiye Ekle” düğmesine dokunun. Mesajlar listesindeki birisini kişi listenize ekleme: Telefon numarasına veya e-posta adresine dokunun ve sonra “Kişilere Ekle” düğmesine dokunun. Mesajlar ayarları Aşağıdakiler de dahil olmak üzere Mesajlar seçeneklerini ayarlamak için Ayarlar > Mesajlar bölümüne gidin: • iMessage’ı açma veya kapatma • Başkalarına, mesajlarını okuduğunuzu bildirme • Mesajlar ile kullanılacak telefon numarasını, Apple kimliğini veya e-posta adresini belirtme • Konu alanını gösterme Mesajlar için bildirimleri yönetme: Bakınız: Rahatsız Etme ve Bildirimler sayfa 119. Gelen mesajlar için uyarı sesini ayarlama: Bakınız: Sesler sayfa 124.8 54 iPad 2 veya daha yenisinde FaceTime’ı destekleyen diğer iOS aygıtlarını veya bilgisayarları görüntülü aramak için FaceTime’ı kullanabilirsiniz. FaceTime kamerası yüz yüze konuşma yapmanızı sağlar; etrafınızda gördüklerinizi paylaşmak için arka taraftaki iSight kameraya geçin. Not: FaceTime bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir. iPad Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerinde, FaceTime aramaları hücresel veri bağlantısı üzerinden yapılabilir. Hücresel veri ücretleri uygulanabilir. Görüntünüzü herhangi bir köşeye sürükleyin. Görüntünüzü herhangi bir köşeye sürükleyin. Kameralar arasında geçiş yapın. Kameralar arasında geçiş yapın. Sesi kapatın (duyabilir ve görebilirsiniz; arayan kişi sizi görebilir ama duyamaz). Sesi kapatın (duyabilir ve görebilirsiniz; arayan kişi sizi görebilir ama duyamaz). FaceTime’ı kullanmak için, bir Apple kimliğine ve Wi-Fi üzerinden Internet bağlantısına gereksiniminiz vardır FaceTime’ı açtığınızda, Apple kimliğinizi kullanarak giriş yapmanız veya yeni bir hesap yaratmanız istenebilir. FaceTime ile arama yapma: Kişiler’e dokunun, bir ad seçin ve sonra kişinin FaceTime için kullandığı telefon numarasına veya e-posta adresine dokunun. Kişiler uygulamasından da FaceTime araması yapabilirsiniz. FaceTime’ı yatay veya düşey yönde kullanmak için iPad’i döndürün. Yönün isteğiniz dışında değişmesini engellemek için, iPad’i düşey yöne kilitleyin. Bakınız: Düşey ve yatay yön sayfa 20. Son aramayı yeniden başlatma: Son Aramalar düğmesine dokunun ve sonra bir ad veya numara seçin. FaceTimeBölüm 8 FaceTime 55 Hızlı Arama’yı kullanma: Hızlı Arama’ya dokunun. • Hızlı aramaya ekleme: simgesine dokunun ve bir kişi seçin. • Hızlı arama listesindeki bir kişiyi arama: Listede bir ada dokunun. Kişi ekleme: Kişiler’e dokunun, simgesine dokunun, daha sonra kişinin adını ve FaceTime için kullandığı e-posta adresini veya telefon numarasını girin. Alanınızın dışındaki bir kişi için, ülke kodu ve alan kodu da dahil olmak üzere numaranın tamamını girdiğinizden emin olun. Arama sırasında başka bir uygulamayı kullanma: Ana Ekran düğmesine basın ve sonra bir uygulama simgesine dokunun. Arkadaşınızla konuşmaya devam edebilirsiniz ama birbirinizi göremezsiniz. Görüntülü aramaya dönmek için, ekranın en üstündeki yeşil çubuğa dokunun. FaceTime seçeneklerini ayarlama: Ayarlar > FaceTime bölümüne gidin. Seçenekler arasında FaceTime ile kullanılacak telefon numarasını, Apple kimliğini veya e-posta adresini belirtme sayılabilir.9 56 İlk bakışta iPad 2 veya daha yenisi sahibiyseniz, hem hareketsiz fotoğraf hem de video çekebilirsiniz. Arkasındaki iSight kameraya ek olarak, ön tarafında FaceTime aramaları ve otoportreler için FaceTime kamerası bulunur. Çektiğiniz fotoğrafları veya videoları görüntüleyin. Çektiğiniz fotoğrafları veya videoları görüntüleyin. Video kaydını başlatın veya durdurun. Video kaydını başlatın veya durdurun. Kamera/ Video anahtarı Kamera/ Video anahtarı Kameranın odaklandığı ve pozlamayı ayarladığı yerde kısa süreliğine bir dikdörtgen görünür. iPad (3. nesil), kişilerin fotoğrafını çekerken otomatik olarak odaklanmak ve pozlamayı en fazla 10 yüz arasında dengelemek için yüz tanımayı kullanır. Algılanan her bir yüzün üzerinde bir dikdörtgen görünür. Fotoğraf çekme:  simgesine dokunun veya ses yüksekliği düğmelerinden birine basın. Ekranda ızgarayı görüntülemek için Seçenekler'e dokunun. • Büyütme veya küçültme: Ekranda parmaklarınızı kıstırın (yalnızca iSight kamera). Video kaydı yapma:  simgesine geçin, sonra kaydı başlatmak veya durdurmak için simgesine dokunun ya da ses yüksekliği düğmelerinden birine basın. Fotoğraf çektiğinizde veya video kaydına başladığınızda, iPad, deklanşör düğmesine basma sesi çıkarır. Ses yüksekliğini, ses yüksekliği düğmeleriyle veya yandaki anahtarla denetleyebilirsiniz. Not: Bazı ülkelerde iPad’un sesini kapatma deklanşör düğmesine basma sesini engellemez. Konum Servisleri açıksa, fotoğraflar ve videolar diğer uygulamalar ve fotoğraf paylaşma web siteleri tarafından kullanılabilen konum verileriyle etiketlenir. Bakınız: Gizlilik sayfa 125. KameraBölüm 9 Kamera 57 Odağı ve pozlamayı ayarlama:   • Bir sonraki çekim için odağı ve pozlamayı ayarlama: Ekrandaki nesneye dokunun. Yüz tanıma geçici olarak kapatılır. • Odağı ve pozlamayı kilitleme: Ekrana dokunup dikdörtgen yanıp sönmeye başlayana dek parmağınızı basılı tutun. AE/AF Kilidi ekranın en altında görüntülenir ve ekrana yeniden dokununcaya dek odak ve pozlama kilitli kalır. Ekran resmi çekme: Uyut/Uyandır düğmesine ve Ana Ekran düğmesine aynı anda basıp bırakın. Ekran resmi, Film Rulosu albümünüze eklenir. Not: Kamerası olmayan bir iPad'de ekran resimleri Kaydedilenler albümüne eklenirler. Görüntüleme, paylaşma ve yazdırma Kamera ile çektiğiniz fotoğraflar ve videolar Film Rulosu albümünüze kaydedilir. Ayarlar > iCloud bölümünde Fotoğraf Yayını açıksa, yeni fotoğraflar Fotoğraf Yayını albümünüzde de görünür ve diğer iOS aygıtlarınıza ve bilgisayarlarınıza duraksız yayımlanır. Bakınız: iCloud’u kullanma sayfa 15 ve Fotoğraf Yayını sayfa 60. Film Rulosu albümünüzü görüntüleme:  Sağa kaydırın veya küçük resim görüntüsüne dokunun. Film Rulosu albümünüzü Fotoğraflar uygulamasında da görüntüleyebilirsiniz. • Fotoğrafı veya videoyu görüntülerken denetimleri gösterme ya da gizleme: Ekrana dokunun. • Fotoğrafı veya videoyu paylaşma: simgesine dokunun. Birden fazla fotoğrafı veya videoyu göndermek için, küçük resimleri görüntülerken simgesine dokunun, öğeleri seçin, sonra Paylaş’a dokunun. • Fotoğrafı yazdırma: simgesine dokunun. Bakınız: AirPrint ile yazdırma sayfa 32. • Fotoğrafı veya videoyu silme: simgesine dokunun. Kameraya dönme: Bitti düğmesine dokunun. Fotoğrafları ve videoları bilgisayarınıza aktarma:  iPad’u bilgisayarınıza bağlayın. • Mac:  İstediğiniz fotoğrafları ve videoları seçin ve iPhoto’da veya bilgisayarınızdaki başka bir desteklenen fotoğraf uygulamasında İçe Aktar (Import) veya İndir (Download) düğmesini tıklayın. • PC:  Fotoğraf uygulamanızla birlikte gelen yönergeleri izleyin. iPad'deki fotoğrafları veya videoları bilgisayarınıza aktarırken silmeyi seçerseniz, bunlar Film Rulosu albümünüzden silinir. Fotoğrafları ve videoları iPad üzerindeki Fotoğraflar uygulaması ile eşzamanlamak için iTunes’daki Fotoğraflar ayar penceresini kullanabilirsiniz (videolar yalnızca Mac ile eşzamanlanabilir). Bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16.Bölüm 9 Kamera 58 Fotoğrafları düzenleme ve videoları kısaltma Otomatik Otomatik Kırp Kırp Döndür Döndür Kırmızı gözü sil Kırmızı gözü sil Fotoğrafı düzenleme:  Bir fotoğrafı tam ekran görüntülerken Düzenle’ye dokunun ve sonra bir araca dokunun. • Otomatik iyileştirme: İyileştirme; fotoğrafın genel koyuluğunu veya açıklığını, renk doymasını ve diğer özelliklerini iyileştirir. Düzeltmeyi istemiyorsanız, araca yeniden dokunun (değişiklikleri kaydetmiş olsanız bile). • Kırmızı gözü sil: Düzeltme gerektiren her bir göze dokunun. • Kırp: Izgaranın köşelerini sürükleyin, konumunu değiştirmek üzere fotoğrafı sürükleyin ve daha sonra Kırp düğmesine dokunun. Belirli bir oran ayarlamak için Kısıtla’ya dokunun. Videoyu kısaltma:  Bir videoyu görüntülerken, denetimleri göstermek için ekrana dokunun. Videonun en üstündeki kare görüntüleyicinin herhangi bir ucunu sürükleyin, daha sonra Kısalt düğmesine dokunun. Önemli: Özgünü Kısalt’ı seçerseniz, kısaltılan kareler özgün videodan kalıcı olarak silinir. "Yeni Klip Olarak Kaydet"i seçerseniz, kısaltılmış yeni video klip Film Rulosu albümünüze kaydedilir ama özgün video değiştirilmez.10 59 Fotoğrafları ve videoları görüntüleme Fotoğraflar, iPad üzerinde şu konumlardaki fotoğrafları ve videoları görüntülemenizi sağlar: • Film Rulosu albümü—iPad ile çektiğiniz veya bir e-posta iletisinden, mesajdan, web sayfasından veya ekran resminden kaydettiğiniz fotoğraflar ve videolar • Fotoğraf Yayını albümleri—Fotoğraf Yayınım’daki ve paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınlarınızdaki fotoğraflar (bakınız: Fotoğraf Yayını sayfa 60) • Son İçe Aktarma albümü—bir sayısal kameradan, iOS aygıttan veya SD bellek kartından aktarılan fotoğraflar ve videolar (bakınız: Fotoğrafları ve videoları içe aktarma sayfa 63) • Bilgisayarınızdan eşzamanlanarak aktarılan Fotoğraf Arşivi ve diğer albümler (bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16) Not: Kamerası olmayan bir iPad’de Kaydedilenler, Film Rulosu albümünün yerine geçer. Görüntülenecek fotoğrafı seçin. Görüntülenecek fotoğrafı seçin. Fotoğrafı düzenleyin. Fotoğrafı düzenleyin. Slayt sunusu oynatın. Slayt sunusu oynatın. Fotoğrafı silin. Fotoğrafı silin. Slayt sunusunu AirPlay kullanarak HDTV'de duraksız yayımlayın. Slayt sunusunu AirPlay kullanarak HDTV'de duraksız yayımlayın. Fotoğrafı paylaşın, bir kişiye atayın, duvar kağıdı olarak kullanın veya yazdırın. Fotoğrafı paylaşın, bir kişiye atayın, duvar kağıdı olarak kullanın veya yazdırın. Denetimleri görüntülemek için ekrana dokunun. Denetimleri görüntülemek için ekrana dokunun. FotoğraflarBölüm 10 Fotoğraflar 60 Fotoğrafları ve videoları görüntüleme:  Ekranın üst kısmındaki düğmelerden birine dokunun. Örneğin, Albüm'e dokunun, sonra da küçük resimlerini görmek için bir albüme dokunun. Tam ekran görmek istediğiniz fotoğrafın veya videonun küçük resmine dokunun. • Bir sonraki veya önceki fotoğrafı ya da videoyu görme: Sola veya sağa doğru kaydırın. • Büyütme veya küçültme: Çift dokunun veya parmaklarınızı kıstırıp açın. • Fotoğrafın diğer bölümlerini görme: Sürükleyin. • Video oynatma: Ekranın ortasındaki simgesine dokunun. Ayrıca, bir albümü açıp kapatmak, bir fotoğrafı veya videoyu tam ekran görüntülemek veya küçük resim görüntüsüne dönmek için parmaklarınızı kıstırıp açabilirsiniz. iPhoto 8.0 (iLife ’09) veya daha yenisi ya da Aperture 3.0.2 veya daha yenisi ile eşzamanladığınız albümler etkinliklere veya yüzlere göre görüntülenebilir. Fotoğraflar yer belirleme özelliğini destekleyen bir fotoğraf makinesi ile çekilmişlerse onları konuma göre de görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Slayt sunusunu görüntüleme:  Slayt Sunusu'na dokunun. Slayt sunusu seçeneklerini seçin, sonra Slayt Sunusunu Başlat düğmesine dokunun. Slayt sunusunu durdurmak için ekrana dokunun. Diğer seçenekleri ayarlamak için Ayarlar > Fotoğraflar ve Kamera bölümüne gidin. Videoyu veya slayt sunusunu TV’de duraksız yayımlama: Bakınız: AirPlay sayfa 32. Fotoğrafları ve videoları düzenleme Albüm yaratma:  Albümler’e dokunun, simgesine dokunun, bir ad girin ve daha sonra Kaydet düğmesine dokunun. Yeni albüme eklenecek öğeleri seçin ve daha sonra Bitti’ye dokunun. Not: iPad üzerinde yaratılan albümler eşzamanlanarak bilgisayarınıza aktarılmaz. Öğeleri albüme ekleme: Küçük resimleri görüntülerken simgesine dokunun, öğeleri seçin ve daha sonra Bitti’ye dokunun. Albümleri yönetme: Düzenle düğmesine dokunun. • Albümün adını değiştirme: Albüm adına dokunun, sonra yeni bir ad girin. • Albümleri yeniden düzenleme: Albümü sürükleyin. • Albümü silme: simgesine dokunun. Yalnızca iPad'de yaratılan albümler silinebilir veya adları değiştirilebilir. Fotoğraf Yayını Bir iCloud özelliği olan Fotoğraf Yayını sayesinde (bakınız: iCloud’u kullanma sayfa 15), iPad üzerinde çektiğiniz fotoğraflar Fotoğraf Yayını ile ayarlanmış diğer aygıtlarınızda (Mac’iniz veya PC’niz de dahil olmak üzere) otomatik olarak görünür. Fotoğraf Yayını, seçilen fotoğrafları arkadaşlarınızla ve ailenizle paylaşmanızı da sağlar (doğrudan onların aygıtlarında veya web üzerinde). Fotoğraf Yayını hakkında Fotoğraf Yayını açıkken; iPad üzerinde çektiğiniz fotoğraflar (ve Film Rulosu’na eklenmiş diğer fotoğraflar), Kamera uygulamasından ayrıldıktan sonra ve iPad Wi-Fi üzerinden Internet’e bağlıyken fotoğraf yayınınıza yüklenir. Bu fotoğraflar iPad'deki Fotoğraf Yayınım albümünde ve Fotoğraf Yayını ile ayarlanmış diğer aygıtlarınızda görünür. Fotoğraf Yayını’nı açma:  Ayarlar > iCloud > Fotoğraf Yayını bölümüne gidin.Bölüm 10 Fotoğraflar 61 Diğer iCloud aygıtlarınızdan fotoğraf yayınınıza eklenmiş fotoğraflar da Fotoğraf Yayınım’da görünür. iPad ve diğer iOS aygıtları en son eklenen en fazla 1000 fotoğrafı Fotoğraf Yayınım’da tutabilir. Bilgisayarlarınız, Fotoğraf Yayını fotoğraflarınızın tümünü daimi olarak tutabilir. Not: Fotoğraf Yayını fotoğrafları, iCloud saklama alanınızdan düşülmez. Fotoğraf yayını içeriklerini yönetme:  Fotoğraf yayını albümünde Düzenle’ye dokunun. • Fotoğrafları iPad'e kaydetme:  Fotoğrafları seçin ve daha sonra Kaydet’e dokunun. • Fotoğrafları paylaşma, yazdırma, kopyalama veya Film Rulosu albümünüze kaydetme:  Fotoğrafları seçin ve daha sonra Paylaş’a dokunun. • Fotoğrafları silme: Fotoğrafları seçin ve daha sonra Sil’e dokunun. Not: Silinen fotoğraflar aygıtlarınızdaki fotoğraf yayınlarından kaldırılsa da; özgün fotoğraflar, ait oldukları aygıttaki Film Rulosu albümünde kalır. Fotoğraf yayınından bir aygıta veya bilgisayara kaydedilen fotoğraflar da silinmez. Fotoğraf Yayını’ndan fotoğrafları silebilmek için iPad’de ve diğer iOS aygıtlarınızda iOS 5.1 veya daha yenisinin olması gerekir. Bakınız: support.apple.com/kb/HT4486?viewlocale=tr_TR. Paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınları Paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınları, seçilen fotoğrafları yalnızca seçtiğiniz kişilerle paylaşmanızı sağlar. iOS 6 ve OS X Mountain Lion kullanıcıları paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınlarınıza doğrudan kendi aygıtlarından abone olabilir, eklediğiniz en son fotoğrafları görüntüleyebilir, fotoğrafları tek tek “beğenebilir” ve yorum bırakabilirler. Fotoğraflarınızı diğer kişilerle web üzerinden paylaşmak amacıyla, paylaşılan fotoğraf yayını için herkese açık bir web sitesi de yaratabilirsiniz. Not: Paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınları hem Wi-Fi hem de hücresel ağlar üzerinden çalışır (iPad Wi-Fi + hücresel). Hücresel veri ücretleri uygulanabilir. Paylaşılan Fotoğraf Yayınları’nı açma:  Ayarlar > iCloud > Fotoğraf Yayını bölümüne gidin. Paylaşılan fotoğraf yayını yaratma:  Fotoğraf Yayını’na dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun. Diğer iOS 6 veya OS X Mountain Lion kullanıcılarını, paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınınıza abone olmaya davet etmek için, onların e-posta adreslerini girin. Fotoğraf yayınını icloud. com üzerinde yayımlamak için, Herkese Açık Site seçeneğini açın. Albüme bir ad verin, sonra Yarat’a dokunun. Paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınına fotoğraf ekleme:  Bir fotoğraf seçin, simgesine dokunun, Fotoğraf Yayını’na dokunun, sonra paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınını seçin. Albümdeki birden fazla fotoğrafı eklemek için, Düzenle’ye dokunun, fotoğrafları seçin, sonra Paylaş’a dokunun. Paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınındaki fotoğrafları silme:  Paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınına dokunun, Düzenle’ye dokunun, fotoğrafları seçin, sonra Sil’e dokunun. Paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınını düzenleme:  Fotoğraf Yayını’na dokunun, Düzenle’ye dokunun, sonra paylaşılan fotoğraf yayınına dokunun. Şunları yapabilirsiniz: • Fotoğraf yayınının adını değiştirme • Abone ekleme veya silme ve daveti yeniden gönderme • Herkese açık web sitesi yaratma ve bağlantıyı paylaşma • Fotoğraf yayınını silmeBölüm 10 Fotoğraflar 62 Fotoğrafları ve videoları paylaşma Fotoğrafları e-posta, mesaj, fotoğraf yayınları, Twitter gönderileri ve Facebook ile paylaşabilirsiniz. Videolar e-postalar, mesajlar ve YouTube ile paylaşılabilir. Fotoğrafı veya videoyu paylaşma veya kopyalama:  Fotoğrafı veya videoyu seçin ve daha sonra simgesine dokunun. simgesini görmüyorsanız, denetimleri göstermek için ekrana dokunun. İlişiklerin büyüklük sınırı, servis sağlayıcınız tarafından belirlenir. iPad, gerekiyorsa fotoğraf ve video ilişiklerini sıkıştırabilir. Fotoğrafları ve videoları kopyalayabilir ve sonra onları e-postaya veya mesaja yapıştırabilirsiniz. Birden fazla fotoğrafı ve videoyu paylaşma veya kopyalama: Küçük resimleri görüntülerken Düzenle’ye dokunun, fotoğrafları veya videoları seçin, daha sonra Paylaş düğmesine dokunun. Fotoğrafı veya videoyu şuradan kaydetme: • E-posta: Gerekiyorsa öğeyi indirmek için dokunun, fotoğrafa dokunun veya videoya dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun ve daha sonra Kaydet’e dokunun. • Mesaj: Yazışmadaki öğeye dokunun, simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra Kaydet’e dokunun. • Web sayfası (yalnızca fotoğraf): Fotoğrafa dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun ve sonra Görüntüyü Kaydet düğmesine dokunun. Aldığınız veya bir web sayfasından kaydettiğiniz fotoğraflar ve videolar, Film Rulosu albümünüze (kamerası olmayan iPad'lerde Kaydedilenler'e) kaydedilir. Fotoğrafları yazdırma AirPrint özellikli yazıcılarda yazdırma: • Tek bir fotoğrafı yazdırma: simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra Yazdır’a dokunun. • Birden fazla fotoğrafı yazdırma: Fotoğraf albümünü görüntülerken Düzenle’ye dokunun, fotoğrafları seçin, Paylaş’a dokunun, sonra Yazdır’a dokunun. Bakınız: AirPrint ile yazdırma sayfa 32. Resim Çerçevesi iPad kilitli olduğunda, fotoğraflarınızın tüm albümlerinin veya seçili albümlerinin slayt sunusunu görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Resim Çerçevesi'ni başlatma:  iPad'i kilitlemek için Uyut/Uyandır düğmesine basın, ekranı açmak için düğmeye yeniden basın ve sonra simgesine dokunun. • Slayt sunusunu duraklatma: Ekrana dokunun. • Slayt sunusunu durdurma: Slayt sunusunu duraklatın, sonra simgesine dokunun. Hangi albümlerin görüntüleneceğini seçme: Ayarlar > Resim Çerçevesi bölümüne gidin. Resim Çerçevesi için diğer seçenekleri ayarlama: Ayarlar > Resim Çerçevesi bölümüne gidin. Resim Çerçevesi'ni kapatma: Ayarlar > Genel > Parolayla Kilitleme bölümüne gidin.Bölüm 10 Fotoğraflar 63 Fotoğrafları ve videoları içe aktarma iPad Camera Connection Kit ile (ayrı olarak satılır); sayısal fotoğraf makinesindeki, kamerası olan başka bir iOS aygıttaki veya SD bellek kartındaki fotoğrafları ve videoları doğrudan içe aktarabilirsiniz. Fotoğrafları aktarma: 1 iPad Camera Connection Kit ile birlikte gelen SD kart okuyucuyu veya kamera bağlayıcıyı, iPad dock bağlayıcıya takın. • Bir kamera veya iOS aygıtı bağlamak için: Fotoğraf makinesi veya iOS aygıtı ile gelen USB kablosunu kullanın ve kabloyu kamera bağlayıcıdaki USB kapısına bağlayın. Bir iOS aygıtı kullanıyorsanız, açık ve kilitlenmemiş olduğundan emin olun. Fotoğraf makinesi bağlamak için, fotoğraf makinesinin açık ve aktarım modunda olduğundan emin olun. Daha fazla bilgi için, fotoğraf makinesiyle birlikte gelen belgelere bakın. • SD bellek kartı kullanmak için: Kartı, SD kart okuyucudaki yuvaya takın. Kartı yuvaya zorlayarak takmaya çalışmayın; kart yalnızca bir şekilde takılabilir. Daha fazla bilgi için, iPad Camera Connection Kit belgelerine bakın. 2 iPad'in kilidini açın. 3 Fotoğraflar uygulaması açılır ve içe aktarılabilecek fotoğrafları ve videoları görüntüler. 4 Aktarmak istediğiniz fotoğrafları ve videoları seçin. • Tüm öğeleri içe aktarmak için: Tümünü İçe Aktar'a dokunun. • Öğelerin bazılarını içe aktarmak için: Dahil etmek istediklerinize dokunun (her birinde bir onay işareti görünür), İçe Aktar'a dokunup Seçileni İçe Aktar düğmesini seçin. 5 Fotoğraflar içe aktarıldıktan sonra; karttaki, fotoğraf makinesindeki veya iOS aygıtındaki fotoğrafları ve videoları tutmayı veya silmeyi seçebilirsiniz. 6 SD kart okuyucunun veya kamera bağlayıcının bağlantısını kesin. Fotoğrafları görüntülemek için, Son İçe Aktarma albümüne bakın. Yeni bir etkinlik, içe aktarma için seçilen fotoğrafların tümünü içerir. Fotoğrafları bilgisayarınıza aktarmak için, iPad'i bilgisayarınıza bağlayın ve görüntüleri iPhoto veya Adobe Elements gibi bir fotoğraf uygulamasıyla içe aktarın.11 64 Fotoğraf çekme iPad 2 veya daha yenisine sahipseniz, Photo Booth ile fotoğraf çekmek ve efekt uygulayarak fotoğrafınızı ilginç hale getirmek çok kolaydır. Fotoğraf çekerken, iPad deklanşör sesi çıkarır. Deklanşör düğmesine basma sesinin yüksekliğini denetlemek için iPad'in yanındaki ses yüksekliği düğmelerini kullanabilirsiniz. Yandaki Anahtarı sessize ayarladıysanız, ses duymazsınız. Bakınız: Düğmeler sayfa 9. Not: Bazı bölgelerde, Yandaki Anahtar sessize ayarlansa bile ses efektleri duyulur. Fotoğraf çekme:  iPad'i fotoğrafını çekmek istediğiniz şeye yöneltin ve simgesine dokunun. Efekt seçme:  simgesine dokunun ve sonra istediğiniz efekti seçin. • Bozulma efektini değiştirme:  Parmağınızı ekran boyunca sürükleyin. • Bozulma efektinde değişiklik yapma:  Görüntüyü kıstırın, kaydırın veya döndürün. Yeni çektiğiniz fotoğrafı gözden geçirme:  Son çekiminize ait küçük resme dokunun. Denetimleri tekrar görüntülemek için ekrana dokunun. Ön ve arka kameralar arasında geçiş yapma:  Ekranın altındaki simgesine dokunun. Photo BoothBölüm 11 Photo Booth 65 Fotoğrafları yönetme Photo Booth ile çektiğiniz fotoğraflar, iPad'deki Fotoğraflar uygulamasında bulunan Film Rulosu albümüne kaydedilir. Fotoğrafı silme:  Küçük resmini seçin ve sonra simgesine dokunun. Birden fazla fotoğrafı silme:  simgesine dokunun, bir veya birden fazla küçük resme dokunun, sonra Sil’e dokunun. Fotoğrafları e-postayla gönderme veya kopyalama:  simgesine dokunun, bir veya birden fazla küçük resme dokunun, sonra E-postayla gönder'e veya Kopyala'ya dokunun. Film Rulosu albümündeki fotoğrafları görüntüleme:  Fotoğraflar'da bir albüme dokunun, sonra bir küçük resme dokunun. Bir sonraki veya önceki fotoğrafı görmek için sola veya sağa doğru kaydırın. Bakınız: Fotoğrafları ve videoları görüntüleme sayfa 59. Fotoğrafları bilgisayarınıza aktarma:  iPad’i, Lightning - USB kablosunu kullanarak bilgisayarınıza bağlayın. • Mac:  Aktarmak istediğiniz fotoğrafları seçin ve daha sonra iPhoto'da veya bilgisayarınızdaki başka bir desteklenen fotoğraf uygulamasında İçe Aktar (Import) veya İndir (Download) düğmesini tıklayın. • PC:  Fotoğraf uygulamanızla birlikte gelen yönergeleri izleyin. iPad'deki fotoğrafları bilgisayarınıza aktarırken silmeyi seçerseniz, bunlar Film Rulosu albümünden silinir. Fotoğrafları iPad üzerindeki Fotoğraflar uygulaması ile eşzamanlamak için iTunes'daki Fotoğraflar ayar penceresini kullanabilirsiniz.12 66 Film, TV şovu ve video klip izlemek için Videolar uygulamasını kullanın. Video podcast’leri izlemek için App Store’dan ücretsiz Podcast’ler uygulamasını yükleyin. Bakınız: Bölüm 24, Podcast’ler, sayfa 98. iPad'deki Kamera’yı kullanarak kaydettiğiniz videoları izlemek için Fotoğraflar uygulamasını açın. Video alma: • iTunes Store’dan video satın alma veya kiralama (bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir):  iPad'de iTunes uygulamasını açın ve Videolar’a dokunun. Bakınız: Bölüm 20, iTunes Store, sayfa 88. • Videoları bilgisayarınızdan aktarma:  iPad'i bağlayın ve daha sonra bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da videoları eşzamanlayın. Bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16. • Videoları bilgisayarınızdan duraksız yayımlama:  Bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da Ev Paylaşımı’nı açın. Sonra, iPad'da Ayarlar > Videolar bölümüne gidin ve bilgisayarınızda Ev Paylaşımı’nı ayarlamak için kullandığınız Apple kimliğini ve parolasını girin. Daha sonra iPad'da Videolar’ı açın ve video listesinin en üstündeki Paylaşılan’a dokunun. İleriye veya geriye sarmak için sürükleyin. İleriye veya geriye sarmak için sürükleyin. Denetimleri göstermek veya gizlemek için videoya dokunun. Denetimleri göstermek veya gizlemek için videoya dokunun. Videoyu Apple TV ile TV’de izleyin. Videoyu Apple TV ile TV’de izleyin. Ses yüksekliğini ayarlamak için sürükleyin. Ses yüksekliğini ayarlamak için sürükleyin. UYARI: İşitme kaybını önleme hakkında önemli bilgiler için, Önemli güvenlik bilgileri sayfa 131 konusuna bakın. VideolarBölüm 12 Videolar 67 Videoyu izleme:  Filmler'e veya TV Şovları'na dokunun, sonra izlemek istediğiniz videoya dokunun. • Videoyu ekranı dolduracak ya da ekrana sığacak şekilde ölçekleme:   veya simgesine dokunun. Veya denetimleri göstermeden ölçeklemek için ekrana çift dokunun. • Baştan başlama:  Video bölümler içeriyorsa, oynatma çubuğunu ilerleme çubuğu boyunca tamamen sola sürükleyin. Hiçbir bölüm yoksa simgesine dokunun. • Sonraki veya önceki bölüme atlama (varsa):   veya simgesine dokunun. Uyumlu bir mikrofonlu kulaklık setinin ortasındaki düğmeye veya eşdeğerine iki kez (bir sonrakine atlama) veya üç kez de (bir öncekine atlama) basabilirsiniz. • Geri veya ileri sarma:   veya simgesini basılı tutun. • Farklı bir seslendirme dili seçme (varsa):   simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra Ses listesinden bir dil seçin. • Altyazıları gösterme veya gizleme (varsa):   simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra Altyazı listesinden bir dil seçin veya Kapalı seçeneğini seçin. • Gizli altyazıları gösterme veya gizleme (varsa):  Ayarlar > Videolar bölümüne gidin. • Videoyu televizyonda izleme:  Bakınız: iPad’i TV’ye veya başka bir aygıta bağlama sayfa 32. Bir videoyu silme:  Arşiv'inizde, bir filme dokunup sil düğmesi görününceye dek parmağınızı basılı tutun ve sonra simgesine dokunun. Birden fazla videoyu silmek istiyorsanız, Düzenle'ye dokunun. Önemli: Kiralanmış bir filmi iPad'den silerseniz, film kalıcı olarak silinir ve yeniden bilgisayara aktarılamaz. iPad'den bir videoyu (kiralanmış bir film hariç) sildiğinizde, o video bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes arşivinizden silinmez ve siz daha sonra videoyu yeniden eşzamanlayarak iPad'e aktarabilirsiniz. Videoyu yeniden iPad'le eşzamanlamak istemiyorsanız; iTunes’u, videoları eşzamanlamayacak şekilde ayarlayın. Bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16.13 68 İlk bakışta iPad, programa sadık kalmanızı kolaylaştırır. Takvimleri ayrı ayrı veya aynı anda birden fazlasını görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Görüntüler arasında geçiş yapın. Görüntüler arasında geçiş yapın. Etkinliği yeniden zamanlamak için sürükleyin. Etkinliği yeniden zamanlamak için sürükleyin. Bir görüntü seçin. Bir görüntü seçin. Davetleri görüntüleyin. Davetleri görüntüleyin. Farklı bir tarihe gidin. Farklı bir tarihe gidin. Etkinliği görüntüleme veya düzenleme: O etkinliğe dokunun. Şunları yapabilirsiniz: • Birincil ve ikincil uyarı ayarlama • Etkinliğin tarihini, saatini veya süresini değiştirme • Etkinliği farklı bir takvime taşıma • Diğer kişileri iCloud, Microsoft Exchange ve CalDAV takvimlerindeki etkinliklere katılmaya davet etme • Etkinliği silme Etkinliği basılı tutup yeni bir saate sürükleyerek veya tutma noktalarını düzenleyerek de taşıyabilirsiniz. TakvimBölüm 13 Takvim 69 Etkinlik ekleme:   simgesine dokunun ve etkinlik bilgilerini girin, sonra da Bitti düğmesine dokunun. • Yeni etkinlikler için saptanmış takvimi ayarlama: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > Saptanmış Takvim bölümüne gidin. • Doğum günleri ve etkinlikler için saptanmış uyarı süresi ayarlama: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > Saptanmış Uyarı Süresi bölümüne gidin. Etkinliklerde arama yapma: Liste’ye dokunun ve daha sonra arama alanına bir metin girin. Görüntülediğiniz takvimlerin başlıkları, davetlileri, konumları ve notları aranır. Ana Ekran’dan da Takvim etkinliklerinde arama yapabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Arama yapma sayfa 28. Takvim uyarılarının ses tonunu ayarlama: Ayarlar > Sesler > Takvim Uyarıları bölümüne gidin. Takvim dosyasındaki etkinlikleri içe aktarma: Mail’de bir .ics takvim dosyası alırsanız, iletiyi açın ve takvimin içerdiği tüm etkinlikleri içe aktarmak için takvim dosyasına dokunun. Ayrıca dosya bağlantısına dokunarak da web üzerinde yayımlanan bir .ics dosyasını içe aktarabilirsiniz. Bazı .ics dosyaları etkinlikleri takviminize eklemek yerine sizi takvime abone yapar. Bakınız: Birden fazla takvimle çalışma sayfa 69. iCloud hesabınız, Microsoft Exchange hesabınız veya desteklenen bir CalDAV hesabınız varsa, şirketinizdeki kişilerden toplantı davetleri alabilir ve bunlara yanıt verebilirsiniz. Diğer kişileri etkinliğe davet etme: Etkinliğe dokunun, Düzenle’ye dokunun, sonra Kişiler’den seçim yapmak için Davetliler’e dokunun. Bir davete yanıt verme:  Takvimdeki bir davete dokunun. Veya Etkinlik ekranını görüntülemek için simgesine dokunun, sonra bir davete dokunun. Düzenleyen kişi ve diğer davetliler hakkında bilgi görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Yorum eklerseniz (bazı takvim türlerinde kullanılamayabilir), yorumlarınızı düzenleyen kişi görebilir ama diğer katılımcılar göremez. Zamanı ayrılmış olarak işaretlemeden etkinliği kabul etme: Etkinliğe dokunun, sonra Uygunluk’a dokunup “serbest”i seçin. Etkinlik takviminizde kalır ama size davet gönderen diğer kişiler meşgul olduğunuzu görmez. Birden fazla takvimle çalışma Takvimleri ayrı ayrı veya aynı anda birden fazla takvimi görüntüleyebilirsiniz. iCloud, Google, Yahoo! veya iCalendar takvimlerinin yanı sıra Facebook etkinliklerine ve doğum günlerine de abone olabilirsiniz. iCloud, Google, Exchange veya Yahoo! takvimlerini açma: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, bir hesaba dokunun ve daha sonra Takvim’i açın. CalDAV hesabı ekleme:  Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, Hesap Ekle’ye dokunun ve daha sonra Diğer’e dokunun. Takvimler’in altında CalDAV Hesabı Ekle’ye dokunun. Facebook etkinliklerini görüntüleme: Ayarlar > Facebook bölümüne gidin, sonra Facebook hesabınıza giriş yapın ve Takvim’e erişimi açın. Görüntülenecek takvimleri seçme: Takvimler’e dokunun, sonra görüntülemek istediğiniz takvimleri seçmek üzere dokunun. Seçilen tüm takvimlere ait etkinlikler tek bir görüntüde gösterilir.Bölüm 13 Takvim 70 Doğum Günleri takvimini görüntüleme: Takvimler’e dokunun, daha sonra Kişiler’inizdeki doğum günlerini etkinliklerinize dahil etmek için Doğum Günleri’ne dokunun. Facebook hesabı ayarladıysanız, Facebook arkadaşlarınızın doğum günlerini de dahil edebilirsiniz. iCalendar (.ics) biçimini kullanan takvimlere abone olabilirsiniz. iCloud, Yahoo!, Google ve OS X’deki Takvim uygulaması da dahil olmak üzere birçok takvim tabanlı servis, takvim aboneliklerini destekler. Abone olunan takvimler salt okunurdur. Abone olunan takvimlerdeki etkinlikleri iPad üzerinde okuyabilir ama bu etkinlikleri düzenleyemez veya yeni etkinlikler yaratamazsınız. Takvime abone olma:  Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Hesap Ekle’ye dokunun. Diğer’e dokunun, sonra Abone Olunan Takvim Ekle’ye dokunun. Abone olunacak .ics dosyası için sunucuyu ve dosya adını girin. Ayrıca takvim bağlantısına dokunarak da web üzerinde yayımlanan bir iCalendar (.ics) takvimine abone olabilirsiniz. iCloud takvimlerini paylaşma iCloud takvimini diğer iCloud kullanıcılarıyla paylaşabilirsiniz. Bir takvimi paylaştığınızda diğer kişiler o takvimi görüntüleyebilir ve diğer kişilerin etkinlik eklemesine veya etkinlikleri değiştirmesine de olanak tanıyabilirsiniz. Herkesin görüntüleyebileceği salt okunur bir sürümü de paylaşabilirsiniz. iCloud takvimi yaratma: Takvimler’e dokunun, Düzenle’ye dokunun, sonra da Takvim Ekle’ye dokunun. iCloud takvimini paylaşma: Takvimler’e dokunun, Düzenle’ye dokunun, sonra da paylaşmak istediğiniz iCloud takvimine dokunun. Kişi Ekle’ye dokunun, sonra Kişiler’den birisini seçin. Bu kişi takvime katılmak için e-posta daveti alır, ama davetinizi kabul etmek için Apple kimliğine ve iCloud hesabına gereksinimi vardır. Paylaşılan takvimler için bildirimleri kapatma: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, sonra Paylaşma Uyarıları seçeneğini kapatın. Bir kişinin paylaşılan takvime erişimini değiştirme: Takvimler’e dokunun, Düzenle’ye dokunun, sonra takvimi paylaştığınız kişiye dokunun. Takvimi düzenleyebilme özelliğini kapatabilir, takvime katılması için yeniden davet gönderebilir veya paylaşmayı durdurabilirsiniz. Salt okunur takvimi herhangi biriyle paylaşma: Takvimler’e dokunun, Düzenle’ye dokunun, sonra da paylaşmak istediğiniz iCloud takvimine dokunun. Herkese Açık Takvim’i açın, sonra takvimin URL’sini kopyalamak veya göndermek için Bağlantıyı Paylaş’a dokunun. Herhangi biri iOS’deki veya OS X’deki Takvim gibi uyumlu bir uygulamayı kullanarak takviminize abone olmak için URL’yi kullanabilir. Takvim ayarları Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümünde Takvim’i ve takvim hesaplarınızı etkileyen birçok ayar vardır. Bunlar arasında aşağıdakiler sayılabilir: • Geçmiş etkinlikleri eşzamanlama (gelecekteki etkinlikler her zaman eşzamanlanır) • Yeni toplantı davetleri için çalınan uyarı sesleri • Tarihleri ve saatleri farklı bir saat dilimi kullanarak göstermek için takvim saat dilimi desteği14 71 İlk bakışta iPad; kişisel, iş veya kurumsal hesaplarınızdaki kişi listelerinize kolayca erişmenizi ve onları düzenlemenizi sağlar. Harita'da gösterin. Harita'da gösterin. Bilgileri ekleyin veya değiştirin. Bilgileri ekleyin veya değiştirin. Kişileri bulun. Kişileri bulun. Bilgilerim kartınızı ayarlama: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, daha sonra Bilgilerim’e dokunun ve adınızı ve bilgilerinizi içeren kişi kartını seçin. Bilgilerim kartı Siri ve diğer uygulamalar tarafından kullanılır. Siri’nin bilmesini istediğiniz ilişkileri tanımlamak için ilgili kişiler alanlarını kullanın; böylece “find my sister” gibi ifadeleri söyleyebilirsiniz. Kişilerde arama yapma:  Kişi listesinin en üstündeki arama alanına dokunun ve arama metninizi girin. Ana Ekran’dan da kişilerinizde arama yapabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Arama yapma sayfa 28. Kişiyi paylaşma: Kişiye dokunun, daha sonra Kişiyi Paylaş’a dokunun. Kişi bilgilerini e-posta veya mesaj ile gönderebilirsiniz. Kişi ekleme:   simgesine dokunun. Microsoft Exchange Genel Adres Listesi gibi yalnızca görüntülediğiniz bir dizine kişi ekleyemezsiniz. Hızlı Arama listenize kişi ekleme: Bir kişi seçin, sonra aşağıya kaydırın ve Hızlı Arama düğmesine dokunun. Hızlı Arama listesi Rahatsız Etme tarafından kullanılır. Bakınız: Rahatsız Etme ve Bildirimler sayfa 119. Hızlı Arama listenizi FaceTime uygulamasında görüntüleyebilir ve düzenleyebilirsiniz. Kişiyi silme: Bir kişi seçin ve daha sonra Düzenle düğmesine dokunun. Aşağıya kaydırın ve Kişiyi Sil düğmesine dokunun. KişilerBölüm 14 Kişiler 72 Kişiyi düzenleme: Bir kişi seçip Düzenle düğmesine dokunun. Şunları yapabilirsiniz: • Yeni bir alan ekleme: simgesine dokunun, daha sonra alan için bir etiket seçin veya girin. • Alan etiketini değiştirme: Etikete dokunun ve farklı birini seçin. Yeni bir alan eklemek için, Özel Etiket Ekle düğmesine dokunun. • Kişinin zil sesini veya SMS tonunu değiştirme: Zil sesi veya SMS tonu alanına dokunun ve daha sonra yeni bir ses seçin. Kişiler için saptanmış ses tonunu değiştirmek istiyorsanız Ayarlar > Sesler bölümüne gidin. • Kişiye fotoğraf atama: Fotoğraf Ekle düğmesine dokunun. Kamera ile fotoğraf çekebilir veya var olan bir fotoğrafı kullanabilirsiniz. • Twitter’ı kullanarak kişi bilgilerini güncelleme: Ayarlar > Twitter > Kişileri Güncelle bölümüne gidin. Kişiler e-posta adresleri kullanılarak eşleştirilir. İzlediğiniz arkadaşlarınızın kişi kartları Twitter kullanıcı adları ve fotoğrafları ile güncellenir. • Facebook’u kullanarak kişi bilgilerini güncelleme: Ayarlar > Facebook > Kişileri Güncelle bölümüne gidin. Kişiler e-posta adresleri kullanılarak eşleştirilir. Arkadaş listenizdeki her eşleşmeye ait kişi kartı o kişinin Facebook kullanıcı adı ve fotoğrafı ile güncellenir. • Telefon numarasına bir duraklama girme: simgesine ve sonra da Duraklat veya Beklet düğmesine dokunun. Her bir duraklatma iki saniye sürer. Her bir bekletme, siz Çevir’e yeniden dokununcaya dek numaranın çevrilmesini durdurur. Örneğin iPhone’da Kişiler’i kullanırken bir dahili hattın veya parolanın çevrilmesini otomatikleştirmek için bunları kullanın. Kişi ekleme Kişileri şu şekillerde ekleyebilirsiniz: • iCloud kişilerinizi kullanma: Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin ve sonra Kişiler’i açın. • Facebook arkadaşlarınızı içe aktarma: Ayarlar > Facebook bölümüne gidin, sonra “Bu Uygulamalar Hesabınızı Kullanabilsin” listesinde Kişiler seçeneğini açın. Bu, Kişiler’de bir Facebook grubu yaratır. • Microsoft Exchange Genel Adres Listesi’ne erişme: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, daha sonra Exchange hesabınıza dokunun ve Kişiler seçeneğini açın. • İş veya okul rehberlerine erişmek için LDAP veya CardDAV hesabı ayarlama: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > Hesap Ekle > Diğer bölümüne gidin. Daha sonra “LDAP Hesabı Ekle” veya “CardDAV Hesabı Ekle” düğmesine dokunun ve hesap bilgilerini girin. • Kişileri bilgisayarınızdan, Yahoo! veya Google hesabınızdan eşzamanlayarak aktarma: Bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da, aygıtın bilgi bölümünde kişi eşzamanlamayı açın. Bilgi için iTunes Yardım’a bakın. • Kişileri vCard’dan aktarma: E-postadaki veya mesajdaki ya da web sayfasındaki .vcf ilişiğine dokunun. GAL, CardDAV veya LDAP sunucusunda arama yapma: Gruplar’a dokunun, aramak istediğiniz dizine dokunun, sonra da arama metninizi girin. GAL, LDAP veya CardDAV sunucusundaki kişi bilgilerini kaydetme: Eklemek istediğiniz kişiyi aratın ve daha sonra Kişi Ekle’ye dokunun. Grubu gösterme veya gizleme: Gruplar’a dokunun, sonra görmek istediğiniz grupları seçin. Bu düğme yalnızca birden fazla kişiler kaynağınız varsa görünür.Bölüm 14 Kişiler 73 Birden fazla kaynaktan gelen kişileriniz olduğunda, aynı kişi için birden fazla giriş olabilir. Kişiler (Tümü) listesinde gereksiz bilgilerin görünmesini engellemek için, farklı kaynaklardan gelen aynı ada sahip kişiler birbirine bağlanır ve listenizde tek bir birleşik kişi olarak görüntülenir. Birleşik kişi bilgilerini görüntülediğinizde, ekranın en üstündeki başlık bölümünde Birleşik Bilgi ifadesi görünür. Bir kişiyi bağlama: Kişiyi düzenleyin, Düzenle'ye dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun ve bir kişi seçin. Bağlı kişiler birleştirilmezler. Birleşik kişi için bir bilgiyi değiştirirseniz veya bilgi eklerseniz, değişiklikler o bilginin mevcut olduğu her bir kaynak hesaba kopyalanır. Farklı adlara veya soyadlara sahip kişileri bağlarsanız, o kartlardaki adlar değişmez ama birleşik kartta yalnızca bir ad görünür. Birleşik kartı görüntülerken hangi adın görüneceğini seçmek için, tercih ettiğiniz ada sahip bağlı karta dokunun ve daha sonra Birleştirilmiş Kart İçin Bu Adı Kullan düğmesine dokunun. Kaynak hesaptaki kişi bilgilerini görüntüleme: Kaynak hesaplardan birine dokunun. Kişinin bağlantısını silme: Düzenle’ye dokunun, simgesine dokunun ve sonra Bağlantıyı Sil’e dokunun. Kişiler ayarları Kişiler ayarlarını değiştirmek için, Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin. Kullanılabilir seçeneklerle: • Kişilerin sıralama düzenini değiştirebilirsiniz • Kişileri ada veya soyada göre görüntüleyebilirsiniz • Yeni kişiler için saptanmış bir hesap ayarlayabilirsiniz • Bilgilerim kartınızı ayarlama15 74 İlk bakışta Notu e-postayla gönderin veya yazdırın. Notu e-postayla gönderin veya yazdırın. Notu silin. Notu silin. Görüntülemek için nota dokunun. Görüntülemek için nota dokunun. Bir not ekleyin. Bir not ekleyin. Bir önceki veya bir sonraki notu görüntüleyin. Bir önceki veya bir sonraki notu görüntüleyin. Düzenlemek için nota dokunun. Düzenlemek için nota dokunun. Notlarınızı iOS aygıtlarınızda ve Mac bilgisayarlarınızda güncel tutmak için iCloud’u kullanma:   • iCloud için me.com veya mac.com e-posta adresi kullanıyorsanız:  Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin ve Notlar’ı açın. • iCloud için Gmail veya başka bir IMAP hesabı kullanıyorsanız:  Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, sonra hesap için Notlar seçeneğini açın. Yeni notlar için saptanmış hesabı seçme:  Ayarlar > Notlar bölümüne gidin. Belirli bir hesapta not yaratma:  Hesaplar’a dokunun ve hesabı seçin, daha sonra notu yaratmak için simgesine dokunun. Hesaplar düğmesini görmüyorsanız, önce Notlar düğmesine dokunun. Yalnızca belirli bir hesaptaki notları görme:  Hesaplar’a dokunun ve hesabı seçin. Hesaplar düğmesini görmüyorsanız, önce Notlar’a dokunun. Notlar listesini görüntülerken bir notu silme:  Listedeki notun üzerinde parmağınızı sola veya sağa doğru kaydırın. NotlarBölüm 15 Notlar 75 Notlarda arama yapma:  Notlar listesini görüntülerken arama alanını göstermek için listenin en üstüne kaydırın. Alana dokunun ve aradığınız ifadeyi yazın. Ana Ekran’dan da notlarda arama yapabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Arama yapma sayfa 28. Notu yazdırma veya e-posta ile gönderme:  Notu okurken simgesine dokunun. Notu e-posta ile gönderebilmek için, iPad’in e-posta için ayarlanmış olması gerekir. Bakınız: Mail hesaplarını ve diğer hesapları ayarlama sayfa 14. Fontu değiştirme:  Ayarlar > Notlar bölümüne gidin.16 76 Anımsatıcılar yapmanız gereken her şeyi takip etmenizi sağlar. Tamamlanmış olarak işaretleyin. Tamamlanmış olarak işaretleyin. Belirli bir tarihte süresi dolacak öğeleri görüntüleyin. Belirli bir tarihte süresi dolacak öğeleri görüntüleyin. Listeler arasında geçiş yapın. Listeler arasında geçiş yapın. Öğe ekleyin. Öğe ekleyin. Anımsatıcı ayrıntılarını görme:  Anımsatıcıya dokunun. Şunları yapabilirsiniz: • Değiştirebilir veya silebilirsiniz • Hedeflenen tarihi ayarlayabilirsiniz • Öncelik ayarlayabilirsiniz • Not ekleyebilirsiniz • Onu farklı bir listeye taşıyabilirsiniz Bazı iPad Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerinde, Anımsatıcılar, bir konuma vardığınızda veya bir konumdan ayrıldığınızda sizi uyarabilir. Konum uyarısı ekleme: Anımsatıcı girerken simgesine dokunun, sonra “Belirli Bir Konumda Anımsat”ı açın. Farklı bir konum kullanmak için şu anki konumunuza dokunun. Listedeki konumlar Kişiler uygulamasındaki kişisel bilgi kartınızda bulunan adresleri (eklediğiniz ev ve iş adresleri gibi) içerir. Farklı bir adres kullanmak için Bir Adres Girin’e dokunun. Not: Konum anımsatıcıları yalnızca yeni iPad Wi-Fi + hücresel veri modellerinde kullanılabilir. Microsoft Exchange ve Outlook hesaplarında anımsatıcılar için konum ayarlayamazsınız. AnımsatıcılarBölüm 16 Anımsatıcılar 77 Anımsatıcılarınızda arama yapma: Arama alanına bir sözcük veya ifade girin. Anımsatıcılar ada göre aranır. Anımsatıcıları bulmak veya eklemek için Siri’yi de kullanabilirsiniz. Anımsatıcı bildirimlerini kapatma: Ayarlar > Bildirimler bölümüne gidin. Bilgi için, bakınız: Rahatsız Etme ve Bildirimler sayfa 119. Bildirimler için çalınan ses tonunu ayarlama: Ayarlar > Sesler bölümüne gidin. Anımsatıcılarınızı diğer aygıtlarda güncel tutma: Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin ve sonra Anımsatıcılar’ı açın. OS X Mountain Lion’da anımsatıcıları güncel tutmak için Mac’inizde de iCloud’u açın. Exchange gibi diğer hesap türlerinden bazıları da Anımsatıcılar’ı destekler. Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, sonra kullanmak istediğiniz hesaplar için Anımsatıcılar’ı açın. Yeni anımsatıcılar için saptanmış listeyi ayarlama: Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Anımsatıcılar’ın altında Saptanmış Liste’ye dokunun.17 78 Dünyanın diğer büyük şehirlerindeki ve saat dilimlerindeki zamanı göstermek için saat ekleyebilirsiniz. Saat ekleyin. Saat ekleyin. Saatleri görüntüleyin, alarm ayarlayın, etkinlik zamanlayın veya sayacı ayarlayın. Saatleri görüntüleyin, alarm ayarlayın, etkinlik zamanlayın veya sayacı ayarlayın. Saatleri silin veya sırasını değiştirin. Saatleri silin veya sırasını değiştirin. Saat ekleme:  Ekle’ye dokunun, sonra şehrin adını yazın veya listeden bir şehir seçin. Aradığınız şehri görmüyorsanız, aynı saat dilimindeki büyük bir şehri deneyin. Saati tam ekran gösterme:  Saate dokunduğunuzda saat ekranı doldurur. Tüm saatlerinizi görüntülemek için Dünya Saati'ne dokunun. Saatleri düzenleme:  Düzenle’ye dokunun, sonra taşımak için simgesini sürükleyin veya silmek için simgesine dokunun. Alarm ayarlama:  Alarm’a dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun. Alarmı değiştirme:  Düzenle’ye dokunun, sonra ayarları değiştirmek için simgesine dokunun veya silmek için simgesine dokunun. Uyku için sayacı ayarlama:  Sayaç'a dokunun, süreyi seçin, Sesler'e dokunun, Çalmayı Durdur'u seçin, Ayarla'ya dokunun ve sonra Başlat'a dokunun. Saat18 79 Konumları bulma UYARI: Güvenli navigasyon ve sürüş sırasında dikkatinizin dağılmasından kaçınma hakkında önemli bilgiler için, Önemli güvenlik bilgileri sayfa 131 konusuna bakın. Daha fazla bilgi alın. Daha fazla bilgi alın. Bilgi başlığını görüntülemek için iğneye dokunun. Bilgi başlığını görüntülemek için iğneye dokunun. Yazdırın, trafiği gösterin, sonuçları listeleyin veya görüntüyü seçin. Yazdırın, trafiği gösterin, sonuçları listeleyin veya görüntüyü seçin. Yol tarifi alın. Yol tarifi alın. Bir arama girin. Bir arama girin. Şu anki konumunuzu gösterin. Şu anki konumunuzu gösterin. Sürüş için hızlı yol tarifi Sürüş için hızlı yol tarifi Büyütmek için çift dokunun; küçültmek için iki parmağınızla dokunun. Veya kıstırıp açın. Büyütmek için çift dokunun; küçültmek için iki parmağınızla dokunun. Veya kıstırıp açın. Şu anki konum Şu anki konum Kuş bakışı veya Flyover (standart görüntüde 3B) Kuş bakışı veya Flyover (standart görüntüde 3B) Önemli: Harita, yol tarifleri, 3B, kuş bakışı (Flyover) ve konuma dayalı uygulamalar veri servislerine bağlıdır. Bu veri servisleri değişebilir ve tüm bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir. Bu yüzden de haritalar, yol tarifleri, 3B, kuş bakışı (Flyover) veya konuma dayalı bilgiler kullanılamayabilir, doğru olmayabilir veya eksik olabilir. iPad’da verilen bilgileri çevrenizle karşılaştırın ve uyuşmazlıkları çözmek için tabela ve işaretlere uyun. Bazı Harita özellikleri Konum Servisleri’ni gerektirir. Bakınız: Gizlilik sayfa 125. Bir konumu bulma:  Arama alanına dokunun ve daha sonra bir adres veya aşağıdakiler gibi başka bir bilgi yazın: • Kavşak ("8. ve market") • Bölge ("greenwich köyü") HaritaBölüm 18 Harita 80 • Referans noktası (“guggenheim”) • Posta kodu • İşletme (“sinemalar”, “restaurant san francisco ca,” “apple inc new york”) Veya arama alanının altındaki listede bulunan önerilerden birine dokunun. Haritada dolaşma: • Yukarıya, aşağıya, sola veya sağa doğru taşıma:  Ekranı sürükleyin. • Haritayı döndürme:  İki parmağınızı ekranda döndürün. Sağ üst köşede harita yönünü gösteren bir pusula görünür. • Kuzeye bakan yöne dönme:   simgesine dokunun. Kişinin veya yer imi konmuş ya da en son yapılan aramanın konumunu bulma:   simgesine dokunun. Bir konum hakkında bilgi alma ve paylaşma:  Bilgi başlığını görüntülemek için iğneye dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun. Kullanabilir olduğunda, Yelp’den yorumlar ve fotoğraflar alabilirsiniz. Ayrıca yol tarifi alabilir, işletmeyle iletişim kurabilir, ana sayfasını ziyaret edebilir, işletmeyi kişilerinize ekleyebilir, konumu paylaşabilir veya konuma yer imi koyabilirsiniz. • Yorumları okuma:  Yorumlar’a dokunun. Diğer Yelp özelliklerini kullanmak için, yorumların altındaki düğmelere dokunun. • Fotoğrafları görme:  Fotoğraflar’a dokunun. • Bir konumu e-posta, mesaj veya Tweet ile gönderme ya da Facebook’ta yayımlama:  Konumu Paylaş düğmesine dokunun. Tweet göndermek veya Facebook’ta yayımlamak için, hesaplarınıza giriş yapmış olmanız gerekir. Bakınız: Paylaşma sayfa 30. Konumu işaretlemek için iğneyi kullanma: Haritaya dokunun ve iğne görününceye dek parmağınızı basılı tutun. Standart, hibrit veya uydu görüntüsünü seçme:  Sağ alt köşeye dokunun. Bir sorun bildirme:  Sağ alt köşeye dokunun. Yol tarifi alma Sürüş için yol tarifi alma: simgesine dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun, başlangıç ve bitiş konumlarını girin ve Yol düğmesine dokunun. Veya kullanılabilir olduğunda listeden bir konum veya yol seçin. Birden fazla yol görünüyorsa, kullanmak istediğiniz yola dokunun. • Adım adım yol tariflerini duyma (iPad Wi-Fi + hücresel):  Başlat’a dokunun. Harita ilerleyişinizi izler ve hedefinize ulaşmanız için adım adım yol tarifini seslendirir. Denetimleri göstermek veya gizlemek için ekrana dokunun. iPad otomatik olarak kilitlenirse, Harita ekranda kalır ve yönergeleri bildirmeye devam eder. Başka bir uygulamayı açabilir ve adım adım yol tarifi almaya devam edebilirsiniz. Harita’ya dönmek için, ekranın en üstündeki başlığa dokunun. • Adım adım yol tariflerini görüntüleme (iPad Wi-Fi + hücresel):  Başlat’a dokunun ve bir sonraki yönergeyi görmek için sola kaydırın. • Genel yol bilgisine dönme:  Genel Bilgi düğmesine dokunun. • Yol tariflerini liste olarak görüntüleme:  Genel Bilgi ekranında simgesine dokunun. • Adım adım yol tarifini durdurma:  Bitir düğmesine dokunun.Bölüm 18 Harita 81 O anki konumunuzdan başka bir konuma hızlı yol tarifi alma:  Hedefinizin başlığındaki simgesine dokunun, sonra Buraya Yol Tarifi’ne dokunun. Yürüme için yol tarifi alma:   simgesine dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun, başlangıç ve bitiş konumlarını girin ve Başlat düğmesine dokunun. Veya kullanılabilir olduğunda listeden bir konum veya yol seçin. Başlat’a dokunun ve bir sonraki yönergeyi görmek için sola kaydırın. Toplu taşıma için yol tarifi alma:   simgesine dokunun, başlangıç ve bitiş konumlarını girin, simgesine dokunun, sonra Başlat düğmesine dokunun. Veya kullanılabilir olduğunda listeden bir konum veya yol seçin. Kullanmak istediğiniz toplu taşıma servisi için yönlendirme uygulamalarını indirin ve açın. Trafik durumunu gösterme: Ekranın sağ alt köşesine dokunun, sonra Trafiği Göster’e dokunun. Turuncu noktalar yavaşlayan trafiği ve kırmızı noktalar dur-kalk trafiği gösterir. Olay raporunu görmek için, işarete dokunun. 3B ve kuş bakışı (Flyover) 3. nesil iPad veya daha yenisinde dünyanın birçok şehrini üç boyutlu olarak görüntülemek için 3B (standart görüntü) veya Kuşbakışı (Flyover, uydu veya hibrit görüntü) özelliklerini kullanın. Her zamanki gibi dolaşabilir ve binaları görmek için görüntüyü büyütebilirsiniz. Kamera açısını da ayarlayabilirsiniz. Transamerica Pyramid binası, Transamerica Corporation’ın kayıtlı servis markasıdır. Transamerica Pyramid binası, Transamerica Corporation’ın kayıtlı servis markasıdır. 3B veya kuş bakışı (Flyover) görüntüyü kullanma: veya etkin hale gelene kadar büyütün, sonra düğmeye dokunun. Veya iki parmağınızla yukarı sürükleyin. Sağ alt köşeye dokunarak ve görüntüleri değiştirerek 3B ile kuş bakışı (Flyover) arasında geçiş yapabilirsiniz. Kamera açısını ayarlama:  İki parmağınızla yukarı veya aşağı sürükleyin. Harita ayarları Harita seçeneklerini ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Harita bölümüne gidin. Ayarlar arasında şunlar bulunur: • Navigasyon ses yüksekliği (iPad Wi-Fi + hücresel) • Mil veya kilometre olarak mesafe • Etiketlerin dili ve büyüklüğü19 82 Müzikleri alma Müzikleri ve diğer ses içeriklerini iPad üzerine alma: • iTunes Store’dan satın alma ve indirme: Müzik uygulamasında Mağaza’ya dokunun. Bakınız: Bölüm 20, iTunes Store, sayfa 88. • Diğer iOS aygıtlarınızda ve bilgisayarlarınızda satın alınan müzikleri otomatik olarak indirme: Bakınız: iCloud’u kullanma sayfa 15. • İçerikleri bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes ile eşzamanlama: Bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16. • Müzik arşivinizi iCloud’da saklamak için iTunes Match’i kullanma: Bakınız: iTunes Match sayfa 86. Müzik çalma UYARI: İşitme kaybını önleme hakkında önemli bilgiler için, Önemli güvenlik bilgileri sayfa 131 konusuna bakın. Sesleri; yerleşik hoparlörden, kulaklık jakına takılmış olan kulaklıklardan veya iPad ile eşlenmiş olan kablosuz Bluetooth stereo kulaklıklardan dinleyebilirsiniz. Kulaklık bağlıyken veya eşlenmiş durumdayken hoparlörden ses gelmez. Bir izi çalma:  Listeye, parçaya, sanatçıya veya başka bir kategoriye göre tarayın ve daha sonra ize dokunun. Çalma denetimleri ekranın en üst kısmında görünür. • Ek tarama düğmelerini görme: Fazlası düğmesine dokunun. • Müzik parçasındaki herhangi bir noktaya atlama: Oynatma çubuğunu ilerleme çubuğu boyunca sürükleyin. Sarma hızını yavaşlatmak için parmağınızı aşağı kaydırın. Şu An Çalınan ekranını görüntüleme:  Ekranın en üstünde albüm kapağının küçük resmine dokunun. • Denetimleri görüntüleme: Ekrana dokunun. • Müzik parçalarını kapak resmini kullanarak tarama: Sola veya sağa doğru kaydırın. Müzik parçaları otomatik olarak çalınmaya başlar. MüzikBölüm 19 Müzik 83 • O anki müzik parçasını içeren albümdeki tüm müzik parçalarını görme:  simgesine dokunun. Bir müzik parçasını çalmak için ona dokunun. Şu An Çalınan ekranına dönmek için simgesine tekrar dokunun. • Parçalara beğeni düzeyi atama: İz listesi görüntüsünde, yıldız sayısını ayarlamak için listenin üstündeki nokta satırına dokunun. iTunes’da akıllı listeler yaratırken beğeni düzeylerini kullanabilirsiniz. İleriye veya geriye sarmak için sürükleyin. İleriye veya geriye sarmak için sürükleyin. Ses yüksekliğini değiştirin. Ses yüksekliğini değiştirin. Geri Geri Müzikleri tarayın. Müzikleri tarayın. İz listesi İz listesi Şu an çalınan ve tarama arasında geçiş yapın. Şu an çalınan ve tarama arasında geçiş yapın. Genius listesi oluşturun. Genius listesi oluşturun. Çal/Duraklat Çal/Duraklat Yinele Yinele Karıştır Karıştır AirPlay AirPlay Müziklerde (başlıklar, sanatçılar, albümler ve besteciler) arama yapma:  Tarama yaparken, ekranın sağ alt köşesindeki arama alanına metin girin. Ana Ekran’dan da ses içeriklerinde arama yapabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Arama yapma sayfa 28. Başka bir uygulamadayken ses denetimlerini görüntüleme: Ana Ekran düğmesine iki kez basın, sonra ekranın alt kısmını sağa doğru kaydırın. Şu anki ses uygulaması; açmak için dokunun. Şu anki ses uygulaması; açmak için dokunun. Ekran kilitliyken ses denetimlerini görüntüleme: Ana Ekran düğmesine iki kez basın. Müzikleri AirPlay hoparlörlerde veya Apple TV’de çalma: simgesine dokunun. Bakınız: AirPlay sayfa 32.Bölüm 19 Müzik 84 Podcast’ler ve sesli kitaplar Çalmaya başladığınızda podcast ve sesli kitap denetimleri Şu An Çalınan ekranında görünür. Not: Podcast’ler uygulaması App Store’da ücretsiz olarak bulunur. Bakınız: Bölüm 24, Podcast’ler, sayfa 98. Podcast’ler uygulamasını yüklerseniz, podcast içeriği ve denetimleri Müzik uygulamasından silinir. Podcast çalma hızını ayarlama: simgesine dokunun. Hızı değiştirmek için yeniden dokunun. • = İki kat hızda çal. • = Yarım hızda çal. • = Normal hızda çal. Podcast’in son 15 saniyesini yinele simgesine dokunun. Daha fazla podcast bölümünü alma: Podcast’ler öğesine dokunun (Podcast’ler öğesi görünmüyorsa önce Fazlası düğmesine dokunun), daha sonra kullanılabilir bölümleri görmek için bir podcast’e dokunun. Listeler Liste yaratma:  Listeler’i görüntüleyin, ekranın üst kısmındaki Yeni düğmesine dokunun, sonra bir başlık girin ve kaydedin. Dahil edilecek parçaları ve videoları seçin, sonra Bitti’ye dokunun. Listeyi düzenleme:  Listeler'i görüntüleyin, listeyi seçin, sonra Düzenle düğmesine dokunun. • Daha fazla parça ekleme: Parça Ekle düğmesine dokunun. • Parçayı silme: simgesine dokunun. Bir müzik parçasını listeden sildiğinizde, o parça iPad’dan silinmez. • Parçanın sırasını değiştirme: simgesini sürükleyin. Yeni ve değiştirilen listeler, iPad’i bilgisayarınızla bir sonraki eşzamanlayışınızda veya iTunes Match abonesi iseniz iCloud yoluyla iTunes arşivinize kopyalanır. Bir listeyi silme: Listeler'de listeyi basılı tutun, sonra simgesine dokunun. Parçayı iPad’den silme: Parçalar’da, parçanın üzerinde parmağınızı kaydırın ve daha sonra Sil’e dokunun. Müzik parçası iPad’den silinir ama Mac’inizdeki veya PC’nizdeki iTunes arşivinizden ya da iCloud’dan silinmez. iTunes Match açıkken, müzikleri silemezsiniz. Alan gerektiğinde, iTunes Match sizin için en eskilerden ve en az çalınan parçalardan başlayarak müzikleri siler. Genius Genius listesi, arşivinizdeki birbiriyle uyumlu müzik parçalarının bir koleksiyonudur. Genius ücretsiz bir servistir ama Apple kimliği gerektirir. Genius Karması, karmayı her dinleyişinizde arşivinizden yeniden yaratılan ve aynı müzik türündeki parçalardan oluşan bir seçimdir. iPad’de Genius’u kullanma: Bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da Genius’u açın ve daha sonra iPad’i iTunes ile eşzamanlayın. Genius Karmaları, müziklerinizi elle yönetmediğiniz sürece otomatik olarak eşzamanlanır. Genius listelerini de eşzamanlayabilirsiniz.Bölüm 19 Müzik 85 Genius Karması'nı çalma:  Listeler'e dokunun, sonra listelerin üst kısmındaki Genius Karmalarından birine dokunun. Genius listesi oluşturma:  Bir müzik parçasını çalın, sonra ekranın üst kısmındaki simgesine dokunun. Genius Listesi, listelerinize eklenir. Genius listesini çalma: Listeye dokunun. • Listeyi yenileme: Yenile’ye dokunun. • Listeyi kaydetme: Kaydet’e dokunun. Liste, seçtiğiniz prçanın başlığıyla kaydedilir ve simgesiyle işaretlenir. Farklı bir parçayı kullanarak Genius listesini değiştirme: Bir müzik parçasını çalın ve sonra simgesine dokunun. Kaydedilmiş bir Genius listesini düzenleme: Listeye dokunun, daha sonra Düzenle düğmesine dokunun. • Parçayı silme: simgesine dokunun. • Parçanın sırasını değiştirme: simgesini sürükleyin. Kaydedilmiş bir Genius listesini silme: Listeye dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun ve sonra simgesine dokunun. iPad üzerinde yaratılan Genius listeleri iTunes ile eşzamanladığınızda bilgisayarınıza kopyalanır. Not: Genius listesi bir kez eşzamanlanarak iTunes’a aktarıldıktan sonra, onu doğrudan iPad’dan silemezsiniz. Liste adını düzenlemek, eşzamanlanmasını durdurmak veya listeyi silmek için iTunes’u kullanın. Siri Müzik çalmayı denetlemek için Siri’yi kullanabilirsiniz (3. nesil iPad veya daha yenisi). Bakınız: Bölüm 4, Siri, sayfa 37. Müzik çalmak için Siri'yi kullanma: Ana Ekran düğmesini basılı tutun. • Müzikleri çalma veya duraklatma: İngilizce “play” veya “play music” ifadelerini söyleyin. Duraklatmak için, İngilizce “pause,” “pause music” veya “stop” ifadelerini söyleyin. İngilizce “next song” veya “previous song” gibi ifadeler de söyleyebilirsiniz. • Bir albümü, sanatçıyı veya listeyi çalma: İngilizce “play” ifadesini ve daha sonra “album”, “artist” veya “playlist” ifadesini söyleyip albüm, sanatçı veya liste adını söyleyin. • O anki listeyi karıştırma: İngilizce “shuffle” ifadesini söyleyin. • O anki parça hakkında daha fazla bilgi edinme: İngilizce “what’s playing”, “who sings this song” veya “who is this song by” ifadelerini söyleyin. • Benzer parçaları çalmak amacıyla Genius’u kullanma: İngilizce “Genius” veya “play more songs like this” ifadelerini söyleyin.Bölüm 19 Müzik 86 iTunes Match iTunes Match, CD’lerden içe aktarılan parçalar da dahil olmak üzere tüm müzik arşivinizi iCloud’da saklar; iPad’de, diğer iOS aygıtlarınızda ve bilgisayarlarınızda koleksiyonlarınızın keyfini çıkarmanızı sağlar. iTunes Match, ücretli bir abonelik ile kullanılabilir. Not: iTunes Match bazı bölgelerde kullanılamaz. Ayarlar > Müzik > Hücresel Veri’yi Kullan açıksa, hücresel veri ücretleri uygulanabilir. iTunes Match’e abone olma:  Bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da Mağaza > iTunes ile Eşleştirme’yi Aç bölümüne gidin ve sonra Abone Ol düğmesini tıklayın. Abone olduktan sonra iTunes; müziklerinizi, listelerinizi ve Genius Karmaları'nızı iCloud'a ekler. iTunes Store’da bulunan müziklerle eşleşen parçalarınız, otomatik olarak iCloud'da kullanılabilir olur. Diğer parçalar karşıya yüklenir. Eşleşen parçaları iTunes Plus kalitesine (256 kb/sn DRM korumasız AAC) varan kalitelerde indirebilir ve çalabilirsiniz (özgün parçalarınız daha düşük kalitede olsa bile). Daha fazla bilgi için, www.apple.com/icloud/features adresine gidin. iTunes Match’i açma: Ayarlar > Müzik bölümüne gidin. iTunes Match'in açılması, eşzamanlanan müzikleri iPad'dan siler ve Genius Karmaları ile Genius Listeleri'ni etkisizleştirir. Not: Hücresel Veri seçeneği açıksa, hücresel veri ücretleri uygulanabilir. Parçalar, siz onları çalarken iPad’e indirilir. Parçaları elle de indirebilirsiniz. iPad’e albüm indirme:  Tararken Albümler’e dokunun, bir albüme dokunun ve sonra simgesine dokunun. Yalnızca iCloud’dan indirilen müzikleri gösterme:  Ayarlar > Müzik bölümüne gidin, Tüm Müzikleri Göster’i kapatın (yalnızca iTunes Match açıkken kullanılabilir). iTunes Match’i veya Otomatik İndirmeler’i kullanarak aygıtlarınızı yönetme:  Bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da Mağaza > Hesabımı Görüntüle’ye gidin. Giriş yapın, sonra “Buluttaki iTunes” bölümünde Aygıtları Yönet’i tıklayın. Ev Paylaşımı Ev Paylaşımı, Mac’inizdeki veya PC’nizdeki müzikleri, filmleri ve TV şovlarını iPhone üzerinde çalmanızı veya oynatmanızı sağlar. iPad’in ve bilgisayarınızın aynı Wi-Fi ağında olması gerekir. Not: Ev Paylaşımı, www.apple.com/tr/itunes/download adresinden edinilebilecek iTunes 10.2 veya daha yenisini gerektirir. Sayısal kitapçıklar ve iTunes Extras gibi bonus içerikler paylaşılamaz. Bilgisayarınızın iTunes arşivindeki müzikleri iPad üzerinde çalma: 1 Bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da, İleri Düzey > Ev Paylaşımı’nı Aç komutunu seçin. Oturum açın ve daha sonra Ev Paylaşımı Yarat düğmesini tıklayın. 2 iPad üzerinde Ayarlar > Müzik bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra aynı Apple kimliğini ve parolasını kullanarak Ev Paylaşımı’nda oturum açın.. 3 Müzik’te, Fazlası düğmesine dokunun, daha sonra Paylaşılan düğmesine dokunun ve bilgisayarınızdaki arşivi seçin. iPad’deki içeriklere dönme: Paylaşılan’a dokunun ve iPad seçeneğini seçin.Bölüm 19 Müzik 87 Müzik ayarları Aşağıdakiler de dahil olmak üzere Müzik seçeneklerini ayarlamak için Ayarlar > Müzik bölümüne gidin: • Ses Denetimi (ses içeriğinizin ses yüksekliği düzeyini normalleştirmek için) • Dengeleme (EQ) Not: EQ, mikrofonlu kulaklık seti jakı ve AirPlay de dahil olmak üzere tüm ses çıkışlarını etkiler. EQ ayarları genel olarak yalnızca Müzik uygulamasında çalınan müziklere uygulanır. Ancak, Geç Vakit ayarı tüm ses çıkışlarına uygulanır (video ve müzik). Geç Vakit, yüksek pasajların sesini azaltıp sessiz pasajların sesini yükselterek ses çıkışının dinamik aralığını sıkıştırır. Bu ayarı, örneğin uçakta veya diğer bazı gürültülü ortamlarda müzik dinlerken kullanmak isteyebilirsiniz. • Albüm sanatçısına göre gruplama • iTunes Match • Ev Paylaşımı Ses sınırını ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Müzik > Ses Sınırı bölümüne gidin, sonra ses yüksekliği sürgüsünü ayarlayın. Ses sınırı değişikliklerini sınırlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Sınırlamalar > Ses Sınırı bölümüne gidin, sonra Değişikliğe İzin Verme’ye dokunun.20 88 iPad’e müzik, TV şovları ve podcast’ler eklemek için iTunes Store’u kullanın. Tarama Tarama Satın alınanları yeniden indirin. Satın alınanları yeniden indirin. Kategorileri değiştirin. Kategorileri değiştirin. Aşağıdakiler için iTunes Store’u kullanın: • Tarama veya arama yaparak müzikleri, TV şovlarını, filmleri, ses tonlarını ve daha fazlasını bulma • Daha önce satın alınanları indirme Not: iTunes Store’u kullanmak için Internet bağlantısına ve bir Apple kimliğine gereksiniminiz vardır. İçerikleri tarama:  Kategorilerden birine dokunun. Listeleri ayrıntılandırmak için Genres’e dokunun. Öğe hakkında daha fazla bilgi görmek için ona dokunun. İçerik arama: Ara’ya dokunun, sonra arama alanına dokunup bir veya birden fazla sözcük girin ve Ara düğmesine dokunun. Öğenin önizlemesini görme: Bir örneğini çalmak veya oynatmak için parçaya ya da videoya dokunun. Öğe satın alma: Öğenin ücretine (veya Ücretsiz düğmesine) dokunun ve daha sonra satın almak için tekrar dokunun. Öğeyi önceden satın aldıysanız, ücret yerine “İndir” ifadesi görünür ve yeniden ücret alınmaz. Öğeler indirilirken Fazlası düğmesine dokunun, sonra ilerlemelerini görmek için İndirilenler’e dokunun. iTunes StoreBölüm 20 iTunes Store 89 Film kiralama: Bazı bölgelerde belirli filmler kiralanabilir. Kiralanan bir filmi izlemeye başlamak için 30 gününüz vardır. Bir kez oynatmaya başladıktan sonra, 24 saat içinde istediğiniz sayıda seyredebilirsiniz. Bu süre sınırlarının sonunda film otomatik olarak silinir. Daha önce satın alınan bir öğeyi indirme: Satın Alınmış’a (Purchased) dokunun. Diğer aygıtlarda satın alınan öğeleri otomatik olarak indirmek için Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store bölümüne gidin. Bir hediye kartını veya kodunu takas etme: Herhangi bir kategoriye (müzik gibi) dokunun, en alta kaydırın ve daha sonra Redeem düğmesine dokunun. Hesabınızı görüntüleme veya düzenleme: Ayarlar > iTunes ve App Store bölümüne gidin, Apple kimliğinize ve daha sonra Apple Kimliğini Göster düğmesine dokunun. Düzenlemek istediğiniz öğeye dokunun. Parolanızı değiştirmek için, Apple Kimliği alanına dokunun. iTunes Match’i açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store bölümüne gidin. iTunes Match, istediğiniz her yerden erişebilmeniz için tüm müziklerinizi iCloud’da saklayan bir abonelik servisidir. Farklı bir Apple kimliği kullanarak giriş yapma: Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store bölümüne gidin, hesap adınıza ve daha sonra Çıkış Yap düğmesine dokunun. Uygulamayı bir sonraki indirişinizde farklı bir Apple kimliği girebilirsiniz. Satın alınan öğeleri hücresel ağı kullanarak indirme (Wi-Fi + hücresel modelleri): Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store > Hücresel Veri’yi Kullan bölümüne gidin. Bu işlem, iTunes Match'den parça çalma özelliğini de açar. Hücresel ağ üzerinden satın alınan öğelerin indirilmesi ve iTunes Match’in kullanılması operatörünüz tarafından ücretlendirme yapılmasına neden olabilir.21 90 İlk bakışta iPad'e uygulamalar eklemek için App Store'u kullanabilirsiniz. Özellikle iPad, iPhone ve iPod touch için tasarlanmış uygulamaları tarayabilir, satın alabilir ve indirebilirsiniz. Tarama Tarama Satın alınanları yeniden indirin. Satın alınanları yeniden indirin. Şunları yapmak için App Store’u kullanın: • Tarama veya arama yaparak ücretsiz ya da satın alınan uygulamaları bulma • Daha önce satın alınanları ve güncellemeleri indirme • Bir hediye kartını takas etme veya kodu indirme • Uygulamayı birisine önerme • App Store hesabınızı yönetme Not: App Store’u kullanmak için Internet bağlantısına ve bir Apple kimliğine gereksiniminiz vardır. Bir uygulamayı satın alma: Uygulamanın ücretine (veya Ücretsiz düğmesine) dokunun ve daha sonra Satın Al düğmesine dokunun. Uygulamayı daha önce satın aldıysanız, ücret yerine “yükle” (install) ifadesi görünür. Yeniden indirmek için hesabınızdan ücret alınmaz. Uygulama indirilirken simgesi, bir ilerleme göstergesiyle birlikte Ana Ekran’da görünür. App StoreBölüm 21 App Store 91 Daha önce satın alınan bir öğeyi indirme: Güncellemeler’e dokunun, sonra Satın Alınmış’a dokunun. Diğer aygıtlarda satın alınan yeni öğeleri otomatik olarak indirmek için Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store bölümüne gidin. Güncellenen uygulamaları indirme: Güncellemeler’e dokunun. Yeni sürüm hakkındaki bilgileri okumak için uygulamaya dokunun, daha sonra uygulamayı indirmek için Güncelle’ye dokunun. Veya listedeki uygulamaların tümünü indirmek için Tümünü Güncelle’ye dokunun. Bir hediye kartını takas etme veya kodu indirme: Öne Çıkanlar düğmesine dokunun, en alta kaydırın ve daha sonra Kodu Kullan düğmesine dokunun. Arkadaşına bir uygulamadan bahsetme: Uygulamayı bulun, sonra simgesine dokunun ve onu nasıl paylaşmak istediğinizi seçin. Hesabınızı görüntüleme ve düzenleme: Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store bölümüne gidin, Apple kimliğinize ve daha sonra Apple Kimliğini Göster düğmesine dokunun. iTunes bültenlerine abone olabilir ve Apple’ın gizlilik politikasını görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Parolanızı değiştirmek için, Apple Kimliği alanına dokunun. Farklı bir Apple kimliği kullanarak giriş yapma: Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store bölümüne gidin, hesap adınıza ve daha sonra Çıkış Yap düğmesine dokunun. Uygulamayı bir sonraki indirişinizde farklı bir Apple kimliği girebilirsiniz. Yeni bir Apple kimliği yaratma: Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store bölümüne gidin, daha sonra Yeni Apple Kimliği Yarat düğmesine dokunun ve ekrandaki yönergeleri izleyin. Satın alınan öğeleri hücresel ağı kullanarak indirme (Wi-Fi + hücresel modelleri): Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store > Hücresel Veri’yi Kullan bölümüne gidin. Satın alınan öğelerin hücresel ağ üzerinden indirilmesi operatörünüz tarafından ücretlendirme yapılmasına neden olabilir. Gazete Bayisi uygulamaları yalnızca Wi-Fi üzerinden güncellenir. Uygulamaları silme Bir App Store uygulamasını silme:  Ana Ekran’da uygulama simgesine dokunup simge titremeye başlayana dek parmağınızı basılı tutun ve daha sonra simgesine dokunun. Yerleşik uygulamaları silemezsiniz. İşiniz bittiğinde, Ana Ekran düğmesine basın. Uygulama silindiğinde uygulamaya ait tüm veriler de silinir. App Store’dan satın almış olduğunuz herhangi bir uygulamayı ücret ödemeden yeniden indirebilirsiniz. Uygulamalarınızın, verilerinizin ve ayarlarınızın tümünü silme hakkında bilgi için, bakınız: Sıfırlama sayfa 124.22 92 Gazete Bayisi, dergi ve gazete uygulamalarınızı düzenler ve yeni sayılar okunmaya hazır olduğunda size haber verir. Gazete Bayisi uygulamalarını bulun. Gazete Bayisi uygulamalarını bulun. Yeniden düzenlemek için yayını basılı tutun. Yeniden düzenlemek için yayını basılı tutun. Gazete Bayisi, dergi ve gazete uygulamalarını kolay erişim için raf şeklinde düzenler. Gazete Bayisi uygulamalarını bulma:  Rafı göstermek için Gazete Bayisi’ne dokunun ve daha sonra Gazete Bayisi’ne dokunun. Bir Gazete Bayisi uygulaması satın aldığınızda, uygulama rafınıza otomatik olarak eklenir. Uygulama indirildikten sonra sayılarını ve abonelik seçeneklerini görüntülemek için uygulamayı açın. Abonelikler, Apple Kimliği hesabınıza fatura edilen Uygulama İçi satın alımlardır. Yeni sayıları otomatik olarak indirmeyi kapatma: Ayarlar > Gazete Bayisi bölümüne gidin. Uygulama Gazete Bayisi’ni destekliyorsa, Wi-Fi ağına bağlıyken Gazete Bayisi yeni sayıları otomatik olarak indirir. Gazete Bayisi23 93 İlk bakışta iBooks, kitapları okumanın ve satın almanın harika bir yoludur. App Store’dan ücretsiz iBooks uygulamasını indirin ve daha sonra klasiklerden çok satanlara varıncaya dek her şeyin keyfini çıkarın. Yer imi ekleyin. Yer imi ekleyin. Büyütmek için çift dokunun. Büyütmek için çift dokunun. Farklı bir sayfaya gidin. Farklı bir sayfaya gidin. iBooks, kitapların ve PDF’lerin keyfini çıkarmanın harika bir yoludur. App Store’dan ücretsiz iBooks uygulamasını indirin ve daha sonra yerleşik iBookstore’dan, klasiklerden çok satanlara varıncaya dek her şeyi alın. iBooks uygulamasını indirmek ve iBookstore’u kullanmak için, Internet bağlantısına ve bir Apple kimliğine gereksiniminiz vardır. iBookstore’u ziyaret etme: iBooks’ta şunları yapmak için Mağaza’ya dokunun: • Tarayarak veya arama yaparak kitapları bulma • Beğenip beğenmeyeceğinizi görmek için kitabın örneğini edinme • Değerlendirmeleri okuma ve yazma ve güncel çok satanları görme • Arkadaşınızı e-postayla kitap hakkında bilgilendirme Kitabı satın alma: İstediğiniz kitabı bulun, ücrete dokunun, sonra onu almak için tekrar dokunun. iBooksBölüm 23 iBooks 94 Bir kitap hakkında bilgi alma: Kitabın özetini okuyabilir, yorumları okuyabilir ve satın almadan önce kitabın örneğini deneyebilirsiniz. Bir kitabı satın aldıktan sonra, kendi yorumunuzu yazabilirsiniz. Daha önce satın alınan bir öğeyi indirme: Satın Alınmış’a (Purchased) dokunun. Tararken indirmek için genellikle fiyatı gördüğünüz yerde İndir (Download) düğmesine dokunun. Hesabınızdan yeniden ücret alınmaz. Diğer aygıtlarda satın alınan öğeleri otomatik olarak indirmek için Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store bölümüne gidin. Kitapları okuma Bir kitabı okumak kolaydır. Kitap rafına gidin ve okumak istediğiniz kitaba dokunun. Her bir kitabın, içeriklerine ve biçimine bağlı olarak bir dizi özelliği vardır. Aşağıda açıklanan özelliklerden bazıları, sizin okuduğunuz kitapta olmayabilir. Kitabı açma: Okumak istediğiniz kitaba dokunun. Kitabı rafta görmüyorsanız, diğer koleksiyonları görmek için sola veya sağa kaydırın. • Denetimleri gösterme: Sayfanın ortasına yakın bir yere dokunun. • Görüntüyü büyütme: Görüntüye çift dokunun. Bazı kitaplarda, bir resmi görmek için kullanabileceğiniz büyüteci göstermek için parmağınızı ekrana basılı tutun. • Belirli bir sayfaya gitme: Ekranın alt kısmındaki sayfa dolaşma denetimlerini kullanın. Veya, simgesine dokunup bir sayfa numarası yazın, sonra arama sonuçlarında sayfa numarasına dokunun. • Bir sözcüğü sözlükte arama: Bir sözcüğe çift dokunun, seçimi ayarlamak üzere tutma noktalarını kullanın, sonra görünen menüde Define öğesine dokunun. Tanımlar, tüm diller için kullanılabilir değildir. • İçindekiler tablosunu görüntüleme: simgesine dokunun. Ayrıca, bazı kitaplarda içindekiler tablosunu görmek için iki parmağınızı kıstırıp açabilirsiniz. • Yer imi ekleme veya yer imini silme: simgesine dokunun. Yer imini silmek için yeniden dokunun. Kitabı kapatırken yer imi eklemenize gerek yoktur çünkü iBooks kaldığınız yeri anımsar. Birden fazla yer iminiz olabilir; tüm yer imlerinizi görmek için simgesine dokunun, sonra Yer İmleri’ne dokunun. Kitaba açıklama ekleme: Kitaba notlar ve vurgular ekleyebilirsiniz. • Vurgu ekleme: Bir sözcüğe çift dokunun, seçimi ayarlamak üzere tutma noktalarını kullanın, sonra Vurgula’ya dokunun ve bir renk veya alt çizgi seçin. • Vurguyu silme: Vurgulanan metne dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun. • Not ekleme: Bir sözcüğe çift dokunun, Highlight'a dokunun, sonra da görünen menüden simgesini seçin. • Notu silme:  Notun metnini silin. Notu ve vurgusunu silmek için, vurgulanan metne dokunun ve daha sonra simgesine dokunun. • Tüm notlarınızı görme: simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra Notes öğesine dokunun. Notlarınızı yazdırmak veya e-posta ile göndermek için simgesine dokunun.Bölüm 23 iBooks 95 Kitabın görünüşünü değiştirme: Bazı kitaplar; fontu, puntoyu ve sayfa rengini değiştirmenize olanak tanır. • Fontu veya puntoyu değiştirme: Denetimleri görüntülemek için sayfanın ortasına yakın bir yere dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun. Bir yazıtipi seçmek için Fonts'a dokunun. Bazı kitaplar, yalnızca iPad düşey yöndeyken yazıtipini değiştirmenize izin verir. • Sayfanın ve metnin rengini değiştirme: Denetimleri görüntülemek için sayfanın ortasına yakın bir yere dokunun, simgesine ve sonra Tema’ya dokunun. Bu ayar, onu destekleyen tüm kitaplara uygulanır. • Parlaklığı değiştirme: Denetimleri görüntülemek için sayfanın ortasına yakın bir yere dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun. simgesini görmüyorsanız, önce simgesine dokunun. • Hizalamayı ve tirelemeyi açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > iBooks bölümüne gidin. PDF’ler ve bazı kitaplar iki yana yaslanamaz veya tirelenemez. Çoklu ortamlarla etkileşimde bulunma Bazı kitaplarda filmler, diyagramlar, sunular, galeriler, 3B nesneler ve bölüm değerlendirmeleri gibi etkileşimli öğeler vardır. Çoklu ortam nesnesiyle etkileşimde bulunmak için dokunun, kaydırın veya parmaklarınızı kıstırıp açın. Örneğin bir sunuyu başlatmak için simgesine dokunabilir ve daha sonra her bir ekranı görmek için dokunabilirsiniz. Bir öğeyi tam ekran görüntülemek için, iki parmağınızı birbirinden ayırın. İşiniz bittiğinde, kapatmak için parmaklarınızı kıstırın. Çalışma notları ve sözcük listeleri Destekleyen kitaplarda, vurgularınızın ve notlarınızın tümünü kartlar şeklinde gözden geçirmek için notlar görüntüsünü kullanabilirsiniz. Notlarınızı görüntüleme: simgesine dokunun. Ayrıca: • Notları bölüme göre görüntüleme: Notlarını görmek istediğiniz bölüme dokunun. Bölüm listesindeki işaretler, her bir bölüme eklediğiniz not ve vurgu sayısını belirtir. Bölüm listesini görmüyorsanız, Bölüm düğmesine dokunun. • Tüm notlarda arama yapma: Arama alanına bir sözcük veya ifade girin. Arama alanını görmüyorsanız, Bölümler düğmesine dokunun. Notlarını görmek istediğiniz bölüme dokunun. • Notları ve sözcükleri çalışma kartları olarak gözden geçirme: Çalışma Kartları’na dokunun. Bir karttan diğerine gitmek için kaydırın. Kartta ile belirtilen notlar varsa, ters çevirmek için karta dokunun. Hangi vurguların görüntülendiğini seçmek veya kartları karıştırmak için simgesine dokunun. Bölümde sözcük listesi varsa, onu kartlarınıza da dahil edebilirsiniz. • Notlarınızı e-postayla gönderme: simgesine dokunun. Paylaşmak istediğiniz notları seçin ve daha sonra E-postala’ya dokunun. • Notları silme: simgesine dokunun. Silmek istediğiniz notları seçin ve daha sonra Sil’e dokunun.Bölüm 23 iBooks 96 Kitap rafını düzenleme Kitaplarınızı ve PDF’lerinizi taramak için kitap rafını kullanabilirsiniz. Öğeleri koleksiyonlar halinde de düzenleyebilirsiniz. Yeniden düzenlemek için kitabı basılı tutun. Yeniden düzenlemek için kitabı basılı tutun. iBookstore'da bulunabilir. Başlık bulunabilirliği değişebilir. iBookstore'da bulunabilir. Başlık bulunabilirliği değişebilir. Kitabı veya PDF’i bir koleksiyona taşıma:  Kitap rafına gidin ve Edit düğmesine dokunun. Taşımak istediğiniz öğeleri seçin, sonra Move düğmesine dokunun ve bir koleksiyon seçin. Koleksiyonları görüntüleme ve yönetme: Koleksiyonlar’a dokunun. Koleksiyonun adını düzenlemek için Düzenle’ye dokunun. Yerleşik Kitaplar ve PDF koleksiyonlarını düzenleyemez veya silemezsiniz. Kitap rafını sıralama: simgesine dokunun ve daha sonra ekranın altından bir sıralama yöntemi seçin. Kitap rafındaki bir öğeyi silme: Düzenle’ye dokunun, sonra silmek istediğiniz her bir kitaba veya PDF’e dokunarak onay işareti görünmesini sağlayın. Delete düğmesine dokunun. İşiniz bittiğinde Bitti düğmesine dokunun. Satın aldığınız bir kitabı silerseniz, onu iBookstore’daki Purchases bölümünde yeniden indirebilirsiniz. Bir kitabı arama: Kitap rafına gidin. Ekranın en üstüne kaydırmak için durum çubuğuna dokunun ve daha sonra simgesine dokunun. Başlık ve yazar adı ile arama yapılır. Kitapları ve PDF’leri eşzamanlama Kitaplarınızı ve PDF'lerinizi iPad'unuzla bilgisayarınız arasında eşzamanlamak ve iTunes Store'dan kitap satın almak için iTunes'u kullanın. iPad bilgisayarınıza bağlıyken, Kitaplar bölümü eşzamanlamak istediğiniz öğeleri seçmenize olanak tanır. Ayrıca, web üzerinde DRM korumasız ePub kitapları ve PDF’leri de bulabilir ve onları iTunes arşivinize ekleyebilirsiniz. Bir kitabı veya PDF’i iPad ile eşzamanlama:  Bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes’da Dosya > Arşive Ekle komutunu seçip bir .pdf, .epub veya.ibooks dosyası seçin. iPad’i bilgisayarınıza bağlayın ve eşzamanlayın Bir kitabı veya PDF’i eşzamanlamadan iBooks’a ekleme: Kitap veya PDF çok büyük değilse, onu bilgisayarınızdan kendinize e-posta ile gönderin. iPad’da e-posta iletisini açın, daha sonra ilişiğe dokunup tutun ve görünen menüden “iBooks ile Aç” komutunu seçin.Bölüm 23 iBooks 97 PDF’i yazdırma veya e-postayla gönderme PDF’in bir kopyasını e-postayla göndermek veya PDF’in tümünü veya bir bölümünü bir AirPrint yazıcıda yazdırmak için iBooks’u kullanabilirsiniz. PDF’i e-postayla gönderme:  PDF’i açın, simgesine dokunun ve Belgeyi E-postala’yı seçin. PDF’i yazdırma: PDF’i açın, simgesine dokunun ve Yazdır’ı seçin. Daha fazla bilgi için, bakınız: AirPrint ile yazdırma sayfa 32. iBooks ayarları iBooks; koleksiyonlarınızı, yer imlerinizi, notlarınızı ve bulunduğunuz sayfa bilgilerini Apple kimliğinizi kullanarak saklar, böylece kitabı tüm iOS aygıtlarınızda sorunsuz bir şekilde okuyabilirsiniz. iBooks, uygulamayı açtığınız veya uygulamadan çıktığınız zaman tüm kitaplarınızın bilgilerini kaydeder. Bir kitap tek başına açıldığında veya kapatıldığında da bilgileri kaydedilir. Eşzamanlamayı açma veya kapatma:  Ayarlar > iBooks bölümüne gidin. Bazı kitaplar web'de saklanan videolara veya seslere erişebilirler. iPad’un hücresel veri bağlantısı varsa, bu dosyaların çalınması veya oynatılması operatör tarafından ücretlendirilebilir. Çevrimiçi video ve ses erişimini açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > iBooks > Online Audio & Video bölümüne gidin. Sol marja dokunduğunuzda sayfanın döneceği yönü değiştirme: Ayarlar > iBooks > Sol Marja Dokun bölümüne gidin.24 98 Arşivinizdeki podcast’leri görüntüleyin. Arşivinizdeki podcast’leri görüntüleyin. Kulanılabilir podcast’lerin tümünü tarayın. Kulanılabilir podcast’lerin tümünü tarayın. En popüler bölümleri tarayın ve önizlemelerini görün. En popüler bölümleri tarayın ve önizlemelerini görün. Arşivinizin tamamını görmek için kaydırın. Arşivinizin tamamını görmek için kaydırın. Kullanılabilir bölümleri görüntülemek için podcast’e dokunun. Kullanılabilir bölümleri görüntülemek için podcast’e dokunun. Podcast’i silin. Podcast’i silin. Çalma denetimlerini görün. Çalma denetimlerini görün. Podcast’leri alma:   • Tüm kataloğu tarama:  Katalog düğmesine dokunun, sonra ilginizi çeken herhangi bir podcast’e dokunun. • En popüler podcast’leri tarama:  En İyi İstasyonlar’a dokunun (onu görmüyorsanız önce Arşiv’e dokunun). Kategoriyi değiştirmek için sola veya sağa kaydırın veya o anki kategoriyi taramak için yukarı veya aşağı kaydırın. En son bölümün önizlemesini görmek için podcast’e dokunun veya bölümlerin listesini görmek için simgesine dokunun. • Bölümü yayımlama:  Herhangi bir bölüme dokunun. • Bölümü Wi-Fi ağına bağlı değilken dinleyebilmek için indirme:  Herhangi bir bölümün yanındaki indir düğmesine dokunun. • Her zaman en son bölümü almak için podcast’e abone olma:  Kataloğu tarıyorsanız, bölümlerin listesini görmek için podcast’e dokunun, sonra Abone Ol’a dokunun. Önceden bir bölüm indirdiyseniz, arşivinizdeki podcast’e dokunun, simgesine dokunun, sonra Abonelik seçeneğini açın. • Abone olunan podcast’in en son bölümünü otomatik olarak alma:  Arşivinizdeki podcast’e dokunun, simgesine dokunun, sonra Otomatik İndirme seçeneğini açın. Otomatik İndirme anahtarını görmüyorsanız, önce Abonelik seçeneğini açtığınızdan emin olun. Podcast’lerBölüm 24 Podcast’ler 99 Ses çalmayı denetleme:  Çalma denetimlerinin hepsini görmek için o an çalan podcast’in resmini yukarı kaydırın. Podcast’in başka bir bölümüne atlamak için oynatma çubuğunu sürükleyin. Podcast’in başka bir bölümüne atlamak için oynatma çubuğunu sürükleyin. Çalma hızını ayarlayın. Çalma hızını ayarlayın. Bir sonraki bölüme atlayın. Bir sonraki bölüme atlayın. Son 10 saniyeyi yeniden çalın. Son 10 saniyeyi yeniden çalın. 30 saniye ileriye atlayın. 30 saniye ileriye atlayın. Bir önceki bölümü çalın. Bir önceki bölümü çalın. Uyku için sayacı ayarlayın. Uyku için sayacı ayarlayın. Bu podcast’i paylaşın. Bu podcast’i paylaşın. Denetimleri göstermek veya gizlemek için yukarı veya aşağı kaydırın. Denetimleri göstermek veya gizlemek için yukarı veya aşağı kaydırın. Video oynatmayı denetleme:  Video podcast’i izlerken ekrana dokunun.25 100 İlk bakışta Game Center; iPhone’u, iPad’i, iPod touch’ı veya OS X Mountain Lion yüklü Mac’i olan arkadaşlarınızla favori oyunlarınızı oynamanızı sağlar. Game Center’ı kullanmak için Internet’e bağlı olmanız gerekir. UYARI:  Yinelenen hareketler nedeniyle oluşan rahatsızlıklardan kaçınma hakkında önemli bilgiler için, Önemli güvenlik bilgileri sayfa 131 konusuna bakın. Arkadaşlarınızın meydan okuyup okumadığını denetleyin. Arkadaşlarınızın meydan okuyup okumadığını denetleyin. Durumunuzu belirtin, fotoğrafınızı değiştirin veya çıkış yapın. Durumunuzu belirtin, fotoğrafınızı değiştirin veya çıkış yapın. Arkadaşlarınızı oyun oynamaya davet edin. Arkadaşlarınızı oyun oynamaya davet edin. Oynamak için bir oyun seçin. Oynamak için bir oyun seçin. Arkadaşlık isteklerine yanıt verin. Arkadaşlık isteklerine yanıt verin. Oyun oynayın. Oyun oynayın. Kimlerin en iyi olduğunu görün. Kimlerin en iyi olduğunu görün. Oyun hedeflerinin listesini görün. Oyun hedeflerinin listesini görün. Oyun oynayacak bir kişi bulun. Oyun oynayacak bir kişi bulun. Giriş yapma:  Game Center’ı açın. Ben ekranın en üstünde takma adınızı ve fotoğrafınızı görüyorsanız zaten giriş yapmış durumdasınız demektir. Görmüyorsanız, Apple kimliğinizi ve parolanızı girin ve sonra Giriş Yap düğmesine dokunun. iCloud veya çevrimiçi mağaza (Store) alışverişleriniz için kullandığınız Apple kimliğini kullanabilir veya oyun oynamak için ayrı bir Apple kimliği istiyorsanız Yeni Hesap Yarat’a dokunabilirsiniz. Oyun satın alma:  Oyunlar’a dokunun, sonra önerilen bir oyuna veya Game Center Oyunlarını Bul düğmesine dokunun. Oyun oynama:  Oyunlar’a dokunun, bir oyun seçin ve sonra Oyunu Oyna’ya dokunun. Game CenterBölüm 25 Game Center 101 Oyun oynadıktan sonra Game Center’a dönme:  Ana Ekran düğmesine basın ve daha sonra Ana Ekran’daki Game Center’a dokunun. Çıkış yapma:  Ben düğmesine dokunun, Hesap başlığına dokunun ve daha sonra Çıkış Yap düğmesine dokunun. Game Center’ı her kapatışınızda çıkış yapmanız gerekmez. Arkadaşlarla oyun oynama Arkadaşlarınızı çok oyunculu bir oyuna davet etme:  Arkadaşlar’a dokunun, bir arkadaş seçin, bir oyun seçin, sonra Oyna’ya dokunun. Oyun daha fazla oyuncuya izin veriyorsa veya daha fazla oyuncu gerektiriyorsa, davet edilecek ek oyuncuları seçin ve Sonraki düğmesine dokunun. Davetinizi gönderin ve sonra diğer kişilerin kabul etmesini bekleyin. Herkes hazır olduğunda oyunu başlatın. Arkadaş yoksa veya davetinize yanıt vermiyorsa, Game Center’ın size başka bir oyuncu bulması için Otomatik Eşleme’ye veya başka bir arkadaşı davet etmeyi denemek için Davet Et düğmesine dokunabilirsiniz. Arkadaşlık isteği gönderme:  Arkadaşlar’a veya İstekler’e dokunun, Arkadaş Ekle’ye dokunun ve sonra arkadaşınızın e-posta adresini veya Game Center’daki takma adını girin. Kişilerinizi taramak için, simgesine dokunun. Tek bir istekte birden fazla arkadaşı eklemek için, her adresten sonra Geç tuşuna basın. Sizi yenmesi için birine meydan okuma:  Puanlarınızdan veya başarılarınızdan birine dokunun, sonra Meydan Oku’ya dokunun. Arkadaşınızın oynadığı oyunları görme ve arkadaşınızın puanlarını denetleme:  Arkadaşlar’a dokunun, arkadaşın adına dokunun ve daha sonra Oyunlar veya Puan düğmesine dokunun. Arkadaşınızda olan bir oyunu satın alma:  Arkadaşlar’a dokunun ve sonra arkadaşınızın adına dokunun. Arkadaşınızın oyun listesindeki oyuna dokunun, sonra ekranın üst kısmında bulunan fiyata dokunun. Arkadaşınızın arkadaş listesini görme:  Arkadaşlar’a dokunun, arkadaşın adına dokunun ve daha sonra arkadaşınızın resminin altındaki Arkadaşlar düğmesine dokunun. Arkadaşı silme:  Arkadaşlar’a dokunun, bir ada dokunun ve daha sonra Arkadaşı Sil düğmesine dokunun. E-posta adresinizi gizli tutma:  Game Center hesap ayarlarınızda Herkese Açık Profil’i kapatın. Aşağıdaki “Game Center ayarları” bölümüne bakın. Çok oyuncu etkinliğini veya arkadaşlık isteklerini etkisizleştirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Sınırlamalar bölümüne gidin ve Çok Oyunculu Oyunlar veya Arkadaş Ekleme’yi kapatın. Anahtarlar etkin değilse, önce en üstteki Sınırlamaları Etkinleştir’e dokunun. Rahatsız edici veya uygunsuz davranışları bildirme:  Arkadaşlar’a dokunun, kişinin adına dokunun ve daha sonra "Sorun Bildir" düğmesine dokunun. Game Center ayarları Bazı Game Center ayarları giriş yapmak için kullandığınız Apple kimliğiyle ilişkilidir. Diğerleri, iPad'deki Ayarlar uygulamasındadır. Apple kimliğiniz için Game Center ayarlarını değiştirme:  Apple kimliğinizi kullanarak giriş yapın, Ben’e dokunun, Hesap başlığına dokunun ve sonra Hesabı Göster’i seçin. Game Center için hangi bildirimleri istediğinizi belirtme:  Ayarlar > Bildirimler > Game Center bölümüne gidin. Game Center görünmüyorsa Bildirimler’i açın. Game Center için sınırlamaları değiştirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Sınırlamalar bölümüne gidin.26 102 Erişilebilirlik özellikleri iPad şu erişilebilirlik özelliklerini içerir: • VoiceOver ekran okuyucu • Siri sesli yardımcı • Büyütme • Büyük Metin • Renkleri Tersine Çevirme • Seçimi Seslendir • Otomatik Seslendir • Mono Ses ve ses dengesi • Atanabilir ses tonları • Güdümlü Erişim • AssistiveTouch • Braille ekranları için destek • Gizli altyazılı içerikleri dinleme Erişilebilirlik özelliklerini iPad’i kullanarak açma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik bölümüne gidin. Erişilebilirlik özelliklerini iTunes’u kullanarak açma:  iPad’i bilgisayarınıza bağlayın ve iTunes’daki aygıt listesinde iPad’i seçin. Özet’i tıklayın ve daha sonra Özet ekranının altında Evrensel Erişim’i Ayarla’yı tıklayın. iPad'in erişilebilirlik özellikleri hakkında daha fazla bilgi almak için şu adrese gidin: www.apple.com/accessibility. VoiceOver VoiceOver, ekranda görünenleri sesli olarak açıklar böylece iPad'i görmeden de kullanabilirsiniz. VoiceOver, ekranda seçtiğiniz her bir öğe hakkında sizi bilgilendirir. Bir öğeyi seçtiğinizde, öğenin etrafı VoiceOver imleci (siyah bir dikdörtgen) ile çevrilir ve VoiceOver öğenin adını söyler veya öğeyi açıklar. Ekrandaki farklı öğeleri duymak için ekrana dokunun veya parmaklarınızı sürükleyin. Metni seçtiğinizde, VoiceOver metni okur. Seslendirme İpuçları’nı açarsanız, VoiceOver size öğenin adını söyleyip yönergeler sunabilir—örneğin “açmak için çift dokunun”. Ekrandaki öğelerle (düğmeler veya bağlantılar gibi) etkileşimde bulunmak için, şu bölümde açıklanan hareketleri kullanın: VoiceOver hareketlerini öğrenme sayfa 105. ErişilebilirlikBölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 103 Yeni bir ekrana gittiğinizde, VoiceOver bir ses çalar, sonra ekrandaki ilk öğeyi seçip seslendirir (genellikle sol üst köşedeki öğeyi). VoiceOver, ekran yatay veya düşey olarak görüntülendiğinde ve ekran kilitlendiğinde ya da kilidi açıldığında da size haber verir. Not: VoiceOver, Ayarlar > Genel > Uluslararası bölümündeki Bölge Biçimi ayarı tarafından da etkilenebilen ve Uluslararası ayarlarında belirtilen dilde konuşur. VoiceOver, tüm diller için olmasa da pek çok dilde geçerlidir. Temel VoiceOver bilgileri Önemli: VoiceOver, iPad'i denetlemek için kullandığınız hareketleri değiştirir. VoiceOver açıldıktan sonra, artık iPad'i kullanmak için VoiceOver hareketlerini kullanmanız gerekir—hatta standart çalışmanızı sürdürmek üzere tekrar VoiceOver’ı kapatmak için bile. VoiceOver’ı açma ya da kapatma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver bölümüne gidin. VoiceOver’ı açmak veya kapatmak için Ana Ekran düğmesini üç kez tıklamayı da ayarlayabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık sayfa 111. Ekranı keşfetme:  Parmağınızı ekranın üzerinde sürükleyin. VoiceOver dokunduğunuz her bir öğeyi seslendirir. Bir öğeyi seçili bırakmak için parmağınızı kaldırın. • Öğeyi seçme:  Öğeye dokunun veya parmağınızı üzerinde sürüklerken kaldırın. • Bir sonraki veya bir önceki öğeyi seçme:  Tek parmağınızla sağa veya sola itin. Öğe sırası soldan sağa, yukarıdan aşağıyadır. • Üstteki veya alttaki öğeyi seçme:  Düşeyde Dolaşma’yı açmak için rotoru kullanın, sonra tek parmağınızla yukarı veya aşağı itin. • Ekrandaki ilk veya son öğeyi seçme:  Dört parmağınızla yukarı veya aşağı itin. • Öğeyi ada göre seçme:  Öğe Seçici’yi açmak için ekranın herhangi bir yerine iki parmağınızla üç kez dokunun. Daha sonra arama alanına bir ad yazın veya liste boyunca alfabetik olarak hareket etmek için sağa veya sola itin ya da listenin sağ tarafındaki tablo dizinine dokunun ve öğe listesi boyunca hızlı bir şekilde hareket etmek için yukarı veya aşağı itin. • Seçili bir öğenin adını daha kolay bulmak amacıyla değiştirme:  Ekranın herhangi bir yerine iki parmağınızla iki kez dokunup parmaklarınızı basılı tutun. • Seçilen öğenin metnini seslendirme:  Rotor denetimini karakterlere veya sözcüklere ayarlayın, sonra tek parmağınızla aşağı veya yukarı itin. • Seslendirme ipuçlarını açma veya kapatma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver bölümüne gidin. • Fonetik yazımı dahil etme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Fonetik Kullan bölümüne gidin. • En üstten başlayarak ekranın tamamını okuma:  İki parmağınızla yukarı itin. • O anki öğeden başlayarak ekranın altına kadar okuma:  İki parmağınızla aşağı itin. • Seslendirmeyi durdurma:  İki parmağınızla bir kez dokunun. Seslendirmeyi sürdürmek için yeniden iki parmakla dokunun. Başka bir öğeyi seçtiğinizde seslendirme otomatik olarak devam eder. • VoiceOver sesini kapatma:  Üç parmağınızla çift dokunun. Seslendirmeyi yeniden açmak için üç parmağınızla tekrar çift dokunun. Yalnızca VoiceOver seslerini kapatmak için, Sesli/Sessiz anahtarını Sessiz’e ayarlayın. Harici bir klavye bağlıysa, VoiceOver sesini kapatmak veya açmak için klavyedeki Kontrol tuşuna da basabilirsiniz.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 104 Seslendirme sesini ayarlama:  Daha kolay anlamanız için VoiceOver seslendirme sesinin özelliklerini ayarlayabilirsiniz: • Seslendirmenin ses yüksekliğini değiştirme:  iPad’deki ses yüksekliği düğmelerini kullanın. Ses yüksekliğini rotora ekleyebilir ve ayarlamak için yukarıya veya aşağıya da kaydırabilirsiniz; bakınız: VoiceOver rotor denetimini kullanma sayfa 106. • Seslendirme hızını değiştirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik> VoiceOver bölümüne gidin ve Konuşma Hızı sürgüsünü sürükleyin. Konuşma Hızı’nı rotora ekleyip daha sonra düzenlemek için yukarıya veya aşağıya da kaydırabilirsiniz. • Perde değişimini kullanma:  VoiceOver bir grubun (bir liste veya tablo gibi) ilk öğesini seslendirirken yüksek bir perde ve bir grubun son öğesini seslendirirken de düşük bir perde kullanır. Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Perde Değişimi bölümüne gidin. • iPad’de kullanılan dili değiştirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Uluslararası > Dil bölümüne gidin. Bazı dillerin VoiceOver telaffuzları Ayarlar > Genel > Uluslararası > Bölge Biçimi tarafından etkilenir. • Telaffuzu değiştirme:  Rotoru Dil’e ayarlayın, sonra yukarı veya aşağı kaydırın. Dil yalnızca, birden fazla telaffuz seçtiyseniz rotorda kullanılabilir. • Dil rotorunda kullanılabilecek telaffuzları seçme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Dil Rotoru bölümüne gidin. Listedeki bir dilin konumunu değiştirmek için, simgesini yukarıya veya aşağıya sürükleyin. • Temel okuma sesini değiştirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Sıkıştırılmış Ses Kullan bölümüne gidin. iPad’i VoiceOver ile kullanma iPad'in kilidini açma:  Kilidi Aç sürgüsünü seçin, daha sonra ekrana çift dokunun. Seçilen öğeyi etkinleştirmek için “dokunma“:  Ekranda herhangi bir yere çift dokunun. Seçilen öğeye “çift dokunma”:  Ekranda herhangi bir yere üç kez dokunun. Sürgüyü ayarlama:  Sürgüyü seçin ve daha sonra tek parmağınızla yukarı veya aşağı itin. VoiceOver açıkken standart bir hareketi kullanma:  Çift dokunun ve parmağınızı ekranda basılı tutun. Duyulan bir dizi ton, normal hareketlerin yürürlükte olduğunu belirtir. Normal hareketler, parmağınızı kaldırıncaya ve VoiceOver hareketleri yeniden kullanılmaya başlayıncaya dek etkili olmaya devam eder. Listeyi veya ekran alanını kaydırma:  Üç parmağınızla yukarı veya aşağı itin. Liste boyunca sayfa sayfa ilerlerken; VoiceOver, görüntülenen öğe aralığını söyler (örneğin, "5 ile 10 arasındaki satırlar gösteriliyor”). Liste boyunca sayfa sayfa ilerlemek yerine listeyi sürekli olarak da kaydırabilirsiniz. Çift dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun. Bir dizi ses tonu duyduğunuzda, listeyi kaydırmak için parmağınızı yukarı veya aşağı hareket ettirin. Parmağınızı kaldırdığınızda sürekli kaydırma durur. • Bir liste boyunca sürekli olarak kaydırma:  Çift dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun. Bir dizi ses tonu duyduğunuzda, listeyi kaydırmak için parmağınızı yukarı veya aşağı hareket ettirin. Parmağınızı kaldırdığınızda sürekli kaydırma durur. • Liste dizini kullanma:  Bazı listelerin sağ taraflarında alfabetik dizini vardır. Dizin, öğeleri iterek seçilemez; dizini seçmek için doğrudan ona dokunmanız gerekir. Dizin seçiliyken, dizinde ilerlemek için yukarı veya aşağı itin. Çift dokunup daha sonra parmağınızı yukarı veya aşağı da kaydırabilirsiniz. • Listeyi yeniden düzenleme:  Erişilebilirlik ayarlarındaki Rotor ve Dil Rotoru ayarları gibi, bazı listelerdeki öğelerin sırasını değiştirebilirsiniz. Bir öğenin sağ tarafındaki simgesini seçin, çift dokunup bir ses duyana dek parmağınızı basılı tutun ve sonra yukarı veya aşağı sürükleyin. VoiceOver, yukarı veya aşağı taşıdığınız öğeyi sürüklediğiniz yöne bağlı olarak seslendirir.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 105 Ana Ekran’ınızı yeniden düzenleme:  Ana Ekran’da, taşımak istediğiniz simgeyi seçin. Simgeye çift dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun, daha sonra onu sürükleyin. Siz simgeyi sürüklerken VoiceOver satır ve sütun konumunu seslendirir. Simge istediğiniz yere gelince onu bırakın. Daha fazla simge sürükleyebilirsiniz. Bir öğeyi farklı bir Ana Ekran sayfasına taşımak için, onu ekranın sol veya sağ kenarına sürükleyin. İşiniz bittiğinde, Ana Ekran düğmesine basın. iPad'in durum bilgilerini seslendirme:  Saat, pil ömrü, Wi-Fi sinyal gücü hakkındaki bilgileri ve daha fazlasını duymak için ekranın en üstüne dokunun. Bildirimleri seslendirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver bölümüne gidin ve Bildirimleri Seslendir seçeneğini açın. Gelen SMS mesajlarının metinleri de dahil olmak üzere bildirimler, iPad kilitli olsa bile alındıkları anda seslendirilir. Okunmamış bildirimler iPad’in kilidini açtığınızda yinelenir. Ekran perdesini açma veya kapatma:  Üç parmağınızla üç kez dokunun. Ekran perdesi açıkken, ekran kapalı olsa bile ekran içeriği etkindir. VoiceOver hareketlerini öğrenme VoiceOver açıkken, standart dokunmatik ekran hareketlerinin farklı etkileri vardır. Bunlar ve ek bazı hareketler, ekranda dolaşmanızı ve seçilen her bir öğeyi denetlemenizi sağlar. VoiceOver hareketleri, dokunmak veya itmek için iki ve üç parmakla yapılan hareketleri içerir. İki veya üç parmağınızı kullanmanızı gerektiren hareketleri yaparken en iyi sonuçları almak için; kendinizi rahat bırakın ve parmaklarınızın aralarında biraz boşluk olacak şekilde ekrana dokunmasını sağlayın. VoiceOver hareketlerini girmek için farklı teknikler kullanabilirsiniz. Örneğin; iki parmakla dokunma hareketini, bir elinizin iki parmağını veya iki elinizin birer parmağını kullanarak gerçekleştirebilirsiniz. Başparmaklarınızı da kullanabilirsiniz. Birçok kişi bir öğeyi seçmek ve çift dokunmak yerine "ayrı ayrı dokunma" hareketini özellikle faydalı bulmaktadır: bir parmağınızla bir öğeye dokunup onu tutabilir ve sonra başka bir parmakla ekrana dokunabilirsiniz. En iyi hangisinin işinize yaradığını keşfetmek için farklı teknikler deneyin. Hareketleriniz çalışmıyorsa, özellikle çift dokunma ve itme hareketlerinde daha hızlı davranmayı deneyin. İtmek için, parmağınızı veya parmaklarınızı ekran üzerinde hızlı bir şekilde kaydırın. VoiceOver açıldığında, ilerlemeden önce VoiceOver hareketlerini denemenize olanak tanıyan VoiceOver Denemeleri düğmesi görünür. VoiceOver hareketlerini deneme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik> VoiceOver bölümüne gidin ve sonra VoiceOver Denemeleri’ne dokunun. Denemeleri bitirdiğinizde Bitti düğmesine dokunun. VoiceOver Denemeleri düğmesini görmüyorsanız, VoiceOver’ın açık olduğundan emin olun. En önemli VoiceOver hareketlerinin özeti aşağıda verilmektedir: Dolaşma ve okuma • Dokunma:  Öğeyi seslendirir. • Sağa veya sola kaydırma:  Bir sonraki veya bir önceki öğeyi seçer. • Yukarı veya aşağı kaydırma:  Rotor Denetimi ayarına bağlıdır. Bakınız: VoiceOver rotor denetimini kullanma sayfa 106. • İki parmakla dokunma:  O anki öğenin seslendirmesini durdurur. • İki parmakla yukarı kaydırma:  Ekranın en üstünden başlayarak tümünü okur. • İki parmakla aşağı kaydırma:  O anki konumdan başlayarak tümünü okur.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 106 • İki parmakla “sarma”:  Bir uyarıyı kapatmak veya bir önceki ekrana geri dönmek için iki parmağınızı ileri geri üç kez hızlıca hareket ettirin (“z” harfi çizer gibi). • Üç parmakla yukarı veya aşağı kaydırma:  Sayfa sayfa kaydırır. • Üç parmakla sağa veya sola kaydırma:  Bir sonraki veya bir önceki sayfaya (Ana Ekran, Borsa veya Safari gibi) gider. • Üç parmakla dokunma:  Liste içindeki konum veya metnin seçili olup olmadığı gibi ek bilgileri seslendirir. • Ekranın en üstüne dört parmakla dokunma:  Sayfadaki ilk öğeyi seçer. • Ekranın en altına dört parmakla dokunma:  Sayfadaki son öğeyi seçer. Etkinleştirme • Çift dokunma:  Seçilen öğeyi etkinleştirir. • Üç kez dokunma:  Öğeye çift dokunur. • Ayrı ayrı dokunma:  Bir öğeyi seçip onu etkinleştirmek için ona çift dokunmanın diğer bir yolu da, öğeye bir parmağınızla dokunup sonra ekrana başka bir parmakla dokunmaktır. • Çift dokunma ve basılı tutma (1 saniye) + standart hareket:  Standart hareketi kullanır. Çift dokunup basılı tutma hareketi iPad’e bir sonraki hareketi standart hareket olarak algılamasını söyler. Örneğin, çift dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutabilir ve daha sonra parmağınızı kaldırmadan bir anahtarı kaydırmak için parmağınızı sürükleyebilirsiniz. • İki parmakla çift dokunma:  Müzik’te, Videolar’da, Sesli Notlar’da veya Fotoğraflar’da çalar/ oynatır ya da duraklatır. Kamera’da resim çeker. Kamera’da veya Sesli Notlar’da kaydı başlatır ya da duraklatır. Kronometreyi başlatır veya durdurur. • İki parmakla çift dokunup parmaklarınızı basılı tutma:  Seçilen öğenin etiketini değiştirir. • İki parmakla üç kez dokunma:  Öğe Seçici'yi açar. • Üç parmakla çift dokunma:  VoiceOver sesini kapatır veya açar. • Üç parmakla üç kez dokunma:  Ekran perdesini açar veya kapatır. VoiceOver rotor denetimini kullanma VoiceOver açıkken yukarı veya aşağı ittiğinizde ne olacağını seçmek için rotoru kullanın. Rotoru çalıştırma:  iPad ekranında iki parmağınızı aralarındaki bir nokta etrafında döndürün. Rotora dahil edilen seçenekleri değiştirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Rotor bölümüne gidin ve rotoru kullanırken olmasını istediğiniz seçenekleri seçin. Kullanılabilir rotor konumları ve etkileri ne yaptığınıza bağlıdır. Örneğin bir e-postayı okuyorsanız, yukarı veya aşağı ittiğinizde metnin sözcük sözcük ya da karakter karakter okunması arasında geçiş yapmak için rotoru kullanabilirsiniz. Bir web sayfasını tarıyorsanız, rotor ayarını metnin tümünü (sözcük sözcük veya karakter karakter) seslendirmeye veya başlıklar ya da bağlantılar gibi belirli türdeki bir öğeden başka birine atlamak için kullanabilirsiniz.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 107 VoiceOver ile metin girme ve düzenleme Düzenlenebilir bir metin alanına girdiğinizde, metin girmek için ekrandaki klavyeyi veya iPad’e bağlı harici bir klavyeyi kullanabilirsiniz. Metin girme:  Düzenlenebilir bir metin alanını seçin, ekleme noktasını ve ekran klavyesini görüntülemek için çift dokunun, sonra karakterleri yazın. • Standart yazma:  Sola veya sağa kaydırarak klavyede bir tuş seçin, daha sonra karakteri girmek için çift dokunun. Veya parmağınızı klavye üzerinde hareket ettirerek bir tuş seçin ve bir parmağınızla tuşu basılı tutarken diğer bir parmağınızla ekrana dokunun. VoiceOver, seçildiğinde tuşu söyler; karakter girildiğinde tekrar söyler. • Dokunarak yazma:  Klavyedeki bir tuşa dokunarak onu seçin, sonra karakteri girmek için parmağınızı kaldırın. Yanlış tuşa dokunursanız, istediğiniz tuşu seçene dek parmağınızı klavye üzerinde hareket ettirin. VoiceOver, dokunduğunuz her tuşun karakterini söyler ama parmağınızı kaldırana dek karakteri girmez. Dokunarak yazma, yalnızca metin giren tuşlar için çalışır. Shift, Sil veya Geç gibi diğer tuşlar için standart yazmayı kullanın. • Standart veya dokunarak yazmayı seçme:  VoiceOver açıkken ve klavyede bir tuş seçili iken, yazma modunu seçmek üzere rotoru kullanın, sonra yukarı veya aşağı kaydırın. Ekleme noktasını taşıma:  Ekleme noktasını metinde ileri veya geri taşımak için yukarı veya aşağı kaydırın. Ekleme noktasını karakter karakter mi, sözcük sözcük mü yoksa satır satır mı hareket ettirmek istediğinizi seçmek için rotoru kullanın. VoiceOver, ekleme noktası hareket ettiğinde bir ses çıkarır ve ekleme noktasının üzerinden geçtiği karakteri, sözcüğü veya satırı söyler. İleriye doğru sözcük sözcük hareket ederken; ekleme noktası, üzerinden geçilen her sözcüğün sonuna, o sözcüğü izleyen boşluğun veya noktalama işaretinin önüne yerleştirilir. Geriye doğru hareket ettirirken; ekleme noktası, bir önceki sözcüğün sonuna, o sözcüğü izleyen boşluğun veya noktalama işaretinin önüne yerleştirilir. Ekleme noktasını bir sözcüğün veya cümlenin sonundaki noktalama işaretinden sonraya hareket ettirme:  Karakter moduna dönmek için rotoru kullanın. Ekleme noktasını satır satır hareket ettirirken, VoiceOver üzerinden geçtiğiniz her bir satırı söyler. İleriye doğru hareket ettirirken; ekleme noktası, bir sonraki satırın başına yerleştirilir (bir paragrafın son satırına ulaştığınız durumlar dışında; o zaman ekleme noktası henüz söylenmiş olan satırın sonuna taşınır). Geriye doğru hareket ettirirken; ekleme noktası söylenmiş olan satırın başına yerleştirilir. Yazma geri bildirimini değiştirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Yazma Geri Bildirimi bölümüne gidin. Yazma geri bildiriminde fonetik kullanma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Fonetik Kullan bölümüne gidin. Metin, karakter karakter okunur. Voiceover öncelikle karakteri, daha sonra onun fonetik karşılığını söyler (örneğin “f” ve daha sonra “foxtrot”). Bir karakteri silme:   simgesini seçin ve daha sonra çift dokunun veya ayrı ayrı dokunun. Bunu, dokunarak yazıyor olsanız da yapmalısınız. Birden fazla karakteri silmek için Sil tuşuna dokunun ve parmağınızı basılı tutun, sonra silmek istediğiniz her bir karakter için ekrana başka bir parmağınızla bir kez dokunun. VoiceOver, silinen her bir karakteri söyler. Perde Değişimi özelliği açıksa, VoiceOver silinen karakterleri daha düşük perdeden söyler. Metin seçme:  Rotoru Düzenle’ye ayarlayın, Seç’i veya Tümünü Seç’i seçmek için yukarı veya aşağı kaydırın, sonra çift dokunun. Seç’i seçerseniz, çift dokunduğunuzda ekleme noktasına en yakın sözcük seçilir. Tümünü Seç’i seçerseniz, metnin tümü seçilir. Daha azını veya daha çoğunu seçmek için parmaklarınızı kıstırın veya açın.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 108 Kesme, kopyalama veya yapıştırma:  Rotorun düzenlemeye ayarlı olduğundan emin olun. Metni seçin, Kes’i, Kopyala’yı veya Yapıştır’ı seçmek için yukarı ya da aşağı itin, daha sonra çift dokunun. Geri alma:  iPad’i sallayın, geri alınacak eylemi seçmek için sola veya sağa itin, daha sonra çift dokunun. Aksanlı bir karakter girme:  Standart yazma modunda, düz karakteri seçin, sonra çift dokunun ve diğer karakterlerin belirdiğine dair bir ses duyana dek parmağınızı basılı tutun. Seçenekleri seçmek ve duymak için sola veya sağa sürükleyin. O anki seçimi girmek için parmağınızı kaldırın. Klavye dilini değiştirme:  Rotoru Dil’e ayarlayın, sonra yukarı veya aşağı kaydırın. Uluslararası ayarlarında belirtilen dili kullanmak için “saptanmış dil”i seçin. Dil rotoru yalnızca Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Dil Rotoru bölümünde birden fazla dil seçtiyseniz görünür. VoiceOver’ı Safari ile kullanma VoiceOver açıkken Safari ile web üzerinde arama yaptığınızda; Arama Sonuçları rotor öğeleri, önerilen arama ifadeleri listesini duymanızı sağlar. Web’de arama yapma:  Arama alanını seçin, arama metninizi girin, sonra önerilen arama ifadeleri listesinde aşağı veya yukarı hareket etmek için sağa veya sola kaydırın. Daha sonra seçilen ifadeyi kullanarak web üzerinde arama yapmak için ekrana çift dokunun. Web tarama için rotor seçeneklerini ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Rotor bölümüne gidin. Seçenekleri seçmek veya seçimlerini kaldırmak için dokunun ya da bir öğenin yerini değiştirmek için simgesini yukarıya sürükleyin. Dolaşırken görüntüleri atlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Görüntüleri Dolaş bölümüne gidin. Tüm görüntüleri veya yalnızca açıklaması olmayanları atlamayı seçebilirsiniz. Daha kolay okuma ve dolaşma için sayfa karışıklığını azaltma:  Safari adres alanında Okuyucu öğesini seçin (bazı sayfalarda kullanılamayabilir). VoiceOver’ı Harita ile kullanma VoiceOver ile büyütebilir veya küçültebilir, bir iğne seçebilir veya bir konum hakkında bilgi alabilirsiniz. Haritayı keşfetme:  Parmağınızı ekranın üzerinde sürükleyin veya başka bir öğeye gitmek için sola veya sağa kaydırın. Büyütme veya küçültme:  Haritayı seçin, rotoru Büyütme’ye ayarlayın, sonra tek parmağınızla yukarı veya aşağı kaydırın. Haritanın diğer bölümlerini görme:  Üç parmağınızla kaydırın. Görünür ilgi çekici yerleri tarama:  Rotoru İlgi Çekici Yerler’e ayarlayın, sonra tek parmağınızla yukarı veya aşağı kaydırın. Yolu takip etme:  Parmağınızı yola basılı tutun, “İzlemeyi duraklat” ifadesini duyana kadar bekleyin, daha sonra kılavuz tonunu dinlerken parmağınızı yol boyunca hareket ettirin. Yoldan saptığınızda ses perdesi yükselir. İğne seçme:  İğneye dokunun veya iğneyi seçmek için sola ya da sağa kaydırın. Konum hakkında bilgi alma:  İğne seçiliyken, bilgi bayrağını görüntülemek için çift dokunun. Daha Fazla Bilgi düğmesini seçmek için sola veya sağa kaydırın, daha sonra bilgi sayfasını görüntülemek için çift dokunun.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 109 Videoları VoiceOver ile düzenleme Kamera videolarını ve kısaltmak için VoiceOver hareketlerini kullanabilirsiniz. Videoyu kısaltma:  Bir videoyu görüntülerken, video denetimlerini görüntülemek için ekrana çift dokunun. Kırpma aracının başını veya sonunu seçin. Daha sonra, sağa doğru sürüklemek için yukarı veya sola doğru sürüklemek için aşağı itin. VoiceOver, o anki konumun kayıttan kısaltacağı süreyi bildirir. Kısaltmayı tamamlamak için, Kısalt’ı seçin ve çift dokunun. VoiceOver’ı Apple kablosuz klavyeyi kullanarak denetleme VoiceOver’ı iPad ile eşlenmiş bir Apple kablosuz klavye kullanarak denetleyebilirsiniz. Bakınız: Bluetooth aygıtları sayfa 34. Ekranda dolaşmak, öğeleri seçmek, ekran içeriğini okumak, rotoru ayarlamak ve diğer VoiceOver eylemlerini gerçekleştirmek için VoiceOver klavye komutlarını kullanabilirsiniz. Biri dışında tüm klavye komutlarında, aşağıdaki tabloda "VO" olarak kısaltılmış olan Kontrol-Option tuşları kullanılır. VoiceOver Yardım, yazdığınız tuşları veya klavye komutlarını seslendirir. Klavye yerleşimini ve tuş birleşimleriyle ilişkili eylemleri öğrenmek için VoiceOver Yardım’ı kullanabilirsiniz. VoiceOver klavye komutları VO = Kontrol-Option • O anki konumdan başlayarak tümünü okuma:  VO–A • En üstten başlayarak okuma:  VO–B • Durum çubuğuna gitme:  VO–M • Ana Ekran düğmesine basma:  VO–H • Bir sonraki veya bir önceki öğeyi seçme:  VO–Sağ Ok veya VO–Sol Ok • Öğeye dokunma:  VO–Boşluk çubuğu • İki parmakla çift dokunma:  VO–”-” • Bir sonraki veya bir önceki rotor öğesini seçme:  VO–Yukarı Ok veya VO–Aşağı Ok • Bir sonraki veya bir önceki konuşma rotoru öğesini seçme:  VO–Komut–Sol Ok veya VO–Komut–Sağ Ok • Konuşma rotoru öğesini ayarlama:  VO–Komut–Yukarı Ok veya VO–Komut–Aşağı Ok • VoiceOver sesini kapatma veya açma:  VO–S • Ekran perdesini açma veya kapatma:  VO–Shift-S • VoiceOver yardımı açma:  VO–K • Önceki ekrana dönme veya VoiceOver yardımı kapatma:  Escape Hızlı Dolaşma Ok tuşlarını kullanarak VoiceOver’ı denetlemek için Hızlı Dolaşma’yı açın. • Hızlı Dolaşma’yı açma veya kapatma:  Sol Ok–Sağ Ok • Bir sonraki veya bir önceki öğeyi seçme:  Sağ Ok veya Sol Ok • Rotor ayarı tarafından belirtilen bir sonraki veya bir önceki öğeyi seçme:  Yukarı Ok veya Aşağı Ok • Birinci veya sonuncu öğeyi seçme:  Kontrol–Yukarı Ok veya Kontrol–Aşağı Ok • Öğeye "dokunma":  Yukarı Ok–Aşağı Ok • Yukarıya, aşağıya, sola veya sağa doğru sürükleme:  Option–Yukarı Ok, Option–Aşağı Ok, Option–Sol Ok veya Option–Sağ Ok • Rotoru değiştirme:  Yukarı Ok–Sol Ok veya Yukarı Ok–Sağ OkBölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 110 Web için tek harfle Hızlı Dolaşma Hızlı Dolaşma etkin olarak bir web sayfasını görüntülerken sayfada hızlı bir şekilde dolaşmak için klavyede aşağıdaki tuşları kullanabilirsiniz. Tuşa basıldığında belirtilen türdeki bir sonraki öğeye gidilir. Bir önceki öğeye gitmek için, harfi yazarken Shift tuşunu basılı tutun. • Başlık:  H • Bağlantı:  L • Metin alanı:  R • Düğme:  B • Form denetimi:  C • Görüntü:  I • Tablo:  T • Statik metin:  S • ARIA referans noktası:  W • Liste:  X • Aynı türdeki bir öğe:  M • Düzey 1 başlık:  1 • Düzey 2 başlık:  2 • Düzey 3 başlık:  3 • Düzey 4 başlık:  4 • Düzey 5 başlık:  5 • Düzey 6 başlık:  6 VoiceOver ile Braille ekranı kullanma VoiceOver çıkışını Braille’de okumak için yenilenebilir bir Bluetooth Braille ekranı kullanabilirsiniz ve VoiceOver açıkken iPad’i denetlemek için giriş tuşları ve diğer denetimleri olan Braille ekranlarını da kullanabilirsiniz. iPad, popüler kablosuz Braille ekranlarının birçoğuyla çalışır. Desteklenen Braille ekranlarının listesi için, şu adrese gidin: www.apple.com/accessibility/iphone/braille-display.html. Braille ekranını ayarlama:  Ekranı açın ve daha sonra Ayarlar > Genel > Bluetooth bölümüne gidip Bluetooth’u açın. Daha sonra Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Braille bölümüne gidip ekranı seçin. Küçültülmüş veya sekiz noktalı Braille’i açma veya kapatma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > VoiceOver > Braille bölümüne gidin. VoiceOver ile dolaşma için kullanılan yaygın Braille komutları hakkındaki ve belli ekranlara özel bilgileri edinmek için şu adrese gidin: support.apple.com/kb/HT4400?viewlocale=tr_TR. Braille ekranı, Sesle Denetim için ayarlanmış olan dili kullanır. Genellikle bu, Ayarlar > Uluslararası > Dil bölümünde iPad için ayarlanmış olan dildir. VoiceOver ve braille ekranları için farklı bir dil ayarlamak amacıyla VoiceOver dil ayarını kullanabilirsiniz. VoiceOver için dili ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Uluslararası > Sesle Denetim bölümüne gidin ve sonra dili seçin. iPad için dili değiştirirseniz, VoiceOver ve braille ekranınız için olan dili yeniden ayarlamanız gerekebilir.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 111 Braille ekranınızın en sol veya en sağ hücresini sistem durumunu ve diğer bilgileri sağlamaya ayarlayabilirsiniz: • Duyuru Tarihçesi okunmamış bir ileti içeriyor • Şu anki Duyuru Tarihçesi mesajı okunmamış • VoiceOver sesi kapatılmış • iPad pili azalmış (şarjın % 20’sinden daha azı) • iPad yatay yönde • Ekran görüntüsü kapalı • Şu anki satır solda ek metin içeriyor • Şu anki satır sağda ek metin içeriyor En soldaki veya en sağdaki hücreyi durum bilgisini görüntülemeye ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik> VoiceOver > Braille > Durum Hücresi bölümüne gidin ve Sol’a veya Sağ’a dokunun. Durum hücresinin genişletilmiş açıklamasını görme:  Braille ekranınızda, durum hücresinin yöneltici düğmesine basın. Siri Siri ile sadece sorular sorarak iPad’inizle çalışabilirsiniz (uygulamaları açmak gibi) ve VoiceOver, Siri yanıtlarını size okuyabilir. Bilgi için, bakınız: Siri nedir? sayfa 37. Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık, Ana Ekran düğmesine hızlı bir şekilde üç kez basarak bazı Erişilebilirlik özelliklerini açıp kapatmanızı sağlar. Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık özelliğini şunlar için kullanabilirsiniz: • VoiceOver • Renkleri Tersine Çevirme • Büyütme • AssistiveTouch • Güdümlü Erişim (Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık, zaten açıksa Güdümlü Erişim’i başlatır. Bakınız: Güdümlü Erişim sayfa 113.) Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık işlevini ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık bölümüne gidin. Birden fazlasını seçerseniz, Ana Ekran’a üç kez bastığınızda hangisini denetlemek istediğiniz sorulur. Tıklama hızını yavaşlatma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > Ana Ekran’a Tık Hızı bölümüne gidin. Büyütme Birçok uygulama belirli öğeleri büyütmenize veya küçültmenize olanak sağlar. Örneğin, Safari’deki web sayfası sütunlarını genişletmek için çift dokunabilir veya iki parmağınızı kıstırıp açabilirsiniz. Ama ayrıca, kullandığınız herhangi bir uygulama ekranının tamamını büyütmenizi sağlayan Büyütme erişilebilirlik özelliği de vardır. Büyütme’yi VoiceOver ile birlikte kullanabilirsiniz. Büyütme’yi açma ya da kapatma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > Büyütme bölümüne gidin. Veya Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık seçeneğini kullanın. Bakınız: Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık sayfa 111.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 112 Büyütme veya küçültme:  Ekrana, üç parmağınızla çift dokunun. Büyütme oranını değiştirme:  Üç parmağınızla dokunun ve yukarıya veya aşağıya sürükleyin. Dokunup sürükleme hareketi, çift dokunmaya benzerdir. Tek farkı; ikinci dokunuşta parmaklarınızı kaldırmaz, ekranda sürüklersiniz. Sürüklemeye başladığınızda tek parmağınızla sürükleyebilirsiniz. Üç parmağınızla çift dokunarak tekrar küçültüp büyüttüğünüzde iPad ayarlanmış büyütme oranına döner. Ekranın diğer bölümlerini görme:  Ekran büyütülmüşken, üç parmağınızla ekranı sürükleyin. Sürüklemeye başladıktan sonra, ekranın daha fazla bölümünü görebilmek için tek parmağınızla sürükleyebilirsiniz. Veya, parmağınızı ekranın bir kenarına yakın basılı tutarak o tarafa kaydırın. Daha hızlı kaydırmak için, parmağınızı kenara daha çok yaklaştırın. Yeni bir ekran açtığınızda, Büyütme ekranın üst ortasına gider. Büyütme’yi Apple kablosuz klavye ile kullanırken; ekran görüntüsü, ekleme noktasını ekranın merkezinde tutarak onu takip eder. Bakınız: Apple kablosuz klavye sayfa 26. Büyük Metin Büyük Metin; uyarılardaki, Takvim’deki, Kişiler’deki, Mail’deki, Mesajlar’daki ve Notlar’daki puntoyu artırmanıza olanak tanır. Metin puntosunu ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > Büyük Metin bölümüne gidin. Renkleri Tersine Çevirme Bazen iPad ekranındaki renkleri tersine çevirmek onu okumayı kolaylaştırabilir. Renkleri Tersine Çevirme açıkken; ekran, fotoğraf negatifi gibi görünür. Ekran renklerini tersine çevirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > Renkleri Tersine Çevirme bölümüne gidin. Seçimi Seslendir VoiceOver kapalı olsa bile, iPad'in seçtiğiniz herhangi bir metni sesli okumasını sağlayabilirsiniz. Seçimi Seslendir’i açma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > Seçimi Seslendir bölümüne gidin. Burada ayrıca: • Seslendirme hızını ayarlayabilirsiniz • Her bir sözcüğün okunurken vurgulanmasını seçebilirsiniz Metnin okunmasını sağlama:  Metni seçin ve daha sonra Seslendir’e dokunun. Otomatik Seslendir Otomatik Seslendir, siz yazarken iPad'in yaptığı metin düzeltmelerini ve önerilerini söyler. Otomatik Seslendir seçeneğini açma veya kapatma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > Otomatik Seslendir bölümüne gidin. Otomatik Seslendir, VoiceOver ve Büyütme ile de çalışır.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 113 Mono Ses Mono Ses, sol ve sağ kanallardaki sesi her iki tarafta da çalınan tek bir (mono) sinyalde birleştirir. Bu, tek kulağında işitme sorunu olan kullanıcıların tüm ses sinyalini diğer kulaklarıyla duymasını sağlar. Mono Ses’i açma veya kapatma ve ses dengesini ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > Mono Ses bölümüne gidin. Atanabilir ses tonları Kişiler listenizdeki kişilere, arayan FaceTime numarasına göre ayırt edici bir ses tonu atayabilirsiniz. Diğer çeşitli etkinliklerle (yeni sesli mesaj, yeni ileti, gönderilmiş ileti, Tweet, Facebook gönderisi ve anımsatıcılar gibi) ilgili uyarı almak için de farklı ses tonları atayabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Sesler sayfa 124. Zil seslerini iPad’deki iTunes Store’dan satın alabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Bölüm 20, iTunes Store, sayfa 88. Güdümlü Erişim Güdümlü Erişim, iPad kullanan bir kişinin belirli bir işe odaklanmış olarak kalmasına yardım eder. Güdümlü Erişim, iPad’i tek bir uygulamayla sınırlar ve hangi uygulama özelliklerinin kullanılabileceğini denetlemenizi sağlar. Şunları yapmak için Güdümlü Erişim’i kullanın: • iPad’i geçici olarak belirli bir uygulamayla sınırlama • Bir görevle ilgili olmayan ekran alanlarını veya yanlışlıkla yapılan bir hareketin dikkat dağılmasına yol açabileceği alanları etkisizleştirme • iPad’in donanım düğmelerini etkisizleştirme Güdümlü Erişim’i kullanma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > Güdümlü Erişim bölümünde şunları yapabilirsiniz: • Güdümlü Erişim’i açma veya kapatma • Güdümlü Erişim’in kullanımını denetleyen ve kişinin etkin bir oturumu terk etmesini engelleyen bir parola ayarlama • iPad’in bir oturum sırasında uyku durumuna geçip geçmeyeceğini ayarlama Güdümlü Erişim oturumu başlatma:  Çalıştırmak istediğiniz uygulamayı açın, sonra Ana Ekran düğmesine üç kez basın. Oturum ayarlarını yapın, sonra Başlat’ı tıklayın. • Uygulama denetimlerini ve uygulama ekranı bölgelerini etkisizleştirme:  Ekranın etkisizleştirmek istediğiniz herhangi bir bölümünü yuvarlak içine alın. Alanı ayarlamak için tutamakları kullanabilirsiniz. • Tüm ekran dokunuşlarını göz ardı etme:  Dokunma’yı kapatın. • iPad’in yatay ekrandan düşey ekrana geçmesini veya diğer hareketlere yanıt vermesini engelleme:  Hareket’i kapatın. Güdümlü Erişim oturumunu sona erdirme:  Ana Ekran düğmesine üç kez basın ve Güdümlü Erişim parolasını girin.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 114 AssistiveTouch AssistiveTouch, ekrana dokunma veya düğmelere basma güçlüğü çekiyorsanız iPad’i kullanmanıza yardımcı olur. iPad’i denetlemek için AssistiveTouch ile birlikte uyumlu bir uyarlanabilir aksesuar (kumanda kolu gibi) kullanabilirsiniz. Size zor gelen hareketleri gerçekleştirmek için bir aksesuar olmadan AssistiveTouch’ı da kullanabilirsiniz. AssistiveTouch’ı açma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > AssistiveTouch bölümüne gidin. AssistiveTouch’ı açmak veya kapatmak amacıyla Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık seçeneğini ayarlamak için, Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik> Ana Ekran’a Üç Tık bölümüne gidin. İzleme hızını ayarlama (aksesuar bağlıyken):  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > AssistiveTouch > İzleme hızı bölümüne gidin. AssistiveTouch menüsünü gösterme veya gizleme:  Aksesuarınızda ikincil düğmeyi tıklayın. Menü düğmesini gizleme (aksesuar bağlıyken):  Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > AssistiveTouch > Menüyü Hep Göster bölümüne gidin. 2, 3, 4 veya 5 parmağı kullanan bir kaydırma veya sürükleme gerçekleştirme:  Menü düğmesine dokunun, Hareketler’e dokunun ve daha sonra hareket için gerekli olan basamak sayısına dokunun. Ekranda karşılık gelen daireler göründüğünde, hareketin gerektirdiği yönde itin veya sürükleyin. İşiniz bittiğinde menü düğmesine dokunun. Kıstırıp açma hareketini gerçekleştirme:  Menü düğmesine dokunun, Favoriler’e dokunun ve daha sonra Kıstırıp Aç’a dokunun. Kıstırıp açma daireleri göründüğünde onları taşımak için ekranda herhangi bir yere dokunun ve daha sonra kıstırıp açma hareketini gerçekleştirmek için kıstırıp açma dairelerini içeriye veya dışarıya sürükleyin. İşiniz bittiğinde menü düğmesine dokunun. Kendi hareketinizi yaratma:  Menü düğmesine dokunun, Favoriler’e dokunun ve daha sonra boş bir hareket yer tutucusuna dokunun. Veya Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik > AssistiveTouch > Yeni Hareket Yarat bölümüne gidin. Ekranı kilitleme veya döndürme, iPad’in ses yüksekliğini ayarlama veya iPad’in sallanmasına benzetme:  Menü düğmesine dokunun ve daha sonra Aygıt düğmesine dokunun. Ana Ekran düğmesinin basılmasına benzetme:  Menü düğmesine dokunun ve daha sonra Ana Ekran düğmesine dokunun. Menü düğmesini taşıma:  Ekranda herhangi bir konuma sürükleyin. Hareketi gerçekleştirmeden menüden çıkma:  Menünün dışında herhangi bir yere dokunun. OS X’deki Erişilebilirlik iTunes arşivinizdeki bilgileri ve içerikleri eşzamanlayarak iPad’e aktarmak için iTunes’u kullanırken OS X’deki erişilebilirlik özelliklerinden yararlanın. Finder’da, Yardım > Yardım Merkezi komutunu seçin ve sonra “erişilebilirlik” ifadesini aratın. iPad ve OS X’in erişilebilirlik özellikleri hakkında daha fazla bilgi için www.apple.com/accessibility adresine gidin.Bölüm 26 Erişilebilirlik 115 Mail iletileri için en küçük font puntosu Okunabilirliği artırmak için Mail ileti metni için en küçük font puntosunu Büyük, Çok Büyük veya En Büyük olarak ayarlayın. Mail iletilerinin minimum font puntosunu ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler > En Küçük Punto bölümüne gidin. Büyük Metin ayarı en küçük font puntosunu geçersiz kılar. Geniş ekran klavyeler iPad'deki yerleşik tüm uygulamalar, iPad'i yatay görüntüleyecek şekilde döndürdüğünüzde daha büyük bir ekran klavyesi gösterir. Apple kablosuz klavyeyi kullanarak da yazabilirsiniz. Gizli altyazılar Videolar için gizli altyazıları açma:  Ayarlar > Videolar > Gizli Altyazılar bölümüne gidin. Her video içeriği gizli altyazı içermeyebilir.27 116 Ayarlar; iPad'i ayarlamanızı, uygulama seçeneklerini belirlemenizi, hesaplar eklemenizi ve diğer tercihleri değiştirmenizi sağlar. Yerleşik uygulamaların ayarları hakkında bilgi almak istiyorsanız diğer bölümlere bakın. Örneğin Safari ayarları için, Bölüm 5, Safari, sayfa 43 konusuna bakın. Uçak modu Uçak Modu seçeneği, uçağın çalışma sistemlerinde ve diğer elektrikli cihazlarda parazite neden olma olasılığını azaltmak için kablosuz iletişim özelliklerini etkisizleştirir. Uçak modunu açma:  Ayarlar bölümüne gidin ve Uçak Modu seçeneğini açın. Uçak Modu seçeneği açıkken, ekranın en üstündeki durum çubuğunda  simgesi görünür. Wi-Fi + hücresel'den Wi-Fi, Bluetooth veya hücresel sinyaller (iPad modellerinde) yayılmaz Bu sinyallere dayanan uygulamaları ve özellikleri (Internet’e bağlanma gibi) kullanamayacaksınız. Uçuş yetkililerinin ve geçerli mevzuatın izin verdiği yerlerde, iPad'i ve bu sinyallere gerek duymayan uygulamaları kullanabilirsiniz. Wi-Fi varsa ve uçuş yetkililerinin ve geçerli mevzuatın izin verdiği yerlerde kullanılabiliyorsa, Wi-Fi’yi açmak için Ayarlar > Wi-Fi bölümüne gidin. Ayrıca Ayarlar > Bluetooth bölümünde Bluetooth’u da açabilirsiniz. Wi-Fi Bir Wi-Fi ağına katılma Wi-Fi ayarları, iPad'in Internet’e bağlanmak için yerel Wi-Fi ağlarını kullanıp kullanmadığını belirler. iPad bir Wi-Fi ağına katıldığında, ekranın en üstündeki durum çubuğunda bulunan Wi-Fi simgesi  sinyal gücünü gösterir. Ne kadar çok çubuk görürseniz, sinyal o kadar güçlüdür. Bir Wi-Fi ağına katıldıktan sonra, bu ağ kapsama alanı içindeyken iPad ona otomatik olarak bağlanır. Kapsama alanı içinde önceden kullanılan birden fazla ağ varsa, iPad en son kullanılana katılır. Evinizde veya iş yerinizde Wi-Fi servislerini sağlayan yeni bir AirPort baz istasyonu ayarlamak için de iPad’u kullanabilirsiniz. Bakınız: AirPort baz istasyonunu ayarlama sayfa 117. Wi-Fi seçeneğini açma veya kapatma:  Ayarlar > Wi-Fi bölümüne gidin. Şunları yapabilirsiniz: • iPad’u yeni bir ağa katılmak isteyip istemediğinizi soracak şekilde ayarlama: “Ağlara Katılmadan Sor” seçeneğini açın veya kapatın. “Ağlara Katılmadan Sor” seçeneği kapalıysa ve önceden kullanılmış bir ağ yoksa Internet’e bağlanmak için ağa katılmayı elle seçmeniz gerekir. • iPad’un katılmaması için bir ağı unutma: Daha önce katıldığınız bir ağın yanındaki  simgesine dokunun. Sonra da “Bu Ağı Unut” düğmesine dokunun. AyarlarBölüm 27 Ayarlar 117 • Kapalı bir Wi-Fi ağına katılma: Ağ adları listesinde Diğer’e dokunun ve daha sonra kapalı ağın adını girin. Kapalı bir ağa bağlanmak için ağın adını, parolasını ve güvenlik türünü biliyor olmalısınız. • Wi-Fi ağına bağlanmayla ilgili ayarları yapma: Ağın yanındaki  simgesine dokunun. Bir HHTP proxy ayarlayabilir, statik ağ ayarlarını tanımlayabilir, BootP'yi açabilir veya DHCP sunucu tarafından sağlanan ayarları yenileyebilirsiniz. AirPort baz istasyonunu ayarlama AirPort baz istasyonu; evinizdeki, okulunuzdaki veya küçük işletmenizdeki ağ için Wi-Fi bağlantısı sağlar. Yeni bir AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme veya Time Capsule baz istasyonu ayarlamak için iPad’ı kullanabilirsiniz. AirPort Ayarlama Yardımcısı’nı kullanma:  Ayarlar > Wi-Fi bölümüne gidin. “Bir AirPort Baz İstasyonu Ayarla”nın altında, ayarlamak istediğiniz baz istasyonunun adına dokunun. Daha sonra ekrandaki yönergeleri izleyin. Ayarlamak istediğiniz baz istasyonu listelenmiyorsa, baz istasyonunun açık olduğundan, kapsama alanında bulunduğunuzdan ve baz istasyonunun daha önce ayarlanmış olmadığından emin olun. Yalnızca yeni veya sıfırlanmış olan baz istasyonlarını ayarlayabilirsiniz. Bazı eski AirPort baz istasyonları iOS aygıtı kullanılarak ayarlanamaz. Ayarlama yönergeleri için, baz istasyonuyla birlikte gelen belgelere bakın. AirPort ağını yönetme: iPad bir AirPort baz istasyonuna bağlıysa, ağ adının yanındaki simgesine dokunun. AirPort İzlencesi’ni önceden indirmediyseniz, almanız için App Store açılır. VPN Şirketiniz özel bilgileri, özel olmayan bir ağ üzerinden güvenli bir şekilde iletmek için VPN kullanıyor olabilir. Örneğin, işle ilgili e-postalarınıza erişmek için VPN’i ayarlamanız gerekebilir. Bu ayar, iPad üzerinde VPN ayarlanmışsa görünür ve VPN seçeneğini açmanıza veya kapatmanıza olanak sağlar. Bakınız: VPN sayfa 121. Kişisel Erişim Noktası Internet bağlantısını, Wi-Fi + hücresel’inize Wi-Fi üzerinden bağlı bir bilgisayarla veya başka bir aygıtla—Pod touch veya iPhone gibi—paylaşmak için Kişisel Erişim Noktası’nı kullanabilirsiniz (iPad modellerinde). Internet bağlantısını iPad’e Bluetooth veya USB yoluyla bağlı bir bilgisayarla paylaşmak için de Kişisel Erişim Noktası’nı kullanabilirsiniz. Kişisel Erişim Noktası sadece; iPad, hücresel veri ağı üzerinden Internet’e bağlıysa çalışır. Not: Bu özellik bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir. Ek ücret ödemeniz gerekebilir. Daha fazla bilgi için operatörünüze danışın. Internet bağlantısını paylaşma:  Servisi operatörünüzle ayarlamak için Ayarlar > Genel > Hücresel bölümüne gidin ve Kişisel Erişim Noktasını Ayarla düğmesine (görünüyorsa) dokunun. Kişisel Erişim Noktası’nı açtıktan sonra diğer aygıtlar şu şekillerde bağlanabilir: • W-Fi:  Aygıt üzerinde, kullanılabilir Wi-Fi ağları listesinde iPad’inizi seçin. • USB:  iPad ile birlikte gelen kabloyu kullanarak bilgisayarınızı iPad'e bağlayın. Bilgisayarınızın Ağ tercihlerinde iPad’i seçin ve ağ ayarlarını yapın. • Bluetooth:  iPad'de Ayarlar > Bluetooth bölümüne gidin ve Bluetooth’u açın. iPad’i aygıtınızla eşlemek ve ona bağlanmak için bilgisayarınızla birlikte gelen belgelere bakın.Bölüm 27 Ayarlar 118 Aygıta bağlanıldığında, iPad ekranının en üstünde mavi bir bant görünür. USB üzerinden bağlandığınızda, Internet bağlantısını etkin olarak kullanmasanız bile Kişisel Erişim Noktası açık kalır. Not: Kişisel Erişim Noktası’nı kullanan iOS aygıtlarının durum çubuğunda Kişisel Erişim Noktası simgesi görünür. iPad için Wi-Fi parolasını değiştirme: Ayarlar > Kişisel Erişim Noktası > Wi-Fi Parolası bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra en az 8 karakterden oluşan bir parola girin. Hücresel veri ağı kullanımınızı izleme: Ayarlar > Genel > Kullanım > Hücresel Kullanımı bölümüne gidin. Bluetooth iPad, müzik dinlemeniz ve eller serbest olarak konuşabilmeniz için mikrofonlu kulaklık setleri, kulaklıklar ve araç kitleri gibi Bluetooth aygıtlarına kablosuz olarak bağlanabilir. Bluetooth ile Apple kablosuz klavye de bağlayabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Apple kablosuz klavye sayfa 26. Bluetooth’u açma veya kapatma:  Ayarlar > Bluetooth bölümüne gidin. Bir Bluetooth aygıtına bağlanma: Aygıtlar listesinde aygıta dokunun ve sonra ona bağlanmak için ekrandaki yönergeleri izleyin. Bluetooth eşleme hakkında bilgi için aygıtla birlikte gelen belgelere bakın. Hücresel Veri Hücresel veri servisini etkinleştirmek, hücresel kullanımı açıp kapatmak veya SIM kartı kilitlemek üzere bir PIN (Kişisel Kimlik Numarası) eklemek için iPad'deki Hücresel Veri ayarlarını kullanın (Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerinde). Bazı operatörlerde veri planınızı da değiştirebilirsiniz. Hücresel Veri seçeneğini açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > Hücresel Veri bölümüne gidin. Hücresel Veri seçeneği kapatılırsa; e-posta, web tarama, anında ilet bildirimleri ve diğer servisler de dahil olmak üzere tüm veri servisleri yalnızca Wi-Fi’yi kullanacaktır. Hücresel Veri seçeneğinin açılması operatör ücretlerine neden olabilir. Örneğin Mesajlar gibi belirli özelliklerin ve servislerin kullanılması veri planınızda ücretlendirmeye neden olabilecek veriler aktarır. LTE’yi açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > Hücresel Veri bölümüne gidin. LTE kullanılabilir ise, onu açmak verileri daha hızlı yükler. Uluslararası Dolaşım seçeneğini açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > Hücresel Veri bölümüne gidin. Uluslararası Dolaşım'ın kapatılması, farklı bir operatör tarafından sağlanan bir ağın kullanılması sonucu operatör ücretleri uygulanmasını engeller. Kişisel Erişim Noktası’nı ayarlama: Ayarlar > Hücresel Veri > Kişisel Erişim Noktası bölümüne gidin. Kişisel Erişim Noktası, iPad’in Internet bağlantısını bilgisayarınızla ve diğer iOS aygıtlarınızla paylaşır. Bakınız: Kişisel Erişim Noktası sayfa 117. Hücresel veri kullanılırken ayarlama: Ayarlar > Hücresel Veri bölümüne gidin, sonra iCloud Belgeleri, iTunes, FaceTime veya Okuma Listesi için hücresel veriyi açın veya kapatın. Bu ayarlar kapalıyken, iPad yalnızca Wi-Fi ağını kullanır. iTunes, hem iTunes Match’i hem de iTunes’dan ve App Store’dan otomatik indirmeleri içerir. Hücresel veri hesabınızı etkinleştirme, görüntüleme veya değiştirme:  Ayarlar > Hücresel Veri bölümüne gidin ve sonra Hesabı Göster’e dokunun. Ekrandaki yönergeleri izleyin. SIM'i kilitleme: Ayarlar > Hücresel Veri > SIM PIN bölümüne gidin. SIM'i kilitleme, iPad'in hücresel bağlantısını kullanmak için PIN gerektirir.Bölüm 27 Ayarlar 119 Rahatsız Etme ve Bildirimler Anında ilet bildirimleri Bildirim Merkezi’nde görünür ve ilişkili uygulama çalışmıyor olsa bile yeni bilgileri size bildirir. Bildirimler, uygulamaya göre değişir ve yazılı veya sesli uyarılar ve Ana Ekran’daki uygulama simgesinde görünen numaralı bir işaret içerebilir. Tüm bildirimleri kapatma: Ayarlar’a gidin ve Rahatsız Etme’yi açın. Bu özellik açıkken ve iPad kilitliyken, tüm bildirimler sessize alınır ama alarmlar hâlâ seslidir. Ayarlar > Bildirimler > Rahatsız Etme bölümünde aşağıdaki seçenekleri ayarlayabilirsiniz: • Rahatsız Etme’yi otomatik olarak açma: Rahatsız edilmek istemediğiniz zamanın başlangıç ve bitiş saatini ayarlayın. iPad Rahatsız Etme’yi her gün bu saatlerde otomatik olarak açar. • Rahatsız Etme sırasında bazı FaceTime aramalarına izin verme: Rahatsız Etme açıkken, FaceTime aramaları sessize alınır. Bazı kişilerin sesli olarak aramasına izin vermek için, Arayabilecekler’e dokunun. Hızlı Arama listenizden veya tanımladığınız diğer Kişiler gruplarından gelen aramalara izin verebilirsiniz. Hızlı Arama hakkında bilgi için, bakınız: Bölüm 14, Kişiler, sayfa 71. • Israrlı aramaların sesli çalmasına izin verme: Yinelenen Aramalar’ı açın. Aynı kişi (FaceTime kimliğine göre) sizi üç dakika içinde iki kere ararsa iPad sesli olarak çalar. Uygulamanın bildirimlerini açma veya kapatma:  Ayarlar > Bildirimler bölümüne gidin. Listede bir öğeye dokunun ve daha sonra o öğe için bildirimleri açın veya kapatın. Bildirimleri kapalı olan uygulamalar Bildirim Merkezi’nde Değil listesinde görünür. Bildirimlerin nasıl görüneceğini değiştirme: Ayarlar > Bildirimler bölümüne gidin. Şunları yapabilirsiniz: • Bildirim sayısını değiştirme: Bildirim Merkezi’nde listesinde bir öğeyi seçin. Bu türdeki bildirimlerden kaç tanesinin Bildirim Merkezi’nde görüneceğini ayarlamak için Göster’e dokunun. • Uyarı stillerini değiştirme: Bildirim Merkezi’nde listesinde bir öğeyi seçin. Bir uyarı stili seçin veya uyarıları ve başlıkları kapatmak için Yok'u seçin. Bildirimler, Bildirim Merkezi'nde görünmeye devam edecektir. • Bildirimlerin sırasını değiştirme: Düzenle düğmesine dokunun. Bildirimleri istediğiniz sıraya sürükleyin. Bildirimi kapatmak için, onu Bildirim Merkezi’nde Değil listesine sürükleyin. • Bildirimlere sahip uygulamaların üzerinde numaralı işaret görüntüleme: Bildirim Merkezi’nde listesinde bir öğe seçin ve Uygulama İşareti’ni açın. • iPad kilitliyken bir uygulamanın uyarılarını gizleme: Bildirim Merkezi’nde listesinde uygulamayı seçin, sonra “Kilitli Ekranda Görüntüle”yi kapatın. Bazı uygulamalarda ek seçenekler vardır. Örneğin Mesajlar, uyarı sesinin kaç kez yineleneceğini ve mesaj önizlemelerinin bildirime dahil edilip edilmeyeceğini belirtmenize olanak tanır. Bildirim Merkezi’nde gönderileri ve Tweet’leri silme: Bu paylaşma seçenekleri yalnızca Facebook veya Twitter hesapları ayarlanmışsa görünür. Bu düğmeleri silmek için, Ayarlar > Bildirimler bölümüne gidin, sonra Paylaşma Araç Takımı’nı kapatın.Bölüm 27 Ayarlar 120 Genel Genel ayarları; ağ ayarlarını, paylaşma ayarlarını, güvenlik ayarlarını ve diğer ayarları kapsar. Ayrıca, iPad'iniz hakkında bilgiler bulabilir ve çeşitli ayarları sıfırlayabilirsiniz. Hakkında iPad hakkındaki bilgileri görüntüleme: Ayarlar > Genel > Hakkında bölümüne gidin. Görüntüleyebileceğiniz öğeler şunlardır: • Kullanılabilir saklama alanı • Seri numarası • iOS sürümü • Ağ adresleri • Hücresel Veri Numarası (Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerinde) • IMEI (Uluslararası Mobil Cihaz Kodu) (Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerinde) • GSM ağları için ICCID (Tümleşik Devre Kartı Tanıtıcısı veya Akıllı Kart) (Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerinde) • CDMA ağları için MEID (Mobil Cihaz Kimliği) (Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerinde) • Yasal uyarılar, lisans ve düzenleyici işaretler. Seri numarasını ve diğer tanıtıcıları kopyalamak için, tanıtıcıya dokunup Kopyala görününceye dek parmağınızı basılı tutun. Aygıt adını değiştirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Hakkında bölümüne gidin ve sonra Ad’a dokunun. Aygıtın adı iTunes’a bağlıyken kenar çubuğunda görünür ve iCloud tarafından kullanılır. Apple’ın ürünlerini ve servislerini geliştirmesine yardım etmek için, iPad tanı ve kullanım verilerini gönderir. Bu veriler sizi bireysel olarak teşhis etmez ama konum bilgilerini içerebilir. Tanı bilgilerini görüntüleme veya kapatma: Ayarlar > Genel > Hakkında > Tanılar ve Kullanım bölümüne gidin. Yazılım Güncelleme Yazılım Güncelleme, Apple’dan iOS güncellemelerini indirmenizi ve yüklemenizi sağlar. En son iOS sürümüne güncelleme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Yazılım Güncelleme bölümüne gidin. iOS’in daha yeni bir sürümü varsa onu indirmek ve yüklemek için ekrandaki yönergeleri izleyin. Kullanım Kullanım bilgilerini görüntüleme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Kullanım bölümüne gidin. Şunları yapabilirsiniz: • Hücresel kullanımınızı görme ve istatistikleri sıfırlama (Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerinde) • iCloud yedeklemelerini görüntüleme ve silme, Film Rulosu’nun yedeklenmesini kapatma ve ek saklama alanı satın alma • Her bir uygulamanın saklama alanını görüntüleme • Pil düzeyini yüzde olarak görüntüleme • iPad şarj olduğundan beri geçen süreyi görme Siri Siri’yi etkinleştirme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Siri bölümüne gidin. Siri’yi kullanma ve Siri ayarlarını değiştirme hakkında bilgi için, bakınız: Siri seçeneklerini ayarlama sayfa 40.Bölüm 27 Ayarlar 121 VPN Şirketlerde kullanılan VPN’ler; özel bilgileri, özel olmayan bir ağ üzerinden güvenli bir şekilde iletmenize olanak sağlar. Örneğin, işle ilgili e-postalarınıza erişmek için VPN’i ayarlamanız gerekebilir. Ağınızda VPN’i ayarlamak için gerekli ayarları ağ yöneticinize sorun. Bir veya daha fazla VPN ayarı tanımlandıktan sonra şunları yapabilirsiniz: • VPN’i açma veya kapatma: Ayarlar > VPN bölümüne gidin. • VPN’ler arasında geçiş yapma: Ayarlar > Genel > VPN bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra bir konfigürasyon seçin. iTunes Wi-Fi Eşzamanlama iPad’u aynı Wi-Fi ağına bağlı olan bir bilgisayardaki iTunes ile eşzamanlayabilirsiniz. iTunes Wi-Fi Eşzamanlama’yı etkinleştirme:  Wi-Fi eşzamanlamayı ilk kez etkinleştirmek için, iPad’u eşzamanlamak istediğiniz bilgisayara bağlayın. Yönergeler için, bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16. Wi-Fi Eşzamanlama’yı ayarladıktan sonra, iPad şu durumlarda günde bir kez iTunes ile eşzamanlanır: • iPad bir güç kaynağına bağlıyken, • iPad ve bilgisayarınız aynı Wi-Fi ağına bağlıyken ve • Bilgisayarınızdaki iTunes çalışır durumdayken. Spotlight Araması Spotlight Araması ayarı, "Ara" özelliğiyle aranacak içerik alanlarını belirtmenizi ve sonuçların sırasını yeniden düzenlemenizi sağlar. "Ara" özelliğiyle aranacak içerik alanlarını ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Spotlight Araması bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra aranacak öğeleri seçin. Sonuç kategorilerinin sırasını da değiştirebilirsiniz. Otomatik Kilit iPad’ı kilitleme, pilden tasarruf etmek ve iPad’ın istemeden çalışmasını önlemek amacıyla ekranı kapatır. Buna rağmen mesajları alabilir, ses yüksekliğini ayarlayabilir ve müzik dinlerken mikrofonlu kulaklık setinizdeki mikrofon düğmesini kullanabilirsiniz. iPad kilitlenmeden önceki süreyi ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Otomatik Kilit bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra bir süre seçin. Parolayla Kilitleme Saptanmış olarak iPad, kilidinin açılması için parola girmenizi gerektirmez. Parola ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Parolayla Kilitleme bölümüne gidin, sonra 4 basamaklı bir parola ayarlayın. Güvenliği artırmak için Basit Parola’yı kapatın ve daha uzun bir parola kullanın. Parolanızı unutursanız, iPad yazılımını geri yüklemeniz gerekir. Bakınız: iPad yazılımını güncelleme ve geri yükleme sayfa 137. iPad kilitliyken erişime izin verme: Ayarlar > Genel > Parolayla Kilitleme bölümüne gidin. iPad'in kilidini açmadan Siri'yi kullanabilirsiniz. Bakınız: Siri seçeneklerini ayarlama sayfa 40. Başarısız on parola girişiminden sonra verileri silme: Ayarlar > Genel > Parolayla Kilitleme bölümüne gidin, sonra Verileri Sil düğmesine dokunun. On başarısız parola girişiminden sonra tüm ayarlar sıfırlanır, 256 bit AES şifreleme kullanılarak şifrelenmiş olan verilerin şifreleme anahtarı kaldırılarak bilgilerinizin ve ortamlarınızın tümü silinir.Bölüm 27 Ayarlar 122 iPad Kapağıyla Kilitleme/Kilidi Açma iPad Smart Cover veya iPad Smart Case ile (ayrı satılır) kullanılırken iPad'i otomatik olarak kilitleyebilir veya kilidini açabilirsiniz. Bu özellik açıkken; kapağı kapattığınızda iPad otomatik olarak kilitlenir ve uyku durumuna geçer, kapağı açtığınızda ise uyanır. Bu ayar iPad Smart Cover’ı veya iPad Smart Case'i taktığınızda görünür. Sınırlamalar Bazı uygulamalar ve satın alınan içerikler için sınırlamalar ayarlayabilirsiniz. Örneğin, ebeveynler müstehcen müzik parçalarının listelerde gözükmesini sınırlayabilir veya uygulamaların yüklenmesini engelleyebilirler. Sınırlamaları açma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Sınırlamalar bölümüne gidin ve sonra Sınırlamaları Etkinleştir’e dokunun. Yaptığınız ayarları değiştirmek için gerekli olan bir sınırlama parolası tanımlamanız istenecektir. Bu, iPad'in kilidini açmak için kullanılan paroladan farklıdır. Önemli: Sınırlama parolanızı unutursanız, iPad yazılımını geri yüklemeniz gerekir. Bakınız: iPad yazılımını güncelleme ve geri yükleme sayfa 137. Şu uygulamalar için sınırlamalar ayarlayabilirsiniz: • Safari • Kamera (ve kamerayı kullanan uygulamalar) • FaceTime • iTunes Store • iBookstore • Siri Şunları da sınırlayabilirsiniz: • App Store: App Store etkisizleştirilir ve simgesi Ana Ekran’dan kaldırılır. iPad’a uygulama yükleyemezsiniz. • Uygulamaları Silme: iPad’daki uygulamaları silemezsiniz. simgesi Ana Ekran’ı özelleştirirken uygulama simgelerinde görünmez. • Müstehcen Dil: Siri, seslendirdiğiniz açık sözcüklerin yerine yıldız işaretleri ve bip sesleri kullanarak onları değiştirmeye çalışır • Gizlilik: Konum Servisleri, Kişiler, Takvimler, Anımsatıcılar, Fotoğraflar, Bluetooth Paylaşma, Twitter ve Facebook için o anki gizlilik ayarlarının her biri kilitlenebilir. • Hesaplar: O anki Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler ayarları kilitlenir. Hesap ekleyemez ve hesabı değiştiremez veya silemezsiniz. iCloud ayarlarını da değiştiremezsiniz. • Arkadaşlarımı Bul: O anki Arkadaşlarımı Bul ayarları kilitlenir. Bu seçenek, Arkadaşlarımı Bul uygulaması yüklüyse kullanılabilir. • Ses Sınırı: O anki ses yüksekliği sınırı ayarı kilitlenir. • Uygulama İçi Alım: Uygulama İçi Alım kapalıyken App Store’dan indirdiğiniz uygulamalar için ek içerik veya işlevsellik satın alamazsınız. • Parola Gereksin: Belirttiğiniz süreden sonraki uygulama içi alımlarda Apple kimliğinizin girilmesini gerektirir. • İçerik Sınırlamaları: Derecelendirme’ye dokunun, daha sonra listeden bir ülke seçin. Sonra müzikler, podcast’ler, kitaplar, filmler, TV şovları ve uygulamalar için sınırlamaları ayarlayın. Seçtiğiniz derecelendirme sistemine uygun olmayan içerikler iPad’da görünmez.Bölüm 27 Ayarlar 123 • Çok Oyunculu Oyunlar: Çok Oyunculu Oyunlar seçeneği kapalıyken eşleme isteyemez, oyun oynamak için davet gönderip alamaz ya da Game Center’da arkadaş ekleyemezsiniz. • Arkadaş Ekleme: Arkadaş Ekleme seçeneği kapatılırsa, Game Center’da arkadaşlık isteği gönderemez veya alamazsınız. Çok Oyunculu Oyunlar seçeneği açılırsa, var olan arkadaşlarla oyun oynamayı sürdürebilirsiniz. Yandaki Anahtar Ekran yönünü kilitlemek veya bildirimlerin ve ses efektlerinin sesini kapatmak için Yandaki Anahtarı kullanabilirsiniz. Ekranı düşey veya yatay yöne kilitleme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Yandaki Anahtarı Kullanarak… bölümüne gidin, sonra Yönü Kilitle'ye dokunun. Bildirimlerin ve ses efektlerinin sesini kapatma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Yandaki Anahtarı Kullanarak… bölümüne gidin, sonra Sesi Kapat'a dokunun. Yandaki Anahtar, çalınan sesi veya oynatılan videonun sesini kapatmaz. Bu sesleri kapatmak için yandaki ses yüksekliği düğmelerini kullanın. Çoklu Görev Hareketleri Çoklu görev hareketleri; uygulamalar arasında hızla geçiş yapmanıza, çoklu görev çubuğunu göstermenize ve Ana Ekran'a gitmenize olanak tanır. Bakınız: Çoklu Görev hareketleri sayfa 20. Tarih ve Saat Bu ayarlar; ekranın en üstündeki durum çubuğunda gösterilen saati, dünya saatlerini ve takvimlerinizi etkiler. iPad’u saati 24 saat ya da 12 saat biçiminde gösterecek şekilde ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Genel > Tarih ve Saat bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra 24 Saat Biçimi seçeneğini açın ya da kapatın. (24 Saat Biçimi bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir.) iPad’u tarihi ve saati otomatik olarak güncellemeye ayarlama: Ayarlar > Genel > Tarih ve Saat bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Otomatik Ayarla seçeneğini açın ya da kapatın. iPad saati otomatik olarak güncellemeye ayarlanmışsa, doğru saati hücresel (Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerinde) veya Wi-Fi bağlantınızın üzerinden alır. Bazı durumlarda iPad yerel saati otomatik olarak belirleyemeyebilir. Tarihi ve saati elle ayarlama: Ayarlar > Genel > Tarih ve Saat bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Otomatik Ayarla seçeneğini kapatın. Saat diliminizi ayarlamak için Saat Dilimi’ne dokunun. Tarih ve Saat düğmesine dokunun ve daha sonra Tarih ve Saati Ayarla düğmesine dokunun. Klavye Farklı dillerde yazmak için klavyeleri açabilir ve yazım denetimi gibi yazma özelliklerini açabilir veya kapatabilirsiniz. Klavye seçenekleri hakkında bilgi için, bakınız: Yazma sayfa 23. Uluslararası klavyeleri kullanma hakkında bilgi için, bakınız: Ek B, Uluslararası Klavyeler, sayfa 128. Uluslararası Aşağıdakileri ayarlamak için Ayarlar > Genel > Uluslararası bölümüne gidin: • iPad’de kullanılan dil • Takvim biçimi • Kullandığınız klavyeler • Tarih, saat ve numara biçimleriBölüm 27 Ayarlar 124 Erişilebilirlik Ayarlar > Genel > Erişilebilirlik bölümüne gidin ve istediğiniz özellikleri açın. Bakınız: Bölüm 26, Erişilebilirlik, sayfa 102. Profiller Bu ayar, iPad üzerine bir veya daha fazla profil yüklediyseniz görünür. Yüklediğiniz profiller hakkında bilgi almak için Profiller’e dokunun. Profiller hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, bakınız: Ek A, İş hayatında iPad, sayfa 126. Sıfırlama Sözcük sözlüğünü, ağ ayarlarını, ana ekran yerleşimini ve konum uyarılarını sıfırlayabilirsiniz. İçeriklerinizin ve ayarlarınızın tümünü de silebilirsiniz. iPad’u sıfırlama: Ayarlar > Genel > Sıfırla bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra bir seçenek seçin: • Tüm ayarları sıfırlama: Tüm tercihleriniz ve ayarlarınız sıfırlanır. • Tüm içeriği ve ayarları silme: Bilgileriniz ve ayarlarınız silinir. iPad yeniden ayarlanıncaya dek kullanılamaz. • Ağ ayarlarını sıfırlama: Ağ ayarlarını sıfırladığınızda daha önce kullanılan ağların listesi ve bir konfigürasyon profili tarafından yüklenmemiş VPN ayarlarınız silinir. Wi-Fi kapatılıp yeniden açılır ve bağlı olduğunuz ağlarla bağlantınız kesilir. Wi-Fi ve “Ağlara Katılmadan Sor” ayarları açık kalır. Bir konfigürasyon profili tarafından yüklenmiş VPN ayarlarını silmek için, Ayarlar > Genel > Profil bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra profili seçip Sil’e dokunun. Bu işlem, profil tarafından sağlanan diğer ayarları veya hesapları da siler. • Klavye sözlüğünü sıfırlama: Yazarken iPad’un önerdiği sözcükleri reddederek klavye sözlüğüne sözcükler eklersiniz. Klavye sözlüğünü sıfırlama, eklediğiniz tüm sözcükleri siler. • Ana Ekran yerleşimini sıfırlama: Yerleşik uygulamaları Ana Ekran’da özgün yerleşimlerine döndürür. • Konumu ve gizliliği sıfırlama: Konum servisleri ve gizlilik ayarlarını fabrika saptanmışlarına sıfırlar. Sesler iPad’ı yeni bir mesaj, e-posta, Tweet, Facebook gönderisi, sesli mesaj veya anımsatıcı aldığınızda ses çalacak şekilde ayarlayabilirsiniz. Randevular, e-posta gönderimleri, klavye tıklamaları için ve iPad’ı kilitlediğiniz zaman için de ses ayarlayabilirsiniz. Ses ayarlarını değiştirme: Ayarlar > Sesler bölümüne gidin. Kullanılabilir seçenekler arasında şunlar bulunur: • Zil sesinin ve uyarı seslerinin yüksekliğini ayarlama. • Uyarıları ve diğer ses tonlarını ayarlama. • iPad'in kilitlendiği zamanlar için klavye tıklamalarını ve ses tonunu açma. Parlaklık ve Duvar Kağıdı Ekran parlaklığı pil ömrünü etkiler. iPad’ı yeniden şarj etmeniz gerekinceye kadar olan süreyi uzatmak için ekranı soluklaştırın ya da Otomatik Parlaklık seçeneğini kullanın. Ekran parlaklığını ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Parlaklık bölümüne gidin, sonra sürgüyü sürükleyin. Otomatik Parlaklık açılmışsa; iPad, yerleşik çevre aydınlatması algılayıcısını kullanarak o anki ışık koşulları için uygun ekran parlaklığını ayarlar.Bölüm 27 Ayarlar 125 Duvar Kağıdı ayarları, Kilitli ekran veya Ana Ekran için bir görüntüyü veya fotoğrafı duvar kağıdı olarak ayarlamanızı sağlar. Bakınız: Duvar kağıdını değiştirme sayfa 22. Resim Çerçevesi Resim Çerçevesi modu, iPad'i hareketli bir resim çerçevesine dönüştürür. Hangi geçişin kullanılacağını, her bir fotoğrafın görüntülenme süresini ve hangi albümün görüntüleneceğini seçin. Yüzlerin yaklaştırılıp yaklaştırılmayacağını ve fotoğrafların karışık sırada gösterilip gösterilmeyeceğini seçebilirsiniz. Resim Çerçevesi'ni başlatma:  Kilitli ekranda simgesine dokunun. Resim Çerçevesi düğmesini kilitli ekrandan kaldırma: Ayarlar > Genel > Parolayla Kilitleme bölümüne gidin. Gizlilik Gizlilik ayarları, hangi uygulamaların ve sistem servislerinin Konum Servisleri’ne ve kişilere, takvimlere, anımsatıcılara ve fotoğraflara erişimi olduğunu görmenizi ve bunları denetlemenizi sağlar. Konum Servisleri; Anımsatıcılar, Harita ve Kamera gibi konuma dayalı uygulamaların konumuzu belirten verileri toplamasına ve kullanmasına olanak tanır. Yaklaşık konumunuz; hücresel ağ verilerinden (Wi-Fi + hücresel modellerinde), yerel Wi-Fi ağlarından (Wi-Fi seçeneğiniz açıksa) ve GPS’den (bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir) alınan bilgiler kullanılarak belirlenir. Apple tarafından toplanan konum verileri, sizi bireysel olarak teşhis edecek şekilde toplanmaz. Bir uygulama Konum Servisleri’ni kullanıyorken, menü çubuğunda simgesi görünür. Konum Servisleri’ni açma veya kapatma:  Ayarlar > Gizlilik > Konum Servisleri bölümüne gidin. Bu özelliği uygulamaların ve servislerin bazıları veya tümü için kapatabilirsiniz. Konum Servisleri’ni kapatırsanız; bir uygulamanın veya servisin, bu özelliği bir sonraki kullanmak isteyişinde yeniden açmanız istenir. Sistem servisleri için Konum Servisleri’ni kapatma: Konuma dayalı iAd’ler gibi birçok sistem servisi Konum Servisleri’ni kullanır. Bu servislerin durumunu görmek, onları açmak veya kapatmak ya da bu servisler konumunuzu kullanırken menü çubuğunda simgesini göstermek için, Ayarlar > Gizlilik > Konum Servisleri > Sistem Servisleri bölümüne gidin. Gizli bilgilere erişimi kapatma: Ayarlar > Gizlilik bölümüne gidin. Hangi uygulamaların aşağıdaki bilgilere erişim istediğini ve hangi uygulamalara izin verildiğini görebilirsiniz: • Kişiler • Takvimler • Anımsatıcılar • Fotoğraflar • Bluetooth Paylaşma • Twitter • Facebook Her bir uygulamanın her bir bilgi kategorisine erişimini kapatabilirsiniz. Üçüncü parti uygulamalarının istedikleri verileri nasıl kullandıklarını anlamak için bu uygulamaların hükümlerini ve gizlilik politikalarını gözden geçirin.A 126 Şirket ortamında iPad Şirket ağlarına güvenli erişim, rehberler ve Microsoft Exchange desteğiyle, iPad işe gitmeye hazırdır. iPad'i iş amaçlı kullanma hakkında ayrıntılı bilgi almak için www.apple.com/ipad/business adresine gidin. Konfigürasyon profillerini kullanma Bir şirket ortamındaysanız, bir konfigürasyon profili yükleyerek iPad üzerinde hesapları ve diğer öğeleri ayarlayabilirsiniz. Konfigürasyon profilleri, yöneticinizin iPad'inizi şirketinizdeki, okulunuzdaki veya kurumunuzdaki bilgi sistemlerini kullanacak şekilde ayarlamasını sağlar. Örneğin bir konfigürasyon profili iPad’inizi iş yerindeki Microsoft Exchange sunucularına erişecek şekilde ayarlayabilir; böylece iPad, Exchange e-postalarınıza, takvimlerinize ve kişilerinize erişebilir ve bilgileri güvenlik altında tutmaya yardım etmek için Parolayla Kilitleme özelliğini açabilir. Yöneticiniz; konfigürasyon profillerini e-postayla göndererek, güvenli bir web sayfası üzerine koyarak veya sizin için doğrudan iPad'e yükleyerek dağıtabilir. Yöneticiniz, iPad'inizi bir taşınabilir aygıt yönetimi sunucusuna bağlayan bir profil yüklemenizi isteyebilir. Bu, yöneticinizin uzaktan sizin ayarlarınızı yapmasına olanak tanır. Konfigürasyon profillerini yükleme:  iPad üzerinde yöneticiniz tarafından sağlanan e-posta iletisini açın veya konfigürasyon profillerini web sitesinden indirin. Konfigürasyon profilini açtığınızda yükleme başlar. Önemli: Konfigürasyon profilinin güvenilir olup olmadığı sorulabilir. Emin değilseniz, konfigürasyon profilini yüklemeden önce yöneticinize sorun. Konfigürasyon profili tarafından tanımlanan ayarları değiştiremezsiniz. Ayarları değiştirmek istiyorsanız önce konfigürasyon profilini silmeli veya yeni ayarlarla yeni bir konfigürasyon profili yüklemelisiniz. Konfigürasyon profilini silme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Profil bölümüne gidin, sonra konfigürasyon profilini seçin ve Sil’e dokunun. Konfigürasyon profilini silme, profil tarafından yüklenen ayarları ve diğer tüm bilgileri siler. Microsoft Exchange hesaplarını ayarlama Microsoft Exchange, iPad ile kablosuz bir şekilde otomatik olarak eşzamanlayabileceğiniz e-posta, kişi, görev ve takvim bilgileri sunar. Exchange hesabını doğrudan iPad üzerinde ayarlayabilirsiniz. iPad üzerinde Exchange hesabı ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin. Hesap Ekle’ye dokunun, sonra Microsoft Exchange’e dokunun. Hangi ayarları kullanmanız gerektiğini servis sağlayıcınıza veya yöneticinize sorun. İş hayatında iPad EkEk A İş hayatında iPad 127 VPN erişimi VPN (sanal özel ağ), şirketinizdeki veya okulunuzdaki ağlar gibi özel ağlara Internet üzerinden güvenli erişim sağlar. VPN'i ayarlamak ve açmak için iPad üzerindeki Ağ ayarlarını kullanın. Hangi ayarları kullanmanız gerektiğini yöneticinize sorun. VPN ayrıca bir konfigürasyon profili tarafından da otomatik olarak ayarlanabilir. VPN bir konfigürasyon profili tarafından ayarlandığında, iPad gerektiği zaman VPN'i otomatik olarak açabilir. Daha fazla bilgi için yöneticinize danışın. LDAP ve CardDAV hesapları LDAP hesabı ayarladığınızda, şirketinizin LDAP sunucusundaki kişileri görebilir ve arayabilirsiniz. Sunucu Kişiler’de yeni bir grup olarak görünür. LDAP kişileri iPad'e indirilmediği için, onları görüntülemek için bir Internet bağlantınız olmalıdır. Hesap ayarları ve diğer gereksinimler için (VPN gibi) yöneticinize danışın. Bir CardDAV hesabı ayarladığınızda, hesabınızdaki kişiler iPad ile kablosuz olarak eşzamanlanır. Şirketinizin CardDAV sunucusundaki kişileri de arayabilirsiniz. LDAP veya CardDAV hesabı ayarlama:  Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Hesap Ekle’ye dokunun. Diğer’e dokunun. Hangi ayarları kullanmanız gerektiğini servis sağlayıcınıza veya yöneticinize sorun.B 128 Uluslararası klavyeleri kullanma Uluslararası klavyeler, Asya dilleri ve sağdan sola yazılan diller de dahil olmak üzere birçok farklı dilde metin yazmanızı sağlar. Desteklenen klavyelerin listesi için, www.apple.com/tr/ipad/specs adresine gidin. Klavyeleri yönetme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Uluslararası > Klavyeler bölümüne gidin. • Klavye ekleme:  Yeni Klavye Ekle’ye dokunun, sonra listeden bir klavye seçin. Daha fazla klavye eklemek için bunu yineleyin. • Klavyeyi silme:  Düzenle’ye dokunun, silmek istediğiniz klavyenin yanındaki simgesine dokunun, sonra Sil’e dokunun. • Klavye listenizi düzenleme:  Düzenle’ye dokunun ve daha sonra klavyenin yanındaki simgesini listede yeni bir yere sürükleyin. Farklı bir dilde metin girmek için, klavyeler arasında geçiş yapın. Yazarken klavyeler arasında geçiş yapma:  Etkin klavyelerinizin tümünü göstermek için Dünya tuşuna basın ve parmağınızı basılı tutun. Bir klavye seçmek için parmağınızı o klavyenin adına kaydırın ve sonra bırakın. Dünya tuşu , yalnızca birden fazla klavyeyi etkinleştirdiğinizde görünür. Yalnızca simgesine de dokunabilirsiniz. simgesine dokunduğunuzda, yeni etkinleştirilen klavyenin adı kısa bir süre görünür. Etkinleştirilen diğer klavyelere erişmek için dokunmaya devam edin. Birçok klavye, klavyede görünür olmayan harfler, rakamlar veya semboller sunar. Aksanlı harfleri veya diğer karakterleri girme:  İlişkili harfe, rakama veya sembole dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutun, sonra bir varyant seçmek için kaydırın. Örneğin: • Tayca bir klavyede:  İlişkili rakama dokunup parmağınızı basılı tutarak yerel rakamları seçin. • Çince, Japonca veya Arapça bir klavyede:  Önerilen karakterler veya adaylar klavyenin en üstünde görünür. Girmek için aday karaktere dokunun veya daha fazla aday görmek için sola itin. Genişletilmiş aday listesini kullanma:  Aday listesinin tamamını görüntülemek için sağdaki yukarı oka dokunun. • Listeyi kaydırma:  Yukarı veya aşağı itin. • Kısa listeye dönme:  Aşağı oka dokunun. Belirli Çince veya Japonca klavyeleri kullanırken sözcük - giriş çiftleri için kestirme yaratabilirsiniz. Kestirme, kişisel sözlüğünüze eklenir. Desteklenen bir klavyeyi kullanarak bir kestirme yazdığınızda kestirme yerine onunla eşlenmiş sözcük veya giriş kullanılır. Uluslararası Klavyeler EkEk B Uluslararası Klavyeler 129 Kestirmeleri açma ya da kapatma:  Ayarlar > Genel > Klavye > Kestirmeler bölümüne gidin. Aşağıdakiler için kestirmeler vardır: • Basitleştirilmiş Çince:  Pinyin • Geleneksel Çince:  Pinyin ve Zhuyin • Japonca:  Romaji ve 50 Tuş Özel giriş yöntemleri Bazı dilleri farklı şekillerde girmek için klavyeleri kullanabilirsiniz. Çince Cangjie ve Wubihua, Japonca Kana ve Yüz İşaretleri örneklerden bazılarıdır. Çince karakterleri ekrana yazmak için parmağınızı veya stylus kalemi de kullanabilirsiniz. Bileşen Cangjie tuşlarından Çince karakterler oluşturma:  Siz yazarken, önerilen karakterler görünür. Seçmek istediğiniz karaktere dokunun veya daha fazla seçenek görmek için beş taneye kadar bileşen yazmayı sürdürün. Çince Wubihua (çizgi) karakterlerini oluşturma:  Doğru yazma sırasında en fazla beş çizgiyi kullanarak Çince karakterler oluşturmak için klavyeyi kullanın: yatay, düşey, sola eğik, sağa eğik ve çengel. Örneğin Çince karakter 圈 (daire) düşey çizgiyle 丨 başlamalıdır. • Siz yazarken, önerilen Çince karakterler görünür (en yaygın kullanılan karakterler ilk önce görünecek şekilde). Seçmek istediğiniz karaktere dokunun. • Doğru çizgiyi tam olarak bilmiyorsanız, yıldız (*) girin. Daha fazla karakter seçeneği görmek için bir çizgi daha girin ya da karakter listesini kaydırın. • Yalnızca yazdığınızla tam olarak eşleşen karakterleri göstermek için eşle tuşuna (匹配) dokunun. Çince karakterleri yazma:  Basitleştirilmiş veya Geleneksel Çince el yazısı biçimleri açıkken Çince karakterleri parmağınızla doğrudan ekrana yazın. Siz karakter çizgilerini yazarken, iPad onları tanır ve en iyi eşleşen en üstte olacak şekilde eşleşen karakterleri bir listede gösterir. Bir karakteri seçtiğinizde, ardından gelmesi en olası karakterler ek seçenekler olarak listede görünür. Dokunmatik yüzey Dokunmatik yüzey Bazı karmaşık karakterler ( 鱲 (Hong Kong Uluslararası Hava Alanı adının bir bölümü), 𨋢 (asansör) ve 㗎 (Kantonca’da kullanılan bir takı) gibi) iki veya daha fazla bileşen karakteri sırayla yazarak girilebilir. Yazdığınız karakterlerin yerini alması için karaktere dokunun. Latin harfler de tanınır.Ek B Uluslararası Klavyeler 130 Japonca kana yazma:  Heceleri seçmek için Kana klavyesini kullanın. Daha fazla hece seçeneği için, ok tuşuna dokunun ve pencerede başka bir hece veya sözcük seçin. Japonca romaji yazma:  Heceleri yazmak için Romaji klavyeyi kullanın. Alternatif seçenekler klavyenin üst tarafında görünür; yazmak için birine dokunun. Daha fazla hece seçeneği için, ok tuşuna dokunun ve pencerede başka bir hece veya sözcük seçin. Yüz işaretlerini veya yüz ifadesi simgelerini yazma:  Japonca Kana klavyesini kullanın ve ^_^ tuşuna dokunun. Veya şunları yapabilirsiniz: • Japonca Romaji klavyesini (QWERTY-Japonca yerleşimi) kullanma:  Sayı tuşuna dokunun, sonra ^_^ tuşuna dokunun. • Çince (Basitleştirilmiş veya Geleneksel) Pinyin veya (Geleneksel) Zhuyin klavyelerini kullanma:  Sembol tuşuna dokunun, sonra ^_^ tuşuna dokunun.C 131 Önemli güvenlik bilgileri UYARI: Bu güvenlik yönergelerine uyulmaması yangına, elektrik çarpmasına veya başka yaralanmalara neden olabilir ya da iPad’e veya diğer eşyalara hasar verebilir. iPad’i kullanmadan önce aşağıdaki güvenlik bilgilerinin tümünü okuyun. Kullanım  iPad’i dikkatli kullanın. Metal, cam ve plastikten yapılmıştır ve hassas elektronik bileşenler içerir. iPad düşürülürse, yanarsa, delinirse veya çarpılırsa ya da suyla temas ederse hasar görebilir. Yaralanmalara neden olabileceğinden hasar görmüş bir iPad’i (örneğin ekranı çatlamış olan) kullanmayın. Çizilmesinden endişe ediyorsanız, bir kılıf kullanmayı düşünün. Onarım  iPad'in içini açmayın ve iPad’i kendiniz onarmayı denemeyin. iPad’in sökülmesi yaralanmanıza veya iPad’in zarar görmesine neden olabilir. iPad zarar görmüşse, kusurlu çalışıyorsa veya suyla temas etmişse Apple veya Apple yetkili servis sağlayıcısıyla iletişime geçin. Servis almayla ilgili daha fazla bilgiyi şu adreste bulabilirsiniz: www.apple.com/support/ipad/service/faq. Pil  iPad pilini kendiniz değiştirmeyi denemeyin—aşırı ısınmaya ve hasara yol açacak şekilde pile zarar verebilirsiniz. iPad’taki lityum iyon pil yalnızca Apple veya Apple yetkili servis sağlayıcısı tarafından değiştirilmelidir ve ev atıklarından ayrı olarak geri dönüştürülmeli veya atılmalıdır. Pili yakmayın. Pilin geri dönüştürülmesi ve değiştirilmesi hakkında bilgi için şu adrese gidin: www.apple.com/tr/batteries. Dikkatin dağılması  Using iPad’in bazı koşullarda kullanılması dikkatinizi dağıtabilir ve tehlikeli durumlara neden olabilir. Cep telefonlarının veya kulaklıkların kullanımını yasaklayan veya sınırlayan kurallara uyun (örneğin araba kullanırken mesaj atmaktan veya bisiklet sürerken kulaklık kullanmaktan kaçının). Navigasyon  Harita, yol tarifleri, kuş bakışı (Flyover) ve konuma dayalı uygulamalar veri servislerine dayanır. Bu veri servisleri değişebilir ve bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir. Bu yüzden de haritalar, yol tarifleri, kuş bakışı (Flyover) veya konuma dayalı bilgiler kullanılamayabilir, doğru olmayabilir veya eksik olabilir. iPad’da verilen bilgileri çevrenizle karşılaştırın ve uyuşmazlıkları çözmek için tabela ve işaretlere uyun. Bazı Harita özellikleri Konum Servisleri’ni gerektirir. Bakınız: Gizlilik sayfa 125. Navigasyon sırasında sağ duyunuzu kullanın. Şarj etme  iPad ’i birlikte gelen USB kablosu ve güç adaptörü ile veya USB 2.0 ile uyumlu olan başka bir üçüncü parti “Made for iPad” kablosu ve güç adaptörü ile şarj edin. Hasar görmüş kablo veya şarj aletlerinin kullanılması ya da ıslak ortamlarda şarj etme elektrik çarpmasına neden olabilir. iPad’i şarj etmek için Apple USB güç adaptörünü kullanıyorsanız, elektrik prizine takmadan önce AC fişinin veya AC güç kablosunun adaptöre tam olarak takılı olduğundan emin olun. Güç adaptörleri normal kullanım sırasında ısınabilir ve uzun süreli temas yaralanmaya neden olabilir. Güç adaptörlerini kullanırken etrafında her zaman yeterli havalandırma olmasını sağlayın. Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek EkEk C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 132 İşitme kaybı  Yüksek ses düzeylerinde dinleme işitme duyunuza zarar verebilir. Yüksek ses düzeylerine uzun süre maruz kalma, arkaplandaki seslerle birlikte seslerin aslında olduklarından daha alçakmış gibi algılanmalarına neden olabilir. Kulağınıza herhangi bir şey takmadan önce sesi açın ve ses yüksekliğini denetleyin. İşitme kaybı hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, bakınız: www.apple.com/sound. iPad’de maksimum ses sınırını ayarlama hakkında bilgi için, bakınız: Müzik ayarları sayfa 87. UYARI: Olası işitme hasarlarını engellemek için yüksek ses düzeylerinde uzun süre dinlemeyin. Apple mikrofonlu kulaklık setleri  Çin’de iPhone 4S veya daha yenisi ile satılan mikrofonlu kulaklık setleri (fişindeki koyu yalıtıcı halkalarla ayırt edilebilir) Çin standartlarıyla uyumlu olarak tasarlanmıştır ve iPhone 4S veya daha yenisi, iPad 2 veya daha yenisi ve 5. nesil iPod touch ile uyumludur. Yalnızca aygıtınızla uyumlu mikrofonlu kulaklık setlerini kullanın. Radyo sinyalleri  iPad kablosuz ağlara bağlanmak için radyo sinyallerini kullanır. Bu sinyalleri göndermek için kullanılan güç miktarı ve maruz kalmayı en aza indirmek için yapılması gerekenler hakkında bilgi için, Ayarlar > Genel > Hakkında > Yasal > RF Maruz Bırakma bölümüne gidin. Radyo frekansı paraziti  Mobil aygıtların kullanılmasını yasaklayan veya sınırlayan işaret ve uyarılara uyun (örneğin sağlık tesislerinde veya patlayıcı ortamlarda). iPad radyo frekansı yayılımlarını düzenleyen kurallara uyacak şekilde tasarlanmış, test edilmiş ve üretilmiş olmasına rağmen, iPad’deki kablosuz vericiler ve elektrik devreleri diğer elektronik aygıtlarda parazite neden olabilir. Kullanımın yasak olduğu durumlarda (örneğin uçak yolculuğu sırasında) veya yetkililer tarafından istendiğinde iPad’i kapatın veya iPad’in kablosuz vericilerini kapatmak üzere Uçak Modu özelliğini kullanın. Tıbbi cihazlar iPad elektromanyetik alanlar yayan radyolar içerir. Bu elektromanyetik alanlar kalp pillerinde veya diğer cihazlarda parazit yapabilir. Kalp pili kullanıyorsanız, iPad ile kalp pilinizin arasında en az 15 cm mesafe olması önerilmektedir. iPad’in kalp pilinizle veya diğer tıbbi cihazlarla parazit yaptığından şüphelenmek için nedeniniz varsa, iPad’i kullanmayı bırakın ve tıbbı cihazınızla ilgili özel bilgi için hekiminize danışın. iPad’in sol kenarı boyunca ve ön camının sağ kenarında kalp pillerinde, defibrilatörlerde ve diğer tıbbi cihazlarda parazite neden olabilecek mıknatıslar bulunur. iPad Smart Cover'da ve iPad Smart Case'de de mıknatıslar bulunur. iPad, iPad Smart Cover veya iPad Smart Case ile kalp piliniz ve defibrilatörünüz arasında en az 15 cm mesafe bırakın. Tıbbi durumlar  iPad tarafından etkilenebileceğini düşündüğünüz tıbbi bir durumunuz varsa (örneğin, nöbetler, geçici bilinç kaybı, göz yorgunluğu veya baş ağrısı), iPad’i kullanmadan önce hekiminize danışın. Patlama riski olan ortamlar  Yakıt alanları veya havanın kimyasal madde veya parçacık (tane, toz veya metal tozu gibi) içerdiği alanlar gibi patlama riskinin olduğu ortamlarda iPad’i şarj etmeyin veya kullanmayın. Tüm işaretlere ve yönergelere uyun. Yinelenen hareketler  iPad’de yazmak veya oyun oynamak gibi yinelenen etkinlikleri gerçekleştirirken ellerinizde, kollarınızda, bileklerinizde, omuzlarınızda, boynunuzda veya vücudunuzun diğer kısımlarında ara sıra rahatsızlık hissedebilirsiniz. Rahatsızlık hissederseniz, iPad’i kullanmayı bırakın ve bir hekime görünün. Ağır sonuçları olan etkinlikler  Bu aygıt, aygıtın hatalı çalışmasının ölüm, kişisel yaralanma veya ciddi çevresel zarara yol açabileceği durumlarda kullanılmak üzere tasarlanmamıştır. Boğulma tehlikesi  Bazı iPad aksesuarları, küçük çocukların boğulmasına neden olabilecek küçük parçalar içerebilir. Bu tür aksesuarları küçük çocuklardan uzak tutun.Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 133 Önemli kullanım bilgileri Temizleme  iPad; kir, mürekkep, makyaj veya losyon gibi leke yapabilecek herhangi bir maddeye temas ederse onu hemen temizleyin. Temizlemek için: • Tüm kabloları çıkarın ve iPad’i kapatın (Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini basılı tutun ve sonra ekrandaki sürgüyü kaydırın). • Yumuşak, tüy bırakmayan bir bez kullanın. • Açıklıkların nemlenmesinden kaçının. • Temizleme ürünleri veya basınçlı hava kullanmayın. iPad’in ön yüzü parmak izine dayanıklı yağ geçirmeyen bir kaplamaya sahip camdan yapılmıştır. Bu kaplama zaman içerisinde normal kullanımla aşınır. Temizleme ürünleri ve aşındırıcı maddeler kaplamayı daha da azaltacak ve camı çizebilecektir Aşındırıcı maddeler de iPad’i çizebilir. Bağlayıcıların, kapıların ve düğmelerin kullanımı  Asla bir bağlayıcıyı bir kapıya zorlayarak takmaya veya bir düğmeye aşırı basınç uygulamaya çalışmayın; aksi takdirde bu durum garanti kapsamında olmayan hasarlara neden olabilir. Eğer bağlayıcı ve kapı, makul bir kolaylıkla birbirine oturmuyorsa muhtemelen birbiriyle uyumlu değildir. Kapının önünde engel olup olmadığına bakın ve bağlayıcının kapıya uyduğundan ve bağlayıcıyı kapıya uygun yönde taktığınızdan emin olun. Lightning  Lightning fişinin düzenli kullanımdan sonra renginin solması normaldir. Kir, birikinti veya sıvıya maruz kalma rengin solmasına neden olabilir. Renk değişikliğini ortadan kaldırmak için veya kablo kullanım sırasında ısındıysa ya da iPad’i şarj etmiyor veya eşzamanlamıyorsa, Lightning kablosunu bilgisayarınızdan veya güç adaptörünüzden çıkarın ve yumuşak, kuru, tüy bırakmayan bir bezle temizleyin. Lightning bağlayıcısını temizlerken sıvı veya temizleme ürünleri kulanmayın. Çalıştırma sıcaklığı  iPad, ortam sıcaklığının 0º ile 35º C (32º - 95º F) arasında olduğu yerlerde çalışacak ve sıcaklığın -20° ile 45° C (-4 - 113° F) arasında olduğu yerlerde saklanacak şekilde tasarlanmıştır. iPad bu sıcaklık aralıklarının dışında saklanır veya çalıştırılırsa hasar görebilir ve pil ömrü kısalabilir. iPad’i kullanırken aşırı sıcaklık veya nem değişikliklerinden kaçının. iPad’i kullanırken veya pili şarj ederken iPad’in ısınması normaldir. iPad’in iç sıcaklığı, normal çalıştırma sıcaklıklarının üzerine çıkmışsa (örneğin sıcak bir arabanın içinde bırakılmışsa veya uzun süre doğrudan güneş ışığına maruz kalmışsa), sıcaklığı düzenlemeye çalışması sırasında şu durumlarla karşılaşabilirsiniz: • iPad şarj olmayı durdurur. • Ekran soluklaşır. • Sıcaklık uyarısı ekranı görünür. • Bazı uygulamalar kapanabilir. Önemli: Sıcaklık uyarısı ekranı göründüğünde iPad’i kullanamayabilirsiniz. iPad dahili sıcaklığını düzenleyemezse, soğuyana dek derin bir uyku moduna geçer. iPad’i yeniden kullanmayı denemeden önce, iPad’i doğrudan güneş ışığı almayan, serin bir yere taşıyıp birkaç dakika bekleyin. Daha fazla bilgi için, support.apple.com/kb/HT2101?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin.Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 134 iPad Destek Kapsamlı destek bilgileri www.apple.com/tr/support/ipad adresinde çevrimiçi olarak bulunabilir. Kişiselleştirilmiş destek için Apple ile iletişim kurmak istiyorsanız (bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir), expresslane.apple.com adresine bakın. Pil azaldı görüntüsü veya "Şarj Etmiyor" iletisi görüntüleniyorsa iPad’in pili azalmıştır ve onu tekrar kullanabilmeniz için yirmi dakikaya kadar şarj edilmesi gerekir. iPad'in pilini şarj etme hakkında bilgi için, bakınız: Pil sayfa 36. veya veya • Şarj ederken, iPad ile birlikte gelen USB güç adaptörünü veya yeni Mac'lerdeki USB kapısını kullandığınızdan emin olun. Şarj etmenin en hızlı yolu güç adaptörünü kullanmaktır. Bakınız: Pil sayfa 36. • Daha hızlı şarj olması için iPad'i kapatın. • iPad; daha eski bir Mac'teki, PC'deki, klavyedeki veya USB hub'daki USB kapısına bağlandığında şarj olmayabilir. Mac'iniz veya PC'niz iPad'i şarj etmek için yeterli güç sağlamazsa, durum çubuğunda Şarj Etmiyor iletisi görünür. iPad'i şarj etmek için, bilgisayarınızla bağlantısını kesin ve onunla birlikte gelen USB kablosu ile USB güç adaptörünü kullanarak onu bir elektrik prizine takın. iPad yanıt vermiyorsa • iPad'in pili azalmış olabilir. iPad'i şarj etmek için USB güç adaptörüne bağlayın. Bakınız: Pil sayfa 36. • Kırmızı bir sürgü gözükene dek Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini birkaç saniye basılı tutun ve sonra kullandığınız uygulamayı çıkmaya zorlamak için Ana Ekran düğmesini basılı tutun. • Bu işe yaramazsa, iPad'i kapatın ve sonra yeniden açın. Kırmızı sürgü gözükene dek Uyut/ Uyandır düğmesini basılı tutun, sonra sürgüyü sürükleyin. Sonra da Apple logosu gözükene dek Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini basılı tutun. • Bu işe yaramazsa, iPad'i sıfırlayın. Uyut/Uyandır düğmesine ve Ana Ekran düğmesine aynı anda basın; Apple logosu gözükene dek en az on saniye boyunca basılı tutun. • iPad'i çevirdiğinizde ekran dönmüyorsa, iPad'i dik tutun ve ekran döndürme kilidinin devrede olmadığından emin olun. iPad'i yeniden başlatma ve sıfırlama Bir şey doğru çalışmıyorsa; iPad’i yeniden başlatmayı, bir uygulamayı kapanmaya zorlamayı veya iPad’i sıfırlamayı deneyin. iPad’ı yeniden başlatma:  Kırmızı sürgü görünene dek Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini basılı tutun. iPad'i kapatmak için sürgüyü sürükleyin. iPad'i yeniden açmak için, Apple logosu gözükene dek Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini basılı tutun.Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 135 Bir uygulamayı kapanmaya zorlama:  Kırmızı bir sürgü gözükene dek iPad'in üst kısmındaki Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini birkaç saniye basılı tutun ve sonra uygulama kapanıncaya dek Ana Ekran düğmesini basılı tutun. iPad’i kapatamıyorsanız veya sorun devam ediyorsa, iPad’i sıfırlamanız gerekebilir. Bu işlem yalnızca, iPad'i kapatıp açma sorunu çözmüyorsa yapılmalıdır. iPad’i sıfırlama:  Uyut/Uyandır düğmesine ve Ana Ekran düğmesine aynı anda basın; Apple logosu gözükene dek en az on saniye boyunca basılı tutun. “Yanlış Parola” veya “iPad etkin değil” ifadesi görünüyor Parolanızı unuttuysanız veya iPad etkin olmadığı uyarısını veriyorsa, “iOS: Yanlış parola kırmızı etkisizleştirildi ekranına neden olur” konusuna bakın: support.apple.com/kb/HT1212?viewlocale=tr_TR. “Bu aksesuar iPad tarafından desteklenmiyor” ifadesi görünüyor Bağladığınız aksesuar iPad ile çalışmıyor olabilir. USB kablosunun ve bağlayıcıların kirli olmadığından emin olun ve aksesuarla birlikte gelen belgelere bakın. Bir uygulama ekranı doldurmuyorsa iPhone ve iPod touch için olan çoğu uygulama iPad ile kullanılabilir ama bu uygulamalar büyük ekran avantajından faydalanamıyor olabilirler. Bu durumda, uygulamayı büyütmek için simgesine dokunun. Özgün boyuta dönmek için simgesine dokunun. Uygulamanın iPad için en iyi duruma getirilmiş bir sürümünün veya iPhone, iPod touch ve iPad için en iyi duruma getirilmiş evrensel bir sürümünün olup olmadığını görmek için App Store’u denetleyin. Ekran klavyesi görünmüyorsa iPad bir Bluetooth klavyeyle eşlenmişse, ekran klavyesi görünmez. Ekran klavyesinin görünmesini sağlamak için, Bluetooth klavyedeki Diski Çıkar tuşuna basın. Bluetooth klavyeyi kapsama alanı dışına çıkararak ya da kapatarak da ekran klavyesinin görünmesini sağlayabilirsiniz. iPad'i yedekleme iPad'i otomatik olarak yedeklemek için iCloud'u veya iTunes'u kullanabilirsiniz. iCloud’u kullanarak otomatik olarak yedeklemeyi seçerseniz, bilgisayarınıza otomatik olarak yedeklemek için iTunes'u da kullanamazsınız ama bilgisayarınıza elle yedeklemek için iTunes’u kullanabilirsiniz.Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 136 iCloud ile yedekleme iCloud, iPad bir güç kaynağına bağlı ve kilitliyken, her gün Wi-Fi üzerinden otomatik olarak yedekler. Son yedeklemenin tarihi ve saati Saklama Alanı ve Yedekleme ekranının en altında listelenir. iCloud şunları yedekler: • Satın aldığınız müzikleri, TV şovlarını, uygulamaları ve kitapları • Film Rulosu'ndaki fotoğrafları ve videoları • iPad ayarlarını • Uygulama verilerini • Ana ekran ve uygulama düzenlemenizi • Mesajlar Not: Satın alınan müzikler bazı bölgelerde yedeklenmeyebilir ve TV şovları bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir. iCloud yedeklemelerini iPad'i ilk kez ayarlarken etkinleştirmediyseniz, iCloud ayarlarında açabilirsiniz. iCloud yedeklemeyi açtığınızda, iPad artık iTunes ile eşzamanladığınızda bilgisayarınıza otomatik olarak yedeklenmez. iCloud yedeklemelerini açma:  Ayarlar > iCloud bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra gerekiyorsa Apple kimliğinizle ve parolanızla oturum açın. Saklama Alanı ve Yedekleme bölümüne gidin ve sonra iCloud Yedekleme seçeneğini açın. Hemen yedekleme:  Ayarlar > iCloud > Saklama Alanı ve Yedekleme bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Şimdi Yedekle düğmesine dokunun. Yedeklemelerinizi yönetme:  Ayarlar > iCloud > Saklama Alanı ve Yedekleme bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Alanı Yönet düğmesine dokunun. iPad’unuzun adına dokunun. Film Rulosu’nu yedeklemeyi açma veya kapatma:  Ayarlar > iCloud > Saklama Alanı ve Yedekleme bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra Alanı Yönet düğmesine dokunun. iPad’unuzun adına dokunun ve daha sonra Film Rulosu’nu yedeklemeyi açın veya kapatın. Yedeklenen aygıtları görüntüleme:  Ayarlar > iCloud > Saklama Alanı ve Yedekleme > Alanı Yönet bölümüne gidin. iCloud yedeklemelerini durdurma:  Ayarlar > iCloud > Saklama Alanı ve Yedekleme > Yedekleme bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra iCloud Yedekleme’yi kapatın. iTunes’da satın alınmamış müzikler iCloud’da yedeklenmezler. Bu içerikleri yedeklemek ve geri yüklemek için iTunes’u kullanmalısınız. Bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16. Önemli: Satın alınan müzikler veya TV şovları için yedeklemeler bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir. Daha önce satın alınanlar artık iTunes Store’da, App Store’da veya iBookstore’da yoksa kullanılamayabilir. Fotoğraf Yayını içeriklerinizin yanı sıra satın alınan diğer içerikler 5 GB’lık ücretsiz iCloud saklama alanınızdan düşülmez.Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 137 iTunes ile yedekleme iTunes; Film Rulosu'ndaki veya Kaydedilenler'deki fotoğrafların, mesajlarınızın yedeklerinin, notlarınızın, Hızlı Arama listenizin, ses ayarlarınızın ve daha birçok şeyin yedeklemesini yaratır. Müzik parçaları ve bazı fotoğraflar gibi ortam dosyaları yedeklenmez ama iTunes ile eşzamanlanarak geri yüklenebilir. iPad’ı her zaman eşzamanladığınız bilgisayara bağlarsanız iTunes aşağıdaki durumlarda yedekleme yaratır: • iTunes ile eşzamanladığınızda: iTunes, iPad’u bilgisayarınıza her bağladığınızda iPad’u eşzamanlar. iTunes, o bilgisayarla eşzamanlanmaya ayarlanmamış bir iPad’u otomatik olarak yedeklemeyecektir. Bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16. • iPad’u güncellediğinizde veya geri yüklediğinizde: iTunes, güncellemeden veya geri yüklemeden önce iPad’u otomatik olarak yedekler. iTunes, verilerinizin güvenliğini sağlamak için iPad yedeklemelerini de şifreleyebilir. iPad yedeklemelerini şifreleme:  iTunes’un Özet penceresinde “iPad yedeklemesini şifrele” seçeneğini seçin. iPad dosyalarını ve ayarlarını geri yükleme:  iPad’ı her zaman eşzamanladığınız bilgisayara bağlayın, iTunes penceresinde iPad’ı seçin ve Özet bölümünde Geri Yükle’yi tıklayın. Yedeklemeler hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, support.apple.com/kb/HT1766?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin. iTunes yedeklemesini silme Bir iPad yedeklemesini, iTunes’daki yedeklemeler listesinden silebilirsiniz. Örneğin; yedekleme, başka bir kişinin bilgisayarında yaratılmışsa bunu yapmak isteyebilirsiniz. Yedeklemeyi silme: 1 iTunes’da, iTunes Tercihleri’ni açın. • Mac: iTunes > Tercihler komutunu seçin. • Windows: Düzen > Tercihler komutunu seçin. 2 Aygıtlar sekmesini tıklayın (iPad’un bağlı olması gerekmez). 3 Silmek istediğiniz yedeklemeyi seçin, daha sonra Yedeklemeyi Sil düğmesini tıklayın. 4 Seçilen yedeklemeyi silmek istediğinizi doğrulamak için Sil’i tıklayın, sonra Tamam’ı tıklayın. iPad yazılımını güncelleme ve geri yükleme iPad yazılımını, Ayarlar’da veya iTunes’u kullanarak güncelleyebilirsiniz. Ayrıca iPad’i silebilir ve sonra da bir yedeklemeden geri yüklemek için iCloud’u veya iTunes’u kullanabilirsiniz. Silinen verilere iPad kullanıcı arayüzüyle bir daha erişilemez ama bunlar iPad’unuzdan silinmez. İçeriklerin ve ayarların tümünü silme hakkında bilgi için, bakınız: Sıfırlama sayfa 124. iPad'i güncelleme iPad yazılımını Ayarlar’da veya iTunes’u kullanarak güncelleyebilirsiniz. iPad üzerinde kablosuz olarak güncelleme:  Ayarlar > Genel > Yazılım Güncelleme bölümüne gidin. Pad, kullanılabilir yazılım güncelleme olup olmadığını denetler.Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 138 Yazılımı iTunes’da güncelleme:  iTunes’u kullanarak iPad’ı her eşzamanlayışınızda iTunes, kullanılabilir yazılım güncelleme olup olmadığını denetler. Bakınız: iTunes ile eşzamanlama sayfa 16. iPad yazılımını güncelleme hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, support.apple.com/kb/HT4623?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin. iPad'i geri yükleme Yedekten iPad üzerine geri yüklemek için iCloud’u veya iTunes’u kullanabilirsiniz. iCloud yedeklemesinden geri yükleme:  Ayarların ve bilgilerin tümünü silmek için iPad’ı sıfırlayın. iCloud’a giriş yapın ve Ayarlama Yardımcısı’nda Yedekten Geri Yükle’yi seçin. Bakınız: Sıfırlama sayfa 124. iTunes yedeklemesinden geri yükleme:  iPad’ı her zaman eşzamanladığınız bilgisayara bağlayın, iTunes penceresinde iPad’ı seçin ve Özet bölümünde Geri Yükle’yi tıklayın. iPad yazılımı geri yüklendiğinde onu yeni bir iPad olarak ayarlayabilir veya müziklerinizi, videolarınızı, uygulama verilerinizi ve diğer içerikleri yedekten geri yükleyebilirsiniz. iPad yazılımını geri yükleme hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, support.apple.com/kb/HT1414?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin. E-posta alma, gönderme veya görüntüleme iPad e-posta alıp gönderemiyorsa veya e-posta ilişiklerini görüntüleyemiyorsa şu adımları deneyin. E-posta gönderilemiyorsa • iPad'i kapatıp sonra yeniden açın. Kırmızı sürgü gözükene dek Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini birkaç saniye basılı tutun, sonra sürgüyü sürükleyin. Sonra da Apple logosu gözükene dek Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini basılı tutun. • Ayarlar'da; Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin ve daha sonra kullanmaya çalıştığınız hesabı seçin. Hesap Bilgisi'ne dokunun, daha sonra Giden Posta Sunucusu altındaki SMTP düğmesine dokunun. Ek SMTP sunucular ayarlayabilir veya iPad üzerindeki başka bir posta hesabının SMTP sunucusunu seçebilirsiniz. Konfigürasyon bilgileri için Internet servis sağlayıcınıza danışın. • E-posta hesabınızı iTunes'dan eşzamanlayarak aktarma yerine doğrudan iPad üzerinde ayarlayın. Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, Hesap Ekle düğmesine dokunun ve sonra hesap bilgilerinizi girin. iPad, e-posta adresinizi girdiğinizde servis sağlayıcınızın ayarlarını bulamıyorsa hesabınızı ayarlamayla ilgili yardım için support.apple.com/kb/HT4810?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin. Ek sorun giderme bilgileri için, www.apple.com/tr/support/ipad adresine gidin. E-posta alınamıyorsa • iPad'i kapatıp sonra yeniden açın. Kırmızı sürgü gözükene dek Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini birkaç saniye basılı tutun, sonra sürgüyü sürükleyin. Sonra da Apple logosu gözükene dek Uyut/Uyandır düğmesini basılı tutun. • Aynı e-posta hesabını birden fazla bilgisayarda denetliyorsanız, kilitlenme durumu olabilir. Daha fazla bilgi için, support.apple.com/kb/TS2621?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin.Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 139 • E-posta hesabınızı iTunes'dan eşzamanlayarak aktarma yerine doğrudan iPad üzerinde ayarlayın. Ayarlar > Mail, Kişiler, Takvimler bölümüne gidin, Hesap Ekle düğmesine dokunun ve sonra hesap bilgilerinizi girin. iPad, e-posta adresinizi girdiğinizde servis sağlayıcınızın ayarlarını bulamıyorsa hesabınızı ayarlamayla ilgili yardım için support.apple.com/kb/HT4810?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin. • iPadWi-Fi + hücresel modeliniz varsa, iPad’in Internet’e hücresel veri ağı üzerinden bağlanması için Wi-Fi’yi kapatın. Ayarlar > Wi-Fi bölümüne gidin, sonra Wi-Fi'yi kapatın. Ek sorun giderme bilgileri için, www.apple.com/tr/support/ipad adresine gidin. E-posta ilişikleri görüntülenemiyor • İliştirilmiş bir dosyayı görüntüleme:  Göz At ile açmak için ilişiğe dokunun. Görüntülemeden önce dosyanın indirilmesini beklemeniz gerekebilir. • İliştirilmiş bir fotoğrafı veya videoyu kaydetme:  Göz At ile açmak için ilişiğe dokunun. Görüntülemeden önce dosyanın indirilmesini beklemeniz gerekebilir. Göz At şu belge türlerini destekler: • .doc, .docx—Microsoft Word • .htm, .html—web sayfası • .key—Keynote • .numbers—Numbers • .pages—Pages • .pdf—Önizleme, Adobe Acrobat • .ppt, .pptx—Microsoft PowerPoint • .rtf—Zengin Metin Biçimi • .txt—metin • .vcf—kişi bilgisi • .xls, .xlsx—Microsoft Excel Ek sorun giderme bilgileri için, www.apple.com/tr/support/ipad adresine gidin. Ses, müzik ve video iPad'de ses yoksa veya video oynatılamıyorsa şu adımları deneyin. Ses yoksa • iPad hoparlörünün örtülü veya önü kapatılmış olmadığından emin olun. • Yandaki Anahtarı sessize ayarlamadığınızdan emin olun. Bakınız: Ses yüksekliği düğmesi ve Yandaki Anahtar sayfa 10. • Mikrofonlu kulaklık seti kullanıyorsanız, onu çıkarın ve sonra tekrar takın. Bağlayıcıyı yerine tam oturttuğunuzdan emin olun. • Ses yüksekliğinin sonuna dek kısık olmadığından emin olun. • iPad'deki müzik duraklatılmış olabilir. Çal düğmesine sahip bir mikrofonlu kulaklık seti kullanıyorsanız, çalmayı sürdürmek için çal düğmesine basmayı deneyin. Veya Ana Ekran'da Müzik'e dokunun, sonra simgesine dokunun. • Bir ses yüksekliği sınırının ayarlanmış olup olmadığını denetleyin. Ayarlar’da Müzik > Ses Sınırı bölümüne gidin. Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 140 • İsteğe bağlı iPad dock'undaki ses çıkış kapısını kullanıyorsanız, harici hoparlörlerinizin veya müzik setinizin açık olduğundan, doğru takılı olduğundan ve düzgün çalıştığından emin olun. iPad üzerindeki ses yüksekliği denetimlerini değil, harici hoparlörlerdeki veya müzik setindeki denetimleri kullanın. • AirPlay ile çalışan bir uygulama kullanıyorsanız, sesi gönderdiğiniz AirPlay aygıtının açık olduğundan ve ses düzeyinin de açık olduğundan emin olmak için denetleyin. Sesi iPad'in hoparlörlerinden duymak istiyorsanız, simgesine dokunun ve onu listeden seçin. Bir müzik parçası, video veya başka bir öğe çalınamıyor/oynatılamıyorsa Müzik parçası, video, sesli kitap veya podcast; iPad'in desteklemediği bir biçimde kodlanmış olabilir. iPad'in desteklediği ses ve video dosyası biçimleri hakkında bilgi için, şu adrese gidin: www.apple.com/tr/ipad/specs. iTunes arşivinizdeki bir müzik parçası veya video iPad tarafından desteklenmiyorsa, onu iPad'in desteklediği bir biçime dönüştürebilirsiniz. Örneğin, korumalı olmayan WMA dosyalarını iPad'in desteklediği bir biçime dönüştürmek için iTunes for Windows’u kullanabilirsiniz. Daha fazla bilgi için, iTunes'u açıp Yardım > iTunes Yardım komutunu seçin. AirPlay kullanılıyorken video veya ses yoksa Apple TV gibi bir AirPlay aygıtına video veya ses göndermek için iPad'in ve AirPlay aygıtının aynı kablosuz ağa bağlı olmaları gerekir. düğmesini görmüyorsanız; iPad, AirPlay agıtıyla aynı Wi-Fi ağına bağlı değildir veya kullandığınız uygulama AirPlay'i desteklemiyordur. • Bir AirPlay aygıtına ses veya video gönderiliyorken, iPad video görüntülemez veya ses çalmaz. İçeriği iPad'e yönlendirmek ve iPad'in AirPlay aygıtıyla bağlantısını kesmek için, simgesine dokunun ve iPad'i listeden seçin. • Bazı uygulamalar AirPlay üzerinden yalnızca ses çalar. Video çalışmıyorsa, kullandığınız uygulamanın hem sesi hem de videoyu desteklediğinden emin olun. • Apple TV bir parola gerektirecek şekilde ayarlanmışsa, sizden istenildiğinde AirPlay'i kullanabilmek için iPad'de bu parolayı girmelisiniz. • AirPlay aygıtındaki hoparlörlerin açık ve sesinin de açık olduğundan emin olun. Eğer bir Apple TV kullanıyorsanız, TV'nin giriş kaynağının Apple TV'ye ayarlanmış olduğundan emin olun. iPad üzerindeki ses denetiminin açık olduğundan emin olun. • iPad, AirPlay ile duraksız yayımlanıyorken Wi-Fi ağına bağlı kalmalıdır. iPad'i aralık dışına çıkarırsanız, çalma/oynatma durur. • Ağınızın hızına bağlı olarak, AirPlay kullanırken çalmanın/oynatmanın başlaması 30 saniye veya daha fazla sürebilir. AirPlay hakkında daha fazla bilgi için, support.apple.com/kb/HT4437?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin. iPad'e bağlı TV'de veya projektörde görüntü yoksa iPad'i USB kablo kullanarak bir TV'ye veya projektöre bağladığınızda, bağlı ekran otomatik olarak iPad ekranını yansıtır. Bazı uygulamalar, bağlı ekranı ikinci monitör olarak kullanmayı destekleyebilir. Uygulamanın ayarlarına ve belgelerine bakın. • HD videoları yüksek çözünürlükte görmek için Apple dijital AV adaptörü veya bir komponent video kablosu kullanın. • Video kablosunun her iki tarafa da sıkıca bağlı olduğundan ve kablonun desteklenen bir türde olduğundan emin olun. iPad bir A/V anahtar kutusuna veya alıcıya bağlıysa, onu doğrudan TV'ye veya projektöre bağlamayı deneyin.Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 141 • TV'nizde HDMI veya component video gibi uygun bir video girişinin seçildiğinden emin olun. • Hiç video görünmüyorsa; Ana Ekran düğmesine basın, kabloyu çıkarıp yeniden bağlayın ve tekrar deneyin. iTunes Store ve App Store iTunes Store'u veya App Store'u kullanmak için, iPad'in Internet bağlantısı olmalıdır. Bakınız: Bir Wi-Fi ağına katılma sayfa 116. iTunes Store veya App Store kullanılamıyorsa iTunes Store'dan veya App Store'dan içerik satın almak için bir Apple Kimliğiniz olmalıdır. iPad üzerinde bir Apple Kimliği ayarlayabilirsiniz. Ayarlar > iTunes Store/App Store bölümüne gidin, sonra Giriş Yap düğmesine dokunun. iTunes'u açıp Mağaza > Hesap Yarat komutunu seçerek bilgisayarınızda da bir Apple Kimliği ayarlayabilirsiniz. Not: iTunes Store ve App Store bazı ülkelerde kullanılamayabilir. Daha fazla bilgi, servis ve destek Aşağıdaki tabloda, iPad'le ilişkili daha fazla güvenlik, yazılım, servis ve destek bilgilerini nereden edinebileceğiniz açıklanmaktadır. Şu konuda bilgi edinmek için Bunu yapın iPad’ı güvenli bir şekilde kullanma Bakınız: Önemli güvenlik bilgileri sayfa 131. iPad servis ve destek bilgileri, ipuçları, forumlar ve Apple yazılım indirmeleri www.apple.com/tr/support/ipad adresine gidin. iPad hakkında en yeni bilgiler www.apple.com/tr/ipad adresine gidin. Apple kimliği hesabınızı yönetme appleid.apple.com adresine gidin. iCloud’u kullanma www.apple.com/emea/support/icloud/ adresine gidin. iTunes’u kullanma iTunes’u açıp Yardım > iTunes Yardım komutunu seçin. Çevrimiçi bir iTunes öğreticisi için (her bölgede kullanılabilir değildir) www.apple.com/emea/support/itunes/ adresine gidin. Diğer Apple iOS uygulamalarını kullanma www.apple.com/emea/support/ios/ adresine gidin. iPad’inizin seri numarasını veya IMEI'yi bulma iPad’inizin seri numarasını veya Uluslararası Mobil Cihaz Kodu'nu (IMEI) iPad paketinde bulabilirsiniz. Veya iPad üzerinde, Ayarlar > Genel > Hakkında öğelerini seçebilirsiniz. Daha fazla bilgi için support.apple.com/kb/ht4061?viewlocale=tr_TR adresine gidin. Garanti servisi alma Öncelikle bu kılavuzdaki önerileri izleyin. Daha sonra www.apple.com/tr/support/ipad adresine gidin. iPad mevzuat bilgilerini görüntüleme iPad’ta Ayarlar > Genel > Hakkında > Yasal > Mevzuat bölümüne gidin. Pil değiştirme servisi www.apple.com/tr/batteries/ gidin. iPad’i bir şirket ortamında kullanma www.apple.com/ipad/business adresine gidin.Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 142 Atma ve geri dönüşüm bilgileri iPad’ınız yerel mevzuata uygun olarak doğru şekilde atılmalıdır. iPad pil içerdiği için ev atıklarından ayrı atılmalıdır. iPad'inizin kullanım ömrü sona erdiğinde, geri dönüşüm seçeneklerini öğrenmek için Apple ile veya yerel makamlarla iletişime geçin. Apple’ın geri dönüşüm programı hakkında bilgi için, www.apple.com/recycling adresine gidin. Pil değişimi:  iPad’taki lityum iyon pil yalnızca Apple veya Apple yetkili servis sağlayıcısı tarafından değiştirilmelidir ve ev atıklarından ayrı olarak geri dönüştürülmeli veya atılmalıdır. Pilin geri dönüştürülmesi ve değiştirilmesi hakkında bilgi için şu adrese gidin: www.apple.com/tr/batteries/. Pil Şarj Etme Verimliliği Türkiye Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur. Avrupa Birliği—elektronik cihazlar ve pil atma bilgileri  Yukarıdaki sembol, ürününüzün ve/veya pilinin yerel mevzuata uygun olarak ev atıklarından ayrı atılması gerektiği anlamına gelir. Bu ürünün kullanım ömrü sona erdiğinde; onu, yerel mercilerce belirlenen bir toplama noktasına götürün. Ürününüzün ve/veya pilinin atılacağı zaman ayrı ayrı toplanması ve geri dönüştürülmesi doğal kaynakların korunmasına yardımcı olacak ve insan sağlığını ve çevreyi koruyacak şekilde geri kazanılmasını sağlayacaktır. Union Européenne—informations sur l’élimination:  Le symbole ci-dessus signifie que, conformément aux lois et réglementations locales, vous devez jeter votre produit et/ou sa batterie séparément des ordures ménagères. Lorsque ce produit arrive en fin de vie, apportez-le à un point de collecte désigné par les autorités locales. La collecte séparée et le recyclage de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie lors de sa mise au rebut aideront à préserver les ressources naturelles et à s’assurer qu’il est recyclé de manière à protéger la santé humaine et l’environnement. Europäische Union—Informationen zur Entsorgung:  Das oben aufgeführte Symbol weist darauf hin, dass dieses Produkt und/oder die damit verwendete Batterie den geltenden gesetzlichen Vorschriften entsprechend und vom Hausmüll getrennt entsorgt werden muss. Geben Sie dieses Produkt zur Entsorgung bei einer offiziellen Sammelstelle ab. Durch getrenntes Sammeln und Recycling werden die Rohstoffreserven geschont und es ist sichergestellt, dass beim Recycling des Produkts und/oder der Batterie alle Bestimmungen zum Schutz von Gesundheit und Umwelt eingehalten werden.Ek C Güvenlik, Kullanım ve Destek 143 Unione Europea—informazioni per lo smaltimento:  Il simbolo qui sopra significa che, in base alle leggi e alle normative locali, il prodotto e/o la sua batteria dovrebbero essere riciclati separatamente dai rifiuti domestici. Quando il prodotto diventa inutilizzabile, portalo nel punto di raccolta stabilito dalle autorità locali. La raccolta separata e il riciclaggio del prodotto e/o della sua batteria al momento dello smaltimento aiutano a conservare le risorse naturali e assicurano che il riciclaggio avvenga nel rispetto della salute umana e dell’ambiente. Europeiska unionen—information om kassering:  Symbolen ovan betyder att produkten och/eller dess batteri enligt lokala lagar och bestämmelser inte får kastas tillsammans med hushållsavfallet. När produkten har tjänat ut måste den tas till en återvinningsstation som utsetts av lokala myndigheter. Genom att låta den uttjänta produkten och/eller dess batteri tas om hand för återvinning hjälper du till att spara naturresurser och skydda hälsa och miljö. Brasil—Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem O símbolo acima indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria não devem ser descartadas no lixo doméstico. Quando decidir descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o de acordo com as leis e diretrizes ambientais locais. Para informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple, pontos de coleta e telefone de informações, visite www.apple.com/br/environment. Apple ve çevre Apple olarak biz, işlemlerimizin ve ürünlerimizin çevreye olan olumsuz etkilerini en aza indirme sorumluluğumuzun farkındayız. Daha fazla bilgi için www.apple.com/environment adresine gidin.KApple Inc. © 2012 Apple Inc. Tüm hakları saklıdır. Apple, Apple logosu, AirPlay, AirPort, AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme, Aperture, Apple TV, FaceTime, Finder, iBooks, iCal, iLife, iPad, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iPod touch, iSight, iTunes, iTunes Extras, Keynote, Mac, Mac OS, Numbers, OS X, Pages, Photo Booth, Safari, Siri, Smart Cover, Spotlight ve Time Capsule; Apple Inc.’in ABD ve diğer ülkelerde kayıtlı ticari markalarıdır. AirPrint, EarPods, Kuşbakışı (Flyover), Güdümlü Erişim, iMessage ve Multi-Touch; Apple Inc.’in ticari markalarıdır. Apple Store, Genius, iAd, iCloud, iTunes Extras, iTunes Plus ve iTunes Store; Apple Inc.’in ABD ve diğer ülkelerde kayıtlı servis markalarıdır. App Store, iBookstore ve iTunes Match; Apple Inc.’in servis markalarıdır. Adobe ve Photoshop, Adobe Systems Incorporated’ın ABD ve/veya diğer ülkelerde ticari markaları ya da kayıtlı ticari markalarıdır. Bluetooth® sözcüğü markası ve logoları, Bluetooth SIG, Inc. şirketinin sahip olduğu kayıtlı ticari markalardır ve söz konusu markaların Apple Inc. tarafından tüm kullanımı lisanslıdır. IOS, Cisco’nun ABD ve diğer ülkelerde ticari markası veya kayıtlı ticari markasıdır ve lisans altında kullanılmaktadır. Bazı uygulamalar bazı bölgelerde kullanılamayabilir. Uygulama kullanılabilirliği değişebilir. İçerik iTunes'da mevcuttur. Başlık bulunabilirliği değişebilir. Burada bahsedilen diğer şirket ve ürün adları, ait oldukları şirketlerin ticari markaları olabilirler. Üçüncü parti ürünlerin adları yalnızca bilgi vermek amacıyla verilmiş olup herhangi bir öneri veya teşvik anlamı bulunmamaktadır. Apple, bu ürünlerin kullanımına veya performansına ilişkin hiçbir sorumluluk kabul etmemektedir. Varsa tüm mutabakat ve anlaşmalar veya garantiler, doğrudan satıcı firmalar ve olası kullanıcılar arasında gerçekleşir. Bu kitaptaki bilgilerin doğruluğu için gerekli özen gösterilmiştir. Basım ve yazım hatalarından dolayı Apple sorumlu tutulamaz. TU019-2401/2012-09 iPad คู่มือผู้ใช้ สำ�หรับซอฟต์แวร์ iOS 6เนื้อห� 7 บท 1: ทำ�คว�มรู้จัก iPad 7 ภาพรวมของ iPad 8 อุปกรณ์เสริม 9 ปุ่มต่าง ๆ 11 ถาดซิมการ์ด 11 ไอคอนสถานะ 13 บท 2: ก�รเริ่มต้นใช้ง�น 13 อุปกรณ์พื้นฐาน 13 การตั้งค่า iPad 13 Apple ID 14 การตั้งค่าเมลและบัญชีอื่น 14 การจัดการเนื้อหาบน iPad 14 การใช้ iCloud 16 การเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ 16 การเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes 17 การดูคู่มือผู้ใช้นี้บน iPad 18 บท 3: ข้อมูลพื้นฐ�น 18 การใช้แอปพลิเคชั่น 21 การปรับแต่ง iPad 22 การป้อน 26 การป้อนตามคำาบอก 27 การค้นหา 28 การแจ้ง 29 การแบ่งปัน 30 การเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับทีวีหรืออุปกรณ์อื่น 30 การพิมพ์ด้วย AirPrint 32 อุปกรณ์บลูทูธ 32 การแบ่งปันไฟล์ 32 คุณสมบัติความปลอดภัย 33 แบตเตอรี่ 35 บท 4: Siri 35 Siri คืออะไร 35 เกี่ยวกับ Siri 38 ร้านอาหาร 38 ภาพยนตร์ 39 กีฬา 39 การป้อนตามคำาบอก 40 การแก้ไข Siri ให้ถูกต้อง 241 บท 5: Safari 44 บท 6: Mail 44 การอ่านเมล 45 การส่งอีเมล 46 การจัดการอีเมล 46 การพิมพ์ข้อความและสิ่งที่แนบ 47 บัญชี Mail และการตั้งค่า 48 บท 7: ข้อคว�ม 48 การส่งและรับข้อความ 49 การจัดการบทสนทนา 49 การส่งรูปภาพ วิดีโอ และอื่น ๆ 50 การตั้งค่าของข้อความ 51 บท 8: FaceTime 53 บท 9: กล้อง 53 ทำาความรู้จัก 54 การดู แบ่งปัน และพิมพ์ 54 การแก้ไขรูปภาพและการตัดแต่งวิดีโอ 56 บท 10: รูปภ�พ 56 การดูรูปภาพและวิดีโอ 57 การจัดระเบียบรูปภาพและวิดีโอ 57 การกระจายรูปภาพ 58 การแบ่งปันรูปภาพและวิดีโอ 59 การพิมพ์รูปภาพ 59 กรอบรูปภาพ 59 การนำาเข้ารูปภาพและวิดีโอ 61 บท 11: Photo Booth 61 การถ่ายรูป 62 การจัดการรูปภาพ 63 บท 12: วิดีโอ 65 บท 13: ปฏิทิน 65 ทำาความรู้จัก 66 การทำางานกับหลายปฏิทิน 67 การแบ่งปันปฏิทิน iCloud 67 การตั้งค่าปฏิทิน 68 บท 14: ร�ยชื่อ 68 ทำาความรู้จัก 69 การเพิ่มรายชื่อ 70 การตั้งค่ารายชื่อ 71 บท 15: โน้ต 71 ทำาความรู้จัก เนื้อหา 373 บท 16: เตือนคว�มจำ� 75 บท 17: น�ฬิก� 76 บท 18: แผนที่ 76 การหาสถานที่ 77 การหาทิศทาง 78 3D และ Flyover 78 การตั้งค่าแผนที่ 79 บท 19: เพลง 79 การรับเพลง 79 การเล่นเพลง 80 พ็อดคาสท์และหนังสือเสียง 81 เพลย์ลิสต์ 81 Genius 82 Siri 82 iTunes Match 83 การแบ่งปันกันภายในพื้นที่ 83 การตั้งค่าเพลง 84 บท 20: iTunes Store 86 บท 21: App Store 86 ทำาความรู้จัก 87 การลบแอปพลิเคชั่น 88 บท 22: แผงหนังสือพิมพ์ 89 บท 23: iBooks 89 ทำาความรู้จัก 90 การอ่านหนังสือ 91 การโต้ตอบกับมัลติมีเดีย 91 การเรียนรู้โน้ตและรายการคำาศัพท์ 91 การจัดระเบียบชั้นวางหนังสือ 92 การเชื่อมข้อมูลหนังสือและ PDF 92 การพิมพ์หรือส่งอีเมล PDF 92 การตั้งค่า iBooks 93 บท 24: พ็อดค�สท์ 95 บท 25: Game Center 95 ทำาความรู้จัก 96 การเล่นเกมกับเพื่อน ๆ 96 การตั้งค่า Game Center 97 บท 26: ผู้พิก�ร 97 คุณสมบัติผู้พิการ 97 VoiceOver 105 Siri 106 การคลิกสามครั้งที่โฮม 106 การซูม เนื้อหา 4106 อักษรขนาดใหญ่ 106 การสลับสี 107 การออกเสียงข้อความที่เลือก 107 การอ่านออกเสียงข้อความอัตโนมัติ 107 ระบบเสียงโมโน 107 ระดับเสียงที่กำาหนดได้ 107 การเข้าถึงการใช้ 108 AssistiveTouch 108 คุณสมบัติผู้พิการใน OS X 109 ฟอนต์ขนาดเล็กสุดสำาหรับข้อความ Mail 109 แป้นพิมพ์แบบจอกว้าง 109 คำาบรรยายภาพ 110 บท 27: ก�รตั้งค่� 110 โหมดเครื่องบิน 110 Wi-Fi 111 VPN 111 ฮ็อตสปอตส่วนตัว 112 บลูทูธ 112 ข้อมูลเซลลูลาร์ 113 ห้ามรบกวนและการแจ้ง 113 ทั่วไป 118 เสียง 118 ความสว่างและรูปพื้นหลัง 118 กรอบรูปภาพ 118 ความเป็นส่วนตัว 120 ภ�คผนวก A: iPad สำ�หรับธุรกิจ 120 iPad สำาหรับองค์กร 120 ใช้การตั้งค่าโปรไฟล์ 120 การตั้งค่าบัญชี Microsoft Exchange 121 การเข้าถึง VPN 121 บัญชี LDAP และบัญชี CardDAV 122 ภ�คผนวก B: แป้นพิมพ์น�น�ช�ติ 122 การใช้แป้นพิมพ์นานาชาติ 123 วิธีการป้อนข้อมูลแบบพิเศษ 125 ภ�คผนวก C: คว�มปลอดภัย ก�รดูแล และก�รสนับสนุน 125 ข้อมูลด้านความปลอดภัยที่สำาคัญ 127 ข้อมูลด้านการดูแลที่สำาคัญ 127 การสนับสนุน iPad 128 รูปภาพแสดงปริมาณแบตเตอรี่ต่ำาหรือข้อความ “ไม่ได้ชาร์จอยู่” ปรากฏขึ้น 128 iPad ไม่ตอบสนองต่อการทำางาน 128 การเริ่มการทำางานใหม่และรีเซ็ต iPad 129 “รหัสผ่านผิด” หรือ “iPad ถูกปิดใช้งาน” ปรากฏ 129 “iPad ไม่รองรับอุปกรณ์เสริมนี้” ปรากฏขึ้น 129 แอปพลิเคชั่นไม่ขึ้นเต็มหน้าจอ 129 แป้นพิมพ์บนหน้าจอไม่ปรากฏขึ้น 129 การสำารองข้อมูล iPad 131 การอัปเดตและกู้คืนซอฟต์แวร์บน iPad เนื้อหา 5131 การส่ง รับ หรือดูอีเมล 132 เสียง เพลง และวิดีโอ 134 iTunes Store และ App Store 134 การเรียนรู้เพิ่มเติม บริการ และการสนับสนุน 135 ข้อมูลการกำาจัดและรีไซเคิล 136 Apple กับสิ่งแวดล้อม เนื้อหา 61 7 อ่านบทนี้เพื่อเรียนรู้เกี่ยวกับคุณสมบัติของ iPad วิธีบังคับใช้งาน และอื่นๆ ภาพรวมของ iPad iPad mini หน�าจอ Multi-Touch หน�าจอ Multi-Touch กล�อง FaceTime กล�อง FaceTime โฮม โฮม ไอคอนแอปฯ ไอคอนแอปฯ แถบสถานะ แถบสถานะ ขั้วต�อ Lightning ขั้วต�อ Lightning ลำโพง ลำโพง ไมโครโฟน ไมโครโฟน แจ็คชุดหูฟ�ง แจ็คชุดหูฟ�ง พัก/ปลุก พัก/ปลุก กล�อง iSight กล�อง iSight เพิ่ม/ลด ความดังเสียง เพิ่ม/ลด ความดังเสียง ถาดซิมนาโน (เฉพาะบางรุ�น) ถาดซิมนาโน (เฉพาะบางรุ�น) สวิตช�ด�านข�าง สวิตช�ด�านข�าง ทำ�คว�มรู้จัก iPadบท 1 ทำาความรู้จัก iPad 8 iPad หน�าจอ Multi-Touch หน�าจอ Multi-Touch กล�อง FaceTime กล�อง FaceTime โฮม โฮม ไอคอนฯ ไอคอนฯ แถบสถานะ แถบสถานะ ลำโพง ลำโพง ขั้วต�อ Lightning ขั้วต�อ Lightning ไมโครโฟน ไมโครโฟน แจ็คชุดหูฟ�ง แจ็คชุดหูฟ�ง ถาดซิมไมโคร (เฉพาะบางรุ�น) ถาดซิมไมโคร (เฉพาะบางรุ�น) พัก/ปลุก พัก/ปลุก กล�อง iSight กล�อง iSight เพิ่ม/ลด ความดังเสียง เพิ่ม/ลด ความดังเสียง สวิตช�ด�านข�าง สวิตช�ด�านข�าง iPad และหน้าจอโฮมของคุณอาจแตกต่างออกไป ขึ้นอยู่กับรุ่นของ iPad ของคุณ อุปกรณ์เสริม อุปกรณ์เสริมที่รวมมาด้วยกับ iPad: ตัวช�ร์จ USB: ใช้อะแดปเตอร์ไฟฟ้าที่รวมมาด้วยเพื่อจ่ายไฟฟ้าให้ iPad และชาร์จแบตเตอรี่บท 1 ทำาความรู้จัก iPad 9 หมายเหตุ: อะแดปเตอร์ไฟฟ้าที่รวมอยู่กับ iPad อาจแตกต่างกันไปตามรุ่นและภูมิภาค ส�ย Lightning ที่เชื่อมต่อกับ USB: ใช้สายนี้เพื่อเชื่อมต่อ iPad และ iPad mini เข้ากับอะแดป เตอร์ไฟฟ้าแบบ USB หรือเข้ากับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณเพื่อเชื่อมข้อมูล ใช้สายนี้กับ Dock ของ iPad หรือเสียบสายโดยตรงไปที่ iPad ส�ยตัวเชื่อมต่อ Dock ที่เชื่อมต่อกับ USB: ใช้สายนี้เพื่อเชื่อมต่อ iPad 2 และ iPad รุ่นที่ 3 เข้า กับอะแดปเตอร์ไฟฟ้าแบบ USB หรือเข้ากับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณเพื่อเชื่อมข้อมูล ใช้สายนี้กับ Dock ของ iPad ที่เลือกมาใช้เพิ่มเติมได้ หรือเสียบสายโดยตรงไปที่ iPad ปุ่มต่าง ๆ ปุ่มเพียงไม่กี่ปุ่มทำาให้ล็อก iPad และปรับความดังได้ง่าย ปุ่มพัก/ปลุก คุณสามารถล็อก iPad ได้โดยทำาให้เครื่องอยู่ในโหมดพักเมื่อคุณไม่ได้ใช้งาน เมื่อคุณล็อก iPad จะ ไม่มีอะไรเกิดขึ้นหากคุณแตะหน้าจอ แต่คุณยังคงสามารถฟังเพลงและใช้ปุ่มปรับเสียงได้ต่อไป ปุ�มพัก/ปลุก ปุ�มพัก/ปลุก ล็อก iPad: กดปุ่มพัก/ปลุก ปลดล็อก iPad: กดปุ่มโฮม หรือปุ่มพัก/ปลุก จากนั้นลากแถบเลื่อน ปิด iPad : กดปุ่มพัก/ปลุกค้างไว้ประมาณ 2-3 วินาที จนกระทั่งแถบเลื่อนสีแดงปรากฏขึ้น จากนั้น ลากแถบเลื่อนบนหน้าจอ เปิด iPad : กดปุ่มพัก/ปลุกค้างไว้ จนสัญลักษณ์ Apple ปรากฏขึ้น หากคุณไม่แตะหน้าจอประมาณ 1 หรือ 2 นาที iPad จะล็อกโดยอัตโนมัติ คุณสามารถเปลี่ยนระยะ เวลาจนกว่าหน้าจอจะล็อก หรือตั้งรหัสผ่านเพื่อปลดล็อก iPad ได้ ตั้งเวล�ล็อกอัตโนมัติ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > ตั้งล็อกอัตโนมัติ ตั้งรหัสผ่�น: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > ล็อกรหัสผ่าน คุณสามารถใช้ iPad Smart Cover หรือ iPad Smart Case ที่จำาหน่ายต่างหาก เพื่อล็อกหรือ ปลดล็อก iPad 2 หรือรุ่นใหม่กว่าได้โดยอัตโนมัติ ใช้ iPad Smart Cover หรือ iPad Smart Case: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > ล็อกหรือปลดล็อก ปกของ iPad ปุ่มโฮม ปุ่มโฮม จะช่วยให้คุณกลับสู่หน้าจอโฮมได้เมื่อใดก็ได้ ปุ่มโฮมยังให้ทางลัดเพื่ออำานวยความสะดวก อื่น ๆ อีกด้วยบท 1 ทำาความรู้จัก iPad 10 ไปที่หน้�จอเริ่มต้น: กดปุ่มโฮม บนหน้าจอเริ่มต้น ให้แตะแอปพลิเคชั่นเพื่อเปิด ดู การเปิดและสลับระหว่างแอปพลิเคชั่น ที่หน้า 18 ก�รแสดงแอปพลิเคชั่นที่ใช้ล่�สุด: เมื่อ iPad ปลดล็อกอยู่ ให้คลิกสองครั้งที่ปุ่มโฮม แถบมัลติทาสก์ จะปรากฏที่ด้านล่างของหน้าจอ แสดงแอปพลิเคชั่นที่ใช้ล่าสุด กวาดนิ้วที่แถบไปทางซ้ายเพื่อดู แอปพลิเคชั่นเพิ่มเติม ก�รแสดงตัวควบคุมก�รเล่นเสียง: • เมื่อ iPad ถูกล็อก: คลิกปุ่มโฮมสองครั้ง ดู การเล่นเพลง ที่หน้า 79 • เมื่อใช้แอปพลิเคชั่นอื่น ๆ อยู่: คลิกปุ่มโฮมสองครั้ง จากนั้นเลื่อนปัดแถบมัลติทาสก์จากซ้าย ไปขวา ใช้ Siri (iPad รุ่นที่ 3 หรือรุ่นใหม่กว่�): กดปุ่มโฮมค้างไว้ ดู บทที่ 4 Siri ที่หน้า 35 ปุ่มคว�มดังเสียงและสวิตช์ด้�นข้�ง ใช้สวิตช์ด้านข้างเพื่อปิดใช้งานเสียงเตือนและการแจ้งต่าง ๆ คุณยังสามารถใช้สวิตช์ด้านข้างเพื่อ ล็อกหน้าจอไม่ให้หมุนและป้องกันไม่ให้ iPad แสดงผลสลับระหว่างแนวตั้งและแนวนอนได้ ก�รปรับคว�มดังเสียง: กดปุ่มความดังเสียงด้านบนหรือด้านล่างเพื่อเพิ่มหรือลดความดังเสียง • ปิดเสียง: กดค้างที่ด้านล่างสุดของปุ่มความดังเสียง • ตั้งค่าการจำากัดความดังเสียง: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > เพลง > การจำากัดความดังเสียง ปิดเสียงก�รแจ้ง เสียงเตือน และเสียงเอฟเฟ็กต์ต่�ง ๆ: เลื่อนสวิตช์ด้านข้างลง สวิชต์ดังกล่าวจะไม่ปิดเสียงของการเล่นเสียงต่าง ๆ เช่น เพลง พ็อดคาสท์ ภาพยนตร์ และรายการ ทีวี ดู สวิตช์ด้านข้าง ที่หน้า 116 ล็อกก�รหมุนหน้�จอ: ไปที่ตั้งค่า เลือกทั่วไป > “ใช้สวิตช์ด้านข้างสำาหรับ…” แล้วแตะ ล็อกไม่ให้ หมุน ใช้ปุ่มความดังเสียงเพื่อปรับความดังเสียงของเพลงและสื่ออื่น ๆ และความดังของเสียงเตือนและ เอฟเฟกต์เสียงอื่น ๆ เพิ่ม/ลด ความดังเสียง เพิ่ม/ลด ความดังเสียง สวิตช� ด�านข�าง สวิตช� ด�านข�าง คำาเตือน: สำาหรับข้อมูลที่สำาคัญเกี่ยวกับการหลีกเลี่ยงการสูญเสียการได้ยิน ให้ดู ข้อมูลด้านความ ปลอดภัยที่สำาคัญ ที่หน้า 125 คุณยังสามารถปิดเสียงเรียกเข้า FaceTime เสียงเตือนและเสียงการแจ้งโดยการตั้งค่าเครื่องให้เป็น ห้ามรบกวน ได้อีกด้วย ก�รตั้งค่� iPad ให้เป็น ห้�มรบกวน: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า และเปิด ห้ามรบกวน การตั้งค่าให้เป็น ห้าม รบกวน จะปิดเสียงและการสว่างของหน้าจอของเตือนความจำาและการแจ้งเมื่อหน้าจอถูกล็อก อย่างไร ก็ตาม เสียงปลุกจะยังคงมีเสียงอยู่ และเมื่อหน้าจอถูกปลดล็อก การตั้งค่าให้เป็น ห้ามรบกวน จะไม่มี ผล ในการตั้งช่วงเวลาที่ต้องการความสงบ อนุญาตให้บุคคลบางคนให้โทรเข้าได้ หรืออนุญาตให้สาย FaceTime ที่เรียกซ้ำาโทรเข้าได้ ให้ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > การแจ้ง > ห้ามรบกวน ดู ห้ามรบกวนและการ แจ้ง ที่หน้า 113บท 1 ทำาความรู้จัก iPad 11 ถาดซิมการ์ด ซิมการ์ดใน iPad รุ่น Wi-Fi + cellular จะถูกใช้สำาหรับข้อมูลผ่านเครือข่ายโทรศัพท์มือถือ หาก ซิมการ์ดของคุณไม่ได้ติดตั้งเตรียมไว้ก่อนแล้ว หรือหากคุณเปลี่ยนผู้ให้บริการข้อมูลผ่านเครือข่าย โทรศัพท์มือถือ คุณอาจจำาเป็นต้องติดตั้งหรือเปลี่ยนซิมการ์ดนั้น iPad mini Wi-Fi + cellular ซิมการ�ดนาโน ซิมการ�ดนาโน เครื่องมือ ถอดซิม เครื่องมือ ถอดซิม ถาดซิม ถาดซิม iPad mini Wi-Fi + cellular ซิมการ�ดไมโคร ซิมการ�ดไมโคร เครื่องมือ ถอดซิม เครื่องมือ ถอดซิม ถาดซิม ถาดซิม เปิดถ�ดซิม: เสียบปลายของเครื่องมือถอดซิมเข้าในรูบนถาดซิม กดและดันเครื่องมือให้มั่นเข้าไป ตรง ๆ จนกระทั่งถาดหลุดออกมา ดึงถาดซิมออกเพื่อติดตั้งหรือเปลี่ยนซิมการ์ด หากคุณไม่มีเครื่อง มือถอดซิม คุณสามารถใช้ปลายของคลิปหนีบกระดาษแทนได้ สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม โปรดดู ข้อมูลเซลลูลาร์ที่หน้า 112 ไอคอนสถานะ ไอคอนต่าง ๆ ในแถบสถานะที่อยู่ด้านบนสุดของหน้าจอจะให้ข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับ iPad: ไอคอน สถ�นะ คว�มหม�ย โหมดเครื่องบิน แสดงการเปิดโหมดเครื่องบินที่เปิดใช้อยู่ คุณไม่สามารถเข้าใช้ อินเทอร์เน็ตหรืออุปกรณ์บลูทูธ® ได้ แต่ใช้คุณสมบัติต่าง ๆ ที่ไม่ใช้ การเชื่อมต่อแบบไร้สายได้ ดู โหมดเครื่องบิน ที่หน้า 110 LTE แสดงว่า iPad (รุ่น Wi-Fi + cellular) เครื่องนั้นเชื่อมต่อกับ อินเทอร์เน็ตผ่านเครือข่าย LTE 4G แล้ว 4G แสดงว่า iPad (รุ่น Wi-Fi + cellular) เครื่องนั้นเชื่อมต่อกับ อินเทอร์เน็ตผ่านเครือข่าย 4G แล้วบท 1 ทำาความรู้จัก iPad 12 ไอคอน สถ�นะ คว�มหม�ย 3G แสดงว่า iPad (รุ่น Wi-Fi + cellular) เครื่องนั้นเชื่อมต่อกับ อินเทอร์เน็ตผ่านเครือข่าย 3G แล้ว EDGE แสดงว่า iPad (รุ่น Wi-Fi + cellular) เครื่องนั้นเชื่อมต่อกับ อินเทอร์เน็ตผ่านเครือข่าย EDGE แล้ว GPRS แสดงว่า iPad (รุ่น Wi-Fi + cellular) เครื่องนั้นเชื่อมต่อกับ อินเทอร์เน็ตผ่านเครือข่าย GPRS แล้ว Wi-Fi แสดงว่า iPad เครื่องนั้นมีการเชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ตผ่าน Wi-Fi ยิ่งมี จำานวนขีดมาก สัญญาณของการเชื่อมต่อยิ่งแรง ดู การเข้าใช้เครือข่าย Wi-Fi ที่หน้า 110 ห้�มรบกวน แสดงว่าได้เปิด “ห้ามรบกวน” อยู่ ดู ห้ามรบกวนและการแจ้ง ที่ หน้า 113 ฮอตสปอตส่วนตัว แสดงว่า iPad กำาลังจัดเตรียมฮอตสปอตส่วนตัวให้กับ iPad, iPhone หรือ iPod touch เครื่องอื่น ๆ ดู ฮ็อตสปอตส่วนตัว ที่หน้า 111 ก�รเชื่อมข้อมูล แสดงว่า iPad เครื่องนั้นกำาลังเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes ดู การเชื่อม ข้อมูลกับ iTunes ที่หน้า 16 กิจกรรม แสดงกิจกรรมเครือข่ายหรือกิจกรรมอื่น แอปพลิเคชั่นของบริษัทอื่นบาง ตัวอาจใช้ไอคอนนี้ในการแสดงว่าอยู่ในระหว่างดำาเนินการ VPN แสดงว่าคุณได้เชื่อมต่อกับเครือข่ายโดยใช้ VPN ดู VPN ที่หน้า 111 ล็อก แสดงว่า iPad เครื่องนั้นถูกล็อกอยู่ ดู ปุ่มพัก/ปลุก ที่หน้า 9 น�ฬิก�ปลุก แสดงว่ามีการตั้งการปลุกไว้ ดู บทที่ 17 นาฬิกา ที่หน้า 75 ล็อกแนวหน้�จอ จะแสดงว่าแนวของหน้าจอถูกล็อกอยู่ ดู แนวตั้งและแนวนอน ที่ หน้า 20 บริก�รห�ที่ตั้ง แสดงว่าแอปพลิเคชั่นกำาลังใช้บริการที่ตั้งอยู่ ดู ความเป็นส่วนตัว ที่ หน้า 118 เล่น แสดงว่าเพลง หนังสือเพลง หรือพ็อดคาสท์กำาลังเล่นอยู่ ดู การเล่น เพลง ที่หน้า 79 บลูทูธ ไอคอนสีขาว: บลูทูธถูกเปิดใช้งานและจับคู่กับอุปกรณ์ชิ้นนั้น ๆ เช่น หู ฟัง หรือคีย์บอร์ดไว้ ไอคอนสีเทา: บลูทูธถูกเปิดและจับคู่กับอุปกรณ์ชิ้นนั้น ๆ อยู่ แต่ อุปกรณ์ชิ้นนั้น ๆ อยู่นอกระยะการเชื่อมต่อหรือถูกปิดไว้ ไม่มีไอคอน: บลูทูธไม่ได้จับคู่กับอุปกรณ์ชิ้นใด ๆ ไว้ ดู อุปกรณ์บลูทูธ ที่หน้า 32 แบตเตอรี่บลูทูธ แสดงระดับของแบตเตอรี่ของอุปกรณ์บลูทูธที่รองรับและได้จับคู่ไว้แล้ว แบตเตอรี่ แสดงปริมาณแบตเตอรี่หรือสถานะว่ากำาลังชาร์จอยู่ ดูแบตเตอรี่ ที่ หน้า 332 13 อ่านบทนี้เพื่อเรียนรู้วิธีการตั้งค่า iPad การตั้งค่าบัญชีเมล การใช้ iCloud และอื่น ๆ อุปกรณ์พื้นฐาน · คำาเตือน: ในการหลีกเลี่ยงการบาดเจ็บ ให้อ่าน ข้อมูลด้านความปลอดภัยที่สำาคัญ ที่หน้า 125 ก่อนการใช้ iPad ในการใช้งาน iPad คุณจำาเป็นต้องมีสิ่งต่าง ๆ ต่อไปนี้: • เครื่องคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณต้องต่อกับอินเทอร์เน็ต (แนะนำาให้ใช้ระบบบรอดแบนด์) • Apple ID สำาหรับคุณสมบัติบางประการ ซึ่งรวมถึง iCloud, App Store และ iTunes Store และการซื้อออนไลน์ คุณสามารถสร้าง Apple ID ระหว่างการตั้งค่า สำาหรับใช้ iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ คุณจำาเป็นต้องมี: • Mac ที่มีพอร์ด USB 2.0 หรือ 3.0 หรือ PC ที่มีพอร์ต USB 2.0 และหนึ่งในระบบปฏิบัติการต่อ ไปนี้: • Mac OS X เวอร์ชั่น 10.6.8 หรือเวอร์ชั่นใหม่กว่า • Windows 7, Windows Vista หรือ Windows XP Home หรือ Professional ที่มี Service Pack 3 หรือเวอร์ชั่นใหม่กว่า • iTunes 11 หรือเวอร์ชั่นใหม่กว่า (สำาหรับคุณสมบัติบางอย่าง) มีใน www.apple.com/th/itunes/download/ การตั้งค่า iPad ในการตั้งค่าและเปิดใช้งาน iPad ให้เปิดและปฏิบัติตามคำาแนะนำาการตั้งค่า คำาสั่งบนหน้าจอในตัว ช่วยเหลือการตั้งค่าจะพาคุณไปตามกระบวนการตั้งค่า อันได้แก่: • การเชื่อมต่อไปยังเครือข่าย Wi-Fi • การลงชื่อเข้าใช้หรือการสร้าง Apple ID แบบฟรี • การตั้งค่า iCloud • การเปิดคุณสมบัติที่แนะนำา เช่น บริการตำาแหน่ง และค้นหา iPad ของฉัน ระหว่างการติดตั้ง คุณสามารถคัดลอกแอปพลิเคชั่น ของคุณ การตั้งค่า และเนื้อหาจาก iPad อื่นๆ โดยการกู้คืนจากข้อมูลสำารองของ iCloud หรือจาก iTunes ดู การสำารองข้อมูล iPad ที่หน้า 129 Apple ID Apple ID คือชื่อผู้ใช้สำาหรับบัญชีแบบฟรีที่ช่วยให้คุณเข้าถึงบริการ Apple เช่น iTunes Store, App Store และ iCloud คุณต้องการเพียงแค่ Apple ID เดียวเท่านั้นสำาหรับการใช้งานร่วมกับ Apple อาจจะมีค่าบริการสำาหรับบริการและผลิตภัณฑ์ที่คุณใช้ ซื้อ หรือเช่า ก�รเริ่มต้นใช้ง�นบท 2 การเริ่มต้นใช้งาน 14 หากคุณมี Apple ID ให้ใช้ในครั้งแรกที่คุณตั้งค่า iPad และเมื่อใดก็ตามที่คุณจำาเป็นต้องลงชื่อเข้า ใช้เพื่อใช้บริการ Apple หากคุณยังไม่มี Apple ID คุณสามารถสร้างได้ใหม่ในตอนนี้หรือเมื่อใดคุณ ถูกขอให้ลงชื่อเข้าใช้ ก�รสร้�ง Apple ID: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iTunes Store และ App Store แล้วแตะ ลงชื่อเข้าใช้ (หากคุณได้ลงชื่อเข้าใช้บัญชีของคุณไว้แล้วและต้องการสร้าง Apple ID อีกอัน ลำาดับแรกให้แตะ Apple ID ของคุณ จากนั้นแตะ ลงชื่อออก) สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม ให้ดูที่ support.apple.com/th/kb/HT4356 การตั้งค่าเมลและบัญชีอื่น iPad จะทำางานกับ iCloud, Microsoft Exchange และผู้ให้บริการระบบอินเทอร์เน็ตสำาหรับอีเมล รายชื่อ และปฏิทิน กรณีที่คุณยังไม่มีบัญชีเมล คุณสามารถตั้งค่าบัญชี iCloud ได้ฟรีสำาหรับการติดตั้งครั้งแรกของ iPad หรือภายหลังให้เข้าไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud ดู การใช้ iCloud ที่หน้า 14 ก�รตั้งค่�บัญชี iCloud: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud ติดตั้งบัญชีอื่นๆ : ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน คุณสามารถเพิ่มรายชื่อโดยใช้บัญชี LDAP หรือ CardDAV หากบริษัทหรือองค์กรของคุณใช้บัญชี แบบนี้ ดู การเพิ่มรายชื่อ ที่หน้า 69 สำาหรับข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับการติดตั้งบัญชี Microsoft Exchange ในสภาพแวดล้อมขององค์กร โปรดดู การตั้งค่าบัญชี Microsoft Exchange ที่หน้า 120 การจัดการเนื้อหาบน iPad คุณสามารถถ่ายโอนข้อมูลและไฟล์ระหว่าง iPad และอุปกรณ์ iOS หรือคอมพิวเตอร์โดยใช้ iCloud หรือ iTunes • iCloud จะจัดเก็บเนื้อหา เช่น เพลง รูปภาพ ปฏิทิน รายชื่อ เอกสาร และอื่น ๆ แล้วพุชแบบไร้สาย ไปยังอุปกรณ์ iOS และคอมพิวเตอร์เครื่องอื่นของคุณ เพื่อให้ทุกอย่างอัปเดตอยู่เสมอ ดู การใช้ iCloud ด้านล่าง • iTunes จะเชื่อมข้อมูลเพลง รูปภาพ และอื่น ๆ ระหว่างคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณกับ iPad การ เปลี่ยนแปลงที่คุณทำาไว้บนอุปกรณ์หนึ่งจะถูกคัดลอกไปยังอุปกรณ์อื่น เมื่อคุณเชื่อมข้อมูล คุณยัง สามารถใช้ iTunes เพื่อคัดลอกไฟล์ไปยัง iPad สำาหรับใช้กับแอปพลิเคชั่น หรือคัดลอกเอกสารที่ คุณสร้างขึ้นบน iPad ไปยังคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ ดู การเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes ที่หน้า 16 คุณสามารถใช้ iCloud หรือ iTunes หรือทั้งคู่ ซึ่งขึ้นอยู่กับความต้องการของคุณ ตัวอย่างเช่น คุณ สามารถใช้การกระจายภาพของ iCloud เพื่อใส่รูปภาพที่ถ่ายบน iPad ไปยังอุปกรณ์อื่นๆ อัตโนมัติ และใช้ iTunes เพื่อเชื่อมข้อมูลอัลบั้มรูปภาพจากคอมพิวเตอร์ไปยัง iPad ได้ หมายเหตุ: ไม่ควรเชื่อมข้อมูลบนหน้าข้อมูล ของ iTunes (เช่น รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน และโน้ต) โดยควร ใช้ iCloud เพื่อให้ข้อมูลเหล่านั้นบนอุปกรณ์ต่าง ๆ ของคุณอัปเดตอยู่เสมอ ไม่เช่นนั้น คุณอาจพบ ข้อมูลที่ซ้ำาซ้อนบน iPad ได้ การใช้ iCloud iCloud จะเก็บเนื้อหาต่าง ๆ ของคุณ รวมถึงเพลง รูปภาพ รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน และเอกสารที่รองรับ เนื้อหาที่ถูกเก็บอยู่ใน iCloud จะถูกพุชอย่างไร้สายไปยังอุปกรณ์ iOS อื่น ๆ และคอมพิวเตอร์ของที่ ได้ตั้งค่าบัญชี iCloud เดียวกันไว้อย่าง บท 2 การเริ่มต้นใช้งาน 15 iCloud สามารถใช้งานได้ในอุปกรณ์ที่มี iOS 5 หรือเวอร์ชั่นใหม่กว่า ในคอมพิวเตอร์ Mac ที่มี OS X Lion v10.7.2 หรือเวอร์ชั่นใหม่กว่า และใน PC ที่มีแผงควบคุม iCloud สำาหรับ Windows (จำาเป็นต้องใช้ Windows Vista Service Pack 2 หรือ Windows 7) คุณสมบัติที่รวมอยู่ใน iCloud: • iTunes ใน Cloud ใช้ดาวน์โหลดเพลง iTunes และรายการทีวีที่ซื้อก่อนหน้าไปยัง iPad ได้ฟรี เมื่อใดก็ได้ • แอปพลิเคชั่นและหนังสือ ใช้ดาวน์โหลดรายการซื้อก่อนหน้าใน App Store และ iBookstore ได้ฟรี เมื่อใดก็ได้ • การกระจายภาพ รูปภาพที่คุณถ่ายในอุปกรณ์หนึ่งจะปรากฏบนอุปกรณ์ทั้งหมดของคุณโดย อัตโนมัติ ดู การกระจายรูปภาพ ที่หน้า 57 • เอกสารใน Cloud สำาหรับแอปพลิเคชั่น ที่เปิดใช้งาน iCloud จะเก็บเอกสารและข้อมูลแอปพลิเคชั่น ให้ทันสมัยผ่านอุปกรณ์ทุกชิ้นของคุณ • Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน จะเก็บรักษารายชื่อเมล ปฏิทิน โน้ต และเตือนความจำาของคุณให้อุปกรณ์ทุก ชิ้นของคุณอัปเดตเหมือน ๆ กัน • สำารองข้อมูล สำารองข้อมูล iPad ไปยัง iCloud โดยอัตโนมัติเมื่อเชื่อมต่อกับแหล่งจ่ายไฟและ Wi-Fi ดู การสำารองข้อมูลด้วย iCloud ที่หน้า 129 • ค้นหา iPad ของฉัน จะระบุตำาแหน่ง iPad ของคุณบนแผนที่ แสดงข้อความ เล่นเสียง ล็อกหน้า จอ หรือควบคุมให้ลบข้อมูลจากระยะไกล ดู ค้นหา iPad ของฉัน ที่หน้า 33 • ค้นหาเพื่อนของฉัน จะตามรอยครอบครัวและเพื่อนของคุณ (เมื่อเชื่อมต่อไปยังเครือข่าย Wi-Fi หรือโครงข่ายมือถือ) โดยใช้แอปพลิเคชั่น ค้นหาเพื่อนของฉัน ดาวน์โหลดแอปพลิเคชั่น ฟรีจาก App Store • iTunes Match กับการเป็นสมาชิก iTunes Match สำาหรับเพลงทั้งหมดของคุณ รวมทั้งเพลงที่ นำาเข้าจะซีดีหรือซื้อจากที่อื่น ๆ ที่ไม่ใช่ iTunes จะปรากฏบนอุปกรณ์ทุกชิ้นของคุณและสามารถ ดาวน์โหลดและเล่นได้ตามต้องการ ดู iTunes Match ที่หน้า 82 • แท็บ iCloud ใช้ดูหน้าเว็บที่คุณได้เปิดในอุปกรณ์ iOS อื่น หรือคอมพิวเตอร์ที่ได้ติดตั้ง OS X Mountain Lion หรือเวอร์ชั่นใหม่กว่า ดู บทที่ 5 Safari ที่หน้า 41 เกี่ยวกับ iCloud คุณจะได้รับบัญชีเมลฟรีและมีความจุพื้นที่ 5 GB สำาหรับใช้งานเมล เอกสาร และ การสำารองข้อมูล สำาหรับเพลง แอปพลิเคชั่น รายการทีวี และหนังสือที่คุณซื้อไว้ เช่นเดียวกันกับ การกระจายภาพ ซึ่งจะไม่นับรวมกับที่ว่างของคุณ หมายเหตุ: iCloud อาจไม่มีบริการในทุกพื้นที่ และคุณสมบัติบางอย่างของ iCloud อาจแตกต่างไป ตามแต่ละพื้นที่ สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม ให้ไปที่ www.apple.com/asia/icloud ลงชื่อเข้�ใช้หรือสร้�งบัญชี iCloud: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud จัดก�ร iCloud: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud • เปิดใช้งานหรือปิดใช้งานบริการ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud จากนั้นเปิดบริการ เช่น การกระจาย ภาพ และเอกสารและข้อมูล • เปิดใช้งานสำารองข้อมูลใน iCloud: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud > เนื้อที่เก็บข้อมูลและข้อมูล สำารอง • ซื้อเนื้อที่เก็บข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมของ iCloud: ไปที่การตั้งค่า > iCloud > เนื้อที่เก็บข้อมูลและข้อมูล สำารอง > จัดการเนื้อที่เก็บข้อมูล > เปลี่ยนแผนเนื้อที่เก็บข้อมูล จากนั้นเลือกอัปเกรด สำาหรับข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับการซื้อพื้นที่เพิ่มเติมของ iCloud ไปที่ help.apple.com/icloud/ ก�รเปิด ก�รด�วน์โหลดอัตโนมัติ สำ�หรับเพลง แอปพลิเคชั่น หรือหนังสือ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ร้าน ก�รดูและด�วน์โหลดร�ยก�รซื้อก่อนหน้�: • รายการซื้อของ iTunes Store: ไปที่ iTunes จากนั้นแตะ รายการซื้อแล้ว บท 2 การเริ่มต้นใช้งาน 16 • รายการซื้อของ App Store: ไปที่ App Store จากนั้นแตะ รายการซื้อแล้ว • รายการซื้อของ iBookstore: ไปที่ iBooks แตะ ร้าน จากนั้นแตะ ซื้อแล้ว ค้นห� iPad ของคุณ: เข้าไปที่ www.icloud.com ลงชื่อเข้าใช้ด้วย Apple ID ของคุณ จากนั้น เลือกค้นหา iPad ของฉัน ข้อสำาคัญ: บน iPad ค้นหา iPad ต้องถูกเปิดใช้งาน โดยไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud เพื่อให้ iPad สามารถถูกระบุตำาแหน่งได้ สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับ iCloud ให้ไปที่ www.apple.com/asia/icloud สำาหรับข้อมูลแก้ไข ปัญหาเพิ่มเติม ให้ไปที่ www.apple.com/asia/support/icloud การเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ ใช้สาย USB ที่ให้รวมมาด้วยในการเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ การเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับ คอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณช่วยให้คุณเชื่อมข้อมูล เพลง และเนื้อหาอื่น ๆ บน iTunes คุณยังสามารถเชื่อม ข้อมูลกับ iTunes อย่างไร้สายได้ ดู การเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes ที่หน้า 16 หาก iPad ไม่ได้กำาลังเชื่อมข้อมูลอยู่กับเครื่องคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ คุณสามารถถอดเครื่องออกได้ ทุกเวลา ถ้าคุณตัดการเชื่อมต่อขณะเชื่อมข้อมูลกำาลังดำาเนินการอยู่ ข้อมูลบางอย่างอาจจะไม่ได้ถูก เชื่อมไปจนกระทั่งคุณได้เชื่อมต่อ iPad ไปยังคอมพิวเตอร์ในครั้งถัดไป การเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes การเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes จะคัดลอกข้อมูลจากคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณไปยัง iPad หรือในทางกลับกัน คุณสามารถเชื่อมข้อมูลโดยการเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณโดยใช้สาย USB ที่ให้รวมมา ด้วย หรือคุณสามารถตั้งค่า iTunes เพื่อเชื่อมต่อโดยใช้ Wi-Fi ได้ คุณสามารถตั้งค่าให้ iTunes เชื่อมข้อมูลเพลง รูปภาพ วิดีโอ พ็อดคาสท์ แอปพลิเคชั่น และอื่น ๆ สำาหรับข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับการเชื่อม ข้อมูลของ iPad ให้เปิด iTunes บนคอมพิวเตอร์ของคน จากนั้นเลือกวิธีใช้ iTunes จากเมนูวิธีใช้ ติดตั้งก�รเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes: เชื่อมต่อ iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณโดยใช้สายที่มาพร้อมกับ เครื่อง ใน iTunes ที่ติดตั้งในคอมพิวเตอร์ ให้เลือก iPad (ใต้ อุปกรณ์) คลิก เนื้อหาสรุป จากนั้น เปิด “เชื่อมข้อมูลผ่านการเชื่อมต่อ Wi-Fi” ขณะที่การเชื่อมข้อมูลผ่าน Wi-Fi เปิดใช้งาน บน iPad จะเชื่อมข้อมูลอัตโนมัติทุกวัน โดยที่ iPad ต้องเชื่อมต่อกับแหล่งจ่ายไฟ ทั้ง iPad และคอมพิวเตอร์ต้องอยู่บนเครือข่ายเดียวกัน และ iTunes ต้องเปิดใช้อยู่ด้วย สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม โปรดดู การเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes ผ่าน Wi-Fi ที่หน้า 114 เทคนิคสำ�หรับก�รเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes • หากคุณใช้ iCloud เพื่อเก็บรายชื่อ ปฏิทิน ที่คั่นหน้า และโน้ตของคุณ อย่าเชื่อมข้อมูลเหล่านั้นไป ยัง iPad ด้วย iTunesบท 2 การเริ่มต้นใช้งาน 17 • รายการซื้อที่คุณได้ซื้อจาก iTunes Store หรือ App Store ใน iPad จะถูกเชื่อมข้อมูลกลับไป ยังคลัง iTunes ของคุณ คุณยังสามารถซื้อหรือดาวน์โหลดเนื้อหาและแอปพลิเคชั่นจาก iTunes Store ลงบนเครื่องคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ จากนั้นเชื่อมข้อมูลเหล่านั้นไปที่ iPad • ในบานหน้าต่างเนื้อหาสรุปของอุปกรณ์ คุณสามารถตั้งค่า iTunes เพื่อให้เชื่อมข้อมูลอัตโนมัติ กับ iPad เมื่อเชื่อมต่อกับคอมพิวเตอร์ สำาหรับแทนที่ไฟล์สำารอง ให้กดค้างที่ปุ่ม Command และ Option (Mac) หรือ Shift และ Control (PC) จนกระทั่งเห็น iPad ในแถบด้านข้าง • ในบานหน้าต่างเนื้อหาสรุปของอุปกรณ์ ให้เลือก “เข้ารหัสข้อมูลสำารอง iPad หากคุณต้องการเข้า รหัสข้อมูลที่เก็บไว้ในคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณเมื่อ iTunes สร้างข้อมูลสำารอง ข้อมูลสำาเนาที่มีการเข้า รหัสจะมีไอคอนล็อกบ่งบอก และจำาเป็นต้องใช้รหัสเพื่อเรียกข้อมูลสำารองกลับ หากคุณไม่ได้ เลือกตัวเลือกนี้ รหัสผ่านอื่น (เช่น รหัสผ่านสำาหรับบัญชีเมล) จะไม่รวมอยู่ในข้อมูลสำารองและคุณ จำาเป็นต้องป้อนรหัสผ่านใหม่เมื่อคุณใช้ข้อมูลสำารองเพื่อกู้คืนอุปกรณ์ iPad • ในหน้าข้อมูลของอุปกรณ์ เมื่อคุณเชื่อมข้อมูลกับบัญชีเมล ค่าที่กำาหนดจะถูกถ่ายโอนจาก คอมพิวเตอร์ไปยัง iPad เครื่องนี้เท่านั้น การเปลี่ยนค่าต่าง ๆ ให้กับบัญชีอีเมลใน iPad จะไม่ส่ง ผลกระทบกับบัญชีอีเมลบนเครื่องคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ • ในหน้าข้อมูลของอุปกรณ์ ให้เลือก ขั้นสูง สำาหรับตัวเลือกที่จะช่วยให้คุณ แทนที่ ข้อมูลบน iPad กับข้อมูลจากคอมพิวเตอร์ระหว่างการเชื่อมข้อมูลครั้งถัดไป • หากคุณฟังพ็อดคาสท์ หรือหนังสือเสียงเพียงบางส่วน จุดที่หยุดจะถูกรวมเข้าไปถ้าคุณเชื่อมข้อมูล กับ iTunes หากคุณฟังอะไรต่างๆ บน iPad คุณสามารถกลับมาฟังต่อจากคราวที่แล้วได้โดยใช้ iTunes บนคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ หรือในทางกลับกัน • ในหน้ารูปภาพของอุปกรณ์ คุณสามารถเชื่อมข้อมูลรูปภาพและวิดีโอจากโฟลเดอร์บนคอมพิวเตอร์ ของคุณ การดูคู่มือผู้ใช้นี้บน iPad คุณสามารถดู คู่มือผู้ใช้ iPad บน iPad ใน Safari และในแอปพลิเคชั่น iBooks ที่แจกฟรี ดูคู่มือผู้ใช้ใน Safari: ใน Safari ให้แตะ จากนั้นแตะที่คั่นหน้าเว็บคู่มือผู้ใช้ iPad หรือไปที่ help.apple.com/ipad ใส่ไอคอนของคู่มือผู้ใช้เพิ่มไปที่หน้�จอโฮม: แตะ จากนั้นแตะ “เพิ่มไปที่หน้าจอเริ่มต้น” ดูคู่มือผู้ใช้ใน iBooks: ถ้าคุณไม่ได้ติดตั้ง iBooks ให้เปิด App Store จากนั้นค้นหาสำาหรับ ติดตั้ง “iBooks” เปิด iBooks แล้วแตะ ร้าน ค้นหาสำาหรับ “คู่มือผู้ใช้ iPad ” จากนั้นเลือกและ ดาวน์โหลดคู่มือผู้ใช้ สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับ iBooks ให้ดู บทที่ 23 iBooks ที่หน้า 893 18 การใช้แอปพลิเคชั่น คุณโต้ตอบกับ iPad ได้โดยใช้นิ้วของคุณแตะ แตะสองครั้ง กวาดนิ้ว และจีบนิ้วที่วัตถุบนหน้าจอ สัมผัส ก�รเปิดและสลับระหว่�งแอปพลิเคชั่น ในการกลับไปที่หน้าจอเริ่มต้น ให้กดปุ่มโฮม ก�รเปิดแอปพลิเคชั่น: แตะแอปพลิเคชั่น ในการกลับไปสู่หน้าจอเริ่มต้น ให้กดปุ่มโฮม อีกครั้ง ก�รดูแอปพลิเคชั่นที่ใช้ล่�สุด: คลิกสองครั้งที่ปุ่มโฮม เพื่อให้แถบมัลติทาสก์ปรากฏ แตะที่แอปพลิเคชั่นเพื่อใช้แอปพลิเคชั่นตัวนั้นอีกครั้ง กวาดนิ้วไปทางซ้ายเพื่อดูแอปพลิเคชั่นอื่น ๆ หากคุณมีแอปพลิเคชั่นหลายตัว คุณอาจต้องการใช้ Spotlight เพื่อระบุตำาแหน่งแล้วเปิดแอปพลิเคชั่น เหล่านั้น ดู การค้นหา ที่หน้า 27 ข้อมูลพื้นฐ�นบท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 19 ก�รเลื่อน ลากนิ้วขึ้นหรือลงเพื่อเลื่อน บนหน้าจอบางหน้าจอ เช่น หน้าเว็บ คุณสามารถเลื่อนจากด้านหนึ่งไปยัง อีกด้านได้ การลากนิ้วเลื่อนของคุณจะไม่เลือกหรือเปิดใช้สิ่งใด ๆ บนหน้าจอ ตวัดนิ้วเพื่อเลื่อนหน้าจออย่างรวดเร็ว คุณสามารถรอให้หน้าจอที่เลื่อนหยุดนิ่ง หรือแตะหน้าจอที่ใดก็ได้เพื่อให้หยุดเลื่อนทันที หากต้องการไปที่ด้านบนสุดของหน้าอย่างรวดเร็ว ให้แตะไปที่แถบสถานะที่ด้านบนสุดของจอ ร�ยก�ร การเลือกรายการก่อให้เกิดผลลัพธ์ที่แตกต่างกันออกไป โดยจะขึ้นอยู่กับรายการนั้น ตัวอย่างเช่น อาจเป็นการเปิดรายการอื่น เล่นเพลง เปิดอีเมล หรือแสดงข้อมูลรายชื่อของบุคคลหนึ่ง ก�รเลือกร�ยก�รในร�ยก�ร: แตะรายการ บางรายการมีดัชนีอยู่ด้านข้างเพื่อช่วยให้คุณนำาทางได้อย่างรวดเร็ว ค้นห�ร�ยก�รต่�ง ๆ ในร�ยก�รดัชนี: แตะตัวอักษรเพื่อข้ามไปยังรายการที่เริ่มต้นด้วยตัวอักษรตัว นั้น หรือลากนิ้วของคุณไปตามดัชนีเพื่อเลื่อนผ่านรายการอย่างรวดเร็ว ย้อนกลับไปยังร�ยก�รหรือหน้�จอก่อนหน้�นี้: แตะปุ่มย้อนกลับตรงมุมซ้ายบนบท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 20 ก�รซูมเข้�หรือออก คุณอาจสามารถซูมเข้าเพื่อขยาย หรือซูมออกเพื่อลดขนาดรูปภาพบนหน้าจอได้โดยจะขึ้นอยู่กับ แอปพลิเคชั่นนั้น ยกตัวอย่างเช่น เมื่อดูรูปภาพ หน้าเว็บ เมล หรือแอปพลิเคชั่น ให้จีบนิ้วสองนิ้วเข้า หากันเพื่อซูมออก หรือกางนิ้วออกจากกันเพื่อซูมเข้า สำาหรับรูปภาพและหน้าเว็บ คุณยังสามารถแตะ สองครั้ง (แตะสองครั้งอย่างรวดเร็ว) เพื่อซูมเข้า แล้วแตะสองครั้งอีกครั้งเพื่อซูมออกได้อีกด้วย สำาหรับ แผนที่ ให้แตะสองครั้งเพื่อซูมเข้า แล้วแตะหนึ่งครั้งด้วยสองนิ้วเพื่อซูมออก การซูมยังเป็นคุณสมบัติผู้พิการที่ให้คุณขยายทั้งหน้าจอของแอปพลิเคชั่นตัวใด ๆ ที่คุณใช้งานอยู่ เพื่อช่วยให้คุณเห็นได้ว่ามีอะไรบ้างอยู่บนหน้าจอ ดู การซูม ที่หน้า 106 ลักษณะท่�ท�งใช้ง�นมัลติท�สก์ คุณสามารถใช้ลักษณะท่าทางมัลติทาสก์บน iPad เพื่อกลับไปยังหน้าจอเริ่มต้น แสดงแถบมัลติทาสก์ หรือสลับไปยังแอปพลิเคชั่นอื่น ๆ ได้ กลับไปที่หน้�จอเริ่มต้น: ใช้ 4 หรือ 5 นิ้วในการจีบนิ้ว แสดงแถบมัลติท�สก์: ปัดขึ้นด้วย 4 หรือ 5 นิ้ว ก�รสลับแอปพลิเคชั่น : ปัดไปทางซ้ายหรือขวาด้วย 4 หรือ 5 นิ้ว เปิดหรือปิด ลักษณะท่�ท�งใช้ง�นมัลติท�สก์: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > ลักษณะท่าทางใช้งาน มัลติทาสก์ แนวตั้งและแนวนอน คุณสามารถดูแอปพลิเคชั่นหลายแอปพลิเคชั่นใน iPad ได้ในแนวตั้งหรือแนวนอน หมุน iPad แล้ว หน้าจอจะหมุนตามไปด้วยเพื่อปรับให้เข้ากับแนวใหม่โดยอัตโนมัติ ล็อกแนวหน้�จอ: คลิกสองครั้งที่ปุ่มโฮม กวาดนิ้วจากซ้ายไปขวาที่แถบมัลติทาสก์ แล้วแตะ บท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 21 ไอคอนแม่กุญแจแนวตั้ง จะปรากฏในแถบสถานะเมื่อแนวหน้าจอถูกล็อกอยู่ คุณยังสามารถใช้สวิตช์ด้านข้างนี้ในการล็อกหน้าจอไม่ให้หมุนแทนการปิดเสียงเอฟเฟกต์ต่าง ๆ และ การแจ้ง ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > และใต้ “ใช้สวิตช์ด้านข้างสำาหรับ” แล้วแตะ ล็อกไม่ให้หมุน ดู สวิตช์ด้านข้าง ที่หน้า 116 ก�รปรับคว�มสว่�งหน้�จอ คุณสามารถปรับความสว่างของหน้าจอได้ด้วยตนเอง หรือเปิด ความสว่างอัตโนมัติ เพื่อให้ iPad ใช้ เซ็นเซอร์แสงรอบ ๆ ที่มีในตัวเพื่อปรับความสว่างโดยอัตโนมัติ ปรับคว�มสว่�งหน้�จอ: คลิกสองครั้งที่ปุ่มโฮม กวาดนิ้วจากซ้ายไปขวาที่แถบมัลติทาสก์ แล้ว ลากตัวเลื่อนความสว่าง ความสว�าง ความสว�าง ก�รเปิดหรือปิดคว�มสว่�งอัตโนมัติ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ความสว่างและวอลล์เปเปอร์ ดู ความสว่างและรูปพื้นหลัง ที่หน้า 118 การปรับแต่ง iPad คุณสามารถปรับแต่งเค้าโครงของแอปพลเคชั่นของคุณได้ด้วยตัวเองบนหน้าจอเริ่มต้น จัดระเบียบใน โฟลเดอร์ และเปลี่ยนวอลล์เปเปอร์ได้ ก�รจัดเรียงแอปพลิเคชั่นใหม่ ปรับแต่งหน้าจอเริ่มต้นของคุณด้วยตัวเองโดยการจัดเรียงแอปพลิเคชั่นใหม่ ย้ายแอปพลิเคชั่นไปยัง Dock ตรงด้านล่างของหน้าจอ และสร้างหน้าจอเริ่มต้นเพิ่มเติม ก�รจัดเรียงแอปพลิเคชั่นใหม่: แตะค้างไว้ที่แอปพลิเคชั่นใดก็ได้บนหน้าจอเริ่มต้นจนกว่าจะแอปพลิเคชั่น จะกระดุกกระดิก แล้วย้ายแอปพลิเคชั่นไปรอบ ๆ โดยการลาก กดปุ่มโฮม เพื่อบันทึกการจัดเรียง ของคุณ ก�รสร้�งหน้�จอเริ่มต้นใหม่: ขณะจัดเรียงแอปพลิเคชั่น ให้ลากแอปพลิเคชั่นไปทางขอบขวาของ หน้าจอด้านขวาสุด จนกว่าหน้าจอใหม่จะปรากฏบท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 22 คุณสามารถสร้างหน้าจอเริ่มต้นได้ถึง 11 หน้า จุดต่าง ๆ เหนือ Dock แสดงถึงหมายเลขของหน้าจอ ที่คุณมี และคุณกำาลังดูอยู่หน้าจอใด • สลับระหว่างหน้าจอเริ่มต้น: กวาดนิ้วไปทางซ้ายหรือขวา • การไปที่หน้าจอเริ่มต้นเป็นลำาดับแรก: กดปุ่มโฮม ก�รเลื่อนแอปพลิเคชั่นไปยังหน้�จออื่น: ขณะที่แอปพลิเคชั่นกระดุกกระดิก ให้ลากแอปพลิเคชั่นไป ด้านข้างของหน้าจอ ก�รปรับแต่งหน้�จอเริ่มต้นด้วยตัวเองโดยใช้ iTunes: เชื่อมต่อ iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ ใน iTunes ในคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ ให้เลือก iPad จากนั้นคลิกปุ่มแอปพลิเคชั่นเพื่อดูรูปภาพหน้าจอเริ่ม ต้นของ iPad รีเซ็ตหน้�จอเริ่มต้นให้กลับสู่เค้�โครงดั้งเดิม: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > รีเซ็ต จากนั้นแตะ รีเซ็ต การเรียงไอคอนที่หน้าจอเริ่มต้น การรีเซ็ตหน้าจอเริ่มต้นจะลบโฟลเดอร์ต่างใด ๆ ที่คุณสร้างขึ้นมา และปรับใช้รูปภาพเริ่มต้นกับหน้าจอเริ่มต้นของคุณ ก�รจัดระเบียบด้วยโฟลเดอร์ คุณสามารถใช้โฟลเดอร์เพื่อจัดระเบียบแอปพลิเคชั่นบนหน้าจอเริ่มต้นของคุณได้ เช่นเดียวกับที่คุณ จัดเรียงแอปพลิเคชั่น ให้จัดเรียงโฟลเดอร์ใหม่โดยการลากโฟลเดอร์ไปรอบ ๆ หน้าจอเริ่มต้นของคุณ หรือไปยัง Dock ก�รสร้�งโฟลเดอร์: แตะค้างที่แอปพลิเคชั่นจนกว่าไอคอนหน้าจอเริ่มต้นจะเริ่มกระดุกกระดิก จาก นั้นลากแอปพลิเคชั่นไปไว้บนแอปพลิเคชั่นอีกตัวหนึ่ง iPad จะสร้างโฟลเดอร์ใหม่ที่รวมแอปพลิเคชั่นสองตัว และตั้งชื่อโฟลเดอร์ตามประเภทของแอปพลิเคชั่น นั้น ในการป้อนชื่ออื่น ให้แตะที่ช่องชื่อ ก�รสร้�งโฟลเดอร์: แตะที่โฟลเดอร์ ในการปิดโฟลเดอร์ ให้แตะด้านนอกของโฟลเดอร์ หรือกดปุ่ม โฮม ก�รจัดระเบียบด้วยโฟลเดอร์: ขณะจัดเรียงแอปพลิเคชั่นใหม่ (ไอคอนกระดุกกระดิกอยู่): • การเพิ่มแอปพลิเคชั่นไปยังโฟลเดอร์: ลากแอปพลิเคชั่นไปยังโฟลเดอร์ • การลบแอปพลิเคชั่นออกจากโฟลเดอร์: เปิดโฟลเดอร์หากจำาเป็น แล้วลากแอปพลิเคชั่นออก • การลบโฟลเดอร์: ย้ายแอปพลิเคชั่นทั้งหมดออกจากโฟลเดอร์ โฟลเดอร์นั้นจะถูกลบโดยอัตโนมัติ • การตั้งชื่อโฟลเดอร์ใหม่: แตะเพื่อเปิดโฟลเดอร์ แล้วแตะชื่อและป้อนชื่อใหม่ หากคุณทำาเสร็จ ให้กดปุ่มโฮม ก�รเปลี่ยนวอลล์เปเปอร์ คุณสามารถปรับแต่งทั้งหน้าจอล็อกและหน้าจอเริ่มต้นได้ด้วยตัวเองโดยเลือกภาพหรือรูปภาพเพื่อ ใช้เป็นวอลล์เปเปอร์ เลือกรูปภาพที่มีให้รูปใดรูปหนึ่ง หรือรูปภาพจากอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณ หรือ อัลบั้มอื่นใน iPad ก�รเปลี่ยนวอลล์เปเปอร์: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ความสว่างและวอลล์เปเปอร์ การป้อน แป้นพิมพ์บนหน้าจอให้คุณป้อนเมื่อคุณจำาเป็นต้องป้อนข้อความ ก�รป้อนข้อคว�ม ใช้แป้นพิมพ์บนหน้าจอเพื่อป้อนข้อความ เช่น ข้อมูลรายชื่อ เมล และที่อยู่เว็บ แป้นพิมพ์อาจแก้ไข การสะกดคำาผิด คาดเดาสิ่งที่คุณกำาลังป้อน และแม้แต่เรียนรู้ขณะที่คุณใช้แป้นพิมพ์ โดยจะขึ้นอยู่กับ แอปพลิเคชั่นและภาษาที่คุณใช้อยู่บท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 23 คุณยังสามารถเชื่อมต่อแป้นพิมพ์ไร้สายของ Apple เพื่อป้อนได้ ดู แป้นพิมพ์ไร้สายของ Apple ที่หน้า 25 ในการใช้การป้อนตามคำาบอกแทนการป้อน ให้ดูที่ การป้อนตามคำาบอก ที่ หน้า 26 ก�รป้อนข้อคว�ม: แตะที่ช่องข้อความเพื่อนำาแป้นพิมพ์ขึ้นมา แล้วแตะแป้นบนแป้นพิมพ์ ในระหว่างพิมพ์ อักษรแต่ละตัวจะแสดงอยู่ด้านบนนิ้วหัวแม่มือหรือนิ้วมือ หากคุณสัมผัสแป้นผิด คุณ สามารถเลื่อนนิ้วเพื่อไปแตะที่แป้นที่ถูกต้อง ตัวอักษรจะไม่ถูกป้อนจนกว่าคุณจะยกนิ้วของคุณออก จากแป้น • การป้อนตัวพิมพ์ใหญ่: แตะที่แป้น Shift ก่อนที่จะแตะตัวอักษร หรือสัมผัสค้างไว้ที่แป้น Shift จากนั้นเลื่อนไปยังตัวอักษร • ป้อนการจุดและช่องว่างอย่างรวดเร็ว: แตะสองครั้งที่ space bar • การเปิด caps lock: แตะสองครั้งที่แป้น Shift ในการปิด caps lock ให้แตะแป้น Shift • การป้อนหมายเลข เครื่องหมายวรรคตอน หรือสัญลักษณ์: แตะแป้นหมายเลข เครื่องหมาย วรรคตอนและสัญลักษณ์เพิ่มเติม ให้แตะที่แป้นสัญลักษณ์ • ป้อนตัวอักษรที่เน้นเสียงหรือสลับอักขระอื่น ๆ : แตะค้างไว้ที่แป้น แล้วเลื่อนเพื่อเลือกตัวเลือกใด ตัวเลือกหนึ่ง ซ่อนแป้นพิมพ์หน้�จอ แตะแป้นของแป้นพิมพ์ ก�รตั้งค่�ตัวเลือกเพื่อป้อน: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > แป้นพิมพ์ ก�รแก้ไขคำ� หากคุณจำาเป็นต้องแก้ไขข้อความ แว่นขยายบนหน้าจอจะให้คุณวางตำาแหน่งจุดแยกที่คุณต้องการ คุณสามารถเลือกข้อความ และตัด คัดลอก และวางข้อความได้ ในบางแอปพลิเคชั่น คุณยังสามารถ ตัด คัดลอก และวางรูปภาพและวิดีโอได้เช่นกัน ก�รว�งตำ�แหน่งจุดแทรก: แตะค้างไว้เพื่อเปิดใช้แว่นขยาย แล้วลากเพื่อวางตำาแหน่งจุดแทรก เลือกข้อคว�ม: แตะจุดแทรกเพื่อให้ปุ่มเลือกปรากฏขึ้น แตะ เลือก เพื่อเลือกคำาที่อยู่ติดกัน หรือแตะ เลือกทั้งหมด เพื่อเลือกข้อความทั้งหมด บท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 24 คุณสามารถแตะสองครั้งที่คำาเพื่อเลือกได้เช่นกัน ลากจุดจับเพื่อเลือกข้อความมากขึ้นหรือน้อยลง ใน เอกสารแบบอ่านอย่างเดียว เช่น หน้าเว็บ ให้แตะค้างไว้เพื่อเลือกคำา จุดจับ จุดจับ ก�รตัดหรือคัดลอกข้อคว�ม: เลือกข้อความ แล้วแตะ ตัด หรือ คัดลอก ก�รว�งข้อคว�ม: แตะจุดแทรก แล้วแตะ วาง เพื่อแทรกข้อความล่าสุดที่คุณได้ตัดหรือคัดลอกไว้ ใน การแทนที่ข้อความ ให้เลือกข้อความก่อนแตะ วาง ก�รเลิกทำ�ก�รแก้ไขล่�สุด: เขย่า iPad แล้วแตะ เลิกทำา ก�รทำ�ให้ข้อคว�มเป็นตัวหน� ตัวเอียง หรือ ขีดเส้นใต้: เลือกข้อความ แตะ แล้วแตะ B/I/U (ไม่ ได้มีให้ใช้ครบทุกบริบท) ก�รดูนิย�มของคำ�: เลือกคำานั้น แล้วแตะ นิยาม (ไม่ได้มีให้ใช้ครบทุกบริบท) ก�รดูคำ�อื่น ๆ: เลือกคำานั้น แล้วแตะ แนะนำา (ไม่ได้มีให้ใช้ครบทุกบริบท) จัดบรรทัดข้อคว�ม: เลือกข้อความ จากนั้นแตะลูกศรซ้ายหรือขวา (ไม่ได้มีให้ใช้ครบทุกบริบท) ก�รแก้ไขอัตโนมัติและก�รตรวจสอบตัวสะกด ในหลาย ๆ ภาษา iPad จะแก้ไขการสะกดคำาผิดโดยอัตโนมัติหรือให้คำาแนะนำาขณะที่คุณป้อน เมื่อ iPad เสนอการแก้ไข คุณไม่จำาเป็นต้องหยุดป้อนเพื่อยอมรับคำาเสนอแนะเหล่านั้น สำาหรับภาษาต่าง ๆ ที่รองรับ โปรดดู www.apple.com/asia/ipad/specs ยอมรับก�รเสนอแนะ: แตะเว้นวรรค เครื่องหมายวรรคตอน หรือ return ก�รปฏิเสธคำ�แนะนำ�: แตะที่ “x” ถัดจากคำาแนะนำา แต่ละครั้งที่คุณปฎิเสธคำาเสนอแนะของคำาเดิม iPad จะค่อย ๆ ยอมรับคำานั้น ๆ ของคุณแทน iPad อาจจะยังขีดเส้นใต้คำาที่คุณป้อนแล้วเห็นว่าสะกดผิดบท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 25 ก�รแทนที่คำ�ที่สะกดผิด: แตะคำาที่ขีดเส้นใต้ แล้วแตะการสะกดคำาที่ถูกต้อง หากคำาที่คุณต้องการไม่ ปรากฏ ให้แก้ไขคำาโดยการป้อนใหม่ ก�รเปิดหรือปิดก�รแก้ไขอัตโนมัติหรือก�รตรวจสอบตัวสะกด: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > แป้นพิมพ์ คำ�ลัดและพจน�นุกรมส่วนตัวของคุณ คำาลัดจะช่วยให้คุณป้อนเพียงไม่กี่อักขระแทนการป้อนคำาหรือประโยคที่ยาว ข้อความแบบเต็มจะ ปรากฏเมื่อใดก็ตามที่คุณป้อนคำาลัด ตัวอย่างเช่น คีย์ลัดของ “กลป” สามารถขยายเป็น “กำาลังไป!” สร้�งคำ�ลัด: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > แป้นพิมพ์ แล้วแตะเพิ่มคำาลัดใหม่ ป้องกัน iPad ไม่ให้พย�ย�มแก้ไขคำ�หรือวลี: สร้างคำาลัด แต่ปล่อยให้ช่องคำาลัดว่างเปล่า ก�รแก้ไขคำ�ลัด: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > แป้นพิมพ์ แล้วแตะ คำาลัด ก�รใช้ iCloud เพื่ออัปเดตพจน�นุกรมส่วนตัวของคุณบนอุปกรณ์ iOS อื่นของคุณอยู่เสมอ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud และเปิด “เอกสารและข้อมูล” เค้�โครงแป้นพิมพ์ บน iPad คุณสามารถป้อนด้วยแป้นพิมพ์แบบแยกที่อยู่ด้านล่างของจอ หรือปล่อยแป้นพิมพ์ออกจาก แท่นไปไว้ตรงกลางของหน้าจอก็ได้ ก�รปรับแป้นพิมพ์: แตะค้าง จากนั้น: • ใช้แป้นพิมพ์แยก: เลื่อนนิ้วของคุณเพื่อแยก จากนั้นปล่อยนิ้ว • ย้ายแป้นพิมพ์ไปยังตรงกลางของหน้าจอ: เลื่อนนิ้วของคุณเพื่อปล่อยจากแท่น จากนั้นปล่อยนิ้ว • กลับไปเป็นแป้นพิมพ์แบบเต็ม: เลื่อนนิ้วของคุณเพื่อวางแท่นและผสาน จากนั้นปล่อยนิ้ว • กลับไปเป็นแป้นพิมพ์แบบเต็มที่ด้านล่างสุดของหน้าจอ: เลื่อนนิ้วของคุณเพื่อวางแท่น จากนั้น ปล่อยนิ้ว เปิดหรือปิดแยกแป้นพิมพ์: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > แป้นพิมพ์ > แป้นพิมพ์แยกออก คุณสามารถใช้การตั้งค่าเพื่อตั้งค่าเค้าโครงสำาหรับแป้นพิมพ์บนหน้าจอ หรือสำาหรับแป้นพิมพ์ไร้สาย ของ Apple ที่คุณใช้กับ iPad ได้ เค้าโครงที่มีให้ใช้ขึ้นอยู่กับภาษาของแป้นพิมพ์นั้น ดู แป้นพิมพ์ไร้ สายของ Apple ด้านล่างและ ภาคผนวก B แป้นพิมพ์นานาชาติที่หน้า 122 ก�รเลือกเค้�โครงของแป้นพิมพ์: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > นานาชาติ > แป้นพิมพ์ เลือกภาษา แล้วเลือกเค้าโครง แป้นพิมพ์ไร้ส�ยของ Apple คุณสามารถใช้แป้นพิมพ์ไร้สายของ Apple (ขายแยกต่างหาก) สำาหรับพิมพ์บน iPad แป้นพิมพ์ไร้ สายของ Apple จะเชื่อมต่อผ่านบลูทูธ ดังนั้นคุณจำาเป็นต้องจับคู่กับ iPad ดู การจับคู่อุปกรณ์บลู ทูธ ที่หน้า 32 ทันทีที่แป้นพิมพ์ถูกจับคู่กับ iPad แป้นพิมพ์นั้นจะทำาการเชื่อมต่อทุกครั้งที่อยู่ภายในระยะ—สูงสุด ถึง 33 ฟุต (10 เมตร) เมื่อแป้นพิมพ์ไร้สายถูกเชื่อมต่อ แป้นพิมพ์หน้าจอจะไม่ปรากฏเมื่อคุณแตะที่ ช่องข้อความ ในการประหยัดแบตเตอรี่ ให้ปิดแป้นพิมพ์เมื่อไม่ได้ใช้ เปลี่ยนภ�ษ�เมื่อใช้แป้นพิมพ์ที่เป็นฮ�ร์ดแวร์: กด Command–Space bar เพื่อแสดงรายการ ภาษาที่มี กด Space bar อีกครั้งเพื่อเลือกภาษาบท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 26 ก�รปิดแป้นพิมพ์ไร้ส�ย: กดปุ่มเปิด/ปิดค้างไว้บนแป้นพิมพ์จนกว่าไฟสีเขียวจะดับลง iPad จะยกเลิกการเชื่อมต่อแป้นพิมพ์เมื่อปิดแป้นพิมพ์หรือแป้นพิมพ์อยู่นอกระยะ ก�รยกเลิกก�รจับคู่แป้นพิมพ์ไร้ส�ย: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > บลูทูธ แตะ ถัดจากชื่อแป้นพิมพ์ จาก นั้นแตะ “เลิกใช้อุปกรณ์ชิ้นนี้” การป้อนตามคำาบอก ใน iPad ที่รองรับ คุณสามารถป้อนข้อความตามคำาบอกได้แทนการป้อนเอง ในการใช้การป้อนตาม คำาบอก คุณต้องเปิด Siri และ iPad จะต้องเชื่อมต่อกับอินเทอร์เน็ต คุณสามารถใส่เครื่องหมาย วรรคตอนและออกคำาสั่งเพื่อจัดรูปแบบข้อความของคุณ หมายเหตุ: การป้อนตามคำาบอกอาจจะไม่มีครบทุกภาษา หรือครบทุกพื้นที่ และคุณสมบัติอาจจะ แตกต่างกันไป อาจคิดค่าบริการข้อมูลเครือข่ายโทรศัพท์มือถือ ก�รเปิดก�รป้อนต�มคำ�บอก: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > Siri จากนั้นเปิด Siri ก�รป้อนข้อคว�มต�มคำ�บอก: แตะ จากแป้นพิมพ์บนหน้าจอ แล้วพูด เมื่อทำาเสร็จ ให้แตะ แตะเพื่อเริ่มการป�อนตามคำบอก แตะเพื่อเริ่มการป�อนตามคำบอก ในการเพิ่มข้อความ ให้แตะ อีกครั้งแล้วดำาเนินการป้อนตามคำาบอกต่อ ในการแทรกข้อความ ให้ แตะเพื่อวางจุดแทรกก่อน คุณสามารถแทนที่ข้อความที่เลือกโดยการป้อนตามคำาบอกได้เช่นกัน ก�รเพิ่มเครื่องหม�ยวรรคตอนหรือจัดรูปแบบข้อคว�ม: พูดเครื่องหมายวรรคตอนหรือการจัดรูป แบบคำาสั่ง ตัวอย่างเช่น “Dear Mary comma the check is in the mail exclamation mark” จะมี ผลลัพธ์จะเป็น “Dear Mary, the check is in the mail!” เครื่องหมายวรรคตอนและการจัดรูปแบบคำาสั่ง ได้แก่: • quote … end quote • new paragraph • cap—เพื่อทำาให้คำาถัดไปเป็นตัวพิมพ์ใหญ่ • caps on … caps off—เพื่อทำาให้อักขระตัวแรกของแต่ละคำาเป็นตัวพิมพ์ใหญ่ • all caps—เพื่อทำาให้คำาถัดไปเป็นตัวพิมพ์ใหญ่ทั้งหมด • all caps on … all caps off—เพื่อทำาให้คำาที่อยู่ภายในเป็นตัวพิมพ์ใหญ่ทั้งหมด • no caps on … no caps off—เพื่อทำาให้คำาที่อยู่ภายในเป็นตัวพิมพ์เล็กทั้งหมด • no space on … no space off—เพื่อให้คำาต่อเนื่องกัน • smiley—เพื่อแทรก :-) • frowny—เพื่อแทรก :-( • winky—เพื่อแทรก ;-)บท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 27 การค้นหา คุณสามารถค้นหาแอปพลิเคชั่นได้หลายตัวใน iPad รวมถึงวิกิพีเดียและเว็บด้วย ค้นหาแอปพลิเคชั่น แต่ละตัว หรือค้นหาแอปพลิเคชั่นทั้งหมดในครั้งเดียวได้โดยใช้ Spotlight Spotlight ยังค้นหาชื่อ ของแอปพลิเคชั่นใน iPad ได้อีกด้วย หากคุณมีแอปพลิเคชั่นหลายตัว คุณอาจต้องการใช้ Spotlight เพื่อระบุตำาแหน่งแล้วเปิดแอปพลิเคชั่นเหล่านั้น ก�รค้นห�แอปพลิเคชั่นแต่ละตัว: ป้อนข้อความในช่องค้นหา ค้นห� iPad โดยใช้ Spotlight: กวาดนิ้วไปทางขวาจากหน้าจอเริ่มต้นหน้าแรกของคุณ หรือกดปุ่ม โฮม จากหน้าจอเริ่มต้นใดก็ได้ ป้อนข้อความในช่องค้นหา ผลลัพธ์การค้นหาจะปรากฏในขณะที่คุณป้อน แตะ ค้นหา เพื่อยกเลิกแป้นพิมพ์แล้วดูผลลัพธ์เพิ่มเติม แตะที่รายการในรายการเพื่อเปิด ไอคอนต่าง ๆ จะให้คุณทราบว่าผลลัพธ์มาจากแอปพลิเคชั่นตัวใด iPad อาจแสดงตามอันดับยอดนิยมให้คุณ โดยอิงตามการค้นหาก่อนหน้านี้ Spotlight ค้นหาดังต่อไปนี้: • รายชื่อ ได้แก่ เนื้อหาทั้งหมด • แอปพลิเคชั่น ได้แก่ ชื่อแอปพลิเคชั่น • เพลง ได้แก่ ชื่อเพลง ศิลปิน อัลบั้ม และไตเติลของพ็อดคาสท์และวิดีโอ • พ็อดคาสท์ ได้แก่ ชื่อเรื่อง • วิดีโอ ได้แก่ ชื่อเรื่อง • หนังสือเสียง ได้แก่ ชื่อเรื่อง • โน้ต ได้แก่ ข้อความในโน้ต • ปฏิทิน (กิจกรรม) ได้แก่ ชื่อกิจกรรม ผู้รับเชิญ สถานที่ และโน้ต • Mail ได้แก่ ช่อง ถึง จาก และหัวเรื่อง ของทุกบัญชี (ไม่ค้นหาข้อความในข้อความ) • เตือนความจำา ได้แก่ ชื่อเรื่อง • ข้อความ ได้แก่ ชื่อและข้อความในข้อความ ก�รค้นห�เว็บหรือวิกิพีเดียจ�ก Spotlight: เลื่อนลงมาด้านล่างของผลการค้นหา แล้วแตะ ค้นหา ในเว็บ หรือ ค้นหาในวิกิพีเดีย ก�รเปิดแอปพลิเคชั่นจ�ก ค้นห�: ป้อนชื่อแอปพลิเคชั่นบางส่วนหรือทั้งหมด จากนั้นแตะที่แอปพลิเคชั่น ตัวนั้นบท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 28 เลือกว่�ร�ยก�รใดจะถูกค้นห�และลำ�ดับที่ถูกค้นห�: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > ค้นหาโดย Spotlight การแจ้ง ในการทำาให้แน่ใจว่าคุณจะไม่พลาดกิจกรรมสำาคัญ มีแอปพลิเคชั่นใน iPad หลายตัวที่สามารถเตือน ได้ การเตือนสามารถที่จะปรากฏเป็นระยะเวลาสั้น ๆ เหมือนแบนเนอร์ที่ด้านบนสุดของหน้าจอ ซึ่ง จะหายไปหากคุณไม่ได้ตอบสนองการเตือนนั้น หรือจะปรากฏที่กึ่งกลางของหน้าจอที่จะคงอยู่จนกว่า คุณจะตอบสนองต่อการเตือนนั้น แอปพลิเคชั่นบางตัวยังสามารถแสดงป้ายกำากับบนไอคอนของ แอปพลิเคชั่นนั้นที่หน้าจอเริ่มต้น เพื่อแจ้งให้คุณทราบถึงจำานวนของรายการใหม่ ตัวอย่างเช่น จำานวน ของข้อความอีเมลใหม่ที่คุณได้รับ หากพบปัญหา เช่น ไม่สามารถส่งข้อความได้ เครื่องหมาย อัศเจรีย์ จะปรากฏบนป้ายกำากับ ป้ายกำากับจำานวนบนโฟลเดอร์จะแสดงจำานวนการเตือนสำาหรับ แอปพลิเคชั่นทั้งหมดในโฟลเดอร์ การเตือนยังสามารถที่จะปรากฏบนหน้าจอที่ล็อกได้ ก�รตอบสนองต่อก�รเตือนเมื่อ iPad ล็อกอยู่: กวาดนิ้วจากซ้ายไปขวาที่การเตือน การเตือนทั้งหมดของคุณจะอยู่ในศูนย์การแจ้ง ดังนั้น หากคุณไม่สามารถตอบสนองการเตือนในครั้ง แรกได้ คุณสามารถตอบสนองการเตือนนั้นได้ในศูนย์การแจ้งเมื่อคุณพร้อม การเตือนจะรวมไปถึง: • การพลาดสาย FaceTime • อีเมลใหม่ • ข้อความใหม่ • เตือนความจำา • กิจกรรมในปฏิทิน • คำาเชิญของเพื่อน (Game Center) คุณยังสามารถรับข่าวสารที่เกี่ยวกับภูมิอากาศในท้องถิ่น และแสดงหลักทรัพย์ที่เกี่ยวกับหุ้นส่วน บุคคลของคุณได้ หากคุณได้ลงชื่อเข้าใช้บัญชี Twitter และ Facebook ของคุณแล้ว คุณจะสามารถ โพสต์และทวีตจากศูนย์การแจ้งไปยังบัญชีนั้นได้บท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 29 ก�รดูศูนย์ก�รแจ้ง กวาดนิ้วลงจากด้านบนของหน้าจอ • การตอบกลับการเตือน: แตะการเตือน • การลบการเตือน: แตะ จากนั้นแตะ ล้าง ก�รจัดก�รก�รเตือนสำ�หรับแอปพลิเคชั่นของคุณ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > การแจ้ง ดู ห้ามรบกวนและ การแจ้ง ที่หน้า 113 ก�รเลือกเสียงเตือน ปรับคว�มดังเสียงเตือน หรือปิด/เปิดก�รสั่น: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > เสียง การแบ่งปัน มีหลายวิธีที่จะแบ่งปันกับบุคคลอื่นด้วย iPad ก�รแบ่งปันภ�ยในแอปพลิเคชั่น ในแอปพลิเคชั่นหลายตัว การแตะ จะแสดงตัวเลือกสำาหรับการแบ่งปัน และการกระทำาอื่น เช่น การพิมพ์ หรือ การคัดลอก ตัวเลือกจะเปลี่ยนไปตามแอปพลิเคชั่นที่คุณกำาลังใช้ Facebook ลงชื่อเข้าใช้บัญชี Facebook ของคุณ (หรือสร้างบัญชีใหม่) ในการตั้งค่าเพื่อเปิดใช้งานการโพสต์ โดยตรงจากหลากหลายแอปพลิเคชั่นบน iPad ก�รลงชื่อเข้�ใช้หรือสร้�งบัญชี Facebook: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Facebook ก�รโพสต์จ�กศูนย์ก�รแจ้ง: แตะ “แตะเพื่อโพสต์” คุณสามารถเปิดคุณสมบัตินี้ได้ ให้ไปที่การตั้งค่า > การแจ้ง > แบ่งปันวิดเจ็ต ก�รโพสต์โดยใช้ Siri: พูดว่า “Post to Facebook ….” ก�รโพสต์ร�ยก�รจ�กแอปพลิเคชั่น: ในหลายแอปพลิเคชั่น ให้แตะ ในแผนที่ ให้แตะ แตะ แบ่งปันที่ตั้ง จากนั้นแตะ Facebook ก�รตั้งค่�ตัวเลือกสำ�หรับ Facebook: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ตั้งค่า Facebook ไปที่: • อัปเดตรายชื่อบน iPad ด้วยชื่อ Facebook และรูปภาพ • อนุญาตให้ App Store, ปฏิทิน, รายชื่อ หรือ iTunes ใช้บัญชีของคุณ ก�รติดตั้งแอปพลิเคชั่น Facebook: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Facebook จากนั้นแตะ ติดตั้ง Twitter ลงชื่อเข้าใช้บัญชี Twitter ของคุณ (หรือสร้างบัญชีใหม่) ในการตั้งค่าเพื่อเปิดใช้งานทวีตที่มีสิ่งที่ แนบจากหลากหลายแอปพลิเคชั่นบน iPad ก�รลงชื่อเข้�ใช้หรือสร้�งบัญชี Twitter: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Twitter บท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 30 ก�รทวีตจ�กศูนย์ก�รแจ้ง: แตะ “แตะเพื่อทวีต” คุณสามารถเปิดคุณสมบัตินี้ได้ ให้ไปที่การตั้งค่า > การแจ้ง > แบ่งปันวิดเจ็ต ก�รทวีตโดยใช้ Siri: พูดว่า “Tweet ….” ก�รทวีตร�ยก�รจ�กแอปพลิเคชั่น: ดูรายการ แตะ จากนั้นแตะ Twitter หาก ไม่ปรากฏขึ้น ให้แตะที่หน้าจอ แตะ เพิ่มที่ตั้ง เพื่อใส่ตำาแหน่งของคุณ ก�รทวีตตำ�แหน่งในแผนที่: แตะหมุดตำาแหน่ง แตะ แตะ แบ่งปันที่ตั้ง จากนั้นแตะ Twitter เมื่อคุณเขียนทวีต หมายเลขที่อยู่มุมขวาล่างของหน้าจอทวีตแสดงจำานวนอักขระที่เหลืออยู่ที่คุณ สามารถป้อนได้ สิ่งที่แนบจะใช้บางส่วนของอักขระ 140 อักขระที่ทวีตด้วย ก�รเพิ่มชื่อผู้ใช้ Twitter และรูปภ�พไปยังร�ยชื่อ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Twitter แล้วแตะ อัปเดต รายชื่อ ก�รตั้งค่�ตัวเลือกสำ�หรับ Twitter: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Twitter ก�รติดตั้งแอปพลิเคชั่น Twitter: ไปที่ติดตั้ง > Twitter แล้วแตะติดตั้ง การเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับทีวีหรืออุปกรณ์อื่น คุณสามารถใช้ AirPlay กับ Apple TV เพื่อกระจายเนื้อหาไปยัง HDTV หรือเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับทีวี ของคุณโดยใช้สาย AirPlay ด้วย AirPlay คุณจะสามารถกระจายเพลง รูปภาพ และวิดีโอไปยัง Apple TV และอุปกรณ์ที่เปิดใช้ งาน AirPlay แบบไร้สายได้ ตัวควบคุม AirPlay จะปรากฏขึ้นเมื่อมีอุปกรณ์ที่เปิดใช้งาน AirPlay ในเครือข่าย Wi-Fi เดียวกันกับที่ iPad เชื่อมต่ออยู่ คุณยังสามารถสะท้อนเนื้อหาบนหน้าจอ iPad ของคุณบนทีวีได้ ก�รกระจ�ยเนื้อห�ไปยังอุปกรณ์ที่เปิดใช้ง�น AirPlay: แตะ และเลือกอุปกรณ์ ก�รเข้�ถึงตัวควบคุม AirPlay และตัวควบคุมคว�มดังเสียงในขณะใช้แอปพลิเคชั่น: เมื่อเปิดหน้า จอ ให้คลิกสองครั้งที่ปุ่มโฮม แล้วเลื่อนไปทางซ้ายสุดของแถบที่ทำางานพร้อมกัน AirPlay AirPlay ความดังเสียง ความดังเสียง สลับก�รเล่นกลับไปที่ iPad: แตะ และเลือก iPad แสดงหน้�จอ iPad ให้เหมือนกันบนทีวี: แตะ ที่ด้านซ้ายสุดของแถบมัลติทาสก์ เลือก Apple TV และแตะ การสะท้อน แถบสีน้ำาเงินจะปรากฏที่ด้านบนของจอ iPad เมื่อเปิดใช้หน้าเหมือน AirPlay ทุกอย่างบนจอ iPad จะปรากฏบนจอทีวี ก�รเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับทีวีโดยใช้ส�ย สายและอะแดปเตอร์ของ Apple (แยกต่างหาก) อาจใช้เพื่อเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับทีวี โปรเจคเตอร์ หรือจอแสดงผลภายนอกอื่น ๆ สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม ให้ไปที่ support.apple.com/kb/HT4108 การพิมพ์ด้วย AirPrint AirPrint ให้คุณพิมพ์แบบไร้สายไปยังเครื่องพิมพ์ที่ใช้งานได้กับ AirPrint จากแอปพลิเคชั่น iOS ดังต่อไปนี้: • Mail ได้แก่ ข้อความอีเมลและสิ่งที่แนบที่สามารถเปิดดูได้ใน Quick Look • รูปภาพและกล้อง ได้แก่ รูปภาพบท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 31 • Safari ได้แก่ หน้าเว็บ PDF และสิ่งที่แนบอื่นที่สามารถดูได้ใน Quick Look • iBooks ได้แก่ PDF • แผนที่ ได้แก่ ส่วนของแผนที่ที่แสดงบนหน้าจอ • โน้ต ได้แก่ โน้ตที่แสดงในขณะนี้ แอปพลิเคชั่นอื่น ๆ ที่มีให้ใช้จาก Apple Store อาจรองรับ AirPrint ด้วยเช่นกัน iPad และเครื่องพิมพ์ต้องอยู่ในเครือข่าย Wi-Fi เดียวกัน สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับ AirPrint ให้ไปที่ support.apple.com/kb/HT4356 พิมพ์เอกส�ร: แตะ หรือ (ขึ้นอยู่กับแอปพลิเคชั่นที่คุณกำาลังใช้) จากนั้นแตะ พิมพ์ ก�รดูสถ�นะของง�นพิมพ์: คลิกสองครั้งที่ปุ่มโฮม แล้วแตะ ศูนย์การพิมพ์ ในแถบมัลติทาสก์ ป้ายกำากับบนไอคอนจะแสดงจำานวนเอกสารที่พร้อมให้สั่งพิมพ์ ซึ่งรวมถึงเอกสารปัจจุบัน ก�รยกเลิกง�นพิมพ์: ในศูนย์การพิมพ์ หากจำาเป็นให้เลือกงานพิมพ์ จากนั้นแตะ ยกเลิกการพิมพ์บท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 32 อุปกรณ์บลูทูธ คุณสามารถใช้ iPad กับแป้นพิมพ์ไร้สายของ Apple และอุปกรณ์บลูทูธอื่นๆ เช่น หูฟังบลูทูธ สำาหรับโปรไฟล์บลูทูธที่รองรับ ให้ไปที่ support.apple.com/kb/HT3647 ก�รจับคู่อุปกรณ์บลูทูธ ก่อนที่คุณจะใช้อุปกรณ์บลูทูธกับ iPad ได้ คุณต้องจับคู่อุปกรณ์บลูทูธกับ iPad ก่อน จับคู่อุปกรณ์บลูทูธกับ iPad: 1 ทำาให้อุปกรณ์นั้นค้นหาพบ ดูเอกสารประกอบที่มาพร้อมกับอุปกรณ์ สำาหรับแป้นพิมพ์ไร้สายของ Apple ให้กดปุ่มเปิด/ปิด 2 ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > บลูทูธ แล้วเปิดบลูทูธ 3 เลือกอุปกรณ์ และป้อนคีย์รหัสผ่านหรือพิน หากได้รับแจ้ง ดูคำาแนะนำาเกี่ยวกับคีย์รหัสผ่านหรือ PIN ที่มาพร้อมกับอุปกรณ์ สำาหรับข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับแป้นพิมพ์ไร้สายของ Appleให้ดูที่ แป้นพิมพ์ไร้สายของ Apple ที่หน้า 25 ในการใช้ชุดหูฟังบลูทูธกับ iPad ให้ดูที่เอกสารประกอบที่มาพร้อมกับอุปกรณ์ ก�รเรียกคืนเสียงออกไปยัง iPad เมื่อเชื่อมต่อชุดหูฟังบลูทูธ: ปิดหรือยกเลิกการจับคู่อุปกรณ์ หรือ ปิดบลูทูธใน การตั้งค่า > บลูทูธ ทุกครั้งที่อุปกรณ์อยู่นอกระยะ เสียงออกจะกลับไปดังที่ iPad คุณยัง สามารถใช้ AirPlay เพื่อสลับเสียงออกไปยัง iPad ดู AirPlay ที่หน้า 30 สถ�นะบลูทูธ หลังจากที่คุณจับคู่อุปกรณ์กับ iPad ไอคอนบลูทูธจะปรากฏในแถบสถานะที่ด้านบนสุดของหน้าจอ: • (ขาว): บลูทูธเปิดและเชื่อมต่อกับอุปกรณ์อยู่ • (เทา): บลูทูธเปิดและเชื่อมต่อกับอุปกรณ์อยู่ แต่อุปกรณ์อยู่นอกระยะการเชื่อมต่อหรือปิดอยู่ • ไม่มีไอคอนบลูทูธ: บลูทูธไม่ได้จับคู่กับอุปกรณ์ ก�รยกเลิกก�รจับคู่อุปกรณ์จ�ก iPad คุณสามารถยกเลิกการจับคู่อุปกรณ์บลูทูธ หากคุณไม่ต้องการใช้กับ iPad อีกต่อไป เลิกจับคู่อุปกรณ์บลูทูธ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > บลูทูธ และเปิดบลูทูธ แตะ ถัดจากชื่ออุปกรณ์ จากนั้น แตะ “เลิกใช้อุปกรณ์นี้้” การแบ่งปันไฟล์ คุณสามารถใช้ iTunes เพื่อถ่ายโอนไฟล์ระหว่าง iPad และคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ คุณสามารถดูไฟล์ ที่ได้รับเป็นสิ่งที่แนบในอีเมลบน iPad ได้เช่นกัน ดู การอ่านเมล ที่หน้า 44 หากคุณมีแอปพลิเคชั่น เดียวกับที่เปิดใช้งาน iCloud ในอุปกรณ์มากกว่าหนึ่งเครื่อง คุณสามารถใช้ iCloud เพื่ออัปเดต เอกสารของคุณในอุปกรณ์ทั้งหมดของคุณโดยอัตโนมัติเสมอ ดู การใช้ iCloud ที่หน้า 14 ก�รถ่�ยโอนไฟล์โดยใช้ iTunes: เชื่อมต่อ iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณโดยใช้สายที่มาพร้อม กับเครื่อง ใน iTunes ที่ติดตั้งในคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ ให้เลือก iPad จากนั้นคลิกปุ่มแอปพลิเคชั่น ใช้ส่วนการแบ่งปันไฟล์เพื่อถ่ายโอนเอกสารระหว่าง iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ แอปพลิเคชั่นที่ รองรับการแบ่งปันไฟล์จะปรากฏในรายการแอปพลิเคชั่นการแบ่งปันไฟล์ใน iTunes ในการลบไฟล์ ให้เลือกไฟล์ในรายการไฟล์ แล้วกดแป้น Delete คุณสมบัติความปลอดภัย การรักษาความปลอดภัยช่วยคุณป้องกันข้อมูลบน iPad จากการลักลอบเข้าไปใช้ บท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 33 รหัสผ่�นและก�รปกป้องข้อมูล เพื่อความปลอดภัย คุณสามารถตั้งค่ารหัสผ่านที่คุณจำาเป็นต้องป้อนทุกครั้งที่คุณเปิดเครื่องหรือเรียก คืน iPad หรือเมื่อคุณได้เข้าถึงการตั้งค่าการล็อกรหัสผ่าน การตั้งรหัสผ่านจะเปิดใช้การป้องกันข้อมูล ซึ่งใช้รหัสผ่านนั้นเป็นกุญแจสำาหรับเข้ารหัสข้อความอีเมล และเอกสารแนบที่เก็บไว้บน iPad (แอปพลิเคชั่นบางตัวที่มีให้ใช้จาก Apple Store อาจรองรับ การปกป้องข้อมูลด้วยเช่นกัน) ข้อความแจ้งเตือนที่อยู่ด้านล่างของหน้าจอล็อกรหัสผ่านในการตั้งค่า แสดงว่าการปกป้องข้อมูลถูกเปิดใช้งานแล้ว ตั้งรหัสผ่�น: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > ล็อกรหัสผ่าน แล้วแตะ ตรวจรหัสผ่าน และป้อนรหัสผ่าน ตัวเลข 4 ตัว ก�รใช้รหัสผ่�นที่ปลอดภัยม�กขึ้น: ในการเพิ่มความปลอดภัย ให้ปิดรหัสผ่านแบบง่าย และใช้รหัส ผ่านที่ยาวขึ้นด้วยการผสมหมายเลข ตัวอักษร เครื่องหมายวรรคตอน และอักขระพิเศษ ในการปลดล็อก iPad เมื่อป้องกันไว้ด้วยรหัสผ่านผสม ให้คุณป้อนรหัสผ่านโดยใช้แป้นพิมพ์ หาก คุณต้องการปลดล็อก iPad โดยใช้แป้นคีย์ตัวเลข คุณสามารถตั้งค่ารหัสผ่านที่ยาวขึ้นได้โดยใช้ หมายเลขอย่างเดียว ดู การล็อกรหัสผ่าน ที่หน้า 115 ค้นห� iPad ของฉัน ค้นหา iPad ของฉัน จะช่วยให้คุณระบุตำาแหน่งและป้องกัน iPad ของคุณโดยการใช้แอปพลิเคชั่น ค้นหา iPhone ของฉันที่แจกฟรีบน iPad, iPhone หรือ iPod touch เครื่องอื่นหรือโดยการใช้เว็บ เบราว์เซอร์บน Mac และ PC ที่ลงชื่อเข้าใช้ใน www.icloud.com ค้นหา iPad ของฉันประกอบด้วย: • การเล่นเสียง: เล่นเสียงเป็นเวลาสองนาที • โหมดสูญหาย: คุณสามารถล็อก iPad ที่สูญหายของคุณด้วยรหัสผ่านโดยทันทีและสามารถส่ง ข้อความที่ใช้แสดงหมายเลขที่ติดต่อได้ นอกจากนั้น iPad จะติดตามและรายงานตำาแหน่ง เพื่อที่ คุณจะได้เห็นว่าเครื่องของคุณอยู่ในตำาแหน่งใดเมื่อคุณค้นหาโดยใช้แอปพลิเคชั่นค้นหา iPhone ของฉัน • ลบ iPad: ลบข้อมูลและสื่อทั้งหมดบน iPad ของคุณ และเปลี่ยนการตั้งค่าของ iPad ให้กลับสู่ค่า เริ่มต้นเดิมจากโรงงาน ข้อสำาคัญ: ในการใช้คุณสมบัติเหล่านี้ คุณจะต้องเปิดค้นหา iPad ของฉันในการตั้งค่า iCloud บน iPad ของคุณและ iPad จะต้องเชื่อมต่อกับอินเทอร์เน็ตอยู่ เปิดค้นห� iPad ของฉัน: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud แล้วเปิด ค้นหา iPad ของฉัน แบตเตอรี่ iPad จะมีแบตเตอรี่ลิเธียมไอออนแบบชาร์จใหม่ได้อยู่ภายใน สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับแบตเตอรี่ ซึ่งรวมถึงเคล็ดลับในการยืดอายุการใช้งานแบตเตอรี่ ให้ไปที่ www.apple.com/asia/batteries คำาเตือน: สำาหรับข้อมูลสำาคัญที่เกี่ยวกับความปลอดภัยในเรื่องแบตเตอรี่และการชาร์จ iPad ให้ดู ข้อมูลด้านความปลอดภัยที่สำาคัญ ที่หน้า 125บท 3 ข้อมูลพื้นฐาน 34 ช�ร์จแบตเตอรี่: วิธีที่ดีที่สุดในการชาร์จแบตเตอรี่ของ iPad คือ เชื่อมต่อ iPad เข้ากับแหล่งจ่ายไฟ โดยใช้สายเคเบิล และอะแดปเตอร์แบบ USB iPad อาจจะชาร์จได้ช้าเมื่อคุณเชื่อมต่อกับพอร์ต USB 2.0 ในคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ หากเครื่อง Mac หรือ PC ไม่มีพลังงานไฟเพียงพอในการชาร์จ iPad จะปรากฏข้อความ “ไม่ได้ชาร์จ” บนแถบ สถานะ ข้อสำาคัญ: แบตเตอรี่ของ iPad อาจถ่ายเทประจุออกไปแทนที่การชาร์จ หาก iPad ต่อกับกับเครื่อง คอมพิวเตอร์ที่ปิดอยู่หรืออยู่ในโหมดพักเครื่องหรือสแตนด์บาย หรือต่อกับฮัป USB หรือต่อกับช่อง USB ของแป้นพิมพ์ ไอคอนแบตเตอรี่ในมุมบนขวาของแถบสถานะแสดงระดับแบตเตอรี่หรือสถานะการชาร์จ ไม�ได�ชาร�จ ไม�ได�ชาร�จ กำลังชาร�จ กำลังชาร�จ ชาร�จแล�ว ชาร�จแล�ว ก�รแสดงเปอร์เซ็นต์ของก�รช�ร์จแบตเตอรี่: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > การใช้งาน และเปิดการตั้ง ค่าด้านล่างการใช้งานแบตเตอรี่ ข้อสำาคัญ: หาก iPad มีพลังงานไฟน้อยจะแสดงรูปภาพดังต่อไปนี้ ที่แสดงว่าต้องชาร์จ iPad นาน ถึงยี่สิบนาที ก่อนการใช้งานใหม่อีกครั้ง หาก iPad มีพลังงานน้อยมากๆ อาจไม่มีรูปภาพใดๆ ขึ้นที่ หน้าจอประมาณนานกว่า 2 นาที ก่อนที่รูปภาพแสดงพลังงานแบตเตอรี่ต่ำาจะปรากฏขึ้น หรือ หรือ แบตเตอรี่แบบชาร์จได้จะมีจำานวนการชาร์จที่จำากัด ซึ่งในท้ายที่สุดก็ต้องทำาการเปลี่ยนใหม่ ก�รเปลี่ยนแบตเตอรี่: แบตเตอรี่ไม่สามารถเปลี่ยนได้โดยผู้ใช้ และต้องให้ตัวแทนผู้ให้บริการที่ได้ รับรองจาก Apple (AASP) เป็นผู้เปลี่ยนเท่านั้น ไปที่ www.apple.com/asia/batteries/replacements.html4 35 Siri คืออะไร Siri คือผู้ช่วยส่วนตัวที่ชาญฉลาด ซึ่งจะช่วยให้คุณทำาสิ่งต่าง ๆ ให้ลุล่วงได้โดยเพียงแค่พูด Siri เข้าใจการพูดอย่างเป็นธรรมชาติ ดังนั้นคุณจึงไม่จำาเป็นต้องเรียนรู้คำาสั่งเฉพาะหรือจดจำาคำาสำาคัญ ต่าง ๆ คุณสามารถขอให้ช่วยทำาสิ่งต่าง ๆ ได้หลายวิธี ตัวอย่างเช่น คุณสามารถพูดว่า “Set the alarm for 6:30 a.m.” หรือ “Wake me at 6:30 in the morning.” ไม่ว่าอย่างไร Siri ก็ สามารถเข้าใจได้ คำาเตือน: สำาหรับข้อมูลที่สำาคัญเกี่ยวกับการหลีกเลี่ยงสิ่งรบกวนขณะขับรถ ให้ดูที่ ข้อมูลด้าน ความปลอดภัยที่สำาคัญ ที่หน้า 125 Siri จะช่วยให้คุณเขียนและส่งข้อความ จัดกำาหนดการประชุม โทรแบบ FaceTime หาเส้นทาง ตั้ง ค่าเตือนความจำา ค้นหาเว็บ และอื่น ๆ อีกมากมาย ซึ่งทำาได้ง่าย ๆ เพียงแค่พูดอย่างเป็นธรรมชาติ Siri จะถามคำาถามหากต้องการความกระจ่างหรือข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม Siri ยังใช้ข้อมูลรายชื่อ คลังเพลง ปฏิทิน เตือนความจำาของคุณ เป็นต้น เพื่อที่จะรู้จักสิ่งที่คุณกำาลังพูดถึง Siri ทำางานได้อย่างราบรื่นกับแอปพลิเคชั่นส่วนใหญ่ที่มากับ iPad และจะใช้บริการค้นหาและบริการ หาที่ตั้ง เมื่อจำาเป็น คุณยังสามารถขอให้ Siri เปิดแอปพลิเคชั่นให้คุณได้อีกด้วย คุณสามารถพูดกับ Siri ได้มากมายหลายเรื่อง นี่คือตัวอย่างบางตัว เริ่มกันจาก: • FaceTime Joe • Set the timer for 30 minutes • Directions to the nearest Apple store • Is it going to rain tomorrow? • Post to Facebook • Tweet หมายเหตุ: Siri มีให้ใช้ได้บน iPad รุ่นที่ 3 หรือใหม่กว่า และต้องใช้การเข้าถึงอินเทอร์เน็ต Siri อาจไม่มีให้ใช้ได้ครบทุกภาษาหรือครบทุกพื้นที่ และคุณสมบัติบางอย่างอาจจะแตกต่างกันไปตาม พื้นที่ อาจคิดค่าบริการข้อมูลเครือข่ายโทรศัพท์มือถือ เกี่ยวกับ Siri ก�รเริ่มต้นใช้ง�น Siri Siri จะเริ่มใช้งานได้ด้วยการกดปุ่ม ก�รเริ่มต้นใช้ง�น Siri: กดปุ่มโฮม จนกว่า Siri จะปรากฏ หากคุณไม่ได้เปิด Siri ไว้เมื่อตอนที่ คุณตั้งค่า iPad ให้ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > Siri Siriบท 4 Siri 36 คุณจะได้ยินเสียงบิ๊บสั้น ๆ สองครั้งและเห็นคำาว่า “What can I help you with?” บนหน้าจอ ให้เริ่มพูด ไอคอนไมโครโฟนจะสว่างขึ้นเพื่อช่วยให้คุณรู้ว่า Siri ได้ยินสิ่งที่คุณกำาลังพูดอยู่ เมื่อคุณได้ เริ่มต้นพูดกับ Siri แล้ว ให้แตะไอคอนไมโครโฟนเพื่อพูดกับ Siri อีกครั้ง Siri จะรอจนกว่าคุณจะหยุดพูด แต่คุณยังสามารถแตะไอคอนไมโครโฟนเพื่อบอก Siri ว่าคุณพูด เสร็จแล้วได้อีกด้วย นี่เป็นจะประโยชน์อย่างมากเมื่อมีเสียงรบกวนจำานวนมากอยู่รอบๆ และนี่ยัง สามารถเร่งการสนทนาของคุณกับ Siri ได้ เนื่องจาก Siri จะไม่ต้องรอให้คุณหยุดพักการพูด เมื่อคุณหยุดพูดแล้ว Siri จะแสดงสิ่งที่ได้ยินแล้วจัดหาสิ่งตอบกลับมาให้ Siri มักจะรวมข้อมูลที่ เกี่ยวข้องที่อาจเป็นประโยชน์มาให้ด้วย หากข้อมูลนั้นเกี่ยวข้องกับแอปพลิเคชั่น เช่น ข้อความตัว อักษรที่คุณได้เขียนไว้ หรือตำาแหน่งที่คุณเคยขอไว้ ให้เพียงแค่แตะที่หน้าจอเพื่อเปิดแอปพลิเคชั่น สำาหรับรายละเอียดและการกระทำาต่อไป ข�อมูลที่เกี่ยวข�อง ให�แตะเพื่อเป�ดแอปพลิเคชั่น ข�อมูลที่เกี่ยวข�อง ให�แตะเพื่อเป�ดแอปพลิเคชั่น สิ่งที่ Siri ได�ยินคุณพูด สิ่งที่ Siri ได�ยินคุณพูด การตอบกลับของ Siri การตอบกลับของ Siri แตะเพื่อพูดกับ Siri แตะเพื่อพูดกับ Siri Siri อาจขอความกระจ่างคุณในการทำาให้คำาร้องขอสมบูรณ์ ตัวอย่างเช่น บอก Siri ให้ “Remind me to call mom” แล้ว Siri อาจถามว่า “What time would you like me to remind you?” ก�รยกเลิกคำ�ขอ: พูดว่า “cancel” แตะ หรือกดปุ่มโฮม ก�รบอก Siri เกี่ยวกับตัวคุณ ยิ่ง Siri รู้จักคุณมากเท่าไหร่ Siri ยิ่งสามารถใช้ข้อมูลของคุณเพื่อช่วยเหลือคุณได้มากขึ้นเท่านั้น Siri จะรับข้อมูลของคุณจากการ์ดข้อมูลส่วนตัวของคุณ (“ข้อมูลของฉัน”) ในรายชื่อ บอก Siri ว่�คุณเป็นใคร: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > Siri > ข้อมูลของฉัน จากนั้นแตะที่ชื่อของคุณ ใส่ที่อยู่บ้านและที่ทำางานลงไปบนการ์ดของคุณ เพื่อให้คุณสามารถพูดได้ว่า “Tell me how to get home” Siri ยังต้องการทราบเกี่ยวกับบุคคลสำาคัญ ๆ ในชีวิตของคุณด้วย ดังนั้นให้ใส่ความสัมพันธ์เหล่านั้น บนการ์ดข้อมูลส่วนบุคคลของคุณด้วย ซึ่ง Siri สามารถช่วยคุณได้ ตัวอย่างเช่น หากคุณบอกให้ Siri ส่งข้อความถึงพี่สาวของคุณ Siri จะถามคุณว่าใครคือพี่สาวของคุณ (หากคุณไม่ได้มีข้อมูลนั้นบน การ์ดของคุณอยู่แล้ว) Siri จะเพิ่มความสัมพันธ์นั้นไปยังการ์ดข้อมูลส่วนบุคคลของคุณเพื่อจะได้ไม่ ต้องถามอีกในครั้งต่อไป บท 4 Siri 37 สร้างการ์ดในรายชื่อสำาหรับความสัมพันธ์ที่สำาคัญของคุณทั้งหมด และรวมข้อมูลต่าง ๆ เช่น หมายเลข โทรศัพท์ ที่อยู่อีเมล ที่อยู่ที่บ้านและที่ทำางาน และชื่อเล่นที่คุณชอบใช้ไว้ด้วย คู่มือบนหน้�จอ Siri จะแจ้งให้คุณทราบพร้อมตัวอย่างของสิ่งที่คุณสามารถพูดได้ไว้บนหน้าจอ ถาม Siri ว่า “what can you do” หรือแตะ เมื่อ Siri ปรากฏเป็นครั้งแรก Siri จะแสดงรายการของแอปพลิเคชั่นที่ Siri รองรับ พร้อมตัวอย่างของคำาร้องขอ แตะรายการในรายการเพื่อดูตัวอย่างเพิ่มเติม Siri แบบแฮนด์ฟรี คุณสามารถใช้ Siri กับชุดหูฟังที่เข้ากันได้ เช่น Apple EarPods ที่มาพร้อมกับรีโมทและไมโครโฟน (ใช้งานแยกกัน) และชุดหูฟังแบบมีสายหรือแบบบลูทูธอื่น ๆ ก�รพูดกับ Siri โดยใช้ชุดหูฟัง: กดค้างไว้ที่ปุ่มตรงกลาง (หรือปุ่มโทรบนชุดหูฟังแบบบลูทูธ) ในการดำาเนินการสนทนาต่อกับ Siri ให้กดค้างไว้ที่ปุ่มในแต่ละครั้งที่คุณต้องการพูด เมื่อคุณใช้ชุดหูฟัง Siri จะพูดสิ่งตอบกลับมาให้คุณ Siri จะอ่านทวนข้อความตัวอักษรและข้อความ อีเมลที่คุณได้ป้อนตามคำาบอกไว้ให้คุณฟังก่อนจะส่งออกไป การกระทำานี้จะให้โอกาสคุณเปลี่ยน ข้อความได้หากคุณต้องการ Siri จะยังอ่านทวนหัวเรื่องของเตือนความจำาให้ฟังก่อนการสร้างเตือน ความจำานั้นอีกด้วย บริก�รห�ที่ตั้ง เพราะ Siri รู้จักตำาแหน่ง เช่น “current” “home” and “work” (หาก iPad รุ่น Wi-Fi + cellular ของคุณรองรับคุณสมบัตินี้) ดังนั้นจึงสามารถเตือนคุณให้ทำางานบางอย่างเมื่อคุณออกจากตำาแหน่ง หรือไปถึงตำาแหน่งนั้น ๆ ได้ บอก Siri ว่า “Remind me to call my daughter when I leave the office” และ Siri จะทำาตามนั้น ข้อมูลตำาแหน่งจะไม่ถูกติดตามหรือจัดเก็บภายนอก iPad คุณยังสามารถใช้ Siri ได้หากคุณปิด บริการหาที่ตั้ง แต่ Siri จะไม่ทำาสิ่งใดก็ตามที่จำาเป็นต้องใช้ข้อมูลตำาแหน่ง ปิดบริก�รห�ที่ตั้งสำ�หรับ Siri: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ความเป็นส่วนตัว > บริการหาที่ตั้ง ผู้พิก�ร Siri สามารถเข้าถึงโดยผู้พิการทางสายตาและผู้มีปัญหาด้านการมองเห็นได้โดยผ่าน VoiceOver ซึ่งก็คือตัวอ่านหน้าจอที่มาพร้อมกับ iOS VoiceOver จะอธิบายสิ่งต่าง ๆ บนหน้าจอ ซึ่งรวมถึง ข้อความใด ๆ ในการตอบกลับของ Siri ดังนั้นคุณจึงสามารถใช้ iPad ได้โดยไม่ต้องมอง เปิด VoiceOver: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > ผู้พิการบท 4 Siri 38 การเปิด VoiceOver จะทำาให้แม้แต่การแจ้งเตือนก็จะถูกอ่านออกมาให้คุณฟัง สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่ม เติม ให้ดูที่ VoiceOver ที่หน้า 97 ก�รตั้งค่�ตัวเลือกสำ�หรับ Siri เปิดหรือปิด Siri: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > Siri หมายเหตุ: การปิด Siri จะรีเซ็ต Siri และ Siri จะลืมการเรียนรู้ต่าง ๆ เกี่ยวกับเสียงของคุณไป ตั้งตัวเลือกสำ�หรับ Siri: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > Siri • ภาษา: เลือกภาษาสำาหรับใช้พูดกับ Siri • เสียงตอบกลับ: ตามค่าเริ่มต้น Siri จะพูดตอบกลับเมื่อคุณใช้ Siri กับชุดหูฟังเท่านั้น หากคุณ ต้องการให้ Siri พูดตอบกลับเสมอ ให้ตั้งค่าตัวเลือกนี้เป็น ตลอดเวลา • ข้อมูลของฉัน: ให้ Siri รู้จักการ์ดในรายชื่อที่ประกอบด้วยข้อมูลส่วนตัวของคุณ ดูที่ การบอก Siri เกี่ยวกับตัวคุณ ที่หน้า 36 ก�รอนุญ�ตหรือป้องกันก�รเข้�ถึง Siri เมื่อ iPad ถูกล็อกด้วยรหัสผ่�น: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > ล็อกรหัสผ่าน คุณยังสามารถปิดใช้งาน Siri โดยการเปิดการควบคุม ดูที่ การจำากัด ที่หน้า 115 ร้านอาหาร Siri ทำางานร่วมกับ Yelp, OpenTable และอื่น ๆ เพื่อให้ข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับร้านอาหารและช่วยให้คุณ จองโต๊ะได้ ขอให้ค้นหาร้านอาหารตามประเภทอาหาร ราคา ตำาแหน่ง ที่นั่งกลางแจ้ง หรือตัวเลือก ต่าง ๆ รวมกัน Siri สามารถแสดงรูปภาพ ดาว Yelp ระดับราคา และคำาวิจารณ์ที่มีให้คุณดูได้ ขอ ข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมโดยการใช้แอปพลิเคชั่น Yelp และ OpenTable โดย iPad จะแจ้งให้คุณดาวน์โหลด หากคุณยังไม่ได้ติดตั้งไว้ ก�รดูข้อมูลโดยละเอียดเกี่ยวกับร้�นอ�ห�ร: แตะร้านอาหารที่ Siri แนะนำา โทรหาร�านอาหาร โทรหาร�านอาหาร เยี่ยมชมเว็บไซต� เยี่ยมชมเว็บไซต� ทำการจองผ�าน OpenTable ทำการจองผ�าน OpenTable ดูคำวิจารณ�ของ Yelp ดูคำวิจารณ�ของ Yelp ภาพยนตร์ ถาม Siri เกี่ยวกับภาพยนตร์ที่เข้าโรงฉายอยู่ หรือสถานที่ที่คุณสามารถไปดูภาพยนตร์ที่ระบุไว้ได้ ค้นหาว่าภาพยนตร์ฉายรอบปฐมทัศน์เมื่อใด ใครเป็นผู้กำากับ และภาพยนตร์เรื่องนั้นชนะรางวัลใดมา บ้าง Siri จะบอกตำาแหน่ง แสดงรอบฉาย และคำาวิจารณ์จากเว็บไซต์ Rotten Tomatoบท 4 Siri 39 ก�รดูข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับภ�พยนตร์โดยละเอียด: แตะภาพยนตร์ที่ Siri แนะนำา ดูภาพยนตร�ตัวอย�าง ดูภาพยนตร�ตัวอย�าง อ�านคำวิจารณ�ของ Rotten Tomato อ�านคำวิจารณ�ของ Rotten Tomato กีฬา Siri รู้หลายเรื่องเกี่ยวกับกีฬาต่าง ๆ ซึ่งรวมถึงเบสบอล บาสเกตบอล ฟุตบอล ซอคเกอร์ และฮอคกี้ ขอ Siri ให้หากำาหนดการแข่งขัน คะแนนจากการแข่งขันในฤดูกาลปัจจุบัน หรือคะแนนสดในนาที นั้นจากการแข่งขันสด บอก Siri ให้แสดงสถิติผู้เล่นแล้วเปรียบเทียบกับสถิติของผู้เล่นคนอื่น Siri ติดตามข้อมูลสถิติของทีมได้ด้วย นี่คือสิ่งที่คุณอาจถามได้: • What was the score of the last Giants game? • What are the National League standings? • When is the Chicago Cubs first game of the season? การป้อนตามคำาบอก เมื่อ Siri เปิดอยู่ คุณยังสามารถป้อนข้อความตามคำาบอกได้อีกด้วย ดูที่ การป้อนตามคำาบอก ที่ หน้า 26 ถึงแม้ว่าคุณจะสามารถเขียนอีเมล ข้อความตัวอักษร และข้อความอื่น ๆ ได้โดยการพูดไปยัง Siri โดยตรง คุณอาจเลือกใช้การป้อนตามคำาบอกได้ การป้อนตามคำาบอกจะช่วยให้คุณแก้ไขข้อความ แทนการแทนที่ข้อความทั้งหมด การป้อนตามคำาบอกยังให้เวลาคุณคิดมากขึ้นขณะกำาลังเขียนอยู่ Siri เข้าใจการหยุดพักที่หมายถึงคุณได้พูดเสร็จแล้วในขณะนั้น และจะใช้โอกาสนั้นในการตอบสนอง ในขณะที่สิ่งนี้ช่วยให้คุณสนทนากับ Siri ได้อย่างเป็นธรรมชาติ Siri อาจขัดจังหวะคุณก่อนที่คุณจะ พูดเสร็จจริง ๆ หากคุณหยุดพักนานเกินไป ด้วยการป้อนตามคำาบอก คุณสามารถหยุดพักได้นานเท่า ที่คุณต้องการ และกลับมาพูดต่อได้เมื่อคุณพร้อม คุณยังสามารถเริ่มการเขียนข้อความโดยใช้ Siri จากนั้นใช้การป้อนตามคำาบอกได้ ตัวอย่างเช่น คุณ สามารถสร้างอีเมลด้วย Siri จากนั้นแตะร่างจดหมายเพื่อเปิดข้อความนั้นใน Mail ได้ ใน Mail คุณ สามารถเขียนให้เสร็จหรือแก้ไขข้อความและทำาการเปลี่ยนแปลงอื่น ๆ ได้ เช่น การเพิ่มหรือลบผู้รับ ออก การปรับแก้หัวเรื่อง หรือการเปลี่ยนบัญชีที่คุณกำาลังจะใช้ส่งอีเมลไปบท 4 Siri 40 การแก้ไข Siri ให้ถูกต้อง ห�ก Siri มีปัญห� บางครั้ง Siri อาจมีปัญหาในการทำาความเข้าใจคุณ ตัวอย่างเช่น ในสภาพแวดล้อมที่มีเสียงดัง หาก คุณพูดโดยใช้สำาเนียง นั่นจะทำาให้ Siri ต้องใช้เวลาในการทำาความคุ้นเคยกับเสียงของคุณ หาก Siri ได้ยินไม่เหมือนกับสิ่งที่คุณพูดอย่างถูกต้องครบถ้วน คุณสามารถแก้ได้ Siri จะแสดงสิ่งที่คุณพูด พร้อมกับการตอบกลับของ Siri ก�รแก้ไขสิ่งที่ Siri ได้ยินจ�กที่คุณพูด: แตะกล่องคำาพูดที่แสดงสิ่งที่ Siri ได้ยินคุณพูด แก้ไขคำาร้อง ขอของคุณโดยการป้อน หรือแตะ บนแป้นพิมพ์เพื่อป้อนตามคำาบอก สำาหรับข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับการป้อนตามคำาบอก ให้ดูที่ การป้อนตามคำาบอก ที่หน้า 26 หากบางส่วนของข้อความถูกขีดเส้นใต้ด้วยสีฟ้า ให้แตะข้อความนั้นแล้ว Siri จะแนะนำาทางเลือกอื่น ๆ แตะการแนะนำาอันใดอันหนึ่ง หรือแทนที่ข้อความนั้นโดยการป้อนหรือป้อนตามคำาบอก แก้ไข Siri ด้วยเสียงพูด: แตะ แล้วพูดซ้ำาหรือร้องขอให้ชัดเจนอีกครั้ง ตัวอย่างเช่น “I meant Boston.” เมื่อกำาลังแก้ไข Siri อย่าพูดสิ่งที่คุณ ไม่ ต้องการ ให้บอก Siri ถึงสิ่งที่คุณ ต้องการ เท่านั้น ก�รแก้ไขข้อคว�มเมลหรือข้อคว�มตัวอักษร: หาก Siri ถามว่าคุณต้องการส่งข้อความหรือไม่ คุณ สามารถพูดได้ว่า: • เปลี่ยนเป็น: Call me tomorrow. • เพิ่ม: See you there question mark. • No, send it to Bob. • No (เพื่อเก็บข้อความนั้นไว้โดยไม่ส่งออกไป) • Cancel. ในการให้ Siri อ่านข้อความให้คุณฟัง ให้พูดว่า “Read it back to me” หรือ “Read me the message” หากข้อความถูกต้อง คุณสามารถพูด “Yes, send it” สภ�พแวดล้อมที่มีเสียงรบกวน ในสภาพแวดล้อมที่มีเสียงรบกวน ให้ถือ iPad ไว้ใกล้กับปากของคุณ แต่อย่าพูดเข้าไปในขอบล่าง สุดโดยตรง พูดให้ชัดเจนและพูดอย่างเป็นธรรมชาติ แตะ เมื่อคุณพูดเสร็จ ก�รเชื่อมต่อเครือข่�ย Siri อาจบอกคุณถึงปัญหาการเชื่อมต่อไปยังเครือข่าย เพราะ Siri จะต้องอาศัยเซิร์ฟเวอร์ Apple สำาหรับการรู้จำาเสียงและบริการอื่น ๆ คุณจำาเป็นต้องมีการเชื่อมต่อโทรศัพท์มือถือแบบ 3G 4G หรือ LTE หรือการเชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ตแบบ Wi-Fi ที่ใช้ได้ดี 5 41 คุณสมบัติต่าง ๆ ของ Safari ประกอบด้วย: • ตัวอ่าน ใช้ดูบทความต่าง ๆ โดยไม่มีโฆษณาหรือสิ่งเกะกะ • รายการการอ่าน ใช้รวบรวมบทความต่าง ๆ เพื่ออ่านภายหลัง • โหมดเต็มหน้าจอ ใช้เมื่อดูหน้าเว็บในแนวนอน ใช้ iCloud เพื่อดูหน้าต่าง ๆ ที่คุณได้เปิดบนอุปกรณ์อื่น ๆ และใช้เพื่อทำาให้ที่คั่นหน้าและรายการการ อ่านของคุณอัปเดตอยู่เสมอบนอุปกรณ์อื่น ๆ ของคุณ ดูที่คั่นหน�าเว็บ ประวัติการเข�าชม หรือรายการการอ�านของคุณ ดูที่คั่นหน�าเว็บ ประวัติการเข�าชม หรือรายการการอ�านของคุณ เป�ดหน�าใหม� เป�ดหน�าใหม� ป�อนที่อยู�เว็บ (URL) ป�อนที่อยู�เว็บ (URL) ค�นหาเว็บและหน�าป�จจุบัน ค�นหาเว็บและหน�าป�จจุบัน แตะสองครั้งที่รายการ หรือจีบนิ้วเพื่อซูมเข�า หรือออก แตะสองครั้งที่รายการ หรือจีบนิ้วเพื่อซูมเข�า หรือออก ก�รดูหน้�เว็บ: แตะช่องที่อยู่ (ในแถบชื่อเรื่อง) ป้อน URL จากนั้นแตะ ไป • การเลื่อนหน้าเว็บ: เลื่อนขึ้น ลง หรือไปด้านข้าง • การเลื่อนภายในกรอบ: เลื่อนด้วยสองนิ้วภายในกรอบ • การโหลดหน้าเว็บอีกครั้ง: แตะ ในช่องที่อยู่ ก�รปิดหน้�เว็บ: แตะ บนแถบของหน้าเว็บ ก�รดูหน้�เว็บอื่นที่คุณเปิด: แตะที่แถบที่ด้านบนสุดของหน้า ก�รเปิดหน้�เว็บที่เพิ่งปิดอีกครั้ง: แตะค้างไว้ที่ จากนั้นแตะรายการในรายการ Safariบท 5 Safari 42 ก�รดูหน้�เว็บที่คุณเปิดบนอุปกรณ์อื่น ๆ ของคุณ: แตะ ในการแบ่งปันหน้าเว็บที่คุณเปิดบน iPad ด้วยอุปกรณ์อื่น ๆ ของคุณโดยใช้แถบ iCloud ให้ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud แล้วเปิด Safari ก�รต�มลิงก์บนหน้�เว็บ: แตะลิงก์นั้น • การดูที่อยู่ปลายทางของลิงก์: แตะค้างไว้ที่ลิงก์นั้น • การเปิดลิงก์ในแถบใหม่: แตะค้างไว้ที่ลิงก์ จากนั้นแตะ “เปิดในแถบใหม่” ข้อมูลที่ตรวจพบ เช่น หมายเลขโทรศัพท์และที่อยู่อีเมล อาจปรากฏเป็นลิงก์ในหน้าเว็บได้เช่นกัน แตะค้างไว้ที่ลิงก์เพื่อดูตัวเลือกที่มี ก�รดูบทคว�มในตัวอ่�น: แตะปุ่มตัวอ่าน หากปุ่มนี้ปรากฏอยู่ในช่องที่อยู่ • การปรับขนาดแบบอักษร: แตะ • การแบ่งปันบทความ: แตะ หมายเหตุ: เมื่อคุณส่งอีเมลบทความจากตัวอ่าน นอกเหนือจากลิงก์แล้ว ข้อความแบบเต็มของ บทความจะถูกส่งไปด้วย • การกลับไปมุมมองปกติ: แตะ ตัวอ่าน ก�รใช้ร�ยก�รก�รอ่�นเพื่อรวบรวมหน้�เว็บแล้วอ่�นในภ�ยหลัง: • การเพิ่มหน้าเว็บปัจจุบัน: แตะ จากนั้นแตะ “เพิ่มไปยังรายการการอ่าน” ด้วย iPad 2 หรือ รุ่นใหม่กว่า หน้าเว็บและลิงก์จะถูกบันทึกไว้ เพื่อให้คุณสามารถอ่านหน้าเว็บนั้นได้แม้เวลาที่คุณไม่ สามารถเชื่อมต่อกับอินเทอร์เน็ตได้ • การเพิ่มที่อยู่ปลายทางของลิงก์: แตะค้างไว้ที่ลิงก์ จากนั้นแตะ “เพิ่มไปยังรายการการอ่าน” • การดูรายการการอ่านของคุณ: แตะ จากนั้นแตะ • การลบรายการจากรายการการอ่านของคุณ: กวาดนิ้วที่รายการนั้น จากนั้นแตะ ลบ ก�รกรอกแบบฟอร์ม: แตะช่องข้อความเพื่อเรียกใช้แป้นพิมพ์ • การย้ายไปยังช่องข้อความอื่น: แตะที่ช่องข้อความ หรือแตะ ถัดไป หรือ ก่อนหน้า • การส่งแบบฟอร์ม: แตะ ไป ค้นหา หรือที่ลิงก์บนหน้าเว็บเพื่อส่งแบบฟอร์ม • การเปิดใช้งานการป้อนอัตโนมัติ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Safari > การป้อนอัตโนมัติ ก�รค้นห�เว็บ หน้�เว็บปัจจุบัน หรือ PDF ที่ค้นห�ได้: ป้อนข้อความในช่องค้นหา • การค้นหาเว็บ: แตะคำาแนะนำาใดคำาแนะนำาหนึ่งที่ปรากฏขึ้น หรือแตะ ค้นหา • การหาข้อความค้นหาบนหน้าเว็บปัจจุบันหรือ PDF: เลื่อนไปยังด้านล่างสุดของหน้าจอ จากนั้น แตะรายการที่อยู่ด้านล่างของ บนหน้านี้ ผลการค้นหาแรกจะถูกไฮไลท์ ในการหาผลการค้นหาต่อ ๆ มา ให้แตะ ก�รคั่นหน้�เว็บปัจจุบัน: แตะ จากนั้นแตะ ที่คั่นหน้า เมื่อคุณบันทึกที่คั่นหน้า คุณจะสามารถแก้ไขชื่อของที่คั่นหน้าได้ ตามค่าเริ่มต้น ที่คั่นหน้าจะถูกบันทึก ไว้ที่ระดับบนสุดของที่คั่นหน้า ในการเลือกโฟลเดอร์อื่น ให้แตะ ที่คั่นหน้า ก�รแสดงแถบที่คั่นหน้�: แตะช่องที่อยู่ ในการแสดงแถบที่คั่นหน้าเสมอ ให้ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Safari ใต้ ทั่วไป ก�รสร้�งไอคอนบนหน้�จอโฮม: แตะ จากนั้นแตะ “เพิ่มไปที่หน้าจอโฮม” Safari จะเพิ่มไอคอน สำาหรับหน้าเว็บปัจจุบันไปยังหน้าจอโฮมของคุณ รูปภาพนั้นจะถูกใช้เป็นไอคอนคลิปเว็บบนหน้า จอโฮมด้วย นอกเสียจากว่าหน้าเว็บนั้นจะมีไอคอนแบบกำาหนดเอง คลิปเว็บจะถูกสำารองข้อมูลโดย iCloud และ iTunes แต่จะไม่ถูกพุชไปยังอุปกรณ์อื่น ๆ โดย iCloud หรือเชื่อมข้อมูลโดย iTunes ก�รใช้ iCloud เพื่อทำ�ให้ที่คั่นหน้�และร�ยก�รก�รอ่�นของคุณอัปเดตอยู่เสมอบนอุปกรณ์อื่น ๆ ของ คุณ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud แล้วเปิด Safari ดูที่ การใช้ iCloud ที่หน้า 14 ก�รตั้งค่�ตัวเลือกสำ�หรับ Safari: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Safari ตัวเลือกต่าง ๆ ประกอบด้วย:บท 5 Safari 43 • โปรแกรมค้นหา • การป้อนอัตโนมัติ สำาหรับการกรอกแบบฟอร์ม • การเปิดลิงก์ในหน้าใหม่หรือในพื้นหลัง • การเลือกดูแบบเป็นส่วนตัวเพื่อช่วยปกป้องข้อมูลส่วนตัวและปิดกั้นบางเว็บไซต์ไม่ให้ตามรอย พฤติกรรมของคุณได้ • การล้างประวัติการเข้าชม คุกกี้ และข้อมูล • ข้อมูลโทรศัพท์มือถือสำาหรับรายการการอ่าน • คำาเตือนการหลอกลวง6 44 การอ่านเมล เขียนข�อความ เขียนข�อความ เปลี่ยนกล�องเมลหรือบัญชี เปลี่ยนกล�องเมลหรือบัญชี ลบ ย�าย หรือ ทำเครื่องหมายหลายข�อความ ลบ ย�าย หรือ ค�นหากล�องเมลนี้ ค�นหากล�องเมลนี้ ทำเครื่องหมายหลายข�อความ เปลี่ยนความยาวของการแสดงตัวอย�างใน ค�าติดตั้ง > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน เปลี่ยนความยาวของการแสดงตัวอย�างใน ค�าติดตั้ง > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน ก�รติดธงข้อคว�มหรือทำ�เครื่องหม�ยเป็นยังไม่ได้อ่�น: แตะ ในการทำาเครื่องหมายข้อความ หลายข้อความในครั้งเดียว ให้แตะ แก้ไข ในระหว่างที่ดูรายการข้อความ ก�รระบุข้อคว�มที่ระบุที่อยูุ่ถึงคุณโดยเฉพ�ะ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน จากนั้นเปิด หรือปิด แสดงป้ายถึง/สำาเนาถึง ข้อความที่มีที่อยู่ของคุณในช่องถึงหรือสำาเนาถึงจะระบุด้วยไอคอน ในรายการข้อความ ก�รดูผู้รับทั้งหมดของข้อคว�ม: แตะรายละเอียดคำาในช่องจาก แตะชื่อหรือที่อยู่อีเมลของผู้รับเพื่อดู ข้อมูลรายชื่อของผู้รับหรือเพิ่มผู้รับไปยังรายชื่อหรือรายการ VIP ของคุณ ก�รป้องกันก�รด�วน์โหลดรูปภ�พระยะไกล: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน จากนั้นเปิด หรือปิด โหลดรูปภาพระยะไกล ก�รเปิดลิงก์: แตะลิงก์เพื่อใช้การกระทำาเริ่มต้น หรือสัมผัสค้างไว้เพื่อดูการกระทำาอื่น ตัวอย่างเช่น สำาหรับที่อยู่คุณจะสามารถแสดงตำาแหน่งในแผนที่หรือเพิ่มไปยังรายชื่อ สำาหรับเว็บลิงก์ คุณสามารถ เพิ่มไปยังรายการการอ่าน ก�รเปิดคำ�เชิญก�รประชุมหรือสิ่งที่แนบ: แตะที่รายการนั้น หากสิ่งที่แนบสามารถใช้ได้กับแอปพลิเคชั่น หลายตัว ให้แตะค้างไว้เพื่อเลือกแอปพลิเคชั่นที่ทำางานร่วมกับไฟล์นั้น Mailบท 6 Mail 45 ก�รบันทึกรูปภ�พหรือวิดีโอที่แนบม�: แตะค้างไว้ที่รูปภาพหรือวิดีโอ แล้วแตะ บันทึกรูปภาพหรือ วิดีโอ รายการจะถูกบันทึกไปยังอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณในแอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพ ก�รโหลดข้อคว�มใหม่: ดึงรายการข้อความหรือกล่องเมลลงเพื่อรีเฟลชรายการ • การตั้งค่าการรับจำานวนข้อความที่เก่ากว่า: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน > แสดง ก�รปิดก�รแจ้งข้อคว�มใหม่สำ�หรับบัญชี: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > การแจ้ง > Mail > ชื่อบัญชี จากนั้น ปิด ศูนย์กลางการแจ้ง ก�รเปลี่ยนระดับเสียงที่เล่นโดย Mail: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > เสียง • การเปลี่ยนระดับเสียงที่เล่นสำาหรับเมลใหม่ในบัญชีแต่ละบัญชี: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > การแจ้ง > Mail > ชื่อบัญชี > เสียงได้รับเมลใหม่ • การเปลี่ยนระดับเสียงที่เล่นสำาหรับเมลใหม่จาก VIPs: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > การแจ้ง > Mail > VIP > เสียงได้รับเมลใหม่ การส่งอีเมล เปลี่ยนลายเซ็นของคุณใน ค�าติดตั้ง > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน เปลี่ยนลายเซ็นของคุณใน ค�าติดตั้ง > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน แตะเพื่อเปลี่ยน จาก สำเนาถึง หรือสำเนาลับถึง แตะเพื่อเปลี่ยน จาก สำเนาถึง หรือสำเนาลับถึง ก�รเขียนข้อคว�ม: แตะ จากนั้นป้อนชื่อหรือที่อยู่อีเมล หลังจากคุณได้ป้อนผู้รับ คุณสามารถ ลากเพื่อย้ายผู้รับนั้นระหว่างช่องได้ เช่น จาก ถึงเป็นสำาเนาถึง หากคุณมีบัญชีเมลหลายบัญชี ให้แตะ จาก เพื่อเปลี่ยนบัญชีที่คุณกำาลังส่งมา ก�รส่งสำ�เน�ลับถึงคุณเองในข้อคว�มข�ออกโดยอัตโนมัติ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน > สำาเนาลับถึงตัวเองเสมอ ก�รบันทึกฉบับร่�งของข้อคว�ม: แตะ ยกเลิก จากนั้นแตะ บันทึกฉบับร่าง แตะค้างไว้ที่ เพื่อดู แบบร่างที่บันทึกของคุณ ก�รตอบกลับข้อคว�ม: แตะ แล้วแตะ ตอบกลับ ไฟล์และภาพถ่ายที่แนบมากับอีเมลเริ่มแรกจะ ไม่ส่งกลับไปด้วย ในการรวมสิ่งที่แนบ ให้ส่งต่อข้อความแทนการตอบกลับข้อความ ก�รส่งต่อข้อคว�ม: เปิดข้อความ และแตะ จากนั้นแตะ ส่งต่อ การกระทำานี้จะส่งต่อสิ่งที่แนบของ ข้อความอีกด้วย ก�รอ้�งอิงข้อคว�มบ�งส่วนที่คุณกำ�ลังตอบกลับหรือส่งต่อ: แตะค้างไว้เพื่อเลือกข้อความ ลากจุด จับเพื่อเลือกข้อความที่คุณต้องการรวมไว้ในการตอบกลับของคุณ จากนั้นแตะ • การเปลี่ยนแปลงระดับย่อหน้า: แตะข้อความที่จะย่อหน้า แตะ อย่างน้อยสองครั้ง จากนั้นแตะ ย่อหน้าอ้างบท 6 Mail 46 • การเพิ่มย่อหน้าอ้างโดยอัตโนมัติ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน จากนั้นเปิด เพิ่ม ย่อหน้าอ้าง ก�รส่งรูปหรือวิดีโอในข้อคว�ม: แตะจุดแทรกเพื่อแสดงปุ่มการเลือก จากนั้นแตะ แทรกรูปภาพหรือ วิดีโอ แล้วเลือกรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอจากอัลบั้ม คุณยังสามารถส่งอีเมลรูปภาพหลายรูปโดยใช้รูปภาพ ได้ด้วย ดูที่ การแบ่งปันรูปภาพและวิดีโอ ที่หน้า 58 ก�รเปลี่ยนล�ยเซ็นอีเมลของคุณ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน > ลายเซ็น หากคุณมีบัญชี เมลมากกว่าหนึ่งบัญชี ให้แตะ แต่ละบัญชี เพื่อกำาหนดลายเซ็นที่แตกต่างกันสำาหรับแต่ละบัญชี การจัดการอีเมล ก�รดูข้อคว�มจ�ก VIPs: ไปยังรายการกล่องเมล (แตะ กล่องเมล เพื่อไปยังรายการ) จากนั้นแตะ VIP • การเพิ่มบุคคลไปยังรายการ VIP: แตะชื่อหรือที่อยู่ของบุคคลในช่องจาก ถึง หรือ สำาเนาถึง/ สำาเนาลับถึง จากนั้นแตะ เพิ่มไปยัง VIP ก�รจัดกลุ่มข้อคว�มที่เกี่ยวข้องไว้ด้วยกัน: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฎิทิน แล้วเปิดหรือปิด จัดเรียงตามประเด็น ก�รค้นห�ข้อคว�ม: เปิดกล่องเมล จากนั้นป้อนข้อความในช่องค้นหา คุณสามารถค้นหาช่อง จาก ถึง หรือ เรื่องในกล่องเมลที่เปิดอยู่ในปัจจุบัน สำาหรับบัญชีเมลที่รองรับการค้นหาข้อความบน เซิร์ฟเวอร์ ให้แตะ ทั้งหมด เพื่อค้นหา จาก ถึง เรื่อง และเนื้อหาในข้อความ ก�รลบข้อคว�ม: หากข้อความเปิดอยู่ ให้แตะ • การลบข้อความโดยไม่ต้องเปิด: กวาดนิ้วเหนือชื่อข้อความ จากนั้นแตะ ลบ • การลบข้อความหลายข้อความ: ในขณะที่ดูรายการข้อความ ให้แตะ แก้ไข • การปิดการยืนยันการลบ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน > ถามก่อนที่จะลบ ก�รกู้คืนข้อคว�ม: ไปที่กล่องเมลถังขยะของบัญชี เปิดข้อความ แตะ จากนั้นย้ายข้อความไปยัง กล่องข้อความเข้าหรือโฟลเดอร์อื่นของบัญชี • การตั้งค่าระยะเวลาที่ข้อความอยู่ในถังขยะก่อนจะลบอย่างถาวร: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน > ชื่อบัญชี > บัญชี > ขั้นสูง ก�รเปิดหรือปิดก�รเก็บถ�วร: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน > ชื่อบัญชี > บัญชี > ขั้นสูง เมื่อคุณเก็บข้อความโดยถาวร ข้อความนั้นจะย้ายไปยังกล่องเมลที่ชื่อว่าเมลทั้งหมด มีเพียงบางบัญชี เมลเท่านั้นที่รองรับการเก็บถาวร ก�รย้�ยข้อคว�มไปยังกล่องเมลอื่น: ในขณะที่ดูข้อความ ให้แตะ จากนั้นเลือกปลายทาง ก�รเพิ่ม ตั้งชื่อใหม่ หรือลบกล่องเมล: ในรายการกล่องเมล ให้แตะ แก้ไข กล่องเมลบางกล่องจะไม่ สามารถเปลี่ยนแปลงหรือลบได้ การพิมพ์ข้อความและสิ่งที่แนบ ก�รพิมพ์ข้อคว�ม: แตะ จากนั้นแตะ พิมพ์ ก�รพิมพ์รูปภ�พภ�ยใน: แตะค้างไว้ที่รูปภาพ แล้วแตะ บันทึกรูปภาพ ไปที่ รูปภาพ และพิมรูปภาพ จากอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณ ก�รพิมพ์สิ่งที่แนบ: แตะสิ่งที่แนบเพื่อเปิดใน Quick Look แตะ แล้วแตะ พิมพ์ สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม ให้ดูที่ การพิมพ์ด้วย AirPrint ที่หน้า 30บท 6 Mail 47 บัญชี Mail และการตั้งค่า ก�รเปลี่ยนก�รตั้งค่� Mail และบัญชีเมล: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฎิทิน คุณสามารถตั้งค่า: • iCloud • Microsoft Exchange และ Outlook • Google • Yahoo! • AOL • Microsoft Hotmail • บัญชี POP และ IMAP อื่น ๆ การตั้งค่าจะแตกต่างไปตามประเภทของบัญชีที่คุณกำาลังตั้งค่าอยู่ ผู้ให้บริการอินเทอร์เน็ตหรือผู้ดูแล ระบบของคุณสามารถให้ข้อมูลที่คุณจำาเป็นต้องป้อน ก�รหยุดใช้บัญชีชั่วคร�ว: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน เลือกบัญชี จากนั้นปิดบริการเมล สำาหรับบัญชี เมื่อบริการปิดอยู่ iPad จะไม่แสดงหรือเชื่อมข้อมูลนั้นจนกว่าคุณจะกลับมาเปิดบริการ นี่เป็นวิธีที่ดีที่จะหยุดการรับอีเมลงานระหว่างช่วงพักร้อน เป็นต้น ก�รลบบัญชี: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน เลือกบัญชี แล้วเลื่อนลงมา และแตะ ลบบัญชี ข้อมูลทั้งหมดที่เชื่อมต่อกับบัญชี เช่น ที่คั่นหน้า เมล และโน้ต จะถูกลบออก กำ�หนดก�รตั้งค่�พุช: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน > เรียกข้อมูลใหม่ พุชจะส่งข้อมูลใหม่ เมื่อข้อมูลนั้นปรากฏบนเซิร์ฟเวอร์และเมื่อมีการเชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ต (อาจเกิดความล่าช้า) เมื่อพุช ปิดอยู่ ให้ใช้การตั้งค่าในการเรียกข้อมูลใหม่เพื่อระบุความบ่อยในการเรียกข้อมูล การตั้งค่าที่คุณ เลือกไว้นี้จะแทนที่การตั้งค่าบัญชีแต่ละบัญชี อย่าเรียกข้อมูลบ่อย ๆ เพื่ออาุยุการใช้งานที่ยาวนานยิ่ง ขึ้นของแบตเตอรี่ มีเพียงบางบัญชีเมลเท่านั้นที่รองรับการพุช ก�รส่งข้อคว�มที่ลงชื่อและเข้�รหัส: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฎิทิน แตะที่บัญชี แล้วแตะ ขั้นสูง เปิด S/MIME จากนั้นเลือกใบรับรองสำาหรับลงชื่อและเข้ารหัสข้อความขาออก ในการติดตั้ง ใบรับรอง คุณอาจต้องได้รับโปรไฟล์การกำาหนดค่าจากผู้ดูแลระบบของคุณ ให้ดาวน์โหลดใบรับรอง จากผู้เผยแพร่เว็บไซต์โดยใช้ Safari หรือรับใบรับรองเป็นสิ่งที่แนบมาในเมล ก�รตั้งค่�ตัวเลือกขั้นสูง: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน > ชื่อบัญชี > บัญชี > ขั้นสูง ตัว เลือกจะเปลี่ยนแปลงไปตามบัญชี และอาจรวมถึง: • เก็บร่างข้อความ ข้อความที่ส่ง และข้อความที่ลบใน iPad • การตั้งค่าระยะเวลาที่ข้อความที่ลบแล้วจะอยู่ในถังขยะก่อนจะลบอย่างถาวร • การปรับการตั้งค่าเซิร์ฟเวอร์เมล • การปรับการตั้งค่า SSL และรหัสผ่าน ให้สอบถามผู้ให้บริการอินเทอร์เน็ตหรือผู้ให้บริการเครือข่ายของคุณหากคุณไม่แน่ใจว่าการตั้งค่า อะไรที่เหมาะสมกับบัญชีของคุณ7 48 การส่งและรับข้อความ คำาเตือน: สำาหรับข้อมูลที่สำาคัญเกี่ยวกับการหลีกเลี่ยงสิ่งรบกวนระหว่างขับขี่ ให้ดูที่ ข้อมูลด้าน ความปลอดภัยที่สำาคัญ ที่หน้า 125 ด้วยการใช้แอปพลิเคชั่นข้อความและบริการ iMessage ในตัว คุณจะสามารถส่งข้อความตัวอักษร ได้อย่างไม่จำากัดผ่าน Wi-Fi หรือการเชื่อมต่อข้อมูลโทรศัพท์มือถือไปยังผู้ใช้ iOS และ OS X Mountain Lion อื่น ๆ ได้ ข้อความสามารถรวมถึงรูปภาพ วิดีโอ และข้อมูลอื่น ๆ ได้ คุณสามารถ เห็นเมื่อบุคคลอื่นกำาลังป้อน และแจ้งให้บุคคลนั้นทราบว่าคุณได้อ่านข้อความแล้วได้ iMessages จะแสดงบนอุปกรณ์ iOS ของคุณทั้งหมดที่เข้าสู่ระบบด้วยบัญชีเดียวกัน เพื่อให้คุณสามารถเริ่มการ สนทนาในอุปกรณ์หนึ่งของคุณ และดำาเนินการสนทนาต่อในอีกอุปกรณ์หนึ่งของคุณได้ iMessages จะถูกเข้ารหัสไว้เพื่อความปลอดภัย หมายเหตุ: อาจคิดค่าบริการข้อมูลผ่านสัญญาณโทรศัพท์มือถือ แตะปุ�มแก�ไขเพื่อ แก�ไขหรือส�งต�อ การสนทนา แตะปุ�มแก�ไขเพื่อ แก�ไขหรือส�งต�อ การสนทนา แตะปุ�มเขียนเพื่อ เริ่มการสนทนาใหม� แตะปุ�มเขียนเพื่อ เริ่มการสนทนาใหม� แตะปุ�มแนบสื่อเพื่อ รวมรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอ แตะปุ�มแนบสื่อเพื่อ รวมรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอ ก�รเริ่มต้นก�รสนทน�เป็นตัวอักษร: แตะ จากนั้นแตะ และเลือกผู้ติดต่อ ค้นหารายชื่อของคุณ โดยการป้อนชื่อ หรือป้อนหมายเลขโทรศัพท์หรือที่อยู่อีเมลด้วยตนเอง ป้อนข้อความ จากนั้นแตะ ส่ง ข้อคว�มบท 7 ข้อความ 49 หมายเหตุ: การเตือน จะปรากฏหากไม่สามารถส่งข้อความได้ แตะการเตือนสำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่ม เติมหรือเพื่อลองส่งข้อความอีกครั้ง ก�รทำ�ก�รสนทน�ต่อ: แตะบทสนทนาในรายการข้อความ ก�รซ่อนแป้นพิมพ์: แตะ ที่มุมขวาล่าง ก�รใช้อักขระรูปภ�พ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > แป้นพิมพ์ > แป้นพิมพ์ > เพิ่มแป้นพิมพ์ใหม่ จาก นั้นแตะ อิโมจิ เพื่อทำาให้แป้นพิมพ์ใช้งานได้ จากนั้นขณะที่กำาลังป้อนข้อความ ให้แตะ เพื่อใช้แป้น พิมพ์อิโมจิ ดูที่ วิธีการป้อนข้อมูลแบบพิเศษ ที่หน้า 123 ก�รดูข้อมูลร�ยชื่อของบุคคล: แตะ เลื่อนไปยังด้านล่างสุดของบานหน้าต่างข้อมูลเพื่อดูการ กระทำาที่คุณสามารถทำาได้ เช่น การโทรโดยใช้ FaceTime ก�รดูข้อคว�มก่อนหน้�ในบทสนทน�: เลื่อนไปด้านบนสุด (แตะแถบสถานะ) แตะ โหลดข้อความ ก่อนหน้านี้ หากจำาเป็น ก�รส่งข้อคว�มให้กับกลุ่ม: แตะ จากนั้นป้อนผู้รับหลาย ๆ คน การจัดการบทสนทนา บทสนทนาจะถูกบันทึกไว้ในรายการข้อความ จุดสีฟ้า บ่งบอกถึงข้อความที่ยังไม่ได้อ่าน แตะบท สนทนาเพื่อดูหรือดำาเนินการสนทนาต่อ ก�รส่งต่อบทสนทน�: เลือกบทสนทนา แตะ เลือกส่วนของบทสนทนา จากนั้นแตะ ส่งต่อ ก�รแก้ไขบทสนทน�: เลือกบทสนทนา แตะ เลือกส่วนของบทสนทนา จากนั้นแตะ ลบ ในการ ล้างข้อความและสิ่งที่แนบทั้งหมดโดยไม่ลบบทสนทนา ให้แตะ ล้างทั้งหมด ก�รลบบทสนทน�: ในรายการข้อความ ให้กวาดนิ้วบนบทสนทนา จากนั้นแตะ ลบ ก�รค้นห�บทสนทน�: เลื่อนไปด้านบนสุดของรายการข้อความเพื่อแสดงช่องค้นหา จากนั้นป้อน สิ่งที่คุณต้องการค้นหา คุณยังสามารถค้นหาบทสนทนาจากหน้าจอเริ่มต้นได้ด้วย ดูที่ การค้นหา ที่ หน้า 27 เพิ่มบุคคลไปยังร�ยก�รร�ยชื่อของคุณ หรือแบ่งปันผู้ติดต่อ: แตะหมายเลขโทรศัพท์หรือที่อยู่อีเมล ในรายการข้อความ จากนั้นแตะ การส่งรูปภาพ วิดีโอ และอื่น ๆ คุณสามารถส่งรูปภาพ วิดีโอ ตำาแหน่ง ข้อมูลรายชื่อ และเสียงบันทึกได้ การจำากัดขนาดของสิ่งที่ แนบจะถูกกำาหนดโดยผู้ให้บริการของคุณiPad อาจบีบอัดรูปภาพและวิดีโอที่แนบเมื่อจำาเป็น ก�รส่งรูปภ�พหรือวิดีโอ: แตะ ก�รส่งตำ�แหน่ง: ในแผนที่ ให้แตะ สำาหรับตำาแหน่ง แตะ แบ่งปันที่ตั้ง จากนั้นแตะ ข้อความ ก�รส่งข้อมูลร�ยชื่อ: ในรายชื่อ ให้เลือกรายชื่อ แตะ แบ่งปันรายชื่อ (ด้านล่างของโน้ต) จากนั้น แตะ ข้อความ ก�รบันทึกรูปภ�พหรือวิดีโอที่คุณได้รับไปยังอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณ: แตะรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอ แตะ จากนั้นแตะ บันทึกรูปภาพ ก�รคัดลอกรูปภ�พหรือวิดีโอ: แตะค้างไว้ที่สิ่งที่แนบ จากนั้นแตะ คัดลอก ก�รบันทึกข้อมูลร�ยชื่อที่คุณได้รับ: แตะกล่องคำาพูดที่มีข้อมูลรายชื่อ จากนั้นแตะ สร้างรายชื่อใหม่ หรือ “เพิ่มไปที่รายชื่อที่มีอยู่เดิม” ก�รเพิ่มบุคคลไปยังร�ยชื่อของคุณจ�กร�ยก�รข้อคว�ม: แตะหมายเลขโทรศัพท์หรือที่อยู่อีเมล จากนั้นแตะ “เพิ่มไปที่รายชื่อ”บท 7 ข้อความ 50 การตั้งค่าของข้อความ ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ข้อความ เพื่อตั้งค่าตัวเลือกสำาหรับข้อความ รวมถึง: • การเปิดหรือปิด iMessage • การแจ้งคนอื่น ๆ เมื่อคุณได้อ่านข้อความของพวกเขาแล้ว • การระบุหมายเลขโทรศัพท์ Apple ID หรือที่อยู่อีเมลที่ใช้กับข้อความ • การแสดงช่องเรื่อง ก�รจัดก�รก�รแจ้งสำ�หรับข้อคว�ม: ดูที่ ห้ามรบกวนและการแจ้ง ที่หน้า 113 ก�รตั้งค่�เสียงเตือนสำ�หรับข้อคว�มตัวอักษรที่เข้�ม�: ดูที่ เสียง ที่หน้า 1188 51 บน iPad 2 หรือรุ่นใหม่กว่า คุณสามารถใช้ FaceTime เพื่อทำาการโทรผ่านจอภาพไปยังอุปกรณ์ iOS อื่น ๆ หรือคอมพิวเตอร์ที่รองรับ FaceTime ได้ กล้อง FaceTime ช่วยให้คุณพูดคุยได้แบบ เห็นหน้ากัน และสลับไปใช้กล้อง iSight ทางด้านหลังเพื่อแบ่งปันสิ่งที่คุณเห็นรอบ ๆ ตัวคุณ หมายเหตุ: FaceTime อาจไม่มีให้ใช้ครบทุกพื้นที่ บน iPad รุ่น Wi-Fi + cellular การโทร FaceTime สามารถทำาได้ผ่านการเชื่อมต่อข้อมูลผ่านสัญญาณเครือข่ายโทรศัพท์มือถือ อาจคิดค่า บริการข้อมูลผ่านสัญญาณเครือข่ายโทรศัพท์มือถือ ลากรูปภาพของคุณ ไปยังมุมต�าง ๆ ลากรูปภาพของคุณ ไปยังมุมต�าง ๆ สลับกล�อง สลับกล�อง ป�ดเสียง (คุณสามารถได�ยินและเห็น ส�วนผู�โทรจะเห็นแต�ไม�ได�ยิน) ป�ดเสียง (คุณสามารถได�ยินและเห็น ส�วนผู�โทรจะเห็นแต�ไม�ได�ยิน) ในการใช้งาน FaceTime คุณจำาเป็นต้องใช้ Apple ID และการเชื่อมอินเทอร์เน็ตผ่าน Wi-Fi เมื่อ คุณเปิด FaceTime คุณอาจจะต้องลงชื่อเข้าใช้ด้วย Apple ID หรืออาจจะต้องสร้างบัญชีใหม่เพื่อใช้ งาน โทรผ่�น FaceTime: แตะรายชื่อ เลือกชื่อ แล้วแตะอีเมลหรือหมายเลขโทรศัพท์ที่บุคคลนั้นใช้ สำาหรับ FaceTime คุณสามารถโทรผ่าน FaceTime ได้จากแอปพลิเคชั่นรายชื่อ หมุน iPad เพื่อใช้ FaceTime ในแนวนอนหรือแนวตั้ง ในการหลีกเลี่ยงการเปลี่ยนแนวที่ไม่ต้องการ ให้ล็อก iPad ในแนวตั้ง ดู แนวตั้งและแนวนอน ที่หน้า 20 โทรเบอร์ล่�สุดอีกครั้ง: แตะ ล่าสุด แล้วแตะที่ชื่อ หรือหมายเลข ใช้ร�ยก�รโปรด: แตะรายการโปรด: FaceTimeบท 8 FaceTime 52 • เพิ่มคนโปรด: แตะ แล้วเลือกรายชื่อ • โทรหาคนโปรด: แตะไปที่ชื่อที่อยู่ในรายการ ก�รเพิ่มร�ยชื่อ: แตะ รายชื่อ แตะ จากนั้นป้อนชื่อและที่อยู่อีเมล หรือหมายเลขโทรศัพท์ที่พวก เขาใช้เพื่อโทรผ่าน FaceTime สำาหรับรายชื่อที่อยู่นอกเขตภูมิภาคของคุณ ให้แน่ใจว่าได้ป้อน หมายเลขครบสมบูรณ์ ซึ่งรวมทั้งรหัสประเทศและรหัสพื้นที่ด้วย ก�รใช้แอปพลิเคชั่นอื่นระหว่�งก�รใช้ส�ย: กดปุ่มโฮม จากนั้นแตะไอคอนแอปพลิเคชั่น คุณยัง สามารถพูดคุยกับเพื่อนของคุณได้ แต่คุณจะไม่เห็นหน้าซึ่งกันและกัน ในการกลับไปที่วิดีโอ ให้แตะ แถบสีเขียวที่ด้านบนสุดของหน้าจอ ตั้งค่�ตัวเลือกสำ�หรับ FaceTime: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > FaceTime ตัวเลือกได้รวมถึงการระบุหมายเลขโทรศัพท์ Apple ID หรือที่อยู่อีเมลเพื่อใช้สำาหรับ FaceTime9 53 ทำาความรู้จัก หากคุณใช้งาน iPad 2 หรือรุ่นใหม่กว่า คุณสามารถถ่ายได้ทั้งภาพและวิดีโอ นอกเหนือจากกล้อง iSight ที่ด้านหลัง เครื่องยังมีกล้องที่ใช้สำาหรับ FaceTime ที่ด้านหน้าสำาหรับการโทรแบบ FaceTime และการถ่ายรูปตัวเอง ดูรูปภาพและวิดีโอที่ คุณถ�ายไว� ดูรูปภาพและวิดีโอที่ คุณถ�ายไว� เริ่มหรือหยุด บันทึกวิดีโอ เริ่มหรือหยุด บันทึกวิดีโอ สวิตช� กล�อง/วิดีโอ สวิตช� กล�อง/วิดีโอ กรอบสี่เหลี่ยมบนหน้าจอแสดงบริเวณโฟกัสของกล้องและบริเวณที่กล้องเปิดรับแสง เมื่อคุณถ่าย รูปบุคคล iPad (รุ่นที่ 3) จะใช้การตรวจจับใบหน้าเพื่อโฟกัสโดยอัตโนมัติและเพื่อความสมดุลของ การเปิดรับแสงให้ใบหน้าต่าง ๆ ได้ไม่เกิน 10 ใบหน้า กรอบสี่เหลี่ยมจะปรากฏสำาหรับใบหน้าแต่ละ ใบหน้าที่ถูกตรวจจับ ก�รถ่�ยรูป: แตะ หรือกดปุ่มเพิ่ม/ลดความดังเสียง ในการแสดงตารางบนหน้าจอ ให้แตะ ตัว เลือก • การซูมเข้าหรือซูมออก: จีบนิ้วที่หน้าจอ (กล้อง iSight เท่านั้น) ก�รบันทึกวิดีโอ: สลับไปเป็น จากนั้นแตะ หรือกดปุ่มเพิ่ม/ลดความดังเสียงเพื่อเริ่มหรือหยุด บันทึก เมื่อคุณเริ่มถ่ายภาพหรือเริ่มบันทึกวิดีโอ iPad จะมีเสียงชัตเตอร์ดังขึ้น คุณสามารถควบคุมความดัง เสียงด้วยปุ่มความดังเสียง หรือสวิตช์ด้านข้าง หมายเหตุ: ในบางประเทศ การปิดเสียง iPad จะไม่ได้ทำาให้เสียงชัตเตอร์หายไป หากเปิดบริการหาตำาแหน่ง รูปภาพและวิดีโอจะถูกระบุข้อมูลตำาแหน่งซึ่งสามารถนำาไปใช้ได้ใน แอปพลิเคชั่นอื่น ๆ และเว็บไซต์สำาหรับแบ่งปันรูปภาพ ดู ความเป็นส่วนตัว ที่หน้า 118 กล้องบท 9 กล้อง 54 ก�รตั้งค่�โฟกัสและก�รเปิดรับแสง: • การตั้งค่าโฟกัสและการเปิดรับแสงสำาหรับช็อตต่อไป แตะที่วัตถุบนหน้าจอ การตรวจจับใบหน้า จะปิดชั่วคราว • การล็อกโฟกัสและการเปิดรับแสง: แตะค้างไว้ที่หน้าจอจนกระทั่งกรอบสี่เหลี่ยมกระพริบ การล็อก แบบ AE/AF จะแสดงที่ด้านล่างสุดของหน้าจอ และโฟกัสกับการเปิดรับแสงจะยังล็อกอยู่จนกว่า คุณจะแตะหน้าจออีกครั้ง ก�รถ่�ยสกรีนช็อต: กดและปล่อยปุ่มพัก/ปลุก และปุ่มโฮม พร้อมกัน สกรีนช็อตจะถูกเพิ่มไปยัง อัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณ หมายเหตุ: บน iPad ที่ไม่มีกล้อง ภาพถ่ายทั้งหน้าจอจะถูกเพิ่มไปยังอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มที่บันทึกไว้ การดู แบ่งปัน และพิมพ์ รูปภาพและวิดีโอที่คุณถ่ายจากกล้องจะถูกบันทึกไปที่อัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณ ถ้าคุณได้เปิด การตั้ง ค่า > iCloud สำาหรับการกระจายภาพ รูปภาพใหม่จะปรากฏในอัลบั้มการกระจายภาพของคุณและ กระจายไปยังอุปกรณ์ iOS อื่น ๆ และคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณด้วย ดู การใช้ iCloud ที่หน้า 14 และ การกระจายรูปภาพ ที่หน้า 57 ดูอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณ: กวาดนิ้วไปทางขวา หรือแตะรูปภาพขนาดย่อ คุณยังสามารถดูอัลบั้ม ม้วนฟิลม์ของคุณในแอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพได้อีกด้วย • การแสดงหรือซ่อนตัวควบคุมขณะดูรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอ: แตะหน้าจอ • การแบ่งปันรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอ: แตะ ในการส่งรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอหลายรายการ ให้แตะ ใน ขณะที่ดูรูปขนาดย่อ เลือกรายการ จากนั้นแตะ แบ่งปัน • การพิมพ์รูปภาพ: แตะ ดู การพิมพ์ด้วย AirPrint ที่หน้า 30 • การลบรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอ: แตะ ก�รกลับไปสู่กล้อง: แตะ เสร็จ อัปโหลดรูปภ�พและวิดีโอไปที่คอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ: เชื่อมต่อ iPad ไปที่คอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ • Mac: เลือกรูปภาพและวิดีโอที่คุณต้องการ จากนั้นคลิกปุ่มนำาเข้าหรือดาวน์โหลดใน iPhoto หรือแอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพอื่น ๆ ที่รองรับในคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ • PC: ปฏิบัติตามขั้นตอนที่มากับแอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพของคุณ หากคุณลบรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอจาก iPad เมื่อคุณอัปโหลดไปยังคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ รูปภาพและ วิดีโอเหล่านั้นจะลบออกจากอัลบั้มม้วนฟิลม์ของคุณ คุณสามารถใช้บานหน้าต่างการตั้งค่ารูปภาพ ใน iTunes เพื่อเชื่อมข้อมูลรูปภาพและวิดีโอกับแอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพบน iPad (วิดีโอสามารถเชื่อม ข้อมูลได้เฉพาะเครื่อง Mac เท่านั้น) ดู การเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes ที่หน้า 16 การแก้ไขรูปภาพและการตัดแต่งวิดีโอ ปรับสีอัตโนมัติ ปรับสีอัตโนมัติ ครอบตัด ครอบตัด หมุน หมุน ลบตาแดง ลบตาแดง ก�รแก้ไขรูปภ�พ: ขณะดูรูปภาพแบบเต็มหน้าจอ ให้แตะ แก้ไข จากนั้นเลือกเครื่องมือ • ปรับอัตโนมัติ: การปรับจะเพิ่มความมืดและความสว่างโดยรวม ความอิ่มตัวของสี และคุณภาพ อื่นของรูปภาพ หากคุณต้องการให้มีการปรับ ให้แตะที่เครื่องมืออีกครั้ง (แม้ว่าคุณจะได้บันทึกการ เปลี่ยนแปลงไปแล้ว) • การลบตาแดง: แตะที่ตาแต่ละข้างที่ต้องการแก้ไขบท 9 กล้อง 55 • การครอบตัด: ลากมุมต่าง ๆ ของตาราง ลากรูปภาพเพื่อเปลี่ยนตำาแหน่ง แล้วแตะ ครอบตัด ใน การตั้งค่าอัตราส่วนเฉพาะ ให้แตะ อัตราส่วน ก�รตัดแต่งวิดีโอ: ขณะที่กำาลังดูวิดีโอ ให้แตะที่หน้าจอเพื่อแสดงตัวควบคุม ลากปลายข้างใดข้าง หนึ่งของกรอบเฟรมภาพนิ่งที่อยู่ด้านบนของวิดีโอ แล้วแตะตัดต่อ ข้อสำาคัญ: หากคุณเลือก ตัดแต่งต้นฉบับ เฟรมที่โดนตัดแต่งจะถูกลบออกจากวิดีโอต้นฉบับอย่าง ถาวร หากคุณเลือก “บันทึกเป็นคลิปใหม่” คลิปวิดีโอที่ตัดแต่งใหม่จะถูกบันทึกไว้ในอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์ม ของคุณและไม่มีผลกระทบใด ๆ กับวิดีโอต้นฉบับ10 56 การดูรูปภาพและวิดีโอ รูปภาพจะให้คุณดูรูปภาพและวิดีโอบน iPad ใน: • อัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์ม จะประกอบด้วยรูปภาพและวิดีโอที่คุณถ่ายใน iPad หรือที่บันทึกจากอีเมล ข้อความ ตัวอักษร หน้าเว็บ หรือสกรีนช็อต • อัลบั้มการกระจายรูปภาพ จะประกอบด้วยรูปภาพในการกระจายรูปภาพของฉัน และการกระจาย รูปภาพที่แบ่งปันของคุณ (ดู การกระจายรูปภาพ ที่หน้า 57) • อัลบั้มล่าสุดที่นำาเข้ามาจะประกอบด้วยรูปภาพและวิดีโอที่ถูกนำาเข้าจากกล้องดิจิตอล อุปกรณ์ iOS หรือการ์ดหน่วยความจำาแบบ SD (ให้ดูที่ การนำาเข้ารูปภาพและวิดีโอ ที่หน้า 59) • คลังรูปภาพและอัลบั้มอื่นที่เชื่อมข้อมูลมาจากคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ (ให้ดูที่ การเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes ที่หน้า 16) หมายเหตุ: บน iPad ที่ไม่มีกล้อง รูปภาพที่บันทึกจะแทนที่อัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์ม เลือกรูปภาพเพื่อดู เลือกรูปภาพเพื่อดู แก�ไขรูปภาพ แก�ไขรูปภาพ เล�นการนำเสนอภาพนิ่ง เล�นการนำเสนอภาพนิ่ง ลบรูปภาพ ลบรูปภาพ กระจายการนำเสนอภาพนิ่ง ไปยัง HDTV โดยใช� AirPlay กระจายการนำเสนอภาพนิ่ง ไปยัง HDTV โดยใช� AirPlay แบ�งป�นรูปภาพ ส�งไปยังรายชื่อ ใช�เป�นรูปพื้นหลัง หรือพิมพ�รูปภาพ แบ�งป�นรูปภาพ ส�งไปยังรายชื่อ ใช�เป�นรูปพื้นหลัง หรือพิมพ�รูปภาพ แตะหน�าจอเพื่อ แสดงแถบควบคุม แตะหน�าจอเพื่อ แสดงแถบควบคุม ก�รดูรูปภ�พและวิดีโอ: แตะที่ปุ่มหนึ่งปุ่มใดบนหน้าจอ สำาหรับตัวอย่าง ให้แตะอัลบั้ม จากนั้นแตะ อัลบั้มเพื่อดูรูปย่อ แตะรูปขนาดย่อเพื่อดูรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอแบบเต็มจอ • การดูรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอถัดไปหรือก่อนหน้า: กวาดนิ้วไปทางซ้ายหรือขวา • การซูมเข้าหรือซูมออก: แตะสองครั้ง หรือจีบนิ้ว • การแพนรูปภาพ: ลากรูปภาพ รูปภ�พบท 10 รูปภาพ 57 • การเล่นวิดีโอ: แตะ ที่อยู่ตรงกลางของหน้าจอ คุณยังสามารถจีบนิ้วเพื่อเปิดหรือปิดอัลบั้ม ดูรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอแบบเต็มจอ หรือกลับไปยังมุมมองรูป ย่อ อัลบั้มที่คุณเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iPhoto 8.0 (iLife ’09) หรือใหม่กว่า หรือกับ Aperture v3.0.2 หรือใหม่กว่า สามารถดูได้ตามกิจกรรมหรือใบหน้า คุณยังสามารถดูรูปภาพตามที่ตั้งได้ด้วย หาก ถ่ายรูปนั้นด้วยกล้องที่รองรับการแท็กด้วยจุดพิกัดภูมิศาสตร์ ก�รดูก�รนำ�เสนอภ�พนิ่ง: แตะ การนำาเสนอภาพนิ่ง เลือกตัวเลือกของการนำาเสนอภาพนิ่ง จากนั้น แตะ เริ่มต้นการนำาเสนอภาพนิ่ง ในการหยุดการนำาเสนอภาพนิ่ง ให้แตะหน้าจอ ในการตั้งค่าตัวเลือก อื่น ให้ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > รูปภาพและกล้อง ก�รกระจ�ยวิดีโอหรือก�รนำ�เสนอภ�พนิ่งไปยังทีวี: ดูที่ AirPlay ที่หน้า 30 การจัดระเบียบรูปภาพและวิดีโอ ก�รสร้�งอัลบั้ม: แตะ อัลบั้ม แตะ ป้อนชื่อ แล้วแตะ บันทึก เลือกรายการเพื่อเพิ่มไปยังอัลบั้มใหม่ จากนั้นแตะ เสร็จ หมายเหตุ: อัลบั้มที่สร้างบน iPad จะไม่เชื่อมข้อมูลกลับไปยังคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณได้ ก�รเพิ่มร�ยก�รไปยังอัลบั้ม: เมื่อดูรูปขนาดย่อ ให้แตะ เลือกรายการ จากนั้นแตะ เสร็จ ก�รจัดก�รอัลบั้ม: แตะ แก้ไข • การเปลี่ยนชื่ออัลบั้ม: แตะที่ชื่ออัลบั้ม จากนั้นป้อนชื่อใหม่ • การจัดเรียงอัลบั้มใหม่: การลากอัลบั้ม: • การลบอัลบั้ม: แตะ เฉพาะอัลบั้มที่สร้างบน iPad ที่สามารถเปลี่ยนชื่อหรือลบได้ การกระจายรูปภาพ ด้วยการกระจายรูปภาพ ซึ่งเป็นคุณสมบัติของ iCloud (ดู การใช้ iCloud ที่หน้า 14) รูปภาพที่คุณ ถ่ายบน iPad จะปรากฏโดยอัตโนมัติบนอุปกรณ์อื่น ๆ ของคุณที่ตั้งค่าด้วยการกระจายรูปภาพ ซึ่ง รวมถึง Mac หรือ PC ของคุณด้วย การกระจายรูปภาพยังให้คุณแบ่งปันรูปภาพที่เลือกกับเพื่อนและ ครอบครัวโดยตรงไปยังอุปกรณ์ของพวกเขาหรือบนเว็บได้อีกด้วย เกี่ยวกับก�รกระจ�ยรูปภ�พ เมื่อเปิดการกระจายรูปภาพ รูปภาพที่คุณถ่ายใน iPad (รวมถึงรูปภาพอื่น ๆ ที่เพิ่มไปยังอัลบั้มม้วน ฟิล์มของคุณ) จะอัปโหลดไปยังการกระจายรูปภาพของคุณหลังจากที่คุณออกจากแอปพลิเคชั่นกล้อง และ iPad เชื่อมต่ออินเทอร์เน็ตผ่าน Wi-Fi รูปภาพเหล่านี้จะปรากฏในอัลบั้มการกระจายรูปภาพของ ฉันบน iPad และบนอุปกรณ์อื่น ๆ ของคุณที่ตั้งค่าด้วยการกระจายรูปภาพ ก�รเปิดก�รกระจ�ยรูปภ�พ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud > กระจายภาพ รูปภาพที่เพิ่มไปยังการกระจายรูปภาพของคุณจากอุปกรณ์ iCloud อื่น ๆ ของคุณจะปรากฏในการ กระจายรูปภาพของฉันด้วย iPad และอุปกรณ์ iOS อื่น ๆ สามารถเก็บรูปภาพล่าสุดของคุณได้มาก ถึง 1000 รูปในการกระจายรูปภาพของฉัน คอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณสามารถเก็บรูปภาพในการกระจาย รูปภาพของคุณทั้งหมดได้อย่างถาวร หมายเหตุ: รูปภาพในการกระจายรูปภาพไม่ได้นับจากการจัดเก็บ iCloud ของคุณ ก�รจัดก�รเนื้อห�ของก�รกระจ�ยรูปภ�พ: แตะ แก้ไข ในอัลบั้มการกระจายรูปภาพ • การบันทึกรูปภาพไปยัง iPad: เลือกรูปภาพ แล้วแตะ บันทึกบท 10 รูปภาพ 58 • การแบ่งปัน พิมพ์ คัดลอก หรือบันทึกรูปภาพไปยังอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณ: เลือกรูปภาพ จากนั้น แตะ แบ่งปัน • การลบรูปภาพ: เลือกรูปภาพ จากนั้นแตะ ลบ หมายเหตุ: แม้ว่ารูปภาพที่ลบนั้นจะถูกลบออกจากการกระจายรูปภาพบนอุปกรณ์ของคุณ แต่รูปภาพ ต้นฉบับนั้นยังคงอยู่ในอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มบนอุปกรณ์ที่ถ่ายรูปภาพนั้นมา รูปภาพที่บันทึกไปยังอุปกรณ์ หรือคอมพิวเตอร์จากการกระจายรูปภาพไม่ได้ถูกลบเช่นกัน ในการลบรูปภาพจากการกระจาย รูปภาพ คุณจำาเป็นต้องใช้ iOS 5.1 หรือเวอร์ชั่นใหม่กว่าบน iPad และอุปกรณ์ iOS อื่น ๆ ของคุณ ดูที่ support.apple.com/kb/HT4486 ก�รกระจ�ยรูปภ�พที่แบ่งปัน การกระจายรูปภาพที่แบ่งปันจะให้คุณแบ่งปันรูปภาพที่เลือกเฉพาะกับบุคคลที่คุณเลือก ผู้ใช้ iOS 6 และ OS X Mountain Lion สามารถสมัครสมาชิกการกระจายรูปภาพที่แบ่งปันของคุณ ดูรูปภาพ ล่าสุดที่คุณเพิ่ม “ถูกใจ” รูปภาพแต่ละรูป และแสดงความคิดเห็น จากอุปกรณ์ของตนได้ คุณสามารถ สร้างเว็บไซต์สาธารณะสำาหรับการกระจายรูปภาพที่แบ่งปัน เพื่อแบ่งปันรูปภาพของคุณกับผู้อื่นผ่าน เว็บนั้นได้เช่นกัน หมายเหตุ: การกระจายรูปภาพที่แบ่งปันทำางานผ่านทั้งเครือข่าย Wi-Fi และเครือข่ายโทรศัพท์มือถือ (iPad Wi-Fi + cellular) อาจคิดค่าบริการข้อมูลจากสัญญาณโทรศัพท์มือถือ ก�รเปิดก�รกระจ�ยรูปภ�พ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud > การกระจายรูปภาพ ก�รสร้�งก�รกระจ�ยรูปภ�พที่แบ่งปัน: แตะ การกระจายรูปภาพ แล้วแตะ ในการเชิญผู้ใช้ iOS 6 หรือ OS X Mountain Lion อื่น ๆ ให้สมัครสมาชิกการกระจายรูปภาพที่แบ่งปันของคุณ ให้ ป้อนที่อยู่อีเมลของบุคคลเหล่านั้น ในการโพสต์การกระจายรูปภาพบน icloud.com ให้เปิด เว็บไซต์ สาธารณะ ตั้งชื่ออัลบั้ม แล้วแตะ สร้าง ก�รเพิ่มรูปภ�พไปยังก�รกระจ�ยรูปภ�พที่แบ่งปัน: เลือกรูปภาพ แตะ แตะ การกระจายรูปภาพ แล้วเลือกการกระจายรูปภาพที่แบ่งปัน ในการเพิ่มรูปภาพหลายรูปจากอัลบั้ม ให้แตะ แก้ไข เลือก รูปภาพ แล้วแตะ แบ่งปัน ก�รลบรูปภ�พจ�กก�รกระจ�ยรูปภ�พที่แบ่งปัน: แตะการกระจายรูปภาพที่แบ่งปัน แตะ แก้ไข เลือกรูปภาพ แล้วแตะ ลบ ก�รลบก�รกระจ�ยรูปภ�พที่แบ่งปัน: แตะ การกระจายรูปภาพ แตะ แก้ไข จากนั้นแตะการกระจาย รูปภาพที่แบ่งปัน คุณสามารถ: • ตั้งชื่อการกระจายรูปภาพ • เพิ่มหรือลบผู้สมัครสมาชิกออก และส่งคำาเชิญใหม่ • สร้างเว็บไซต์สาธารณะ และแบ่งปันลิงก์ • ลบการกระจายรูปภาพ การแบ่งปันรูปภาพและวิดีโอ คุณสามารถแบ่งปันรูปภาพในอีเมล ข้อความตัวอักษร การกระจายรูปภาพ โพสต์ของ Twitter และ Facebook ได้ วิดีโอสามารถแบ่งปันในอีเมลและข้อความตัวอักษร และบน YouTube ได้ ก�รแบ่งปันหรือคัดลอกรูปภ�พหรือวิดีโอ: เลือกรูปภาพหรือวิดีโอ จากนั้นแตะ หากคุณไม่เห็น ให้แตะหน้าจอเพื่อแสดงตัวควบคุม การจำากัดขนาดของไฟล์แนบจะถูกกำาหนดโดยผู้ให้บริการของคุณ บางครั้งอาจมีความจำาเป็นที่ iPad จะบีบอัดไฟล์แนบรูปภาพและวิดีโอ คุณยังสามารถคัดลอกรูปภาพและวิดีโอ จากนั้นวางลงในอีเมลหรือข้อความตัวอักษรได้ด้วยบท 10 รูปภาพ 59 ก�รแบ่งปันหรือคัดลอกรูปภ�พและวิดีโอหล�ยอัน: ขณะดูรูปขนาดย่อ ให้แตะ แก้ไข เลือกรูปภาพ หรือวิดีโอ แล้วแตะ แบ่งปัน บันทึกรูปภ�พหรือวิดีโอจ�ก: • อีเมล: แตะเพื่อดาวน์โหลดรายการนั้นหากจำาเป็น แตะรูปภาพหรือแตะค้างไว้ที่วิดีโอ จากนั้นแตะ บันทึก • ข้อความตัวอักษร: แตะรายการในการสนทนา แตะ จากนั้นแตะ บันทึก • หน้าเว็บ (รูปภาพเท่านั้น): แตะรูปภาพค้างไว้ แล้วแตะบันทึกรูปภาพ รูปภาพและวิดีโอที่คุณได้รับ หรือคุณบันทึกจากหน้าเว็บจะถูกบันทึกไปยังอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณ (หรืออยู่ที่รูปภาพบันทึกบน iPad ที่ไม่มีกล้อง) การพิมพ์รูปภาพ ก�รพิมพ์ด้วยเครื่องพิมพ์ที่เปิดใช้ง�น AirPrint: • การพิมพ์รูปภาพรูปเดียว: แตะ จากนั้นแตะ พิมพ์ • การพิมพ์รูปภาพหลายรูป: ขณะดูอัลบั้มรูปภาพ ให้แตะ แก้ไข เลือกรูปภาพ แตะ แบ่งปัน แล้ว แตะ พิมพ์ ดูที่ การพิมพ์ด้วย AirPrint ที่หน้า 30 กรอบรูปภาพ เมื่อ iPad ล็อกอยู่ คุณสามารถแสดงการนำาเสนอภาพนิ่งของทั้งหมดหรืออัลบั้มที่เลือกของรูปภาพ คุณ เปิดใช้กรอบรูปภ�พ: กดปุ่มพัก/ปลุกเพื่อล็อก iPad ให้กดปุ่มอีกครั้งเพื่อเปิดหน้าจอ จากนั้นแตะ • การหยุดพักการนำาเสนอภาพนิ่ง: แตะหน้าจอ • การหยุดการนำาเสนอภาพนิ่ง: หยุดพักการนำาเสนอภาพนิ่ง จากนั้นแตะ ก�รเลือกอัลบั้มเพื่อแสดง: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > กรอบรูปภาพ ก�รตั้งค่�ตัวเลือกอื่น ๆ สำ�หรับกรอบรูปภ�พ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > กรอบรูปภาพ ก�รปิดกรอบรูปภ�พ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > ทั่วไป > ล็อกรหัสผ่าน การนำาเข้ารูปภาพและวิดีโอ คุณสามารถใช้ชุดต่อกล้อง (ขายแยกต่างหาก) กับ iPad เพื่อนำาภาพและวิดีโอเข้าโดยตรงจาก กล้องดิจิตอลหรืออุปกรณ์ iOS อื่นๆ หรือจากการ์ดหน่วยความจำาแบบ SD ก�รนำ�เข้�รูปภ�พ: 1 เสียบตัวอ่านการ์ด SD หรือขั้วต่อกล้อง ซึ่งมาพร้อมกับชุดต่อกล้องกับ iPad เข้ากับช่องต่อแท่นวาง ของ iPad • การเชื่อมต่อกล้องหรืออุปกรณ์ iOS: ใช้สายเคเบิล USB ที่มากับกล้องหรืออุปกรณ์ iOS และ เชื่อมต่อเข้ากับพอร์ต USB ของขั้วต่อกล้อง หากคุณใช้อุปกรณ์ iOS ให้ตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่า เครื่องเปิดอยู่และไม่ล็อก ในการเชื่อมต่อกล้อง ให้ตรวจสอบให้แน่ใจว่ากล้องเปิดอยู่ และอยู่ใน โหมดถ่ายโอน สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม ให้ดูเอกสารประกอบที่มาพร้อมกับกล้อง • การใช้การ์ดหน่วยความจำาแบบ SD : การใส่การ์ดในช่องบนตัวอ่านการ์ดแบบ SD อย่าใช้แรง ฝืนดันการ์ดให้เข้าในช่อง ซึ่งการ์ดเข้าได้เฉพาะทางเดียว สำาหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม ให้ดูที่เอกสารประกอบของชุดเชื่อมต่อกล้องสำาหรับ iPadบท 10 รูปภาพ 60 2 ปลดล็อก iPad 3 แอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพจะเปิดขึ้นและแสดงรูปภาพและวิดีโอที่พร้อมให้นำาเข้าได้ 4 เลือกภาพและวิดีโอที่คุณต้องการนำาเข้า • การนำาเข้ารายการทั้งหมด: แตะ นำาเข้าทั้งหมด • การนำาเข้าแค่บางรายการ: ให้แตะรายการที่คุณต้องการนำาเข้า (เครื่องหมายถูกจะปรากฏบน แต่ละรายการ) แตะ นำาเข้า จากนั้นเลือก นำาเข้าที่เลือก 5 หลังจากนำาเข้ารูปภาพแล้ว คุณสามารถเก็บหรือลบรูปภาพและวิดีโอบนการ์ด กล้อง หรืออุปกรณ์ iOS ได้ 6 ถอดตัวอ่านการ์ด SD หรือขั้วต่อกล้องออก ในการดูรูปภาพเหล่านั้น ให้มองหาในอัลบั้มนำาเข้าล่าสุด กิจกรรมใหม่จะประกอบด้วยรูปภาพ ทั้งหมดที่เลือกไว้สำาหรับนำาเข้า ในการถ่ายโอนภาพไปที่คอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ ให้เชื่อมต่อ iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณและนำาเข้า รูปภาพด้วยแอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพ เช่น iPhoto หรือ Adobe Elements11 61 การถ่ายรูป หากคุณมี iPad 2 หรือรุ่นใหม่กว่า จะทำาให้ถ่ายรูปด้วย Photo Booth และทำาให้รูปภาพของคุณ น่าสนใจโดยการปรับใช้เอฟเฟกต์ได้อย่างง่ายดาย เมื่อคุณถ่ายรูป iPad จะส่งเสียงชัตเตอร์ คุณสามารถใช้ปุ่มความดังเสียงที่ด้านข้างของ iPad เพื่อ ควบคุมความดังของเสียงชัตเตอร์ได้ คุณจะไม่ได้ยินเสียงหากคุณตั้งค่าสวิตช์ด้านข้างไว้ที่เงียบ ดูที่ ปุ่มต่าง ๆ ที่หน้า 9 หมายเหตุ: ในบางที่ เอฟเฟกต์เสียงต่าง ๆ จะเล่น ถึงแม้ว่าสวิตซ์ด้านข้างจะถูกตั้งค่าไว้ที่เงียบ ก�รถ่�ยรูป: เล็ง iPad แล้วแตะ ก�รเลือกเอฟเฟกต์: แตะ จากนั้นแตะเอฟเฟกต์ที่คุณต้องการ • การเปลี่ยนเอฟเฟกต์บิดเบี้ยว: ลากนี้วของคุณไปบนหน้าจอ • การดัดแปลงการบิดเบี้ยว: จีบนิ้ว กวาดนิ้ว หรือหมุนรูปภาพ ก�รตรวจดูรูปภ�พที่คุณเพิ่งถ่�ย: แตะรูปขนาดย่อของภาพล่าสุดของคุณ ในการแสดงตัวควบคุมอีก ครั้ง ให้แตะที่หน้าจอ ก�รสลับระหว่�งกล้องด้�นหน้�กับด้�นหลัง: แตะ ที่ด้านล่างสุดของหน้าจอ Photo Boothบท 11 Photo Booth 62 การจัดการรูปภาพ รูปภาพที่คุณถ่ายด้วย Photo Booth จะถูกบันทึกไว้ในอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณในแอปพลิเคชั่นรูป ภาพใน iPad ก�รลบรูปภ�พ: เลือกรูปขนาดย่อ จากนั้นแตะ ก�รลบรูปภ�พหล�ยรูป: แตะ แตะรูปขนาดย่อหนึ่งหรือหลายรูป จากนั้นแตะ ลบ ก�รส่งอีเมลหรือคัดลอกรูปภ�พ: แตะ แตะรูปขนาดย่อหนึ่งหรือหลายรูป จากนั้นแตะ ส่งอีเมล หรือ คัดลอก ดูรูปภ�พในอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณ: ในรูปภาพ ให้แตะอัลบั้ม จากนั้นแตะรูปขนาดย่อ ในการดู รูปภาพถัดไปหรือก่อนหน้า ให้กวาดนิ้วไปทางซ้ายหรือขวา ดูที่ การดูรูปภาพและวิดีโอ ที่หน้า 56 ก�รอัปโหลดรูปภ�พไปยังคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ: เชื่อมต่อ iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณโดยใช้สาย Lightning ไปเป็น USB • Mac: เลือกรูปภาพเพื่ออัปโหลด จากนั้นคลิกปุ่มนำาเข้าหรือดาวน์โหลดใน iPhoto หรือใน แอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพอื่นที่รองรับบนคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ • PC: ปฏิบัติตามคำาแนะนำาที่มากับแอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพของคุณ หากคุณต้องการลบรูปภาพจาก iPad เมื่อคุณอัปโหลดไปยังคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณแล้ว รูปภาพจะถูก ลบออกจากอัลบั้มม้วนฟิล์มของคุณ คุณสามารถใช้บานหน้าต่างการตั้งค่ารูปภาพใน iTunes เพื่อ เชื่อมข้อมูลรูปภาพไปยังแอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพบน iPad ได้12 63 ใช้แอปพลิเคชั่นวิดีโอเพื่อดูภาพยนตร์ รายการทีวี และวิดีโอเพลง ในการดูพ็อดคาสท์วิดีโอ ให้ติดตั้ง แอปพลิเคชั่นพ็อดคาสท์ฟรีจาก App Store ดูที่ บทที่ 24 พ็อดคาสท์ที่หน้า 93 ในการดูวิดีโอที่ คุณบันทึกโดยใช้กล้องบน iPad ให้เปิดแอปพลิเคชั่นรูปภาพ ก�รรับวิดีโอ: • การซื้อหรือเช่าวิดีโอจาก iTunes Store (ไม่มีให้ใช้ได้ครบทุกพื้นที่): เปิดแอปพลิเคชั่น iTunes บน iPad แล้วแตะ วิดีโอ ดูที่ บทที่ 20 iTunes Store ที่หน้า 84 • การถ่ายโอนวิดีโอจากคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ: เชื่อมต่อ iPad จากนั้นเชื่อมข้อมูลวิดีโอใน iTunes บนคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ ดู การเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes ที่หน้า 16 • การกระจายวิดีโอจากคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ: เปิดการแบ่งปันกันภายในพื้นที่ใน iTunes บน คอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ จากนั้น บน iPad ให้ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > วิดีโอ แล้วป้อน Apple ID และรหัส ผ่านที่คุณใช้ตั้งค่าการแบ่งปันกันภายในพื้นที่บนคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ จากนั้น เปิดวิดีโอบน iPad แล้วแตะ แบ่งปัน ที่ด้านบนสุดของรายการวิดีโอ ลากเพื่อข�ามไปข�างหน�าหรือย�อนกลับ ลากเพื่อข�ามไปข�างหน�าหรือย�อนกลับ แตะวิดีโอเพื่อ แสดงหรือซ�อน แถบควบคุม แตะวิดีโอเพื่อ แสดงหรือซ�อน แถบควบคุม ดูวิดีโอบนทีวี ด�วย Apple TV ดูวิดีโอบนทีวี ด�วย Apple TV ลากเพื่อปรับ ความดังเสียง ลากเพื่อปรับ ความดังเสียง คำาเตือน: สำาหรับข้อมูลที่สำาคัญเกี่ยวกับการหลีกเลี่ยงการสูญเสียการได้ยิน ให้ดูที่ ข้อมูลด้าน ความปลอดภัยที่สำาคัญ ที่หน้า 125 ก�รดูวิดีโอ: แตะ ภาพยนตร์ หรือ รายการทีวี จากนั้นแตะวิดีโอที่คุณต้องการดู • การปรับขนาดวิดีโอให้เต็มหน้าจอหรือพอดีกับหน้าจอ: แตะ หรือ หรือแตะสองครั้งที่หน้า จอเพื่อปรับขนาดโดยไม่ต้องแสดงตัวควบคุม • การเริ่มใหม่ตั้งแต่เริ่มต้น: หากวิดีโอมีหลายตอน ให้ลากตัวชี้ตำาแหน่งบนแถบเลื่อนไปให้สุดทาง ด้านซ้าย หากไม่มีตอน ให้แตะ วิดีโอบท 12 วิดีโอ 64 • การข้ามไปตอนถัดไปหรือก่อนหน้า (หากมี): แตะ หรือ คุณสามารถกดปุ่มตรงกลางหรือ ปุ่มที่เทียบเท่ากันบนชุดหูฟังที่เข้ากันได้สองครั้ง (ข้ามถัดไป) หรือสามครั้ง (ข้ามก่อนหน้า) • การกรอกลับหรือกรอไปข้างหน้า: แตะค้างไว้ที่ หรือ • การเลือกภาษาเสียงอื่น (หากมี): แตะ จากนั้นเลือกภาษาจากรายการเสียง • การแสดงหรือซ่อนคำาบรรยายใต้ภาพ (หากมี): แตะ จากนั้นเลือกภาษา หรือ ปิด จากรายการ คำาบรรยายใต้ภาพ • การแสดงหรือซ่อนการอธิบายภาพเอฟเฟกต์ (หากมี): ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > วิดีโอ • การดูวิดีโอบนทีวี: ดู การเชื่อมต่อ iPad กับทีวีหรืออุปกรณ์อื่น ที่หน้า 30 ก�รลบวิดีโอ: ในคลังของคุณ ให้แตะค้างไว้ที่วิดีโอจนกระทั่งปุ่มลบปรากฏขึ้น จากนั้นแตะ หาก คุณต้องการลบหลายวิดีโอ ให้แตะ แก้ไข ข้อสำาคัญ: หากคุณลบภาพยนตร์ที่เช่าจาก iPad ภาพยนตร์นั้นจะถูกลบอย่างถาวร และไม่สามารถ ถ่ายโอนกลับมายังคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณได้ เมื่อคุณลบวิดีโอ (นอกเหนือจากภาพยนตร์ที่เช่า) จาก iPad วิดีโอนั้นจะไม่ถูกลบจากคลัง iTunes บนคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ และคุณสามารถเชื่อมข้อมูลวิดีโอนั้นกลับไปยัง iPad ได้ในภายหลัง หาก คุณไม่ต้องการเชื่อมข้อมูลวิดีโอกลับไปที่ iPad ให้ตั้งค่า iTunes ให้ไม่เชื่อมข้อมูลวิดีโอนั้น ดู การ เชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes ที่หน้า 1613 65 ทำาความรู้จัก iPad ทำาให้การทำาตรงตามกำาหนดเป็นเรื่องง่าย คุณสามารถดูปฏิทินทีละปฏิทินหรือหลายปฏิทิน พร้อมกันได้ เปลี่ยนมุมมอง เปลี่ยนมุมมอง ลากกิจกรรมเพื่อ จัดกำหนดการใหม� ลากกิจกรรมเพื่อ จัดกำหนดการใหม� เลือกมุมมอง เลือกมุมมอง ดูคำเชิญ ดูคำเชิญ ไปที่วันที่อื่น ไปที่วันที่อื่น ก�รดูหรือแก้ไขกิจกรรม: แตะกิจกรรมนั้น คุณสามารถ: • ตั้งค่าการเตือนหลักและรอง • เปลี่ยนวันที่ เวลา หรือระยะเวลาของกิจกรรม • ย้ายกิจกรรมไปยังปฏิทินอื่น • เชื้อเชิญบุคคลอื่นให้เข้าร่วมกิจกรรมในปฏิทิน iCloud, Microsoft Exchange และ CalDAV • ลบกิจกรรม คุณยังสามารถย้ายกิจกรรมโดยการกดกิจกรรมค้างไว้แล้วลากไปที่เวลาใหม่ หรือโดยการปรับขอบ จับได้อีกด้วย ก�รเพิ่มกิจกรรม: แตะ แล้วป้อนข้อมูลกิจกรรม แล้วแตะ เสร็จสิ้น ปฏิทินบท 13 ปฏิทิน 66 • การตั้งค่าปฏิทินเริ่มต้นสำาหรับกิจกรรมใหม่: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฎิทิน > ปฎิทิน เริ่มต้น • การตั้งค่าเวลาเตือนเริ่มต้นสำาหรับวันเกิดและกิจกรรม: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฎิทิน > เวลาเตือนเริ่มต้น ก�รค้นห�กิจกรรม: แตะ รายการ แล้วป้อนข้อความในช่องค้นหา ชื่อเรื่อง ผู้ได้รับเชิญ ตำาแหน่ง และโน้ต สำาหรับปฏิทินที่คุณดูอยู่จะถูกค้นหา คุณยังสามารถค้นหากิจกรรมของปฏิทินได้จากหน้าจอ เริ่มต้น ดู การค้นหา ที่หน้า 27 ก�รตั้งค่�ระดับเสียงเตือนในปฏิทิน: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > เสียง > ปฏิทินเตือน นำ�เข้�กิจกรรมจ�กไฟล์ปฏิทิน: หากคุณได้รับไฟล์ปฏิทิน .ics ใน Mail ให้เปิดข้อความนั้นแล้วแตะ ไฟล์ปฏิทินเพื่อนำาเข้ากิจกรรมทั้งหมดที่มี นอกจากนี้ คุณยังสามารถนำาเข้าไฟล์ .ics ที่เผยแพร่บน เว็บโดยการแแตะที่ลิงก์เพื่อไปยังไฟล์นั้น ไฟล์ .ics บางไฟล์จะสมัครใช้งานปฏิทินให้คุณแทนการ เพิ่มกิจกรรมไปยังปฏิทินของคุณ ดู การทำางานกับหลายปฏิทิน ที่หน้า 66 หากคุณมีบัญชี iCloud บัญชี Microsoft Exchange หรือบัญชี CalDAV ที่รองรับ คุณก็สามารถ รับและตอบสนองคำาเชิญคำาเชิญจากบุคคลในองค์กรของคุณได้ ก�รเชื้อเชิญบุคคลอื่นเข้�ร่วมกิจกรรม: แตะ กิจกรรม แตะ แก้ไข จากนั้นแตะ ผู้ได้รับเชิญ เพื่อเลือก บุคคลจากรายชื่อ ก�รตอบสนองคำ�เชิญ: แตะไปที่คำาเชิญที่อยู่ในรายการ หรือแตะ เพื่อแสดงหน้าจอกิจกรรม แล้ว แตะคำาเชิญ คุณสามารถดูข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับผู้จัดและผู้ได้รับเชิญรายอื่น ๆ ได้ หากคุณเพิ่มความคิดเห็น ซึ่งอาจไม่มีให้ใช้ได้กับปฏิทินครบทุกประเภท ความคิดเห็นของคุณจะปรากฏให้ผู้จัดเห็นแต่ผู้เข้าร่วม รายอื่นจะไม่เห็น ก�รตอบรับกิจกรรมโดยไม่ต้องทำ�เครื่องหม�ยจอง: แตะ กิจกรรม จากนั้นแตะ ความพร้อมใช้ แล้ว เลือก “ว่าง” กิจกรรมจะยังคงอยู่ในปฏิทินของคุณ แต่จะไม่ปรากฏสถานะเป็นไม่ว่างให้บุคคลที่ส่งคำา เชิญให้คุณเห็น การทำางานกับหลายปฏิทิน คุณสามารถดูปฏิทินทีละปฏิทิน หรือดูหลายปฏิทินได้ในคราวเดียว คุณสามารถติดตามกิจกรรมใน ปฏิทินของ iCloud, Google Yahoo! หรือ iCalendar เช่นเดียวกับกิจกรรมและวันเกิดใน Facebook ของคุณ เปิดปฎิทินของ iCloud, Google, Exchange หรือ Yahoo! ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฎิทิน ให้แตะที่บัญชี แล้วเปิดปฎิทิน ก�รเพิ่มบัญชี CalDAV: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail, รายชื่อ, ปฏิทิน แตะ เพิ่มบัญชี จากนั้นแตะ อื่น ๆ แตะ เพิ่มบัญชี CalDAV ที่อยู่ใต้ปฏิทิน ก�รดูกิจกรรมใน Facebook: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Facebook จากนั้นลงชื่อเข้าใช้บัญชี Facebook ของคุณแล้วเปิดการเข้าถึงปฏิทิน ก�รเลือกปฏิทินเพื่อดู: แตะ ปฏิทิน แล้วแตะเพื่อเลือกปฏิทินที่คุณต้องการดู กิจกรรมสำาหรับปฏิทิน ที่เลือกทั้งหมดจะปรากฏในมุมมองหนึ่งเดียว ก�รดูปฏิทินวันเกิด: แตะ ปฏิทิน จากนั้นแตะ วันเกิด เพื่อรวมวันเกิดจากรายชื่อของคุณกับกิจกรรม ของคุณ หากคุณได้ตั้งค่าบัญชี Facebook คุณก็จะสามารถรวมวันเกิดของเพื่อนบน Facebook ของคุณได้ คุณสามารถติดตามกิจกรรมในปฏิทินที่ใช้รูปแบบ iCalendar (.ics) ได้ บริการปฏิทินหลายบริการ รองรับการติดตามกิจกรรมในปฏิทินต่าง ๆ ซึ่งรวมถึง iCloud, Yahoo!, Google และแอปพลิเคชั่น ปฏิทินใน OS X ปฏิทินที่ติดตามเป็นแบบอ่านอย่างเดียว คุณสามารถอ่านกิจกรรมได้จากปฏิทินที่ สมัครใช้งานบน iPad แต่คุณไม่สามารถแก้ไขหรือสร้างกิจกรรมใหม่ได้บท 13 ปฏิทิน 67 ก�รสมัครใช้ง�นปฏิทิน: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฎิทิน แล้วแตะ เพิ่มบัญชีผู้ใช้ แตะ อื่น ๆ แล้วแตะ เพิ่มปฏิทินที่สมัครใช้งาน ป้อนเซิร์ฟเวอร์และชื่อไฟล์ของไฟล์ .ics เพื่อสมัครใช้งาน คุณ สามารถติดตามกิจกรรมในปฏิทิน iCalendar (.ics) ที่เผยแพร่บนเว็บ โดยการแตะลิงก์ที่ไปยัง ปฏิทินนั้นได้เช่นกัน การแบ่งปันปฏิทิน iCloud คุณสามารถแบ่งปันปฏิทิน iCloud กับผู้ใช้ iCloud อื่น เมื่อคุณแบ่งปันปฏิทิน ผู้ใช้อื่นจะสามารถ ดูปฏิทินนั้นได้ และผู้ใช้อื่นก็จะสามารถเพิ่มหรือเปลี่ยนแปลงกิจกรรมได้เช่นกัน นอกจากนี้ คุณยัง สามารถแบ่งปันเวอร์ชั่นแบบอ่านอย่างเดียวที่ผู้ใช้อื่นสามารถดูได้ ก�รสร้�งปฏิทิน iCloud: แตะ ปฏิทิน แตะ แก้ไข จากนั้นแตะ เพิ่มปฏิทิน ก�รแบ่งปันปฏิทิน iCloud: แตะ ปฏิทิน แตะ แก้ไข จากนั้นแตะปฏิทิน iCloud ที่คุณต้องการแบ่งปัน แตะ เพิ่มบุคล จากนั้นเลือกบุคคลอื่นจากรายชื่อ บุคคลนั้นจะได้รับคำาเชิญทางอีเมลเพื่อเข้าร่วมใน ปฏิทิน แต่บุคคลนั้นจำาเป็นต้องมี Apple ID และบัญชี iCloud เพื่อยอมรับคำาเชิญของคุณ ก�รปิดก�รแจ้งสำ�หรับปฏิทินที่แบ่งปัน: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน แล้วปิดการเตือนที่ เกี่ยวข้องกับปฏิทินที่แบ่งปัน ก�รเปลี่ยนแปลงก�รเข้�ถึงของผู้ใช้อื่นในปฏิทินที่แบ่งปัน: แตะ ปฏิทิน แตะ แก้ไข จากนั้น แตะผู้ ใช้ที่คุณต้องการแบ่งปันด้วย คุณสามารถจำากัดสิทธิ์ในการแก้ไขปฏิทิน การส่งคำาเชิญเพื่อเข้าร่วม ปฏิทินใหม่ หรือหยุดการแบ่งปันกับผู้ใช้อื่นได้ ก�รแบ่งปันปฏิทินแบบอ่�นอย่�งเดียวกับผู้ใช้อื่น: แตะ ปฏิทิน แตะ แก้ไข จากนั้นแตะปฏิทิน iCloud ที่คุณต้องการแบ่งปัน เปิดปฏิทินสาธารณะ จากนั้นแตะ แบ่งปันลิงก์ เพื่อคัดลอกหรือส่ง URL สำาหรับ ปฏิทิน ผู้ใช้อื่นสามารถใช้ URL เพื่อติดตามกิจกรรมในปฏิทินของคุณโดยใช้แอปพลิเคชั่นที่เข้ากันได้ เช่น ปฏิทินสำาหรับ iOS หรือ OS X การตั้งค่าปฏิทิน มีค่าติดตั้งหลายค่าใน การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฎิทิน ที่มีผลต่อปฎิทินและบัญชีปฎิทินของคุณ สิ่ง เหล่านี้ได้แก่: • การเชื่อมข้อมูลของกิจกรรมในอดีต (กิจกรรมในปัจจุบันจะถูกเชื่อมข้อมูลเสมอ) • เสียงเตือนที่เล่นสำาหรับคำาเชิญการประชุมใหม่ ๆ • การรองรับเขตเวลาของปฏิทิน เพื่อแสดงวันที่และเวลาโดยใช้เขตเวลาที่แตกต่างกัน14 68 ทำาความรู้จัก iPad ให้คุณเข้าถึงและแก้ไขรายการรายชื่อของคุณจากบัญชีส่วนตัว บัญชีธุรกิจ และบัญชีในองค์กร ต่าง ๆ ได้อย่างง่ายดาย ดูในแผนที่ ดูในแผนที่ เพิ่มหรือ แก�ไขข�อมูล เพิ่มหรือ แก�ไขข�อมูล ค�นหารายชื่อ ค�นหารายชื่อ ก�รตั้งค่�ก�ร์ดข้อมูลของฉัน: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฎิทิน แล้วแตะ ข้อมูลของฉัน และ เลือกการ์ดรายชื่อที่มีชื่อและข้อมูลของคุณ การ์ดข้อมูลของฉันจะถูกใช้โดย Siri และแอปพลิเคชั่น ตัวอื่น ๆ ใช้ช่องบุคคลที่เกี่ยวข้องเพื่อกำาหนดความสัมพันธ์ที่คุณต้องการให้ Siri ทราบเพื่อให้คุณ สามารถพูดสิ่งต่าง ๆ อย่าง เช่น “find my sister” ได้ ค้นห�ผู้ติดต่อ: แตะที่ช่องค้นหาที่อยู่ด้านบนของรายการรายชื่อ แล้วป้อนการค้นหาของคุณ คุณยัง สามารถค้นหารายชื่อของคุณได้จากหน้าจอเริ่มต้น ดู การค้นหา ที่หน้า 27 ก�รแบ่งปันร�ยชื่อ: แตะที่รายชื่อ แล้วแตะ แบ่งปันรายชื่อ คุณสามารถส่งข้อมูลรายชื่อได้ทางอีเมล หรือข้อความได้ ก�รเพิ่มร�ยชื่อ: แตะ คุณไม่สามารถเพิ่มรายชื่อไปยังไดเร็กเทอรี่ที่คุณดูอยู่อย่างเดียวได้ เช่น สมุดรายชื่อส่วนกลางของ Microsoft Exchange ก�รเพิ่มร�ยชื่อไปยังร�ยก�รโปรดของคุณ: เลือกรายชื่อ จากนั้นเลื่อนลง แล้วแตะปุ่มเพิ่มไปยัง รายการโปรด รายการโปรดถูกใช้โดยสถานะห้ามรบกวน ดู ห้ามรบกวนและการแจ้ง ที่หน้า 113 คุณสามารถดูและแก้ไขรายการรายการโปรดในแอปพลิเคชั่น FaceTime ก�รลบร�ยชื่อ: เลือกรายชื่อ แล้วแตะ แก้ไข เลื่อนหน้าจอลงมา และแตะ ลบรายชื่อ ก�รแก้ไขร�ยชื่อ: แตะที่รายชื่อ แล้วแตะ แก้ไข คุณสามารถ: • การเพิ่มช่องใหม่: แตะ แล้วเลือกหรือป้อนป้ายสำาหรับช่องนั้น ร�ยชื่อบท 14 รายชื่อ 69 • การเปลี่ยนป้ายช่อง: แตะที่ป้ายแล้วเลือกป้ายอื่น ในการเพิ่มช่องใหม่ ให้แตะ เพิ่มป้ายแบบ กำาหนดเอง • การเปลี่ยนเสียงเรียกเข้าหรือเสียงข้อความสำาหรับรายชื่อ: แตะที่ช่องเสียงเรียกเข้าหรือเสียง ข้อความ แล้วเลือกเสียงใหม่ ในการเปลี่ยนเสียงเริ่มต้นสำาหรับรายชื่อ ให้ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > เสียง • การกำาหนดรูปภาพไปยังรายชื่อ: แตะ เพิ่มรูปภาพ คุณสามารถถ่ายภาพด้วยกล้องหรือใช้ภาพที่ มีอยู่แล้วได้ • การอัปเดตข้อมูลรายชื่อโดยใช้ Twitter: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Twitter > อัปเดตรายชื่อ รายชื่อ จะถูกจับคู่กันโดยใช้ที่อยู่อีเมล สำาหรับเพื่อนที่คุณกำาลังติดตาม การ์ดรายชื่อจะถูกอัปเดตด้วยชื่อผู้ ใช้และรูปภาพใน Twitter • การอัปเดตข้อมูลรายชื่อโดยใช้ Facebook: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Facebook > อัปเดตรายชื่อ รายชื่อจะถูกจับคู่กันโดยใช้ที่อยู่อีเมล สำาหรับแต่ละการจับคู่ในรายการเพื่อนของคุณ การ์ดรายชื่อ จะถูกอัปเดตด้วยชื่อผู้ใช้และรูปภาพใน Facebook • การป้อนการหยุดพักในหมายเลขโทรศัพท์: แตะ แล้วแตะ หยุดพัก หรือ รอ การหยุดพักแต่ละ ครั้งนานสองวินาที การรอแต่ละครั้งจะหยุดการต่อสายจนกว่าคุณจะแตะ ต่อสาย อีกครั้ง ใช้สิ่ง เหล่านี้เพื่อต่อสายของหมายเลขภายในหรือรหัสผ่านอัตโนมัติ ตัวอย่างเช่น เมื่อใช้รายชื่อ หรือ iPhone การเพิ่มรายชื่อ คุณสามารถเพิ่มรายชื่อด้วยวิธีต่อไปนี้: • การใช้รายชื่อ iCloud ของคุณ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud แล้วเปิดรายชื่อ • การนำาเข้าเพื่อนใน Facebook ของคุณ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Facebook จากนั้นเปิดรายชื่อ ในรายการ “อนุญาตแอปพลิเคชั่นเหล่านี้ให้ใช้บัญชีของคุณ” การกระทำาเช่นนี้จะสร้างกลุ่ม Facebook ในรายชื่อ • เข้าถึงสมุดรายชื่อส่วนกลางของ Microsoft Exchange: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน จากนั้นแตะบัญชี Exchange ของคุณ แล้วเปิดรายชื่อ • ตั้งค่าบัญชี LDAP หรือ CardDAV เพื่อเข้าถึงไดเร็กเทอรี่ทางธุรกิจหรือทางสถานศึกษา: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน > เพิ่มบัญชี > อื่น ๆ แล้วแตะ “เพิ่มบัญชี LDAP” หรือ “เพิ่ม บัญชี CardDAV” และป้อนข้อมูลบัญชี • การเชื่อมข้อมูลรายชื่อจากคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ Yahoo! หรือ Google: ใน iTunes บน คอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ ให้เปิดรายชื่อที่เชื่อมข้อมูลในบานหน้าต่างข้อมูลอุปกรณ์ สำาหรับข้อมูล ให้ ดูวิธีใช้ iTunes • การนำาเข้ารายชื่อจาก vCard: แตะสิ่งที่แนบในรูปแบบ .vcf ที่อยู่ในอีเมลหรือข้อความ หรือบน หน้าเว็บ ก�รค้นห�เซิร์ฟเวอร์ GAL, CardDAV หรือ LDAP: แตะ กลุ่ม แตะที่ไดเร็กเทอรี่ที่คุณต้องการ ค้นหา แล้วป้อนการค้นหาของคุณ ก�รบันทึกข้อมูลร�ยชื่อจ�กเซิร์ฟเวอร์ GAL, LDAP หรือ CardDAV: ค้นหารายชื่อที่คุณต้องการ เพิ่ม แล้วแตะ เพิ่มรายชื่อ ก�รแสดงหรือซ่อนกลุ่ม: แตะ กลุ่ม จากนั้นเลือกลุ่มที่คุณต้องการดู ปุ่มนี้จะปรากฏขึ้นเมื่อคุณมี แหล่งข้อมูลรายชื่อมากกว่าหนึ่งแหล่งเท่านั้น เมื่อมีคุณมีรายชื่อจากแหล่งข้อมูลหลายแหล่ง คุณอาจจะมีรายการที่หลากหลากสำาหรับบุคคล เดียวกัน ในการดูแลไม่ให้รายชื่อที่ซ้ำาซ้อนปรากฏในรายการของรายชื่อทั้งหมด รายชื่อจากแหล่ง ข้อมูลอื่น ๆ ที่มีชื่อเดียวกันจะถูกเชื่อมและแสดงเป็น รายชื่อแบบรวมอันเดียว หากคุณดูรายชื่อแบบ รวม หัวข้อข้อมูลแบบรวมจะปรากฏที่ด้านบนของหน้าจอ บท 14 รายชื่อ 70 ก�รเชื่อมร�ยชื่อ: แก้ไขรายชื่อ แตะ แก้ไข จากนั้นแตะ แล้วเลือกรายชื่อ รายชื่อที่เชื่อมต่อแล้ว จะไม่ถูกผสาน หากคุณเปลี่ยนแปลงหรือเพิ่มข้อมูลในรายชื่อแบบรวม การเปลี่ยนแปลงต่าง ๆ จะถูก คัดลอกไปยังบัญชีต้นทางแต่ละบัญชีที่มีข้อมูลนั้นอยู่แล้ว หากคุณเชื่อมรายชื่อที่มีชื่อต้นหรือนามสกุลต่างกัน ชื่อบนการ์ดแต่ละใบจะไม่เปลี่ยน แต่จะมีเพียงชื่อ เดียวเท่านั้นที่ปรากฏในการ์ดแบบรวม ในการเลือกชื่อที่จะให้ปรากฏเมื่อคุณดูการ์ดแบบรวม ให้แตะ การ์ดที่เชื่อมไว้ด้วยชื่อที่คุณต้องการ แล้วแตะ ใช้ชื่อนี้สำาหรับการ์ดแบบรวม ก�รดูข้อมูลของร�ยชื่อจ�กบัญชีต้นท�ง: แตะบัญชีต้นทางบัญชีใดบัญชีหนึ่ง ก�รยกเลิกก�รเชื่อมร�ยชื่อ: แตะ แก้ไข แตะ จากนั้นแตะ ยกเลิกการเชื่อม การตั้งค่ารายชื่อ ในการเปลี่ยนการตั้งค่ารายชื่อ ให้ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน ตัวเลือกที่ใช้งานได้ให้คุณ: • เปลี่ยนวิธีจัดเรียงรายชื่อ • แสดงรายชื่อตามชื่อต้นหรือนามสกุล • ตั้งค่าบัญชีเริ่มต้นสำาหรับรายชื่อใหม่ • ตั้งค่าการ์ดข้อมูลของฉัน15 71 ทำาความรู้จัก อีเมลหรือพิมพ�โน�ต อีเมลหรือพิมพ�โน�ต ลบโน�ต ลบโน�ต แตะโน�ตเพื่อดู แตะโน�ตเพื่อดู เพิ่มโน�ตใหม� เพิ่มโน�ตใหม� ดูโน�ตก�อนหน�าหรือถัดไป ดูโน�ตก�อนหน�าหรือถัดไป แตะโน�ตเพื่อแก�ไข แตะโน�ตเพื่อแก�ไข ก�รใช้ iCloud เพื่อทำ�ให้โน้ตของคุณอัปเดตอยู่เสมอบนอุปกรณ์ iOS และคอมพิวเตอร์ Mac ของ คุณ: • หากคุณใช้ที่อยู่อีเมล me.com หรือ mac.com สำาหรับ iCloud: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud แล้วเปิดโน้ต • หากคุณใช้บัญชี Gmail หรือ IMAP อื่นสำาหรับ iCloud: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฎิทิน จากนั้นเปิดโน้ตสำาหรับบัญชีนั้น ก�รเลือกบัญชีเริ่มต้นสำ�หรับโน้ตใหม่: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > โน้ต ก�รสร้�งโน้ตในบัญชีที่ระบุ: แตะ บัญชี แล้วเลือกบัญชีนั้น จากนั้นแตะ เพื่อสร้างโน้ต หากคุณไม่ เห็นปุ่มบัญชี ให้แตะปุ่ม โน้ต ก่อน ก�รดูเฉพ�ะโน้ตในบัญชีที่ระบุเท่�นั้น: แตะ บัญชี แล้วเลือกบัญชี หากคุณไม่เห็นปุ่มบัญชี ให้แตะ โน้ต ก่อน ก�รลบโน้ตขณะที่กำ�ลังดูร�ยก�รของโน้ตอยู่: กวาดนิ้วไปทางซ้ายหรือขวาไปตามโน้ตในรายการ ก�รก�รค้นห�โน้ต: ขณะที่ดูรายการของโน้ต ให้เลื่อนไปที่ด้านบนสุดของรายการเพื่อแสดงช่อง ค้นหา แตะในช่องแล้วป้อนสิ่งที่คุณกำาลังหา คุณยังสามารถค้นหาโน้ตจากหน้าจอเริ่มต้นได้ด้วย ดูที่ การค้นหา ที่หน้า 27 ก�รพิมพ์หรือส่งอีเมลโน้ต: ขณะอ่านโน้ต ให้แตะ ในการส่งอีเมลโน้ต จะต้องตั้งค่า iPad สำาหรับ อีเมล ดูที่ การตั้งค่าเมลและบัญชีอื่น ที่หน้า 14 โน้ตบท 15 โน้ต 72 ก�รเปลี่ยนแบบอักษร: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > โน้ต16 73 เตือนความจำาจะช่วยให้คุณติดตามทุกสิ่งที่คุณต้องทำา ทำเครื่องหมาย ว�าเสร็จสิ้น ทำเครื่องหมาย ว�าเสร็จสิ้น ดูรายการที่ ถึงกำหนด ดูรายการที่ ถึงกำหนด สลับรายการ สลับรายการ เพิ่มรายการ เพิ่มรายการ ก�รดูร�ยละเอียดเตือนคว�มจำ�: แตะเตือนความจำา คุณสามารถ: • เปลี่ยนหรือลบเตือนความจำา • ตั้งค่าวันครบกำาหนด • ตั้งค่าลำาดับความสำาคัญ • เพิ่มโน้ต • ย้ายเตือนความจำาไปยังรายการอื่น บน iPad รุ่น Wi-Fi + cellular บางตัว เตือนความจำาจะสามารถเตือนคุณเมื่อคุณไปถึงหรือออกจาก ตำาแหน่งได้ ก�รเพิ่มก�รเตือนตำ�แหน่ง: ขณะป้อนเตือนความจำา ให้แตะ จากนั้นเปิด “เตือนฉัน ณ สถานที่” ในการใช้ตำาแหน่งอื่น ให้แตะที่ตำาแหน่งปัจจุบันของคุณ ตำาแหน่งต่าง ๆ ในรายการจะรวมถึงที่อยู่ จากการ์ดข้อมูลส่วนบุคคลของคุณในรายชื่อ เช่น ที่อยู่ของบ้านและที่ทำางานที่คุณได้เพิ่มไว้ ในการใช้ ที่อยู่อื่น ให้แตะ ป้อนที่อยู่ หมายเหตุ: เตือนความจำาตำาแหน่งจะมีเฉพาะใน iPad รุ่น Wi-Fi + cellular ใหม่เท่านั้น คุณจะไม่ สามารถตั้งค่าตำาแหน่งสำาหรับเตือนความจำาในบัญชี Microsoft Exchange และ Outlook ได้ เตือนคว�มจำ�บท 16 เตือนความจำา 74 ก�รค้นห�เตือนคว�มจำ�ของคุณ: ป้อนคำาหรือวลีในช่องค้นหา เตือนความจำาจะถูกค้นหาตามชื่อ คุณยังสามารถใช้ Siri เพื่อค้นหาหรือเพิ่มเตือนความจำาได้ด้วย ก�รปิดก�รแจ้งเตือนคว�มจำ�: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > การแจ้ง สำาหรับข้อมูล ให้ดู ห้ามรบกวนและการ แจ้ง ที่หน้า 113 ก�รตั้งค่�เสียงเตือนที่เล่นสำ�หรับก�รแจ้ง: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > เสียง ก�รทำ�ให้เตือนคว�มจำ�ของคุณอัปเดตอยู่เสมอบนอุปกรณ์อื่น ๆ: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > iCloud จากนั้น เปิดเตือนความจำา ในการทำาให้เตือนความจำาบน OS X Mountain Lion อัปเดตอยู่เสมอ ให้เปิด iCloud บน Mac ของคุณด้วย บัญชีประเภทอื่น ๆ บางประเภท เช่น Exchange รองรับเตือนความจำา ด้วยเช่นกัน ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน จากนั้นเปิดเตือนความจำาสำาหรับบัญชีที่คุณ ต้องการใช้ ก�รตั้งค่�ร�ยก�รเริ่มต้นสำ�หรับเตือนคว�มจำ�ใหม่: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > Mail รายชื่อ ปฏิทิน จากนั้น แตะ รายการเริ่มต้น ที่อยู่ใต้เตือนความจำา17 75 คุณสามารถเพิ่มนาฬิกาเพื่อแสดงเวลาของเมืองสำาคัญต่าง ๆ และเขตเวลาต่าง ๆ รอบโลกได้ เพิ่มนาฬ�กา เพิ่มนาฬ�กา ดูนาฬ�กา ตั้งค�าการเตือน ตั้งเวลากิจกรรม หรือตั้งค�าจับเวลาถอยหลัง ดูนาฬ�กา ตั้งค�าการเตือน ตั้งเวลากิจกรรม หรือตั้งค�าจับเวลาถอยหลัง ลบนาฬ�กาหรือเปลี่ยน ลำดับของนาฬ�กา ลบนาฬ�กาหรือเปลี่ยน ลำดับของนาฬ�กา เพิ่มน�ฬิก�: แตะ เพิ่ม จากนั้นป้อนชื่อเมืองหรือเลือกเมืองจากรายการ หากคุณไม่เห็นเมืองที่คุณ กำาลังค้นหา ให้ลองค้นหาเมืองหลักในเขตเวลาเดียวกัน แสดงน�ฬิก�แบบเต็มหน้�จอ: แตะนาฬิกาแล้วนาฬิกาจะขยายเต็มหน้าจอ แตะ นาฬิกาโลก เพื่อดู นาฬิกาทั้งหมดของคุณ จัดระเบียบน�ฬิก�: แตะ แก้ไข แล้วลาก เพื่อย้าย หรือแตะ แตะเพื่อลบ ตั้งก�รปลุก: แตะนาฬิกาปลุก แล้วแตะ ก�รเปลี่ยนก�รปลุก: แตะ แก้ไข แล้วแตะ เพื่อเปลี่ยนการตั้งค่า หรือแตะ เพื่อลบ ตั้งค่�ตัวนับเวล�ถอยหลังสู่ก�รพัก: แตะตัวนับถอยหลัง เลือกเวลา แตะ เสียง เลือก หยุดการเล่น แตะ ตั้งค่า จากนั้นแตะ เริ่ม น�ฬิก�18 76 การหาสถานที่ คำาเตือน: สำาหรับข้อมูลที่สำาคัญเกี่ยวกับการนำาทางอย่างปลอดภัยและการหลีกเลี่ยงสิ่งรบกวน ระหว่างขับขี่ ให้ดูที่ ข้อมูลด้านความปลอดภัยที่สำาคัญ ที่หน้า 125 ขอข�อมูลเพิ่มเติม ขอข�อมูลเพิ่มเติม แตะหมุดเพื่อ แสดงป�ายข�อมูล แตะหมุดเพื่อ แสดงป�ายข�อมูล พิมพ� แสดงการจราจร ผลลัพธ�รายการ หรือเลือกมุมมอง พิมพ� แสดงการจราจร ผลลัพธ�รายการ หรือเลือกมุมมอง ขอวิธีเดินทาง ขอวิธีเดินทาง ป�อนการค�นหา ป�อนการค�นหา แสดงที่ตั้งป�จจุบันของคุณ แสดงที่ตั้งป�จจุบันของคุณ ทิศทางการขับด�วน ทิศทางการขับด�วน แตะสองครั้งเพื่อซูมเข�า และแตะด�วยสองนิ้วเพื่อ ซูมออก หรือจีบนิ้ว แตะสองครั้งเพื่อซูมเข�า และแตะด�วยสองนิ้วเพื่อ ซูมออก หรือจีบนิ้ว ที่ตั้งป�จจุบัน ที่ตั้งป�จจุบัน Flyover (3D ในมุมมองมาตรฐาน) Flyover (3D ในมุมมองมาตรฐาน) ข้อสำาคัญ: ผู้ใช้จะสามารถใช้งานแผนที่ ทิศทาง 3D Flyover และแอปพลิเคชั่นตามตำาแหน่งผ่าน บริการข้อมูล บริการข้อมูลเหล่านี้อาจเปลี่ยนแปลงได้ และอาจไม่มีให้ใช้ได้ครบทุกพื้นที่ ซึ่งส่งผล ให้แผนที่ ทิศทาง 3D Flyover หรือข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับตำาแหน่งอาจจะไม่มี ไม่ถูกต้อง หรือไม่สมบูรณ์ เปรียบเทียบข้อมูลที่ได้จาก iPad กับสภาพแวดล้อมรอบตัวคุณ และปฏิบัติตามป้ายต่าง ๆ เพื่อแก้ ปัญหาความแตกต่างกันของข้อมูลที่ได้รับกับความเป็นจริง คุณสมบัติแผนที่บางอย่างต้องใช้บริการ หาตำาแหน่ง ดูที่ ความเป็นส่วนตัว ที่หน้า 118 ก�รค้นห�ตำ�แหน่ง: แตะช่องค้นหา จากนั้นป้อนที่อยู่หรือข้อมูลอื่น เช่น: • แยก (“8th and market”) • พื้นที่ (“greenwich village”) • สถานที่สำาคัญ (“guggenheim”) แผนที่บท 18 แผนที่ 77 • รหัสไปรษณีย์ • ธุรกิจ (“movies” “restaurants san francisco ca” “apple inc new york”) หรือ แตะคำาแนะนำาใดคำาแนะนำาหนึ่งในรายการด้านล่างช่องค้นหา ก�รนำ�ท�งแผนที่: • การเลื่อนขึ้นหรือลง ซ้ายหรือขวา: ลากหน้าจอ • การหมุนแผนที่: หมุนด้วยสองนิ้วบนหน้าจอ เข็มทิศจะปรากฏที่มุมขวาบนเพื่อแสดงการกำาหนด ทิศทางของแผนที่ • การกลับไปที่ทิศทางแบบหันไปทางทิศเหนือ: แตะ ก�รค้นห�ตำ�แหน่งของร�ยชื่อ หรือก�รค้นห�ที่คั่นไว้หรือก�รค้นห�ล่�สุด: แตะ ก�รห�และแบ่งปันข้อมูลเกี่ยวกับสถ�นที่: แตะหมุดเพื่อแสดงแบนเนอร์ข้อมูล จากนั้น แตะ เมื่อ มีข้อมูล คุณสามารถรับคำาวิจารณ์และรูปภาพจาก Yelp นอกจากนี้ คุณยังสามารถรับทิศทาง รายชื่อ ธุรกิจ เยี่ยมชมโฮมเพจ เพิ่มธุรกิจไปยังรายชื่อของคุณ แบ่งปันตำาแหน่ง หรือคั่นตำาแหน่งไว้ • การอ่านคำาวิจารณ์: แตะ คำาวิจารณ์ ในการใช้คุณสมบัติอื่นของ Yelp ให้แตะปุ่มด้านล่างคำา วิจารณ์ • การดูรูปภาพ: แตะ รูปภาพ • การส่งอีเมล ส่งข้อความ ทวีต หรือโพสต์ตำาแหน่งไปยัง Facebook: แตะแบ่งปันที่ตั้ง ในการทวี ตหรือโพสต์ไปยัง Facebook คุณจำาเป็นต้องลงชื่อเข้าใช้บัญชีของคุณ ดูที่ การแบ่งปัน ที่หน้า 29 ก�รใช้หมุดปักเพื่อทำ�เครื่องหม�ยตำ�แหน่ง: แตะค้างไว้ที่แผนที่จนกระทั่งหมุดปรากฏขึ้น ก�รเลือกมุมมองม�ตรฐ�น มุมผสม หรือมุมมองด�วเทียม: แตะมุมขวาล่าง ก�รร้องเรียนปัญห�: แตะมุมขวาล่าง การหาทิศทาง ก�รห�ทิศท�งก�รขับขี่: แตะ แตะ ป้อนตำาแหน่งเริ่มต้นและตำาแหน่งสิ้นสุด จากนั้นแตะ เส้น ทาง หรือ เลือกตำาแหน่งหรือเส้นทางจากรายการ เมื่อมีข้อมูล หากมีหลายเส้นทางปรากฏขึ้น ให้แตะ เส้นทางที่คุณต้องการใช้ • ฟังทิศทางแบบเลี้ยวต่อเลี้ยว (iPad Wi-Fi + cellular): แตะ เริ่มต้น แผนที่จะติดตามการเคลื่อนที่ของคุณและจะออกเสียงทิศทางแบบเลี้ยวต่อเลี้ยวไปยังปลายทาง ของคุณ ในการแสดงหรือซ่อนตัวควบคุม ให้แตะหน้าจอ หาก iPad ล็อกอัตโนมัติ แผนที่จะยังคงอยู่ที่หน้าจอและจะยังคงบอกเกี่ยวกับขั้นตอนต่อไป นอกจากนี้ คุณยังสามารถเปิดแอปพลิเคชั่นอื่นในขณะที่ใช้ระบบทิศทางแบบเลี้ยวต่อเลี้ยว ใน การกลับไปยังแผนที่ ให้แตะแบนเนอร์ที่ด้านบนสุดของหน้าจอ • ดูทิศทางแบบเลี้ยวต่อเลี้ยว (iPad Wi-Fi เท่านั้น): แตะ เริ่มต้น จากนั้นกวาดนิ้วไปทางซ้ายเพื่อดู ขั้นตอนต่อไป • การกลับไปสู่มุมมองเส้นทาง: แตะ มุมมอง • การดูทิศทางเป็นรายการ: แตะ ที่หน้าจอภาพรวม • การปิดระบบทิศทางแบบเลี้ยวต่อเลี้ยว: แตะ สิ้นสุด ก�รห�ทิศท�งก�รขับขี่อย่�งรวดเร็วจ�กตำ�แหน่งปัจจุบันของคุณ: แตะ ที่แบนเนอร์ปลายทาง ของคุณ จากนั้น แตะ ทิศทางถึงที่นี่ ก�รห�ทิศท�งก�รเดิน: แตะ แตะ ป้อนตำาแหน่งเริ่มต้นและตำาแหน่งสิ้นสุด จากนั้นแตะ เริ่ม หรือ เลือกตำาแหน่งหรือเส้นทางจากรายการ เมื่อมีข้อมูล แตะ เริ่มต้น จากนั้นกวาดนิ้วไปทางซ้าย เพื่อดูขั้นตอนต่อไป บท 18 แผนที่ 78 ก�รห�ทิศท�งของบริก�รขนส่งมวลชน: แตะ ป้อนตำาแหน่งเริ่มต้นและตำาแหน่งสิ้นสุด แตะ จากนั้นแตะ เริ่ม หรือ เลือกตำาแหน่งหรือเส้นทางจากรายการ เมื่อมีข้อมูล ดาวน์โหลดและเปิด แอปพลิเคชั่นเส้นทางสำาหรับบริการขนส่งที่คุณต้องการใช้ ก�รแสดงสภ�พก�รจร�จร: แตะมุมขวาล่างสุดของหน้าจอ จากนั้นแตะ แสดงการจราจร จุดสีส้ม จะแสดงการชะลอตัว และจุดสีแดงจะแสดงการจราจรแบบเคลื่อนตัวไปอย่างช้า ๆ ในการดูรายงาน เหตุการณ์ ให้แตะเครื่องหมาย 3D และ Flyover บน iPad รุ่นที่ 3 หรือใหม่กว่า จะใช้ 3D (มุมมองมาตรฐาน) หรือ Flyover (มุมมองดาวเทียมหรือ มุมมองผสม) สำาหรับมุมมองสามมิติของเมืองต่าง ๆ รอบโลก คุณสามารถนำาทางในวิธีปกติ และซูม เข้าเพื่อดูอาคารได้ นอกจากนี้ คุณยังสามารถปรับมุมกล้องได้อีกด้วย รูปตึกทรานส�อเมริกาพีระมิดเป�นเครื่องหมายบริการที่จดทะเบียนของบริษัท Transamerica Corporation รูปตึกทรานส�อเมริกาพีระมิดเป�นเครื่องหมายบริการที่จดทะเบียนของบริษัท Transamerica Corporation ก�รใช้ 3D หรือ Flyover: ซูมเข้าจนกระทั่ง หรือ เปิดใช้งาน จากนั้นแตะปุ่ม หรือ ลากสอง นิ้วขึ้น คุณสามารถสลับระหว่าง 3D และ Flyover โดยการแตะมุมขวาล่างที่ปุ่มเปลี่ยนมุมมอง ก�รปรับมุมกล้อง: ลากสองนิ้วขึ้นหรือลง การตั้งค่าแผนที่ ก�รตั้งค่�ตัวเลือกสำ�หรับแผนที่: ไปที่ การตั้งค่า > แผนที่ การตั้งค่าจะรวมถึง: • ระดับเสียงการนำาทาง (iPad Wi-Fi + cellular) • ไมล์หรือกิโลเมตรสำาหรับระยะทาง • ภาษาและขนาดของป้าย19 79 การรับเพลง ก�รรับเพลงและเนื้อห�เสียงอื่น ๆ ลงบน iPad: • การซื้อและดาวน์โหลดจาก iTunes Store: ใน เพลง ให้แตะ Store ดูที่ บทที่ 20 iTunes Store ที่หน้า 84 • การดาวน์โหลดเพลงที่ซื้อบนอุปกรณ์ iOS และคอมพิวเตอร์เครื่องอื่นของคุณโดยอัตโนมัติ: ดูที่ การใช้ iCloud ที่หน้า 14 • การเชื่อมข้อมูลเนื้อหากับ iTunes บนคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ: ดูที่ การเชื่อมข้อมูลกับ iTunes ที่หน้า 16 • การใช้ iTunes Match เพื่อจัดเก็บคลังเพลงของคุณใน iCloud: ดูที่ iTunes Match ที่หน้า 82 การเล่นเพลง คำาเตือน: สำาหรับข้อมูลสำาคัญเกี่ยวกับการหลีกเลี่ยงการสูญเสียการได้ยิน ให้ดูที่ ข้อมูลด้านความ ปลอดภัยที่สำาคัญ ที่หน้า 125 คุณสามารถฟังเสียงจากลำาโพงในตัว หูฟังที่เชื่อมต่อกับแจ็คหูฟัง หรือหูฟังสเตอริโอบลูทูธแบบไร้ สายที่จับคู่กับ iPad ได้ เมื่อต่อหรือจับคู่หูฟังแล้ว จะไม่มีเสียงออกมาจากลำาโพง ก�รเล่นแทร็ก: เลือกดูตามเพลย์ลิสต์ เพลง ศิลปิน หรือหมวดหมู่อื่น จากนั้นแตะแทร็กนั้น ตัว ควบคุมการเล่นจะปรากฏที่ด้านบนสุดของหน้าจอ • การดูปุ่มเลือกดูเพิ่มเติม: แตะ เพิ่มเติม • การข้ามไปยังจุดใด ๆ ในเพลง: ลากตัวชี้ตำาแหน่งไปตามแถบเลื่อน เลื่อนนิ้วของคุณลงเพื่อลด อัตราการเลื่อนให้ช้าลง ดูหน้�จอกำ�ลังเล่นอยู่: แตะรูปขนาดย่อของหน้าปกอัลบั้มที่ด้านบนสุดของหน้าจอ • การแสดงตัวควบคุม: แตะหน้าจอ • การเลือกดูเพลงโดยใช้หน้าปก: กวาดนิ้วไปทางซ้ายหรือขวา เพลงจะเริ่มเล่นอัตโนมัติ • ดูแทร็กทั้งหมดของอัลบั้มที่เล่นเพลงปัจจุบันอยู่: แตะ แตะแทร็กเพื่อให้เล่น ในการย้อนกลับไป ที่หน้าจอกำาลังเล่น ให้แตะ อีกครั้ง เพลงบท 19 เพลง 80 • การจัดอันดับเพลง: ในมุมมองรายการแทร็ก ให้แตะแถวจุดด้านบนของรายการเพื่อตั้งค่าจำานวน ดาว คุณสามารถใช้การจัดอันดับเพื่อสร้างเพลย์ลิสต์ที่ดีใน iTunes ลากเพื่อข�ามไปข�างหน�า หรือย�อนกลับ ลากเพื่อข�ามไปข�างหน�า หรือย�อนกลับ ปรับความดังเสียง ปรับความดังเสียง ย�อนกลับ ย�อนกลับ เลือกดูเพลง เลือกดูเพลง รายการแทร็ก รายการแทร็ก สลับเป�ดป�ดระหว�าง กำลังเล�นอยู�กับเลือกดู สลับเป�ดป�ดระหว�าง กำลังเล�นอยู�กับเลือกดู สร�างเพลย�ลีสต� Genius สร�างเพลย�ลีสต� Genius เล�น/หยุดพัก เล�น/หยุดพัก เล�นซ เล�นซำ้ำ้ สับเปลี่ยน สับเปลี่ยน AirPlay AirPlay ก�รค้นห�เพลง (ชื่อ ศิลปิน อัลบั้ม และผู้แต่ง): ขณะที่เลือกดู ให้ป้อนข้อความในช่องค้นหาที่มุม ขวาล่างของหน้าจอ คุณสามารถค้นหาเนื้อหาเสียงจากหน้าจอเริ่มต้นได้เช่นกัน ดูที่ การค้นหา ที่ หน้า 27 ก�รแสดงตัวควบคุมเสียงขณะอยู่ในแอปพลิเคชั่นอื่น: คลิกสองครั้งที่ปุ่มโฮม จากนั้นกวาดนิ้วไป ทางขวาตามส่วนล่างสุดของหน้าจอ แอปพลิเคชั่นเสียงป�จจุบัน ให�แตะเพื่อเป�ด แอปพลิเคชั่นเสียงป�จจุบัน ให�แตะเพื่อเป�ด ก�รแสดงตัวควบคุมเสียงขณะที่หน้�จอถูกล็อก: คลิกสองครั้งที่ปุ่มโฮม ก�รเล่นเพลงท�งลำ�โพง AirPlay หรือ Apple TV: แตะ ดูที่ AirPlay ที่หน้า 30 พ็อดคาสท์และหนังสือเสียง ตัวควบคุมพ็อดคาสท์และหนังสือเสียงจะปรากฏขึ้นบนหน้าจอกำาลังเล่นเมื่อคุณเริ่มเล่น หมายเหตุ: แอปพลิเคชั่นพ็อดคาสท์มีให้ใช้ฟรีใน App Store ดูที่ บทที่ 24 พ็อดคาสท์ที่หน้า 93 หากคุณติดตั้งแอปพลิเคชั่นพ็อดคาสท์ เนื้อหาและตัวควบคุมพ็อดคาสท์จะถูกลบออกจากเพลง ก�รตั้งค่�คว�มเร็วก�รเล่นพ็อดค�สท์: แตะ แตะอีกครั้งในการเปลี่ยนความเร็ว • = เร็วขึ้น 2 เท่า • = เร็วขึ้นครึ่งหนึ่ง • = เร็วปกติ ก�รเล่นซ้ำ� 15 วิน�ทีสุดท้�ยของพ็อดค�สท์: แตะ บท 19 เพลง 81 ก�รด�วน์โหลดพ็อดค�สท์ตอนอื่น ๆ: แตะ พ็อดคาสท์ (แตะ เพิ่มเติม ก่อน หากไม่เห็นพ็อดคาสท์) จากนั้นแตะพ็อดคาสท์เพื่อดูตอนที่มี เพลย์ลิสต์ ก�รสร้�งเพลย์ลิสต์: ดูเพลย์ลิสต์ แตะ ใหม่ ที่อยู่ใกล้กับด้านบนสุดของหน้าจอ จากนั้นป้อนและ บันทึกชื่อ เลือกเพลงและวิดีโอที่คุณต้องการ จากนั้นแตะ เสร็จสิ้น ก�รแก้ไขเพลย์ลิสต์: ดูเพลย์ลิสต์ เลือกเพลย์ลิสต์ จากนั้นแตะ แก้ไข • การเพิ่มเพลงอื่น ๆ : แตะเพิ่มเพลง • การลบเพลง: แตะ การลบเพลงจากเพลย์ลิสต์จะไม่ลบเพลงนั้นจาก iPad • การเปลี่ยนลำาดับเพลง: ลาก เพลย์ลิสต์ใหม่และเพลย์ลิสต์ที่มีการเปลี่ยนแปลงจะถูกคัดลอกไปยังคลัง iTunes ของคุณในครั้ง ต่อไปที่คุณเชื่อมข้อมูล iPad กับคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ หรือผ่าน iCloud หากคุณได้สมัครสมาชิก iTunes Match ไว้ ลบเ